The SECOND & THIRD EMBASSY to the EMPIRE of TAYSING or CHINA. with Previledge Ao. 1672.    

ATLAS' CHINENSIS:  
Being a Second Part of A RELATION OF Remarkable Passages IN TWO EMBASSIES FROM THE East-India Company OF THE UNITED PROVINCES, TO THE VICEROY SINGLAMONG AND GENERAL TAISING LIPOVI, AND TO KONCHI, EMPEROR OF China and East-Tartary.  
WITH A Relation of the Netherlanders Assisting the Tartar against Coxinga, and the Chinese Fleet, who till then were Masters of the Sea.  
AND A more exact Geographical Description than formerly, both of the whole Empire of China in general, and in particular of every of the fifteen Provinces.  
Collected out of their several Writings and Journals, By ARNOLDUS MONTANUS.  
Englished, and Adorned with above a hundred several Sculptures, By JOHN OGILBY, Esq  
Master of His MAJESTY'S REVELS in the Kingdom of IRELAND.  
LONDON, Printed by Tho. johnson for the Author, and are to be had at his House in White Friars. M. DC. LXXI.   

TO THE Supreme, Most High and Mighty Prince HARLES II.  
By the Grace of God, OF GREAT BRITAIN, FRANCE, and IRELAND KING, DEFENDER of the FAITH, etc.  
THIS ATLAS CHINENSIS, CONTAINING Remarkable Passages IN TWO EMBASSIES FROM NEW BATAVIA TO KONCHI, EMPEROR OF China and East-Tartary.  
WITH A MORE EXACT GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION THAN FORMERLY, DEDICATED with all HUMILITY, LIES PROSTRATE AT THE SACRED FEET OF YOUR MOST SERENE MAJESTY, BY THE HUMBLEST OF YOUR SERVANTS, AND MOST LOYAL SUBJECT, JOHN OGILBY.   

DIRECTIONS FOR PLACING The Whole-Sheet Prints IN THIS SECOND CHINA.  

TItle.  
The City and Castle Zelandia in the Island Taywan Fol. 39  
Matzou 42  
The Idol Sekia 43  
Quantekong, a Half sheet 44  
Castrum à Meinjaceen 77  
The City Quemoey 134  
The City Aimuy 138  
Hocsieu with its Suburbs 192  
The Royal Presents given to King Singlamon 232  
The Departure of the Emperor from Hocksieu to the Imperial Court at Peking 259  
The City Kinningfoe 264  
The City Jemping 262  
Pouching 265  
Hitsiu 277  
Hanchieu 278  
Lankin, or Nanking 284  
Paolinxie Pagod 286  
Pecking 319  
The Imperial Palace where the Presents were received, Marked A. B. C. D. 223  
The Royal Banquet 334  
The Station of Ceremonies used at the Funerals of great Persons 388  
The Station used by the great Mandarins 414  
The Marks of the Mandarins, Figure 1. a Half-sheet 417  
Idem Figure 2. a Half-sheet 418  
Divers sorts of Bonnets, Figure 1. a Half-sheet 419  
Divers sorts of Caps or Bonnets, Figure 2. a Half-sheet. 420  
Gods and Goddesses, Number 1. 569  
Idem Numb. 2. 570  
Idem Numb. 3. 571  
Idem Numb. 4. 572  
The Idol Sechia 574  
The Idol Vitech, or Ninifoe 582  
Directions for building of Pagod-Temples in two Divisions 600   

PLANTS.  
RHabarbarum Witsoniarum, a Half-sheet. 680  
Lici, Kia-Giu, Arbour Papaya 681  
Su-Pim, Polomie, Cieu-Ko 685  
Cinamonium, Yata, Duliam 686  
Pi-Pa▪ Man-Ko, Giambo 687    

A SECOND EMBASSY OR APPLICATION TO THE Emperor of China.  
MAny Years are past since several Europeans, especially the English, Spaniards, Portuguese, and Hollanders, have with indefatigable Endeavours persevered towards the acquiring a free and unmolested Trade in CHINA: Yet though they have variously attempted what might seem probable to this Effect, their whole Undertake have proved little better than a Labour in vain; for the Chineses priding in the Subsistance of their own Product, and too strictly observing an Ancient Law, prohibiting the Admission of any Strangers into their Country, excepting such only as bringing Tributes from the adjacent Borders, paid Homage to their Emperor, as Supreme Lord of the World; or else Foreign Ambassadors, under which pretence many drove there a subtle Trade, have shut out and abhorred all Correspondency abroad; which Trigaut affirms, saying, The Chineses have a Law that forbids Strangers to come amongst them; but if any such be found, the only Penalty is, That he must dwell there, and never return: Yet these are not suffered to go where they please, but limited in the Entries and Out-skirts of the Empire, moved by a Superstitious Fear, from a Prophecy, That they shall be supplanted by Strangers.  
But the Interpretation or Suspicion extends not only to remote and unknown People, but their Neighbours, with whom they have some Converse, and use the like Customs, Habits, and Religion; for the Coreans, the nearest of their Neighbours, were never seen in China but in the condition of Slaves.  
Father Martinius also, in his Chinese Atlas, relates, That China is locked up so 
Histor. Sinic. 65.  close and cunningly to keep out all Strangers, that scarce any, unless by way of Embassy, are once suffered to come in. The Turks, Tartars, Moguls, and other adjacent People, address themselves as Ambassadors, when indeed are disguised Merchants, and so drive there a profitable Trade; for feigning fantastic Names, for several Princes that never were, nor are, present Gifts to the Emperor, which they buy at low Rates; cheap, but fit Commo ties to be transported thither: Nor can they be Losers; for they receive atleast twice the Value as a grateful Return; the Emperor counting it a high dishonour to do otherwise.  
Besides this, all Ambassadors, during their stay, going, and coming through the Country, are with their whole Retinue maintained at the Public Charge, and their other Goods, whatever, that are not Presents, in stead of Customs and Taxes, are brought on several Carriages, at the Emperor's Expense, to the Palace, where they are permitted to expose them to Sale, or Barter: But although this care be taken concerning their Expenses, and that they shall no way be Losers in making their Addresses to the Court; yet whatever Ambassadors they be, though the Negotiation be never so serious, and of greatest import; nay, though they come loaden with Treasure, to be poured into the Emperor's Exchequer, and be ancient Friends and Allies, yet they are entertained like Spies and Enemies, not suffered in their Journeys to see the Countries, but hoodwinked, have no more Prospect than the Road they tread upon; and in like manner are as close Prisoners, locked up in their Inns, and Places of purpose for such Reception; and when come to Court, not only secured, but never permitted to Public Audience, or to see the Emperor, but manage all their Business by the Mandarins, or Officers of State.  
Besides, Trigaut also tells us, That they severely punish their own People, that hold any Commerce or Intelligence with Strangers, without especial Licence from the Emperor. And what is of more remark, If there be occasion to send any Person of Quality forth by way of Envoy or Embassy beyond the Limits of the Empire, it is a Work of difficulty to procure them; but when prevailed upon by Persuasions, at his departure all his Acquaintance, Kindred, and Relations lament, as if going to suffer Execution; but at his return he is received with as much joy, and specially advanced by the Emperor; which is no wonder, the Chineses having such a reluctancy to whatever seems strange, nay, scorning to learn out of any Books but their own, believing, that all Humane Knowledge is within the Sphere of their Activity, and looking upon all Outlandish as ignorant Animals, and when they mention them in their Writings, take notice of them no otherwise; for their Characters that spell Beast, anagrammatized, signify a Stranger, also stigmatising them with some Mark or Accent, that may interpret them worse than Devil.  
These Orders were more than strictly observed towards Strangers, while the Chineses were Governed by their own Native Princes; but the Oriental Tartars, which so lately by Conquest are become Masters of the Empire, let lose the Reins of that part of their Ancient Policy, and less scrupulous, are more indifferent, leaving opener Doors to the admittance of Trade and Commerce.  
The Chief Council of New Batavia still watching all Opportunities for Improvement of Traffic, being informed by Father Martinius, That the Conquering Tartars, now settled in China, would more readily receive Addresses concerning Trade, than the former Chinese Princes, resolved to make Trial thereof, by sending a Vessel laden with several Merchandises from the Island Tayowan; to which purpose Frederick Schedell, being ordered with a Ship called the Brown-Fish, from Tayowan, came within nine days after his departure from thence, to an Anchor in the Mouth of the River Canton, near the Island Haytomon.  
His Business at first was so well resented, that the Vice-Roys of Canton granted him under their Hands Licence to sell and barter the Contents of his Cargo, and also to build a Storehouse in Canton, for their better Accommodation; although they were advised and persuaded to the contrary by the Portuguese Staple at Macao, who in their Letters to the Vice-Roys gave but a sad Account of the Hollanders, saying, That they were Traitors and Rebels against their true Prince, scarce having any Country of their own, or Religion, but lived by Piracy, robbing and plundering whatever they light upon, either by Sea or Land; hoping by thus decrying their Reputation, to set a stop to their begun Proceedings, and new Factory. In like manner the Chinese Philosophers, great Students of their Country's Antiquities, by the Instigations of the Portuguese jesuits, informed also the Vice-Roys, that the Hollanders were a Nation odious, and through all Ages detested by the Chinese, and never upon any account had the least admittance into their Empire.  
But though this Intelligence did something, yet it had not the expected efficacy, and the Hollanders had gone on, and carried the Business, when accidentally a great Person coming from the Imperial City Peking to Canton, first dissuaded the Vice-Roys from what they intended therein, saying, It was quite another thing to permit any one free Egress and Regress into their Dominions, than to give them a Place of Residence on the Shore, without the knowledge of the Supreme Authority; but that he ought to acquaint the Emperor therewith, if he intended not to incur his displeasure: Upon which the old Viceroy, changing his Determination, civilly sent to Schedell, desiring him for that time to depart with all his Company, lest his abiding there so long, might be misconstrued by his King Matsuyker, as a deterring, or some restraint upon them; although Schedell urged much, that there could be no such cause of mistrust there, using many Arguments. The Vice-Roys presenting him at his departure, gave him also two Letters to Nicholas Verburgh Governor of Tayowan, first complementing, and then advising him, that the best and only way for the Hollanders to obtain liberty for setting up a Factory at Canton, and licence to Trade in China, was by Address to the Emperor, by way of Embassy, carrying rich Presents to the Emperor at Peking.  
The Council at Batavia, observing the Advice they received, would not of themselves undertake so great a business, unless so ordered from their Masters of the East-India Company; which ask some time to bring about, they in the mean time resolved to venture out another Ship, to try her Fortune at Canton: To which purpose they chose Zacharias Wagenaer a Merchant, and the same Frederick Schedell, who with two Ships, the Brown-Fish, and Whiteing, laden with Merchandise, arrived a Month after they left Batavia, in the Mouth of the River Canton, and from thence went to Wangsoe, a Village three Leagues from the City.  
Wagenaer at last arriving at Canton, delivered his Letters from the Council in Batavia, by the old Vice-Roys Secretary (having no admission to the Viceroy) and received for Answer, That since the Hollanders had neither brought Letters nor Presents for the Emperor in Peking, of which they were expressly advised, the more to facilitate their business; therefore lest he should be questioned, he neither would nor could see or speak with them. So that Wagenaer and Schedell returned, having made a fruitless Voyage, without any success, to Batavia.  
Soon after they having received Expresses from the Governors of the East-India Company in Holland, to set forth an Embassy, according to the Advice of the Vice Roys of Canton, sent Peter de Goyer, and jacob de Keyzer Ambassadors Peking, to the Emperor of China, with Letters of Credence and Presents, to obtain his Imperial Licence that they might Trade in China.  
These Ambassadors arrived Anno 1656. in the Chief City Peking. The next day some of the Council, and the Prime Secretary Thouglauja, with two other Tartar Mandarins, Quanlauja, and Hoolauja, came to compliment the Ambassadors in the Emperor's Name, to inquire after their Health, the number of their Attendants, concerning what their Presents were, and from whom, and whence they came? To all which Questions, the Mandarins receiving particular Answers, listed all those Persons that attended the Embassy (which according to the Information sent from Canton were in all twenty four) which they set down one after another by their several Names; nor did they leave out those Hangers on which were not included in the List.  
After that, they turned and looked over several Presents; then enquired, whence they came, how and who made them, for what use, and in what part of the World? And lastly, How far, or how many Month's Sail Holland lay distant from Peking? To which the Ambassadors having returned fitting Answers, the Mandarins enquired further, Whether they were a People that dwelled only upon the Seas, and had no Land-Habitations (which the Portuguese jesuits put into their Heads) or if they inhabited any Country, what they called it, and where it lay? From whence, and to what purpose they were sent? What was their King's Name, and of what Age? All which the Ambassadors answered. Yet they were not so satisfied; but interrogating, forced them to recount the same Answers again. But after they grew more curious, and began to inquire concerning their manner of Government, and if the Ambassadors were not of the Blood Royal, and of Kin to their Prince: For no Foreign Ambassadors (said they) if they be not of Consanguinity with their King, are admitted to appear, bowing their Heads with all humility, before the Imperial Majesty.  
Whereupon the Ambassadors replied, That they were not of the Blood Royal; for the manner of their Country was not to send Princes of the Blood on such remote Embassies, but employed other Men of good Quality, and well esteemed at home, upon such Foreign Negotiations.  
The Mandarins further inquisitive, came at last to ask, What Offices they bore in their Prince's Court? What their Names and Titles of Honour were? How many Men they had under their Command? All which the Ambassadors answered very punctually.  
Then they enquired again, If they came directly from Holland, or Batavia? If from Batavia, What kind of Place it was, and what manner of Person the General? Which being resolved, the Mandarins went away satisfied.  
The next day the Ambassadors, with the Presents, appeared by order of the Chancellor before the Council, without which they were not to be admitted; where the Chancellor sat uppermost, on a high Bed, crosslegged: Next him, on the right Hand, sat two Tartar Lords; and on the left, a jesuit called Adam Schal, an ancient and venerable Person, and being close shaved, looked like a Tartar: he had dwelled above forty six years, in the several Reigns of Chinesy Princes, in the Court at Peking.  
The rest of the Council sat promiscuously, without any Order or State, one among another, upon Benches only covered with old white Linen.  
The Chancellor welcoming the Ambassadors in few words, Commanded them to sit; then laying the Presents on a Table, he asked upon the matter all the Questions which the Mandarines had formerly; whereto the Ambassadors, by the help of Father Adam their Interpreter there, gave ready Answers.  
Mean while Order came from the Emperor to the Council, wherein the Jesuit was desired to write down, and to deliver to his Imperial Majesty that night, if the Hollanders possessed any Land; and also where, and how far it lay distant from his; and also how their Prince was called, and what kind of Government they maintained? All which Schal delivered in Writing to the Chancellor: Adding, that their Country did formerly belong to the King of Spain, from whom they keep it unjustly, etc.  
But the Chancellor perceiving that the Jesuit had no kindness for them, scrupling, made him put in, and put out, and write the whole matter twice over; then ordering him to Transcribe it fair, he refused, excusing himself by age, and weakness of sight; Upon▪ which, he commanded one of his Under-Clerks to write it over; which done, it was immediately with some small Presents carried to the Emperor. Who soon after having received this advice, sent a Mandatory Letter to the Council, signifying, That he received the Hollanders as Ambassadors, and permitted that they might be brought into his presence, so soon as he should sit upon the Throne in his new Court. The Letter to the Council was written in these words:  
Most Honourable, and our great Lords, the Holland Ambassadors are come hither with their Presents to Compliment the Emperor, and show their obedience to Us, which no Record shows, nor any remembers, that they ever did to this Crown in thousands of years before: Therefore, since this is their first Address, We receive them as Ambassadors, and permit, that they, when We shall sit on Our Imperial Throne, in Our New Palace, may be brought into Our presence, to show their obedience to Us, that afterwards they may be well entertained, and dealt withal according to their own requests, and also be speedily dispatched for their better departure; and the rather, because out of respect to Our Fame, they are come an unimaginable vast way by Sea, and also by Land; nay, as if they came out of a shadow from high Mountains, to rest their Feet at Peking; there with open Eyes, to behold the clear Sun in the Firmament; therefore how can We withstand and deny the Requests of such Persons, after their long and tedious Voyages?  
But after, when the Ambassadors Letters of Credence, Translated by Schal, were read to the Emperor, he sent to the Chancellor a second Order in these words:  
Having on the sixteenth day of the sixth Moon read over the Hollanders 
Stilo vet. 6. Aug. Stilo novo 16. Aug.  Letters a second time, and gotten a right understanding thereof, We find that their Embassy which they have undertaken is freely out of their own kindness and inclination towards Us, and that from a Country lying beyond the great Sea; just like a Bird that takes a voluntary flight through the Air, and cannot be forced to come down: And since We esteem this Embassy higher than aught else, and would befriend as Ourselves, therefore We charge you, Our Chancellor, and the rest of Our Council of State, upon their Requests which they shall make by way of this Embassy, to permit them egress and regress through Our Empire; and what other Agreements you drive with them, you acquaint Us therewith.  
This Letter being read, the Chancellor asked the Ambassadors if they could in like manner make annual Addresses, if not, every three year; whereupon the Ambassadors answered, That they could with more certainty and Ceremony wait on the Emperor with their due obeisance in Peking every fifth year, so that they might be Licenced yearly with four Ships to come and Traffic at Canton: Which Proposal the Chancellor put to the Vote, and the Tartars with one voice judged, their Designs were fit, just, and reasonable: But the Chineses thought it sufficient, if they made their Addresses to the Emperor but every ninth year, to save the trouble and danger of so long a Journey, supposing what the Tartarians did not observe, that it was not fit the Hollanders should Trade all that while at Canton.  
Moreover, they urged that these that called themselves Hollanders, might be English, neither they nor their Shipping being much unlike, which would be a high scandal upon their Government, to suffer that Nation that had done them such prejudice within memory, when they came but with four Ships into the Haven Heytamon, and ruffled their Fleet there, sinking some, and taking others, and so battered the Castle, that they took the Mandarine himself Prisoner, fight more like Furies than Men, for which they were ever since declared Enemies, nay, according to an Edict made at that time, never after to be permitted to Trade in China; so that they ought to have greater proofs, whether the Hollanders were not English, before they should be suffered to Traffic upon their Coasts.  
And also (besides that, it was contrary to their ancient Laws and Customs to grant to any Nation a free Trade in the Empire) they could not perceive any thing concerning this Request in their Lettrrs of Credence; therefore, according to their opinion, the Ambassadors went beyond their Orders.  
This stop of the Council so unexpected, seemed very strange to the Ambassadors, who thought of nothing more, but that all things had been done, and a free Trade granted, and that they were only to return him their humble Thanks.  
All which was brought thus about by the influence of Father Adam Schall, and some other Portuguese at Peking, foreseeing the undoing of their Factory at Macao, if the Dutch set up at Canton, and also there wanted not a less Sum than 300 Tail of Silver, which was to be disposed to Bribe the Council, with promises of more: The Tartars also now adding, that the Hollanders under pretence of Trade, sought to get footing in the Empire, and then to Ransack the Country, and Pillage, and make Prize of what e'er they could lay hold on.  
All which was more confirmed as a positive truth, by the Allegation of a Commissioner that had dwelled at Canton three years before; and also by the Tutang's Letters, which at that time was at Canton, and Bribed for that purpose by the Portuguese at Macao, had wrought such an opinion in the Hearts of the People, that they looked upon the Hollanders no otherwise than a company of Outlaws and Exiles, which had no home or abodes, but dwelled on the Sea, their whole subsistence drawn from Spoil and Piracy.  
Lastly, The Ambassadors found that the Chancellor and other Councillors could not without Bribes understand, that these words in their Letters of Credence, To have leave to go and come, could signify nothing but a free Trade: which seemed very strange to them, since they knew no otherwise but that the five and thirty hundred Tail of Silver, which they had obliged themselves to pay to the Viceroy at Canton, was to be distributed amongst the Council. Therefore being thus deceived by the Viceroy, they were forced to fall to new Consultations to obtain their desire.  
First, They Declared to the Chancellor and Council more at large, what was intended by that Point concerning their Annual Trade in Canton, and desired earnestly to obtain it.  
Next they offered by the old Viceroy of Cantons Mandarin, to the Chancellor, that they would stay in Peking, till his Majesty was fully assured, that they were Hollanders and not English. They also requested, that the Emperor would be pleased to give them a Seal, with some peculiar Mark Engraved in Brass, therewith they might Seal Passes for all Ships that either Sailed by, or put into the Harbours of China, thereby to distinguish them from others of their neighbouring Nations.  
At last they exhibited a Proposal, drawn by one of the Clerks of the Council; wherein they urged, that they might as Loyal Subjects Trade in China, upon the Grant whereof, they would undertake to pay all Taxes and Customs whatsoever, like those of Licukieu, Ainan, and Siam; and when those three Nations made their Addresses, being every third year, they would in like manner attend the Emperor with peculiar Presents.  
But all their Proposals were to no effect, wanting at least ten thousand Tail of Silver, there being no other means in that Court to make their way, for what party Bribed most, abnubilated their understandings, and gave them a sense of their Cause, which Sum they being than not able to raise, for none could be took up upon any Security whatsoever, under ten, or eight at least per cent. a Month Interest: Which exaction the Ambassadors judged no way fit or reasonable, because if they were at this Expense, it lay still doubtful, whether their business should be effected.  
The Emperor at last informed of all the Proceedings by his Council, and how the Hollanders were inclined to come in an Embassy to his Majesty, every fifth year; and that they had made it appear, that in less time they could not go and come: Therefore his Majesty, out of a respect to the Hollanders, and for their better accommodation, ordered them to come but every eighth year, For, said he, otherwise they would not be able to hold out; and why should We lay an unnecessary Obligation on a People which We neither need, nor fear? and who of their own inclination come to tender their. Obedience to Us with Presents? No, We have resolved to Treat them so tenderly, that after they have ended their great Journey, they may have two or three years' rest at home.  
By this Declaration of the Emperor, they saw plainly nothing more was to be done, but to apply themselves only to patience, and to put off the Design till another more fit opportunity; for the Councils chief Secretary had told them, that too much pressing, and eager solicitation, would rather hurt than help the Business.  
Amongst others, having made their Addresses concerning this matter, by the Vice-Roys of Cantons Mandarins, they received this Answer:  
Is it not enough, that at this first time they are admitted as Ambassadors to tender their Presents to the Emperor, and notwithstanding the bad fame which hath rendered them odious in the Eyes of the most eminent Persons in China, they were now accepted as Friends, and had leave to dispose of their Goods which they had brought; let them not urge too much for a free Trade, lest perhaps for the future they be denied all.  
They must not think nor imagine that We are obliged to grant them all things at first; if they come the next year, or so soon as they can, and with Presents return the Emperor thanks for his kind accepting of them; then perhaps there will be better Conveniencies to effect their desires.  
At last the Ambassadors having showed due reverence to the Emperor's Seal, appeared before the Throne, and been at three of the Emperor's Feasts, where they were very nobly Entertained, received their Dispatch, together with his Imperial Majesty's Letter to his Excellency john Maetzuiker, in New-Batavia.  
The Emperor sends this Letter to the Netherlanders, Batavia, and to their King John Maetzuiker.  
Ur Countries are as far distant as the East from the West, so that We cannot easily visit each other; Many Ages are passed since the Hollanders have been seen amongst us, but you have done very prudently, in that you sent to Us Peter de Goeyer, and jacob de Keyser, which in your Name have brought Us Presents. You have showed your good inclination, by remembering Us; wherefore Our heart is also much inclined to you; and as a testimony there-thereof, We send you two Rowls of Satin, four Rowls of flowered Satin, four Rowls of blue Satin without Flowers, four Rowls of Kin, four Rowls of Camlet, ten Pieces of Peelings, ten Pieces of Parsu, ten Pieces of light Coloured Stuffs, and three hundred Tail of Silver▪ You have desired to come and Trade in Our Country, to bring Commodities thither, and carry others out, by which a private Man might reap good profit: But because your Country is so many thousand Leagues distant, and here blow very hard Winds, so that the Ships run great danger which come hither, and for that also it is very cold here ashore, by very great Hails and Snows; it would be no small trouble to Us, if any of your People should come hither and miscarry; but if this satisfy not, unless they have permission to visit these parts, then let them come every eighth year once, with a hundred in their Train, of which twenty may come to the Palace, where we keep our Imperial Residence; and you may lay your Merchandise ashore in your Storehouse, without disposing of them at Sea before Canton. This We have thought good out of Our inclination for your benefit, and believe that it will likewise be to your satisfaction. This is that which we intended to advise you.  
In the thirteenth Year, the eighth Month, the nine and twentieth Day of the Reign Xunchi. Somewhat lower stood Hongtee Thoepe.  
The Hollanders thus frustrated of their expectation, having obtained nothing else than to come every eighth year once, with Merchandise to Trade in the Country, left off prosecuting the Design with so much eagerness for a considerable time.  
But since the loss of the Islands Tayowan, and Formosa, taken from the Hollanders by Koxinga, or Iquon, and his Associates, Anno 1661. they renewed their Suit to the Tartar for a free Trade, on promise and assurance, that if they should meet with Coxinga, either at Sea or Land, they would endeavour to destroy him, as a common Enemy both to the Tartars and Hollanders.  
Therefore since the Isles of Tayowan, Formosa, and Coxinga will be often made mention of in this our Relation; and that from the loss of those places, the Hollanders renewed their old Request, under pretence of help to ruin the enemy; it will be necessary, and this our Business seems indeed to require a brief Description of them in the first, and withal, a Relation how Coxinga took them from the Hollanders.  

Of Formosa.  
THe Formosan Isle, formerly called by the Chinese, Paccande, extends itself 
Description of the Island Formosa.  in length from the South to the North, and in breadth East and West, being an hundred and thirty Leagues in Circuit: the Prospect shows you much rising Ground, and a Hilly Country, which abounds with Deer, great store of Wild Goats, Hares, Coneys, Swine, Tigers, and the Luvasey, whose flesh hath a delightful and excellent relish. The Woods also have no want of Pheasants and Pigeons. The Ground being fruitful, produceth store of Sugar, Ginger, Cinnamon, Coco-Nuts, and several other Necessaries fit for humane sustenance; besides, full of populous Villages. They are Governed by several Lords, not depending on, nor acknowledging any Superior, so that each Town being a Republic, they still have Wars, and are at difference one with another, Town against Town, Village against Village, insomuch that Peace never set Foot in that Isle.  
Of their many Villages, the prime and of chiefest note, are Sinkan, Mandauw, Soulang, Backeloang, Taffacan, Tifulucan, Teopan, and Tefurang; the last in a Valley near the Highlands, where Fort Zelandia stands, formerly called Tayovan.  
The Inhabitants of this Village are rude and savage, robust, and almost of a 
The Inhabitants of Tefurang are very savage.  Gigantic size, not black like the Caffers, and count it no immodesty to go stark 
Their Customs.  naked. Their Women, well built for Stowage, short, and inclining to grossness, wearing Apparel; yet twice a day they strip themselves, and are not ashamed to bathe and wash in public.  
These, though a barbarous People, are kind to the Netherlanders, heartily entertaining them with their own, though mean, yet wholesome Fare.  
Soulang breeds a needy, spiteful, inhospitable, and bloody People. Notwithstanding 
Inhabitants of Soulang.  the fruitfulness of the Soil they commonly live in want, being extreme lazy, Tilling no more than they suppose will supply their necessity; which often falling short, they are so hardly put to it, that when they perceive Provision growing scant, they live sparingly many days, or else they might be utterly famished; for in such exigencies they never help one another: nay, they are so supinely slothful, that the Women do all the business of the Field, Plough, Sow, and Reap, having neither Horses, nor any other cattle to help them; the Drudgery being the more, because they make it Gardener's work, for only with Spades they dig and turn the Glebe; and where their Corn grows thickest, especially Rice, they pluck it out with their Hands, and set it where they find the Blades come up thinner; and in Harvest knowing neither Scythe nor Sickle, which tries their patience, crop with a Tool like a Pruning Knife, Stalk by Stalk, a Span below the Ear; which without Threshing, they store up in their Houses, hanging it in the Evening in small Bundles over the Fire; and early in the Morning the Women rise and 
How they order their Rice.  Pound so much as will serve them that day for their lazy Lord and Family Besides Rice and other Grain, they Sow Carrots, Set Water-Melons, Pinang, Quach, Taraum, and Pting.  
This Isle is not stored with such Wines as other places in India have, which their Trees produce; but they have another sort of Liquor, that inebriates no less than the Indian, or Juice of the Spanish Grape; which they prepare in this manner: They take a quantity of Rice, which they put in a Vessel made for that purpose, and boil it; which turning out, they knead into little Balls, or Pellets; when they are well chewed, they put them into another Pot, there letting it stand till grown sour; to this they pour a good quantity of Spring-Water, which being so put together, works a Month or two, for so long it will ferment; than it becomes a clear, pleasant, wholesome, and strong Liquor: which the longer kept, the better grows, for it will hold good thirty 
Strange Liquor in Eormesa.  years. The top of this Drink is thin and clear, the bottom or sediment thick like our Pap: the thin makes their Drink, with which they often Fuddle; the thick makes their Caudle to recover them, which Cropsick, they eat with Spoons. This they carry with them to the Field, and take a Dose thereof when they think fit: and thus yearly they spend most part of their Rice.  
The Women when their Cultivation or Land-work is done, than they betake 
The Women Fish and Till.  themselves to the Sea, and Launch out their Boats, which they call Champans, and fall to Fishing, where they catch great store of Crabs, Oysters, and Gurnet's, which they Salt without Gutting, and therefore, though Pickled, keep not long, but are apt to putrify and breed Worms; yet they like it never the worse, but look upon their Dish as the greater Dainty, the ranker the Hogooe.  
Their Youths, though strong and of able Bodies, spend their time in idleness and sloth; and when forty years old, than they settle themselves to Laziness, as if it were a Trade or Handicraft, spending twenty years in a methodical doing of nothing, in a small Hut or Hovel, dandling their Children, or Dalliance with their Wives, seldom or never stirring out of their own Limits, or Patch of Ground, unless invited either to a private or public Feast, or Hunting-Matches, in which pleasure they take some pains, using several, and 
Several ways of Hunting.  indeed ingenious ways to catch the Game, sometimes practising deceit, laying Snares and Traps of complicated Rushes and Reeds so artificially, that they look fresh, as if growing and ungathered, setting them in the Haunts of wild Boars, Lays of Deers, and the like, and so catch them, wondering who made their new Lodges and Beds so soft, and lay Meshes in other inviting places, which if they take not willingly, nor observe such Allurements, they drive them in, where they also make them their Prey; and they trapan them into Pits, digged and spread over with a light Swarth, or Turf of Grass, supported with brittle Twigs laid athwart the Holes: here to make them sure from getting out, they place a Snare, which suddenly arrests them, taking them Prisoners by the Neck or Legs, and then they with a shout fall upon the so taken Quarry.  
Besides this, they use Hostility and open Arms, whole Villages march out 
Strange manner of Hunting in Firando.  together, nay, two or three Townships, joining their Forces, taking the Field; where drawn out in a single File, they stretch a Ring, which extends four or five English Miles in compass, every one brandishing in each Hand a Javelin, some carrying three or four: thus all prepared, with a rally of Hounds they rouse the Prey, then contracting their wide Circumference by degrees into a narrower▪ Circuit, closing up at last Man to Man, Shoulder to Shoulder; this done, if any one of their thrown Spears hit and fasten into the Body of the Game, they never lose him, for their Lances being short, not above six Foot long, and Pointed with Iron, having three retorted Hooks, stick so fast, that though flying to shelter amongst the Bushes and Shrubs, will not, when impeded by intangling Branches, drop out, and also having tied at the But▪ end of the Staff a long String with a Bell, so that if by chance the Beast thus imparked break the Pale, yet they never lose him, for they follow not only by the scent, but by the sound, both which seldom fail. 
Venison how▪ eaten.   
They use also Arrows, especially when they hunt wild Deer. The remainder of the slain Venison, when they have Feasted themselves, they barter for Clothing and Raiment with the Chinese, seasoning with Salt the Humbles, to keep for their own private Store; but if by chance they kill a pregnant do, they unlace her, and Feasting upon the Slinck, eat up Skin and all. 
The Formosan Mens Exercises, and their manner of Fight.   
To this their Manly Divertisements, and Exercises of Saiha, pleasing Labour, as pursuing their Game, they have also rougher work, and serious engagements, which, when successful, brings no less delight to such a barbarous People, that is, a Civil War, ancient Feuds, or fresh Animosities, still upon new occasions fermenting, so that Town against Town, and Village against Village all the Country over, are in open Hostility, either public Slaughter, or private Murder being their Sports, which thus they carry on: First one Town begins, sending the other a bold Defiance; this is followed by twenty or thirty in a Party, which Row in their Boats, or Champans, to their Enemy's Village, near which they lie as if in Ambuscade till Night, then growing dark, they Landing, march up and down and explore the Fields, culling out private Huts, and such like Houses, where the Graver sort, the Married People, as we said before, at their ease and pleasure dwell: Those that be thus supinely careless they suddenly surprise, and off goes their Heads, Hands, and Feet; sometimes more cruelly they slice out their whole Bodies, each one carrying a Collup in triumph home, as an evidence that he had no small share in that bloody Slaughter, but, as they suppose, honourable Action: But finding no small Game, or such single Adventures, than they attempt secretly the next Village, where silently breaking into a House or two, they spare none, but salvagely kill Men, Women, and Children, carrying their Heads, Hands, and Feet home, as Trophies of their Victory: But sometimes falling short of their Design, are glad to escape to save themselves; and often, the whole Town so suddenly taking the alarm, they with as little mercy are all cut off: at other times in their flight so few appearing, that the Enemies in hopes of revenge, are trepanned to their Boats, where in greater and unexpected numbers they Fight so valiantly, that they put them to the Rout; yet these though seeming Furioso's, receiving the least Wound, basely Retreat and quit the Battle.  
Their Defensive Arms are Shields, so large, that they cover their whole Bodies; 
Their Arms.  their Offensive, Darts and Falchions.  
It often happens, that two or three Villages join against one or more associated Towns: these have no Commission-Officer, or Commander, but whosoever shows most Men, they make their General, and hath the prime Authority to rule over the others according to their numbers. Neither are their Warlike Stratagems common, for when they intent to Attaque some Village by a sudden surprisal, for they have no Works to storm, opposite to the way that they appear upon, and ready to enter the Village; on the contrary side they lie in Ambush, which when they Charge in, giving a smart alarm, the▪ People struck with a sudden fear, in a confused manner, betake themselves to their Heels, and flying from, fall just into the Mouth of the same Enemy, who suddenly starting up, are not sparing, but oftentimes make a general slaughter, whilst the others ransack and pillage the Houses. Sometimes in the Night they break into a House or two, which leaving, their business being done, two of the Parties stick fast in their likeliest way to return, so to stop the Pursuer, sharp-pointed Reeds, about half a Yard long, they making their Retreat by another improbable way. Each Conqueror that shares for his own part a Head, carries it through his Village upon a Spear, insulting and singing in praise and glory of his God, to whom he solely ascribes his Victory; thus proudly vaporing, they are joyfully received every where, and entertained with the best Liquor the Town affords.  
Every sixteen Houses have their own Chapel, to which they carry this 
Formosans have great Churches.  their bloody Spoil, which afterwards he boils till the Flesh comes from the Bone, then drying it in the Sun, they pour strong Liquor (a Custom which they never omit) upon the bare Scalp: fourteen days they keep Holy, Feasting 
Keep great Feasts when they are Conquerors.  and Sacrificing to their gods, who gave them so great and glorious a Victory.  
Of these Heads, who e'er enjoys one, looks upon it as his greatest Treasure, prising them beyond Gold or Silver, or the most precious Jewel, and when any sudden accident of Fire, or the like happen, this they take most care of, how to carry it with them, or leave in safety.  
This Isle, as we said before, hath no King, nor Supreme Governor, but every 
Have no supreme Governor.  petty Village is a small Republic, Ruling itself under twelve Magistrates, chosen every second year; whose chief Qualification is to be fifty years old: 
Strange Councillors.  these when going out, in Honour and Commemoration that they were once prime Rulers, have all their Hair picked off from their Temples, and each side of their Heads with Tweasers; which baldness is the well-known Badge of their former Authority. But these Governor's Power hath but small Limits, 
Their Authority.  for in every Exigence all the Villages meet in the Temple there, having no Representatives, every Man speaks to the purpose according to his abilities, or as he is biased; which done, the Twelve take into their consideration, and from the general result of their various opinions, give their special Verdicts, which the People as they like or dislike, ratify or refuse. But they have absolute Power to seize the Clothes of whomsoever wears Apparel in that three Months, when by their Laws they are commanded to go naked, and Pray to their Idols for Rain, being about that time always a dry Season. This also in part they inflict upon the Women that go too gorgeously in that Quarter. This their Court of twelve Aldermen suffer great hardship or Penance, not being allowed by their Laws to taste any strong Drink, as Pietang, use Sugar, or eat any Fat of their Meat, till such time as their Rice is half ripe, believing that only preserves the sprouting Blade from the harrase of wild Beasts, as Deer, Swine, and such like.  
Their chief Practice, and special Virtues, are Theft, Murder, and Adultery, 
The punishment of Criminals.  at which they are very dextreous, either by Stratagems, or downright violence, and he that reckons up the most of such dire Actions, appears amongst them the bravest Fellow.  
These People▪ though they have no superiority amongst them, neither by the 
Show great respect one to another, and chiefly the Youth to the ancient People.  honour of Birth, nor their own acquired Riches: yet the Seniors keep the Juniors at a greater distance than we in Europe; the old Men exacting a greater Respect from the younger by far, over whom they exercise absolute Authority, and Arbitrary Power, without any limitation, Youth being no better than a Slave to Age; for wheresoever a young Man sees one more aged than himself (though at a great distance) he must start suddenly out of the way, as if a Prince were coming with all his Train; and if he chance to call and beckon to him, then sending him of an Errand, he dare not refuse, though to the farthest part of the Isle; neither dare they once offer to come near, or intrude into any Room where Parents are together; so that to be young, is to be a Slave▪ and when old, a Prince, having no honour of Superiority but by their years.  
The Males must not Marry before their one and twentieth Year, nor wear 
Strange Marriage.  long Hair till the seventeenth. Their ceremonious Rites of Matrimony are only consummated thus: The Suitor, who by the advice of his Parents or his own Affection, hath cast his Eye upon a Mistress, begins his Courtship or Gallanting with a Present, which his Mother, or a near Relation, carries to her House, there presenting in her Servants Name, with all Compliments, and Manifestations of his Affection. These Gifts are commonly eight Skirts or Petticoats, as many Waistcoats, or Upper-Bodice, four hundred Armlets of pleited Rush, a dozen Rings for their Fingers, either Copper, or white polished Hartshorn, and so many Laces of red Dog's Hair, five Linen Girdles, twelve Dogs Hair Coverlets, thirty Chinesie Pieces of Cloth, a great Box full of Dog's Hair, with which they make a Border, or Love-shade, to beautify their Forehead and Temples, which they call Ayam Maniang, and five pair of Hart-skin Stockings. These Presents are sent only by the Wealthiest; and those that are less able according to their abilities. If what they thus present is received, the business is concluded, and Marriage presently confirmed by the Nuptial Bed.  
Notwithstanding the concluding Ceremony, the Husband and Wife dwell 
The Formosan Men live not with the Women▪  not together, but live apart by themselves; but in the Night he is allowed in a clandestine way to steal to his Enjoyments; whither making his approaches, he is neither allowed Fire nor Candle, but with all silence and secrecy steals into the Bed; neither there must he speak to his Bride, but if he want any thing, that he signifies by Coughing; upon which, guessing what it may be, his Wife administers, and her Houshold-business being done, she comes to Bed; a hard Lodging, where indeed they have no Bed, neither Pillow nor Bolster, but a Buck-skin spread upon the Floor; yet others have a Bedstead spread with Rushes. These hardships, as they suppose, makes them fitter for the encounters of Venus, and more stirs up Loves fervour than warm dalliance in softer accommodations: Neither may he linger there, but e'er the Dawn visibly appear, thence he must, that so his departing with an appetite, he may be the more earnest for a second fruition: But all this while neither of them are a burden to one another, but each provide for themselves, and follow their own affairs; and if they meet by chance in the Day, they pass by like Strangers, the Husband 
May not speak to them in the daytime.  not daring to speak to his Wife without her Licence. The Charge of bringing up of the Children is left to her Care, till they are above one and twenty years of age, than their Father receives and keeps, or disposes of them as he thinks fitting.  
But the Formosan Women have a barbarous Custom (void of all Motherly affection, and humane reason,) for whoever proves with Child before thirty seven years of age, when the Fruit of her Womb waxeth ripe and fit for Delivery, they cruelly and in unspeakable manner destroy: for in stead of a Midwise that should assist them in their Labour, or Childbed-throws, they employ a cruel Dame, who laying them in a fit posture on their best and softest Bed, crushes 
Horrible Murder of their Infants.  and kneads the tender Infant in the Womb, till it become like a lump of Doughty, which departs from them with more extreme torture, than if they were naturally delivered.  
Georgius Canidius, a Minister of the Gospel, residing in Formosa Anno 1628. relates, that he knew a Formosan Woman, who was delivered of sixteen Children in that horrible manner, her first Abortion being in her seventeenth Year; and he being inquisitive to know why she thus made away what would have been her own dear Issue, and to be esteemed most of all worldly joys by her, received this answer from her, That her shamefacedness and modesty forbade her to be a Mother before she was of age of discretion, being accounted amongst them thirty seven Years.  
The Husband (as we said before) in the fortieth Year of his Age, forsakes his 
In what year the Formosan Men begin to keep House with their Wives.  solitary abode, and lives with his Wife, spending the remainder of their days together in small Huts or hovel in the Field: but upon the least jangling or falling out, they part; so that sometime they change their old for new Wives once a Month. If he can clearly convict her, showing just reason for his separation, he recovers her Dowry, seizing those Gifts which he presented before Marriage; but failing either in his Arguments or Proofs, the Divorced Wife preserves her own Estate. Some Mary two Wives, but they are looked upon as committing Fornication or Adultery; but of late, Custom, and the common practice, makes the offence not altogether so heinous.  
Their Youth and Bachelors have their peculiar Residence; for in every Village, 
Unmarried People have their Dwellings apart.  as we said before, sixteen Houses have their Chapel, in which they have distinct Lodgings, as in a College, where they keep their Bachelor's Place, though Married, till such time as they go to live with their Wives.  
The Formosan Houses are the handsomest, and exactest built of any after the 
The Formosan Houses are artificial.  Indian manner; for in stead of digging deep, they raise a Foundation six Foot high of firm Clay; the Walls of the Fabric are raised only with Reeds and Rushes, artificially strengthened with interweavings, having four Doors opening 
Their Householdstuff.  to the four Winds; but the prime Buildings have eight: The Ornament without, and Furniture within, are Stags Crested Heads, and wild Boars, Chinesie Raiments, and Deer-skins; and also Assagays or Javelins, Shields, Swords, Bows and Arrows, cattle, Axes, Cans, Pitchers, and Troughs, Vessels of Barks of Trees, and Earthenware. But they pride most in the Bones, Sculls, and hairy Scalps of Enemies Conquered by their own Hands.  
They use no private, but public Feasts, to which every sixteen House-Parish 
Feasts.  repair, being kept in their little Temple, or Chapel, where after their Devotion to their gods, they spend the rest of their time in Feasting, Singing, Dancing, and all manner of Idolatry; and he that appears there in a Dog's Hair Coat, is the bravest Fellow.  
The manner of disposing their Dead, and Funeral Obsequies, are thus: 
Strange ordering of their Dead.  When any dies, the Corpse being Laid out, after four and twenty hours they elevate it upon a convenient Scaffold, or Stage, four Foot high, Matted with Reeds and Rushes, near which they make a Fire, that so the Corpse may by degrees dry: to which place the Friends of the Deceased daily flock together, and that they may keep up Sorrow the better, bring along with them store of Man's Flesh, and several strong intoxicating Liquors. But before the sick Person departs, being just ready to give up the Ghost, thus they begin their inebriating Grief: One beats on a Drum made of a hollow Tree, which gives notion of a Person deceased; at which Summons the Women come from all Parts near, bringing their Pots and Vessels of Strong Drink with them, and making themselves, and the Relations of the Deceased, drunk. They Dance all Night before the Door after this manner: They take a Trough like a Chest, 
Strange Dance  but longer and broader, and turning the bottom upwards, the Women get up, and two by two, Back to Back, move their Legs and Arms in a Dancing time and measure; which pace, or taboring tread, sends a kind of a murmuring, or doleful Sound, from the hollow Tree; when these mounted Couples are weary, they come down, and others supply the Place: Thus the Maudlin-Drunkards dance nine Days together, whilst the Body lies parching by the Fire, sending forth a very noisome Stench; then having bathed the Corpse nine times over, they wrap it up close in a Mat, and lay it higher than before, so covering it with a fitted Canopy from all Light, there lying three years, till such time as nothing remains but a Skeleton, all else being consumed to Dust; then they Inter him in his own House, with all the Ceremony of Feasts, as if lately departed.  
The ordering of their Sick is no less unnatural and preposterous; for they 
How strangely they order their Sick.  use them worse than if the Devil were their Doctor; for in stead of Potion or Pill, and the like, they have but one Medicine for all Diseases, and that's a dry Halter, especially in the Village Teopan; for as soon as any Person falls sick, and begins to complain, lying down, and not able to walk about, and follow his Business, they presently prepare a tough Cord, in stead of Cordial; so putting the Noose about his Neck, they hoist him up to the top of the House with a Pulley kept for that purpose, then let him suddenly fall with a Jolt, which commonly proves an immediate Cure, by killing them; yet some mend upon this choking Medicine, either by the strength of Nature, or their Spirits irritated by the fright.  
The Formosans neither Write nor Read, using no Books, Letters, nor Characters: 
The Religion of the Formosans.  but yet that Law and Religion which they have amongst them, they observe without alteration, delivered by Tradition from Generation to Generation: For certain young Men are appointed to be instructed from the elder; and faithful Memories are their only Registers and Records.  
First, They believe the Universe, Heaven and Earth, to have been without beginning, and shall be without end.  
Secondly, they acknowledge the Immortality of the Soul; for which reason, they build a little Place, in which they put a Tub of Water with a Dish in it, before the Door of the Deceased, supposing the Spirit thereof comes daily thither to bathe or cleanse.  
The next Article of their Faith is, That there are several Punishments after this Life, according to the equality of their Crimes, and Rewards of Eternal Happiness for those that have, when living, merited by doing well: therefore they dig broad and deep Trenches, filling them with Mud and Slime; over which they make a floating Bridge of bundled-up Rushes, which leads to the most delightful and luxurious Vales in the Country: Over these, as they affirm, the Souls of the Deceased must pass, which the Wicked endeavouring to cross, the unstable Truss, or rolling Bridge, tumbles them over into their Stygian Lake; but the Just and Godly walking in safety over, enjoy there all Pleasure in an everlasting Elysium.  
Those Sins which they account most heinous, are but frivolous Toys, built 
What they account Sin.  upon Superstition and sleight Observation, as not to go naked (as we said before) at their set and appointed times; to wear Clothes or any thing of Silk▪ Women to bear Children before their seven and thirtieth year; to fetch and eat Oysters not in due season; and to venture to undertake any Business; though of little or no consequence, before they have observed good Auguries from the Notes or Language of the Birds: All these are Capital, and, as they hold forth, unpardonable Offences; but Murder, Theft, Lying, and Forswearing, these have their Qualifications; for some may commit them, and some may not, without any scruple; but in general they are looked upon no more than Peccadillo's, and venial Offences.  
When they take an Oath, they ratify it by breaking a Straw. To be a public and common Drunkard, and to be an Adulterer, and Debaucher of young Women, if carried privately, is no harm.  
Though they believe the Immortality of the Soul, yet they utterly deny the Resurrection of the Body.  
Amongst their several gods which they worship, the chiefest are Tamagisanhach, 
Their chiefest Idols.  who Governs and Inhabits the South; his Celestial Spouse, Taxankpada Agodales, commands the East, where when it happens to Thunder, they believe that she exercises her Tongue, the Females best Arms, scolding so loud at her Husband in the South, because he neglects his Office, not sending Rain when the Earth needs; who being nettled with his Wives bitter and sharp expression, not enduring to hear her any longer, opens his Mouth, sending, and dispersing with his Breath abundance of Water.  
Another Deity which they worship out of fear, because Tamagisanhach, as they say, creates Men with comely Visages, and well-proportioned Bodies; this being an angry and ill natured Power, delighting in mischief, makes it his whole Business to spoil and mis-shape what Tamagisanhach hath made fair and handsome, disfiguring their Faces with Pox and Blasting, bunching their Backs, withering and crooking their Limbs, and the like, then deriding at their Lameness and Deformity: so this Sariafing they hold in great Veneration, that he would be pleased to spare them, and do them no harm.  
When they take up Arms, and proclaim Hostility, they offer Sacrifices to 
Their gods of War.  Talafula and Tapaliape, their two gods of War.  
Their Priests, or rather Priestesses, which they call Inibs, are Women, the 
Women perform Divine Services.  whole Function in Divine Service, or Worship, belonging to them; for they not only Pray to their gods, and Preach, but also Sacrifice: Their chiefest Offerings are Stags and Boars Heads, presented in a Charger, upon boiled Rice, Pynang, and other strong Drinks, as a Condiment: This performed, two of the Female Order stand up before the Congregation, and make a Sermon, in which they set forth the Praise and Honour of their gods, going on with that vehemency of expressions and loud declamations, that at last their Hair stands upright, and their Eyes rolling, seem ready to start out of their Heads; then 
Strange actions.  near the Conclusion of these their dire Exhortations, they fall down in a Trance, and oftentimes lie so for a whole Hour, whilst the People gathering near them, tear their Throats, and cleave the Air with hideous shrieks and cries; when coming to themselves, in a cold and faint Sweat, their Limbs trembling, their Teeth chattering, strangely discomposed, they tell the People, That in their Trance the gods appeared to them, unfolding mysterious things for their good, not yet to be expressed; besides, two others of these Women mount the Battlements of the Temple, and standing at the gable ends, they make afresh loud, and long Supplications to their gods: At last they strip themselves, and thus denuded, crying more earnestly to their gods, and first shaking, then taboring, or clapping with their Hands, raging as in a fanatic distraction. All the Women, following their impudent example, throw off with their Weeds all Shame at once, and so Tope and Deboush, till 
Drunkenness a Virtue.  they disgorge their too plentiful excess.  
Besides this their public Worship in the Temple, they Offer in the open Streets, and exercise private and domestic Devotions, performing Family-duties daily in their own Houses, to which those that please may repair, and join with them in this their Idol-Service.  
With these Inibs also they consult concerning fair or foul Wether, when 
The Office of the Inibs.  they have any Business abroad; also of future Events, which they seem to foretell, and if bad, advise how to prevent, or at least to mitigate: They also profess Exorcism, to drive away Evil Spirits, and to charm and confine the Devil, and all such deceitful Tempter's; which they perform in a Rant, with loud Hectoring Acclamations, drawing a japan Falchion, with which they Fence, Strike, and Thrust, flourishing it in the Air, making them believe, that thus they Fight the Fiend, and slice Satan out in Sippets, forcing him, thus being mangled, and cut almost into Atoms, to dive for his better safety into the Sea.  
Yet these so savage People, and blind with an overgrown ignorance, have 
Formosans' become Christians.  lately (since the Hollanders East-India Company settled here, and built a Fort for their Defence, and conveniency of Trade) without any great difficulty embraced the Doctrine of the Christian Faith; which was the easier introduced, the Inhabitants being their own Governors, and under no Supreme Authority, 
Why they are easier converted than other Indidians.  who exercising a Tyrannical Power, would, as other Persecutors, force them back from God's true, to their false Idol-Worship, as at that time most part of India was, being either under Heathen or Mahometan Governors, who with great fury obstructed the Gospel, which else might have flourished through the Oriental World: Besides, the Formosans kept no Books, wherein the Bounds of Religion were fixed, and a settled maintained Doctrine, which still caused great variance, and hot Disputes amongst themselves, the whole Conduct of their Divine Laws being left to a few frantic and ignorant Women, who know nothing but by Tradition. This made it the more easy to reduce them from their Paganism and Idolatry; and finding little in their frenzied Inibs, that might persuade them to persist in their former Superstitions, many of them, with small difficulty, became good Christians. Thus far Candidius, which we have acquainted you with in our japan.  
David Wright a Scots-man, and later than Candidius, who dwelled in the Isle several years, hath thus enlarged more particularly in every part.  
This Island is not under the Jurisdiction of one peculiar Governor, but 
The Island Formosa is divided into eight Dominions.  stands divided into eleven Shires or Provinces, all lying to the Inland, of which every one hath several Towns and Villages belonging to them, besides divers Lordships on the Mountains.  
Under the Hollanders Command, (with which we will begin first) were formerly in the Northern Confines Sinkkan, Tavakan, Baklawan, Soelang, Mattou, Tiverang, Faberlang, Takhais, Tornap, Terenip, and Assoek.  
The second Province is Kabelang, a Territory by the Netherlanders called The Bay of Kabelang, and contains seventy two Towns and Villages, every one governed by their own peculiar Laws, and in amity with each other. The Hollanders never being able to subdue the Inhabitants thereof, were forced to make Peace with them; after which they not only Traded with several sorts of Merchandise, but also sold their Sons and Daughters to them for Slaves, taking commonly for a Youth of thirteen years old, ten Rixdollars.  
The third Dominion belongs to the King of Middag, lying against the North-East of Tayowan, Southward of the River Patientia.  
This Prince hath seventeen Towns that obey him, the biggest whereof, called Middag, is his chief Seat, and Place of Residence: Sada, Boedor, Deredonesel, and Goema, are four other of his eminent Towns, which last is a handsome place, lying five Miles from Patientia, in a Plain, whereas all the other are built on Hills. He had formerly twenty seven Towns under his Jurisdiction; but ten of them threw off the Yoke. He keeps no great State, being at his going abroad accompanied only with one or two Attendants. He would never suffer any Christians to dwell in his Dominions, but only allows them to Travel through his Country.  
About seven Leagues to the Northward of Middag, and four Leagues from the Sea, lies Mount Gedult, so called from its difficult and hard Ascents: It appears square like a Table, so even and smooth, as if it were the Work of Art, not of Nature, having the advantage of adjacent Plains round about, and is overgrown with Brambles. On the Southside, at the Foot of this Hill, glides a River with so strong a Current, that the stoutest of the Natives, which are Men of able Bodies, dares not adventure to wade through it in any place; so that to make it fordable, they never attempt with less than twenty or thirty together, holding fast one by another; wherefore the Spaniards have by an Irony called it Rio Patientia, The Patient River; because to pass that rapid Stream, asks not only a great deal of Labour, but also some Patience.  
The fourth Jurisdiction is that of Pimaba, comprehending eight Towns, and several Villages, the chiefest whereof is Pimaba, the Residence for the Governor. The Inhabitants thereof are a stout and warlike People, and most expert in their manner of Arms, of all the Formosans. This King, looked upon as a brave Person, keeps a constant Guard, and is always quarrelling, and making War with his Neighbours. He was formerly in Friendship with the Hollanders, and proud to serve under them as Sergeant of a Company.  
The fifth is Sapat, lying quite on the other side of Formosa, and commands over ten Towns; the Governor whereof is in League with Pimaba.  
The sixth Dominion is called Takabolder, and hath eight Towns, besides several Villages under its Jurisdiction.  
In Takabolder appears an exceeding high Mountain, which may be seen from Tayowan.  
The seventh Lordship is that of Cardeman, governed by a Woman, who for her kind reception of the Christians, was by the Hollanders called The Good Woman: She commands over five Villages. When the Hollanders marched into the Field, she sent them Provisions, had a great Authority over her Subjects, and being a Widow, married to one of the Princes of the Country.  
The eighth Territory hath twelve Villages, of which the chiefest are Deredou, Orrazo, Porraven, Barraba, Warrawarra, Tannatanna, and Cubeca.  
The ninth is called Tokodekal, and hath seven Towns, and seven Villages; the chief whereof is Tokodekal, where the Governor hath his Residence.  
The tenth, named Pukkal, consists only of one handsome City, and maintains a continual War against the seven Villages of Tokodekal, and likewise against Percuzi and Pergunu, two Towns, which make the eleventh Dominion.  
Besides all these forementioned Places, there are abundance of Lordships in the Mountains; but we will not trouble the Reader with naming them, because they are so numerous, and for that every one is for itself, and continually make War one against another: But those Places which formerly the Hollanders had reduced, they kept in good order and quiet.  
These Islands of Formosa and Tayowan, especially the Coasts, suffer much 〈◊〉 Storms and Tempests; for oftentimes the Wind blows down whole Trees and Houses, rending both Walls and Roofs from top to bottom: Besides by these Huricanes yearly many Ships are lost that approach near the Coasts.  
Both these Isles also endure terrible Earthquakes. Anno 1654. happened a mighty Earthquake, on the fourteenth of December, which continued, with short intermissions, almost seven Weeks together. It also reins here very much; wherefore none can travel above two Months, being December and january, for than is generally the fairest Wether; but their greatest and perpetual Rains happen only in july and August. There are two Mousons', o●… Stormy Seasons; the one the Northern, and the other the Southern Mouson: The first begins in October, and continues till March; the second begins in May, and holds till September, which the Hollanders called The unconstant Month, because of its often change of Wether.  
The circumjacent Sea, that washes the Skirts of these Isles, abounds with Fish, especially the Harder, or Shepherd-Fish, and another called the Kings-Fish. The Chineses come yearly towards February, from the Main-Land, with thousands of Jonks, to take these Shepherds, some of the Jonks being able to carry five or six hundred Tun. There sail also another sort of Vessels amongst these Jonks, which they call Koiaes', or Wankans, somewhat smaller than our Cock-boats.  
This Harder, or Shepherd, is a Fish about the bigness of a Whiting, which when taken, is slit to the Back like Habberdine, then salted, and packed up in Barrels, is sent in Pickle all over China, as we and the Hollanders send our Herrings through Europe. The Rows of these Fishes are also salted, and put into Pots, which remaining very red, are accounted for a great Dainty amongst the Chinese.  
For the Privilege of Fishing under this Island, the Chineses used to pay the Tithes of all Fish for Custom, to the Hollanders there resident.  
The Soil hath in it a natural Fertility, yet lies most part waste, through the ignorance and sloth of the Inhabitants: The fruitfullest Tract the King of Middag possesses, which produces abundance of Rice, Wheat, Barley, Rye, Kayjang, Ginger, Sugar, several sorts of Trees, and great variety of Fruits, as Lemons, Oranges, Citrons, Pumpeons, Water-Melons, Cucumbers, Ananasses, China-Roots, Kadjang, Fokkafoka, Potatoes, Ubes, Sweet-Herbs, Cabbage, Carrots, and abundance of Physical Herbs, and Cane-wood. Kadjang is a certain small Seed, green, and about the bigness of Coriander, which boiled with salt and fresh Fish, gives a more pleasant taste. Fokkafokas is a Fruit like a Pear, but thrice as big as one of our greatest; white on the shady side, and on the other, in stead of Red, of a Purple Colour, and shines on the top like Glass. It is first cut into four Quarters, than boiled with Flesh or Bacon, like Turnips, Carrots, or Coleworts: Of the Broth, sweetened with Sugar they make good Drink.  
They also have some few Sheep, and store of Hearts, Goats, stags, Coneys, 
Beasts.  Hares, tame and wild Swine, Tigers, Bears, Apes, and the like: But they have there also another kind of Creature, by the Hollanders called Tayowans Devil, about an Ell long, and five Inches broad▪ it is full of Scales, both under his Belly, and on his Back; hath four Feet, a long sharp Head, very sharp Claws, and a Tail thin at the end; his Food nothing but Pismires; for being hungry, they put forth their Tongues, which when they perceive creep upon it, they draw in again, and so swallow their Prey: It is an Enemy only to the Ants, and is very fearful of Men, from whom it flies upon the first sight, into any hole, or else winds itself together; but if taken by the Tail, and shaken, opens again; so that the Hollanders have by an Irony named it the Tayowans Devil, being so harmless, that it will neither offend another, nor defend itself. None of these are found in all Asia, but on this Isle, where they have all manner of Fowl else, except Parrots. There are also Serpents, Millepedes, Scorpions▪ Hedgehogs, and many other monstrous Creatures. They likewise oftentimes see great Swarms of Locusts.  
Anno 1655. abundance of Locusts spread themselves over these Islands of Formosa and Tayowan: At their first appearance in Tayowan, they fell down from the Sky, like a great Snow here with us, and covered the whole Ground: After two days they directed their way to Sakkam, multiplying in such manner, that no place was free of them. The People endeavouring to destroy the young Locusts in Sakkam, in four or five days got thirty thousand Picol weight: But 
Every Picol is 125 pound weight.  all proved in vain, and they were forced to give over, when they saw their prodigious increase, utterly destroying their Sugar and Rice Fields every where.  
Against the North-East part of Formosa lies a great and rich Golden Mine, surrounded by many other Marble Quarries: At the Foot thereof runs a River, with many winding Reaches; so that any one which intends to go in quest of the Gold, must cross this Stream above twenty times, and not without great danger, because of the Stones, which frequently tumble from the Rocks. In August the great Rains sweep down an incredible Store of this rich Metal, which falls into Pits made on purpose at the Foot of the Hill, which the Inhabitants draining, gather the pure Oar from the bottom.  
These Mountains are inhabited by a People which know no Prince, nor hitherto have been conquered by any. The Hollanders have often endeavoured to gain some Ground in these Highlands; but were always repulsed.  
They are ingenious, of subtle Wit, and great Memories, and none of the Indians are fitter to understand the Mysteries of, and readier to embrace the Christian Faith.  
Their Habit or Summer-Garment, is only a thin Cotton Coat, made wide, 
Apparel.  tied fast on the Breast by two Corners, and then put under one of their Arms; so that generally one side of their Bodies is covered, and the other bare; about the middle close girt, and hanging down below their Knees. They neither wear Shoes nor Stockings; but sometimes a kind of Pumps or Sandals, made of Goatskins, which they fasten on the top of their Feet.  
In the Winter time they wear Tigers, Leopards, Bears, and other Wild-beasts Skins. The People of Soulang went habited like the Dutch, being still conversant among them; but all the rest, like the Chinese.  
Before the Spaniards and Hollanders coming thither, the Inhabitants went naked; which Savage Custom those that live in the Mountains still continue, wearing only a small Cloth before.  
The women's Habit agrees almost with the men's, only with this difference, that they tie Clouts about their Legs, like Spatterdashes, and have short Coats, like a Half-shirt without Sleeves, which reach down to their Middle, and under that a Cotton Cloth, falling down to their Knees. Their Heads are filleted with a piece of Silk, about a Yard and half long, whose two ends stick out like Horns, on their Foreheads; and none of them ever wear Shoes: But every Woman hath commonly a great Pig running after her, as we use to have a Dog.  
The Men paint the Skin of their Breasts, Backs, and Arms, with a Colour which remains in the Flesh, and will never be got out, and by them accounted a great Bravery: about their Necks and Arms they hang Glass Beads strung, and Iron Armlets, which sit very strait, like an Elbow-Gauntlet, so narrow in the Wrist, that it seems impossible almost how they could be put over the Hand; and on their Legs they have Anclets of white Shells, joined together like a Scallop Lace.  
The Men of Tokdadekol wear as an Ornament a long Cane, which they stick behind their Backs at a Girdle, the other end bowing over their Heads, having a white or red Flag about two Handfuls broad.  
Their Heads on Holydays are gay with Cocks Feathers, and their Arms and Legs with Bears Tails: The Women also use Glass, and Stones, and sometimes also Rixdollars. The Skins of Deer, spread on the Ground, serve them for Beds and Blankets. They have no Societies of Artificers, or Manufactory; but every one is his own Workman, and Seamster, making what is necessary or useful for themselves to wear: They are very dexterous and ready in handling their Bows and Arrows; and such excellent Swimmers, that they will bear on their Backs another Person through the swiftest Current.  
They exercise themselves much in Running, and are very swift of Foot; so that some of them are able to beat a Horse at full speed: When they run, they hold a kind of a Bell about six Inches long in their Hand, which tinkles slower or faster according to their motion.  
They never venture out to Sea, but Fish in Rivers with small Canoes.  
They have yet another sort of Drink, by them called Cuthay, made of the same pressed Rice (which they preserve, and through not away) in this manner: They take a Handful of this Rice, and put it into a Callabash, which contains about two Gallons, which they fill up with Water: This is a cool Drink, not strong, and hath only a smatch of the Masakauw.  
In the Northern Part of Formosa, between Kelang and Tamsay, and between Tamsay and Mount Gedult, they make another Drink of Wood-ashes, which is also very strong, but unwholesome for the Europeans, because 'tis apt to excoriate, breeding the Bloodyflux: But the Natives, though so well stored with these several Liquors, yet for the most part satisfy themselves with Water.  
Their usual Diet is dried Venison, Flesh of Wild Swine, and Fish; all which they eat raw, without Seething or Roasting: Boiled Rice serves them for Bread, which they take with their four fingers, and toss into their Mouths. They seeth not their Rice in Water; but putting it into a Cullender, hang it over a Pot filled with boiling Water, from whose ascending Steam and Heat, the Rice grows moist and warm.  
The Inhabitants also take Tobacco▪ although it grows not there, but is brought to them from China: Their Pipes are thin Reeds or Canes, with Stone Heads: That which the Hollanders often smoked there, was brought from japan; which though strong, is but like the Refuse of other Tobacco.  
Their Houses are all built of Wood and split Canes, which because of their 
Houses.  ignorance in preparing of Lime or Stone, and the decaying of the Canes, seldom last above four or five years, at which time they pull down the old, and build new ones in the same place, though not without great charge, occasioned by the unsatiable drinking of the Workmen all the time of their Building; so that an ordinary Man is scarce able to build a House. They generally stand six Foot from the Ground, on a Hill of Clay: When the Foundation is first laid, they raise several Steps from the Street to go up to it: The foremost part of the Foundation resembles a Semicircle, or Half-Moon, and likewise the Roof over the Front; the rest thatched with Straw, and other such like Materials, is above twenty, and sometimes above thirty Foot high, jutting four Foot over the Front, that in rainy Wether they may stand dry. Every House is almost sixty Foot broad, and two hundred Foot long, with only one Room, and one Story. Their Penthouse, or Front-Roof, they hang full of Swine's Teeth, Glasses, Shells, and such like Baubles, strung on Thread, which by the Wind being stirred and blown one against another, make a gingling noise, very pleasant. The Roof, which they finish on the Ground, is by the Builders divided into two parts, one on one side, and the other on the other laid upon the House. They begin their Buildings at a certain time of the Year, viz. in january or February, because those are dry Months; but before they build, they make Observations of their good Success by Dreams, which they tell to one another every Morning: If they dream of a Post, or Pisang Tree, or short Cane, they look upon it as a good signification, and begin their Building▪ but if they Dream of a long Reed on Cane, in their Language called Foerik, they take it for an ill Omen, and defer the Work till they have better Visions. When they begin to build, they thus invoke one of their Idols: Oh Father, be with us; when we go to cut Canes, and we will build an Edifice for thee, and pull the old one down; which done, we will serve thee with more Zeal than ever we did before.  
Coming into the Cane Thicket, they first cut off one of the slenderest of all, speaking these words: Ipatahoang, Tuataki, Maganich, Maling; that is, To your Honour, O ye gods, we cut this Cane, because you have made good our Dreams. This Reed or Cane is not stripped of its Leaves, because the gods may see what it was cut off for, and is Planted on the North side of their Temple; for on the South side is the Burying and Offering places for their Dead; but on the North side they offer all living things.  
After they have cut as many Canes as they want, they pull down the old House, having before made a small Hut, just big enough to hold their Goods; before they go to work upon the main House, they offer to their gods a Box of Pinang, boiled Rice, and a dried Shepherd, or some other the like Fish, with entreaties that they would not be angry at it; for say they, We will build you a new House, we pray you preserve us; O you that help us in all our troubles, defend us against our Enemies, and provide for us in necessity; We pray you be not offended with us; receive our Offerings, and enter with us into our new Houses. Which done, enquiry is again made amongst themselves, what appeared to every one in their sleep the Night before, and he who is judged to have had the best Dream, begins the Work first, and offers strong Drink, and Pinang to the gods, praying them to grant him two quick Hands to perform his Labour. When the Walls are made, the Master of the Work first entering the House, makes an Offering to the gods before all the People.  
When they raise the Roof, three or four Women stand ready with Callibashes full of Water, out of which drinking, they spit some part into the Mouths of each other, which if delivered cleanly, and received without sprinkling, they count it a good Omen, that their Houses will prove staunch and long lasting. But the Women must be very quick in this performance, for according to their thinking, the more exquisite and nimbler they are in performance, the sooner they believe the whole work will be ended; which when effected, and the House perfectly finished, than they Tope at such a free and plentiful rate, that they conclude these Ceremonious Rites in the height of Ebrity. After this, some distance from the House, sit two or three Men, every one holding a black Pot, which they call Tatak, and Worshipping, say, Here is Liquor, come let us drink up all, neither be offended with us, O you gods, but assist us now, and always, in our Buildings. Lastly, They ask again for every ones Dream, and he that hath Dreamt best, must lay the Floor, and kindle the first Fire.  
But concerning their Superstition in Divine Worship, they give to each Priestess a Box of Pasie, that is, a Peck of Rice in the Ear, desiring them about Noon to come to their Houses, to make an Oblation to their gods, which they perform in this manner:  
If any House accidentally happen to be set on fire (by which oftentimes whole Streets, nay whole Villages, by reason of the combustible Materials, are burnt to Ashes) they Apprehend, Accuse, and without Examination, as if Convicted, punish that Man whom they first find in the Street, forcing him to make good, if able, the damage towards the Re-building, which if he refuse, his House is immediately set on fire; but if they find no body in the Street to accuse, then as if all were guilty, they lay their hands to the work, and at their own Costs and Pains finish it.  
The chief Power and Strength of this Island consists in its People, the Country being wonderfully populous.  
The Towns which War continually one against another, are fortified with all manner of Inventions for strength; and in stead of Walls, surrounded with great Woods, Planted on purpose, and much stronger than any Walls, for the Trees stand exceeding close, and above three hundred Paces in breadth. 
The strength of the Island.   
The Passages in and out are only little cross Paths, with many turnings and windings, only wide enough for one Man to walk, so that they must follow each other: On both sides of the narrow Ways are some little outlets, in which they may lie in an Ambuscade, so that no man can pass by them, but they command him with their Bow. In the Night they stick them full of Spikes like our Galthrops, which they make of a very hard Wood; sometimes they use Snares and Traps, which whoever comes amongst them is caught being entangled; these Paths thus made, as occasion offer, they can change and desert, and make new ones when they please.  
In Middagh and Pimeba, nay, in every Town are three or four very high Towers built of Canes, on which Men Armed watch with Bows and Arrows Night and Day.  
They continually maintain War one against another, Lord against Lord, 
Manner of Fight.  and Village against Village: In like manner, before they March into the Fields they Superstitiously observe their Dreams which they had the Night preceding; and augury, from the singing and flying of a certain small Bird, called Aydak; if this Bird meets them flying with a Worm in his Bill, they take it for an infallible sign, that they shall conquer their Enemies; but if the Bird flies from them, or pass by them, they are so much disheartened with the ill Omen, that they return home, nor will Engage till they have better signs: They choose always one most approved for Valour as their General, whom they style Tamatuwa, who never takes the Field, or Engage in Battle, before he hath by Offerings endeavoured to pacify and implore the gods for good success.  
They show no Mercy, nor give any Quarter, but Slaughter all, not sparing Women and Children; neither are they satisfied with killing them, but carry home the Heads of the Slain as Trophies of their Victory, being received at their return by their Wives and Children, with great rejoicing expressed by Singing and Dancing, and enter the Towns with the Heads of their Enemies erected upon long Poles, which they present to their gods seven succeeding Nights; after having taken off all the flesh, they hang up in their Houses the Sculls as Ornaments, as we in Europe use Paintings or Statues.  
When they draw forth again to the like bloody Work, they take the beforementioned Skulls with them, and stop their Mouths full of Rice: And when thus crammed, invoke after this manner: You Relics, though of our Enemies, O let your Spirits departed from you, march with us into the Field, and help us to obtain the Victory; which if you please to grant, and we have the day, we promise to present you with continual Offerings, and reckon you among the number of our favouring gods: But if they be routed and some slain, whose Bodies they could not bring off, they return to their Towns with great lamentations, then feed their fancies with representatives, dressed up as Babies in Clouts, like those that were lost in the Field, whom they Inter, as if the very same Persons, and get the Priestess to make Offerings to the Deceased Souls, conjuring them not to go amongst, nor by intelligence help their Adversaries: Then the Priestess goes by herself to the appointed place, and offers to the Souls of the Deceased a Swine's Liver, Heart, and one or two of the Feet, together with scalded Rice, Pinang, and Masakhaw; at her return she relates what a sad complaint the Souls departed made, and that they were almost starved.  
Their Arms are Bows, Arrows, Shields, Swords, Falchions, Spears, of 
Arms.  Darts, about the length of a half Pike, headed with pointed Steel, and having four Rings of Barbs, close to which hangs a long Line, wherewith when they have discharged the Dart, and wounded any, they hale to them by the Line and Staff of the Javelin the struck Enemy, whom when within their reach, taking hold of the Hair with their left Hand, with the right they whip off their Heads, and leave the Corpse neglected.  
They fight not always, though drawn up in battle array, but when the two Armies are in view, often from each Party a bold Champion steps forth, Armed with a Shield, two short Swords, a Spear, and half a dozen lesser Darts; thus provided they fight valiantly till one is slain, and the Victor returning with his Head upon his Lance, about whom his Friends flock, Rejoicing, Dancing, Singing, and Drinking Masakhaw; then returning home, he fixes his bare Scull as a Register and Trophy of their Victory; and this Duel, for that time decides the Quarrel, and all march off in quiet.  
If any of the Natives of this Isle happen to fall sick, they apply themselves only 
Curing of their Sick.  to Women-Doctors, for no other officiate there; who finding out the part affected by inquiry, they rub and chafe it very strongly, and if that cure not, which seldom happens, they are at a loss, being utterly ignorant of the knowledge of Physic, or how to make any application, either by Herbs or other Compound Medicines fitting for Distempers, or in any manner how to rectify the Diet of the Sick. But before the Tamatatah (for so they call their Doctress) comes to the Patient, she Sacrifices to their gods; if the Distemper be small, then only with Masakhaw; but if the sickness be dangerous, with Pinang and Siry; if the Disease be stubborn, than the Priestess being sent for, makes Offering to the gods Tagitelag and Tagesikel; but if the Distemper doth not remit, than the Doctress and Priestess come both together, and seek by Charms and Incantations to find out whether the Person shall Live or Die, which they perform after this manner: The Priestess pretending to speak with the Sick Man's or Woman's Spirit, pulls them by their Fingers, which if they crack, she comforts them with hopes of recovery; but if not, they look upon it as a certain sign of Death. Secondly, they take a Leaf from a Tree, by them called Fangack, which putting before the Sick Persons Lips, the Priestess comes with a Mouth full of Water, and spurts on the Leaf; if the Water runs off towards her, it is a sign of Life; but if it remains with the disaffected, or fall on the other side, they expect certain death; but if at last the Sick recovers, he is not permitted to come into their Congregation during their Karichang, for that is a testimony of his Thankfulness for the preservation of Life; and then he brings to the Priestess a Pot full of Masakhaw, an Offering to the gods Takafocloe, Telumalum, and Tapali Appe, saying, Accept this as a token of Thanksgiving from my Hands; you have well done to give me Life. While they are going to the Priestess about this affair, they must take heed that they meet with no Blind or Decrepit Person, for if they should, they must return, lest they be punished with another Sickness. They also account it a strange Omen, to hear any one Sneeses in their going: But if the Distemper increase daily to a greater height, either by Convulsions or other acute Pains, they lay the whole blame upon the Devil himself, as being the Author, whom they call Schytinglitto; whom to expel, they send for the Priestess, who conjures him in this manner: First, after some Oblations, she prays to the gods to strengthen her against the Devil, and banish all manner of fears from her; then calling for a Sword, and a Pot of Masakhaw, attended with some of the stoutest Youth, which are so valiant as to venture with her, hunts through all the corners of the House after the Devil; whom when she hath found, as she cries out, she drives away, assisted by the young Men, making a most terrible noise. Having thus driven him a considerable way to the Bank of a River, or some running Water, or to the Woods if there be no Water near, than she takes the Pot with Masakhaw, and first drinking a good Soope out of it, throwing the remainder Pot and all after the Devil, and says these words, Take that, and return not to the Patient from whom I expelled you. This done, she plants a Cane in the Ground, of which (as they report) the Devil stands in great fear.  
When the Fiend (as she saith) approaches her, she strikes very fiercely at him, and shows some Hair hid about her for that purpose to the People, which she makes them believe (and they credit) that she hath broke the Devil's Head, and pulled those Locks from it; and for this her trouble she receives a Red Stripped Garment, and so departs: But if the Distemper still continues, and that there is no sign of amendment, they send again for the Priestess, who coming thither, saith, That the Devil loves the House, and therein intends to dwell; Whereupon, being desired to drive him from thence, and also her Reward showed her, she takes a Spade, Digs a Hole in several places of the House, and pulls out some more Hair which she hath hid, crying aloud to all the standers by, that she hath had the Devil by the Head, and that that is his Hair; then seeming to force him out of the House, with many scurrilous Exclamations.  
After all endeavours used in vain, and that their Stiches and Pains no way abate, than they commit them to their gods; but when they are ready to yield up the Ghost, they pour so much strong Liquor down their Throats, that running out at their Mouth and Nostrils, it drowns and suffocates: Thus having fetched the last Gasp, all those that are about him cry out with a lamentable voice, making strange Gesticulations, clapping, and stamping with their Hands and Feet; and to give notice that one is dead in the Town, they go up and 
Mourning for the Dead.  down Tabering upon one of their Drums; which done, and the Corpse washed in warm Water, his best Clothes are put on, adorned with Bracelets and other Ornaments, his Weapons laid by him, and Rice and Masakhaw proffered to him, all which lie two days by the Body; which if they should not do, his Soul (they say) would be angry: Likewise they kill a Hog for his Provision, to supply his long Journey, and then they offer the Corpse up to their gods: Before the House they set up a long Cane, with a Pennon on the top, and near it a great Tub with Water, for the Soul to bath in: Against the Evening, all the Friends come thither, accompanied with most of the Townsmen, every one with a Pot of Masakhaw; the nearest of Kin to the Deceased, lay themselves down by the Corpse, and making a mournful complaint, utter these words; Why didst thou die? why didst thou leave us? What hurt, what harm have we done thee? O my Son, my loving Child come hither to us, and stay with us; If you will not, take us to yourself, since we are ready to die and follow you; What shall we do without you? what do we do here after you?  
To increase their sorrow, the Women make a very doleful noise, by trampling and tabering with their Feet on a hollow Trough before the Door, at which the standers by cry, Hark, how the Trees bemoan the loss of this Man. This stamping on the Trough, is by them called Smaghdakdaken: They also hire several Women which sit constantly crying by the Corpse, and sometimes make sad Complaints, and Sing mournful Elegies which they name Temulidid▪ These Women likewise pray to the gods, that the Soul may have a good place in Heaven, and find a new Wife and Friends there: The young Men, in the mean time running up and down with Rattles in their Hands.  
After the Corpse hath lain two days on Rushes, they bring it to a place called Takay, where they wash it several times with warm Water; but if a rich Person, with Masakhaw, then scrape it so long, till pieces of Flesh and Skin hang▪ dangling about it. Lastly, they make a gentle fire nine days under the Corpse▪ which Roasting by degrees, occasions a horrible stench.  
The Body thus Broiled is wound up in a Mat, and laid again on the Rushes as before; then they make a great Feast called Gahalhal, killing ten or twelve Swine, some for offerings to the gods, others for Taghimihe, or Provisions for the departed Souls Journey.  
Some of this Pork is cut in small pieces, and served about to the Mourners; at that time the House is filled with Men and Women, every one with a Pot of Masakhaw, all which sometimes Weep, and sometimes Drink, till they are all Maudlin-Drunk; they mix a strange complaint with horrid confusion: Then the nearest Relations go again to the Corpse, and make the forementioned complaints, why he died, etc. If it be the body of a rich Person, it is kept some years before it is Buried, and served every day as if living, setting fresh Meat and Drink before it.  
If the Deceased died a Bachelor, than they relate all the Heroic Exploits which he performed in his Life time, and the number of his slain Enemies; over his Head they hang a Cane, with as many Notches in it as he hath killed Men. Lastly, they carry the Dead to the common Burying-place, close by their Temples, where some must watch nine or ten days, for they certainly believe that the Devil watches about him all that time; after the ten days expired, their Friends go thither with Rattles, and Boughs of Pisang Trees, with fire in their Hands, making a terrible noise, under pretence to hunt the Devil from thence. The Wife to the Deceased (if he leaves one behind him) Prays before him so long as he lies in the House, desiring the gods, that they would be kind and merciful to him. And while the Corpse is above the Ground, the House may not be swept, but when the Corpse is carried out, and the House swept, the Woman that did it must throw away the Broom towards the South, saying, Who owes the House? whereupon answering herself, It doth not belong to me nor us, what then have we to do with this House?  
These People observe seven Solemn times as Festivals with great Ceremonies: 
Seven Feasts.   
The first called Trepaupoe Lakkang, which begins at the latter end of April, 
First.  and is kept by the Sea side, whither both Young and Old, Rich and Poor, flock in great multitudes: Here their Priestess pretends to speak with, and receive Answers from their gods, offering them Swines-flesh, Rice, Masakhaw, and Pisang, with Prayers to send them store of Rain for the forwarding the growth of their Corn, or if it be already grown, to keep it from hurtful Winds.  
After their Sacrifices ended, they sit down about the same place, and fall a Drinking to excess; while the ancient men standing on a row every one with a whole Reed in one hand, and a Lance in the other, sprinkle them with Masakhaw. In their Huts they discourse of all their Villainies committed, or brag who hath slain the most of their Enemies, and brought home their Heads as Trophies; but he that hath done the most work in Harvest, is accounted the bravest Fellow.  
The second Feast called Warabo Lang Varolbo, that is, Tying Fast, they generally 
Second Feast.  hold in june, against which they observe their Dreams, and Singing of the Birds.  
At the day of Offering they rise very early, and make themselves ready for the Work, both Men and Women, with great Zeal; the Women first Consecrate the Irons with which they Weed; the Basket in which they carry their Caps, likewise the calabashes, Rings, Bracelets, Chests, the Front of the House and Bridge; Praying also to the gods Tamagisangak, and Tekaroepada for good Fortune, and security against Fire, and to be their Defence against Poisonous and Voracious Beasts; all which they do before they go out.  
The Men Pray to the gods Topoliap and Takavoelie, and offer them Masakhaw, boiled Rice, Pinang, Siri, and Swine's flesh, begging of them in time of War, to defend them against their Enemies, to sharpen their Swords, Arrows, and Assagays; and lastly, to harden their Bodies against their Adversaries, Darts, and Arrows.  
Then both Men and Women, but most of the Female Sex go to their Priestess called Ibis, to whom they show great Reverence and Obedience; some years ago there was a certain Ibis called Tiladam Tuaka, which was used to perform many abominable Ceremonies at this Feast, viz. She climbed on the Roof of the Temple, where she stood in sight of all the People, than began to tell them, that the gods would have taken her to them from the Temple; which done, she called for the Drink-Offerings, and holding a great Pot with Liquor in both Hands, said, That the gods, unless she did so, would not drink; then being drunk, she pulled off all her Clothes, Because the Children of God, said she, cannot enter into Heaven with any Earthly Robes. Thus standing in sight of all People, she began to evacuate what she had so greedily swallowed, saying, That the gods, according to the quantity of her Vomit, would send them Rain; whereupon the People force upon her more Liquor, that they may have plenty of Rain: If the Priestess chances to Urine thorough the Roof of the Church, than the Spectators promise to themselves a fruitful year, but if not, great scarcity, so that they often drink the more to satisfy the People; then bidding the whole Congregation look up, she Tabors on her private parts a considerable time, which Taboring the Spectators observe with as much Zeal, as in our Country the Auditors give ear to the Preaching of a Sermon.  
Lastly, coming down, she falls flat on the ground, and begins to roar and foam, rolling too and again, and spreading her Hands and Feet, then lies still a while, as in a Trance; her associates come to lift her up, but seem to have met with too weighty a burden; yet at last recovering, after she hath made a small Speech to the People, her Companions lead her into the Temple, where she drinks herself dead Drunk; all which impudent debaucheries, as they say, are done to the honour of their gods, to grant them store of Rain, and a plentiful Harvest.  
All the Women must appear naked at this Feast, except their Privacies, which they cover with a Kagpay, that is, a little piece of Cloth; so also must the Men: When they have drunk out all their Liquor at the Temple, the Congregation goes home, where they Drink till the Morning, and walk from house to house, committing all manner of Villainies, not fearing to lie with, or vitiate their Sisters and Daughters.  
The third Feast called Sickariariang, they keep in june; the manner thus: 
Third Feast.   
After every one hath done their Private Devotions in their Houses, and as they say, spoke with the gods, they make themselves ready to go to the general place of Sacrifice near the Sea. The Men walk stark naked, but the Women have a small Clout before them. At their general Assembly, the Priestess offers to the gods, of whom they now request, that they may be strengthened against their Enemies; and the Women, that the Corn be preserved from Tempests and Wild Beasts.  
Amongst all other, this is the most Celebrated, because it is as one of Bacchus and Venus' Feasts; so that it differs much and exceeds the rest, in perpetrating unheard of Abominations, both night and day: The young Men are commanded by the Magistrates of the Town, to go naked to this Feast, and to exercise themselves with Running, and Martial Discipline, which they willingly perform.  
The fourth named Lingout, begins in Harvest, and kept also on the Sea shore, 
Fourth Feast.  near the mouth of a River: Hither also both Men and Women going naked, pray to the gods for Rain, to keep the Corn in the Ears, to banish Storms and Tempests, which very frequently rise in that Month. Great villainies are committed at this Feast. The Youths are stuck and hung with green Boughs and Garlands, and so adorned, must run Races with Rattles in their Hands; he that gets first to the River wins the Wager, and by the Maidens is conducted and carried over, where he enjoys the handsomest of them at his pleasure.  
The fifth Feast called Piniang, is kept in October, at which time the Magistrates 
Fifth Feast.  have a piece of Wood cut in the fashion of a Tortoise-shell, tied to their Bodies, whereupon in the Night, with their whole Congregation, they walk Drumming and Shouting up and down the Town. At this Feast they come all clothed to their place of Offering, to run about with the artificial Shell, which is first performed by those whose Parents are yet living, then by those that are Orphans. This Feast is no less polluted by vicious performances than the other.  
The sixth they name Itaoungang: At this Feastival the old and young Men appear 
Sixth Feast.  in peculiar Habits, and have a pretty way of moving their Hands and Feet, Capering, and hitting their Feet one against another, and likewise act several Postures with their Hands; besides many other Ceremonies, too long here to relate. This continues two days, meeting both Morning and Evening, at the sound of the artificial Tortoise-shell; after they have performed their several Offerings to their Deities, they fall a Drinking, in which they spend the whole Night.  
The seventh Feast called Korouloutaen, is kept in November with great Solemnity. 
Seventh Feast.  At the time of this Feast they adorn their Arms and Heads with white Feathers.  
The Formosans (except those by the Hollanders converted to Christianity) believe not in God, the Creator of Heaven and Earth, but Worship thirteen Idols.  
The first and chiefest is called Tamagisangak, and resides in the West part of Heaven.  
The other his Wife, Takaroepada, and dwells over against him in the East: both these are by them accounted for their powerfullest gods, and reverenced with great Devotion; for if any War lay desolate their Cities, or Sickness and Famine oppress the People, they say all proceeds from the neglect of their duty in worshipping these gods.  
The third God called Tamagisangak reigns in the South, and shapes handsome People, as the fourth his heavenly Consort Teckarupada, in the East gives growth to Corn and Field-Fruits; they say, these Deities have the ordering of Man's Life, wherefore the Women present them with Seeds and Plants: They believe likewise that Thunder is the Goddess Teckarupadas voice, chiding at her Husband for not sending Rain timely upon the Earth, and he always, when thus rattled up by his thundering Wife, delays not to send Rain in abundance.  
The fifth God called Tugittellaegh, and his Queen Tagisikel the sixth, have the cure of the Sick, and are worshipped by them.  
The seventh Deity being Tiwarakahoeloe, and the eighth Tamakakamak, are chiefly reverenced by such as frequent the Woods and Forest, to hunt and kill wild Beasts.  
The ninth called Tapaliat, and the other Tatawoeli, govern all Martial Affairs, and are for the most part invoked by Soldiers.  
The eleventh named Takarye, and the twelfth Tamakading, preside their annual Feasts, and punish the omission of their long settled Customs.  
The thirteenth Farikhe, they say resides in the North, they esteem him a cross-grained and ill natured God, whose business is to deform what ever nature makes Comely, and therefore only worship him that he may not mis-shape them.  
The Natives relate, that this last God was formerly a Man living in Sinkam, very fierce, and of a stern Countenance, with an exceeding long Nose, which caused the People so to mock at him, that growing impatient to bear such indignities any longer, he desired of the Gods to take him amongst them, which was immediately granted; that after some stay there, he descended again, and gave his Countrymen twenty seven Articles or Commandments, charging to observe them strictly, threatening, that if they neglected, he would send upon them many and great Plagues. These Commandments they keep ten days together every Month, beginning when the Moon enters Aries, which time is by them called Karichang▪ of which Laws more hereafter.  
The Formosans are very slothful, and Till but little, although they possess much fruitful and rich Land. None dare be so bold to Sow his Ground, before he hath offered two Hogs at Tamacuwalo and Tamabal, chief Houses belonging to the third and fourth Gods, Teckarupada, and Tamagisangak; and this Oblation is required by one of the Priests belonging to the same Houses. In like manner, the Oldest of the Village, when it Rains, bring a Hog, and abundance of Masakhaw to the Priests that dwell in those two Houses, to be offered to their Gods.  
If at their going to Sow their Fields, they chance to meet a wild Beast, and kill it, they carry the Liver and Heart as a Victim, to their Gods in the two Houses; and when all the People are assembled, the Priests of the two Houses must first Sow a small spot of Ground, and then all the rest may proceed, having first laid between two Bundles of Straw, by them called Tenguro, a Pisang Leaf, a little Siri and Lime, to be offered to their Gods.  
The Seed being put into the Ground, a Rice Pot, in their Language called Sangi, is placed on the North side of the two Houses, and left there till the Rice hath attained its full growth.  
If the Corn near the Pots (for close by them they Sow a little) grows well, they take them away with great joy, and freely believe, that they shall have a kindly and plentiful Harvest.  
They are not permitted to take Tobacco in the Seedtime, lest (as their Priestesses tell them) all their Seed should turn into that stinking Vapour. The are forbidden in that time to throw the Bones of Salt Fish, or Peels of Onions on the Ground; but must carry them in a Talangack, or Pot, into the Woods, to prevent the devouring of their Corn by Poisonous Serpents.  
They must keep no Fire, lest the Corn should be burnt. Sugarcanes or Pomegranates they may eat only in the Evening; but they may not during that Season taste any Roast-meat, for fear the Corn should be set on Fire by wild Swine; nor any Mahall, that is, Powdered Flesh, lest it should be devoured by Worms: They must also abstain from Kanging and a Hay, both Fishes, because they believe, if they should eat of them, that the Corn would have no Ears.  
They conceit, That if they should sleep in the Field during their Seedtime, their Corn would not grow upright, but lodge on the Ground; and if they drink any Water, except mixed with Masakhaw, that the Grain would never ripen, but be green and watery.  
If the Dust or Sand happen to light in ones Eyes, he may not endeavour to get it out by rubbing, or otherwise, till he has quit the Field they have sown.  
They never cut their Corn before they have made Offerings to their Gods.  
If a Thorn chances to get in any one's Foot, he must not pull it out in the Field, but must leave the Place.  
No Woman may turn her back Parts to a Man, nor go naked.  
Many more ridiculous Customs they use during the Seedtime, which are strictly observed by them; as, when the Corn is ready to be cut, they thresh one Bundle, and laying a Lump of Earth upon it, implore the Gods to fill and make weighty the Ears of all the rest.  
After they have brought in the Corn to their particular Houses, they offer a Swine, and use many Ceremonies in the kill of it; amongst others, they lay a great piece of Clay on a large black Pot, which they firmly believe makes their Corn grow more full and weighty.  
Their Hunting, which is never less than twelve days together, is performed 
Hunting.  sometimes by few, and at other times with many People, who for the most part use Snares and Canes, and also Assagays, Bows, and Arrows. When they have appointed a great Match, they build a House in the Fields, which they call Cadelang, wherein they hang all their Implements.  
And as they have their third and fourth Gods that look over their Tillage, so their seventh and eighth, named Tawarakakoeloe, and Tamakakamak, bear the sway in Hunting. Before they go out, they tell to one another the Dreams they had in the Preceding Night, and also neglect not Augurial Observations; insomuch that if the Bird Aydak meet them, they count it a good Omen; but if it flies either on the right or left side of them, they put off their Venating Sport till some other time.  
Others also go to a River side, where they make a peculiar kind of Sacrifice to their Gods, with these Words, If the Devil, or any other Evil Spirits follow us, we beseech that you would drive and banish them from us.  
From the first Quarry of every sort of Wild Creatures, they take a snip from the Tail, Mouth, Heart, and Kidneys, which with a Pisang Leaf, scalded Rice, and Masakhaw, they present to their Deities.  
Coming back from their Recreation, they return thanks to the Gods, in the House which they built to put their Arms, and Hunting-necessaries in, praying, That those which come after them may have no success, nor kill any thing.  
Lastly, They pull down and burn the House, having first sent for the Women to carry home the taken Venison, who coming thither, bring abundance of cheering Tope to make merry with.  
They often kill at one of these great Hunting-Matches, eight hundred, a thousand, nay, sometimes two thousand Head of Deer; so that the Netherlanders could buy there the best and fattest Haunch of Venison for a Shilling.  
All the Formosans much differ from one another in their Speech, so that you 
Language.  shall seldom find two or three Villages, though but three or four Leagues distant from one another, but their Dialects vary so much, that they are forced to use Interpreters.  
They have neither Letters, Writings, nor Books, neither were willing to learn, although both the Spaniards and Hollanders have offered to teach and instruct them.  
The Islands Formosa and Tayowan lay very convenient for the Netherlanders Chinese Trade, because at most Seasons of the Year they could sail to them from the Coast of China, out of the River Chinch, or Chinchieu.  
The chiefest Merchandise which the Hollanders got at Formosa, consisted in Sugar, Goats and Deers Skins, which they transported thence to japan.  
The Companies Merchandise was carried in Chinese Jonks to the River Chinchieu, and the City Eymuy, to their Factors or Merchants residing there, and also to other peculiar Chinese▪ Merchants, whose Credit was good, to send them such Returns as were desired at japan, India, and the Netherlands, which Trade was connived at by the Koabon of the Territory Fokien. There also came some peculiar Merchants out of China, with their own Vessels, to dispose of their private Merchandise, though of small concern: Therefore when the time approached, that the Ships were to go Annually to japan or Batavia, and that the Goods came but slowly from China, they were necessitated to go themselves with two or three Vessels to China or Eymuy, where the Goods were brought, weighed, and received aboard in several Parcels, and were forced to give eight or ten Tail more on a Picol of Silk, than▪ otherwise; each Tail valued at about five Shillings Sterling, and a Picol, a hundred twenty five Pound weight.  
The Formosans observe a Time, which they call Karichang, very strictly, abstaining from several things while it lasteth.  
This Karichang comes every Month once, which is when the Moon (as we mentioned before) enters our Vernal Sign Aries. It was, they say, first constituted by one that lived in Sinkan, called Fariche Fikrigo Gon-go-Sey, being of a very stern Countenance, with a long Nose, for which, mocked and derided by all his Acquaintance: He therefore tired with their continual gybes and jeering, having still one fling or other at his Nose, desired the Gods that they would please to take him from this wicked World, and place him in Heaven; which being, as they say, granted, after some time he descended again on the Earth, where he commanded the People, as a punishment for their former derision, strictly to observe the following twenty seven Commandments, which if omitted, he threatened them with severe Punishments.  

I. Thou shalt not in the time of Karichang build either Houses, Walls, or Resting-places, by them called Taekops; nor any Hedges or Fences in the Field.  
II. Thou shalt neither buy nor sell Skins, Salt, Gangans, Painted Clothes, nor any thing else of that kind.  
III. No Married-men shall sleep with their Wives in the time of Karichang, neither shall a Young Man espouse, nor bring his Householdstuff or Goods to his Bride, nor enjoy her, lest he die soon after, have a lingering Sickness, or live at debate.  
IV. Thou shalt not manure new Lands, nor lay Straw or Grass upon them, nor sow any Seed upon them, lest all thy Labours, and what thou hast done, be destroyed.  
V. Thou shalt not make Bows, Arrows, Shields, Swords, Assagays, or Snares; neither shalt thou catch any Beast. If any Woman make Bracelets, they shall have great Pains in their Arms.  
VI Thou shalt not put on any new Garment, nor use any new thing whatsoever, lest thou lose that, and suffer also a great Sickness.  
VII. Thou shalt make no Bridges, lest they fall, or be broken down, and thy Swine die.  
VIII. No Clothes, Gangans, Rice, Rice-Stampers, Black Pots with two Ears, nor any other Drinking Vessels, shall be brought into the Houses: None shall cut green, but only dry Canes; and those they may not put into their own Houses, but into one of their Neighbours.  
IX. Thou shalt not plant Pinang, nor Clapper-Trees, nor Canes, nor Potatoes, nor any other Plant.  
X. Thou shalt kindle no Fires on thy new Place of Assembly, which is called Kavo, nor sleep in them, lest thou be punished with great Sickness.  
XI. No young Men shall exercise themselves in running the Race called Tragaduwell.  
XII. No Child born in that time shall be taken from his Mother; lest it die immediately.  
XIII. Let no Man wear any Armlets called Salahim, lest their Arms should grow sore.  
XIV. Thou shalt not kill any Swine, though one of thy chiefest Friends come to visit thee, unless at Obits.  
XV. Thou shalt not Fish or Hunt for more than thy own Provision.  
XVI. Thou shalt not put any Swine in the new Houses made before the Karichang, if there were none in before.  
XVII. Thou shalt not name the Child that is born in that time, till the Karichang be over, lest the Child die:  
XVIII. Nor shall the Mother stir with her Infant from the Childbed Chamber, further than the next Neighbours.  
XIX. A new Tamatawa, or General, shall not march into the Field till the Karichang is over.  
XX. A Bridegroom shall not walk with his Bride, except he hath gone abroad with her before, lest some dangerous Sickness ensue.  
XXI. No Parent shall knock out their Daughters two upper Teeth before (as it is customary with them) nor bore Holes in their Ears during the Karichang.  
XXII. No Man that never travelled before, shall then begin his Journey.  
XXIII. No Maid shall taber with her Feet on a Funeral-Trough, if she never Danced before.  
XXIV. Young Children, called Taliglig, shall wear no Armlets, lest some hurt should befall them.  
XXV. None shall go in Pilgrimage, called Zapuliung, to the City Mattou, in this time, except they have been there before.  
XXVI. Thou shalt not receive into thy House any Chinese, or other stranger; but carry them to thy Neighbours. And if thou make any Contracts or Alliance, thou shalt do it with a Straw in thy Hands over a Chost, saying, Shall I gain by this, or not? If I speak angrily, will he be patient? Which said, thou shalt pay the Gods the usual Offering.  
XXVII. Thou mayst not make any Mariche t'had Kaddelangang, either in thy 
A kind of their Meat or Drink.  Towns, Houses, Fields, or at thy Hunting, nor no Vagacang, in the time of Karichang.   
ANno 1652. the seventh of September, the Chineses of Tayowan and Formosa being then under the Hollanders obedience, depending on the great numbers of their People, broke out into Rebellion, led by Fayet, a Ruler of Smeerdorp, lying two Leagues from Sakam, with a design to surprise or force the Castle of Tayowan, which thus they contrived, viz. To invite the Governor Nicholas Verburgh, with all the Officers and chiefest of the Merchants residing in the City Zelandia, to their Fullmoon Feast, resolving when they were in the midst of all their Mirth, to dispatch them in a general Massacre.  
This done, they intended to march to the Castle, under pretence to bring the Governor home, and upon the opening of the Castle-Gate, to press in upon them, and so Master it.  
But one Pau, a Chinese Commander, who dwelled in Zelandia, and Brother to Fayet, the Chief Leader of the Conspirators, disputing with his Brother the probability of carrying on the Plot, said, The Design is good, very good, and may be brought to effect; but if we should fail, and the Plot be discovered, and these Devils the Hollanders get the better, what will become of us then? You shall not suffer only, and the Party that you have engaged; but thousands of Innocents', that knew nothing, shall scarce satiate their Revenge with their miserable Slaughter. To which their General Fayet replied, Brother, if you are not satisfied, and your Fear overcome your judgement, you are at your Liberty to dispose of yourself; be Neuter, go to your Habitation, and which way soever the Victory falls, there you may in safety, and unsuspected, enjoy your Freedom.  
Pau having received this Reply, departed, musing as he went, but at last resolved to discover the Plot, and make himself secure indeed. Coming therefore to Tayowan, near the Castle, he desired the Sergeant to admit him to speak privately with the Governor; but the negligent, left Pau waiting with a slight Answer, the Governor and the rest being then at Prayers: But he more importunate, and big with so great a Business, by earnest soliciting was let in to the Governor, to whom he discovered all: At which Verburgh the Governor being startled, first commanded to secure Pau in the Castle, and sent an Officer with eight Men to Smeerdorp, as Spies, and to inquire News; who brought word back, that the Chineses were already gotten into a Head, and that setting upon them, they had escaped by flight. At this Alarm, the Hollanders that had settled in Sakam, being to the number of thirty, in great fear fled for safety to the Forts.  
Fayet, who judged Delays dangerous, and doubting that his Brother would, or had discovered the Plot, marched with his Forces to Sakam, where falling without mercy upon the Town with Fire and Sword, he gave no Quarter to any.  
A Gardener belonging to the Dutch, going on that Sunday Morning early with a Basket of Fruit to the Governor, in the Castle Tayowan, the Revolters overtaking him, cut off his Head, and taking out the Fruits, laid it in the Basket, designing to have sent it before them; but the Humour altering, they cast both it and the Body under a Bridge. The News of this Massacre spreading a strange Fear seized all the Hollanders, wherever settled through the Country, so that dispersing, they hid themselves wherever their Fear carried, or their Hopes led them, to escape the Slaughter. But one Captain Marine, well mounted, with three more, with their Swords in their Hands, broke through the Enemy, and killing the first that opposed him, came safe to Tayowan.  
Verburgh the Governor well knowing how untowardly the Business stood, and the hazard wherein the Hollanders abroad were, lying open to destruction, immediately sent out a hundred and twenty Men, commanded by Captain Danker. This Handful, in comparison of their Enemies great Forces, went in one Sloop and a Boat from Tayowan to Sakam, whither being come, the first that endeavoured to Land, being Captain Hans Pieters, leaped Breast-high into the Water, by which Example, the rest encouraged, forsook their Boats, and resolved wading to fight their way to the Shore; which the Enemy observing, sent down with the Lieutenant-General a thousand Men, to oppose their Landing. While they were thus drawing up towards the Shore for the Service, Fayet the General gave his Lieutenant Loukegwa new Orders, thinking it more fit to suffer them to Land, saying, It would be a higher pleasure to him to see the Christian Dogs die on the Land, than in the Water, which would be much the better sport, having them there environed with his Army, as in a Net. But Loukegwa not so persuaded, nor willing to receive these new Commands, earnestly advised the General that he might go on, and set upon them in the Water, averring, That these being the Hollanders choicest and picked Men, if they did not cut them off at this Advantage, they should never have the like: But however the General's Opinion prevailing, he obeyed, and retreating, gave the opportunity of Landing in safety; where a little towards the left Hand of the Enemy, he drew up his small Party into a Body, when a Negro that had married a Hollander, coming out of a Wood where she had hid, running for her safety towards them, they intercepting, ripped up her Bowels, and cutting the Child in pieces, threw the Limbs at them, vaporing aloud, That so they would serve them all. But the Hollanders not replying, marched boldly up to the Front of the Enemy, where in the first Charge killing fortunately their Prime Commander Fayet, which presently noised through the Army, all struck with a Panic fear, threw down their Arms, and disbanding, fled, shifting for themselves; but the Hollanders pursued, firing at their Heels through Sakam, and the Town cleared, they sat down in their Enemy's Headquarters: But before Night, while yet they were triumphing for the Victory, came two thousand Christian Formosans, raised by the Governor Verburgh, to their Aid, who, according to present Orders, marched together in pursuit of the Enemy, some few of whom the next morning they spied drawn together upon a rising Ground, but a River betwixt impeded their present Charge; but soon after the Formosans, who knew the Fords and Avenues, got over, and charging them smartly, one being slain, they were suddenly dissipated; which Victory they and the Netherlanders pursued, making Execution till Sunset, from whence returning to their Camp weary and hungry, they found store of fresh Provisions, boiled and roast, with which they feasting, were refreshed.  
This Tumultuary Commotion was in fourteen days thus concluded, in 
The Rebellion ended.  which, of the Enemy were slain four thousand Men, besides as many more Women and Children, and not one Hollander so much as wounded.  
Two Years after this War, Anno 1645. in May, came abundance of Locusts 
A Plague of Locusts.  out of the North-West of the Isles, which devouring all the Fruits of the Field, occasioned so great a Famine, that eight thousand Persons died of Hunger. These Locusts were of a strange shape, having a Back and Breast like a Pikeman, and an Helmet on their Heads, such as Soldiers wear. They made an affrighting noise with their Wings in their flight, as if it had blown a Storm.  
They flew from the Island Tayowan to Formosa, where they stayed three Months, and at last took their Progress from thence, towards the North-West, from whence they came at first, on Sunday the ninth of August about Sunset: Yet though they were gone, the fear of that Plague was no ways abated; for they left young ones behind, which were far worse than the old▪ eating up all that remained; yet by the Industry of the Inhabitants, with the Governor's Order, most part of them being not fledged, were taken and destroyed.   

The Island TAYOWAN.  
THe Island Taywan, or as others call it Tayovan, and Tayowan, lieth South from Formosa, the uttermost North-Point being distant almost a League, but the Southermost Point within a Bowe-shot of the Land, over which at low Water they wade to and again; but between the North and Formosa, it is at least thirteen Foot deep at Low Water.  
It spreads Southeast and North-West, and hath two Leagues and a half in 
Tayowan very barren, yet populous.  length, and a quarter of a League in breadth, being naturally a spot of barren Sand, rather than a fertile Isle, producing only Pine-apples, and other wild Trees; yet here resided above ten thousand Chinese, who lived by Merchandise, besides Natives.  
On the North-side, upon a Sand-hill, stands the Fort Zelandia, built by the 
Fort Zelandia.  Hollanders, Anno 1632. surounded with a double Wall, one investing the other, whereof the outermost fortified with Sconces and Redoubts.  
Under the Castle, Westward, lies another Fort, square, guarded by two Points of the Sea.  
A Bowe-shot distant lies a strong Out-work, being the Key to the Castle 
Castle of Utrecht.  called Utrecht, raised sixteen Foot high with Stone, and defended with seven Pallisadoes: Eastward from which stands a Town, built also by the Netherlanders, called by the name of the Isle, and about a Mile in Circumference; adjoining to which, is a Haven, called by the Chinese, Loakhau, and by the Dutch, The straits of Tayowan. On the other side of the Castle lies a rising Sand, called Baxemboy, where a few scattered Villages appear.  
Since the Chinese possessed Tayowan, under the Pirate Coxinga, and his Son Sepoan's Jurisdiction, they made a new Gate to the Castle, between the Amsterdam and Guelderland Points; and near the new Point, a Moat of a Fathom wide, Walled in on both sides, and joining to the Wall strengthened with Iron Rails, through which the Water and Fish passing, rendezvouz in the Castle, before the Governor's House, in a Pond, on which a Banqueting-house being built, which the old Koxin oft frequented, taking his Pleasure in Fishing there.  
Anno 1664. according to the Information of the Netherlanders, which then lay with a Fleet before Tayowan, under Command of the Admiral Balthasar Bort, sent thither to obtain the netherlands Prisoners from the Enemy, and likewise to conclude a Peace with him, the Castle was every where well fortified with Guns, and the Breast-works strengthened with new Canes, besides the Platform before the Haven, which was planted with twenty four Pieces of Cannon. In the Castle dwell only the old Koxins Wives, with a Guard of Soldiers.  
On the other side, in the Main of Formosa, stand the Fort and Village of Sakkam, well planted with Cannon: The Village near it was enlarged with Houses to the number of five hundred; but not all of Stone. The way towards the South was also more built and inhabited than formerly; but they could see but twenty four small Vessels, which were most 
a A sort of small Vessels.  Koyaes', that lay within the Haven, under the Forts.  
Most of the Inhabitants of Tayowan are at present Outlawed Chineses, which 
Inhabitants.  first rebelled against their Native Emperor, and since will not acknowledge the Tartar; who taking both Tayowan and Formosa, Anno 1661. from the Hollander, brought all under the Subjection of their General Coxinga.  
The Chineses on both these Isles, and those that live in China, differ only in the wearing of their Hair long, and braided, after the old Chinese manner; which following the Tartars, they now wear short in China.  
And as the Formosans have several Gods which they worship, so have likewise the Chineses inhabiting these Islands: Our Author, David Wright▪ reckons seventy two in the following Discourse.  
They acknowledge one Almighty God, Governor of Heaven, Earth, Sea, Sun, Moon, and Stars, whom they call Tie, and look upon him as the Supreme and first Deity. They make Offerings to this great God, yet but once a year, at which time they sacrifice a Wild Boar, burning alive with Sandalwood; for to offer this their Almighty any thing but Swine's Flesh, they account Abomination.  
The next whom they worship is called Tien Sho, and joch Koung Shang Tee, who is the second Person or Governor of Heaven; wherefore he is named Tien Sho, that is, The second Person of Heaven; and joch Koung Shang Tee, that is, Governor of the Earth. He commands three ministerial Spirits more: The first is Hevoung, that is, The Ruler of Rain.  
The second Aerial Spirit, Teoung, hath Power over all Living Creatures, whether Rational, Sensitive, or Vegetative.  
The third Spirit, and eighth Deity, called Tsuy Zyen Tei Oung, that is, Commander of the Sea, and of all that is therein, or upon.  
The third Person in Heaven the Chineses call jok Tie, who was formerly a Prince on Earth, but so righteous, that he was taken up to Heaven for his Piety and Justice.  
The fourth God they style Quanoung, who also was formerly a Prince; and likewise the fifth, whom they call jamoung; but both of them were afterwards for their meritorious Actions taken up to Heaven.  
To these five Gods, being as Chief in the Government of Heaven, belongs the three forementioned ministering aerial Spirits, and are indeed, though Deities themselves, subservient to the first five, making up eight Gods.  
Besides these eight Gods, there are twenty eight Councillors, or Ministers of State, which have formerly been Learned Philosophers, and now preferred to the Government of the Stars.  
Moreover, the Chineses have many Demigods, or terrestrial Deities, which ascend every year to Heaven, there to intercede and gain Indulgence for the sins committed by Mankind all the year past.  
The first of these is rather a Nymph, or Demy-goddess, and being the thirty seventh, goes by the Name of Potsou, and is represented in the shape of a Woman with a Child in her Arms, and was, as the Chineses believe, a King's Daughter, a great Prophetess, and a Virgin that bore a Child and not impregnated: which Fatherless Child they named Bachu; who coming to years of perfection, was also a great Exemplar of Prudence and Magnanimity; yet not so much looked upon, or worshipped as the Mother. They make her also to have a Servant called Pausat, a very ancient Man.  
There are some Traditions amongst them, that this Heroine is not a Native of China, but born in a foreign Country: Others again conjecture, that she is the same with the Virgin Mary, and the old Man, her reputed Servant, is indeed her Husband joseph; but the vicissitudes of affairs and time have left us nothing of the truth of this fabulous Tradition.  
The thirty eighth terrestrial Numen they instile Quanien; but Paulus Venetus▪ Quamina; and johannes Gonsales, Quianira, who said that she was the Daughter of the Chinese Emperor Tzonton, which built the Wall between China and Tartary. But this Opinion David Wright explodes, making her the Daughter of the Emperor Biou Tsongong, which Reigned many years before the first Emperor Quantekong, presently after the Deluge, which he thus endeavours to prove.  
This Biou Tsongong (says he) had three Daughters, two of which he had bestowed on Husbands, but the third, Quanien, he could not prevail with to enter into that Estate, although her Father had selected for her a Companion worthy her Love and Esteem: but seeing her no ways inclined to it, he resolved to put her into a Cloister; where to humble her, he commanded the Overseers to put her to do the Drudgery of the House, viz. fetch in Water and Wood, and make it clean. But the Swans, as the Chronicles of China relate, came from the Mountains, and the Angels from Heaven to help her to carry Water, and the Beasts out of the Forests brought Wood for her. Her Father informed thereof, judging she did those things by Magic, was very much enraged, and commanded the Cloister to be set on fire. The Daughter observing that she only was the occasion thereof, thought to make herself away. But the Heavens pitying her innocency, commanded Hevong the God of Rain, to send down such an impetuous Shower as might quench the Fire, now beginning to rage in the Cloister as bad as her Father in his frantic fury, which was accordingly performed. Nevertheless Quanien fled to the Mountains, where she continued a great while. Her Father in the interim by Divine Providence was struck with Leprosy, and almost devoured alive by Worms, no Physicians or Medicines being able to cure him: Of which his Daughter having at last some knowledge, touched with a natural affection, and feeling as it were in herself her Father's misery, came and cured him; which so wrought upon the old Man, that through an excess of joy converting his rage into a contrary passion, he would have worshipped her; but she refusing such honour, bade him return thanks to Heaven and the Gods; which he ceased not to do, after that becoming a zealous Penitent. Not long after Biou Tsongong died, and Quanien betook herself to Lamhay, a Place in China, where she spent the remainder of her Life in great Piety. After her Death they built a stately Temple in honour of her, and Interred her Corpse in the middle, which remains at this day (as the Chineses believe) as fresh and sound, as if it had been buried but a day. Every year the Priests go thither to celebrate the Anniversary of her Death, in the sixth Moon, on the eighteenth day, with Sports and Feasting, which hath won so much esteem, that the Chineses implore her help and assistance in all Tribulations.  
The thirty ninth Goddess is called Nioma, or as others will have it, Matzou; she was born in the City Kotzo, in the Territory of Houkong, where her Father was Viceroy. This Nioma resolving also to live and die a Virgin, to that end went to dwell in the Island Piscadores, or Fishers-Isle, otherwise by the Inhabitants called Pehoe, lying to the Northward, twelve Leagues distant from Formosa, where she spent her Life in a Pious and most Religious manner. Her Image not long after was set up in the Temple with two Servants, one on the right, and another on the left-side, each of them holding a Fan in their Hands, which covered the Goddesses Head. She hath also (as they say) Spirits under her command, and is highly honoured amongst the Chinese for so great and powerful a Deity, that all the Emperors at their Inaugurations must not omit to pay their Devotions in the Temple of this Nioma. Her greatest Festival is on the three and twentieth day of the third Moon; when the Priests repair from all Places of the Empire to her Tomb, because she knows (as they believe) when any Strangers shall address themselves to that Country, and whether their intentions be good or evil; nay more, will give certain Responses to any that consult her, in what affair soever; so that they are so persuaded and superstitious concerning her admonishments, that they think all is lost if she advise not thereunto. The original of her Adoration sprung hence (as the Chinese Records have it;) One Campo, a Chinese Admiral, going out with an Armado to Engage with a foreign Enemy, being driven by contrary Winds, was necessitated to anchor under the Lee of this Isle: but afterwards the Storm ceasing, and the Wind and Wether growing fair, the Fleet weighed, and hoising Sail, set forward; but all the Seamen with their conjoined strength could not get up his Anchor; which while they wondered at, this Goddess appeared to the Admiral; whom imploring, she advised to take her aboard: for the People against whom he had Commission to Fight were great Magicians, practising the Black Art, and could raise or lay Spirits at their pleasure, but she was able to frustrate their diabolical practices. Thus persuaded, the Admiral with great reverence took her into his Ship, and coming to the Shore where they intended to Land, these Masters of occult Sciences used their skill as Nioma had foretold; but she baffled them in their own Arts, and so made their powerfullest Charms of no effect: wherefore the King that trusted to his Necromancers, being necessitated to Engage with the Chinese, was by her direction and assistance, contrary to his confidence, utterly defeated and brought under subjection. The Admiral, though sensible of the wonderful Service which she had done by her power, desired that she would do something in his presence that he might relate, having so many eye-witnesses, to the Emperor. And having accidentally a withered Cane in his Hand, Nioma took it, and upon his Request immediately made it grow and blossom, and to yield a sweet smell: Which signal Prodigy the Admiral fixed on his Stern, and coming to the Emperor, related to him all his Adventures: whereupon he in honour and commemoration of her favours, commanded that they should worship her as a Goddess through the whole Empire. Since which every Ship bears her Image in the Stern, and the Seamen are strangely devoted to her.  
The fortieth God called Sikjaa, born in the Kingdom Tantaico, opposite to the West of China, they held for the first inventor of that Religion which the Chineses observe to this day. He always went bare headed, neither eating Flesh, Fish, or other Creature that had life▪ and lived single. This Sikjaa Drawn or Carved to the life, stands upon the Altars in their Temples, and on the rightside at the entrance of the Door. Over against him, and in some Temples round about him, stand long Tables; at which the Priests sit reading and muttering to themselves Prayers to Sikjaa, to receive them into Heaven. Two Priests watch day and night before his Altar, often bowing to the Ground, and lifting up their Heads equally together, whilst their Tabors and Pipes, consorted with other Wind-Instruments, makes no unpleasing harmony. In their Diet the Priests follow the strict Life of Sikjaa, eating nothing but Rice, Grapes and Herbs: they live some in the Wildernesses like Hermits; others frequent the Temples abroad, and spend their time for a small gratuity in making Offerings in people's Houses, having no allowance either from the Emperor, or Charity of the People: They never pair their Nails, some of them growing six, eight, ten, and twelve Inches long, which the Chineses count a great Ornament. The Doctrine of this Sikjaa is at large declared in the following Description of China.  
The one and fortieth God is called Ang-jaa, and is carried from House to House on the eleventh day of the third Moon on an Altar by six Priests, whereof three go before and three behind; before him stands a Perfuming-pot with burning Incense, and other Aromaticks. The Mendicant Priests stop at every House, and never leave Singing and Praying, tinkling two small Basins one against another, till the Master of the House comes and brings them some Money in a piece of Paper, as an Offering to this God.  
This Ang-jaa is not Clothed like the other Gods, but quite naked, having only a Cloth about his Middle, which reaches down to his Heels, and over his Shoulders a Scarf: his Hair, Beard, Mustachoes, and Face, differ much from the other Chinese Numen, the Hair of his Face more resembling an European than an Asiatic; concerning which dissimilitude the Chineses themselves are altogether silent.  
The two and fortieth Deity called Tontekong, is represented in the shape of an ancient Man with a white Beard, and said to be a great abhorrer of Gaming and Adultery, which by all means possible he sought to extinguish; wherefore the Chineses have placed him in Heaven, and also invoke him daily to defend them from Thiefs.  
The three and fortieth God, named Teiton, a valiant Hero, represented with a drawn Sword in his lefthand; whose Services in redeeming the Empire, like to be lost by the Invasion of the Enemy, have listed him in special rank amongst the number of their Gods.  
The four and fortieth Schercong next takes place, adored for the invention of Tragedies and Comedies, and other Interludes Acted on the Stage.  
The five and fortieth God, named Amkong, hath obtained the like honour merely for his great Merits and Virtues.  
The six and fortieth Tswajong, was in his life-time a mighty Man, of a Gigantic Stature: his Club, which he could flourish with one Hand, weighed ninety two pounds, so that for his strength and valour he was very famous in China, and therefore worshipped as a God.  
The seven and fortieth Hangoe, another Giant, whose Helmet weighed one hundred twenty five pound, whose strength and valour made him living, a Viceroy, and after death, a Deity.  
The eight and fortieth Hanzing, with whom none could stand in competition either for Prudence or Science (except Quantecong and Sodejong) who performed with a few Men greater Acts by his subtle Stratagems, and politic Conduct, than others with vast Armies, and therefore the Chineses worship and hold him for a God.  
The nine and fortieth Sodejong, a wise and politic Prince, yet meek and loving to his Subjects, looked upon as superior in his Character to Hanzing, but much inferior to Quantecong.  
The fiftieth Sjengoesoeng, also a very strong Giant, and much reputed for serving his Country against the common Enemy.  
The one and fiftieth Goumatzintzing, signifies Pastor Gregis, The Shepherd of the People, and a Servant to God. He had (if you will believe the Chinese) five Eyes, two in the right places, and two above them, and the fifth in the middle of his Forehead, like the Cinque upon a die; two of these were always sawake, or open, whilst the other three were shut, for which they implore him as their Watch in Heaven.  
The two and fiftieth Soumanoaom, had four Eyes, two in his Neck, and two in his Forehead: when those two in his Forehead closing slept, the other two kept open watchful; wherefore he being General, was never defeated, whom for his never-sleeping Care and Conduct they worship as a God.  
The three and fiftieth Zjenzucung, a Lord of small Stature, wearing short Hair, but of an acute Wit and profound Understanding, and abominator of Gaming and Drink.  
The four and fiftieth Quantecong, though by johannes Gonsales and others called Vitie; whom the Chineses honoured more than any of their Gods, being reckoned the first Emperor in China: for Valour, Subtlety, and Science, unparalleled, and not to be matched: such was his wonderful and Gigantic Stature, being as they fable, twelve Foot and eight Inches high, and his Shoulders four Foot broad; his Sword weighed ninety two pound, which he used with one Hand. In the beginning of his Reign he possessed only one Province, but by his Conquests and Achievements became Master of the fifteen which now make the Empire. He established many Laws and Ordinances, especially one against Idleness. He first invented Clothing, and Dying of Stuffs, which they use to this day, for before they went naked like the Indians. He also modelled and invented Ships, made Saw-Mills, Gunpowder, and Guns, and improved Architecture. Some Buildings and Edifices are yet to be seen, whereof, as they say, he was the Contriver. He made a Law, That all Mechanics should continue their Parents Trades from Generation to Generation. He erected Cities, Towns, and Villages, and commanded the People to inhabit them. And as their Chronicles relate, this Quantecong with his own Hand slew in one Battle three thousand, some say four thousand Men. He had a Negro for his Squire, or Armor-bearer, who was no less valiant than himself, for he accompanied him in all dangers whatsoever, and was called Tzicutzong; he performed great Exploits in his Master's Service, by conquering many People and several Country's: but besides Quantecong had another Servant, a White, called Quanpiong, yet no Martialist.  
In every City is also a Temple erected to the honour of Quantecong, in which stands his Image: On one side of him stands his black Squire, with a Sword by his Side, and a large Knife, like a Mower's Scythe; four Paces from him on the other Side his white Page Quanpiong. Nor was he invocated only by his Countrymen, but also by the Tungkins their Enemies: for as soon as any War broke out, they set a Guard before his Temple that none might hurt him; for they believe he would punish their neglect with the loss of their Army. Nay farther they say, That mounting his red Horse Angbea (for he only used a red Steed, there being none of that kind else in China) he Rid against their Enemies, and destroyed their whole Army, in revenge of the damage done to his Temple.  
The six and fiftieth Kongsou, is held for the first inventor of Printing, which the Chineses have used eight hundred years and upwards, insomuch that they say the Christians learned that art from them; because at that time they Traded with Christian Merchants.  
This Kongsou stands on a Throne, environed with People of several Nations, every one holding a Book; of all which the Germans stand nearest to him, because they (according to the testimony of the Chinese) have greater Judgement, and Print better than any other Nation.  
The seven and fiftieth Tegoe, that is, Transitory Bull.  
The eight and fiftieth they nominate Kjenke, that is, Crow, or Chicken-Thief. A strange fancy and belief possesses the Chinese about these their two Deities: for, say they, when Tegoe hath the Earth on his Shoulders, than Kjenke comes from Heaven and pecks Tegoe on his Body; whereby necessitated to shake himself, the Earth trembles and shakes with him: and as soon as any such trepidation begins, they fall a laughing, saying, Now is Tegoe pecked by Kjenke.  
Father Martinius, in his Chinese History saith, That the Soil of China is very 
Lib. 9 pag. 389.  little subject to Earthquakes: yet the Chronicles of that Country mention, That the Year before the Birth of our Saviour 73. happened such a great Earthquake, that several Mountains were swallowed up: from whence the Chineses, a People much inclined to Superstition, prognosticated the destruction of their Empire, such things, say they, proceeding from an angry and threatening Heaven.  
The nine and fiftieth Luikong, or The God of Thunder, for Lui is Thunder, and Kong a Governor. They represent him with a Head like a Crane, Feet and Hands like an Eagles Claws, and large Wings, wherewith he seems to fly through the Clouds. When this Luikong (say they) intends to Thunder, he stands between four Clouds, with a Drum on every one, on which he beats continually with two great Iron Pestles: And when any one is struck by a Thunderbolt, they say that Luikong is much enraged against that Person, and therefore struck him with the foremention'd Pestles: so that they are very fearful of him, and when it Thunders creep on their Hands and Feet under Benches and Tables.  
The sixtieth is the Ruler of Lightning, and represented by the Chinese with a Straw Wisp in her Hand, which when it Lightens she spreads abroad.  
The sixty first Kieugkong, the God of Rainbows: the Chineses nickname him Omho, that is, Mischievous, because at his appearance he spoils all their Fruits of the Field; so that they honour him only because he should come but seldom.  
The sixty second Pankun, according to the Chronicles of China, finished and completed the World; for they say that the World when God Created it was without shape or form, but was by Pankun brought to its full perfection in four years' time. They represent him with many Iron Instruments, such as the Stone-cutters use. He was the first that invented the Art of Stone-cutting, and therefore is the peculiar God of Bricklayers, Stone-cutters, and Potters.  
The sixty third Houngkong, rules Winds and Spirits, and is figured like a great Bird with huge long Legs and Feathers, sticking up like Hog's Bristles. The Chineses say, that the fluttering of his Wings occasion great Winds, Storms and Tempests: therefore Fishers, Seamen, Gardeners, and other People that fear too much Wind, adore him.  
The sixty fourth Khuotquan, in his life-time was a Viceroy in China, and the first that made Salt, which he accounted the richest and best Commodity in the World. Another Viceroy having at the same time found out Sugar, esteemed that above Salt: upon this they fell at variance; but both sides appealing to the Emperor, he commanded a Proof to be brought him of each sort, and having tasted both, he preferred the Sugar, as being more pleasant. But Khuotquan contradicted this sentence, saying, That there never was a thing of greater value than Salt, which gave a relish and savoury taste to all things. The Emperor angry at Khuotquans petulancy, commanded him to go out of his Presence: who thereupon much discontented, went instantly and drowned himself in the River Melo, which flows by the City Siangin, in the Territory of Huquang; but highly advanced him that made the Sugar. The next day (saith Wright) after which Khuotquan was drowned, being the fifth Day of the fifth Moon, in the Morning (as the Chinese Chronicles affirm) there began an extraordinary great Rain, which without cessation continued twelve Months, wherefore for want of dry Wether no Salt could be made, by which means a third part of the People died, and some that lay just upon the point of Death, having but one Corn of Salt put into their Mouths presently recovered: The Emperor informed of this Calamity by his Substitute Governors, commanded him that had made the Sugar to be killed, and that none should dare to make any more mention of him, that thereby his Name might be forgotten: whereupon the Rain immediately ceasing, the Emperor sent strict Edicts through all his Dominions, that they should worship the forementioned Khuotquan as a God. On the day of his decease, which is kept with great solemnity, and called Tuonu, the Houses are hung round with Garlands of Roses, Palm-Boughs, and the Ships adorned in like manner; and every Chinese wears a green Sprig on his Head: neither do they any Work in five days, all which time they hold his Festival. The second day they represent Wayangs, or stageplays. On the third they go with hundreds of curious Gilt and Carved Boats, hung with all manner of green Boughs, Flowers and the like, and full of People up and down the River, seeming to look for the Corpse of Khuotquan; coming to the Place where they say they find Khuotquan, they lift up their Oars, and take hold of their Flags and Pendants, and then beating on their Drums, cry with a loud voice, We have found him. This Ceremony, which is observed in all Places and Rivers in China, continues three days one after another.  
This Khuotquan died about three thousand years since, and being taken up two days after his Decease, was kept ten years Embalmed before he was Buried.  
The sixty fifth Schante, was in his life-time a valiant Man, and a great pitier of the Poor, to whom he was very charitable.  
The sixty sixth Naon, was an Assistant to the God Tegoe before mentioned: he is represented with a Ball on his Foot; for (as they fable) when Tegoe groweth weary with carrying so great a burden as the World, than this Naon helps him to support it with his Foot: wherefore they place this Naon in Heaven, and worship him, because when displeased he should not let the World fall by taking away his Foot.  
The sixty seventh Atzion, was Conceived after a strange manner by his Mother Lintion, who walking in the Field, and casting her Eyes up toward Heaven, espied a Lion's Head in the Clouds; by which Vision she Conceived with this Atzion, without knowing Man: for which his wonderful Conception he is by the Chinese honoured for a God.  
The sixty eighth Alsa, taught the People first to Boil and Roast their Meat: for before his time the Chineses did eat both Flesh and Fish raw. He instructed them also to build Huts of Wood for a defence against wild Beasts; and to make Clothes to cover their nakedness.  
The sixty ninth Huntzuihoykong, they say first invented Fire, and taught them to Buy and to Sell.  
The seventieth Otzoe, was Conceived after as strange a manner as the beforementioned Atzion; for his Mother Hautzibon going to the Garden for an Onion, she saw some Footsteps of a Man that had been there before her, in one of which she put hers, to try how much bigger it was than her own; which she had no sooner done, but a great Light encompassing her, she immediately Conceived this Otzoe, who was the first that established Matrimony amongst the Chinese, and invented Musical Instruments.  
The seventy first Ezolon, the first Finder of Medicines and the Virtue of Herbs; had great knowledge in Astronomy, Soothsaying, and Magic; instructed Men in Agriculture by the use of the Plough and Spade, and all sorts of Ploughing Tools.  
The seventy second Skadingkon, was the first, as they say, that taught them the use of Arms, and Martial Discipline.  
Besides these five Governors of Heaven, three Spirits, eight and twenty Councillors, and thirty six earthly Deities, in all seventy two, the Chinese, according to the forementioned Wright, have three Cacadaemons, or evil Spirits.  
The first is called Tytsoequi, that is, Prince of Devils, for Tytsoe signifies Prince, and Qui the Devil: and as their Stories would make out, he was first an Angel in Heaven, but the supreme God observing the wickedness of Mankind on Earth, he called Tytsoequi to him, saying, I have seen the wickedness of Men on Earth, and their hearts are inclined to evil; wherefore none of them shall come to me in Heaven: Therefore do you descend; I have prepared a Place for you, and an everlasting Prison of torments for them. I elect you as our Substitute to Govern Hell; take them to you and punish them; they shall stay with you for ever, and never come near me.  
The Chineses are of opinion, and believe, that this Prince of Devils knows all future things, and that he sends out his Spirits to fetch vicious People to Hell, where he torments them for ever; therefore they worship him that they may not be tortured.  
They also firmly believe, That the Souls of the Wicked return again on Earth to plague and terrify those alive, which, they say, appear to them in several Visions.  
On the fifteenth day of the seventh Moon they present him a well dressed Swine whole, and likewise Hens, Ducks, Pinang, and Cakes of fine Meal, Keekieuw, that is, Arak, or Brandy, and Sugarcanes. The Hog they lay down on his two foremost Knees, with his Head on his fore-feets opposite to the Image Tytsoequi; and use afterwards so many extraordinary Ceremonies at this Offering, that beginning early in the Morning, it continues above an hour after Sunset.  
Several Gilded pieces of Paper, made like a Boat are also burnt in honour to him; and they are very zealous in their Prayers to this Tytsoequi.  
In Hell, they say, he is served like a King, having two Councillors and twelve Spirits, which wear mighty Knives, and wait upon him continually like Halberdiers, to receive and execute his Commands; besides several other Spirits which serve him as Gentlemen.  
The second, or Viceroy of Hell, they call jamkoen, who Commands with great Authority, wherefore they worship and fear him.  
The third jamtouwi.  
The Chineses also observe a certain day in the Year, on which they Offer to all the happy departed Souls, calling it Chinkbinch, and is kept Annually on the third day of the third Moon the Year after Leap-year, but in the Year before Leap-year on the twentieth day of the same Moon. Thus far David Wright.  
In Valour and Warlike Policy the Chineses of Tayowan and Formosa far exceed those on the Main Land, most of them at all times wearing Skeans by their sides, except when at Meat in their own Houses.  
They use no Knives, Forks, or Spoons to eat withal, but take it up with two small Sticks made of Ivory or Ebony-Wood, Tipped at the ends with Silver or Gold.  
Women of mean Capacity maintain themselves with Spinning and Twisting of raw Silk, which is brought thither from the Territory of Chickinny.  
The Women eat not constantly with their Husbands at Meals; and when heretofore the Men found no Women according to their minds on the Islands, they sent for them out of China, and bartered for them as other Commodities.  
Lastly, it is requisite in this place to give a short account how Coxinga and his Associates, Anno 1661. took both these Islands from the netherlands East-India Company; but first we will show his Extract, strange Rise, with the Ruin of his Father, who was called Chunchilung, and by Foreigners Iquon, or Ikoan and Equan: a Man of mean Descent, born in a small Village on the Seashore, in the Territory Fokien, near the City Annay, his Father very poor, and as some say, a Tailor by Trade: He first Served the Portuguese in the City Makao, and afterwards the Hollanders on the Island Formosa; where soon after he became a great Merchant by the japan Trade, and at last a Pirate. Having from this small beginning gotten a great Fleet of Ships, and obtained by his politic Designs and grand Undertake, to so great Treasure, that the Chinese Emperor was not able to stand in competition with him; for he only of all the Chinese engrossed the Commodities of all India in his own hands, driving therewith a vast Trade with the Portuguese at Makao; with the Spaniards on the Philippine Islands; and with the Hollanders at Formosa and Batavia; and likewise with the japanners; besides other Oriental Kingdoms and Islands. He only Transported the Chinese Commodities by his own People, bringing back the Indian and European in Returns for them; so that he began to grow so exceedingly rich, that he could fit out a Fleet of three thousand Sail.  
Yet this Chinchilung, or Iquon, not contenting himself herewith, began to Plot how to be Emperor of China; but well knowing that he could never effect it, so long as any of the Imperial Tamingian Family was in being, which at that time held the Royal Seat, therefore he made choice of a time to extirpate that Family, which was Anno 1644. when the Tartars overran the whole Empire, except three Provinces, being Folnien, otherwise called Chincheo, Quantung, and Quangsi; and the more closely to hide his Design, he pretended to take up Arms against the Tartars, as Enemies to the Chinese, and defend that Empire with all his Forces. And without doubt under this Disguise he would have been taken for the Redeemer and Protector of that Crown, had he not held Correspondence with the Tartars, to whom he gave what Intelligence he thought good for his advantage. At the same time when the Tartars fell into the Country of Fokien, Iquon was declared General by the Emperor Lungun, of all his Forces; the Officers also were either his Brothers or Friends, so that being able to do what he listed, he permitted the Tartars to come into the Empire; for which they gave him the Title of King, making him King of Pingnan, which is in the Southern part of China, and sent him many great Gifts, the more easily to delude him: and though perhaps not ignorant of his Design, but fearing his formidable Power, they durst not use any rigorous course against him, but rather Treated him very honourably with Presents, high Entertainments, and large Promises of the Government over the Territories of Fokien and Quantung; so that he thought easily to get an absolute Command over the Southern Countries. But when the Tartar intended to return to the Imperial City Peking, and all his Vice-Roys according to custom came to attend and accompany him some part of the Way; Iquon also not suspecting any danger, came to show his Respects in like manner, and went with a few, having left his Fleet in the Haven before the City of Focheu: but now being ready to depart, having performed his Compliments, and desiring leave to return, the Tartar Prince requested him to go with him to Peking to the Emperor, where he promised him the highest Preferments: and although Iquon sought with many Arguments to put off this Journey; yet was he at last forced to go; so that by this Stratagem he was taken, which could not be by force of Arms, or any Device whatsoever. Coming to Peking he was put close Prisoner, not only under a strict Guard, but the Door of the Place wherein he was kept, made up with Stone, and himself loaded with Fetters about his Neck and Feet; and if any new Troubles happened by his Son Coxinga, and the News thereof brought to the Court at Peking, as it did Anno 1657. (at which time the Netherlanders were there in an Embassy) they laid fifteen Chains more upon him. His Son Coxinga and Brothers informed of his Imprisonment, betook themselves again to the Fleet, and made all the Seas near China by their Piracies almost useless.  
Upon this account Coxinga with his Associates, and a crew of Rebel Chineses, kept the Tartars on the Coast of China in continual Alarms, and had his chiefest Residence on the Islands Ay, Quemuy, and others lying under the Continent of China. The Chineses themselves on the Main Coast, who had submitted, and in token thereof shaved off their Hair, conformed to the Tartars, brought them all sorts of Provisions, and drove also a private Trade with them. The Tartars at last, to stop all Provisions from going to the Enemy, commanded all the Villages, Towns and Hamlets that stood along the Seashore, or the Main Continent, to be burnt to the Ground, and the Country laid waste, and no People suffered on pain of death to live within three Leagues of the Sea. By this means, and likewise by the great Losses which Coxinga sustained from the Tartars, assisted by the Netherlanders, who set upon them both at Sea and Land, he found himself so straightened, that Anno 1660. he Sailed with all his Forces to Tayowan and Formosa, both which Islands, and also the Castle Zelandia; he took in March, Anno 1661. after a Siege of ten Months. Very cruelly were several of the Netherlanders dealt withal, especially the Ministers Anthony Hantbroel, Aren Vincenius, Leonard Campen, Peter Muts and others, and at last put to death: others against Agreement kept in Prison, without hopes of attaining their Liberty, notwithstanding the great trouble the Hollanders took upon them to procure their enlargement. Therefore in revenge of Coxingas Cruelties, and also to regain the conquered Places, a Fleet was sent out the next year after, under the Command of the aforementioned Admiral Balthasar Bort, and Vice-Admiral john van Campen, with the Ambassador Constantine Noble, with Letters from his Excellency john Maetzuiker, to Singlamong, Viceroy of the Territory Fokien, and the General Taisang Lipovi for the same purpose, and also to request liberty for a free Trade.  
Since the Letter to the Viceroy Singlamong in brief contains the Reasons and Intentions for sending out the Fleet to the Coast of China, and the dispatching of an Ambassador thither, and may also serve for a small declaration of our following Discourse, I judge it no way amiss to set it down beforehand, being to this effect:  
This Letter comes from John Maetzuiker, chief Governor, and the Council for the netherlands State in the Countries of India, to Singlamong, Viceroy, or Governor for the Mighty Emperor of Tartary and China: of the Territory Fokien, whom the God of Heaven grant long Life, and Prosperity on Earth. Great and Powerful Sir,  
THe Letter sent some time since from Your Highness to our Governor of Tayowan he hath received in due time, and also not been negligent to Answer according to Request, and with all speed sent five Men of War with some Soldiers, to the Bay of Engeling, that according to Your Highness' noble Proposal and Request they might, bidding defiance to Coxinga, fall upon him. But We were so unhappy, that as soon as the Ships set Sail from Tayowan, they were surprised by a mighty Storm, which separated them one from another, so that some of them came back to Batavia, and others were forced to return again to Tayowan, which is the only Reason that We could not perform Our good Intentions according to Your Highness' Pleasure. Since which time Coxinga hath joined all his Forces together to Master our Castle in Tayowan, having Besieged it ten Months, raised great Batteries against it on all sides, and so straitened the Besieged with his Army, that the Governor and his Council concluded to deliver him the Fort; which We have resented very ill of our People, because, as We suppose, they have not as they ought to have done, manfully resisted the Enemy; which as an Example to terrify others, We will not pass by unpunished. Yet since We have suffered so great a Loss and Damage, and chiefly for that against his Promise he hath most cruelly Murdered several Unarmed Christians on the Island Formosa; God who is a hater of such Villainies, and a righteous Judge, commands Us to take Revenge for our sustained Wrongs; so that we are resolved with all our Forces to prosecute this Tyrant, and not leave, till by force of Arms We have brought him to nought. And since we are informed, that Your Highness also intends and endeavours the like Ruin towards him; so at once to free the Empire of China from the Oppression which it hath suffered so many years by his Means: Therefore We think it now the most proper time to obtain as well Your Highness', as our own Desires: to which end, according to Your Highness' own Proposal, We are inclined to join all Our Land and Sea-Forces with Your Highness' Militia, against which We suppose Coxinga will not be able to subsist long. And to show that We really intent it, We have sent from hence under the Command of Our Admiral Balthasar Bort to the Bay of Hossien, the number of twelve well prepared Men of War, which, considering their strength and fit posture for defence, may justly be termed Floating Castles, and will be able to make Coxinga quit the Sea, which will not a little trouble and disable him: of which We hope Your Highness shall in a short time see the Event. We therefore fortify Ourselves, (hoping that Your Highness will do the like) that We may enter into a firm League with the Empire of China, with Promises faithfully to assist one another against Coxinga, and to hold him for our mortal Enemy, and with all Endeavours, if it be possible, bring him and all his Party to utter Ruin, so to make him taste the sharpness of Our Revenge for his committed Villainies. But since at present, having lost Tayowan, We have no convenient Harbours to preserve Our Ships in stormy Wether, Our humble Request is, That your Highness would please to do us that favour, as far as your Commands reach along the Seacoasts, to Permit and Order us a place wherein our Ships, if they should chance to be necessitated, may come to an Anchor, and that they may be kindly received, and our People entertained as Friends, and buy Provisions and other Necessaries for Money.  
China and Batavia (as your Highness very well knows) lie a great distance one from another, therefore it is very necessary and requisite, that we had a convenient place of Rendezvouz near Coxingas Channel, there to keep our Ships together, and watch for his Jonks; so that we desire of your Highness, that you would be pleased to direct us to such a place, and to give us leave likewise to Fortify the same against Coxingas Assaults; for we do assure your Highness, if this cannot be granted us, it is altogether impossible for us to do the Enemy that damage which may be expected: Therefore if we intent to manage this War with Prudence, we must be there to wait on our business continually, or else we shall not be able to clear the Sea of Coxingas Ships.  
And as the driving of Trade makes all Nations and People flourish, and we are used from Antiquity to promote the same, for the benefit of the public good, we thought fit to make our inclination known to your Highness, that we heartily desire to furnish the Emperor of China with our Commodities, which formerly the same Coxinga hath prevented by his wicked Practices; therefore to perfect all our good Undertake, we desire that we may be permitted to come into the Empire of China, and have Passes from the great Cham, which we entreat your Highness to procure for us, not doubting, but they may easily be attained; because when two years ago the Emperor was Complemented by two of our Ambassadors with Presents, he in part promised it to us; which your Highness having at that time the Command over Canton, and conversing much with our People, may perhaps remember.  
We send to your Highness with this Letter our peculiar Friend Captain Constantine Noble, humbly to Compliment your Honour; and at large declare our Intentions, with Request, that your Highness would favourably be pleased to hear him, and speedily to dispatch him: We also promise, that whatever your Highness agrees with him about, we will approve of, and stand engaged to: And for a Present, we here send to your Highness these under-written Commodities, desiring your Highness to accept them in good Friendship.  

One Piece of 

Scarlet  
Green Cloth.  
Black Cloth.  
Blue Cloth.    
One Piece of 

Red Crown Serge.  
Grass Green Crown Serge.  
Blue Crown Serge.  
Musk Color Crown Serge.  
Black Crown Serge.    
A handsome Musket, Guilded and Varnished.  
A firelock or Snaphance, adorned like the first.  
One pair of Pistols and Holsters, likewise well Varnished and Gilt.  
Twenty Ounces of Blood Red Coral, upon one String, in an hundred and one pieces.  
Sixteen Ounces and a half of Branch Coral, of the same Colour, in one Polished Branch.  
Three Pound and three Ounces of Amber, in four great pieces.  
One Pound and four Ounces of Amber Beads, in fifty five pieces.  
One great Bengael Alkatiff.  
Ten pieces of fine Moereisen, or white Linen.  
One Pikol of Cloves.  
Half a Case of Rose-Water.  
Two hundred and sixty Katty of Sandalwood, in three pieces.   
From the Castle of Batavia, june 21. 1662.  
john Maetzuiker.  
The Letter to the General Taisang Lipovi, was writ almost after the same manner, with the same Requests and Promises; viz. A League with the Empire of China, to help to ruin Coxinga, upon condition, that the Netherlanders should be free to enter any Haven, and take possession of a convenient place on the Coast of China; as may be seen in the same Letter in its proper place, where it is set down Verbatim. Hereupon the Grand Commissioners at Batavia, the General john Maetzuiker, and the Indian Council began to prepare and make ready several stout Men of War, storing with plenty of Ammunition, and Provisions, and Manning them also with Soldiers and Seamen.  
The whole Fleet that lay thus ready at Batavia for any Engagement, fitted 
Number of Guns, Seamen, and Soldiers.  out to retake the Island Tayowan and Formosa, consisted in twelve Sail, eight Frigates, viz. the Naerden, Zierikzee, Domburgh, Hogeland, Meliskerke, Overveen, the Sea-Dog, Ankeveen; and four Pinks, the Vink, Loenen, Breukelen, and Ter-Boede, every one well Armed with Guns and Ammunition, and Manned both with Soldiers and Seamen. The Naerden Commanded by the Admiral Balthasar Bort carried four Brass, and twenty eight Iron Guns, and an hundred and ninety Men, whereof an hundred and thirteen Soldiers, and eighty four Seamen. Zierikzee, Commanded by the Vice-Admiral john Van Campen, had also four Brass, and twenty eight Iron Guns, with an hundred ninety one Men, viz▪ eighty one Soldiers, and an hundred and ten Seamen. Domburg, Commanded by Captain Constantine Noble, and Captain Ysbraent Boumeester, had four Brass, and twenty one Iron Guns, an hundred forty seven Men, to wit, sixty two Soldiers, and eighty five Seamen. The Hogelande, Commanded by Harmen Symons, carried twenty four Iron Guns, and an hundred and six Men, twenty nine Soldiers, and seventy seven Seamen. The Meliskerke, Dirk Gerritsen Captain, had five Brass, and sixteen Iron Guns, an hundred and two Men, thirty six Soldiers, and sixty six Seamen. The Overveen, Commanded by Barent jochemz, carried one Brass, and twenty Iron Guns, an hundred and sixteen Men, thirty five Soldiers, and sixty one Seamen. The Sea-Dog, Commanded by john Hendrikson, had twenty four Iron Guns, an hundred twenty nine Men, fifty three Soldiers, and seventy six Seamen. The Ankeveen, john Ysbrandsen Van Bank Captain, with one Brass, and seventeen Iron Guns, had ninety three Men, twenty eight Soldiers, and forty five Seamen. The Vink, under Captain Dirik Valk, with two Brass, and eleven Iron Guns, had sixty eight Men, twenty five Soldiers, and forty three Seamen. The Loenen, Commanded by jacob Horse, with eleven Guns, had sixty six Men, that is, twenty six Soldiers, and forty Seamen. The Breukelen, Abraham Ben Commander, carried eight Iron Guns, and fifty eight Men, twenty five Soldiers, and twenty three Seamen. The Ter-Boede, Commanded by Auke Pieters, had two Brass, and eight Iron Guns, one and fifty Men, fifteen Soldiers, and thirty six Seamen. In all the Ships, were twenty three Brass, and an hundred and sixteen Iron Guns; five hundred twenty eight Seamen, and seven hundred fifty six Soldiers; in the whole, one thousand two hundred eighty four Men: With these twelve Ships of War, three Merchants, being the Leerdam, Singing-Bird, and Loosduinen, set Sail, richly Laden for japan, under the Command of Captain and Admiral Henry Van Indiik, having Command to keep company with the Fleet, so long as they did not go out from their Coast.  
The day on which they were to set Sail, the Admiral Bort, and Council of 
The Fleet divided into three Squadrons.  War, for certain reasons, divided the Fleet into three Squadrons, and every Squadron under one chief Commander, viz. The Zierikzee, Meliskerken, Hogelande, Ter Boede, with the Flyboat Leerdam, under the Command of the Vice-Admiral Campen. The Naerden, Overveen, Sea-Dog, and Vink, with the Singing-Bird Pink, under Captain Balthasar Bort▪ The Domburgh, Ankeveen, Breukelen, Loenen, with the Pinks Loosduinen, Commanded by Constantine Noble.  
When his Excellency, General john Maetzuiker, and the Council Charles Hertzing, and Ryklof Van Geuns, went aboard the Naerden Frigate, Commanded by the Admiral Balthasar Bort; and the Vice-Admiral, john Van Campen; and the Rear-Admiral, Constantine Noble, and there impower'd every one in their several Offices and Places, by taking their Oaths; and delivering them their Commissions and Orders the Fleet Weighed Anchor from Batavia, and on Saturday 
Weighs Anchor.  Morning, june the 29. Anno 1662. firing their Guns, set Sail, and Steered North-East, bending their Course directly towards China.  
About Noon, the Fleet being becalmed, cast Anchor on the North of the 
Island of Hoorn.  Island Van Hoorn, lying in sight of Batavia, near several other Isles, which bear the Names of divers Cities in Holland, as Amsterdam, Enkuizen, Medenbleck, and the like.  
All these Isles, though desolate and uninhabited, are Planted along the Shores, and up into the Inland, with several sorts of excellent Trees, which make a pleasant Prospect off at Sea, and stand in such order, as they had been the Workmanship of Art, and not the mere Dress of Nature.  
And likewise the Valleys, Plains and Hills upon them afford, divers sorts of Flowers, Herbs, and Drugs.  
Under these Islands the japanners and Chineses that dwelled on Batavia, used to fish, and catch abundance of Bream, Shepherds, and other sorts of Fishes, unknown in Europe.  
The Trees are loaden with all manner of Singing-Birds, whose Harmonies are so pleasing, that the Inhabitants of Batavia often go to this Island in Boats, to recreate themselves with their Music, as we to our Wood sides, to hear the Thrush and Nightingale.  
On the same day, the Council concluded to Sail first to the Islands Laver and Timon, lying in their way close by one another, that there they might supply themselves with fresh Water, all sorts of Provisions and Fuel, Anchor-stocks, Handspikes, and other Materials of Wood, which that place yields in abundance.  
In the first Watch of the Night, the Wind coming gently out of the South, they Weighed Anchor, and Steered their Course, though but slowly, towards the North-East.  
The twenty fifth, the Fleet Sailed in the depth of thirty one or thirty two Fathom, Tacking up and down, having the Wind against them out of the North-East, yet blowing gently.  
On Monday morning, being the twenty sixth, the Fleet came near Thousand-Islands, 
Thousand Islands.  having the Wind Easterly, and fair Wether, in twenty two and twenty three Fathom Wather, and hard Ground; and were at Noon in five Degrees and eighteen Minute's South Latitude, the Ground still the same, but the depth only fourteen or fifteen Fathom.  
The same day, the Admiral Balthasar Bort, and the Council of War made an Order, which the Commanders of every Ship in the Fleet in their Sailing were to observe as followeth.  

During the Voyage, or till such time as it is ordered otherwise, the good Ship Ter Boede (being under john Idze de Vinke) shall carry a Light on his Poop, and in the day time Sail before, because the Master of her is experienced in these Seas.  
Therefore all the Captains of Ships are expressly Commanded, continually to observe his motion, that when he Anchors, Sails, or Tacks, they do the like, so the better to keep the Fleet together, and prevent separation.  
None shall offer in the Nght to Sail by the same Vessel, much less alter his course on forfeiture of four Rixdollars for the Master, chief, or Under-Mates, in whose Watch soever this misdemeanour shall happen.  
If the Pilot thinks it fit to Tack in the Night, either for the Winds shrinking, or otherwise, he shall put Candles into two Lanterns on his Poop, and all the other Ships one, that thereby it may be known, whether they see the Sign or not.  
In the Night, the altering of the Course shall be left to the discretion of him that carries the Lantern.  
When they have Sea-room enough, they shall not Tack, for the Winds shrinking of one or two Points, for the prevention of all dangers, and keeping together.  
If he that carries the Light, thinks fit to Anchor in the Night, he shall set two Lights, one over another on his Stern, which sign being seen, the other Ships shall instantly come to an Anchor, and likewise set a Candle on their Sterns.  
When it is thought fit to set Sail again, he shall fire a Gun, and make a signal by another Light from the Poop; which the other Ships seeing, shall also put out a Light, and then Weigh Anchor.  
If it should happen that any Ship or Ships should by accident either prove leaky, run aground, strike upon a Rock, Land, or aught else, he shall unfurle a Pennon from his Foremast, and fire a Gun; whereupon, every one shall be obliged to come with his Boat and Pinnace, and assist the Vessel according to the utmost of their power, on forfeiture, as in the Council it shall be judged fit.  
If an accident shall happen by fire, they shall discharge two or three Guns presently one after another, that with Buckets and Pails the rest may come and help the Ship in distress.  
And that the Ships in dark or misty Wether may not straying loose each other, they shall sometimes speak to one another with their Guns, and as often reply. If the Lantern Ship judges it fitting to Tack, he shall fire a great Gun, which the rest hearing, shall answer him, and Tack together.  
If in a dark Night they are forced by stress of Wether, or an overgrown Sea to lie at Hull, or carry no Sail, the guide shall set forth two Light●… of one height, and the other Ships one apiece, the better to keep together.  
In a calm, with a rolling Sea, they shall take great care that the Ships do not fall foul one upon another, by endeavouring to keep as far distant as they can.  
When it grows light, and they from Sea descry Land, Sounding for Ground, they shall unfurle the Prince's Flag or Colours, and also fire a Gun; if in the Night they chance to discern Land, or Fathom Ground, he shall light two Candles by one another, and fire two Guns.  
If any Ships stray from the Fleet, and afterwards appear in sight, they shall hoiss up their foresail three times, and then let it down again; then fire a great Gun, and draw back the foresail, till probably the rest have seen it, and also furl up his Spritsail and Mizzen; after which signs he may come again to his company.  
If this should happen in the Night, they shall call to one another, by the word, Holla, Ship, if it be one of our Fleet, he shall answer, Victoria, which if he does not do, it is a certain sign that it is a strange Ship, and either a Chinesy Jonk or Vessel; and if it be possible, give notice of it to the Admiral, Vice- or Rear-Admiral, who ever of them be nearest, however, to keep within shot; and if it be an Enemy, to give notice to the rest, by the firing of Guns.  
He that descries any strange Ships, or Jonks by day, shall let his Colours fly from his Stern, and Veare his fore- Shete, and soon after hale it up; if by night, he shall light two Candles together, without making chase after it, before he hath spoke, and received order from the Admiral, except it be a Portugese, or Chinesy Vessel, which by that means might make his escape.  
In this exigent, though the Enemy be never so powerful, let him fall on, and if he can possible make himself master thereof; afterwards to do according to the Orders given in Martial Affairs.  
If any Frigates should be separated from the Fleet, either by Storm or other accidents, they shall according to an express Order from his Excellency the Lord General, and Lords of the Indian Council, come to the place of Meeting or Rendezvouz chosen by them, being Isla de Lemas, one of the most Eastern Islands of Makao, which lies in the way of our Voyage, and we may touch at without prejudice or loss of time; and also because his Excellency hath received information, that there is not only a good Haven, but fresh Water; so that the separated Ships are strictly Commanded, not to pass by the forementioned Island De Lemas, but put in to it, and there wait for the Fleets coming, that so they may proceed on together in their Voyage, and the more resolutely bid the Enemy defiance, if they should Rancounter.  
After leaving the Island De Lemas, and coming on the Coast of China, they shall first put in for the Bay of Engeling, or rather that of Hoksiu (they being the safest and convenientest Harbours in the Southern Bay or Mouson) and with the whole Fleet (except those bound for japan, which will part from us before) run into them, to inquire how the Affairs of War stand between the Tartar and Coxinga, and whether he be in China, or Formosa; therefore if in the way from Lemas to the Coast of China any Frigates should be separated from the Fleet, let them put in for the foremention'd Bays of Engeling, or Hoksiu, where they shall join with the Fleet again.  
When the white Flag shall be set up at the Admiral's Stern, and a Gun be fired from his Ship, than the General Council of War shall meet, consisting of these following Persons to consult with the Admiral, viz.  
Henry Indiik of the Ship Loosduinen, john Idze de Vink, or Van Campen▪ Vice-Admiral of the Fleet; but so long as Indiik is by the Fleet, the Finch shall carry the Flag as Rear-Admiral of Zierikzee.  
The Merchant Constantine Noble; who carries the Light before the Fleet, after Indiik hath taken leave, shall bear the Flag of Domburgh.  
Peter jansz Veldmuis, Captain of the Naerden: Ysbrand Bowmester, Captain of the Domburgh: Barent jochemsz, Captain of the Overveen: Harman Symonsz, Commander of the High-Land: john Hendriksz, Master of the Sea-Dog: Dirk Gerritz, Commander of the Meliskerke: john Ysbransz Van Bank, Captain of the Ankeven: Valk, Master of the Vink: Christopher Edwartsz, Secretary.  
If the Admiral le's fly his Red Flag from his Poop, than all the remaining Commanders of the Fleet, as Brukelen, Loenen, and Ter-Bode, shall also come aboard with the foremention'd persons; and likewise their chief Officers of War, as the Ensigns and Sergeants: But if the Admiral will have his Privy Council to come aboard, he shall put out his white Flag with a Bend from the Poop.  
The Privy Council shall consist in the following Persons: Henry Indiik, john Idze de Vink, Constantine Noble, Peter jansz, Veldmuis Commander of the Naerden, Ysbrand Bowmester Captain of the Domburgh.  
If the Admiral is desirous to speak with the Captain of the Loosduine, he shall let a Pennon flow from his Mizzen-Yard; if with the Zirikzee, a Pennon from the Fore-Yard; if with Domburgh, a Jack from the Sprissel-Yard.  
If any one be found to neglect these Orders, he shall be put in mind of it by the Secretary, and after examination of the cause, receive all due punishment.  
All these were made, and agreed on in the Naerden Frigate, Sailing about the Thousand Islands, the 26. of june, 1662.  
Balthazar Bort, john Idze de Vink.   
On Thursday morning, being the twenty seventh, the Fleet having the same Wether, found themselves to be in four Degrees and eighteen Minute's South-Latitude; and in the afternoon, beyond the Point of Boomy's Riff, 
Boomyes' Riff.  in nine and ten Fathom Gravelly Ground; in the Night, on fourteen and fifteen Fathom, the same Ground, they spied the Banks of the foresaid Riff at a pretty distance.  
On Wednesday Morning the twenty eighth, the Fleet (being in thirteen and fourteen Fathom Water, the Wind Easterly) saw the Island Lucipar, or Lukapar, 
Island Lukapar▪  lying to the South-West, about a League and a half from them. This Island lies near Sumatra, in the Mouth of the straits of Banka, and is fourteen Leagues in Circumference. It is uninhabited, yet Wooddy, and yields a pleasant Prospect with its high Trees towards the Sea; it is interlaced with many murmuring Streams, which abounding in Fish, and the Woods with Beasts, makes it a fit place for the Seamen to refresh in.  
In the afternoon, being in three Degrees, and seven Minutes, Lukapar lay three Leagues South Southeast from the Fleet; and having got the first Point of Sumatra on their Starboard, their Course being North-East and by East, they Sailed along the Coast of Sumatra in ten and thirteen Fathom Water.  
The twenty ninth about Noon, the Fleet Sailed by Poele Nancha, lying in the straits of Banka, thirty Leagues to the Inland, in two Degrees and twenty five Minutes Southern-Latitude, and were got within a small League from the third Point of Sumatra.  
Poele Nancha, that is, The Isle Nancha, (for Poele is Island, and Nancha the proper name of the place) and signifies Round Island, so called, being indeed almost Circular, and hath eight Leagues in Circumference, very barren, being only Sandy Ground, having on the Shore nothing but a few Turtles.  
In the Evening, about Sunset, they came up with the high Promontory Monapien, on the North of the Island Banka; and the Fore-Land of Sumatra lying West South-West, about a League from them.  
Banka, an Island about a League from Sumatra, is inhabited, fruitful, and 
Island Banka.  full of Woods.  
The thirteenth, being Friday, the Fleet was at Noon gotten into one Degree and twenty two Minutes South-Latitude; and had Poele Toutyon, that is, 
Poele Toutyon.  seven Islands, East and by North, four Leagues from them in sixteen and seventeen Fathom Water. These Isles, though they lie close by one another, yet are uninhabited.  
Close by Poele Toutyon, towards the East, lies the Isle of Linge, Inhabited on 
Island Linge.  the Shore by Fishers and Rustics; but in the Country by a People who came thither from the Mountain Passarvan, which is in jova; for these People oppressed by the King of Passarvan, with great Tributes and other Inconveniencies, fled for their better accommodation to several places; most of them being Licenced by the King of Bantam to have settled behind the City, on the Coast of Sunda, at the foot of the Mountain Gomon Bezoar, where they have built the City Sura, and several Villages, Electing a King of their own, which pays Tribute to the King of Bantam. Others have settled themselves on this Isle, and built Towns and Villages, which they enjoyed in Peace a long time, but submitted themselves at last, either out of kindness, or force, to the King of Sura.  
These People live peaceably and friendly, maintaining themselves with Husbandry or Tillage; and observe the old Pythagorean Doctrine, concerning the Transmigration of the Soul; therefore they neither kill nor eat any animated Creature.  
They go clothed in white Paper made of Trees, of which they tie only one piece about their Head, and another about their Middle, for decency.  
This Isle hath all manner of good Provisions, though not in very great plenty; but abundance of Birds, which are from thence Transported to China for a great Dainty.  
The first of july, about Noon, the Fleet finding itself in twenty five Minutes South-Latitude, spied the East Point of the Isle of Linge, North-West from them; and Poele Zay, South-West and by West, in eighteen and nineteen Fathom grey Sandy Ground, mixed with little Shells; their Course North and by East; the Wind at Southeast and by South.  
Poele Zay are several small Rocky Isles, and uninhabited, lying in a Train 
Poele Zay.  one by another.  
The second, being Sunday, the Fleet Sailed about Noon in fifty three Minutes Northern Latitude.  
In the afternoon the Pinks Loosduynen being seven Leagues to the Eastward of the Island Poele Panjang, ran on unknown Rocks, not specified in the Maps, to which the Vice-Admiral john Van Campen Rowing with his Boat, and some Tackle, giving speedy assistance, helped the Pink off from the Rocks without any Damage.  
On Monday, being the third, the Fleet proceeded on her Course North-North-East, full before the Wind, and reached about Noon in two Degrees and three Minutes Northern Latitude, and in sight of the Island Poele Tingi▪ which lay North-West from them. In the first Watch the Zierikzee and Ter-Boede Frigates came to an Anchor on the West side of Aura, in thirteen Fathom Water, and put each of them a Light in their Lanterns, for a Sign to those Ships that were behind.  
The fourth, being Tuesday, the Admiral with the Naerden Frigate, accompanied with the Overveen, Sea-dog, Singing-bird, High-land, and Vink, came to an Anchor in the same place; for the Domburg, and six more, took their Course to the Isle of Timon, according to Order when they set sail: Their Boats going ashore to fetch fresh Water and Wood, brought also many Baskets of Fish and Fruits, besides some Hens and Goats, which they either bought for Money, or bartered for.  
Next Morning, being the fifth, the Singing-bird, Sea-dog, and the Goldfinch weighed their Anchors, and sailed to Poele Pisang for fresh Provisions and Wood This Island is Populous, and full of Villages. All the Inhabitants observe strictly their Fishing and Tillage, being bred to such Drudgery from their Childhood. Here, as also on the Coast of the Kingdom of Sampan, and on the Island Lingen, a kind of Birds-nests are plentifully found 
Strange Birds-nests.  which at Feasts and Entertainments are looked upon as a great Regalia; nay, the Inhabitants on their New-year's Feast, which they keep with great Solemnity, commonly present one another with these Dainties, as an infallible sign of unfeigned Friendship. They are also transported, as a great Delicate, to China, and every Pound thereof sold for half a 
a That is, about two Spanish Ducats.  Tahers, they being a great Cordial, much relieving both the Stomach and Brain.  
A Bird like a Swallow, about the time of the year when they choose Mates, and fall to coupling, yields a kind of glutinous or slimy matter, which lying on the Rocks, is the first Material of these Nests, and by a daily additional Moisture, or Morning-dew, gathered on their Wings, and sprinkled on it, at last becomes both large and perfect, which when dry, resembles the Bowl of a Spoon, with high Edges, and are found here in such abundance, that they gather some Hundred weights of them yearly.  
When their Coupling time is past, and the Nests finished, which happens all at one time, they lay their Eggs, and Brood upon them; which Father Kircher thus describes.  
Between Cochinchina and the Island Hainan, lie in a long Ridge a Series both of great and lesser Rocks, to which in March flock abundance of strange Birds like Swallows, there building their Nests, but of what, or how, not known; and having bred up their Young fit for flight, they quit their Birth-place, and leave their empty Nests, which Ships coming thither from China and other places, transport from thence, and sell at home at great Rates, because they are esteemed as the only Condiment either to Fish or Flesh, which being handsomely seasoned with it, gives a delightful Hogooe.  
Philip Martin, in his Relation of the Kingdom of Tunking, saith, That in that Province are many strange Birds and Fowls, especially some little ones, that fly like a Swallow, making their Nests on the Rocks, which are gathered, and sold at no ordinary price, because they believe that they owe their Health to the use of them mixed in their Dishes, and that it is a certain Cure for the loss of Appetite.  
They are of a bright colour, and hard, like Sea-horn; and they esteem the greatest Feast no Entertainment without this Dainty, which they prepare after this manner: First they lay it a whole Night in warm Water, till it grows soft and mellow; then again dried in the Sun, mince it very small.  
It hath of itself almost no taste; but, like Mushrooms prepared in Salads, provokes an Appetite; and as other Food assuages Hunger, and satisfies the Stomach, this, on the contrary, makes the Appetite greater, and still desirous of more.  
There is also much Agerwood, and Cotton.  
On Thursday the sixth, Admiral Bort firing a Gun from the Naerden-Frigat, signified his intention to set Sail; but no sooner had he weighed his Anchor, but the Ship was strongly driven by the Current towards the Shore, so that he was forced to let it fall again, and firing several Guns, the Vice-Admiral Van Campen coming thither with his Pinnace, Longboat, and Tackling, found the Naerden Frigate to ride about three Cables length from the Rocks, on good Ground, able enough to hold out a great Storm: But carrying out a small Anchor, and weighing the other, at last got under Sail, and was followed by the rest of the Ships.  
The seventh, being Friday, the Zierikzee, Highland, and Ter-Boede Frigates came about the East side of the Isle of Timon (for the Naerden and the other Ships lay at the North-East Point) to an Anchor in thirteen Fathom, where they took in Water, Firing, and fresh Provisions, as Hens, Goats, Fish, Potatoes, and the like.  
The eighth, being Saturday, the Zierikzees Men going into the Woods, cut Anchor-stocks, Oars, Handspikes, and Levers; and fishing in their Sloop, took some Shepherds and Bream.  
About Noon happened a great Thunder-shower.  
The ninth day, being Sunday, the Zierikzee, Highland, and Ter-Boede, weighing their Anchors, ran to the North-East Point of Timon, to the Naerden, and the other Ships.  
Admiral Bort putting out his white Flag to call a Council, they judged it convenient to steer further out from the Shore, and also sealed their Orders.  
The Admiral here complaining that he had many young and unexperienced People in his Ship, Order was immediately given, That two of the stoutest Seamen should be taken out of each of the other Ships, except the Goldfinch, and put aboard of him.  
In the afternoon the Fleet set sail, and took their Course North-North-East, and saw the Isle of Timon about Sunset, bearing South and by West, and South-South-West, about five or six Leagues distant.  
The tenth in the afternoon, under three Degrees and eight Minutes, the Fleet had thirty eight Fathom Water, sandy Ground.  
But by the eleventh at Noon they had reached five Degrees and four Minutes Northern Latitude, and in forty and forty one Fathom Water, gravelly Ground.  
The next day at Noon they were in five Degrees and fifty six Minutes, and had thirty nine Fathom Water.  
The thirteenth, the Fleet being in seven Degrees and six Minutes, had twenty nine, thirty, and thirty one Fathom Water: But the Naerden sailing with his Squadron about the East, had almost lost sight of the Zierikzee.  
The fourteenth about Noon the Fleet was in eight Degrees and sixteen Minutes, and had twenty two and twenty three Fathom Water, fine sandy Ground, mixed with white Gravel. At Night, about the latter end of the first Watch, appeared the two Isles lying to the West of the Island Poele or Candor, a League from the Fleet, which had eighteen Fathom Water. This Poele or Candor lies in the Bay of Siam, near the Coast of Vancinaer Cambodia, uninhabited, and about three or four Leagues in Circumference, surrounded with high Rocks and Mountains, crowned with shady Trees, and abounding with good Provision, to the great refreshment of those Ships that put in there.  
The fifteenth in the Morning the Fleet came up with the North-East Point of Candour, which bore Southeast and by East about three or four League's distance from them, in the depth of seventeen and eighteen Fathom Water, white Sand, mixed with small Pebbles.  
The sixteenth in the Morning they sailed in fifteen and sixteen Fathom Water, the Table-Mount being North-East, about three Leagues from the Shore. About Noon they found themselves by observation in ten Degrees and thirty one Minutes Northern Latitude, and had fifteen Fathom Water, about three Leagues from the Coast of Champa.  
Champa, so called according to Texeira, from the Portuguese Pronunciation, Champa; by Martinius, Changpa; and by others, Ciampa, is a Kingdom, which hath the Principality of Camboya on the West, and, according to Father Lerin, that of Laos, from which it is separated by the vast Deserts and Mountains of Samao; the East respects Cochinchina and Tunking, and reaches with its Coasts to the main Continent of China, before you come to the Shore against the Island of Makou.  
The chief City, which lies up in the Country, hath its denomination from the Kingdom: The other Towns are Varella, Penaria, and Tauchonarella. This Country abounds in all sorts of Provisions, and the Hills with Elephants, which are transported from thence to several Places. There is also store of the best Calamback-Wood, by some called Calampart, by Linschot, Calambu, and Calambes, 
Lignum Aloes.  or Lignum-Aloes; by the Arabians, Agalugen, and Haut; and by the Inhabitants of Zaratte and Dekan, Ud, which hath a most sweet and odoriferous smell, said to proceed from its rotting under Ground; for the sound Wood hath no smell at all. The Tree (saith Garzias) resembles that of an Olive, but somewhat bigger; and the firm and sound Wood hath no kind of smell; but with the putrifying of the Bark and Wood, the fat and Oily Moisture may also communicate of its Sweetness to that likewise. This Wood they prise so highly, that they equally value it with Gold; yet much used by the Chinese in their Offerings to their Gods. The Country, though badly stored with Gold and Silver, yet is enriched with excellent Drugs, costly Woods (as the Sampan and Ebon-Wood) Rice, Lint, and Cotton: There is also plenty of a Fruit called Oaby, which is very great, weighing ten or twelve Pounds apiece, and by the Chinese used for Bread, and sometimes mingled with Meat like the Bottoms of Artichokes: They also have a very large Fruit, by the Inhabitants and other Indians called Nankussen, and by some, according to Garzias and Acosta, jaka.  
The Country is Governed by a King, that Rules, neither acknowledging Subjection to the Emperor of China, the Cham of Tartary, or any other Superior. The Vice-Admiral Van Campen spoke with the King himself, who sat in a great Court, in a very large Hall, hung with rich Tapestry; but was not permitted to enter the Presence, till he pulled off his Shoes and Stockings, because none may appear before the King unless barefooted, such was their Custom of due Reverence.  
The Grandees or Persons of Quality there, are mounted on Steeds, with Bells in their Ears, like our Cart-Horses.  
The seventeenth, in the Night, the Fleet doubled the South Point of the 
Bay of Pangerang.  Bay of Pangerang, which bore West and by South about three Leagues from them. In the bottom of this Bay, being a most convenient Harbour for Ships, stands a great City, whose Jurisdiction extends a vast way into the Country, and Governed by a peculiar King. The Vice-Admiral going ashore, spoke with him with his Shoes and Stockings on, and was presented by the King with soms Fans and Stuffs. The Country thereabouts abounds with Calamback-Wood. 
Lignum Aloes.   
The Fleet steering North and by East, found herself about Noon to be in eleven Degrees and thirty five Minutes, about three Leagues from the Champan Shore. In the Morning they plied about the five Islands, close by the forementioned Coast, the Southermost part of which appears like a round Hay-stack.  
The eighteenth, at Noon, by Observation they found themselves in twelve Degrees and thirteen Minutes, two Leagues from the Shore, in seventy Fathom Water.  
On Wednesday about Sunrising the Fleet made St. john de Fyks, on the Coast of Champan, North-East and by North, about three Leagues from them, and at Noon were in thirteen Degrees and five Minutes Northern Latitude; and Coasted about Sunset Cabo Avarelles, which lay Northerly from them, steering North and by East.  
Cabo Avarelles being a very high Mountain, appears a great distance off like a Man on Horseback, and serves for a Beacon.  
The twentieth they found themselves in thirteen Degrees and forty nine Minutes, and saw the Point of Poele Candor, North and by East, a good distance from them.  
The one and twentieth, in the Day-watch, the Vice-Admiral Van Campen (for the Admiral Bort going that Night with seven Ships about the East, was by break of day gotten quite out of sight) with the Ships belonging to his Squadron, came opposite to the Northermost of the Box-Islands, and spied four Sail, 
Box-Islands.  bearing North-East and by East, near the Coast of Champan, or Quinan; whether he, and those that belonged to the Ter-Boede, rowed with their Sloops well Manned and Armed; but three of them escaping, they took only one, which they carried aboard the Vice-Admiral, and found him to be laden with Rice, Honey and strong Arak, Manned with seven Men, and having also five proper Women aboard, that coming from Poeyan, intended to sail from Taywan, 
Poeyan.  not far from thence. They judged it convenient to let them pass with their Vessel; but the Women would rather have stayed with the Netherlanders, if they might have had their desires; yet at their departure, they were presented with three Pieces of course white Linen, which they received with great thankfulness.  
The City Poeyan, lying on the Coast of Quinan, at the foot of a Mountain, between two Rivers, is surrounded with high thick Walls of Stone, fit to plant Guns upon. Their Fortresses are not fortified with Towers, but here and there with some Galleries eighteen Foot high, to which they ascend by a Ladder, and from thence assail their Enemies.  
The City hath three strait and long Streets, which all concentre before the Royal Palace, from whence one leads to the Sea, the second to one of the City-Gates, and the third to the Mountain-Gate. None of the Streets are paved, except those three; for the other By-Lanes and Alleys are Sandy. And notwithstanding the whole may be Navigated by Channels that run through every Street, which receive their Waters from the foremention'd Rivers, yet are they very foul, because when the Water falls, it goes off so slowly.  
Near the Court, on the West side of the City, stands a spacious Temple; on the East-side, the Arsenal; and on the South side, the King's Palace, artificially built, with spacious Courts and Walks within. At the end of the Street that leads into the Country, stand the Mayor or Chief Magistrates House, wherein all the King's Servants or Slaves reside, and where are also his Stables, and other Offices.  
The City stands divided into four parts, over every one of which a Nobleman hath the chief Command in time of War, Fire, or other Accidents. In each of these is also a Drum, as big as a Rhenish-Wine Fat, whereon they beat with a Hammer, which always hangs near it, when any Uproar happens.  
The Merchandise to be had there, are all sorts of Wrought and un-wrought Silks, flowered and plain, of divers Colours; as Peelings, Hokiens, and the like: They trade also in white Linen.  
At Noon the Vice-Admiral Van Campen found himself in fourteen Degrees and forty Minutes Northern Latitude, and in the Morning came up with Admiral Van Bort, with seven Ships and a Jonk.  
The twenty second, about Sunrising, the Fleet spied Poele Canton, North-West 
Poele Canton.  and by North, about five Leagues from them, and were in the Latitude of fifteen Degrees and thirty one Minutes, their Course North-East.  
The twenty third the Fleet was in sixteen Degrees and fourteen Minute's North Latitude.  
The twenty fourth, being Monday, they discovered the Island Hainan, at a 
Island Hainan.  good distance from them; and taking observation at Noon, were in eighteen Degrees and fifteen Minutes, about four or five League's Southeast from Hainan.  
The twenty fifth about Noon they reached nineteen Degrees and fifty one Minutes.  
The twenty six they had twenty one Degrees and seven Minute's North Latitude, and were within four or five Leagues, bearing South-South-West, from the Southermost Island of Macao, or Macau, in twenty six and twenty seven Fathom Water.  
The twenty seventh the Zierikzee and Ter-Boede cast Anchor in the Evening near the Island of Macau, by the Box-Heads, being separated from the rest of the Fleet by Misty Wether, that being the appointed Rendezvouz, where they were to meet, if by any Accident they should lose one another.  
The next day in the Forenoon Indiik, accompanied with the Loosduinen, Singing-bird, and three Frigates, Domburgh, High-land, and Meliskerke, came to an Anchor in the same place, under the Coast of Macau, in thirteen Fathom Water, gravelly Ground, which made up their Number eight.  
The Islands of Macau receive their Denomination from the City of the same name, situate on a small hanging Islet, joined to one that is somewhat bigger; a Ship may without danger in Stormy Wether Sail betwixt, and there lie Land-locked, riding in an always smooth Sea, where they never want store of Freshwater from the living Spring.  
The twenty ninth, being Saturday, Indiik by putting out a white Flag, gave the Signal to the Commanders of the other Ships to come aboard to Council, where it was judged convenient, because Indiik supposed that the staying with the Ships bound for japan would be chargeable, to weigh Anchor in the Morning, put again to Sea, and sail through the Isles of Macau, ordering every Ship now and then to fire a Gun, in hopes thereby to meet again with the other five. Their Course being Nor-East by East, and Nor-Nor-East, in sixteen, seventeen, and eighteen Fathom, gravelly Ground, about nine of the Clock they bore up with one of the greatest of the Macau Islands, in Portuguese called Ilhas de Lemas, where they saw five Champans or Jonks lying near the Shore, which had a few Houses. Here also eight of the Fleet dropped Anchor; for Indiik with two laden Flyboats steered for japan.  
The Boats went ashore well Manned, where they found five great Champans with their Fishing-Nets, and above five thousand dried and salted Shepherd-Fish, with two hundred Pots of the Rows of the same Fish pickled.  
The Chineses taking their flight into the Woods, so left all their Goods to the disposal of the Hollanders; only three were overtaken by the Seamen, and carried aboard the Vice-Admiral, who ask them from whence they came, they told him, From Xantung, and also informed him of Coxingas Death, who were glad of the News, and paid the poor Men for their Fish.  
In the Afternoon they joined with the Admiral Bort, and the other lost and separated Vessels, which lay at Anchor full three Leagues to Lee-ward of the most Easterly Macaan Isles, where they were not able to row ashore with their Boats, because of the swiftness of the Current.  
The Admiral making the usual Signal, the rest of the Captains came aboard, where he ruffling a little, and chiding them for not keeping their Rendezvouz according to Order, he set upon each of them the Penalty to bring him aboard eight Hogsheads of Water.  
The one and thirtieth in the Morning the Fleet setting sail, was at Noon in twenty two Degrees and twelve Minutes, a League and a half North-East and by East from Pedro Branke.  
About Noon spying five Sail in the North-East, the Vice-Admiral Van Campen made Chase after them, and coming up with one in the Evening, took it, with three Chinese from Tamsua, and some fresh and salt Fish.  
On Tuesday, the first of August, the Vice-Admiral went aboard the Naerden Frigate, to know what he should do with the three Chinese and their Vessel: Bort replied, That he should let them go.  
At Noon the Fleet was in twenty two Degrees and thirty six Minutes, in twenty and twenty one Fathom Water, fine Sandy Ground, mixed with Shells; and the next day at Noon, in twenty three Degrees and thirty eight Minutes, bearing about three League's West-South-West from the Island Tangle Goie, in 
Tang Goie.  twenty two and twenty three Fathom Water, Sandy Ground, mixed with small Shells, their Course North-East and by East.  
In the Afternoon they spied several Fisher-Boats in the North-East, which the Admiral and Vice-Admiral ordered to be chased: The Loenen Pink overtaking one of them, found only one Man in her, the rest escaping by swimming.  
The third, the Fleet came up with the Point of Puthay, lying on the main 
Cape Puthay.  Coast of China, Northward from them, their Course North-East and by North along the Shore. This Point of Land appears in Prospect Mountainous, yet full of Valleys and Plains, planted with Trees of a wondrous height, whose Wood is as black as Pitch, and as hard and smooth as polished Marble or Ivory; some resembling Ebony; some a reddish Colour, and others yellowlike Wax.  
The Admiral putting out the Signal, commanded all the Officers to come aboard, and caused the Chinese Prisoners to be asked in their presence, From whence they came? If they had no knowledge of the Tartars Army? And where Coxingas Fleet lay? Whereupon they replied, That Coxinga was dead, that the Tartars had a great Army near Chinkzieu and Zwansifoe; and that they were fitting out abundance of great and small Jonks in all the Havens, to War against Coxinga.  
In the Night the Fleet sailed by the Island Quemuy, to the great dislike of the Admiral Bort, and contrary to the General and Indian Councils Order, which notwithstanding none of the Commanders knew, only that the Vice-Admiral Campen had direction, That if the Ships should be separated from one another in the Southern Mouzon, they should stay at the North Point of the Island Quemuy; and in the Northern Mouzon, at the Promontory of Puthay, lying about two League's North-East from Quemuy; or else, in and before the River Hoksieu. On this Island Quemuy appear two Towers; the one with a Spiry Point; the other, being that of the City Engely, flat and broad.  
The City Engely, which stood on the Island Quemuy, was pulled down, to prevent that Coxinga might not possess or harbour there; and at present there appears only some few Ruins of it, not far from the Seaside.  
In the Afternoon the Fleet raised twenty four Degrees and forty six Minutes, about two Leagues and a half from the Coast of China, where in the South-South-East they spied three Jonks, which the Admiral and all his Fleet chased, but they escaped by their nimble Sailing. About Sunset they were three Leagues distant from an Isle lying at the South Point of the Storm-bay, whereon stands a Tower built like a Pyramid.  
This Storm-bay makes a convenient Harbour for safety in bad Wether, or to 
Storm-Bay.  take in Provisions. On the Shore are divers Towers, with several Entrances, adorned with Images of their Gods, and before whose chief Gate by turns one of their Priests keeps continual Watch.  
On Friday, being the fourth, about Noon, the Vice-Admiral Van Campen descried the Cape of the Cavalles, in twenty five Degrees and thirty seven Minutes, 
Cape of Cavalles.  about two or three Leagues East and by North from the Rough Isle, in the depth of thirty four and thirty five Fathom Water, their Course North-North-East.  
This Point of Cavalles is a great Promontory, full of many handsome Towns and Villages, and exceeding fertile; for besides the great conveniences of Rivers, all sorts of Provisions may be purchased there at a cheap rate, as Sheep, Swine, Poultry, and the like; there are also Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, and several other Fruits of that kind, especially one shaped like a Pear, with a thin Shell, resembling the outward Husk of a Chestnut, white within, and of a delicious taste; they preserve it in Sugar and Oil, because if boiled, it loseth the relish: The Horses of this place are generally very small.  
Near this Point lie certain desolate and barren Isles, which by the Netherlanders are generally called the Cavalles.  
The fifth the Vice-Admiral was by a Storm and hollow Sea separated from the other Ships, when he saw three Isles not appearing in the Maps, about three League's South-West and by South from him, in the depth of thirty one and thirty two, and sometimes twenty seven, twenty five, and twenty four Fathom Water, muddy Ground. About Noon they found thirteen several Isles in the Latitude of twenty seven Degrees, all which the Vice-Admiral supposed to be the Isles of the Old Sayer.  
Thither the Vice-Admiral sailed, to wait for the Admiral and the other eight Ships, where he was so ruffled by a sudden Storm, that his Mainmast had like to come overboard, his Sails and Rigging much torn; yet at last he came to an Anchor, with his four Ships, in twenty seven Degrees and nine Minutes Northern Elevation.  
The sixth the Vice-Admiral Van Campen commanded the Officers of the Ships that were with him to come aboard, to know of them if they were inclined (not to spend any time in vain) to seek for the Admiral, with the other eight Ships, by sailing Southerly or Northerly, because his Orders on the third of the same Month were to meet in the Latitude of twenty seven Degrees and thirty Minutes before the City Hoksieu (if possible,) if they should happen by Storm to be separated one from another, and there to inquire after the state of the Tartars.  
Van Campen judged it convenient to sail but fourteen or fifteen Leagues towards the South, along the Coast of China, and if he missed of him there, to take his Course back again towards the North, or to stay there till they came to him, and then go together to find out their Admiral, which was agreed on.  
The eighth Van Campen weighed Anchor with his Squadron, sailing a pretty way to the Offin, and then stood in towards the Coast of China, there to discover some Haven or River, but saw a little to the Northward of a Cape on the Coast of China, six or seven Isles, which passing by, and plying several times from and towards the Shore, they came again to an Anchor behind the Isle where they had lain before.  
The ninth the Vice-admirals' Pilot went ashore, to seek For Water, which he found running out of the Rocks, between the Hills: About Noon they weighed Anchor, and sailed to a high Isle, unknown to them, and not found in the Map. In the Evening they spied ten or eleven Sail of Fishermen, to reach whom Van Campen sent his Pilot with a Sloop well Manned, and one who spoke some broken Chinese; but they only overtook one of them, which they brought aboard, where they questioned them, From whence they came, and whereabouts Hoksieu was? They answered, From Kita, and that Hoksieu was about six or seven Leagues Southerly from them: And selling their taken Fish to the Netherlanders for three Spanish Rials, promised the next Morning to bring them Hens, Swine, and Chinese Apples aboard.  
With Sunset they came between the Main Coast of China, and four unknown Isles, and dropped their Anchors in thirteen Fathom Water, about Canonshot from the Shore. On the greatest stood a Light-house, with Burning Candles in it.  
The tenth, being Thursday, the Vice-Admiral set Sail in the Morning towards the South-South-West, between the main Coast of China and the Islands, a Canonshot from the shore. On the Main Continent appeared a House in a Bay. About Noon they were come back into twenty six Degrees and twenty seven Minutes, and in the Evening by calm, yet contrary Tides, entered the Bay of Kita, half a League Southward from an unknown Island.  
The eleventh in the Morning Van Campen setting sail again, spied two Jonks lying before Tenhay, to which he sent jacob Black, with a Boat and Skiff, Manned with armed Seamen and Soldiers, to fight them; but the Jonks by swiftness of their Sails got clear off; yet in the Pursuit they saw in the North-West, near the Coast of China, three or four unknown Isles, and seven Ships at an Anchor near the Shore, which were the lost Ships, with the Admiral, that they were in quest of.  
About Noon the Vice-Admiral was commanded aboard of the Admiral Bort, by Captain Auke Pieterson, Master of the Ter-Boede Frigate, and informed by him, That he had taken nineteen Jonks, great and small, near Tenhay, six or seven of which they had fetched from the Shore, and burned the rest, except one, which was blown up by its own Powder.  
The Booty of the taken Jonks consisted in forty one square Packs, nineteen Fardels, and five Bales of fine white Silk, a hundred and thirteen Pieces of Spiljauter, sixty seven Pigs of Lead great and small, two hundred sixty eight Bags of Pepper, besides sixty nine Guns and Blunderbusses.  
The twelfth, being Saturday, the Fleet setting Sail, steered their Course to the River of Hoksieu, to perform the Orders of the General and Council of India; but was forced by calm Wether, and contrary Tides, to come to an Anchor again in seven Fathom Water, a little to the Westward of the Bay, not far from the Land, bordered with a white sandy Shore.  
In the hanging of the Mountain appeared a great and well-built City, called Sotiha, whereof the Walls of one side were washed by the Sea.  
Near the Shore, and against the Gates, lay some small Jonks, and many other Vessels, that were hall'd up above the Water-mark; whither the Admiral Bort, and Vice-Admiral Van Campen, in the afternoon sent ninety seven Seamen, and one hundred and fifty Soldiers in five Boats and seven Sloops, with Command to set them all on fire (for they belonged to Coxinga,) but to spare all Houses.  
The Hollanders coming near the Shore, were roughly entertained by the Chinese, with great Guns and Muskets; but being once Landed they met with little resistance, for the Chineses fled unto the Mountains: whereupon Van Campen entering the City with his Men, set a Watch in a great House near 
Sotiha taken.  the Gate, and sent the rest of his People in three Parties through the City.  
This City Sotiha had been ruined and burnt by the Tartars about a year before, but since that rebuilt with many handsome Houses, wherein they found good quantities of Rice, Salt, and dried Fish. Three Chineses were also taken, with four Women, but set at liberty again immediately. A young Woman was found Murdered, but how none knew.  
This Place is now inhabited chiefly by Chineses, short-haired like the Tartars, that maintain themselves with Fishing and Husbandry, being Licenced thereto by the Governor of Hoksieu.  
After the firing of twenty seven small and great Vessels Laden with Pepper, Silk, and other Commodities to be Transported to japan, Van Campen with his People in the Evening leaving the Shore went aboard, where he related his Adventures to the Admiral. Hence the Fleet Sailed somewhat Southerly, and Anchored before the City Tenhay in nine Fathom Water.  
This Tenhay hath no Walls, and inhabited only by Fishermen, and some Merchants.  
The thirteenth being Sunday, the Fleet between Tenhay and the River Hoksieu came to Anchor in eight Fathom Water, where in the Bay of Linkun they espied some small Fishermen with their Nets.  
This Bay of Linkun lies also between the River Hoksieu and Tenhay, where some Priests coming to the Netherlanders, requested of them a Pass, that they might go free if any of their Ships should meet with them at Sea, promising to do the same to them, if the Hollanders had occasion to travel by Land or Water.  
The Vice-Admiral Van Campen sent to the Admiral Bort, to know if the six Jonks should stay near Tenhay, or go into the River Hoksieu, that if a Storm should happen they might not be driven from their Anchors, with which they were but meanly provided, and had scarce Provision for six or seven Days. In the Night they saw many Fires upon the Mountains.  
The fourteenth being Monday, in the Morning the Fleet Anchored near the Banks of Hoksieu, about a League from the Shore, and to make their coming known to the Tartars, Bort commanded seven Guns to be fired from the Naerden Frigate, five from the Zierikzee, three from the Domburgh, and one from all the rest of the other Ships.  
Here it was concluded, that Captain Abraham Pon, Commander of the Breukelen, with six Men, one Quartermaster, and the Interpreter Lakka, with three Tartars that came to the Hollanders at Tayowan the year before, should carry a Letter to the Governors and Viceroy.  
On Tuesday the fifteenth the Vice-Admiral Van Campen, according as ordered the day before, Sailed with two Frigates, three Pinks, besides the six forementioned Jonks, towards Hoksieu or Chancheu, commonly called The River Change, Steering his Course West and by South between two Sands near the White Rocks, which appear like Pyramids, and close by the North-east Foreland: and bringing the Pyramids on his Starboard, he altered his Course towards the South-west, through a narrow Channel six, seven, or eight Fathom deep gravelly Ground. Thence he Steered his Course East North-east, and Anchored in eight Fathom Water between two pleasant Isles, and left on his Starboard two other within Canonshot, which served as safe Harbours for all Ships against foul Wether. Near the Evening Van Campen fell down with the Ebb out of the River, towards the Bar of Hoksieu, and came about four Glasses after Sunset to the rest of the Fleet; where going Aboard the Naerden Fregat, he gave an account to the Admiral of Affairs, to his great satisfaction.  
The sixteenth being Wednesday, the Fleet passed into the River Hoksieu, and came presently after Noon with the Flood, by the high North-east Point of the Eastermost Island, having the White Rocks on their Starboard, and working through a strong Ebb in a narrow Channel, they came to an Anchor in five Fathom Water, where immediately three handsome Chinese Vessels, with five grand Mandarins, came Aboard of the Naerden Fregat to the Admiral Bort, and with much Ceremony and Compliment welcomed both the Admiral and Vice-Admiral. At Low-water the Naerden Frigate sitting upon the Sand much troubled the Admiral, who called to Van Campen, telling him that he had brought the Ships to a bad Place to Anchor in; but he little regarding such a danger, replied, To Morrow, if it be the Admiral's pleasure, I will carry the Ships out of the River again.  
The seventeenth in the Morning the Fleet weighed Anchor, and Sailed along in five, six, seven, and eight Fathom Water: thence they Sailed Northwest up the River along the Northermost Island; against the middle of which being a safe Harbour, the Ships came to Anchor.  
Not far from hence lay four Islands, formerly peopled, but now laid waste, and depopulated by the Tartars. A whole Month the Netherlanders lay near these four Islands, where they got all things in a plentiful manner, though the ordinary Seamen were not permitted to go ashore without leave, and only six at a time, because they should not be burdensome, nor affright the Inhabitants.  
On Friday the eighteenth Van Campen went ashore with his Sloop, and came 
Van Campen goes ashore.  to the South-west Point of the smallest Island at a Stone Causeway, along which he walked to a deserted Place, wherehe saw many large Ruins of former Houses, and under the jutting of a Hill several Towns, besides two fair Temples, and in them, on a row, many Chests with dead Corpse standing against the Walls above the Ground: There also were two Light-houses, furnished with many Images, sitting on Stools at a Table, before which they burned Offerings, imploring indulgence to departed Souls.  
The nineteenth Admiral Bort sent Philip Mew, who had some smattering of the Chinese Tongue, to the Fort of Minjazen, three Leagues from Hoksieu, to the Governor, with Desire to permit them with Boats, and two of the taken Jonks, to Sail up the River for fresh Water for the Ships, and to buy Provisions. He brought Answer, that they might go with all their Boats and Jonks, and fetch as much Water as they pleased.  
The twentieth and one and twentieth nothing happened of any remark, every Ship being busy to take in Water.  
The two and twentieth being Tuesday, five Mandarins, with a considerable 
Five Mandarins come aboard the Naerden.  Train, came in great Tartar Vessels Aboard the Naerden Frigate to the Admiral, where they were welcomed with the firing of Guns, and three Volleys of small Shot: Upon the Admiral's Order the Naerden fired seven, Zirickzee five, Domburgh three, and all the rest of the Ships two Guns apiece, and three Volleys of small Shot more. The Pilot of the Naerden Frigate carried in a Tartar Vessel, aboard of the Vice-Admiral Van Campen (who at that time being troubled with an Ague, could not be at the Mandarins' Entertainment in the Naerden) one fat Calf, five Hens, five Ducks, three Water-Lemons, with a great Pot of Chinese Beer, all sent as a Present to Van Campen, from the Governors of Hoksieu and Minjazen.  
The twenty fourth a Corporal with four Soldiers was sent ashore with a Flag to the Island, being on the North side of the River, with Command to go to the top of the Mountains, and see if he could descry any Ships or Jonks: if they saw Ships, than they were to wave their Colours as many times as there were Vessels; if Jonks, betwixt every Flourish to fire a Gun.  
In the Afternoon Ysbrant van Bank, Commander of the Ankeveen, who died the Night before, was Buried on the Island, and jacob Swaert put in his Place, being the Pilot to the Vice-Admiral in the Zirickzee.  
The twenty sixth and twenty seventh nothing of remark happened.  
The twenty eighth three Chinese Vessels came with three Mandarins from Hoksieu aboard the Naerden Frigate, and brought a Letter from the Governor thereof, and Commander of the Castle Minjazen: The Contents consisted in many Compliments, with promise of Favours and all kindness from them both; likewise a free Grant to go unmolested up the River, and buy Necessaries for their Money for the Fleet; and lastly, wishing them a kind welcome into China: by which it appeared, that the Tartars intended to join with the netherlands Forces. The Letter being read, several Guns were fired from the Naerden.  
At Noon the three Mandarins taking their leave went away in the same Vessels, whilst five Cannons were fired in honour to them, and also three Volleys of small Shot: they carried with them a Letter from the Admiral Bort, written by the Chinese Interpreter Lakka, to the Governors of Hoksieu, with many civil Expressions of thankfulness.  
The twenty ninth, thirtieth, and one and thirtieth, nothing happened of any note.  
The first of September all Officers were commanded by the Admiral to Land their Soldiers on the middle Island, and take up their Quarters in the best Houses of the ruin'd Town, with Order, that every Officer should furnish his Soldiers with all Necessaries for the Dressing of Meat, and to give them double allowance on the Shore of Rice, Pork, Oil, Vinegar, and Arak, which daily occasioned a murmuring amongst the Seamen, who said, That they did the worst Work, and hazarded their Lives as well as the Soldiers, and therefore ought rather to have the greatest allowance.  
The second, being Saturday, Auke Peter, Commander of the Ter-Boede, and Captain Constantine Noble, came back from Hoksieu (whither they were sent by Order of the Admiral on the thirtieth of the last Month) and brought with them to the Admiral in the Naerden, five Cows, thirty six Ducks, five great Pears, with some Potherbs.  
The third, being Sunday, Vice-Admiral Van Campen went ashore in his Sloop, where he saw divers Burying-places defaced by their own Soldiers, who out of hope to find Gold, Silver, or Jewels buried within, broke open the Chests, and threw out the Corpse, which lay in all their Apparel, as Caps on their Heads, Coats, Breeches, and Shoes, and in their full shape, but as firm as a Mummy.  
On the fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh days nothing happened worthy of relation.  
The eighth, being Friday, john Melman with two Soldiers, and three Tartars 
A Mandarin with a Letter from the Viceroy and General to Admiral Bort.  that came with the Fleet from Batavia, besides the Chinese Interpreter and Secretary Lakka, came back from Sinksieu through Hoksieu, after a Journey of twenty four days, accompanied with a Mandarin, sent to the Admiral Bort, with Letters from the Viceroy Singlamong, and from the next Person to him, the General Taysing Lipovy, besides a Letter from a great Lord called Santing Houbethetok, Governor of the great City Zwansyfoe; in all which they expressed themselves in a handsome Style, signifying the Hollanders kind welcome thither. The two chief Commanders, the Viceroy and General, desired moreover, that the Admiral would please to repair to them, or some other he should Depute (for they would be glad of some People of Quality to Confer with) and likewise, that they would be pleased to send the Letters from the Lord-General and Council of Batavia, by a special Envoy by Land to the Camp at Sinksieu, that so they might better know, by communicating their Intentions, how to carry on the grand Affair; and that they should in the interim leave the Presents for the Viceroy in their Ships till farther order; and accordingly he Commission'd the Vice-Admiral Van Campen and Constantine Noble (yet their Letters did not so earnestly require it as the Interpreter john Melman related to the Admiral,) with Commands to deliver the Lord-General and Indian Counsels Letters to the Viceroy Singlamong, and the Person next to him in State, the General Taysing Lipovy, and withal, to Treat and conclude with them concerning the grand Affair: This being concluded on, they sent advice concerning it to the Governor of Hoksieu, who returned this Answer:  

THe dispatching of the Vice-Admiral john van Campen and Constantine 
A Letter from the Governor of Hoksieu to Bort.  Noble, with Letters from the Lord-General and Council of Batavia, to the Viceroy Singlamong, and the next Person to him, Taysing Lipovy, will, according to my Judgement, come to a good issue; but to join with You, and make a League to go against Coxinga or his Adherents, is beyond my Commission: but I will prepare myself, if the Ambassadors and Letters are ready, to assist them, and provide them Attendants, and all Necessaries which they shall want on their Journey to Sinksieu to the Viceroy and General. About Matters of War and Merchandise I am not permitted to Treat with You, but You must expect Your Answer concerning it from the Viceroy, or Court at Peking.   
The eighteenth, being Monday, in the Morning two Jonks, with the Interpreter Melman, and the Chinese Interpreter and Secretary Lakka, sent from the Governor of Hoksieu, with permittance from the Commander of the Fort Minjazen, to the Fleet to fetch the Vice-Admiral john van Campen and Constantine Noble, with their Goods and Retinue, and conduct them up to Hoksieu, and from thence by Land to travel to Sinksieu to the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Lipovy.  
Van Campen and Noble making themselves ready for their Journey, went attended each with six Men, besides a Trumpet, Interpreter, and two Soldiers, in all eighteen Persons: the Commands and Orders which they were to observe, and were delivered them by the Admiral Bort, were verbatim as followeth:  

THe Reasons and Occasions are known, which have forced and moved 
The Instructions of the Admiral to the Agents going to Sinksieu.  Us and the Council to send you to the chief Governors of the Territory of Fokien, wherein Hoksieu is the Metropolis, and the usual Place of their Residence and Court, though at present they are not there, but lie Encamped with their Army near the City Zansifoe, about nine or ten days Journey Post from Hoksieu. I say to you both, because Constantine Noble hath Order from the Lord-General and Indian Council, to Negotiate and Conclude that Affair with those great Officers, according to their Excellency's Order, and the Letters to the same Governors, viz. the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Taysing Lipovy: the Copies of which you having between you, must serve for your full Directions, without needing any rehearsal to be made of them; so that We only to obtain their Excellency's favour, entreat you to obey and observe these following Orders.  
I. After you have taken leave of Us you shall go to Hoksieu, and at your arrival there, obtain Licence to repair to the Governor Haitingkong, and proffer him great Presents, and inform him that you are ready to travel to the Viceroy Singlamong and Taysing Lipovy, with Letters to him from the Lord-General and Council of Batavia, with a Request, that he would help you by a quck dispatch to go thither. In the Letter which he lately Writ to Us he he hath promised to provide all things fit for the Journey: whereupon We have Answered according to the Copy which you have, containing chiefly Our taken Resolution of the Domburghs staying here with the Presents to the forementioned chief Governors; Our setting Sail with the other seven Ships about the North, to infest and gawl the Enemy, and Intentions to be here against your Return; and amongst other things, a quick Dispatch for your Journey: so that I hope you will find all things there in a readiness.  
II. When you have left Hoksieu, and come to Zansifoe, Commanded by the Lord Santing Houbethetok, who seems to favour Our Designs, you shall deliver Our Letter to Him, and also these Presents, because with the Return of the Interpreter john Melman (who hath already been with the said chief Governors,) he Writ to Us, and thereby expressed his good Inclinations towards Us.  
The chiefest, nay the sole occasion of your Journey, is to deliver the Letters of their Excellencies beforementioned to the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Taysong Lipovy; and if they are so inclined, to Treat and Conclude with them all those Affairs which they desire of them in their Letters, and authorised us to Agree on, consisting chiefly in these Points.  
First, to make an inviolable League with them, for the best and most advantage of the Hollander, and destruction of theirs and our Enemies, being the Pirate Coxinga and his Adherents.  
Secondly, to obtain a free and unmolested Trade through the whole Empire of China.  
To which two chief Points are joined some others which our Masters have commanded us, viz. to permit us to choose some convenient Place for Factory, where there is a good Harbour for the securing of our Ships, and fit to fortify against Coxingas assaults, and to that end keep a small Garrison of Soldiers there.  
To promise to procure a Grant from the Great Emperor of China for that which they shall Conclude with you about.  
That if they join with us against Coxinga, we will follow their Advice and Resolution: Nay, if they are inclined to drive Coxinga from Formosa, we will assist them, and carry part of their Forces in our Ships thither.  
Yet nevertheless, that we at present will use our Ships to seize and conquer Coxingas Jonks, which Sail to and from japan, and likewise to hinder his Fishing behind the Mountain Tankoia on the Southside of Formosa, which begins every year with eighty or a hundred Jonks in the latter end of November, and ends about the middle of january. But these Articles are strictly to be insisted upon, as of most concern for the destroying and disabling of the Enemy.  
After delivery of your Letters you must wait for their Answers. If they should ask you if you have aught else to request of them that is not mentioned in the Letters, then tell them, That if they grant those, there is no other Business of any consequence to Treat about. But if you observe them not to be willing to consent to the chiefest Articles, you must ask them immediately what they resolve to grant us. Then accept of all things which redound to our Profit, and by all means extol our Strength, and what we are able to perform by force of Arms, and the faithful Service which we shall be ready to do them when time requires, in assisting them with all things, whereby they may see our fidelity: nay, lend them our Ships and Men against the Enemy Coxinga, and all other Enemies of the Empire; for recompense of all which they desire nought else but a free Trade. If they should speak of Custom and other Taxes, desire them to tell you what they amount to, if reasonable, consent to it; for our People ought not to pay either more or less than their own Natives, which you are to take notice of. We are afraid, that at present they will not permit us to Traffic, nor Conclude on any thing concerning it, but deny the Request, and only speak and debate about the business of War. If so, and observing that to press it on any longer, or more, all other Business might be neglected, we judge it convenient to take no Cognizance of it at this time; yet if any hopes be, to procure leave for the Sale of those few Merchandise laden in some of the Ships: what they are we desire you to see in the general Inventory of all the Goods. It may be that they will direct you to the Court at Peking, there to obtain the liberty of free Trade from the Emperor, and also to advise us to send another Embassy from Batavia, which you may assure them shall be done the next year. Yet nevertheless, if you cannot attain to our Desires, leave off further Suit, that so we may avoid such vast Expense and Charge: but if they be inclined to send to Batavia, you may seem to be very well pleased at it, and promise to Transport them thither in our Ships, except they will send one or two of their Jonks, which would be the better for us. Concerning the possessing and fortifying of a peculiar Place, you may also desist from▪ if you see them not to favour the Request, but to be satisfied that our Ships may lie in the Haven of Hoksieu, and there drive a Trade, provided they can be assured to lie safe, and without danger there. When you come to Agree with them concerning the War with Coxinga and his Party with our joint Forces, take care that they oblige themselves thereto by Writing, and with us declare themselves Enemies to the same Coxinga and his Adherents, and that they shall not without our knowledge, much less to our prejudice, agree with the Enemy, which we will do also on our part. Moreover, make a strict enquiry, whether or no they have not already Treated, and are inclined to be reconciled to him, if he should submit himself to the Emperor; this may be suspected, because they say Coxinga is dead, and his Son in Ayanny not concerned at it: Which if you observe, let them by no means detain you, but hasten yourself from thence and come to us; for the Vice-Admiral ought on all occasions to be in the Fleet, because his Presence is continually required there: wherefore if he can come away before, let Noble tarry there so long till he thinks he can effect no more by staying. If they desire us, with them, to agree with the Enemy, you may easily understand on what Articles, and with what advantage and satisfaction it may be done, though you conclude noton any thing.  
If you can find out any means for the delivery of our Prisoners in Eymuy, 
These were taken before by Coxinga.  let nothing be wanting to procure their liberty, because the General and Council in Batavia have highly recommended their Release to us; but that we should do nothing without acquainting them with it, and their consent. The Hostage with his Retinue shall be kept so long in the Domburgh, till perhaps by the advice of his Friends he may do something that may be requisite for that Business, because he also longs for his Liberty. The Viceroy Singlamong and General Taysong Lipovy have every one sent us a Letter by the Interpreter Melman; we now therefore send an Answer to every one of them, to the same effect and purpose as theirs were, with some small Presents, as appears by the Copies which you have, to which I refer myself, desiring you to deliver them at a convenient time, either with their Excellency's Letters, or afterwards. The Presents which belong to them, and are signified in their Excellency's Letters, I have caused to be taken out of the Naerden, and put into the Domburgh: By the same Copies you may see how they are Packed, and wherein they consist, which at all times shall be ready upon your Order, whose Acceptation you must in a manner press, although hitherto they have not been willing to receive. Of the Merchandise which are only aboard the Domburgh, I also give you Patterns, if they should chance to fancy any of them; and likewise of the Goods sent along with you, that thereby you may see what Presents to give to one or other, as you shall think fit.  
Lastly, I desire you to promote and advance His Excellency's and Counsels Desires, which at present so highly concerns the Public, with all care and diligence imaginable; and think, that if all things fall out successfully, you will get no small honour and advancement by it, which God grant, into whose Protection I commit you.  
Aboard the Naerden Frigate, lying with the Fleet before the River of Hoksieu, the 19th of Septemb. 1662. Balthasar Bort.   
The next day after, having Shipped all their Necessaries for the Journey, and put the Presents into the Jonks, they took their leave of the Fleet, and Sailed South and by West up the River of Hoksieu. Presently after Noon they passed by a Town called Quanto, lying on the Northwest Shore, about a Musquet-shot up in the Country.  
This Quanto is Walled, being about half an hours Walk in circumference, fortified with Bulwarks and Watch-Towers, and strengthened with a great Garrison. Here, as in most Towns in China, are several Parades, for the Meeting and Exercising of Foot and Horse, and to Train them up in all sorts of Martial Discipline. There are also Exchanges, or Burses for the Sale of Merchandise, besides Markets where the Country People bring their Fruits and Provisions to sell.  
A little farther the Agents passed by a populous Village called Sanwan, near the Shore.  
The Inhabitants of Sanwan are ingenious Artificers, viz. Weavers, Smiths, Cooper's, and other Labouring Trades, who live in peculiar Places of the Village apart one from another, and every Precinct under a particular Governor, who gives an account of all Differences and Misdemeanours to the chief Magistrate.  
All the Villages through which they passed in the Territory of Fokien are wild, and have daily Markets of Herbs, Fish, and Oysters.  
After they passed on Southerly with their Retinue to the River which flows East and by South into the Sea, and hath a small Island in its Mouth, with a Sandy Shelf in the Channel, where they found on the Northwest Shore the Village Sayon, and came after a little Sailing to the strong Fort Benantien, or Minjazen, which is fortified with Towers, Walls, Bulwarks, and a broad Mole: it lieth three Leagues from Hoksieu, hath the bigness of a small Town, with several Streets and fair Houses, set forth with divers Tradesmens Shops, and in the middle a very large open Court, where on one side stands the Governor's House, and on the other a Pagode.  
Here Van Campen and Noble went ashore with their whole Retinue, to Compliment the Governor, and were received into the Fort by three Mandarins with the usual Ceremonies, who conducted them into a great Temple; but they could not speak with him by reason of his indisposition. After they had presented them Bean-broth mixed with Milk (which is accounted the greatest honour they can show to any Person) they returned with their Train into the Jonks, and after many Compliments took their Leave. Being got about half a League high, there appeared a most delightful and pleasant Place on the Southeast side, called Plethoeu, or Pethou; and opposite to it on the Northwest Shore, a large Pagode, named Possang, by them held for one of their Wonders.  
On the other side of the River appears a spacious Area, built about with fair Edifices, and planted with Gardens, and Banquetting-houses in them. About four a Clock in the Evening they came to the Southeast side, near a Stone-Bridge, built over the Water on Pillars and Arches, and covered close on the top with long and thick Planks, from Arch to Arch on each side thereof are Rails of blue Stone, here and there adorned with Dragons and Lions, Hewn and Carved out. Over this Bridge four Horsemen may conveniently ride abrest.  
The twentieth, being Wednesday, they went in two Pallakins, or Horse-Litters, 
The Agents come to Hoksieu.  carried by four Horses, over the Bridge to the City Hoksieu, there to Compliment the Viceroy Singlamong's Wife's Mother, and to present her with an Amber Necklace, and to speak with the Governor: Being passed over the Bridge, they found the Highways built, the Streets paved, and crowded with thousands of People all along the City to the Palace, insomuch that they were scarce able to pass for the Throng.  
The Vice-Roys Palace, in which at that time his Wife's Mother resided, was 
The Viceroy's Palace.  a handsome Edifice, surrounded with Walls of Freestone, with great Portals and fair Gates, and guarded with Horse and Foot. At their entering they were courteously received by the Viceroy's Mother-in-law, who conducting them into a Hall furnished with Pictures and Stools, desired them to sit down. When seated, they were entertained each of them with a Cup full of Bean-broth, and afterwards they were all placed before a little Table, to eat both boiled and roasted Meats, served up in Plate of Massy Gold. The Vice-Roys Brother (for he was also there) discoursed with them about several affairs, and amongst other things, asked of them if they had as great and well built Towns in Holland as they had in China? and if they had Horses, Cows, and Sheep there? to which they answered, that they had: Then he enquired how long they were coming from Holland to China? they replied, Six or seven Months. Then the Viceroy's Mother, who had many Women waiting upon her, came to them, saying, That she intended to have eat and drank with them, but her indisposition had hindered her; but would Write in their behalf to her Son the Viceroy, and at their return sit at Table with them: for you are (said she) in a strange Country full of People, and therefore had need be careful to Travel circumspectly, that you may meet with no inconvenience: Nay, she admired that they durst venture themselves where they knew no Place, nor any Person. Van Campen being asked what Place he bore, and how qualified, answered, He was Vice-Admiral of the Fleet: whereupon she replied, Then your Princes and Lords must needs wear rich Apparel, and go bravely, being much taken with the Velvet Jump he had on. This passed, Van Campen and Noble civilly taking their Leave of the Lady, parted from her, and went to the City Governor's House, Guarded both with Foot and Horse; by which passing, and being entered, they soon returned, upon a Servant's saying that his Lord was troubled with an Ague, and lay at rest in his Chamber, so that at present there was no opportunity to speak with him, wherefore he desired they would please to come again the next Morning: whereupon they were carried in Pallakins out of the City, the Streets being so crowded with Men, Women, and Children quite to the Bridge, where their Jonks lay, that they were scarce able to make their way through.  
The two and twentieth in the Morning going again to Hanlavia, they presented him with some red Cloth, thereby to obtain his favour and assistance in their speedy dispatch to the Viceroy Singlamong. From thence they Road to the City Governor's House, that he might furnish them with People for their Journey: where coming, they found him somewhat indisposed; yet nevertheless they had Audience in the same Place where he generally sits with the chiefest of the Country, consulting about public affairs. Upon their ask if he would be assisting to them in their Journey to the Viceroy Singlamong and Taysing Lipovy, he answered, That he would be ready to do all things that lay in his power, saying he had Writ in their behalf to the Emperor at the Court at Peking, and to the Viceroy Singlamong in Sinksieu, and provided two Mandarins with ninety Men to Travel thither with them. Being asked if he thought it convenient for the Admiral to put to Sea with eleven Sail, to Cruise up and down to the Northward, if there he could, to annoy Coxinga and his Party, and leave one Frigate, in which the Presents were, in the River Hoksieu: he replied, That he durst not advise about it, but their Admiral in that case might do what he thought fit; yet as he supposed, it were better that the Ships stayed there till the Viceroy's coming home, that there might be a better understanding: However, you may go (said he) to the Governor of Minjazen, Hanlavia, and he will be better able to inform you in these punctilio's what to do. Hereupon they leaving Hoksieu, went about Noon to Hanlavia, by whom they were invited to Dinner; when taking opportunity to ask the same Question, they received the like Answer, viz. That the Admiral might do what he thought fittest: all which Van Campen and Noble writ to the Admiral Bort, with their Opinions. A little after Dinner they went with their Retinue into their Jonks, to proceed in their Journey to Sinksieu, and came about three a a Clock after Noon to the Fort Aulavia, or Lavyt, near a Ferry, where on the the Shore they were courteously received by the Governor, and entertained with the customary honour of Bean-broth.  
The Fort Aulavia, surrounded with high Walls, hath a strong Garrison both 
The Fort Aulavia.  of Foot and Horse, and stored with all sorts of Ammunition and Provisions. Here whoever pass over, they pay Custom for all those Goods and Commodities that are after sold and dispersed through the Country.  
Several Troops of Horse are daily sent out of this Fort, to keep the Ways clear from Thiefs, which have their lurking-places in the neighbouring Mountains.  
After some stay here they set Sail again, and in the Evening came to the 
The Village Lanpon.  Village Lanpon, where they stayed all Night. This Lanpon is a Place of good Repute, being inhabited by many rich Chineses, which drive a Trade through all the Country; and also much frequented by the neighbouring People, because of a Temple wherein they worship an Idol, said to give good and comfortable advice in great misfortunes or adversities, and therefore visited daily both by rich and poor, that in their Troubles they may receive some consolation from him.  
The twenty third, being Saturday, at nine a Clock they leaving Lanpon, went by Land in Palakins along a Causeway paved with blue and grey Freestone. This day they travelled through abundance of Rice-Fields, and Plains full of Fruit-trees, and all manner of eatable Plants, scattered with many populous Villages, and moistened by murmuring Streams, that flowing out of the Mountains made it a most delightful Prospect. They also saw several ancient Monuments, all Sculpt out with Imagery resembling Men, Horses, Lions, and Dragons; over which stately Arches raised high, like our, Triumphal with Inscriptions in Chinese Characters of Gold, being ancient Epitaphs in honour of the Deceased. About Noon they came to two great Forts, and about six a Clock in the Evening into the City Hokzwa; which entering, they were received by the chiefest of the Town, and carried into a great House, provided for the most eminent Persons of the Country in their Journeys.  
Here they had sent them for Presents three Pigs, twenty Hens, and four Geese; which they requited by returning some small Trifles. In the Night, by Order of the Magistrates of the Town, a Guard was set about their Lodgings, that they might suffer no injury by the Common People.  
The twenty ninth, being Sunday, though they prepared for their Journey, yet they could not set forward for want of Convoy, because a strong Party of three hundred Horse was sent by the Viceroy's Mother, with Money and other Goods to the Army at Sinksieu, to her Son Singlamong, for the paying of the Soldiers, so that being forced to stay in Hokzwa all that day, they were visited by many great and eminent Mandarins of the City, and presented with Oranges, Pears, Chestnuts, Coco-Nuts, besides several other Fruits, two Pigs, five Geese, and ten Hens, in requital for Money and Goods worth full as much. The People seemed to be very obliging, when they heard that the Hollanders lay with a Fleet on the Coast of China to join with them against the Islanders of Quemuy, and the rest of Coxingas Party. In the afternoon they viewed the Town.  
This City Hokzwa, lying in a pleasant Place, encompassed with many delightful 
The City Hokzwa.  Gardens, contains several Markets and great Plains, and appears beautiful with divers Triumphal Arches, and stately ancient Buildings, ranged close together with Party-walls, not being usual in China. It hath thick and strong Walls, or rather Bulwarks, continually Guarded by many Horse and Foot. About an hours walking from thence are many pleasant Groves, with Arbours, and other like Receptions for such as Walk to refresh themselves in, where they call for all sorts of Fruit whatever they have a mind to, so making themselves merry.  
The twenty fifth, being Monday, they began their Journey anew about daybreak, with a Convoy of fifty Tartars; and passing by several strong Holds, and through many Villages, they came to two Rocks, which so straiten the Passage, that two Carts or Wagons can scarce go between: at each Entrance stands a Block-house, so that none can pass without leave. Upon the top of these Rocks, where there is no kind of Mould to be seen, grow many Cypress and Ash-Trees. About Noon passing by another Hold, the Governor invited them to Dinner, which they modestly refused by their Interpreter; yet their Retinue had as much strong Chinese Beer given them as they pleased to drink. Then proceeding on, in the Evening they passed through a Walled City, and well Garrisoned; and a little Southward from the City they took their repose in a Pagode, where several of the chief Citizens visiting, for welcome presented them with several Provisions, such as the Country afforded: in return whereof they gave them some Spanish Rials, and four Pieces of course white Linen: Besides, their Followers were entertained with two great Pots of strong Chinese Beer, a Drink very pleasing to their Palates.  
The twenty sixth about Sunrising, being ready for their Journey, they had such a concourse of Men, Women, and Children, which came to see them from all places, that they were scarce able to pass along the Streets, for the Palakin, or Sedan, in which the Vice-Admiral Van Campen was carried, was often stopped and held by the People to see his Face and speak with him: but because he could not answer them, and his Interpreter not being able to come to him through the Crowd, they let him pass. This Day they went by and through more Forts and Villages, and in the Evening came to the City Hokexcho, where they stayed all Night, being Entertained by the eminentest of the Town, and visited by many ancient Merchants, which stayed with them so late, that they took but little rest.  
The City of Hokexcho lies but a days Journey from Hokzwa: whose Inhabitants maintain themselves for the most part by Husbandry, (for there are few Merchants) being a kind and hospitable People: for Hok signifies Good, and Zwa, Bad.  
Between Hokzwa and Hokexcho lies a Village, in which they make great quantities of Porcelin.  
The twenty seventh before Sunrising they betook themselves to their Journey, accompanied with several Troops of Horse and Foot; and passed most by and through several great strong Towns and Villages. About three a Clock in the Afternoon they Road through a great Town, and in the Evening arrived at a strong Castle, where they were courteously received by the Governor, and first entertained with Bean-broth, afterwards caressed both with Meat and Drink; which kindness they requited with other Presents.  
The twenty eighth they proceeded again on their Journey very early, and in the Afternoon, about three a Clock, arrived at another City, where they were welcomed and presented by the Magistrates with Provision, and received again in a bartering Return, as others had before: after which they drank Spanish Wine and Brandy with the Agents, showing a great liking thereunto, having never tasted such Liquor; so that it was midnight before they went away.  
The twenty ninth, being Friday, they set forward again with the Dawn after daybreak, beholding very many large and sumptuous Tombs, and stately ancient Buildings, besides several Triumphal Arches, adorned with Horsemen, Tigers, Bears, Lions, and Dragons, hewn out of Freestone, and the Arches beautified with Golden Characters: Then they passed a long Bridge over the great River Loyang, consisting of divers Stone Arches, Paved with Free-stones of an incredible size, some of which being about seventy Foot long, three and a half broad, and half a Foot thick, on each side Railed in, and accommodated with Benches of blue Stone, with the Honours of the Empire, as Lions, Dragons, and the like, on several Pedestals.  
The Chineses report this Bridge to have been built in one Night by the Angels, and look upon it as a great Wonder.  
At the Bridge-foot stood an old House, and in it several Figures of Men gilded with Gold. In the same House also was a great blue Stone, inscribed with the antiquity of this wondrous Bridge.  
The middle Arch of this Bridge had lately been broke down, to hinder the Enemy's Passage, about which they were then busy in mending, laying great Beams of Timber over the Gap.  
A little before Noon they came to the City Zwansifoe, where at the Gates they were kindly welcomed by three Mandarins (sent thither to meet them by Santing Houbethetok, Admiral of the Sea, and Governor of the Place,) and conducted into a great Pagode, where they were civilly entertained with a Draught of honourable Bean-broth: after having stayed a little while, they entered the City in company with the same Mandarins, who carried them into a fair House, whither many of the eminentest Citizens out of curiosity came to visit them.  
The Letter from the Admiral Bort to Santing Houbethetok, with the Presents, being a pair of Snaphance Pistols with Holsters, four Yards of Scarlet, and four Pieces of fine Linen, were by the Agents two Interpreters Bedel and Lakka, sent to him: but he told them, That he durst not receive any Letters or Presents before they came back again from Sinksieu, and had spoke with the Viceroy and General Lipovy: but he intended to have visited them, had not his present indisposition hindered him.  
But Houbethetok caused his Servants to carry them Oranges, Nuts, Chestnuts, besides some Porkers, Hens, and Geese; for which they returned the Servants good Spanish Coyn.  
The next day, being the thirtieth, they with their Retinue went to see the City, whilst the Convoy made all things ready for their farther Journey.  
Zwansifoe is a Place of great Trade, full of Shops and Merchandise, adorned 
The City Zwansifoe.  with several Triumphal Arches made of blue Stone, whereon Men, Women, Horses, Dragons, Tigers, Lions, Bears, Apes, were all presented in Graven Work, to the Life, in their various Colours, and on the top the Names of those in honour of whom they were erected. It hath also three high Steeples, with Galleries about them; besides many inferior Temples.  
The Wall about the City being twenty seven Foot high, and of equal thickness, is fortified with many Bulwarks, Moats, and Breast-works: upon the top of it always lie heaps of Stones and Timber, for defence against sudden Storms or Assaults.  
This City hath three Gates with winding Entrances, raised of great blue Stones, and was never Conquered by the Tartars, but delivered up by Colonel Houbethetok, conditionally, That he should still possess the Place of Governor: and likewise because of this free Surrender, the old Magistrates kept their several Offices, and the City their ancient Privileges and Liberties: yet as a sign of Conquest, the Tartars caused all the Steeples to be pulled down, except the three beforementioned. Coxinga once laid Siege to it, but was forced to leave it, and depart with the loss of many Men.  
In the Morning about nine a Clock they proceeded on their Journey, 
The City Engeling.  and at Noon travelled by the ruin'd City Engeling, and all the day long passed thorough, and in sight of divers strong Castles built of Stone, and many Villages.  
About the Evening, they came to two great Forts, called Twaia, distant from 
Forts Twaia.  each other a quarter of an Hours walking, whose Walls built of Freestone, were twenty five Foot high, and twenty eight thick.  
The first of October, in the Morning, the Agents leaving these Forts, came about three a Clock with their Retinue, which consisted of above a hundred Persons, Hollanders, Chinese, and Tartars, to the City Tanwa; surrounded with a Stone-Wall, and Fortified with high Bulwarks and deep Trenches.  
Tanwa is accounted one of the most delightful and populous Cities of all China; 
City Tanwa▪  seated in a rich Valley, abounding with plenty of all things, so that many Merchants resorting thither, take up their Residence, to enjoy the benefit and pleasure of the adjacent Country.  
Without the City are many stately Monuments, where the Towns men make daily Offerings to the Souls of their deceased Parents.  
Three grand Mandarins well Mounted, and followed by a great Train of Servants, bidding the Agents welcome, carried them into a stately Inn, to which they ascended by seven Marble Steps; in it were many Chambers, all the floors neatly Paved, and furnished with Chairs and Stools, Benches, and costly Bedsteds, to accommodate Persons of Quality when they travelled; with Stable-rooms for an hundred Horse, and Lodgings for twelve hundred Men: Here the Agents choosing one of the most convenient Chambers, took their repose that Night.  
The second being Monday, about nine a Clock, the Agents with all their Attendance left Tanwa, and passing a large Stone Bridge, saw several Ruined Towns and Villages, besides others yet in their Splendour, but commanded by Garrisons.  
A little before Sunset, they came to a Fort on the top of a Hill, which whilst they ascended, they were met and courteously welcomed by the Governor; from whom they understood, that the Islanders of Eymuy and Quemuy were upon a Treaty of Peace with the Tartars, but he feared, that it would come to nothing: This Night they Lodged in the Castle, where they had good Entertainment for their Money.  
The third, being Tuesday, the Agents set forward about three a Clock in the Morning, and travelled by and through many Villages, coming at last to a Stone Bridge, at each side Guarded with a Fort.  
In the afternoon, the Agents passed by several Pagodes, where the Chinesy Priests seemed to show them great Respect, Presenting them with Sweetmeats and Tee: After some stay, proceeding on their Journey, came at last in sight of Sinksieu, whither they were sent, not far from whence, they were met by 
Come in sight of the City Sinksieu.  three Mandarins with their Attendants, sent from the Viceroy Singlamong, and the General Lipovi, to Compliment and welcome them.  
After the Ceremonies were passed on both sides, the Agents were by the Mandarins 
Are fetched in.  carried to a great Pagode, from whence after a short Treat, they were conducted through the City into a spacious Court, the usual place of Reception for their travelling Grandees. This House was of so large Reception, that it not only afforded Stable room for above a thousand Horse, but also Lodgings for as many Men; having divers large and handsome Chambers, furnished with stately Bedsteds, Stools and Benches. Here the Agents took their repose, several Soldiers being sent to Guard the House, from the overpressing intrusions of the common People, which by thousands out of curiosity came thither to see and gaze upon the Hollanders.  
The Agents immediately gave notice of their arrival by their Interpreters, 
Make their Arrival known, and desire Audience.  Pedel and Lakka, to the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Taysing Lipovi, with request to grant them Audience, and suffer them to speak with him, that they might deliver the General of Batavia's Letters, that so time might not be lost in employing so stout a Fleet, as lay at present in his own River. Whereupon, the Viceroy and General replied, That they were come a great and long Voyage by Sea and Land, and were weary with travelling, therefore they should stay till the next day, on which they should have Audience.  
Mean while, several Mandarins came to Congratulate their welcome, bringing with them divers sorts of Fruit, as Oranges, Nuts, Chestnuts, and Pears; besides Hens, Geese, and two Swine, for which they returned them Thanks, and gave their Servant's Money.  
The fourth in the Morning, the Agents made themselves ready to deliver 
Ride to the Army.  the small Presents and Letters from Batavia, to the Viceroy and General in the Camp. About eight a Clock, twelve Horses were brought to their Lodging, which they and their Attendance Mounted, and with two Mandarins Road thorough a great part of the City Sinksieu, by many fair and large Triumphal Arches. A little Southward from the City ran a River, which having crossed, they came into the Army, which lay about a Mile and a half distant, consisting of sixty thousand Horse and Foot; five grand Mandarins attended by a File of Musqueteers, conducted the Agents with great honour to the Secretary's Tent, who hearing of their coming, immediately carried them to a great Pavilion, where the Viceroy Singlamong sat in Council with the General Taysing Lipovi, besides two other great Lords, the one being Santing How Bethetok, and the other Haitankon, Governor of Sinksieu.  
The Floors of this Royal Pavilion were Matted; had three public Gates or Entrances close by one another; thorough the middle most and greatest the Viceroy passes only, and his Attendants thorough the other two. Coming close to the Viceroy and General, the Agents were ordered to sit down and deliver their Letters, which they did with great Ceremony; the Presents also were presented and delivered to the Lords; all which were received very courteously, but they would not accept their Presents, before they had a Warrant for so doing, by an answer from the Emperor at Peking. But they kindly accepted of the small Presents which the Admiral Bort had sent them; being twelve Pound and two Ounces of Amber-Beads, strung on a Thread, to the number of twenty five; one Amber Hourglass, and an Amber Cup.  
The Presents from the Lord General and Council of Batavia, sent to the 
Presents for the Viceroy.  Viceroy, were these following:  

One Piece of 

Scarlet  
Green Cloth.  
Blue Cloth.  
One half Piece of Red Cloth.    
One Piece of 

Red Crown Serge.  
Grass Green Crown Serge.  
Blue Crown Serge.  
Musk Colour Crown Serge.  
Black Crown Serge.    
One Musket, Gilt and Polished.  
One firelock, Gilt and Glazed.  
One pair of Polished Pistols, Gilt, with Holsters.  
One pair of Pocket Pistols.  
One Sword with a Golden Hilt.  
Twenty Ounces of Blood Coral, upon one String, in an hundred and ten pieces.  
Sixteen Ounces of Blood Coral, in one Polished Branch.  
One Pound and four Ounces of Amber Beads, in fifty five pieces.  
One great Bengael 
a A kind of japan Chest of Drawers.  Alkatiff.  
Ten pieces of fine white Linen.  
One Pikol of the best Cloves.  
One Case of Rose-Water.  
Two hundred and sixty Katty of Sandalwood, in three pieces.   
The Viceroy and General falling in Discourse with the Agents, asked how long they had been from Batavia? Whereupon they answered, about seventy days: Then they asked, in what time they could come from Holland to China? Answer was made, in about eight Months; at which they marveled exceedingly, and likewise at their answer to the question, If there were any Horses, Cows, Hogs, Sheep, Fruit, and Herbage? and they replied, By thousands, and more than in China. Next they enquired, Why they came with such a Fleet on their Coast? Whereto the Agents said, To serve the mighty Emperor of China, and to prosecute that great Pirate Coxinga, to do him all the damage they could, both by Sea and Land; because, said they, He without ever giving any notice or reasons thereof, came with an Army, in a Warlike Fleet, the last Year in April, and set upon the Netherlanders in the Islands of Formosa and Tayowan, and in nine months' time, not only made himself Master of the Country, but also took the Castle Zelandia from them into his own possession; therefore we seek to unite with the Emperor of China his Forces, and make a League with him, to Engage Coxinga, both by Sea and Land, till we have Conquered and brought him under the subjection of his Imperial Majesty: Whereupon the Viceroy and General Replied, The Islanders of Quemuy, and Eymuy have already Treated on Peace, and made ready their Ambassadors to come to the Court of Peking, to obtain the Emperor's Ratification. Being asked upon what Articles, they began to smile, and answered, they could not tell.  
Then the Hollanders enquired, if they knew where their Prisoners were? and if there was no likelihood to get them released? They replied, they were in Quemuy, and that they would use their best endeavours in a short time to send them to their Ships. Then the Ambassadors proposed, if they might not take possession of some place on the Main Continent of China, or on some Island, for the Harboring their Ships? They answered, you are free to choose any good place, either on the Main, or any Island where you please, and to take possession of it; and likewise to put into all Havens, Bays, and Rivers on the Coast of China, to take in Water and Firing, buy Provisions, and in bad Wether seek for a safe Harbour. To which purpose We will Command Our Subin all Havens, Bays, and Rivers, to aid and assist you, which We doubt not but they will perform.  
The Agents ask them to Grant them leave for the disposing those few Merchandise for Money, which were loaden in their Ships, to pay and refresh their Men with. The Viceroy and General answered, That they had no Power, but they must have Order from the Emperor at Peking; but had they moved it before, they might perhaps have had Authority to Grant.  
After these Discourses ended, every one according to the fashion of the Country, was placed by himself at a Table; viz. the Viceroy Singlamong, the General Taysang Lipovi, the Admiral Santing Houbethetok, the Governor of Zwamsifoe, the Vice-Admiral Van Campen, Constantine Noble, and Bodel the Assistant, beside several Mandarins. Their Meat was all brought and set upon the Tables in Golden Chargers; and their Drink filled out in Cups of Gold, rarely Embossed; so that their Entertainment was very splendid. After Dinner, the Viceroy carried them through his whole Army, and showed them his Forces, making some of his Soldiers to be Exercised before them. Towards the Evening, the Agents taking their leave, returning humble thanks for the Honour they had received, they Mounted their Horses, and Road towards their Lodgings, where the remainder of the Feast and Banquets which they had left at Dinner was brought after them; and according to the manner of the Country, they were visited and Complemented by divers Persons of Quality.  
The fifth being Thursday, the Agents prepared themselves to deliver their 
The Agents go to the General Lipovi.  Excellency's Letters from Batavia, to the General Taysang Lipovi, with the Letter, and small Presents sent to the same Lord, from Admiral Bort; viz. One Pound and four Ounces of Amber; one String of fifty five Corals; one Amber Hourglass; with a tender of the other Presents sent from Batavia, which were yet on board.  
About eight a Clock, the Tartars brought eight Horses to the Agents Quarters, with which, they Road with their Attendants into the Field, about a Canon shot from the Viceroy, to the General Lipovi.  
Coming into his Presence, the Agents made their Obeisance, delivering the Letter, and were commanded to sit down; with the Letter they also proffered him the Presents, which were for the same reasons as the Viceroy Singlamong gave, refused. The Contents of the Letter were thus.  
John Maetzuiker Governor, and the Council for the netherlands States in the Country of India, send this Letter with our kind Salutation, to Taisang Lipovi General, and Deputy Governor of the Territory Fokien, for the Great Emperor of Tartary and China.  
SO soon as Our Governor of Tayowan, had received Your Highness' Letter, and understood that You would in a short time March with a great Army against Coxinga, that all means possible might be used thereto; so by Our Order, he prepared five Men of War, which he sent to the Bay of Ingeling, to Engage with the forementioned Coxinga; but the Ships were by unexpected bad Wether stopped in their Voyage; after which We also had the Misfortune, that Coxinga after a ten months' Siege took Our Castle of Tayowan; but had the Commander of it been a Valiant Soldier, (who is to be sufficiently punished for his Cowardice) it could not possibly have fallen into his Possession.  
All these Accidents and Misfortunes have occasioned, that We have not been in a condition to serve you, and satisfy Singlamong and Your Highness' Desires: Therefore We entreat You not to take it ill, nor think that We have been wanting in Our Endeavours; for We heartily Declare, jointly with the Emperor of China, to seek and use all means to Ruin Coxinga and his Party; with this Proviso, that We may put into all Harbours, and drive an unmolested Trade; and also to take a place in possession on the Continent of China, without which We should not be able to do Coxinga the intended Damage: So that We desire Your Highness to be assisting to us in this Business, and We promise if that may be performed, to clear the Chinesy Seas from that Pirate.  
And to show that We on Our part, really intent what We Propose; We have at present sent to the Bay of Hoksieu twelve Men of War, and a considerable number of Soldiers, furnished out with all things fit for the Service, in whose sight, We believe Coxinga will not dare to venture forth to Sea. The Admiral Balthasar Bort, whom We have made Chief Commander of them, hath Order to join with Your Highness' Forces, and prosecute all such Adventures as shall happen; to which, God grant a good and happy Event.  
To Salute the Lord Singlamong, and Your Highness, in Our behalves, and to speak with You about several Affairs; We have expressly sent with these Letters, Our Agent Constantine Noble, whom We desire Your Highness to receive Courteously, and Credit his Words; for all things shall be to Our Content, what he shall Treat with Your Highness about; and as a sign of Our good Inclination towards You, We send to Your Highness the under-written Presents, with Request, that Your Highness would be pleased to accept of.  

One Piece of 

Green Cloth.  
Blue Cloth.  
Black Cloth.  
Half a Piece of Scarlet.  
Half a Piece of Stammel, in one Case.    
One Piece of 

Red Crown Serges in a Bale.  
Grass Green Crown Serges in a Bale.  
Blue Crown Serges in a Bale.  
Musk Colour Crown Serges in a Bale.  
Black Crown Serges in a Bale.    
One long Fowling-Piece.  
One pair of Pistols and Holsters.  
One Sword with a Gilded Hilt, in a Case.  
Eighteen Ounces and a half of Blood Coral, in an hundred and eight pieces.  
Three Pound and three Ounces of Amber, in four pieces.  
One Pound and an Ounce of Blood Coral, in fifty four Pieces, in a Box.  
Six Pieces of fine white Linen, in a Pack.  
Half a Pikol of Cloves, in a Bag.  
A Case of Rose-Water.  
An hundred eighty five Pound of Sandalwood in three Pieces.   
From the Castle in Batavia, June the 21. in the Year 1662. john Maetzuiker.  
The Letter to the Viceroy was written almost after the same manner, viz. to Request a Free Trade through the Empire of China.  
After delivery of the Letters, and Compliments from the Lord General and Council, with Wishes of long Life to his Highness Lipovi, that he might Triumph over his Enemies; they fell into Discourse about business concerning the occasion of their coming thither; as in the Audience the day before, the General had understood already: They Requested him that he would be assisting to the Viceroy, in the releasing of the Hollanders, in number thirty nine, thirteen Men, six Women, seven Children, and thirteen Slaves and Slavesses) which were said to be Imprisoned on the Islands Euymuy, or Quemuy, and exchange them for a Mandarin, and his Servants, being of Coxingas Party, and came over with the Agents from Batavia; whereupon General Lipovi promised to do his best Endeavours, and send the released Prisoners aboard.  
The General being also asked, If the Netherlanders might not Sail in and out of the Bays, Havens, and Rivers on the Coast of China, to fetch Water and Wood, and buy Provision for their Money, or in time of bad Wether, to come into any Harbour. He answered, All Havens, Bays, and Rivers are freely open for you, to fetch Water, Wood, and buy Provision; nay, that which is more, said he, We will from this time forward, send to all Harbours, Bays, and Rivers, that are inhabited by the Subjects of this Empire, to aid and assist you in all things; and if you want Money, We will furnish you with it.  
Lastly, being asked, If his Excellency could not assist the Netherlands in the permitting of a free Trade through the Empire: He replied, That to promise such a thing was not in his Power, but must be granted by the Emperor at the Court of Peking; yet promised, that he would write in their behalf about it to the Emperor, if possible, to grant them a free Trade, which was a business that the Merchants in the City Hoksieu much Requested and longed for. But the General Lipovi wondered extremely, that the Admiral Bort should go out of the River Hoksieu with twelve Men, leaving only one behind with the Presents, when as, said he, the Admiral Borts intentions are not known to the Viceroy nor myself; which seemed very strange to the Agents themselves.  
This Discourse ended, they were Treated and Served in Silver Dishes, Plates, and Goblets, Embossed after the same manner as at the Viceroy's.  
Dinner being ended, the Agents desired leave to depart, but the General Lipovi modestly entreated them to stay, and be Merry a little longer; ask them likewise if they had aught else to impart to him; whereupon they answered, Nothing but what they had already acquainted his Excellency with, viz. the releasing of their Prisoners; On which he made answer, that he would lose no time, but do his best endeavour, and shorly send them aboard.  
Then the Agents enquired about Coxingas Death; to which the General replied, That he had been Deceased a considerable time, and that those of the Isles of Quemuy and Eymuy had Treated with them about a Peace, and were sending Ambassadors to Peking, to get the Emperor to ratify it.  
Lastly, Seeing their importunity for dispatch, he said, Why are you so hasty in all your Business? every thing must have its time. About eighteen days hence, I am to be at Hoksiu, with the Viceroy Singlamong, than We will consult together with the Governor of Hoksiu, if you may sell those Commodities that are in your Ships, which to my judgement may be done by the way of connivance.  
The Agents having thus received answers, rewarding the Servants, took their leaves, and Road to the Inn, whither all the Meat that was left on their Tables was brought in Chinesy 
a That is, Baskets.  Suebas.  
About the Evening, nineteen Jonks came thither from the Isles of Quemuy and Eymuy, Laden with Pepper, Cloth, and other Merchandise; wherefore none of the Netherlanders were permitted to go that day, nor the next out of their Lodgings.  
Yet the Agents sent out Ships to inquire what those of the Isles Bartered their Commodities for, who coming back, informed them, that they exchange Rice and other Commodities; for the Inhabitants on those Isles, wanted Provision extremely, because the Tartars had Burnt and Ruined all the Towns, Villages, and Hamlets, which stood along the Shore, on the Main of China, leaving nothing but heaps of Rubbish to testify their former being.  
Neither were any People allowed to live within three Leagues of the Shore, for those that were found in the forementioned Limits, were put to Death without Mercy, so to prevent all manner of supply, either of Provisions or Merchandise to go from those or the Main to their Associates, the public Enemy.  
In the Evening came three Negroes, who could speak Portuguese, and running away from Makou, a Factory of Portugal, were now in service amongst the Tartar Horse; these entering the Agents Lodgings, fell upon the Hollanders with reproachful Language.  
The seventh being Saturday, the Agents Road in the Morning with their 
The Agents address themselves to the Viceroy, and General in the Army.  Attendants to the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Lipovi into the Army, with Request to both, That they would be pleased to Sign what they had in words promised them, that they might give it to their Masters, the Lord General, and the Lords of the Indian Council, and to the Admiral Bort, viz. that they promised to do their best endeavours, if it were possible, to send the Prisoners aboard the Hollanders Ships; and secondly, that they may put into all Harbours, Havens, and Rivers, on the Coast of China with their Ships, and to Sail to and from all Islands, to get Water, Firing, and Provisions for Money, for their Seamen; and in bad Wether, choose any good Harbour to secure their Vessels in. Thirdly, That those Goods which were in their Ships, might be privately sold in Hoksieu; whereto the Viceroy answered about eighteen or twenty days since, (as I said before) I am to be in Hoksieu, than I will consult with the Governor, if you may sell those Goods there, which you have brought in your Ships, which I no ways doubt.  
But as to what concerns the Journey of your Forces with ours, to Ruin Coxinga and his Party, there is no more to be said of it, for those of the Isles are now Treating with us concerning a Peace, so that the Admiral must be silent therein; yet if he should chance to meet with any of their Jonks, or Vessels at Sea, or in Harbours, Havens or Rivers, he may take and carry them away; nevertheless, it would be better to let them pass, rather than to disturb the Coast of China with such sudden Alarms.  
Then the Agents made a complaint to the Viceroy, and General of the three Negroes, that abused them the other Night; whereupon they were immediately brought, and severely punished before them.  
Lastly, The Viceroy desired the Ambassadors, that their followers would stay and be merry with them, and show some skill in their way of Dancing, but they making excuses for them, and taking their leave, went to Sinksieu.  
The eighth being Sunday, in the Morning, the Chinesy Interpreter Lakka, with the two Hoksiean Mandarins (belonging to the Viceroy's Mother) were sent to the Viceroy in the Army, to request, that the Agents might return to Hoksieu.  
After some stay, the Viceroy sent some of his Servants with fifteen Horses Saddled and very richly furnished to their Lodgings, to carry them thorough the City to the Army.  
Having therefore made ready some small Presents, they mounted, and road directly to the Army, addressing themselves in an humble manner to the General, and the rest of the Captains, giving them thanks for the Honour they had received. Hereupon, according to order, the Interpreter Lakka appearing, proffered the Viceroy, in the Vice-Admiral Iohn van Campen's Name, a great Case with fifteen Flasks of Brandy, sixteen Rummers, sixteen Beer-glasses, six handsome Knives, with a Beaver Hat.  
The General Taising Lipovi received from the Hands of the same Interpreter, in the Admiral's Name, a Beaver Hat, a pair of Pistols and Holsters, eight Flasks of Brandy, eight with Spanish Wine, three Knives, three Rummers, and three Beer-glasses.  
The Presents given to Haitangkong, Governor of Hoksieu, was a Castor, six Dutch Knives, three Rummers, three Beer-glasses, six Flasks with Spanish Wine, and six with Brandy.  
The Lord Santing Houbethetok, Admiral of the Sea, and Governor of the City Zwansifoe, was also presented with a Castor, five Flasks of Spanish Wine, and five of Brandy, three Rummers, three Beer-glasses, and five Dutch Knives; all which, though of a small value, were accepted with extraordinary kindness.  
After this, the Agents had a long Discourse with these four Great Ministers, who promised to assist them in all that lay within their Power, alleging, as a proof thereof, That they had already sent their General's Letter to the Emperor, and written in their behalf; so that they did not doubt to get them Licence for a Free Trade through the whole Empire: But at last the Viceroy added,  
You Hollanders must not be too hasty; for We are not to be forced 
Viceroy's Discourse to the Hollanders.  to grant any thing to you; much less can We join our Forces, and make a League with you, against the grand Pirate Coxinga, both by Sea and Land, before We have Order from the Emperor at his Court in Peking.  
We have (continued he) Power to perform what We have promised you; As, Freedom to put into all Havens, Bays, and Rivers lying on the main Coast of China and the adjacent Isles, to fetch Water, Wood, and buy Provision, and furnish yourselves with other Necessaries; nay, We will accommodate you with it upon a free Account: Nay more, you have full Licence to take a convenient place in possession, which is provided of a good Harbour, either on the main Coast of China, or on one of the Islands in the River Hoksieu, or on one of these Places, Tenhai, Sotiha, Kitat, or Onkia, every one of which have large and safe Havens for the accommodation of many Ships.  
As to what concerns your Prisoners, We will speedily send away Letters to the Governors of the Islands Quemuy and Eymuy, to inquire if they be there? If so, We promise to procure their Liberty, and send them aboard your Ships.  
Lastly, The Viceroy and General caused the Interpreter Lakka to tell them, That if they would stay four or five days in Sinksieu, they should have an Answer of their Letters from the Governors of the Islands, and so hear if the Prisoners be there, or not: But if they would depart, they must tarry sixteen or seventeen days in Hoksieu, for the Viceroy and Generals coming thither, because they were desirous to see their Forces and Fleet; mean while they would consult with the Provincials of Hoksieu, and then give their Resolution by the Governor, Whether the several Cargoes which they had in their Ships might not be sold in private. Likewise the Interpreter being so commanded, further told them, That it had been better that their Admiral had stayed in the River Hoksieu, and not gone to Sea, because he would effect little by so doing; for along the Sea-Coast we have nothing but ruined Cities and Villages, where some poor Fishermen, with their Vessels and Nets, with leave of the Governors, live to maintain themselves, because all the greatest Towns and Villages in those Parts were by the Emperor's Order pulled down to the Ground, to prevent the sending of Provisions and Merchandise to the Islands Eymuy and Quemuy, by which means Coxinga and his great Forces being much straightened, he betook himself, with all his Army and Jonks, to Formosa, and not only won that, but Tayowan also, leaving only some small Garrisons of Soldiers on those Isles; yet if by the Treaty now on Foot a Peace be concluded, the Hollanders may easily obtain it of us again.  
Hereupon the Vice-Admiral Campen directed the Interpreter to tell the Viceroy, That the Hollanders hoped, that now would have been the only time to enter into a League with the Great Cham of Tartary, and Emperor of China, that joining their Forces, they might reduce all under the Subjection of his Imperial Majesty.  
Whereupon the Viceroy returned, That is done already, and needs no more to be spoken of: We are now at a Cessation of Arms with the Governors of the Islands; but if the Emperor hath or will accept of the Peace, We know not; yet it hath proceeded thus far, that young Coxinga and all his People will obey, and submit themselves to the Emperor, by shaving off their Hair, except one Tuft, and also become Tributaries; only they demand a peculiar Government, and Garrisons for their own Soldiers; which whether the Emperor will grant, is much to be doubted: However, you must stay sixty or seventy days for an Answer from the Emperor at Peking, viz. If you shall have a Free Trade granted through all China? Which We suppose may be done.  
But Van Campen ordered the Interpreter Lakka to tell the Viceroy and General, That in Peking were many subtle Jesuits and Priests, who bore great spleen to the Hollanders, and sought to scandalise and make them seem odious to the Emperor, because of their difference in Religion among themselves, and likewise for the War maintained by the Hollanders against the two Mighty Kings of Spain and Portugal, to whom these Jesuits and Priests were Confessors.  
The Viceroy and General made answer, That for the same Reason must the Tartars, who under their Emperor the Great Cham of Tartary, have by force of Arms subdued and taken the whole Empire of China, be accounted a despicable People by the Jesuits, because they had done the same thing with the Hollanders; adding, That the Hollanders were the welcomer to them in China, and that they would look to the Priests and Jesuits somewhat better than they had done heretofore. Thus ended the Discourse.  
Then the Viceroy and General, in the presence of many great Mandarins, entertained the Agents and their Retinue, who sat every one at a particular Table, furnished with variety of Meat, served in Gold and Silver Dishes, and being very merry, drunk the Emperors, and the Hollanders General john Maetzuiker's Health.  
The General likewise gave them each two Pieces of Chinese Silk Stuffs, and one Silver Plate; for which the Agents humbly returned them both thanks, and likewise for the Honour and Favor which they had been pleased to show them.  
The Plate given by the General to Van Campen was the biggest and thickest, weighing above twenty Ounces, and eight or nine Inches in Diameter: The undermost or greatest part is quite round, and neatly impressed in the middle with six gilded Chinese Letters; the Edges about it embossed with Flowers, and gilt. On the top, for an Ornament, was like a Handle, a piece Scalloped, the Edges gilded, and the middle wrought with Leaves and Flowers.  
The other Plate, being the Vice-Roys, was much lighter, weighing not above six Ounces, very thin, and no way so well gilded or flowered at the Edges, but only on the Handle, having in the middle sixteen or seventeen Chinese Characters.  
Besides these, every one of the Attendants had a Silver Cognizance given them; but much lesser and lighter than the other.  
Upon the Hollanders first arrival, the Viceroy sent a Letter to the Emperor, informing him of their Intention; and likewise another to the Admiral Bort, whom he desired to stay for his coming, because he was very desirous to see their Fleet, and to that end, for encouragement, proffered to furnish them with Provisions at his own Charge: But Bort being gone with the Fleet towards the North, before the Vice-Roys Letter came to his Hands, and the Vice Roy coming afterwards in vain, it was resented very ill; yet at last he seemed pacified, when told, That it happened through the mistake of not delivering the Letters in good time.  
And now the Ambassadors having leave to return, took their Farewell with many Ceremonies, complemented by the Viceroy and General after the manner of the Tartars, then wishing them a safe Return, they commanded seven Mandarins to conduct them through the Army, beyond all the Guards: From whence they road over a great Bridge, into the City, to their Lodgings.  
The City Sinksieu, lying eleven days Journey into the Country, is cut 
City Sinksieu.  through the middle by a River, which takes its Original out of a Mountain, about an Hours walk beyond the Fort Lantyn: It stands environed with a Stone Wall, broad enough for a Cart and Horses to go upon, and set full of long Poles, pointed with a sharp Iron like a Scythe, with which they can cut a Man asunder at one stroke.  
The City hath handsome Streets▪ paved with Freestone, high Buildings, large Pagodes or Temples of blue Stone, several Houses and Shops well furnished with all manner of Silks, Pourcelan, Linen, and other necessary Commodities.  
All the Windows of the Houses were filled with Spectators, and the Streets on both sides crowded with thousands of People, who out of curiosity came to see the Hollanders, many of whom, as they passed by, wished them all happiness, and a prosperous Journey.  
Being passed through the City with all their Train, which consisted in seventeen Hollanders, about a hundred to carry their Baggage, and fifty Horse and Foot, sent by the Viceroy as their Guard and Convoy, they road in four days to Zwansifoe, from whence in the Evening they came to a great Village named Chinhoe, where they were welcomed by three Mandarins, and conducted into a spacious Pagode, wherein the Images sat on Stools and Tables, being there kindly entertained and treated by the Priests.  
The ninth the Ambassadors set forth very early out of Chinhoe, and travelling all day, at night arrived at a strong Hold, where they intended to take up their Lodging for that night; but they were carried into a Mandarins' House, and accommodated very generously, where amongst others they saw three Ladies, one of whose Feet (with Shoes and all) were but six, another five and a half, and the third five Inches long, occasioned from the strait swaddling of their Legs and Feet in their Infancy, after the Chinese manner; for Women with great Feet they account homely, and those that have little Feet, Beauties; so that the bigger they are, the lesser they strive to make their Feet.  
The tenth setting forward again, they travelled by several ruin'd Villages; They saw also nine strong Castles, and many long▪ haired Chineses Heads, hanging in Baskets on Trees; for all the Chinese of Coxingas Party, which refused to cut their Hair, were (when found) by the Emperors Command decollated, and their Heads hanged up in that manner.  
In the Evening they came to the City Tamwa, where they were received by 
City Tamwa.  three Mandarins, conducted to a great House like a Court of Guard, and entertained with variety of Meats.  
The Eleventh in the Morning they left Tamwa, and proceeding on their Journey, went through several other Villages and Fortifications; in the afternoon coming to the Castle Tamhoe, they retired thither to rest themselves, 
Fort Tamhoe.  because Constantine Noble was much troubled with an Ague, where the Governor entertaining them with variety of Dishes, they made by several Presents a civil Return.  
The twelfth they left Tamhoe, and travelled that day by five great Villages, and many Garrisons, and at Noon arrived at the City Zwansifoe, where met by 
City Zwansifoe.  the Mandarins, and conducted into an ancient Building: After a little stay, they passed on to Santing Houbethetok his House, a Man of great Quality, and Governor of this City, whom they proffered the Presents sent him by the Admiral Bort, viz. A pair of Pistols, five Dutch els of Scarlet, and four Pieces of fine Linen; but because they seemed to Van Campen and Noble too little, they added a Demy-castor, five Dutch Knives, three Rummers, three Beer-glasses, five Flasks of Brandy, and five of Sack; all which Santing Houbethetok received, and caused to be brought to him by his Servants; and having treated the Ambassadors very splendidly, gave each of them two Chinese Rolls of Silk, and a great Silver Medal, whereon with Golden Letters his Name was engraven, which was a Passport, signifying, That whoever bore it were Persons of Quality, and so to be looked upon as no less than Lavyaes', that is, Lords, or Fathers. This done, they began a long Discourse about the Dutch and Chinese Wars, and also that of Coxinga. Lastly, they desired his Assistance in the procuring for them a Free Trade in China; of which he seemed no ways to doubt, saying, Were your Ships here hard by, or in the River, I would buy all your Commodities. Having discoursed a little while, and been plentifully feasted, they took their leaves, and road to their Lodging, where divers Mandarins, out of curiosity, came to visit and speak with them, and bringing Fruit and Sweetmeats, kept them company most part of the Night.  
The thirteenth at daybreak the Agents left Zwansifoe, and travelled until they reached Zwansehoo, a Place of very considerable strength, into which they 
Fort Zwansehoo.  were received by three Mandarins, who gave them a very handsome Entertainment.  
The fourteenth, being Saturday, they left Zwansehoo, and going on all day, came towards Evening to a well-guarded Place called Enwacho, where they took their Repose that Night in a Temple, in which they were nobly accommodated by the Priests.  
On Monday Morning, the sixteenth, the Agents set forward again, and that night reached the City Enwa, into which being conducted by three great Mandarins, 
City Enwa.  they were brought into a great Walled Pagode, wherein above fifty Chinese Priests having their abode, gave them a welcome Reception.  
Many Apartments were in this Pagode, every one furnished with various Images, which being as big as the Life, sat clothed in rich Apparel, on Stools, round about Tables: All the Priests offered Incense to these their Idols, before whom also burned many Lamps, with taboring on a Drum, and singing.  
The next day the Vice-Admiral Van Campen presented the Priests with twenty Crowns of Silver Coin, for which they returned him many complimental Thanks, after the Chinese manner.  
The same day proceeding further on, they passed a most delightful and rich Country, which had not been wasted by the War, but remained still in its full Glory: Here they saw divers well-built and walled Villages, and likewise many ancient Structures, and beautiful Tombs, each of which had a convenient Entrance, and within that an arched Passage leading to the Grave, where they burned Offerings to the Dead. There were also Tombs on which lay great Turtles carved of blue Stone, and others adorned with Columns, and arched above.  
In the Evening they arrived at Fort Lantongzwa, standing on Mount Tishoo, 
Fort Lantongzwa.  into which they were introduced by three Mandarins, and conducted to the Governor's House, who entertained them nobly, and had a long Discourse about the Dutch, Tartar, and Chinese War.  
The eighteenth they began their Journey about Noon, not able sooner to get Men to carry them and their Goods, and travelled towards the Evening through a great unwalled Village, where they were invited to a civil Treat by a grand Mandarin.  
Here the Agents found five Chinese, which a few days before were fled with a Jonk from Tayowan, amongst which was one who smattered so much broken Dutch, that Van Campen could understand when he told him, That Coxinga, and the General Bethekok, two such Leaders that China afforded not the like, being overpowered and straightened by the Tartars, both despairing, ended their days in Tayowan, where since happened such a Famine, that many died, suffering by extremity of want.  
At the Evening arriving at the City Hokzwa, three Mandarins led them to a spacious House, whereto all Governors, when they travel about Public Affairs, are conducted; for these Houses, as we said before, have many large Chambers▪ furnished with good Beds, and all manner of Furniture, both for their Lodging and Diet, with large Out-rooms for Servants, and Stables for Horses. The Governor of the Town sent the Agents good store of fresh Provisions. After Supper many Grandees of the City, and two Mandarins that came lately from Peking, visited them, who told them, that all the News there was, that the Peace between the Emperor and Coxinga would not be concluded, because the Islanders of Eymuy and Quemuy would have their own Governors and Soldiers. They also acquainted them of the sudden Death of Coxingas Envoy in his Journey to Peking, and that there was no News of sending another in his stead.  
Thursday, being the nineteenth, a great Train of People road through the City, that came from Hoksieu, and were going to Sinksieu, to the Viceroy, with Clothes and other Goods, and also with News of his Wives Mothers Death, which forced the Agents to stay for Men to carry their Necessaries. Mean while the Vice-Admiral Campen went to view the City, and walking along, met with a Slave that was run away from Macaw, and served now in the Chinese Army as a Soldier, who leading him out of the City, showed him a Christian Temple, where, according to the Slaves Relation, Father Martinius, famous for his Writing of the Chinese Atlas, and other remarkable Antiquities of that People, died thirty seven days before.  
Anno 1653. this Martinius came with a Portuguese Frigate from Macasser to Batavia, 
Martinius Hist. of China, published in 1653.  after having been ten or twelve Years in the Empire of China, where he preached the Gospel, and converted, as they say, above two thousand Souls, and went the same Year from Batavia in the good Ship the White Elephant, commanded by the forementioned john Van Campen, to Holland; but the Ship running into Bergen in Norway, Martinius travelled from thence through the Sound to Amsterdam, where he published the forementioned Works.  
At Noon leaving Hokzwa, and proceeding on their Journey, in the Evening 
Leave Hokzwa▪  they entered a Village, and according to custom went into a great Pagode, where they were courteously entertained by the Priests, and took repose that Night.  
On Friday Morning, being the twentieth, setting out very early, they road through a Village abont an English Mile and a half long, which the Night before was the greater part burnt down by Thiefs, and in the Fire about a hundred Men, Women, and Children consumed to Ashes, or otherwise murdered.  
About Noon having passed the Village, they were brought to a great House where the Chineses kept Watch. Here was but one Mandarin, who received the Agents very friendly, and seemed heartily to rejoice that they had not shared in the last night's Calamity. In the afternoon they took their leave, and went, being guided by the Mandarins, to the Shore of an Inland River, where they and their Retinue Embarked themselves in a Vessel that lay ready for to carry them to Hoksieu. Towards Night they came to Lavyit, or Anlauja, a Strong-hold, 
Fort Anlauja.  built on the top of a Mountain: Near which was a Ferry for the ease of Travellers.  
The one and twentieth, being Saturday, in the Morning they came to Lamthay, belonging to Hoksieu, where they were kindly received by divers Mandarins, and the Governor of the City Engeling, who nobly entertained them. After Dinner they were conducted through the City, and showed many ancient Edifices, and spacious Pagodes, or Temples. At Night they returned to their Vessel, notwithstanding the Governor of Minjazen proffered them his House for their Lodgings.  
The two and twentieth they sent the Chinese Interpreter Lakka, with two Mandarins, to the City Hoksieu before them, and prepared themselves with some Presents of Scarlet, Crown-Serge, and Bays, to give to Hanlauja the Governor of Minjazen, and likewise to the Ruler of Hoksieu: who hearing of their arrival by the Interpreter Lakka, sent them fifteen Saddle-Horses: But Van Campen not being very well disposed, stayed in the Bark, ordering Constantine Noble to take the Presents, and ride with all their Attendants to Hoksieu, where after a kind Reception, towards Evening he returned to Lamthay, to the Vessel.  
The next day, being the twenty third, the Mandarin of Lamthay invited the Agents to Dinner, which they would willingly have put off; but fearing his Displeasure, they granted his Request. Many great Mandarins, besides the Governors of Minjazen and Engeling, were present at this Feast, which was ended to the general satisfaction of all, with great jollity and good cheer. The Chinese Lords advised the Agents to stay seven or eight days longer, to congratulate the Vice-Roys Return, and for the farther accomplishing their Business; promising them their Assistance in their Request, for selling those Merchandizes that were in the Ships.  
The twenty fourth, being Tuesday, in the morning Van Campen and Noble road both to Hoksieu, to compliment the Governor and other Mandarins, and likewise to present them with five els of Scarlet, a piece of Crown Serge, and a Demy-Castor; which the foresaid Lords received very courteously, promising to be assistant to the Agents in the procuring a Free Trade for them, provided they were not too hasty.  
About Sunset the Agents took their leave, and mounting their Horses, rode through a great Throng of People out of the City, and came at Night to their Vessel, lying at Lamthay, where they took their Repose.  
The City Hoksieu, otherwise called Changcheu, hath many stately Buildings of blue Stone, and several great Pagodes or Temples; being environed with a high Wall, fortified with Bulwarks and deep Ditches, and the Streets well paved.  
The twenty fifth the Governor of the Fort Engeling, accompanied with several very eminent Mandarins, came to visit the Agents in their Jonk, where they were welcomed by the Hollanders with Spanish and Rhenish Wine, which having drunk, they spent some time in discoursing about the War.  
This Fort of Engeling stands on the Seashore, before which is a safe Harbour for Ships: Near the Bay stood formerly a great Town of Trade of the same Name, but was quite ruined and razed by the Tartars.  
But during the Mandarins▪ and Agents Discourse together in their Jonk, came a Tartar, a Soldier of Hanlavia, with a Letter from the Admiral Bort, to the Agents john Van Campen, and Constantine Noble: The Contents thereof to this purpose.  
THis Morning I have understood of your coming back to Hoksieu, from Our Secretary john Melman, sent from Us to the River of Hoksieu to inquire for you, and deliver a Letter to the Governor of Minjazen. Since that being informed, as likewise by your Letter written in haste, That the Tartars have concluded Peace with those of Eymuy and Quemuy, from whence We may suppose that they will begin nothing with Us to their prejudice, but rather prevent it (if they have but any opportunity) and to make Satisfaction for all Damages (because with this Peace they are become their Subjects) done already, and which hereafter we may do them: To prevent all, We wish that We had the Domburgh Frigate here with us.  
Yet nevertheless, We give no such Order by these Presents, that by such sudden alterations we may create no suspicious thoughts in them: But We do hereby send you Our good Sailer the Sea-dog Frigate, that upon the receipt hereof you may come to us. This we desire you to observe, that We may hear your Adventures, and what you have effected in your Business, that then We may consult and resolve one with another, what is best to be done in this Affair, for the Benefit of the Public, and prejudice to the Enemy.  
From aboard the Naerden Frigate in the Fleet before Tinghay, October 25. 1662. Balthasar Bort.  
The Governor of Engeling, with the Mandarin of the Fort, at the Agents Request, provided instantly thirteen Saddle-Horses, whereon they road to Hoksieu, to obtain Licence to return to their Ships; whither they came about Noon, and went to the Governor and Mandarins, of whom they desired leave to depart to their Fleet; whereto the Governor replied, Why so hasty, when you are still weary of your journey? It is better for you to stay till the Viceroy Singlamong and General Lipovi come hither: Your Business hath a good face, and We have writ to the Emperor, at his Court in Peking, on your behalf; and in all likelihood We shall have an Answer back in fifty or sixty days; and in nine or ten days, at farthest, the Viceroy and General will be here: It will be requisite that you stay so long, and be present to fetch in the Viceroy, which he will take as a great Kindness: Mean while you may come daily to visit the Mandarins, which will much promote your Desires. We do certainly believe, That the liberty of a Free Trade will be permitted you, and likewise to dispose of all those Goods in your Ships. Whereupon the Agents returned their humble and hearty Thanks, but told them by their Interpreter Lakka, That their Admiral had writ to them to make what haste they could to the Fleet, which lay near the Cape of Tinghay. Whereupon the Governor made Answer, Will they go? Let them do what they please: But first we will eat. Upon which, Meat being brought, every one was set at a distinct Table, according to the fashion of the Country, and served in Gold and Silver Chargers. Dinner being past, they had a long Discourse concerning the Chinese and Dutch War; which ended, the Agents took their leaves; then mounting, they road through the City, and came at last to Lamthay to their Bark, where having given the Governor and Mandarin of the Fort a Visit, they went aboard their Jonk.  
The twenty sixth, being Thursday, the grand Mandarin, Hanlavia, Governor 
The Agents Treatment with Hanlavia.  of Minjazen, came in the Morning to the River side, and fetching the Agents with great Ceremony out of the Jonk, invited them to a Treatment: They fearing to incur his displeasure if they refused, accepted of his kindness, where they were courteously welcomed, and saluted by the Servants with loud Acclamations, crying out, Fueet, that is, Long live; a peculiar Ceremony of great Honour in this Empire, and used by none but Persons of great Quality, which generally command their Servants to do it. The Feast ended, they began a long Discourse about the War in Holland and China, which last continued twenty Years, in which Hanlavia always performed great Service for the Cham of Tartary, and was a main Assistant in his Conquests.  
He also told them, That he prepared himself to bring that grand Pirate Coxinga under the Emperor's Subjection; to which purpose (said he) I am by the Emperor's Order sent towards the Sea, not seeing any hopes at all of a Peace between the Cham and Coxinga, who by Ambassadors sent to the Emperor in Peking much desires it. I also understand, That the Hollanders coming into the River Hoksieu, is very acceptable to the Great Cham; so that to obtain liberty for a Free Trade for you through all China, is not to be doubted: Why then (proceeded he) are you so hasly to be gone? You ought rather to have stayed in the River Hoksieu, till the Viceroy and General Lipovi were come, since the Peace with Coxinga will come to no effect.  
This Discourse and their Entertainment being ended, the Agents took their leave of the Governor Hanlavia, and other eminent Mandarins, who, according to the manner, wished them a Boon Voyage.  
Whilst they were sitting at Table, they heard the Word Fueet several times repeated, whereat some of their Attendance bowed, and others fell flat on the Ground.  
The Tartars being asked if the Word Fueet signified Holy, they answered, No, but it was a Word of Ceremony, by which they partly expressed how their Servants obeyed them, and partly how welcome their Guests were.  
The Vice-Admiral Van Campen having gratified the Servants for their Attendance, went immediately with his Jonk aboard the Seahound Frigate, Commanded by john Hendrikson, who the next day, being the twenty seventh, weighed Anchor, and fell down with the Ebb to the Mouth of the River, that so he might with the first fair Wind sail to the other Ships at Tinghay, where he arrived the following day in the Evening, when the Vice-Admiral and Noble caused themselves immediately to be put aboard the Admiral, in the Naerden Frigate, there to give him an account of their Affairs and several Adventures, and especially deliver him the Letters sent him from the Viceroy Singlamong and General Lipovi; the Contents of which consisted most in the Promises already mentioned by the same Lords to Van Campen and Noble, of their kind proffer of Friendship, Licence to put into all Bays, Havens, and Rivers on the Coast of China, with their Ships, either in foul Wether, or otherwise; and likewise to take Water and Wood, and buy Provision for their Seamen.  
The thirtieth, about Noon, Constantine Noble was sent with the Seahound Frigate, and Ter-Boede Pink, from the Fleet to the River Hoksieu, there to promote the Business, and strictly to observe all Passages.  
The one and thirtieth the Vice▪ Admiral, though surprised with a Pestilential Fever, and great Sickness, was commanded to Sail about the East with six Ships.  
The second of November, being Thursday, the Finch went from Tinghay to the River Hoksieu.  
The third, by the Admiral's Order, two hundred Soldiers were put ashore to drive the Chinese out of Tinghay into the Mountains; but finding them in a good posture of defence, they retreated without effecting any thing.  
The fourth the Seahound Frigate came again from the River Hoksieu to the Fleet at Tinghay, as also the Finch the next day; and then all the Ships took in Wood  
The sixth the Breukelen Pink set Sail for Batavia, with the Goods that had been taken at Sea, and Letters of Advice concerning the Agents Adventures at Sinksieu, being conveyed beyond the Islands by the Seahound Frigate, and Ter-Boede Pink, who on the next day came again to an Anchor with the rest of the Fleet near Tinghay.  
The eighth in the Morning Van Campen put to Sea with the Zierikzee, Ankeeveen, and Loenen Frigates, to Cruise Northerly; but being hindered by a Storm and contrary Tides, came to an Anchor again about Noon in ten Fathom Water.  
Friday, the tenth, the Vice-Admiral weighed Anchor again, to steer Northerly, but came back without any effect; yet soon after they spied fifteen or sixteen Chinese Jonks in the South-West, at a great distance, to chase which, they presently sent the Seahound and Calf Frigates, with the Zierikzees Boat, and those of the Ankeveen, full of armed Men; but the Chineses escaped by their nimble Sailing, only one Champan, with a few Fish, was taken by the Vice-admirals' Boat near the Shore; and another larger Vessel, deserted by all her Men, was sunk by the Hollanders.  
The eleventh, being Saturday, Van Campen went out again with his Frigates, to sail towards the North; but being driven Southerly by a strong contrary Current, he cast Anchor in fourteen Fathom Water, near one of the nethermost Islands of Pakka▪  
On Sunday Morning, being the twelfth, they saw two Jonks in the South-West, seeming to steer towards Tinghay, which Van Campen chase, endeavoured to get to the Northwards; but laboured in vain, because of contrary Winds and Tides: at last he was forced near the Islands of Pakka, which although 
Islands of Pakka.  pretty large, yet are for the most part waste and untilled, and inhabited by none but Fishers and poor Rustics: Nevertheless there is good Harbour for Ships, and Refreshments of Water, and Provisions to be had.  
The thirteenth, being Monday, Van Campen with the Ebb set Sail Northwards, between the Islands Pakka, in eighteen, nineteen, and twenty Fathom Water; but came, after the Tide spent, to Anchor in thirteen Fathom Water, under the Eastermost Island.  
About Noon the Fleet weighed to get more towards the North, and against the Evening Anchored in eight Fathom Water, about half a League Nor-Eastand-by-East from the Eastermost Isle before Pakka.  
The fourteenth Van Campen set Sail again with a Nor-Nor-East Wind, in six, seven, and eight Fathom, between the Isles of Pakka▪ and about Noon, forced by contrary Tides, came to an Anchor in seven Fathom: Towards Evening weighing again with the Ebb, he let fall his Drag about midnight in eighteen Fathom, gravelly Ground, not far from the place where the Coast of China hath many high Mountains, and broken Land; yet behind them very pleasant and fertile Meadows and Rice-Fields.  
The fifteenth setting Sail again, he Anchored about Noon under an Isle, in thirteen Fathom Water, gravelly Ground, about Canonshot from Shore, whither he sent his Boat to see for Water.  
From hence setting Sail, he came into a Bay behind Campens Point, so called 
john Van Campen's Bay▪  from himself, where he dropped Anchor in five Fathom Water, there being a convenient Harbour, and safe Retreat against hollow Seas and turbulent Winds. On the North side of this Point, lying in twenty six Degrees and fifty one Minutes Northern Latitude, may be seen the Ruins of the City Tikyen, or Tykin, formerly a place of great Trade, but lately destroyed by the Tartars. Here the Zierikzee's Boat was sent ashore, with the Pilot Auke Pieters, and thirteen Men, to fetch Water. Near the Shore, between the Mountains, appeared a pleasant Valley, flourishing with Rice, Carrots, and all manner of Fruit. You may freely, without fear or danger, sail between the main Coast and these Isles; yet not without some care, because divers Shoals lie near the Coast.  
The eighteenth, being Saturday, Van Campen set Sail with his Squadron, the Wind Nor-Nor-East; and laveering it between Campens Point and the forementioned Isles, between seven and thirteen Fathom Water, gravelly Ground, they discovered the old Zajer Isle East-Nor-East, four or five Leagues distant, in twenty seven Degrees and fifteen Minutes Northern Latitude, and about Noon came to an Anchor in ten Fathom Water, gravelly Ground. In the Night setting Sail again, they ran the next day about Noon behind Campens Bay, where they were forced to lie till Friday the twenty fourth, by contrary Winds, Tides, and Calms. Towards Night the Finch came also to an Anchor there.  
Friday the twenty fourth the Ships went to Sea together, and with a Nor-Nor-East Wind endeavoured to sail Easterly; but being driven back by the Tide, they came to an Anchor in eight Fathom, and had the North Point of the Island with Breasts, South-West, and the old Zajer▪ East and by North. At Night, in the second Watch, when the Tide was almost spent, they weighed Anchor again, and the next Evening road in eight Fathom Water, having the Chinese City Samzwa Nor-East and by East, and the Isle Old Zayer Sou-Sou-East, and Sou-East and by South, and the Isle with Breasts Sou-Sou-West.  
The City Samzwa seated on the hanging of a Mountain, and planted round 
City Samzwa▪  about with high Trees, was ruined by the Tartars: It boasts a safe Harbour for Ships, to defend them from the Southern and Northern stormy Seasons. The Hollanders going ashore here, found one Pagode or Temple, with divers Images, about fifteen Leagues from Tinghay.  
The twenty seventh the Point of Samzwa bearing Westward two Leagues from them, they descried a white Cliff in the Sea, about three Leagues from the Shore, and three Isles in the East-Nor-East, and by Observation found themselves at Noon to be in twenty seven Degrees and thirty nine Minutes Northern Latitude.  
In the Evening Van Campen came to an Anchor with the Ankeveen Frigate in eleven Fathom Water, gravelly Ground; but the High-land and Meliskerk Frigates, with the Loenen and Finch, went behind the Isle of Good Hope. Van Campen in the Night, the Tide favouring him, set Sail again, and was followed by the Ankeveen Frigate only, the other four lying still behind the Isle, without making the Reason thereof known.  
The next day, forced by Storm to come to an Anchor again in ten Fathom Water, he was driven from two Anchors, towards the seven Rocks a little Southward of Zwatia, not without great danger of Shipwreck.  
The City Zwatia, lying in the mouth of a River near the Sea, and also ruined 
City Zwathia▪  by the Tartars, is inhabited by mean and poor People, which are very slow in rebuilding the same. Opposite to the Nor-West side of the River lies a Village called Zwatho, whither most of the Citizens fled, it being not laid waste by the Tartars.  
The first of january, Van Campen concluded, upon Advice of the Ships Council, by force of a Storm out of the Nor-East and by East, to set Sail again, to get from the Shore; so that he drove down Sou-West and by South, to Brest-Island, and in the afternoon came to an Anchor in the Bay behind Campens Point in nine Fathom.  
The other Frigates, and the Finch, lay still at Anchor, contrary to their Orders.  
The third, the Ankeveen Frigate, commanded by jacob Swart, having been busied about getting his Anchors aboard, came and rode by the Vice-Admiral.  
The fourth in the afternoon they spied in the Sou-Sou-West between seventy and eighty Fisher-Jonks, and other Vessels, standing towards the North, which they let all pass: About the evening they stood to and again, yet were got out of sight next Morning, on which the Captain Auke Pieters was commanded to go ashore, with fifty Men, to gather Sallad-herbs and Potatoes to refresh their People.  
The sixth in the Evening the four other Ships came to an Anchor near Van Campen, having before lain behind the Isles Northward of the River Zwatia.  
The eighth in the Morning they spied six Jonks fishing in the Sou-East and by East, behind the Breast-Isle; and in the afternoon, two Ships in the Sou-East, in the Bay of Pakka, and also heard the Report of several Cannon▪ shot from thence; whereupon a Council being called, Harmans' Symonsz, Commander of the High land Frigate, was sent thither, with Order, That when he came to them, he should fire five Guns one after another, if he needed Van Campen's Assistance; if not, to fire none, but come back to the Fleet.  
Against the Evening the High-land Frigate came to an Anchor South-West and by South, three Leagues distant from the Fleet.  
The ninth in the morning they saw above twenty Fisher-Jonks near the Shore of Pakka, who were putting to Sea to fish; but not being able to get out, were by the Current driven towards the South: Van Campen chased them between the Islands; yet the Jonks by their swift sailing, escaped him.  
In the afternoon the Hollanders came again to an Anchor behind Campens Point, in nine Fathom Water, about a small Canonshot from the Shore.  
The tenth they saw two Frigates in the Bay of Pakka, viz. the Seahound, in which the Admiral Bort was, (as they understood the next day) and the Highland, which on the eighth was sent thither for Intelligence.  
The eleventh in the morning the Admiral Bort came in the High-land Frigate to an Anchor about half a League from the Vice-Admiral.  
Mean while the Admiral Bort had by Storm taken the Fort Kitat, lying in 
Fort Kitat taken by the Netherlanders.  the Bay of Pakka, and with it plundered all the Towns, Villages, and Hamlets, being twenty in number, belonging thereto: All which he had written to the Vice-Admiral Van Campen, the tenth of the said Month, from the Bay of Pakka; adding thereto, That had he not been detained eight days by tempestuous Wether, he had been with him before that time, to find out Zwathia, lying about the North, in hopes there to find several Trading Jonks.  
The same day Harman Symonsz went aboard the Vice-Admiral, being sent thither by the Admiral from the Bay of Pakka, with the Letters beforementioned, bringing also with him a small Supply of fresh Victuals, which was equally distributed amongst the Ships.  
They found in Kitat nothing but a little Rice, Salt, and a little Lumber, besides twelve Women, and fifteen Youths, which were transported for Servants to Batavia.  
The Hollanders fell upon this Place, because some of Coxingas Party resided there.  
The twelfth they descried three Jonks and a Fisher's Boat in the North-East, one of them being without a Mast: Van Campen, by the Admiral's Order, set Sail towards them with five Ships: That Jonk which had lost her Mast was only taken, the rest escaping by the advantage of the Tide. In the taken Jonk they found no more but only Salt, Rice, and Wood Towards Evening the Frigate came again to the Prize-Jonk, and about eight at Night towed her along with them to Campens Point.  
In the afternoon the Seahound and High-land Frigates, and Ter-Boede Pink, came up to the Vice-Admiral, and at Night Anchored South and by West about a League from them.  
Wednesday, being the thirteenth, the Ter-Boede was sent from the Fleet to the River Hoksieu, there to stay till Van Campen's Squadron came back from the North.  
Against Noon the Overveen Frigate came out of Kitat-Bay, near the Fleet, and turning up Northerly, in the afternoon was forced by contrary Winds to lie in seven Fathom water.  
About midnight the Fleet weighed Anchor, and hearing several Cannons fired, and Van Campen fearing some of the Frigates to be run ashore, sent his Boats thither, and found the Calf to be driven very near the Shore, on which the High-land Frigate had also been fast, but was got off again: whereupon Van Campen returned.  
Ysbrant, Pilot to the Admiral, and another, were sent aboard of the Vice-Admiral, to inquire how many healthy persons he had in his Ship, of Seamen and Soldiers; and what number of Seamen he could be able to send ashore fit for Service: whereupon he replied, about thirty.  
Thursday about Noon the Fleet was in twenty seven Degrees and nineteen Minute's Northern-Latitude, two Leagues and a half from West and by North from Zwamzwa Cape.  
In the afternoon about two a Clock the Fleet weighed Anchor again, and in the Morning were within four League's North and by East of Zwatia, three Leagues East Nor-East from Cape Elephant, and three Leagues and a half West and by South from Zwamzwa. About Noon the Fleet, forced by contrary Winds and Tides, cast Anchor in eleven or twelve Fathom Water, about three League's Nor-West, and Nor-West and by West from the River Zwatia, and two Leagues and a half Southeast and by East from Cape Elephant; where Riding all Night, they Sailed next day toward the North, and soon after turned Westward up the River of Zwatia, where the Vice-Admiral had Cruised with six Sail the twenty eighth and twenty ninth of the last Month.  
The Marks whereby Seamen may know this River, are towards the North a great white Shelf, and on the Shore many Cliffs.  
A little more to the Northward of it lie two Islands, behind which is a safe Harbour.  
About Noon the Fleet found themselves in twenty seven Degrees and thirty five Minutes Eastward from the South-Point of the River Zwatia, from whence Sailing West-South-west into the River, they had from six to twenty three Fathom Water, being the shallowest gravelly Ground; and with the same Course they came before Zwatia, where they cast Anchor in seven Fathom Water, about a Musquet-shot from the Shore: on which the short-haired Chineses stood with Red Flags, (a sign of Peace by them, as the White is with us) in great companies, expecting the Netherlanders, without any offering to come to their Ships. This continued a whole hour, when the Admiral Bort Commanded the Guns to be fired upon the Town. The Chineses thus rudely saluted, immediately let fly their White Flag in sign of War, and shooting with Muskets and Blunderbusses, flourished their Falchions and Scytheses over their Heads, yet betook themselves with all their Movables which they were able to carry out of the City, to flight towards the Mountains; others with their Vessels ran up the River; whereupon the Admiral Bort Commanded the Vice-Admiral Van Campen to go ashore with eight Boats and seven Shallops well Man'd and Armed, which Bort himself promised to follow. Van Campen Landing without any resistance on the Shore, found the City Rebuilt, and the Houses furnished with Tables, Chests, Stools, and Benches, besides abundance of Thrashed and Unthrashed Rice, called Bady, Salt, great store of dried and Salt Fish, and also Nets: There appeared seven large Temples, every one apart in a pleasant Grove, Walled round about, and within Paved with Blue Stone, where stood many Humane Figures, Clothed in all sorts of Stuffs, Caps, Coats, Breeches, Shoes, and Stockings, all, as alive, about Tables on Waxed Benches or Stools, Gilded; on each Table stood two large square Vessels, or Pots, wherein the Priests burn Incense to their Idols, with perfumed Calambak, Agar, and Sandalwood, which yield a most fragrant smell. On the Tables also lay four pieces of Wood, each a large half Foot long, round on the top, and flat at the bottom, which, to know future events, they throw three times one after another before the Idols.  
Towards Evening Van Campen leaving the Shore went aboard again with all his Men, loaden with the best Plunder, and many Images not spoiled by the Tartars.  
Here it is to be observed, that many Native Chineses are to be understood by 
The Conquered Chineses wear their Hair short as the Tartars.  the Name of Tartars, viz. those who by shaving off their Hair, leaving only a long Lock, have yielded themselves to the subjection of the Cham of Tartary.  
The seventeenth, being Sunday, in the Morning the Ankeveen Frigate, and the Loenen and Finch Commanded by Ysbrant, Pilot of the Naerden, besides four Boats and a Sloop, Manned with Armed Soldiers and Seamen, Sailed up the River to surprise five Jonks laden with Goods, and said to lie for their safety a great way up the River, and if possible to bring them to the Fleet; but if not worth the trouble, to burn them. About Noon they came up with seven Jonks and three Coya's (which are a kind of Vessels lesser than Jonks, as our Mackrel-boats,) which Boarding, many Chineses with their Coats of mail, Helmets and Arms, leaped overboard and swum, and others escaped ashore in their Champans, and the rest, being most of them Women and Children, were taken by the Netherlanders; but all soon released, except five Women. Towards Evening the Master of the Finch went aboard the Naerden Frigate to the Admiral, with Tidings that their Vessels had conquered three great, and five small Jonks, amongst which some carried seven Guns of a side; whereupon he was again sent withthe Meliskerks Boat and Pinnace, well Manned and furnished with Tackling, which he said was wanting for the taken Jonks; all which having aboard, he left the Frigate, and Sailed up the River again in the Night.  
Monday the eighteenth about daybreak they heard a great Cry, made by the Men of the Meliskerks Boat, which was over-set near the Shore: whereupon Van Campen and the Master of the Seahound Sailing thither, found five Men sitting on the Keel of the Boat, so benumbed with Cold, that they were not able to give account what was become of their Fellows; but Rowing up farther where the Boat had been over-set, they found another Man sitting on the Shore, which had been driven three times that Night into the River by the Chinese: He told them that he had not seen one of his Fellows; so that ten Men (they having been sixteen in number) were either drowned or killed. At Night the Finches Pinnace went aboard the Naerden to the Admiral with a Letter of Advice, that they had taken eight Jonks, of which they had burnt four, and brought away the other four.  
The nineteenth, being Tuesday, the Chineses made a Sign, by setting up their red Flag, inviting the Netherlanders to come to them: Whereupon Van Campen and the Master of the Seahound went ashore to know what they desired, and Landing found a great number of Chineses with five red Flags of the five neighbouring 
The red Flag among the Tartar-Chineses signifies Peace, as the white Flag War.  Villages, with the chief Governor from every Village, and five Chinese Priests.  
These being carried aboard to the Admiral, begged and entreated, that he would save their Houses and Temples, that they might make Fires, and shelter themselves from the cold Winter; and likewise not to spoil their little Champans and Fishing-nets; which if it might be granted, they would serve him in all things possible, and within four days bring him out of every Village twenty five Porkers, one hundred twenty five Hens, fifty Ducks, and as many Oranges, Radishes, and other Herbage as they could gather: whereupon, in consideration they would keep their Promise, he assured them to save their Pagodes, Houses, Champans, and Fish-nets; after which three only returned ashore, for the other two were kept aboard, as Hostages till the three returned in four days with the Provisions beforenamed, and all things else they could get out of the five Villages. Those Chineses which stayed aboard being asked by the Admiral, If no Jonks were expected that Season from Japan to Zwatia? they replied, That not one had Sailed thither that Year; which afterwards he found to be true.  
The twentieth, being Wednesday, the two Pinks and Ankeveen Frigate, sent up the River the seventh with four Boats and one Sloop, came to an Anchor with the six taken Jonks, viz. two great and four small: in which they found a little Rice, Pady, or unthreshed Rice, Salt-petre, Indigo, several Priests Coats, Helmets, Swords, Scythes, ten Blunderbusses, besides several Chinese Men, Women and Children, whereof five young Women, and four young Men were kept aboard, and the rest released. Seven other Jonks were also set on fire and sunk in the River, out of which many Chineses leaping were either drowned and killed. The next day two of the small Jonks were broke up and used for fuel, but the biggest of them were new Trimmed.  
The two and twentieth they had a general Thanksgiving in all the Fleet for their Victories over their Enemies. The day after the Admiral by putting out the Companies red Flag, commanded all the Officers of the Fleet aboard, where the Ships Council (for certain Reasons) proposed, yet did not conclude, that the Vice-Admiral Van Campen with his Frigate, the Zierikzee, accompanied with the Highland, Meliskerke, Ankeveen, and the Loenen and the Finch, should Cruise out at Sea before Zwatia, to see for the japan Trading Jonks which come from thence, till the middle of February, and the Admiral Bort should put to Sea the twenty sixth with the Naerden, Calf, Overveen, and Seahound Frigates, besides the five Jonks, two great and three small, and cross over to Kitat and Tenhay, and from thence Sail to the River Hoksieu, there to inquire how affairs stood. It was also judged convenient, that the Ankeveen Frigate, and the Loenen and Finch, should immediately weigh their Anchors, and Sail to the Mouth of the forementioned River, to look for some Jonks that were daily expected; but these Proposals never were put into execution.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning, Van Campen was by Borts Order sent ashore with a hundred and ten Soldiers, and fifty Seamen, to burn Zwatia. No sooner was he Landed, but they saw five Priests, with a great many Chineses standing about a red Flag, which all fell down at his Feet, and humbly begged him to save their Temples, Champans, and Fish-nets, which if he did not, they should perish with Cold and Hunger; and promised against the next Morning (according to their first Proposal) to bring them the Porkers, Hens, Ducks, Oranges, Radishes, and Potherbs: Van Campen moved with compassion, was persuaded to forbear.  
The twenty fifth, being Christmas-day, Van Campen going aboard to the Admiral in the Naerden Frigate, asked him what was best to be done with Zwatia? whereupon Bort replied, That he should lay it in Ashes: which said, Van Campen went ashore with three Boats and three Sloops well Manned, where he found lying on the Shore five Hogs and fifteen Baskets of Oranges, brought thither by five Priests and fifteen Chineses: two of the Hogs, and five Baskets of Oranges were by Van Campen carried aboard to the Admiral, who remitting somewhat of his anger, gave him order to do with Zwatia what he pleased and thought convenient: But before Van Campen came ashore again, the Houses were all in a Flame, occasioned through the wilfulness of the Seamen. Out of the Houses and Pagodes came divers sick Men and Women creeping on their Knees to escape the Flames.  
The same day the Admiral leaving Zwatia, according to their agreement in the Council, with the Naerden, Ankeveen, Calf, and Seahound Frigate▪ two great and two small taken Jonks, went to the Bay of Kitat and Tenhay, to go from thence in some of the Frigates to Hoksieu, as was before designed.  
The twenty sixth Van Campen put also to Sea with four Frigates and two Pinks, wherewith steering about the Shore towards the North, they came to an Anchor in the Evening near an Island (by them called The Good Hope,) three Leagues Northerly from the River Zwatia, in twenty four Fathom Water, gravelly Ground, about Canonshot from the Shore.  
The Admiral's Order to Van Campen, was to keep that Course, or to Cruise for the Chinese Jonks that Traded to japan, till the middle of February, and then to fall down Southerly to Tenhay.  
The twenty seventh the Council in Van Campens Squadron Consulted, whether according to Bort's Order they should keep at Sea, or lie still near the Isle of Good Hope, and to place six or seven Men on one of the highest Hills, there to spy what Jonks were out in the Offin: To which last Proposal they all agreed, from thence Sailing early the next day, with intention to get up higher, yet were by contrary Winds and cross Currents forced back to their former Road.  
The twenty eighth, being Thursday, seven Men were sent ashore, as they had before agreed, up to a rising Ground, there with their Glasses to descry what Traffickers that Sea afforded. In the afternoon six Chineses came in a Champan aboard the Vice-Admiral, bringing with them a fat Swine, nine Hens, twenty four Ducks, eleven Baskets with Oranges, and fourteen Pumpeons, not having a greater store: Amongst them were two of their Priests, which they kept aboard till they should return with more Provisions, which they promised in three days; but they failed, not coming the third day, yet Van Campen set the Pledges ashore on the twenty sixth, who afterwards returned to inquire for one Chilo, a Chinese Merchant, whom they feared was slain, or their Prisoner: Van Campen answered, That he knew of none such, but would inquire of the Admiral, and if he found him alive in the Fleet, he should be set ashore at Tenhay; they humbly thanking him, and having received satisfaction for their Provisions, departed.  
The twenty ninth some of the Vice-Admiral's Men went ashore for Wood and Water; where also they Shot a great Hart, and therefore called it Harts-Isle.  
The one and thirtieth, being Sunday, they espied two Fishers-Jonks in the East, which Van Campen chase took, with thirteen Chinese, some fresh and salted Fish, which were taken out, and carried aboard the Vice-Admiral. The Chinese Prisoners being examined in the presence of the Commanders from whence they came? replied, From Zwatia: If they had seen any Holland Ships? answered No: and being demanded if no Jonks were expected that Season from japan at Zwatia? they also replied, No: and being farther asked if none went that Year from Zwatia to japan, and if some Jonks about two days before had not Sailed from Zwatia towards the North? they again answered No: so that the Netherlanders could get nothing out of them: whereupon they were ordered to be kept aboard the Vice-Admiral, till he thought fit to send them out a Fishing for the Fleet.  
After the Admiral's and Vice-admirals' parting at Zwatia the twenty fifth of December, the Admiral arrived before Hoksieu the twenty seventh of the same Month, having in his Way, especially in the Bay of Succour, otherwise called Siang, in the Road of Pakka, and likewise in that of Good Fortune, seen and met several Jonks, which all escaped from him by flight, except five. But at Sothun, a Town which Bort sent out a Party against, having one Man killed, and five wounded; yet the next day with better success Charging the Enemy out of Town, he Commanded that, and likewise all the Houses in Tenhay to be burnt.  
At the earnest Requests of those of Hoksieu, and the Agents Letters to the Admiral, he went thither the seventh of january, Anno 1663. with the Overveen, Seahound, and all the Prize-Jonks; but the Calf and Naerden Frigates had Order to stay at Tenhay, and not upon any occasion to go ashore, for the prevention of all Mischiefs; yet in fair Wether they sometimes sailed to the neighbouring Isles, to see for the Enemy's Jonks, especially those that come from japan: all which the Admiral gave advice of to the Vice-Admiral by the forementioned Letters, adding that the small taken Jonks were fitted and made ready to Sail with News to their Excellencies the Lord-General and Council at Batavia: to which purpose he had given a Packet of Letters to Captain Barrents jochemse, which he had Order immediately to send away by the Jonks, and then come to him with all speed. But if upon the Tartars desire he should redeliver the Jonks, he intended to make use of the Ter-Boede; and to that end at his coming into the River of Hoksieu, where it now lay, he would send it away to the other Ships.  
The sixth, being Tuesday, Van Campen summoned the Commanders of all the Ships in his Squadron to come aboard, where after Consultation they concluded, if that day, or early on the next, they had no News out of the River Hoksieu, to send the Highland Frigate to the Admiral in that River, there to inquire how affairs went, which they were very desirous to know, because they had received no Advices, nor heard from them since the twenty fifth of the last, to the seventh of that Month.  
The seventh they resolved (the time to Sail back to Batavia drawing near) to send the Loenen and the Finch to fetch Water, as well for themselves as for the other Ships, which were to carry their empty Casks aboard them, and at their return when filled to fetch them again: Mean while the Boats of those Ships that stayed should go ashore for Fuel, that when part or all the Fleet should put to Sea, there might be no want.  
The same day the Terr-Boede coming from the River Hoksieu, in the Evening anchored behind Van Campen at Tenhay, from whence according to Bort's Order he was to go by Siam to Batavia, but first to speak with Van Campen at Tenhay.  
The tenth, being Saturday, the Ter-Boede set Sail, being sent as an Advice-Boat, under the Command of Nanning Claesz to Batavia, the same day the Highland Frigate, Commanded by Harmon Simonse, and the Ankeveen by jacob Black, went to the River of Hoksieu, according to the Admiral's Order, Dated the seventh.  
The eleventh they saw four Sail in the River Hoksieu: and now the Cruising up and down with the Frigates for Jonks that Traded to japan was laid quite aside by reason of bad Wether, and till further Order from the Admiral, which Van Campen by Letters of the seventh of january advised him of from his Fleet lying before Tenhay.  
The fourteenth in the Morning the Ankeveen Frigate came out of the River Hoksieu, into the Bay of Linkun, to turn about the North to Tenhay, but the Tide being spent he could not get forward; which being seen by Van Campen, he immediately sent the Pilot, john Cortz, with a well Manned Sloop thither to inquire after affairs, before whose return seven Glasses were run; yet at last he returned with jacob Black, Master of the Ankeveen, who brought a Letter with him from the Admiral, Dated the seventh of the same Month in the Ankeveen, then Riding in the Channel of Hoksieu; the Contents were these: That Noble with all his Attendants were detained in Hoksieu, and not permitted to come aboard; That himself was come with all the Ships down to the Mouth of the River, where stopped by contrary Winds from coming to him, he had lain three days, but would have come in stead of the Letter, had not the Night before three Vessels come down the River with Melman, two Mandarins and Letters from Noble and the Viceroy Singlamong and General Lipovi, who still desired the stay of all or some of the Fleet fifteen or twenty days longer for an Answer from Peking; which if he would not do, Noble and all his Retinue must be forced to wait there, and mean while Trade in private, selling some of their Merchandise, and buying others; about which he was to resolve the next day with the two Mandarins that were sent to him, therefore he desired Van Campen, on receipt of the Letter, to come to him with all speed in one of the Frigates that least drew Water, that he might consult with him about it, and resolve what was best to be done: Bort desired Van Campen also to leave Order with the Ships to store themselves plentifully with Water and Firing at Tenhay, that when the other Ships came to them, they might furnish them also, that then they might proceed on their Journey to Batavia without any hindrance. Whereupon Van Campen went in his Ship aboard of the Ankeveen Frigate, lying at Anchor about half way at Sea, between the River Hoksieu and Tenhay, and came about four hours after Sunset West and by North right against the Pyramids, but being forced by a contrary Tide to cast Anchor in fourteen Foot Water, happened to be aground; yet soon after was by the Tide put afloat again, and the same Night came to the Admiral; who being fetched aboard the next Morning, he understood that the Secretary's Clerk, or Interpreter, john Melman, was the Night before gone to Hoksieu, from whence he was to come the eighteenth of the same Month, with the Merchant Constantine Noble, and that then all things would be in readiness for them to put to Sea. Five Tartar Jonks came with three Mandarins, and cast Anchor near Van Campen, sent thither by the Viceroy Singlamong and the General Taysing Lipovy, with two hundred Picols of Rice, twenty Porkers, and twenty great Vessels of Chinese Beer, which were sent to be divided as a Present amongst the Seamen.  
The sixteenth the Ankeveen set Sail out of the River to the Ships at Tenhay, and came thither again the next day with some Goods for the Admiral, and a Chest for the Secretary of the Naerden Frigate, who was to stay ashore in Hoksieu. The same day Van Campen Embarked himself with his Necessaries.  
The eighteenth in the Morning the Domburgh and Overveen set Sail out of Hoksieu to the Ships at Tenhay: In the afternoon the Admiral received a Letter from Constantine Noble, cóntaining, That the Admiral should stay ten days longer for the Emperor's Letters from Peking, and that they required also two Hostages, viz. the Vice-Admiral Van Campen, and the Captain with one Eye, not knowing his Name, which was Ysbrant Builder: but neither the Admiral nor Vice-Admiral thought this advice fit to be followed.  
The twentieth the Deputy-Secretary, john Melman, came in a Tartar Vessel from Hoksieu to the Ships, but it was so foggy, that those of the Fleet, being not able to see him, but hearing him Row, haled him aboard: Van Campen also Rowing in his Sloop to meet him, was three hours before he could either find the Tartar Vessels or his own Frigates again, notwithstanding they were very near, and had it not been for the sound of the Trumpets, it had been impossible to have found one another that Night.  
The one and twentieth Van Campen hoist Sail, and with a gentle Gale out of the North North-east came to the Channel of Hoksieu, where he lay by the Admiral in five Fathom gravelly Ground.  
The two and twentieth in the Morning the Seahound Frigate set Sail with a fresh North-east Wind; but Van Campen, advised by jacob Swaert, and the chief Pilot Claes johnson, who told him that in such blustering Wether their Ships could not be ruled, because of their fresh experienced Seamen, and that they had better stay for fairer Wether, stirred not: In the afternoon, the Wind blowing very hard out of the same Quarter, and the Sea growing very rough, drove the Ankeveen towards the Pyramids from her Anchor, and enforced them to cast out another; which done, they weighed the first Anchor, supposing it to be encumbered; then the Frigate dragged the other; and being engaged among the Rocks, had neither time nor distance to drop another; whereupon the Master loosened his Foresail and Mizzen, so bearing up to the wind to keep her from what they were almost upon, the Rocky Shore; but all endeavours were in vain, for with the headiness of the Stream, the violence of the Wind, and hollowness of the Sea, she was driven upon the cruel Shore, and carried where she was hemmed in with Rocks; when to prevent the mischief they sent a Boat from the Ship with Tackling; but that also not able to keep off, was with the Frigate driven among intervening Rocks beyond the Ship, while she bilging against the Pyramids was split: when to save the Men a Seaman was ordered to swim to Shore with the Plumming-line, to which they fastened a stronger Rope, by which help they might betwixt swimming and wading get ashore; but he was so bruised and beaten by the Billows upon the Rocks where he Landed, that he was not able to draw the Halser to the Shore: but about two hours after Sunset the Sea did with her impetuous Waves so batter the Frigate, and she rolling so much, that they looked every Minute to be staved, they were forced to cut down their Masts by the Board for the preservation of their lives. About two hours after Sunset Van Campen sent one or two ashore on the Westside of the Pyramids, to make fast a Halser on the Rocks for the purpose beforementioned: after that Van Campen Sailed up the River Hoksieu to look for his Boat, but could not find her.  
The twenty third, being Thursday, Van Campen went ashore with a Sloop on an Island lying close by the Pyramids, to see if any sweet Water was to be had there, which they found in a Pit or Well. A Tent also was carried ashore and set up, into which they brought Rice, Beef, Pork, and fresh Water for those that were Shipwrecked, where two by Cold and drinking of Brandy, miserably lost their Lives in the Night.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning some Chineses coming to a Jonk by Van Campen on the Island, proffered to carry him to the Fort Minjazen, saying that the Governor Hanlavia would entertain him nobly; for they supposed the Fleet to have been gone to Batavia: they also gave him some fresh Pork, Eggs, and Rice, and showed him other Civilities.  
The Admiral by Letters advised Van Campen the same day, that all his expectation and stay was for him, that they might set Sail together, but supposed that the bad Wether had hindered him from coming out; and that in the Morning when he heard him Shoot, he was about weighing Anchor with all the Ships that were with him at Tenhay, of which he had sent him the Finch and Seahound, and desiring him, that if any more Tidings came from Hoksieu, that he should Fire three times, and for a little while keep in his Flag.  
The same day the Seahound Frigate and Finch came to an Anchor near the Wreck in the River of Hoksieu, whither Van Campen went immediately with his Boat, to see what Goods could be saved; which to do was almost impossible, because of the raging Billows, which beat so violently that no Boat was able to come near her. In the interim the Fleet which lay at Tenhay also setting Sail, fell down towards the Wreck; yet afterwards changing their purpose, Tacked about, lying Northward.  
The twenty fifth the Admiral's Sloop, with his chief Pilot, went aboard the the Vice-Admiral in the Seahound Frigate; from whence after midnight he was sent again to the Fleet with News concerning the Wreck. Little was performed that day, no Vessels being able to lie near the foundered Ship: but the next day they recovered some Cordage, Led, Tin, and Sandalwood, which was put aboard the other Frigates.  
The twenty seventh, fetching the last Cables that lay on the Deck, they carried them aboard the Seahound in the Night; and then likewise saved the Guns and some Shot.  
The next day seven Tartar Jonks came to an Anchor near the Wreck; to which Van Campen Rowing, put one Mey aboard to look to the Pepper, and other Goods that were yet remaining; which at last being given to the Tartars, was by them esteemed a great Prize.  
In the afternoon the Seahound and Finch weighed and set Sail to get out of the Channel of Hoksieu, and came towards Evening to an Anchor by the Fleet in the Bay of Linkun, where Van Campen immediately went aboard of the Naerden to the Admiral Bort; to whom having given a Relation concerning the loss of the Ankeveen, he Rowed aboard the Zirickzee.  
The first of March, being Thursday, the Admiral at daybreak fired a Gun, as a Signal that the Fleet should all weigh Anchor, and putting to Sea, proceed on their Way to Batavia. In the Evening about Sunset they came up with the South-Point of the Isle of Crocodiles, which bore South-west about five Leagues, and the South-Point of Carellos Nor-Nor-east about six Leagues from them, their Course West-South-west.  
The second they saw several Fishers Jonks near the Coast, and about Noon came into twenty four Degrees and fifty three Minutes Northern Latitude, and had the Southern Island Makau Northwest and by West about five Leagues from them, they steering South-west, and West and by South.  
Saturday, being the third, the Fleet at Sunset was about three Leagues and a half from another Isle; and on the next day at Noon in twenty two Degrees and thirty eight Minutes Nor-Nor-East, about four Leagues from the Sandy Banks; and against Evening came up with the Black Hill on the Coast of China, about four or five Leagues from them, their Course being South-west and by West, and West-South-west.  
The fifth the Fleet was about five or six Leagues from Ilhas dons Viedos; and at Noon in twenty one Degrees and twenty nine Minutes; the next day in twenty Degrees and thirty Minutes; and the day after, being Wednesday, at Noon in nineteen Degrees and fifty Minutes.  
On Thursday Van Campen was got out of sight of the Fleet in nineteen Degrees and thirty six Minutes; and the next day reached nineteen Degrees and twenty Minutes.  
The tenth in the Morning he came up with the East-Point of the Island Ainan, but at a great distance from him, and found himself at Noon in nineteen Degrees and twenty four Minutes Northern Latitude, the East Point West and by South, and West-South-west, about four or five Leagues, and Poele Tayo, Northwest, about three or four Leagues distant: The East-Point of Ainan appears like two Isles as you come about the North.  
The twelfth about Noon Van Campen was in eighteen Degrees and twenty seven Minutes, three Leagues from the South Coast of Ainan, which is found to be six or seven and forty Minutes more Southerly than it is placed in the Maps; and in the afternoon coming near the Shore, he espied the Fleet standing South-South-east; and the next Morning he descried the Admiral Bort with seven Sail, to lie a little to Leeward on his Larboard. About Noon being eighteen Degrees and thirty two Minutes, the Mount Tinhosa bore West and by North, about four Leagues from him, appearing like three Isles, whereof the middlemost is the biggest: More into the Country are two other Hills to be seen; and in the South-west and by West many Highlands: The South-west Shore was seen in the South-west and by South, about four or five Leagues from him. This Country is not rightly placed in the Maps, neither in its due Latitude nor Longitude; for it lies forty six or forty seven Minutes more Southerly in the Maps than it stands.  
The fourteenth in the Morning the Admiral Bort with all the other Ships were behind in the Channel East-North-east, and about Noon in eighteen Degrees and seventeen Minutes Sailed Northerly up to the Fleet, which in the Evening came up with Tinhosa: The next day at Noon they came to seventeen Degrees and fifty nine Minutes, and the day after to Fifteen Degrees and forty Minute's Northern-Latitude, their Course South.  
The seventeenth about daybreak they espied the Coast of Champan, which is very high Land, lying South-west and by West from them: Six hours after they discerned the Isle called Round Holm, near the Coast of Champan, and about Noon were in the Latitude of twelve Degrees and ten Minutes; and Sailing along the forementioned Coast, in the Evening they passed by the Bay called Bagerang, and about Sunset they descried Poele, or the Isle Cicier de Terra, Westwards about a League from them.  
The eighteenth Van Campen being about midnight separated from the Fleet, found himself about Noon in nine Degrees and nine Minutes, and about Sunset saw Poele Candour West-Nor-West, five Leagues from him, his Course South-West and by South.  
The nineteenth he came into six Degrees and twenty nine Minutes; the twentieth, in four Degrees and thirty Minutes; and on the one and twentieth, in the Morning seeing Poele Timon South-west and by South about three Leagues distant, he made towards it, and dropped Anchor at the South-Point eighteen Fathom Water: and soon after the Admiral Bort with all his Ships, coming also to an Anchor, put their Pennon under their Vein, except the Loenen Pink, which after a little stay steered her Course for Batavia. In the after noon the whole Fleet setting Sail again to proceed onward of their Voyage, steered South Southeast.  
The next day about Sunrising Panyang bore about four Leagues to the South Southeast from them: At Noon the Fleet found themselves to be in forty six Minutes Northern-Latitude, and saw Panyang West and by North; and about Sunset they saw Pismires-Isle in the South-west about four Leagues distant, and the Island Lingen South-west, and South-west and by South, about six or seven Leagues off: and about Noon the next day Van Campen was with the Fleet in six Minute's Southern-Latitude, and saw about Sunset Poele, or the Island Saya, South and by West, and the Cape of Lingen Nor-West and by West, three or four Leagues from them.  
The twenty fifth they discerned the Seven Islands, or Poele Toutyons, in the Southeast and by South, and Poele Saya in the Nor-West, and Nor-West and by West: about Noon the Poele Toutyons were Eastwards four or five Leagues from the Zirickzee.  
The twenty six they descried the Mountain Monapin about Sunrising to lie Southeast and by East, about five Leagues distant, and at Noon about three Leagues from thence they were in two Degrees and nine Minute's South-Latitude: At Night about Sunset they saw the third Point of the Island Sumatra South-South-east, two Leagues from them, and Poele Nanko East and by North, about three Leagues from the Zirickzee; and Monapin in the Nor-West, and Nor-West and by North, all lying along the Coast of Sumatra.  
The twenty seventh at Sunrising they descried the first Point of Sumatra Southeast, and Southeast and by East, about two Leagues and a half from the Zirickzee, who at Noon was in three Degrees and five Minute's South Latitude; and having the Island Lucipar Southeast about three Leagues from him, Sailed close along the Coast.  
The next day about Noon the Zirickzee was in four Degrees and twelve Minutes Southern Latitude, and on the twenty ninth in the Morning coming up with the Thousand Islands, which lay Westward from him, he espied the Admiral Bort with seven Sail in the Nor-East and by East, and one lying at an Anchor near the Island Agnietes. At two a Clock in the afternoon the Fleet came to an Anchor before Batavia, where they found the following Frigate and Pinks, viz. the Stadthouse Frigate of Amsterdam, the Holland Remedy, the Nightingale Pink, the Arms of Batavia a Frigate, the Griffin, being the Rear-admiral of the Harbour.  
The thirtieth, being Friday, the following Ships arrived there from Holland: the Kennemerland, Orange, Rhynland, and the Kogge.  
The next day the Flushing Frigate came also to an Anchor from the Coast of Malabar, with News, that Rykloff van Gouns had taken the City Coessien, and likewise the Rising-Sun Frigate from Rekkam.  
On Tuesday the third of April a Thanksgiving Day was kept for the Conquest of the City Coessien, and in the Evening Bonfires were made, and all the Guns fired from the Fort, and round about the Walls of the City Batavia, and likewise from all the Ships.  
The eleventh the Ter-Boede Pink came also to an Anchor before Batavia from Sian; and the Agents related their Adventures to the Lord-General.    

A CONTINUATION OF THE Second Embassy;  
Being a Journal of the Adventures that happened to the two Fleets sent from Batavia to the Isles of Formosa, Tayowan, and the Coast of China, under the Command of Balthasar Bort, as Admiral, and General of the Land-Forces, since the Year 1663. june the 27. until Anno 1664. March the 21.  
THe great Damage which the Netherlanders suffered, Anno 1661. by the loss of Tayowan and Formosa, taken from them by the Pirate Coxinga, not only staining their Honour, but also damnifying their Estates, and prejudicial to their Trade, was not satisfied by the Fleet and Land-Soldiers, sent out the last Year, as was expected, because the Tartars were not only wanting to join their Forces for the Defeating of the common Enemy, but also detained them most of the time idly at Hoksieu, feeding the Admiral with fair Promises, without any performance, although a fit opportunity seemed to be presented to the Hollanders, because the Enemy by the death of their General Coxinga were all in confusion; yet notwithstanding, as our former Relation mentions, the Hollanders Fleet at several times took thirty three Jonks, besides many lesser Vessels which they burned, and also the strong Fort of Kitat, leaving whole Towns and Villages in Flames, whose Inhabitants fled to the Mountains, whilst the Tartars took not the least Cognizance thereof, although they knew that Coxingas Party made Overtures of Peace, and had to that purpose sent Ambassadors to their Emperor at Peking, as it was reported at the departure of the Fleet; though his Majesty having put them off with dilatory answers, signifying altogether, that they should show the first Point of their Obedience, by wearing short Hair, as himself and all his Subjects did, which (as the Hollanders supposed) might procrastinate the business; and besides all this, the Tartars did not perform what they promised concerning the enlargement of the Dutch Prisoners, yet confined in the Isle Eymuy, although they showed all outward Civilities in their Entertainments, still Complementing their Ambassadors, yet would not grant them a free Trade before they had full Orders from the Emperor, with which they held so long in suspense so long, that they would not any longer attend with their whole Fleet such continual delays; but having done little or nothing, set Sail from thence the first of March, and came safe on the twenty ninth of the same Month before Batavia, leaving the Ankeveen Frigate behind them, which suffered Shipwreck before the Channel of Hoksieu, as before mentioned; and the Merchant Constantine Noble, with eight Netherlanders which were kept by the Tartars; and as their Governors pretended, in kindness to them, that they should not return until they carried from the Emperor what should give satisfaction to their General Maetzuiker; all which cast up together, amounted to more Jealousy, than Hopes, so that Balancing their Actions, they could not positively say, that either they were Friends or Enemies whom they Treated with: Yet howsoever, let them be what they will, whither against the General Maetzuiker and his Council in Batavia, pitched resolutely upon, that with all their Forces they would prosecute those that had done them their Injury, viz. the Coxingans, and would never hearken to any accommodation, until by reprisal or otherwise, they had fully satisfied themselves of the Damages sustained in Tayowan and Formosa. Which Decree of theirs was luckily confirmed by Letters from their Masters at Amsterdam, bearing Date October the 22. Anno 1662. Whereby they were informed, that a Peace was concluded between Holland and the Portuguese, which giving them more liberty, they prepared to equip their Navy with greater speed and diligence, and send forth once more, under the Command of Balthasar Bort, to the Coast of China; and if by Treaty with the Tartars they could not obtain their desires, they would try what they could do by force of Arms, and look upon both as one Enemy.  
In this their great Expedition, sixteen Ships were appointed, and fitted out with Men and Arms according to the following Schedule.  
Names of the Ships. Mariner's Land-Men Volunteers had no Pay Reformadoes Iron Guns Brass Guns Nut-Tree 151 139 17 1 32 10 Tertolen 106 96 2 3 27 4 Ulaerdingen 95 94 4  30  Mars 112 106 1  28 3 Naerden 92 102 3  28 8 Flusshing 105 96 4  30 3 The Arms of Zealand 100 117 1  28  Kogge 90 105 3  30 2 Seahound 62 69 1 1 19 2 Zierikree 107 93 1 1 28 4 Overveen 75 74 1  26  jonker 77 41 2  26  Meliskerke 64 55 1  18 3 Buiksloot 64 51   20  New Dam 48 24   16  Finch 34 22   10 1 Together 1382 1234 41 6 399 44  
Which make in all 16 Ships, bearing 2653 Men, and 396 Iron, and 44 Brass Guns.  
All which Vessels were Victualled for twelve Months, and furnished with Necessaries of War accordingly.  
At the same time, four Merchantmen, viz. the Venenburg, Pepper-Bag, Graveland, and Amstelland, all Laden with rich Cargoes, and Bound for japan, were ordered to go and continue with the Fleet, till they came in sight of Formosa.  
The Soldiers in Batavia were divided into twelve Companies, which had three Captains, twelve Lieutenants, twelve Ensigns, thirty eight Sergeants and Corporals, every Company according to the Councils Order, consisted at first of an hundred Men, that afterwards if need required, they might be divided into fifty or seventy in a Company, and then choose new Officers for them.  
The several Commissions to the Officers of the Fleet, were first given them ashore in the presence of all the Militia in Arms, by the Lord General, and afterwards by the Governor of the Company, Charles Hertsing, accompanied aboard by the Lords Adrian Ʋander Moyden, and jacob Hutzaerd, where their Commissions and Orders were publicly read before all the People.  
The chiefest Orders in their Letter of Advice, given in Writing to the Admiral and his Council, from the Grand Council at Batavia, consisted in the following:  

AFter you have furnished yourself with Water and Wood, at Laver and Timon, 
Orders from the grand Council of Batavia.  you shall Steer your Course directly to Formosa.  
Your first place of Rendezvouz shall be at the Isle of Pehoe, otherwise called Piscadores, about twelve Leagues Westward from Formosa.  
If any Ships run beyond the Piscadores, they shall Sail on to Hoksieu, lying on the Main Coast of China, and there expect the Fleet.  
Coming in sight of Formosa, five or six Ships shall Sail to the South Shore of Tayowan, to inquire how Affairs stand there, and bring a speedy account of it to the Piscadores.  
If the present Possessors should proffer freely to deliver up Tayowan and Formosa, do not refuse, but make the best advantage of the opportunity.  
You shall Sail with the whole Fleet from the Piscadores first to Hoksieu, and put all other affairs aside, till such time as you have made inquiry, in what Posture our business stands with the Tartars.  
Let the absolute knowledge of the Tartars well meaning, or otherwise, be a guide to the Admiral and his Council, what seems fit to be done.  
Take all Chinese Jonks which you meet with by the way, or on the Coast, not regarding from whence they come, or whither they go; neither make any distinction, whether they belong to the Tartars or Coxinga.  
Send peculiar Ships to Cruise up and down for those Jonks that Trade to japan, and let them not Sail to the South of Cabo de Sumber; but to the Northward of it towards the Gulf of japan.  
When it's convenient, let them put into the Isles of Meaxima, Gotto, and Coray, lying to the Westward of japan; and if it may be done without any considerable hindrance, to make Inspections, and inquire what convenient Harbours there are for Ships.  
If two or three Jonks be taken, send them with the Cruisers.  
To use no Hostility to the Portuguese, because of the concluded Peace.  
Let the Merchandise which are distributed in the Fleet, if the Tartars will not permit a free Trade, be sent to japan; and likewise keep the four Merchants Freighted thither in your company, till you come within sight of Formosa, then let them proceed on their Voyage, except the Amstellant, which shall Sail with you to Hoksieu, to take in the Merchandise for the Chinesy Trade, out of the several Ships (but if they will not allow it) then carry them to japan.  
Make your first coming at Hoksieu known to the Governor of the Fort Minjazeen, and sending a Chinesy ashore, ask for the Merchant Constantine Noble, desiring him to come aboard.  
If all things stand well in Hoksieu, send their Excellency's Letter by some person of Quality to the Governors, and desire their Answer to it.  
If the Tartars are united with the Coxingans, and would persuade you not to use Hostility, by no means condescend, except they will consent to make good the Damage which the Hollanders had suffered in Tayowan, and Surrender up Formosa and Tayowan, with all the Forts and Castles; and also procure the Emperor's Letters to forbid the Chinesys to Trade with any, but with our People in Tayowan: Neither should any Chinesys Sail with their Jonks Southward of the Isle Ainan, nor to japan; and that those which were found there, might be taken by them; and also to release the netherlands Prisoners.  
The Chinesys shall be permitted to Sail to Batavia and Malakka, provided they have our Pastports, if the Article of their not Sailing to japan be too hard for them, pass it by.  
But all the other Proposals must be performed, which if not, no way to agree with them; and that they should also get the Articlrs concluded upon Signed and Sealed at Peking.  
If they should request an Embassy to be sent to the great Cham, and there to make our Addresses; by no means agree to it, but promise them, if satisfaction be made of all things, to send a Honourable Embassy in recompense to his Majesty.  
If the Tartars and Coxingans are joined in a League, and do not regard the Netherlanders as much as formerly, neither will make satisfaction, declare them both Enemies, and use Hostility to one as well as the other, by Burning and Ruining all places on the Main Continent of China: Then also Steer to the Chincheu Isles, and there endeavour to destroy the two Towns, Que and Aymuy. If there be a conveniency there for a strong Hold that might be kept by a small Garrison, to take it in Possession; for which purpose the Isle Kolong lies very convenient, and likewise the Piscadore's, but barren and unfertile, where also a Fort might be erected for our better Guard.  
Not to accept to take any other place in possession, if you can get Tayowan again.  
Endeavour to Conquer Formosa and Tayowan by force of Arms, if it cannot be done by Peaceable means; yet take not so much Ground in possession as formerly.  
The lower Castle of Zelandia being a good Garrison, would be a sufficient Defence against the Assaults of the Chinese.  
The upper Castle shall be Dismantled, and left ungarrisoned, that afterwards on farther Order it may be pulled down, and build a strong Redoubt in its place.  
To keep the Fort Provintia, and Garrison it with a hundred Men; as also that of Quelang.  
To begin somewhat in more safety in Tayowan, the Forces ought to be brought ashore through the straits of Lakge Moey on the main Land, and there first to Attaque and win the Fort Provincia, and likewise endeavour to get the Inhabitants there, to join with our People; to which purpose it will be requisite for you to take flat bottomed Vessels from the Chinese, because our Boats cannot carry so many Men in those shallow Waters; neither could the required Forces be brought ashore together; and if they wanted those Vessels, it would not be convenient to attempt any thing on that side, but be better behind Tonkoya, about six Leagues Southward of Tayowan, where in the Northern Mouson the Water is very smooth, and a higher Shore to break off the Winds.  
From thence they should March up in two or three days by Land to the Fort Provincia at Sakkam; and besides the convenient Landing there, the Inhabitants of the South might perhaps join with the Hollanders, which if they should, all the Chinese in Formosa would not be able to withstand them.  
If the Tartars should deny the Trade, and that those of the Isles Ay and Quemuy live apart from Formosa and Tayowan, and are in friendship with the Tartars, and also inclined to agree with you, do you likewise seem willing to it, nay, seek to join with them, provided they procure us those Articles demanded of the Tartars, and use their assistance towards the regaining of Formosa and Tayowan; nay, to fall upon the Tartars themselves, if occasion should require.  
No time is limited you to come with the Fleet from the North to Batavia, but is left to the Discretion of the Admiral and his Council.   
After the Admiral Balthasar Bort had on june the 30. Anno 1663. been conducted by several Friends aboard his Ship, he set Sail the next Morning three hours before Day, with all the Fleet, consisting in sixteen Men of War, and four Merchants, bound for japan, out of the Haven of Batavia, with a South East Wind, and running between the Isles of Hoorn and Edam, they stood to the North-East. At Noon, the Fleet had the Isle South-Wayter South West and by West three Leagues from them, in five Degrees and thirty Minutes Southern Latitude; in the Evening about Sunset they had the Isle North-Wayter, about West-North-West, four Leagues distant.  
The second at the usual Signal of a White Flag, and firing of a Gun, all the Commanders and Chief Officers of the Militia, came aboard the Admiral, who according to the Lord General, and Indian Councils Order, chose out of them all for his Privy Council the Persons under written, which the rest were to follow in Order, viz. next to the Admiral Balthasar Bort, who is to be always Chief: was  
Huybrecht de Lairesse, Vice-Admiral.  
William Volkersz, made Commander of those Ships that were to go to japan, and Rere-Admiral as long as he stayed with the Fleet.  
Bartholomeus Verwei, who at Volkersz departure was to carry the Rere-Admiral's Flag; and in that Degree take place in the Council.  
Peter Coker, Master of the Admiral's Ship.  
Ernest Van Hogenhoek, Merchant in the Kogge.  
And the first Captain Christian Poolman, Commander of the Nut-Tree.  
These having taken their places, the Fleet was by them ordered to be divided into three Squadrons, as had already been considered by the Admiral, and approved of by the Vice-Admiral; and the Orders which the Fleet was to follow, being read were also affirmed, and likewise the proportions of Diet was agreed on.  
At Noon the Admiral was in four Degrees and five Minutes Southern Latitude, and had the High Island with the Trees, West-North-West, about seven Leagues from him.  
The third about daybreak, they spied the Coast of Banka; at Noon they Sailed Eastward of the Isle Lucipa; and in the Evening passed within two Leagues and a half by the first Point of Sumatra, South and by East from them.  
On Thursday, being the fifth, they saw the Mountain Monapyn, and were within two Leagues of the Shore of Sumatra; towards Evening, they Sailed by the River Palimboang, and between Poele Tousjou, and Poele Sayo.  
The sixth, they saw the Isles Tousjou, and were at Noon in one Degree and sixteen Minute's South Latitude.  
The seventh, the Fleet found Poele Sayo North-West and by West, about three Leagues and a half from them, in nineteen Minutes Southern Latitude; and in the Evening descried in the North the Isles which lay near Lingen.  
On Sunday they discovered Dominies Island, West-South-West, four Leagues from them; and crossing the Line, saw the High Isle of the Box-horns, about seven Leagues distant.  
The ninth at Noon, the Admiral was in fifty four Minutes Northern Latitude, and in sight of the Isle Pangang, West and by North, about three Leagues and a half from him.  
On the tenth appeared the Isles Tinghy, North-West and by West, and Laver North and by West from them; in the Morning, the Fleet being near Laver, cast Anchor on the West side of it. Timon hath no Wood, neither for Firing nor any other use, with which Laver is plentifully supplied: This Isle is pretty high, and hath two rising Promontories, one on the South, and the other at the North end, which make a Plain in the middle.  
The twelfth about Noon, five Ships upon the Admiral's Order set Sail from Laver to Poele Timon, to take in Water, Fuel, and other Wood; and likewise to Barter for Provision, according to their agreement of the eleventh.  
The Bay on the Southeast Point of this Island lies very convenient for the fetching and taking in of fresh Water, Firing and other Wood, which is to be had ashore in great plenty; but Provision is somewhat scarce here, because the People of this Country have their Habitations more towards the South-West side; and also that which is to be had, is much dearer than at Poele Laver.  
The nineteenth, the Admiral about Sunrising set Sail from Poele Timon, and came in the afternoon to an Anchor, with the whole Fleet, by those Ships that were sent out before from Laver.  
The Fleet thus furnished with all Necessaries, Weighed Anchor on the twentieth about daybreak; and in the Evening had the Isle Poele Timon, about four Leagues Southerly from them.  
The one and twenty, they kept a Fast.  
The twenty two, twenty three, twenty four, and twenty fifth, nothing happened of any remark.  
The twenty sixth, the Isle's Candour bore Easterly about seven Leagues from the Fleet.  
The twenty seventh, and twenty eighth, nothing happened, only a strong Gale of Wind blew from Southeast out of the River Cambodia.  
The twenty ninth, the Finch Sailing before, made a sign that she saw Land, which was afterwards found to be the two Sand Hills on the Coast of Champan, about six Leagues Northerly from the Admiral; who in the Evening descried Poele Cecier de Mare, three Leagues in the South-South-East; and Cabo Cecier in the North-East and by North, three quarters of a League from them.  
The thirtieth, the Bay of Padaran bearing West-North-West, they came by Avarella Falso about Noon, and were in twelve Degrees and seven Minutes Northern Latitude; their Course North and by East.  
The first of August, Poele Cambir was East and by North from the Admiral, and in the afternoon the Isle Canton, North-North-East, about six Leagues.  
The second, the private juncto being assembled, the Admiral read to them some peculiar Orders, chiefly about the putting in at the South of Tayowan with four or five Ships, and the manner how they should best get knowledge concerning the condition of their Enemies, according to his Excellency's Order in Batavia; and also in what time it was best to Cruise for their Jonks, that Sail richly Laden to and from japan; and likewise how they should dispose of those Jonks which they should take on the Coast of China, Manilhas, Makkaw, Tunking, Quinam, Ciam, Ligoor, Patany, and other places; and also of those which they might find in the Haven of Tayowan, and in the Piscadores.  
Lastly, It was judged best to refer it till the next meeting, and in the mean time to give every one a Copy of it, as was performed by the Secretary on the fourth of the same Month; who also put in what was considered beforehand, and concluded on, That William Volkers, before his departure to japan, might see their resolution chiefly concerning the Cruising for japan Jonks, and giving an account of it to the Netherlanders there, they might make use thereof when occasion served.  
The fifth and sixth they saw the Isles Tinhosa, and Ainam; though Tinhosa lay five Leagues distant from the Admiral.  
Mean while on the sixth, according to their last Intentions, an Order was made in the Council, concerning the written Proposals, and newly added Observations, taken by the Admiral and Council at that time; of which every one had a Copy given them: which the better to understand, it is requisite that we also give a Transcript thereof, as follows:  
The Admiral according to Order, when he came in sight of Formosa, sent four or five Ships to the Southermost Harbour of Tayowan, that there they might inquire some News; and first proposed what Ships and Persons out of the Fleet might be fittest for that purpose; and if the Chinesys did not come aboard of their own accords, whereby they might attain to the desired Information, they should put out a White Flag to invite them, or fire now and then a Gun; but if they could not attain their desire by these two means, they should send one or two Hostages, which they had brought with them from Batavia, (which if they did no good, could do no harm;) and there ask the Governors for whom they kept the Forts and Castles on Tayowan and Formosa, whether for themselves, or together for those of Ey and Quemuy, or for the Tartar, as being his Subjects? and whether it were best to be done in writing or by word of Mouth?  
If they should make answer to the foresaid Demand, and desire to know our Intention, whether it would not be convenient to entreat them to send some of their People with us to the greater part of the Fleet at the Piscadores, promising there to acquaint them with our Design. If they should be thereto inclined, leaving them Hostages, whether they should consent to it? Also how many days the Ships should stay on the South part of Tayowan? likewise if during that time, they should use any Hostility, as taking of their Jonks and other Vessels, because the Indian Council had Commanded them to use none till they knew how they stood affected to the Tartars; but on the contrary, Commanded again, That nevertheless all Chinesy Jonks (from whence soever they came, and whither soever Bound) which they met withal in their Channel, they should endeavour to take without any distinction, whether they belong to the Tartars or Coxinga.  
And in regard the Intentions of their Excellencies in Batavia are declared to us, that we may take all Chinesy Jonks coming from other Countries, if it would not be convenient to take out the Goods, whether Skins or aught else, and sending them for a trial to japan, to see how the japanners would refent it, whether well or ill; and whether it relate only to the Jonks, on the Coast of China, or also to those which they might find on the Coast of the Manilhas, Makkau, Tunking, Quinam, Cambodia, Siam, Ligoor, Patany, johoor, and Formosa, which if they should not be set upon at our first coming thither, might easily escape from us.  
On the contrary, they considered that the Enemy by such harsh actions might alter from their good Resolution, if perhaps they had any before, and then not suffer the Netherlanders to speak with them, much less freely proffer to surrender up Tayowan and Formosa into our possession again, as their Excellencies would willingly have it: and to that purpose Commanded to take hold, and make good use of such an opportunity; otherwise, if the Enemy should make fair Promises, and thereby detain us from taking their Jonks, or doing aught else; when perhaps, being forced by sudden Invasions, they might sooner come to an agreement, and do what we should demand of them.  
Therefore it was Proposed, if they ought not to take all the Jonks and Vessels which they should find in the Piscadores, at the Admiral's coming thither.  
Secondly, Since their Excellencies had commanded to send peculiar Ships to Cruise up and down for the Jonks that Trade to japan, without expressing in what time it is best to be done; nay required, that according to their Order, it should be done before William Volkerts went from the Fleet to japan, to carry News also thither concerning it, that in case ought should happen there he might govern himself accordingly; therefore the Admiral Proposed, if it were best to be begun in the Southern or Northern Mouson; if in the Southern, the only time would be about the latter end of August, or the middle of September, to get to the Northward of the Cape Sumber; and moreover, in the japan Sea, in which the forementioned Jonks were best to be taken.  
But then again was to be considered, the Cruisers would be forced to spend three or four Months, without any likelihood of meeting with any Jonks; and likewise to consider, that the Ships aforementioned would not be able to endure there long, if they should be surprised by Northerly Winds, want Water or Wood, and their Men happening to fall sick and die, which would force them to put into some Harbour or other; and also, that it was very uncertain, if by their Cruising they should meet with any thing, because that the netherlands Ships could not always Sail in that Channel, for the Reasons aforementioned, which the Chineses use: Nay, if they should keep there continually, they might let them pass by in dark or misty Wether; and though the netherlands Ships did perhaps see some Jonks, yet they might lose them by their nimble Sailing: Adding moreover, that their Excellencies in this concern had thus expressed their opinion in the Orders which they had given to them: viz.  As We are informed, there may be more assurance made of those Trading Jonks that Sail to japan, than when they return in the Northern season, at which time it is very uncertain to wait for them, because they generally return late in the Year, and Our Ships can scarce stay so long there. 
But on the contrary, it is also to be observed, that if the netherlands Ships do not go at the forementioned time, but later, they cannot get beyond the Cape de Sumber, and no likelihood to meet with any Jonks to the Southward of it, whereby we should be deprived of those rich Booties, that is to be had out of the japan Jonks; of which their Excellencies make mention in their Orders, saying,  And since the richest Prizes are to be had out of the Trading Jonks which Sail to, and from japan, therefore it is requisite that you use your chiefest endeavours about them, and send out expert Cruisers to frequent the North Passage, and not the South of Cabo de Sumber, Sailing quite to the japan Sea. 
Provided this Cruising thus ordered, with hopes to take something, could be performed; yet there are no reasons to persuade us to it, for the uncertainties, if it must be performed by our Ships only, their Excellencies make mention of in these words:  We put it to your consideration, if it would not be convenient to take two or three Chinesy Jonks that are good Sailors (which perhaps may fall into your hands on the Coast of China) along with you thither, thereby to deceive the Chinese, and the easier take their Trading Jonks, which Our Frigates, because of their sluggish Sailing, are scarce able to do, since We know the Chineses commonly out-Sail them. 
About this the Council ought chiefly to consider, if We had best undertake so uncertain a Design this Year, because the Fleet would not only be much weakened thereby, but also abated in its Power and Forces, when it should go against the Enemies; neither would they esteem nor regard us so much, as if we had all our Forces together; and we should also thereby be bereaved of our nimblest and best Ships, which would be more assisting to us in all Affairs, than the biggest.  
It may also happen, that falling on so many things together, nothing might be effected; therefore it ought to be considered, that all uncertain Designs which cannot be performed, without separating the Fleet be laid aside, and see what could be done to the Enemy with our whole Fleet together, and accordingly defer the sending of Ships out to Cruise up and down the Coast; the rather, because in October, November, and December, it is better to get along the Shore to the Northward, as it happened to us the last Year; besides, their Excellencies themselves have little hopes this Year to get any Jonks that come from japan, as by these following words more plainer appear, speaking of this concern in their Advice and Orders.  And to be ready so soon, that We may take them in their going thither, is not to be done from hence; by which We should understand, that all other Designs ought to be laid aside, and begin first with Cruising; therefore to consider what number of Ships We shall send out to that purpose, and how they shall be Maned; and also if they shall put into the Isles of Meaxima, Gotto, and Koray, to inquire if there be no safe Harbours, Bays, and other conveniencies for Ships, that in time of need, they might make use of them according to their Excellency's Order, if it may be done without prejudice or hindrance. 
But it is again to be considered, that this Enquiry and Cruising cannot be done both in one season; and likewise to be suspected, that our Cruising Ships might be kept in the Havens aforementioned by the Chinese; yet this might be excused in Stormy or Tempestuous Wether; however, We ought not to trust our Forces in their Hands; also that Cruising from Hoksieu, they might by Sailing along the Shore run beyond Cape de Sumber, nay, to Nanking, to see for convenient Havens and Bays, for the getting of Wood and fresh Water, of which in bad Wether, they might also make use, and at once take all those Jonks which they could meet with: On all which Proposals, they resolved and agreed as follows.  
First, That the Admiral in person, according to his request, should go to Tayowan, with the Nut▪ Tree, Vlaerdingen, Kogge, Seahound, and jonker, there to inquire concerning all Affairs, that on all accidents he might give speedy Order: If the Chineses do not come aboard of their own accords, he shall fire some Guns leisurely one after another, and also set up a Chieuw; if nothing be effected that way, to send the two Chinese Hostages, brought along with them from Batavia, (if they can get no Prisoners) ashore with Letters; by whom some Questions should be asked, viz. For whom they kept their Forts and Castles in Formosa and Tayowan? whether for themselves, or jointly with those of Ey and Quemuy? or for the Tartars, as being their Subjects? with promises, if they should truly answer them, that then the Netherlanders would also declare their Intentions; if thus they obtained their desire, the Admiral shall ask them to send some of their People along with him to the rest of the Fleet at the Piscadores, with promise, there to declare his Design, without leaving any of our Men as Hostages in their custody. If they are not inclined thereto, the Admiral shall do what time and convenience shall advise him to: For the performance of which, he shall only spend two or three days, in which time no Hostility shall be used ashore; but nevertheless, not only endeavour to make Prize of all Vessels there, but also in the Piscadores.  
Concerning the second Proposal about Cruising for the Jonks in the japan Channel, It is thought fit that it be undertaken after the business be done at Hoksieu, if they are not prevented by receiving satisfaction for their sustained Injuries. But if they should not, then to wave their Cruising so long in the Southern Mouson, but return to the Enemies chief Towns and Places; and Sailing to the North with the whole Fleet, do all the Damage possible, both by Sea and Land, and then against the time comes, to send the Merchant Ernest Van Hogenbook as Admiral with three of the best Sailors, Man'd as they were at that present, and three nimble Jonks (if they could be Masters of so many betwixt that time) to Cruise beyond Cabo de Sumber, nay, if possible, as far as Nanking, that in their way thither, they might seek for some convenient Bays and Harbours wherein Ships might be safe in bad Wether, and be furnished with Water and Wood Moreover, to fly up and down in thirty two and thirty three Degrees, and seize on all Ships they could light upon. They should also for that purpose, put in at the Isles Meaxima, Gotto, and Koray, provided they could do it without prejudice, according to their Excellency's Order in Batavia: In performance of which also, the Cruisers should again come to the Fleet, either at Ay, Quemuy, or Formosa in February, that then with all their Forces they might undertake such Adventures as should be thought convenient.  
The two chief Articles aforementioned thus agreed on, it was also thought fit, after their former refusal, to Sail with the foremention'd Ships from Pedro Blanko to Formosa, towards the Cape of Tankoya, so to reach the South Harbour of Tayowan, and Anchor there; and likewise although William Volkerts, Admiral for the japan Merchants, had purposed with his Ships to proceed on his Voyage from Pedro Blanco along the Coast of China to japan; yet the whole Fleet consisting of twenty Sail should first appear in sight of Formosa▪ and that then three of the japan Ships should go on without the Ankeveen, between Formosa and the Piscadores, and the Vice-Admiral with the remaining twelve Ships, should immediately Sail to the Piscadores, and there stay and expect the Admiral with his five Ships; but if bad Wether, all the Men of War should go to the Piscadores, and the three Vessels that were bound for japan, without staying any longer by the Fleet, proceed on their Voyage.  
The same day, according to agreement, the Admiral set Sail with his five Ships, the Nut-Tree, Vlaerdingen, Kogge, Seahound, and jonker to Formosa, towards the Cape of Tonkayo, from thence to steer for the South Harbour of Tayowan, and there drop Anchor.  
The eighth, the Seahound and jonker returned from their fruitless chase of a Jonk, since the sixth, which in calm Wether had escaped them, taking only a Chinese Champan, in which the jonker had five Men wounded, and the Seahound one.  
The Politic Chineses first set adrift a Pot with Arak in a Tub▪ and afterwards a Chinese Water-Vessel, on which stood a Cane with a Letter; and lastly, the aforementioned Champan, which was taken by the Netherlanders, but the Pot with Arak the Commanders would not permit the Seamen to take up.  
Whilst the Seahound and jonker were yet busy chase the forementioned Jonk, they spied another under Sail, toward which, accompanied with the Vice-Admiral and his whole Squadron, they made with all the Sail they could possible; and soon after the Admiral's Sloop was put out Armed with six Blunderbusses, and other Necessaries of War, and Man'd with the Boats Crew, being twelve Soldiers, one Ensign, and a Corporal, all Commanded by his Pilot.  
In the taken Jonk, which on the tenth was brought close aboard the Admiral, they found seven small Guns, Sythes, Pikes, a parcel of Fire-Balls and Arrows, and likewise good store of Gunpowder and other Ammunition; the rest of the Lading consisted in several kinds of Wood  
The Admiral first caused some of the Chineses to be mildly examined, then threatening, that if they would not speak the truth, they should die for it; to which purpose a Soldier was put behind one of them with a naked Sword, and then asked, To what intention they plied there, yet (partly supposing, that they would not confess, and partly, because the Interpreters could not well understand what they said) they could get but a slender account from them; but that which they agreed in most was, that they belonged to the Tartar, and with twenty Jonks had carried Tartar Soldiers from Canton to the Island Ainan, to reinforce the Garrison, and had now been in company with five of the same Jonks in their way towards Canton; besides, they made mention of their Pass, which the Viceroy of Canton had given them to that purpose, and delivered it to the Netherlanders, which were not able to understand it: At this time the Admiral was about the Craeke Deep, off from the Makaw Island.  
The eleventh, the Council being assembled by the Admiral, caused the two Commanders of the taken Jonks, named, Onghing, and Ongkeeyn, to be brought before them and examined; but could learn nothing from them, but what agreed with that which their People had told two days before, viz. that they had carried Soldiers from Canton to Ainan, and were now on their return; and replied when asked, That Coxinga had been dead a year, and that his Son Kimsia had the chief Command in Tayowan and Formosa; but how it was with the Wars between the Tartars and Chinese they knew not. When asked if they knew the Champan taken by the Netherlanders of the second instant, and now behind the Admiral's Stern; they answered, after having see it, Yes, and that it belonged to Canton; but if the Jonk to which it belonged came along with them from Ainan, they could not resolve.  
The Letter which they found also in the said Jonk was given them to read; but they gave another construction than the former: Neither could the Hollanders be rightly informed of the Contents, because their Interpreters could not explain it; so that in stead of satisfaction, they found themselves more perplexed than before.  
Hereupon the Admiral desired the Council to consider if these shaved Chineses, with their Jonk and Cargo, since they had showed no manner of Hostility to the Netherlanders, aught to be cleared and discharged, or if it were better to be sure by taking them along with the Fleet to Hoksieu, and put their freedom to be judged by Singlamong and Lipovi Chief Governors there; or if by tortures, they should make a farther examination.  
Which being consulted on, it was supposed that by tortures they might perhaps draw from them the truth, and what the Netherlanders expected, viz. That they were of Coxingas Party, and Sailed with false Passes, and yet be sent out by the Tartars, and be under their jurisdiction, whom by the taking of these Jonks, they ought no ways to displease; the more, because their Excellency's Order in Batavia, concerning the taking of Jonks, was not specified to relate to those which Sailed to places that belonged to the Tartars, but those that drove a Trade to japan: But because this Jonk thus prepared for Piracy was much suspected, and also the rough entertainment which they had from the small Vessel, six of their Men being Wounded, they resolved after consideration to declare the Jonk with the foremention'd Goods, and all her Men free Prize, and carry them to Hoksieu, there to make further inquiry concerning the truth. This being told them, they seemed to be satisfied, only fearing at their return to be taken by Coxingas Jonks.  
In the Morning about daybreak, the Fleet had the North-Point of Ilha does Viados, or the Island Lemas North and by West, two Leagues and a half from them.  
About Noon, the Nut-Tree, Cog, Zierikzee, Overveen, Naerden, and Mars, came at the firing of some Guns, from the Admiral to an Anchor, on the North-side of Lemas, within Cannon shot of the Shore. A good distance behind the Admiral, they saw the Bucksloot and Nieuwendam also lying at Anchor. So on the twenty ninth, the Admiral came with ten Ships safe to an Anchor, in the Road of Hoksieu; the rest of the Fleet were ordered to Sail to the Bay of Tenhay, and the Good Fortune soon after sent notice of her arrival by Letters to the Governor of the Castle Minjazeen, lying at the Mouth of the River Hoksieu; and likewise to the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Lipovi.  
The twentieth of October, after long stay, and many Consultations, concerning the Commencing the War against the Coxingans, the Vice-Admiral Huibert de Laresse, and Hogenbook came aboard the Admiral again at Soanchefoe, with a Letter from the Viceroy Singlamong, containing these words.  
Singlamong's Letter to the Admiral▪  
YOu are come hither from a remote Country, with mighty Ships, to serve Our Emperor, which is a certain Sign of your good Inclinations. How shall We return Kindnesses sufficient to such your Deserts? It is needless to show Thankfulness for the small Trifles sent you. You write to have it Sealed, what hath passed between us: But how can I possibly do it? because you (if it be only Written in Our Language) cannot understand it. Therefore I desire you to let the Business of the War be written in Paper, both in the Dutch and Chinese Tongues, and send it to Me, that I may also rightly apprehend it.  
When We together shall have regained the Isles of Ay and Quemuy, We will join Our jonks and Forces to your Ships, to set upon Tayowan, and so utterly root out their whole Party.  
It is most true, that Our Emperor will requite the good Service which you have done to this Empire, by permitting you a free Trade; for I and the General Lipovi will write expressly about it to his Imperial Majesty.  
The jonk which you desire to carry News to Batavia, shall be sent you, when you please to advise Us, whether you will have it Manned with Tartars or Hollanders: We desire you to employ none of your Ships in it, that your Forces may not be weakened, because they will be wanting in the War. If you please, We desire you to stay a little longer before you depart; for I expect an Answer from Lipovi, which so soon as I have, We will appoint the day. This is in short an Answer to your Letter; for all things cannot so well be expressed on Paper.  
Written in the second Year of the Emperor Conghi, the ninth Moon, and the nineteenth Day.  
The one and twentieth, according to the Vice-Roys Request, the Articles and Agreement were written in Chinese and Dutch, on flowered Paper, and both Signed and Sealed by the Admiral and Secretary, with the Companies Seal in Red Wax, and sent ashore about Noon by the Merchant Ernest Hoogenhoek, who was also commanded to request, That the Viceroy would in like manner Seal that for the Netherlanders with his Seal, and return it with him. The Articles were these.  

I. There shall be an inviolable League between us and the Subjects of his Imperial Majesty of China and Tartary.  
II. Faithfully to assist one another against the Coxingans, our Enemies, till they are brought under Subjection.  
III. That Writings shall be delivered on both sides concerning the Flags and Colours, whereby to distinguish each other from the Enemy.  
IV. That the Expedition against the Enemy shall be hastened on both Parties.  
V. That the Emperor's jonks and Vessels shall be under Our Flags, and as Ours divided into three Squadrons, shall keep under them, till their coming to Eymuy and Quemuy, that when Our Ships, which draw more Water, cannot come near the Shore, We may run with the jonks into the Havens; to which purpose, We desire Chinese Pilots.  
VI That We Land and set upon the Enemy together.  
VII. That the East-India Company shall drive a Free and unmolested Trade in China and Tartary, and all other his Imperial Majesty's Countries, for ever; but the disposing of those Goods which We brought along with Us, shall be referred till with joint Forces We have conquered Eymuy and Quemuy.  
VIII. That when We have subdued those Isles, upon Our Request We may take Possession of one of them, or any other thereabouts, which may be convenient for Us, to keep a Garrison, to defend Us from Assaults of the Pirates.  
IX. That on the Conquest of Eymuy and Quemuy, your Highness jonks and Forces shall Sail with Us to Formosa and Tayowan, and upon Conquering of those Places, deliver them with all the Forts and Castles, and what is found in them, into Our Possession, that We may inhabit that Country, as formerly.  
X. That the Viceroy shall accommodate Us with a good jonk, which we may send with Information to Batavia.  
XI. That his Highness also take care that all this be approved of, and confirmed by the Emperor in Peking, and a Grant thereof procured under his Imperial Majesty's Signet, to the Hollanders.   
About these Articles, as the Admiral was informed by Letters of the twenty third from Noble and Hoogenhoek, the Viceroy made great scruple, saying, That he could not sign them, before he had made the General Lipovi, and the Emperor's Deputies in Chinchieu, acquainted with the seventh and eighth Articles, and had their Approbation concerning them, which at farthest within two or three days, on the Word of a King, should be performed; to which purpose he had already sent the forementioned Articles, written by the Netherlanders in form of an Agreement, by Post to Chinchieu. And likewise the other Articles, especially that of Tayowan and Formosa, which upon the taking of it with joint Forces, should be left in possession of the Netherlanders, was already granted without contradiction by the Viceroy. Nay, he had protested to them, That upon the taking of Ay and Quemuy, the free and unmolested Trade through all the Empire of China should not only be granted to the Hollanders for a few years, but for ever, for which he would stand obliged; only he desired them to stay the forementioned three or four days, as we said; when they answering, told the Viceroy, That in that Point they could not satisfy his desire; but that one thing or other thereof must be Sealed: He again repeated what he declared before.  
The twenty third the Admiral sent Lairesse, and the Rere-Admiral Bartholomew Verwei ashore, with Order to go with Noble and Hoogenhoek to the Viceroy, and desire him to Sign and Seal the Covenant for performance of all those forementioned Articles, and also for that of the Free Trade, which his Highness had granted; and then declare to him, That the Hollanders would at present be satisfied with it, and stay the limited three or four days for the granting of that Article concerning Eymuy and Quemuy; but that in the mean time he would be pleased to hasten the sending of the Jonk which was to be dispatched for Batavia.  
The twenty sixth the Vlaerdingen, Nut-tree, Tertolen, Naerden, Mars, Zierikzee, Flushing, and the Cog, being under the Rere-Admiral Bartholomew Verwei his Squadron, set Sail from before the River Soanchieuw, steering directly for Cape Tsombou.  
The twenty seventh a Servant came with the Interpreter Melman from his Highness Singlamong, who had himself been with the General Lipovi, and brought the long-expected Sealed Agreement; as also two Letters, one from the Viceroy, and another from the General. The Conditions aforesaid were to this effect.  

SInglamong Chief Commander, and King of the Territory of Fokien, hath concluded in his Council as followeth.  
Singlamong's Jonks shall carry a black Flag, in the midst of which shall stand a red Fullmoon.  
Matthithel'avia, Governor in Soanchieuw, a yellow Flag with a white Pennon: The Jonks under his Command, a white Flag, and a red Moon: His Mandarins, a green Flag, with a red Moon, and a white Pennon.  
Tonganpek, a black Flag, and a white Pennon: His Officers, a black Flag, with a Silver Moon.  
Soensinpek, a black Flag, and a red Pennon.  
jantoetek, a black Flag, with a yellow Pennon.  
Loylavia, a green Flag, with a Silver Moon in it: His Officers, a green Vane, with a red Moon, and a white Pennon.  
Thelavia, a green Flag, with a red Moon, and a black Pennon: His Officers, a green Flag, with a red Moon, and red Pennon.  
Yoejoeng, a green Flag, with a red Moon, and a white Pennon.  
The Holland Ships shall set Sail from hence with Our Jonks: The smallest, and those that draw least Water, coming before the Enemy's Country, shall run up into the Harbours; and the greatest Ships, as likewise Our biggest Jonks, shall follow. If the Holland Ships, or Ours, be in any danger, they shall not desert, but each be ready to assist the other as much as possible. We promise therefore to be faithful, as People of one Heart ought to be; and from hence forward no Hostility shall be shown on our Part to the Hollanders. Tonganpek shall also set out two convenient Vessels, furnished with experienced Seamen, which shall sail before the Holland Ships, and be at their Service. Likewise he shall furnish the Hollanders with three good Pilots, that understand and know this Channel, which also shall serve the Hollanders. When they set Sail from hence with Our Jonks, they shall keep together, till they see if the Enemy with his Sea-Forces will come out to meet Us: If not, Our Ships shall with the Hollanders come to an Anchor at the Cape of Laetjen, which shall be the Station where the Jonks of Our Kingdom shall meet, and from thence besiege the Enemy's Forts and Islands by Sea, when Singlamong shall give Order what his People are to do when they come ashore. The Hollanders shall the day before receive a Letter from Singlamong, when they shall set Sail from hence. After the Conquering of Eymuy and Quemuy, the Hollanders shall by Our Emperor be accepted as Subjects, and his Imperial Majesty shall acknowledge their faithful Assistance, and grant them their Requests, which I and Lipovi promise with all speed to procure, when once We have seen the Valour of the Hollanders. Furthermore, you may sell those Merchandizes which you have here aboard in that Ship which lies in the Hoksieu: But since the time is short that the Ships must Sail against the Enemy, it will be better that the Goods be reposited in Hoksieu, and the sale thereof deferred till We shall have conquered Eymuy and Quemuy: Yet if you will sell any thing before, you may, it being freely permitted.  
Our Tartar Jonks shall all have a black Circle in their Sails, in which shall stand a black Character.  
This We have Sealed with Our Royal Signet: In the second Year of the Emperor Conghi, the ninth Moon.   
The Letter writ to the Admiral by the Viceroy Singlamong was to this purpose.  
THe last Year you were sent hither from the King of Batavia, and came with your Ships before Hoksieu, and have acquainted by Letters and Word of mouth, That you come to serve Our Empire, and assist Us against Coxinga, which We have already made known to his Majesty at Peking.: And seeing you resolve to be fully satisfied and revenged to the height for all the Losses you have sustained, and never to desist until you have utterly extirpated those Pirates, therefore We have been the more earnest in Our Solicitation: And since you are come hither again this Year to the same purpose, to join with Us, We have read your Letter, which We received some days since, concerning the War, with the Government and Order thereof, which We shall observe when We come to engage with the Enemy; but We find thereby, that you make more Proposals than the last Year, and those such as I and Lipovi (though Chief Governors of this Territory) cannot conclude on, before we have made it known to the Emperor, and received his Approbation. As to what concerns those things for which We have received Orders and Command from the Emperor to conclude with you heretofore, We have sent you in this Letter, and they shall also be strictly observed by Us.  
The Letter from the General was to this purpose. Lipovi General of the Tartars in the Territory of Fokien, to the Admiral of the Hollanders, sends Greeting.  
TWo days since I received Singlamong's and your Letter concerning the Agreement to be concluded between you and Us, which I have strictly perused; but finding some weighty Articles in it, I thought it not convenient to answer your Proposals. It is true, I am placed by the Emperor here as Chief Commander; yet I am not impower'd to treat about such Affairs, according to my desire; but must first acquaint his Majesty with it, and expect his Confirmation: But I have very well understood your desire, and you must expect an Answer to your Business from the Court at Peking, whither I have already sent a Letter. As to your going with Our Ships to Eymuy and Quemuy, Singlamong will acquaint you with Our Intentions, and give ●…ou order concerning all things else. You have enclosed in your Letter the Agreement We have mentioned, viz. That after the Conquering of Eymuy and Quemuy, Our Fleet and Forces shall sail with yours to Tayowan; and likewise that here in Hoksieu, or elsewhere, a Place shall be granted wherein you may drive a Trade; I have also written about it to the Court at Peking, from whence We expect a sudden Answer, which so soon as We receive, We will send you, together with the Emperor's Pleasure concerning your last Articles. You request also three Pilots, which Singlamong will dispatch to you. Here enclosed I send you an Express of the Flags in those Ships which shall go out of this River, to Eymuy and Quemuy, by which they may be distinguished.  
Santokquon, Lipovi's Admiral, shall carry a blue Flag, with a black Moon, and a white Pennon.  
Cheytinquon, a black Flag, with a Moon Argent.  
a green Flag, with a red Moon.  
Schuluwan, General of the Militia, a red Flag, with a black Moon.  
Captain Yoeloewan, a white Flag, with a sable Moon.  
Captain jan Sumpin, a green Flag.  
Captain Go Sumpin, a black Flag, and a blue Pennon.  
This Sealed Writing, being compared with that sent by the Netherlanders to his Highness, to be Sealed by him, was found to differ in the principal Articles, viz.  
The taking possession of the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, was not mentioned, but left out.  
No mention was also made, That if they conquered, than they would go with them to Tayowan and Formosa.  
Concerning the Free Trade through the whole Empire, and also to get the Emperor to ratify their Agreement, they expressed thus: That upon the Conquering the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, the Hollanders should be received into the Emperor's Subjection, and that his Majesty should acknowledge their Assistance, and grant their Request, to which Singlamong and Lipovi would be means that it should be performed.  
Besides, although the King and Councils Writing agreed for the most part with that of the Hollanders, yet they had inserted many new things, about the carrying of their Flags, and other unnecessary Matters.  
The last Exception was, That the Viceroy Singlamong's Letter was signed with his Seal; but Lipovi's was not.  
The Admiral Bort, in Answer to their Highness' Singlamong and Lipovi, writ back, with an Account of what Flags and Colours the Netherlanders used to carry, and should carry in that Expedition, as follows.  
BEsides the Letter from your Highness and the General Lipovi, I also received yesterday the Result made in your Highness' Assembly about Our Business, in which we are permitted to sell those Commodities at this time only which We brought along with Us, being but few, and such as Captain Noble can at any time give your Highness an Inventory of: We accept of this Grant, provided it may be forthwith published, as well here in Soanchieuw, as Hoksieu, and made known to the People by divulging the Proclamation; and that Captain Noble may go about it to Hoksieu, and there at his coming open his Cargoes, and expose the Goods to sale. And though this be but a small Requital for the great Service which We intent to do, yet We will firmly hope and believe, That his Imperial Majesty hereafter will not refuse to grant us a Free Trade for ever, through his whole Empire, it being only what agrees with his Royal Bounty, to requite all such who to their great Charge come to his Service. We declare, That Our Fleet of Ships stands Our Masters in above a hundred thousand Tail to fit out, and forty thousand Tail a Month to maintain: That Fleet which returned last Year with ill success to Batavia, cost also a great Sum of Money, which your Highness must needs be sensible of, and likewise what damage We sustained by the loss of two Ships that came to his Imperial Majesty's Service. If therefore the Sale of those few Goods which We have brought along with Us, can make any satisfaction for the great Charges which We have already been at, We leave to your Highness' consideration. Therefore We cannot but be still importunate in our first Request, That the Free Trade may be ratified to Us for ever through the whole Empire, and Writings sealed in confirmation thereof.  
But as concerning Eymuy and Quemuy, upon whose Conquest We desire some adjacent Isle to plant in; and also about your Sailing with Us from thence to Formosa and Tayowan, and surrendering that Country upon the retaking of it to Us, your Highness makes no mention; neither of the Article to procure Us Letters from the Emperor for the confirming all things.  
Yet We are confident that your Highness will be so favourable as to procure what We so oft and so long have requested; upon which account We are ready and willing to venture Our Lives and Fortunes for the Emperor, and use Our uttermost Endeavours to ruin that avaricious and insulting Pirate, so We stand ready to join Our Forces with yours, desiring all celerity in the Expedition, and that the time for Our setting Sail from Eymuy and Quemuy may be appointed and published, because the time limited for Us to be there, by Our General and Council, is already past.  
There are yet some Prisoners of Ours, whom We desire your Highness to remember, and to send them to Us, if you hear where they are, or find them. In Canton, as We understand, are two of Our Men, that went over to the Enemy, which We desire may be sent fettered to Us, because such as are unfaithful to their Trust, as the worst of Men, should suffer by condign Punishment.  
The Flags and Colours which your Highness Fleet shall carry in this Our intended Expedition, We are sufficiently informed of their differences by your Highness▪ Ours also you may be pleased to take notice of, here enclosed.  
From the good Ship the Nut-Tree, the twenty seventh of October 1663.. from Soanchieuw. Balthasar Bort.  

The Hollanders Colours, when joined with the Tartars, shall be as follows.  
First, All the Vanes and Flags which constantly flow from their Ships, are Red, White, and Blue.  
When a white Ensign appears on the Stern, and a Gun is fired, it signifies the calling of a General Council: This Ensign also signifies Peace, as the Red War, and the beginning of a Fight.  
At the putting on of a red, white, and blue Pennon from the Admiral's Ship, all the Ships must follow him.  
The Admiral's Captain shall carry a green Flag, in which on the upper end near the Staff stands a gilded Lion with a Bunch of Arrows in his Paws.  
The several Inferior Officers shall be distinguished by their several Colours of Red, Blue, Yellow, and Green.  
The Rere-Admiral shall carry a blue Ensign, with a Lion near the Staff; and his Inferior Officers Watchet, Blue, White, and Yellow Colours.  
All other Martial Officers shall carry their Colours mingled, by which, together with their Sails and Yards, they may very well be distinguished from the Tartars.   
The second of November, Constantine Noble came from Soanchieuw aboard the Admiral, and brought an Answer from the Viceroy Singlamong, in which the time of their setting Sail, and all other things were mentioned, as appears by the following Contents.  
IN the tenth Moon, the first day, I have given Order to the Agent Noble to tell the Holland Admiral, That Our Tartar Jonks shall set Sail out of the River Soanchefoe on the ninth of this Our tenth Moon, and shall ride close by the Hollanders in the Haven of Schoeni, and if Wind and Wether serve, to set forth with your Ships the same day, and set Sail to the Bay of Wettauw. Let five of your best Sailors, that draw least Water, go before with Our nimblest Jonks, and so run into the Haven of Wettauw; and the remaining ten Ships, with Our great Jonks, Anchor in the Mouth of the Harbour. If We should meet with any of the Enemy's Jonks in the Bay of Wettauw, as also in the Haven of Kinsakia, as We may expect, let us jointly assail them.  
Concerning your Landing on the Enemy's Coasts, Bethetok and I have resolved about it, which must be known only to us two; but We will give you timely notice thereof.  
I have ordered the Agent to bring me the List of the Merchandises which you have brought along with you, and I will send them by him to the Governor of Hoksieu, with Orders to him to sell them in Public, to which purpose the 
a An Officer belonging to the City.  Conbon will be very serviceable.  
Noble also brought a Letter from the General Lipovi, in answer to that which the Admiral had sent to him, containing the following Lines.  
THe twenty ninth of this ninth Moon I received your Letter, and perused the Contents of it, taking notice of the several distinctions of the Hollanders Flags and Colours, which We have approved, and at this instant acquainted Our Officers with, and ordered them to govern themselves accordingly.  
You are here sent from your King in Batavia, with your Ships, to assist and sail with us to Eymuy and Quemuy: Therefore We believe that you will show your Valour, in setting upon the Enemy's Countries and Vessels, that when they are Conquered, you may return with Honour to Batavia, and there give an Account of your Adventures to your King, That here you have obtained your long wished for Desire of Free Trade, for which you have come hither two Years.  
You write that We should send you Letters of Assurance, that you might for ever Trade through all this Empire, besides the appointing you convenient Houses and Places; which is not possible to be granted, till we are impower'd from his Majesty at Peking, to whom I have already writ concerning it, who by this time understands your Requests: But as for those Wares which you have brought with you, you may dispose thereof at your pleasure. But after the Conquest of Eymuy and Quemuy, when you shall return with Us again to Hoksieu, We shall by that time have, We hope, a pleasing Answer to all your other desires, from the Emperor.  
You propose also, That if any of your Countrymen, being Prisoners with the Enemy, should fall into Our Hands, we would not kill them; which We not only promise, but further also, that We will send them to you; and to that purpose I have already strictly commanded both My Officers and Soldiers. The day on which the Ships shall set Sail with Our Jonks, Singlamong will privately advise you.  
The eleventh the Admiral Sailed out of the Mouth of the River Soanchieuw, and with three Ships, viz. the Nut-Tree, Cinnamon-Tree, and Younker, he came to the Cape of Sombou, although not followed by the Tartar Jonks. The Rere-Admiral Verwei, who had since the twenty sixth lain in the River Soanchefoe, set Sail also from thence with three Ships, the Vlaerdingen, Naerden, and Seahound.  
The thirteenth the Admiral was informed by Letters from Tonganpek, That his Jonks were the day before come out of the River of Soanchefoe, into the Bay of Schoeni; and that Morning a Letter was brought to him from the Admiral Matitoe (who three days before was gone to the Cape of Wattauw) in which he was advised, That he should be with all the Jonks of the Realm at Wattauw on the fourteenth day of that Moon, and also acquaint the Holland Admiral with it, that he might Sail thither with his Ships.  
According to this Advice from Tonganpek, and also perceiving the Jonks sailing before, the Admiral set sail with fourteen Ships from the Cape of Sombou to that of Puthay, behind which he came to an Anchor about the Evening, in nine Fathom Water.  
Here jacob Gommers, Commander of the Zierikzee, came aboard the Admiral, bringing with him one of the Dutch Prisoners, called Maurice janzen Vis, born in Mauritius-Isle, who not long before was taken by the Enemy Coxingans, and by them sent to the Netherlanders: He also delivered the Admiral a Letter from the Enemy, dated the tenth Instant, written by Summimpesiou, otherwise called Sioubontok, the second or next Person to the young Coxin Kimsia, who had the Supreme Command over the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, and other Islands lying thereabouts. The Letter was to this effect.  
Summimpesiou, alias Sioubontok, Commander and Governor of Quemuy, sends this Letter to the Chief Commander of the Holland Fleet.  
YOu have understood and know, that Coxinga two Years ago conquered Tayowan, which formerly was his Native Country.  
This was done because he was forced to provide a Settlement and strong Fortress for his Soldiers, which he used in his War against the Tartar.  
And two Years since Coxinga coming to Formosa, at Sakkam, jacob Valencyn surrendered upon these Articles, That the Hollanders should be allotted a Place in Sakkam, or elsewhere, to go on with their Trade, and settle their Factory in.  
As to what concerns the Tartars, they are very much disabled, and their Forces so broken, that they have lost the Territories Huquan and Nanquin; therefore they have desired you to make War upon Us with your Ships, as We are informed; which We fear not, having Soldiers enough, all indisputably valiant: As for your Ships, they are very large, but draw a great deal of Water; so that they cannot penetrate the River, but must always live at Sea. You also know very well, that when We were in Tayowan We were stored with Soldiers, and Ammunition; therefore have a care of yourselves, that these Eastern Tartars deceive you not; for they are cowardly and deceitful, as you perhaps will find too soon, when you shall see, that in the Battle, and in the greatest need, they will forsake you, shifting basely for themselves: But admit they should stand stoutly, they will always be cavilling; sometimes they will pretend, that you have not assisted them as you ought, but that in all their Engagements they were forced to resist Coxingas Forces alone: Nay, if you should conquer us, which we no ways fear, they will never grant you a settled Factory; for Singlamong and Lipovi have assured Us, That the Hollanders should never obtain a Free Trade in China, if We would come in. And besides, the Emperor in Peking hath not so much as once heard of your Business; for if he did, he would never put you upon a War against Us; therefore I advise you in good time to look to yourselves, nor Engage for a false Friend against so potent an Enemy: for your Ships, of which you boast so much, are rather for Burden than War: and if you come to Traffic with us, then know, that the Coasts you intent for have many Rocks, Sands and Shelves, where your Ships may easily suffer. But in Tayowan we have Sugar, Deer-skins, and other Merchandises which you desire, in far greater abundance: therefore if you will turn your Business to a friendly Commerce, intimate your Intentions to Kimsia, and he will provide a Place for your Merchants, and a Harbour for your Ships. I have with yours sent some of our Men to you to know further your Mind; and if you desire to Treat with me about any thing, send three of your Men to me, and we will first consult: we will send you aboard Valencine's Wife, your Minister Leonard with his Wife, and all the other Prisoners. What we Write is plain, but serious, not ambiguous, and free from all dissimulation. The Hollander Assam was Interpreter two years since in Sakkam to jacob Valencin, therefore I have sent him with this Letter to declare to you all things, and to acquaint you with the condition of our Affairs.  
In the 17th Year of Yunlie, the 10th Moon and the 9th Day.  
The Commander, jacob Gommers-back, sent in Writing by the same Champan which brought Maurice, an Answer to the young Coxin, That neither he nor his Officers could give any Answer upon it; but that they must first acquaint their Admiral with it, and have his Order: therefore it would be requisite for his Highness to send a Coya with Oars to him, to carry the Messenger (by the Chineses called Assam, and by the Netherlanders, Maurice) to receive his Answer on their Proposals.  
This Maurice janzen Vis informed the Admiral and his Council, as well of his own accord as by Examination, That the Enemy was five or six thousand strong in the Island Eymuy, and that there were no other Castles or strong Holds, but one round Stone Wall, without Batteries or Guns: That the Island Lissoe was inhabited only by Rustics, and that the Enemy had no Fortifications there; but on the Island Goutsoe was a small Castle: That Anpontek commanded in Formosa and Tayowan, yet lived on Sakkam, which was no way fortified: That in the Castle there were no Soldiers, nor any but Coxin's Wives and Children: That the Militia were Quartered all about the Country, yet much decreased by divers running away, and many cut off daily by the Formosan King Middag; for neither he nor the People of the Mountains would submit to the Chinese Government; but all the Villages did: That before Eymuy and Quemuy lay about eighty great, and twenty ordinary Jonks with Soldiers; moreover, above two hundred and sixty Jonks Unarmed, in which their Women and Children, and Householdstuff, had their abodes: Lastly, that the Towns on Eymuy and Quemuy were most of them deserted, and the Chineses preparing to fly to Formosa.  
Upon this Intelligence the Admiral and his Council conceived, that their dilatoriness about the Islands would strengthen Formosa, all the rest flying thither, which by all means aught to be prevented. Hereupon it was thought convenient and concluded, to send the Vice-Admiral and Captain Poleman as authorised Persons, to Tonganpek, General of the Tartar Fleet, lying at the Cape of Pathany, to demand of him peremptorily, If he did not intend with all his Jonks and Forces that very day, to join and set Sail with them, and so together fall upon the Enemy: which if he refused, then tell to him, That they would undertake the Work themselves. And that it might appear they dealt uprightly, Maurice janzen was sent with the two Captains to acquaint him, That they had Overtures of Peace from Summimpessiou, yet they would not desist from their Intentions.  
But they returning told the Admiral, That he was very unwilling to Engage till he heard from Singlamong and Lipovi, and therefore desired three or four days respite, alleging that it was not according to the Agreement, which was, That they should assail the Enemy together: but if they would go, then to leave two or three Ships for their Convoy to follow them.  
The fifteenth he sent a Mandarin with Letters to the Admiral, persisting in his former Desire, that he would please to tarry but two days longer. But the Admiral suspecting delays, and the change of their Counsels, and that the time expired they might have other Orders, pitched upon the next day to set forward with eight Ships to Quemuy, and to leave seven small Frigates to conduct them; of which they sent him word by his own Mandarin; desiring also, that for the more easy Landing of their Men they lend them twenty five of their Coya's, or small Boats.  
In the Evening the Hollanders espied fifty or sixty little Tartar Jonks and Coya's to stand directly for Quemuy, to whom the Admiral immediately sent his Lieutenant Hendrick van Dalen, with the Interpreter john Melman, to demand the reason thereof, and why they Sailed thither? to which they returned answer, That the Tartars had that Night taken a Coya with three Men from the Enemy, who informed them that there were many more at Quemuy, therefore they had sent out those Coya's to watch their motion; adding moreover, that the next Morning they were to come again to the Fleet.  
The sixteenth about daybreak they saw the same Vessels according as they told them, returning from Quemuy, but seemed to be a greater Fleet; to meet whom, upon a Signal, many more Boats set out from the Tartars by fifteen or sixteen in a Company, which might easily be discerned very much to decrease the Fleet; and observing they went all of them thither full of People, and returned in a manner empty, they were jealous that the Tartar either had, or would privately agree with the Enemy: whereupon they changed their intention, and resolved to wait another day for the Tartar Fleet, whilst they sent to them to be better satisfied concerning the former Passages.  
This Design falling out so unfortunately, the Admiral commanded all his Men aboard, and the next day set Sail to meet the Tartars, and the remainder of his Fleet, according to Singlamong's Desire, having sent Letters before him to that purpose.  
Whilst the Admiral made these Dispatches, and went with the Vice-Admiral went aboard the jonker Frigate, a Chinese Messenger arrived with a Letter from Somminpesiou, in Coxin Kimpsia, Coxingas Son's Name, who had the chief Command over his Forces. The Letter being interpreted, was found to be of the same Contents as that of the tenth instant, which we mentioned before. Besides this was another written by a Dutch Prisoner, john janse of Bremen, who also desired them to agree with the Chinese, who, if the Netherlanders were inclined to Trade, were best able to serve them; and to that end they might choose a Place where they pleased, and it should be given them; and also that their King Kimsia did with the first opportunity expect the first Messenger Maurice, who he hoped would bring him news, that they would agree with him; in hopes of which they intended to send them their Prisoners from Tayowan.  
Whereupon the Admiral sent word again to Tsioubontok, That he had received his Letters too late, because the Netherlanders had entered into a League before with the Tartars, by which they were obliged to maintain Wars against them, unless the Tartars gave any new occasion of breach; but as concerning Assam, or Maurice, he intended to send him by some other opportunity.  
All things being now ready and in order, they weighed Anchor, and had not Sailed far before they descried behind the Point of Quemuy two of their other Ships at an Anchor, by which they absolutely concluded, that the Tartars whole Fleet was there with them, because they also saw a great many Jonks Sailing behind the Island Lissoe; but in stead of coming on they dropped Anchor: when in the Evening the Admiral received another Letter from Tonganpek to this effect:  
Which the Admiral presently answered, and sending Orders to his Rear-admiral to be in a readiness, prepared for the Rendezvouz at Lissoe.  
The nineteenth he received other Letters, both from Tonganpek and his Rear-admiral, giving an account only of some small Actions, and a little jealousy of his Rear-admiral concerning the Tartars; which he answered no otherwise, but that he would meet them at Lissoe.  
About daybreak the Admiral received a Letter, brought in a Coxingan Vessel, from Tsioubontok, or the second Person to Kimsia; in which, in Kimsia's Name, was written to this effect:  
Summimpessiou sends this Letter to the Holland Commanders in their Ships.  
YOur Letters which I received yesterday I partly understand, viz. that you have made a League with the Tartars; in so doing you have done well: for we know by experience, that you Hollanders never break your Words, and inviolably observe all Covenants and Promises. Whereas the Tartars were ever a perfidious and treacherous People: for it is common with them, after Articles of Peace, and Acts of Oblivion, whom they receive under their subjection, and should honourably protect, they without mercy murder, butchering in a manner, whole Provinces; and those great Persons that were able to withstand them, after they had invited them with golden Baits of Promotion, having once got them in their power, have first loaden them with Fetters, and after murdered, witness my Grandfather Equon and others, whereof we have had woeful experience these twenty years. They have threatened to destroy us and our Fleet with Fire and Sword, and take in Eymuy, and those Isles we stand possessed off, but never durst look us in the face, till by the like dissembling arts they have drawn you in to their assistance; for which they promise you (if you will believe them) a free Trade for ever through the whole Empire: But they are only pleasant with you, and intending no such matter. Besides, whensoever you with your Ships shall Engage ours, they will, to keep up their character of cowardice and treachery, leave you singly either to be overthrown, or work out a hard, and at the best, a disputable Victory: but if by your sole Prowess and Power you subdue us, which we little fear, yet they will not only take into their possession what you have won, but assume the whole honour of the Victory unto themselves: but we will not insist further on this Point. Your Nation we have a kindness for, because we know you to be honest, therefore we, as an honourable Enemy, hoping ourselves to be sufficient enough to fight you, advise you to beware of Rocks and Shoals, whereof there are many in our Harbours: yet if upon better advice, and surer, you will come in to us, we have in Formosa at present twenty thousand Chinese, which make abundance of Sugar yearly; for which your Ships may come into the Haven of Tayowan, and there Traffic: to which purpose we will give you Tamsuy and Kelang, formerly inhabited by the Hollanders, and provide you with a good Harbour for your Ships: If these please you not, you may take Lamoa, or any other. We therefore desire you speedily to send a Person of Quality with Assam, with whom I may Communicate and Treat concerning the whole Affair, who, if we 
Assam is a Hollander, otherwise called Maurice, and brought the first Letter from Summimpessiou.  come to a right understanding, shall bring you all your Prisoners, of what quality soever. The Heavens, Sun and Moon, are witnesses, that what I offer is truth, and desire Peacen; but if it must be War, let us know your determination: for we have a Fleèt five hundred strong, besides two hundred Fireships, with which we shall put you to it, try your Valour, and know how well you Hollanders can fight, not doubting when we come to trial, but to sink, rout, and burn you all.  
In the seventeenth Year of our Emperor junglie, the tenth Moon and the nineteenth Day.  
The Admiral only answered, That he was engaged already to assist the Tartars, and they never made any breach with their Allies without many and just Provocations: therefore he could serve him no otherwise but by returnning thanks for his kind proffers; and that they would continue their civility to their Prisoners, as he had done to theirs.  
About nine a Clock in the afternoon the Admiral set Sail with his eight Ships to Engage with the Enemy's Forces, which consisted in a thousand as well great as small Jonks, and the day before anchored near the Island Lissoe: Then he Sailed to the Southward of Quemuy, where he met with the remainder of his own and the Tartar Fleet: about Noon they fell in with some of the Enemy's Jonks between Lissoe and Quemuy; and although they endeavoured to hinder them from running away, yet some of them made their escape, creeping close under the Shore, and steered their Course to Eymuy: however, they hemmed in about fifty great Jonks of War, which after some resistance, and the sinking one of their biggest, used all means possible to break through, and to fall upon the Tartars, which lay without Shot, and not once offered to Engage; which after some difficulty they effected, and immediately Boarding them, before the Hollanders, by reason of a Calm, could come to their assistance, behaved themselves with so much courage, that after a little resistance the Tartars were forced to fly up to the netherlands Ships, and leave two of their Jonks behind, one Commanded by the Admiral Bethetok, Governor of the City of Soanchieuw, and the other by the General jantetok, which the Enemy took and plundered, but were afterwards by the Netherlanders regained, which the Enemy could not prevent, because upon the Hollanders approach they had enough to do to secure their own Jonks by flight; for their nimble Rowing (the Ships not being able by reason of the calm Wether to follow them) was their preservation, only one running on the Shore of Quemuy, was forsaken by her Men. Against the Evening the Enemy being much scattered, Tided towards the South; but part of them chased along the Coast of Quemuy by the Rere-Admiral late in the Evening, made their escape. The Enemy thus fled, the Battle ended for that Night. The Tartar Jonks went to the North from whence they came, but the Hollanders anchored at Lissoe; whereupon search he found himself no way damnified, but only in his Sails, having but one Man killed, and about sixteen wounded.  
The Hollanders were now fully satisfied of the Tartars cowardice, for that with their whole Fleet, which was four times as strong as the Enemy's, they durst not Engage with seven or eight Jonks, but fled, as we said, for safeguard under the Netherlanders Guns, leaving their Admiral Bethetok, and the General jantetok, which last was killed: whereas the Enemy, when he came near the great Ships, defended himself with Bows and Arrows, and Darts, which in great abundance they shot and threw into the Sails, and likewise with small Shot and fiery Darts, yet did little damage.  
In the Evening the Interpreter Melman was sent aboard Tonganpek, to inquire how it happened that his Men had not defended themselves better? whereto he made this Answer: That a sudden fear had surprised them; but desired him that he should be pleased at the rising of the Moon, to Sail between the Isle of Goutsoe and the other small Isles thereabouts to Eymuy, where he would meet him.  
The twentieth, two hours before Day, the Admiral with his whole Fleet set Sail for Eymuy, and Rowing along to the Southward, so passing by Goutsoe; not far from whence they spied Coxin'gas' Fleet: whereupon the Hollanders made up towards them, as they on the other side did towards the Tartar Jonks, and about ten of the Clock came into the Channel between the Westermost Island of Toata and the Northern, or third of Goutsoe: but the Hollanders, because the Current was against them in that Strait, spent two hours in approaching the Enemy; by which time they had Engaged the Tartars: but at the Hollanders coming in they quitted their Design, and shifted for their safety; which, though the Hollanders had them as in a Pound, that either they must be taken, sunk, or run ashore, they performed with such activity, skill and courage, that they broke through the midst of them, running their low-built Vessels close under their Guns, so fight their Way, that of a hundred and eighty Ships of War, three only were taken, the rest all entering with small damage into Quemuy and Goutsoe.  
Lipovi, greedy to hear of the Success, came down the River Chinchieu, and sent a Batsiang, or Messenger aboard the Admiral, to know the news and advise concerning the Landing of the Tartar Horse at Eymuy: to all which he returned an Answer in Writing by the same Batsiang, relating at large the whole circumstances of the Battle.  
In the afternoon the Netherlanders saw four Chinese Jonks coming from Quemuy, which designed passing by them to go to the Tartars, but they were prevented in their Course by the Guns, and forced to Anchor near the Ships, of which the Commanders that lay nearest, went aboard, and according to the Admiral's Order brought them into the middle of the Fleet; who being examined by the Commanders, told the Admiral, That they had only six Families aboard, and Provisions for their Voyage: Whereupon he declared the Jonks to be free Prize, and gave all what was in them to be distributed amongst the Seamen. Notwithstanding, some Tartar Mandarins came to entreat the Admiral to let them be discharged, alleging, that they had an Invitation by Letter from Geitonkok, Governor of Chinchieu, to make an escape over to them: but he having a Letter from Soanghieu, to spare none upon any pretence, but to make all Prize and Prisoners, made seizure, sending two of them, and keeping the other two for himself.  
But Lipovi not long after sent another Letter to the Admiral, acknowledging, that though he desired to be informed from his Excellency, yet he had seen the Fight, though at great distance from a Hill, and acknowledged the honour of the Victory belonged only to his Ships. His Letter Translated was to this effect:  
Lipovi, Chief Commander and General of the Tartar Forces in the Territory of Fokien, and Admiral of the Fleet before Eymuy, by this Letter sends kind Salutations to his Excellency the Admiral of the Hollanders.  
THe one and twentieth in the Morning, from a Mountain I saw the coming of your Ships, and with joy beheld the driving away of the Pirates Jonks with the Thunder of your Cannon. Now I see the integrity of your Nation, and that you mean as you say, and perform what you promise. I will not be negligent with the first opportunity, to signify to my Master the good Service which you have done to his Imperial Majesty, and how bravely you have behaved yourselves in the Fight, routing yours and our Enemies. Soanghieu's Supplies will be ready to join with us to morrow. What I have more to write, I hope ere long, Sir, to deliver by word of Mouth.  
To which the Admiral returned in brief, That he was much rejoiced that he was pleased to present their Business to the Emperor with such favour, that he should be the better prepared to requite their good Service.  
With Lipovi's Letter, Bort also received one from Admiral Sitetok, who sent him four fed Oxen which he had taken in Eymuy.  
The same day the Rere-Admiral brought john janz, one of the Dutch Prisoners aboard the Admiral, who had written the two forementioned Letters, and was come in a Champan with four Chinese aboard the Rere-Admiral the day of the Fight, having on purpose misconstrued the Admiral's Letter to the Chineses desire, as if he had granted what was but in Proposal, viz. That the Netherlanders would Charge their Guns only with Powder, and that he must go in Person to acquaint the Rere-Admiral with the Design: By which means he got his Liberty, and the rest were taken Prisoners.  
Mean while, the Enemy being dispatched at Sea, the Tartars under Lipovi having Landed their Horse, which put the People under great consternation, they suddenly took the City of Eymuy by Storm, slaughtering the Inhabitants, and plundering their Houses.  
The same day a Mandarin came with a Letter from the General to the Admiral, expressing his joy for having taken the City Eymuy, and desiring that on the Morrow he would be pleased to favour him so much as to come thither and speak with him. The Admiral congratulated his Victory, but excused himself as to waiting upon him, because of the distance of the Place.  
The one and twentieth he received Missives from Tonganpek to this effect:  
TWo days since I saw with great admiration, how valiantly your Ships behaved themselves in the Engagement against the Enemy, which will so amaze the Pirate himself, that he will never dare to look you in the Face. I for my particular part humbly thank you for such kind Service, in dissipating the Enemy. About three days since I sent you the Viceroy's Order, wherein he commands us to Sail with all our Fleet to Eymuy; but being on my Way thither, I was by another Order detained at Liutien. Now in regard his intentions are to come in Person to Eymuy, I humbly desire you, according to his Request, that you will please to send five of your Ships to Liutien, and with the other ten lie at an Anchor before Eymuy, to prevent the Eenemy from making an escape, and in so doing you will oblige me. At present I have little of fresh Provision to send you; yet be pleased to accept this small Present, viz. five Porkers, fifty Capons, fifty Ducks, five Pots with Liquor, some Crabs, and ten Picols of Radishes.  
To this Letter he answered, That on Singlamong's Request, to secure him and his Jonks from the Enemy, he would command eight of his Ships to Sail to Lissoe; and that they would not fail with the rest of their Fleet to come to the Tartars assistance.  
No sooner was this Answer on Shore, but Lipovi sent a second Request, and that he need not trouble himself, for he was sufficiently Guarded by Tonganpek with his Forces: therefore if he would be pleased to come ashore, he and his Mandarins would entertain him in the fairest House in the Island.  
Upon which Invitation, first choosing two Jonks for his own use out of those which he had taken, he went ashore, accompanied with the Vice-Admiral Huibert de Lairesse, and Captain Poleman.  
The General being assembled with his principal Mandarins in young Coxingas House, received the Admiral with great courtesy and real joy. Lipovi also ascribed the honour of the Victory to the Netherlanders, telling them, That it was not themselves, but they that had put the Enemy to the rout; that he had seen the Engagement at Sea before Eymuy, and sufficiently heard of that at Quemuy: for which much rejoicing, he highly extolled their Valour. Whereupon he assured the Admiral, That though he was not able to make satisfaction for the Service which they had done to his Country, he would endeavour that the Emperor should.  
Lipovy having ended his Discourse, the Admiral returned in like manner, how glad he was for his Victory at Eymuy, wishing him many more, not doubting but he should scour the Sea, and clear the Port and Harbours from the Coxingans, that Piratic Rabble.  
After this the Admiral made three Requests to the General:  
First, That he would be pleased to write a Letter to the Konbon in Hoksieu, and give Order in it, that the Goods which Captain Noble and the Merchant Hogenhook had in Hoksieu, might be sold off.  
Secondly, That they might not stay long there, but prosecute the Enemy on Quemuy and the other Isles.  
Thirdly, That the Tartars should then go with the Netherlanders to Formosa, and assist them in driving the Pirates from thence.  
The first and second Request Lipovi absolutely granted the Admiral, promising more, That he would not fail to get them what they so much desired, a free Trade through the Empire, and that within two days they would Sail together to Quemuy. But concerning the third Proposal of going with the Netherlanders to Tayowan, he made no promise; but said, That perhaps would follow, after the rest of their work was finished.  
Then Lipovi recounted to him what purchase they had upon the Isle, consisting only in a few cattle and Sheep, of which he sent forty Oxen and some of the Sheep aboard the netherlands Ships; promising them the whole Plunder of the other Isles, that his Men might not be discouraged, but might venture their Lives for something.  
Whilst the Admiral was ashore, three Champans with Chinese Rustics came amongst the Fleet, which dwelled on the Main Land near Goutsoe, with Request to the Netherlanders, to grant them a Pass to go to the Tartars, and submit themselves to his Subjection, by cutting their Hair like the Tartars, and paying of Tribute, which the Admiral so soon as he came aboard granted them; in requital whereof, they gave him four Hogs, and five Pots of Chinese Beer.  
The Rustics being asked concerning the condition of the Chinese Enemies, declared, That they were all fled away from thence in the night, none knowing whither they were gone.  
The two and twentieth, the Admiral received a Letter from his Highness, and the Viceroy Singlamong, in Thanks for his got Victories over the Chinese, with Entreaties, that he would Sail with the Fleet to the Isle of Goutsoe.  
The same day Captain Poleman and the Secretary were sent ashore to deliver to the Viceroy and General, what so long had slept, and would not be at first received, the Letter and Presents from Maetzuiker and the Council at Batavia, and to request of Lipovi, that he would be pleased, according to his promise the day before, to write to the Conbon, and with it send a Letter, which the Admiral had given to Poleman and the Secretary, and directed to Constantine Noble at Hoksieu.  
The Agents having received their Orders, went in two Sloops to the General, whom they found on the Main Land, opposite to Colongsoe; and after a kind Salutation to him from Maetzuiker, they delivered him the Letter, which the General having perused, declared, that their Excellency's Letters were very acceptable; yet it seemed strange, that they should send Presents, when they knew it was not his Custom to receive any; but if they were useful in War, he would accept of them; to which being soon persuaded, he required them as they were brought before him, and commanded them, without opening, to be carried to his Tent, only returning the Compliment of Thanks; promising also to unite to the Conbon in Hoksieu, in the behalf of the Hollanders there: After this, the Agents having been nobly entertained by Lipovi, took their leave and departed.  
The three and twentieth the Fleet having fired three Guns, set Sail to the Isle of Goutsoe, accompanied with the Tartars; and about Noon they came to Anchor, a League and half South-West from the Island, not being able, by reason of a calm and contrary Tide, to double the North Fore-land, while the Tartar Jonks Anchored before Lissoe; from whence, the Admiral was desired by Sietetok and Tonganpek to come ashore, whither (having resolved to go before) he went with Lairesse, Captain Poleman, and three Companies of Soldiers to the Isle of Goutsoe; from whence the Enemy was fled, and they took possession of three new raised Forts which were deserted, one of them with a Castle, and though not very beautiful, yet strong, for the Walls and Breast-Works which were twenty three Foot high, were made of firm Stones, and the Curtain on the Walls six Foot broad; the whole in Circumference, as big as the Castle at Batavia; but nothing was found in it, except Stools, Benches, (the Tartars having been there and Plundered all) and thirty nine unserviceable Iron Guns, which lay about; of these the Hollanders making themselves Masters, placed Sentinels to look over them, till they had opportunity of Shipping.  
The next day there came Letters from Lipovi, that he had given Order to dismantle the three Castles, excusing it from the infertility of the Country, as unfit for the Hollanders to make any thing of, either to improve or Garrison; and that Formosa was much better for them to resettle upon, which they need not doubt, but the Tartars should help them to regain, and then they should possess it as formerly; but the Admiral sent word, that he would not suffer them to touch it, until the next day he had spoken with their General Lipovi.  
Soon after the Admiral received a Letter from Lipovi, which was to this effect:  
At present you have had much trouble, but now there is nothing left but the Isle Quemuy, which I desire you will Sail to with Setetok and Tonganpek, that there you may fully take satisfaction for your losses; and therefore let your Soldiers first Pillage the Country, and then ours shall be contented with the Glean: This done, We will burn and pull down the Towns, because we do not desire to keep them; when we have won Quemuy, than we will consult of further Proceedings.  
The twenty fifth in the Morning, the Admiral, and the Mars, and Zirikzee Frigates, setting Sail with all the Tartar Jonks to Quemuy, Anchored in the Afternoon between Lissoe and Toata, where he called a Council, to consult if they should take the Island Goutsoe in Possession, because of the Forts already built upon it, and Garrison them, or not? Whereupon after some debate, they unanimously agreed, not to settle on that Island, nor Garrison the Forts, but suffer the Tartars to burn and destroy them, because it was little, barren, and not improvable by Cultivation; but their special reason was, that it would too much weaken them, having designed so suddenly to fall upon Formosa.  
The twenty sixth in the Morning, the Admiral set Sail again, being followed by nine Frigates to the West side of Quemuy, where he Anchored amongst several Tartar Jonks, which Sailed thither the day before.  
The Rere-Admiral Verwei stayed with five Ships at the Isle of Goutsoe, to bring away the remaining Guns, and make those that could not be brought unfit for Service by Cloying; with Orders also, that when he had done, he should come up to Quemuy.  
The Admiral and his Men going ashore, found the Enemy likewise fled from thence, and the Tartars pulling down, tearing, and rifling the City, which was contrary to Lipovi's promise, who not only in his Letters, but personally assured the Admiral, that the Netherlanders should have all the Plunder; but after this they set a less value upon the Tartars promises.  
But however, the Admiral, Vice-Admiral and Captain Poleman went to see this little City, whose Walls were of an incredible thickness, yet not so strong as those of Aymuy, and an hours walking in Circumference, with four Gates, besides fifteen or sixteen Iron Guns, which the Tartars made Prize of. Moreover, the City consisted all of Stone Houses, but thinner built than Aymuy, yet all were desolated, the Inhabitants being all fled, only here and there the Tartars picked up some miserable Creatures out of Holes and blind Recesses, whom they used Salvagely, killing some, cutting, slashing, and driving them like cattle, which the Admiral observing and pitying, towards Evening went thence aboard.  
The twenty seventh, the Admiral received several Letters, but that of most concern was this from the Viceroy and General, Singlamong and Lipovi, which were written before, but hindered by bad Wether, came not till now, being in effect the Contents of all the rest.  
YOu worthy Hollanders have had great care and trouble to beat the Pirate Our Enemy, which is very well known to Us; We may certainly say, that you have been a Terror to them, and put them to flight by your Valour and Conduct; I and Lipovi Thank you for the Service done to Our Empire. Three days since We desired you in a Letter to come to see Us at Cinwe, that there We might Communicate Our Consultations; to which We have received your Answer and Resolution, that you intent to cleanse your Ships at Quemuy, which We are very well pleased with. But the Pirate out of fear of your Forces is fled, and hath settled on the Isle Tongsan, which place belongs to the Province of Fokien; therefore if he be not now prosecuted, he will soon return to the deserted Islands and skulking places which he hath forsaken. You write after you have cleansed your Ships, that you will Sail to the Cape of Wetaw, or to Soanchefoe, to speak with Us; which if the Enemy should hear of, he would soon come and find the Island, which is now Guarded by you, in its full state as he had left it; because you desired that the Forts there should not be pulled down, nor the Houses in the City be burnt; if therefore the Enemy should find your People gone and his places no way ruined, he might perchance soon be Master of all again; wherefore We keep Our Forces in Arms near the Enemy's Borders, lest that after your departure he should return.  
The twentieth of Our tenth Moon, one of Our Commanders informed us, that in the last Month he took near Tongsan, in the Haven of Yuntzaw, an hundred and sixty Jonks and Vessels; and also that he took and killed five thousand Men, of which two hundred are yet kept Prisoners, whereof one is an eminent Mandarin Therefore since the Pirate is so near, and it is not to be doubted but that he will settle himself again on the forementioned Isle, We desire you to take this trouble upon you, and do so much Service more for this Empire, as to Sail with Our Jonks to Tongsoa, that there the Foe may also be dislodged. To which purpose, Lipovi and I are together at Cinwe, to give Order, that all Our Jonks, as well great as small, may be in readiness; and being furnished with Men and Provisions, may Sail with your Ships to Tongsoa. We very well know, that your People understand better how to fight at Sea than Ours; therefore I and Lipovi wish, that you be inclined to go thither, that We may have it from your own Mouth; whereupon We will rely, and desire that We may know your answer by these two Mandarins; but if it be possible, take the trouble upon you, and come to Us in Cinwe, that We may consult about this and other Affairs.  
The Interpreter and Secretary brought also a Copy of the Letter sent by Singlamong and Lipovi, about their business to the Emperor in Peking, which being Translated was to this effect.  
THe Holland Ships having set Sail with Our Jonks from Soanchefoe, and Anchored again at Wetauw, on the twelfth of the tenth Moon, the eighteenth of the same, eight Ships Sailed to Quemuy, and seven Holland Ships with Our Jonks the day after passed thorough, and Anchored by Our Jonks on the West side of Quemuy.  
The nineteenth, Our People drove away some Jonks from Quemuy, but on the twentieth, We saw the Pirates Jonks, being almost two hundred, coming from Goutsoe, towards Us and the Hollanders, who enclosed the Enemy, and made such a rout amongst them, that they were forced to fly, having left many Men, as We understood of some that came over to Us from Eymuy.  
The one and twentieth day of the same Moon, the Holland Admiral went with a courageous Heart with his fifteen Ships to the Enemy at Taota, and stoutly Engaged him on the Isle Eymuy; from whence the Pirate, to his great shame and disgrace, was also forced to fly to Goutsoe, whither the Hollanders and Our Jonks also Sailing on the twenty fourth, they found the Enemy fled thence Southwardly to Lamoa and Tangsoa.  
The twenty sixth, the Holland Ships Sailed with Ours to Quemuy, and there caused by Our People, all the Towns and Forts to be burnt and pulled down. The Holland's Admiral hath behaved himself very Valiantly against the Enemy; they are all a People of great Resolution and Valour, to fight with their Ships at Sea, and Muskets on the Shore; they have had a great deal of labour and trouble, for they carry many great Guns in their Ships, which require much trouble to Charge and Discharge them.  
The Admiral writ in answer to their Excellencies, That he intended to send a Jonk to Batavia, with advice to the Lord General and Indian Council, of their Adventures concerning the Routing of their Enemy, and his deserting of their chief Cities, Eymuy, Quemuy, Goutsoe, and others; which done, and that he had cleansed his Ships, he would in Person come to their 
a Singlamong and Lipovi.  Highnesses, that then they might consult one with another concerning all their Affairs.  
Moreover, the Admiral told the two forementioned Messengers, how he was displeased, that their People had taken all the Booty on Quemuy, and given his Men not so much as an Ox, which was contrary to Lipovi's promises, not only in Person, but in his Letters also; alleging, that it no ways suited with their Natures to be served so; which he desired them to tell Singlamong and Lipovi: Who replied, The Messengers had to their sorrow already understood it out of the Admiral's Letter, and would not forget to make satisfaction for it.  
The same day the Vlaerding and Buiksloot came to an Anchor near the Island Quemuy, before Goutsoe; for the three other, viz. the Cog, Flushing, and Naerden could not get out. Here the Rere-Admiral Verwei told the Admiral, That since his departure from thence, according to his Order, he had gotten twenty Iron Guns out of the Forts on the Isle Goutsoe, besides an hundred ninety eight Bullets, which were distributed amongst the Flushing, Buiksloot and Nieuwendam.  
The third in the Morning, they saw one great new Jonk, one Wankan, and two Coyaes' coming about the South-West Point of the Isle, to which most of the Ships sent their Boats and Sloops, to take them, which accordingly was performed by the Rere-Admiral, who took the Jonk, and also the three other Vessels, who yielded without the least resistance, all of them Loaden with Ballast, Rice, and 
a Unthres●…'d Rice.  Padije.  
The Admiral and Rere-Admiral Rowing aboard the Jonk, found in her eight Iron Guns: The Chineses aboard informed them, that in the seventh Moon of the Year, they were sent by the young Coxin from the Isle Quemuy to Pakka, Kitat, and other adjacent Isles, and places lying to the Northward of Hoksieu, there to Load as much Rice as they could get, and then return with all speed, because those places were in great want. They also related, That in the eighth Moon, they had found about the North several Bills of Singlamongs and Lipovi's sticking up, whereby all the Chineses that kept out of the Empire were invited to come in to the Tartars. Thus the Chineses in the great Jonk informed the Hollanders, perhaps on advice of some Tartars that had been with them before; For those of the other three Vessels declared, that they thought all things had still been there in their former state and condition, and expected to have found their Families at Eymuy and Quemuy; neither did they know any other, but that their Fleet had remained ready to have Engaged the Tartars: But coming about the South-West Point of Quemuy, and spying the Hollanders Ships, they would fain have fled, but were necessitated by reason of the calm, and seeing they could not get clear from them, to surrender themselves without any resistance; therefore they desired that their Lives might be spared, which they obtained. They also said, That they expected twenty Sail to follow them, which on the second instant they had left to the Northward of the Isle Ongkoe; from whence they came with six Vessels, of which, four were now in the Netherlanders Possession, and two Sailed about the South, as they judged, to the Isles of Tangsoa and Lamao, where they dwelled: Being asked if they had not seen any of the Enemy's Jonks coming from japan, at Sea, they replied, No, but that in this Month some were daily expected from thence.  
Soon after, Tonganpeks Admiral came aboard the Dutch Admiral, to ask what Vessels they were which he had taken, and from whence they came, and also if they had resisted the Netherlanders; of which they informed him as beforemention'd: Then he enquired when the Admiral intended to go to Singlamong and Lipovi; and if he would Sail with them to Tangsoa? To the first Question the Admiral replied, That he knew not the certain day: And to the second, That he did not know what his Ships should do there, because their Highnesses had advised him, that one of the Tartars Commanders had some days since taken from the Enemy an hundred and sixty Vessels, and killed and taken Prisoners near five thousand Men. This, replied he, was not of the young Coxin's power, but of another Pirate, who kept about the Isles Tongsoa and Lamao, and was formerly neither subject to the Tartar nor Coxin, but set up for himself, and maintained Piracy.  
Then the Secretary related, That young Coxin had sent Agents to this Pirate, to crave his assistance against the Tartars; and also that he was gone with all his Forces to Tangsoa and Lamao, there to join with him, because he did not know (being driven from the Isles Eymuy, Quemuy, Goutsoe, and others thereabouts) what he should do.  
The same day they sent the conquered Jonk, by them called, The Good Tidings, to Batavia, with eight Chinese Prisoners, Letters, and Papers.  
This day also the three remaining Ships which stayed at Goutsoe to help take in the Guns, came to the Fleet at Quemuy; so that the whole Fleet consisting in fifteen Men of War, were all in a Body together.  
The fourth, a Tartar Vessel with two Mandarins came to the Admiral with a Letter from Singlamong and Lipovi, in which they earnestly desired him, that he would repair to them at Cinwe. Whereto the Admiral replied, That so soon as his Ship was cleared from the Rocks (for the day before it was driven within half a Musket shot to the Rocky North-West Point of Quemuy) and lay out of danger amongst the other Ships, he would wait upon them.  
Mean while came Maurice jansz, whom the Netherlanders used as their Interpreter in the Chinese Tongue, and told the Admiral, That he had heard by some Tartar Chineses which came aboard with the Mandarins, that young Coxin had sent Agents to Singlamong and Lipovi, with proffers, that they would submit themselves to the Tartars Jurisdiction, by cutting off their Hair, because he was not able to maintain War against them any longer; but especially, by reason of those great losses which he had lately sustained.  
The Admiral to learn the Truth of it, Ordered the Interpreter Melman to inquire of the two Mandarins, who affirmed it, with alleging, That the Enemy had lately so many wounded and slain Men by the Netherlanders Guns, that none of his Soldiers would fight any longer; nay, that all his Forces in Tayowan came flocking to the Tartars, and would freely surrender both Tayowan and Formosa to the Hollanders: Therefore the Viceroy and Lipovi desired to speak with him; also that Tonganpek was to go to Tayowan with some Jonks to fetch all that would submit themselves to their Emperor, and from thence bring them to the Main Land.  
The next Morning, about five a Clock three Jonks came to the Fleet, and in them one Mandarin, who came aboard the Admiral, with request from their Highnesses, that seeing it was fair Wether, he would be pleased in those Jonks to come to them, or at least to appoint a day, because they might not wait in vain at Cinwe, from whence they were minded to go with the first conveniency.  
The Admiral having consulted with his Council, resolved to go thither the next Morning; whereupon the Mandarins went in one Jonk to carry the News to their Excellencies, leaving two behind amongst the Fleet to convey the Admiral to Cinwe.  
The sixth, the Admiral went according to his promise attended with Captain Poleman, Secretary Ysbrantsz, and some other Retinue in the two Tartar Jonks sent for that purpose to the Fleet.  
In the Evening, the Vice-Roys Interpreter came to them, and in his Master's Name entering the Jonks, bade them welcome, with promises, that he would take care the next Morning to provide that they should be well Mounted for Cinwe.  
The seventh, the Admiral Landed between the straits of Eymuy, and the main Coast of China, where he was presented with a Copy of a Letter, by a Batavian Chinese, called Seko, from Noble and Hogenhoek in Hoksieu, dated the twenty eighth of November, (of which the true Letter and Post was sent by the Conbon) in which they informed the Admiral, That they could not go from Soanchieu before the twentieth of the same Month, and that seven days after they came into Hoksieu, where they were not permitted to Vend their Commodities according to the Conbon or Governor's promise, till he had further Order from Singlamong and Lipovi, that when they told him that it was granted by the Viceroy and General, he replied, That he had no such advice.  
The Letters and Presents of the Admirals he had received, and sent a Messenger to their Highnesses, to know their intentions concerning the Trade; further requesting, That they would be pleased to send him the Originals, written by Singlamong and Lipovi concerning the same. This Copy being delivered to the Admiral in his way, riding to the Viceroy, he would not read it till he had been received in the Viceroy's Tent; after which, he perused it in the Viceroy's presence, and three of his Council, and explaining it to them, asked them, Why against their written Obligation they kept their Merchandise unsold? But the Viceroy excusing himself, said, That he had sent Letters of Licence to the Conbon; but Lipovi had Countermanded it, and first desired an Inventory of all the Merchandise which they had brought with them, that he might send it to Peking; but since that he and Lipovi jointly had given free leave to sell those, and bring in other Goods; whereupon the Admiral desired, That he might have such a Letter of Command then given him, that he might send it with one of his own to Noble and Hogenhoek in Hoksieu, which the Viceroy immediately granted.  
This Discourse being ended, Singlamong proposed to the Admiral, and desired that he would send his Ships with their Jonks against the Enemy, who on the Isles Tongsoa and Lamoa did now fortify himself; whereupon the Admiral replied, That he had heard and understood, that the Enemy had sent Agents to his Highness, and proffered to submit themselves to the Tartars, and therefore (said he) how shall we understand your Proposal? The Viceroy pausing a little answered, 'Tis true, but there is no assurance in these Villains, neither do I believe them; therefore he judged it convenient, still to prosecute the War against them. The Admiral replied, That he intended to Sail to Tayowan and Formosa, and therefore entreated him to send his Forces and Jonks first along with him thither, and then they would go jointly, and drive the Enemy from Tongsoa and Lamoa; also that he had received Orders from his Masters in Batavia, that when he had beaten the Enemy from Eymuy and Quemuy, he should not go to Tongsoa or Lamoa, but to Formosa and Tayowan: Besides, the Admiral added, that he had understood that the Coxingan's were not in Tongsoa, but having Pillaged the Rustics, and taken what they could find, were gone to Tayowan and Formosa; and though the Viceroy persuaded the Admiral that he was assured to the contrary, yet he stood firm to his Proposal, that he might go from thence to Tayowan; whereupon, the Viceroy observing the Admiral to be in earnest, said, That the present routing of the Enemy could not be taken for a Conquest, for they still had their Forces together, and therefore without doubt, as soon as the netherlands Ships were gone, they would return to their Receptacles again, and invest the Coasts as formerly. Whereupon the Admiral replied, That it was impossible to kill them all, because where ere they came, they fled from them, and got away by the nimbleness of their Jonks; and if the Netherlanders should go with the Viceroy's Jonks to Tangsoa and Lamoa, and drive the Enemies thence; yet the Coast would not so be cleared of them, but that there would still be some in one place or other: To which the Viceroy said, that if the Enemy were but driven thence, he would be satisfied, because than he would be hunted out of the Territory of Fokien, where he was Chief; and then (proceeded he) my Jonks shall go with yours to Tayowan; therefore he desired the Admiral to consult with his Vice and Rere-Admiral about it; which he promised to do, and so ended that Consultation.  
Moreover, Singlamong excused himself concerning the forty promised Oxen; because he had no Vessels at Eymuy to bring them aboard the Admiral's Ships; therefore he desired him to accept them now, and with them five hundred Picols of Rice, which he had given Order to be carried before. The Admiral thanking him, said, That he needed not the Rice so much as the cattle, however, he would accept his kindness; but when they were brought aboard, half of them were dead, which they were forced to throw into the Sea, whereof the Viceroy having notice, promised, that for every dead Beast, they should have one alive.  
Soon after, the Admiral having been well entertained, took his leave, and went to the Tents set up on purpose for them, near the Seaside on a high Hill. No sooner was the Admiral come thither, but he received the promised Letter of Command to the Conbon, for selling the Merchandizes in Hoksieu, that he might send it himself with his Letter to Noble, who was only to show it to the Conbon, and then make Sale of his Goods, which contained to this effect.  
Singlamong sends this open Letter of Command to the Holland Admiral of the Sea, to be sent by him to their Agent in Hoksieu.  
SInce the Hollanders with their Ships and Forces have done so good Service to Our Realm, in the routing their and Our Enemies, and the wished for Victory remains on Our sides, therefore I and Lipovi have resolved to Grant them to Sell all those Merchandizes, which they have brought with them in Hoksieu, for the maintaining of their People, as We have by Letters already informed the Emperor in Peking: Therefore We Command the Conbon in Hoksieu, that he assist them in the same, and provide them a Person who may be present to look that they may not be cheated by Our Merchants.  
This Letter We have sent open, that the Holland Agent, upon the receipt of these Our Orders, may immediately begin to dispose of his Goods that are ashore in Hoksieu; as also those that are yet in their Ships lying before the Magazine. The Mandarin, who by the Conbon is ordered to be at the selling of the Commodities, shall take an exact account of what Goods and Moneys the Hollanders receive in return for their Merchandise, that they may not be deceived or defrauded by any; and he shall also inform Us of what shall be done herein.  
Under Singlamong's Seal was written: In the second Year of the Emperor Conchi's Reign, the eleventh Moon, and eleventh day.  
In the Evening the Admiral sent the forty Oxen which had been given him by the Viceroy, to be distributed amongst the Ships.  
Soon after the Viceroy sent to tell the Admiral, That if he was desirous to see the Country, he would send Horses to his Tent; for which Proffer he returned thanks, and sent word, That he would expect them. Mean while it began to grow wet Wether; but the Rain again ceasing, the Admiral and his Company walked afoot to the Camp, where the Tartars had entrenched themselves very handsomely within several Batteries: Here getting on Horseback, they were conducted to the Vice-Roys Tent, who desired the Admiral to come in, where having sat a while, he enquired if he had sent Letters to his Vice-Admiral, and also his Letter of Command to Noble and Hogenhoek in Hoksieu; to which he answered, Yes.  
Then the Viceroy told him, That he hoped the Vice-Admiral would comply with his Request, to sail to Tongsoa: The Admiral answered, He supposed there was no doubt; and withal added, That Noble and Pedel desired they might go to Batavia, and therefore he had ordered Hogenhoek, who had lived many Years in japan, and the Factor Bartel (both Men of whom the Netherlanders and his Highness might expect good Service) to stay in Hoksieu: To which Singlamong answered, That it was all one to him who stayed, so they were People of good conversation, and he believed the Lord General would not send any other into that Empire. After this, they discoursed about the cleansing of the netherlands Ships, and the Island Colongsoe, which the Admiral desired he might see, and that if it lay convenient for the Netherlanders, they might take it into possession, and Garrison it with Soldiers, the situation being near the Main Land, and before the Mouth of the River Chincheu, which whatever the Netherlanders wanted, they might have from thence, and likewise drive their Trade all under one. Whereupon the Viceroy replied, That they had always made choice of Goutsoe; What then would they do with Colongsoe? Whereupon the Admiral replied, That if he would permit them to drive their Trade, that then they would leave six Ships there, take the Island into Possession, and Garrison the Forts with their Soldiers: Whereto the Viceroy suddenly said, That that was not his meaning; for he durst not give away any Lands that belonged to the Emperor, but that they must expect his Imperial Majesty's Order for that, as well as the driving of their Trade in Hoksieu: Yet at last, after many Arguments, he granted the Hollanders on the Emperor's allowance to take and Garrison the Isle of Goutsoe, conditionally, That if the Emperor should not approve of it, then to desert it again. But concerning their Traffic, Whether it would be granted them for ever or not, they must expect an Answer in five Weeks time.  
Thus the Business rested; and the Netherlanders, after having been plentifully entertained, taking their leave, in the Evening road to their Tents.  
Towards Night the Admiral received a Letter from the Vice-Admiral Huibert de Lairesse, and his Council, in answer to one sent to him the day before, wherein he advised him, That their Opinions agreed with his, not to go with the Fleet to Tongsoa and Samoa; yet they referred themselves wholly to what the Admiral pleased to do.  
The ninth the Vice-Roys Interpreter went to the Admiral, to know whether he had received an Answer from the Vice-Admiral; whereupon the Admiral informed him, That he could not persuade his People to it, because it was impossible for them with their Ships to go from Tongsoa to Formosa and Tayowan, whither they had strict Order first to Sail; according to which, after six days, he resolved to set Sail thither with his Ships that lay at Quemuy, desiring that his Highness would be pleased to send his Jonks with him; as after the subduing of the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, he had promised; with which Answer the Interpreter returned. But soon after he was sent back with the Vice-Roys Excuses, That he could not send his Jonks with him to Tayowan, because they wanted Sails and Rigging for such a Voyage; but if they would please to stay a little longer, they would endeavour to fit themselves out: And as an Inducement to it, he granted them the Isle of Goutsoe, which they might freely take, and Garrison as they thought fit. But the Admiral much dissatisfied, answered, That he delighted not in such Procrastinations, nor would any longer be delayed; for he plainly saw, and must be bold to say, That the Viceroy minded not either what he said, or what he writ; and therefore they would no longer rely upon him: But as for Goutsoe, it was not then convenient for them to take the possession thereof, because they should thereby weaken their Forces designed for the taking in of Tayowan, but if they would preserve the Forts and Houses from ruin till their return, than they would Garrison it.  
Many other like Expressions he had to the Interpreter, concerning his not being satisfied with the Vice-Roys waver and unconstancy; who relating it all to the Viceroy, he seemed very much nettled, to hear from the Admiral's Mouth such his Character, and sent him back suddenly with several Complimental Excuses: But the Hollanders continuing firm to their Resolution, after many Messages tossed too and fro, at last it was brought so far, that he not only excused them from going to Tangsoa and Lamoa, but also consented, that with all the Fleet they might go to Formosa; promising likewise, that he would send two Jonks, Manned with two hundred Soldiers, to Formosa, under the Command of two Mandarins, with Letters to demand that Country for the Hollanders: But if the Enemies would not surrender to the Hollanders, nor submit to the Tartars, that then one of their Ships should come back with the two Jonks and Mandarins to inform him of it, that he might send all his Navy and Forces to their assistance, which, according to the Admiral's Request, they should have confirmed under his Sign Manual before they set Sail.  
In the Evening Admiral Bort advised the Vice-Admiral Lairesse, in a Letter, of all that had passed ashore.  
The tenth, he having resolved to go aboard the next Morning, desired his Goods might be put into a Jonk, and that he might be furnished with Coelyes for that purpose.  
These Coelyes, by others called Poelyes, are a mean sort of Labouring People, that for small Wages will serve any Person whatsoever, in the Carriage of Burdens and Commodities from Place to Place, as our Porters or Carriers: They wear Shoes of Straw or Leather, which they tie about their Ankles with a String made fast at their Toes; and are so swift of Foot, that they can match a Horse in his full speed.  
In the Afternoon Captain Poleman was sent to Singlamong, to thank him for the Kindnesses shown to them while they had been on Shore, and also to acquaint him, that they would wait five or six days longer for the two Jonks and Mandarins, with two hundred Soldiers, and also the Letter to the Governors of Tayowan: Lastly, to present his Highness, in the Admiral's name, a Pair of Pistols and Holsters, and a Sword with a guilded Hilt.  
At his Return Poleman related what he had received in answer, That his Highness was sorry he could give no better Entertainment; but he hoped they would excuse it, as being in a Camp, and not a City; That he would send the two Jonks and Mandarins, with the Soldiers, and also the Letter to the Governor of Tayowan, at the appointed day: That he accepted the Presents, because they consisted in Arms, pretending to be ashamed, because the Ong or King of Batavia had twice sent to him, and he had not made one Return: But he would not forget to present him by the Finch some of the Products of his own Country, with a Letter, and humble Thanks for his good Inclination towards him.  
The eleventh the Admiral and all his Retinue took their leaves, and soon after went to the Fleet, and Singlamong with his Army to Soanchieuw.  
The twelfth in the Afternoon the Admiral came near the low Point of Quemuy, aboard of the Zierikzee Frigate.  
The thirteenth, several Jonks went from thence to Eymuy and Soanchieuw, whither Tonganpek was gone four days before, in which time he had written a Letter to the Admiral, to this effect.  
I Thank you for the Honour and Kindness which I have received from you since We joined Our Fleets. Now the Enemy is fled, there is great hopes that you may easily regain your Countries of Tayowan and Formosa. The Pirate is retired to Tangsoa, whither We must pursue him; to which purpose, I will fit out eighty great and small Jonks, under the Command of Choentsay and Goemtsin, which shall Sail to Eymuy, and there join with Sitetok's Fleet, I would have gone myself in Person, but that I am obliged to go to Soanchefoe, to receive an Honour sent from the Court at Peking to be conferred upon Me, which I thought good by these to acquaint your Honour with.  
In the Evening two Mandarins brought a Letter to the Admiral from the General Lipovi at Soanchieuw, and also five hundred Picols of Rice, which he had formerly promised to the Seamen and Soldiers.  
The fourteenth in the Morning the Admiral went ashore in the Island Quemuy, where he viewed some ruin'd Villages, and especially the Walled City Sauja-houpon, being built in a pleasant Place, and full of fair Houses, but burnt by the Tartars, before the Hollanders coming thither.  
This Town, according to the Relation of the netherlands Prisoner Maurice jansz, was first built by the forementioned Sauja, in the time when old Coxinga went from thence to besiege Tayowan, having before had his Residence in Eymuy, from whence he went to Quemuy. About six Months before Sauja and his Brothers went thence, and Embarked themselves to go over to the Tartars, because young Coxin continually oppressed them by over-heavy Taxations.  
Coxin having notice of this Flight of Sauja, sent Messengers to him, with fair Promises not to molest him for the future, and to make him Chief Governor of Eymuy and Quemuy; which Bait taking, he returned, but was soon dispatched out of the way, and all his Goods seized, which being told to his Brothers, which were not yet come back (of which Tonganpek was one) they went over to the Tartars.  
In the Afternoon the Admiral returned aboard, whither in his way, going into the Boat, he found many dead Bodies, which had been cruelly Butchered by the Tartars.  
The seventeenth two Mandarins came from Soanchieuw, to the Admiral, with the sealed Letters from Singlamong, in which he advised the seventeen Chinese Commanders on Formosa and Tayowan, to submit with their Soldiers and Countrymen. The Letter was this effect.  
Lipovi's Letter sent to Tsiakoensin, Wetingwan, Toerlinpetensin, Posinsojau, Yogaukiloo, Yoewetsji-kay, Gautinong, Soanchyong, Nioetingli, Chuenkicin, Lioetsingoen, Kiwintsiwan, Suangi, Gautinghtoe, Yuensaugautingwan, Sinkintingjang, Ympincin, Lioetsinang, all Commanders in Tayowan.  
THis is to let you understand, That the Heavens, Sun, Moon, and Stars, nay all the Elements, have hunted you from one Place to another, till at last you came with Coxin into Tayowan: Now I and Singlamong tell you by this Our Letter, That on the tenth Moon, the one and twentieth day, with Ours and the Hollanders Forces We have conquered the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, and all the other adjacent Places of your Generals, and drove them so long, till they are fled to Tongsoa, where Kimsia, Coxingas Son, and all his Party, do now sculk, but cannot find Sustenance there for so many People: Who knows not that in short time he will die of Hunger? His Forces have already the last Month received a terrible blow; for one of Our Generals, called Wansumpin, slew above ten thousand Men, besides two hundred which he took Prisoners, amongst which are three Mandarins, Tsiausou, Syancin, and Rikkoe. We have also taken from them in the Haven Yuntzauw a hundred and fifty Jonks and Vessels. Yet since Singlamong and I know that you intent and resolve to come to Us, and freely submit yourselves to Our Government and Realm, when a fair Opportunity is offered; therefore We have sent these Agents and Letters with the Holland Forces to Tayowan, to persuade you to submit yourselves to the Emperor.  
At the coming of the netherlands Ships to Tayowan, you and your Soldiers having corrected your long Hair, shall come over to Us with those Ships; but if you will not reform your exuberant Locks in Tayowan, We will decline the so doing till you come on the main Land, under Our Government; but whether you pole your Heads, or not, the Hollanders shall transport you and yours in safety in their Ships; which if you distrust, upon notice given, I will send you of Ours, that shall Land you without doing you the least prejudice; and after assure yourselves that you shall be preferred to the like Dignities and Employments in Our Army, as you have in Tayowan, which We have already performed to others of your Party, as Tonganpek, Tuncinpek, jantetok, and many more that yielded.  
The like Letter was sent to the same Commanders by Singlamong. Besides other Letters of several Advices and sleight Concerns, too long to be here inserted.  
The twenty fifth the Council unanimously concluded, That since the Fleet was equipped and ready, to sail with the first fair Wind to Formosa and Tayowan, and according to the State's Order in Batavia, bring them under their Subjection.  
To this purpose the two Jonks, called Eymuy and Quemuy, which were amongst the Fleet, were fitted out: The biggest, being Quemuy, was Manned with thirty Hollanders, and fifteen Chinese Captives; and the smallest with twenty five Hollanders and twelve Chinese. Then the Admiral gave order,  
First, That the Fleet should steer to the Piscadores, and there Anchor near the South Point of the Fishers-Isle, or the Southeast Point of Pehoe, where the Rendezvouz should be, that from thence they might all go together. If any of the Ships should chance to miss the Piscadores, they should lose no time, but sail strait up to Formosa, and there attend the coming of the rest of the Fleet, which all should endeavour to get to the North Foreland of Tayowan. If any of the Ships, or the whole Fleet could not reach that Point, or come before Tayowan; nay, if they were got thither, or any where else on the Formosan Coast, and be necessitated to seek for a convenienter Anchoring Place, it was ordered, That they should go behind the Cape of Tankoya, from whence in fair Wether they might proceed forward in their Voyage to Tayowan: And that the Almighty might prosper them in their Undertake, a Fast and Prayer-day was ordered to be kept in all the Fleet the twenty eighth of that Month.  
The twenty ninth the whole Fleet set sail, consisting in fifteen Ships, besides the two Jonks taken from Coxinga, and two others that belonged to the Tartar, which they sent with their own Letters and Interpreter to Tayowan, and steered their Course South-West, between the Isles of Lissoe and Quemuy, and Anchored about Sunset a League from the Southeast Point of Quemuy, where being hindered by foul Wether, they lay all the next day.  
Mean while a Jonk from the Enemy came to the Admiral with an open Letter from the netherlands Prisoners in Formosa, signed by fifteen of them, and written on the sixth Instant, in the Village Loakhou, near the straits of Tayowan, which Letter informed them, That they not only writ this from their own free inclination, but also by the express Order of Summimpessiou, who told them, That if the Netherlanders desired to treat with him, and drive their former Trade, he would give them Tamsuy, Kelay, or Lemao, alleging, That if they would not accept that proffer, their Prisoners should never expect to be released by him: Therefore they begged, That the Admiral would endeavour to work some means for their Liberty.  
Hereupon the Admiral immediately called his Council, and read the Letter in the presence of the Messenger, who as he had peculiarly done to the Admiral, so he proffered the Council the same Places. But he had no written Orders for so doing, neither was he impower'd to Treat; for he declared, That he was only sent to deliver the Letter, and to see how they were inclined: And although they endavored to draw from him some discovery of the Enemy's Posture, by variety of Questions, yet they could get nothing more, than that by the young Coxin's permission he was sent from the Governors of Tayowan and Formosa, to Singlamong and Lipovi, to make some Agreement with the Tartars.  
Wherefore after serious Debate, the Admiral and his Council, with the five Tartar Agents approbation, answered the Bearer by Word of Mouth, That the Netherlanders would not be wanting on their parts, if they were inclined to agree with them, which they must manifest with the first opportunity, and to that purpose meet them in the Piscadores before Tayowan, whither they were now going. Likewise they gave him a Letter, in answer to that of the Prisoners; yet the Contents were such, that if the Enemy should translate it, he should not pick any advantage out of it.  
In the afternoon the Fleet proceeded on to the Piscadores, but was forced by a strong North-East Wind to Anchor two Leagues Southerly from Quemuy.  
In the Morning, being the first of February, the whole Fleet set sail again, 
February.  and on the second reached the South Point of Fishers-Isle, Southeast and by East five Leagues from them. At the tacking about the South Point, they heard three Cannons fired in Church-Bay, which the Netherlanders supposed was a Sign to the Inhabitants, to give notice of the coming of the Dutch Fleet.  
In the Evening the Fleet came between the Great Table and the South Point of Fishers-Isle, and the next Morning they all dropped Anchor in the Bay of Pehoe, lying to the Southeast.  
In the Night the Wether grew very tempestuous, the Wind blowing hard out of the North-East.  
The sixth the Seahound, Buiksloot, and Cinnamon-Tree Frigates, sailed into the same Bay, close to the Shore.  
In the Evening the Captains of the Ships were commanded early the next Morning to send their Boats full of Soldiers to those three Ships, but not to Land them till farther Order.  
The seventh before day the Admiral and Captain Poleman went aboard the Buiksloot Frigate, from whence Poleman was sent ashore, with a Party of Men, to explore the Country, and bring off some cattle if he could. Mean while the Admiral commanded the Captain of the Buiksloot to put a Cable out of his Stern, and bring all his Guns to one side, that, if occasion required, they might fire at the Shore, which was immediately performed.  
Whilst these things were doing, the Netherlanders were informed, That the Tartars had been ashore, and skirmishing with the Enemy, lost four Men; whereupon the Admiral sent word to Captain Poleman to be very careful, who immediately marched with six Companies, each consisting of forty Men, up into the Country, and left one Company on the Shore. He had scarce marched a League and half, when News was brought, That the Enemy had fallen upon him, and that in the Skirmish five or six of his Men were wounded, and an Ensign slain. Amongst the wounded was Captain Bitter, who with an Arrow was shot into the Foot, and also received two Cuts with a Sword through his Hat and Clothes, but not into his Flesh. The Admiral by this time being also landed, gave Order to all the Ships to send as many Seamen ashore as they could spare, each armed with a Pike and Sword. Being now drawn up into Battalia, he sent two Companies more to Captain Poleman, and soon after a Company of Seamen, who had not been gone above half an Hour, but a Sergeant sent from Poleman brought word, that the Enemy was put to flight, and fourteen of them slain. The Admiral sent back the Sergeant with Orders to Captain Poleman to pursue the Enemy as far as was possible, and prosecute the already got Victory; yet not to go any farther than he would be able to come back in the Evening; for the Admiral would wait his coming upon the Shore: Whereupon the Sergeant, with another Company of Soldiers, and some Seamen, marched away.  
In the Evening Poleman returned, and informed, That he had pursued the Enemy as soon as he had put his Men in Order again, having seen much Blood along the way which he went, and found four more lying dead, but met no manner of Resistance, nor saw so much as one Chinese afterwards.  
Poleman also brought a Horse and an Ass with him, but never an Ox nor Cow, notwithstanding he saw several hundreds, having no opportunity to fetch them.  
The twenty eighth, about daybreak, six Companies of Soldiers and sixty Seamen, under Captain Poleman's Command, were sent to the Church-Bay; and two Companies of Soldiers, and twenty Seamen, led by Captain Shimmelpewy to the Holland's Fort, with Order, That if they could not meet with any of the Enemy, to fetch some cattle aboard of the Ships: In the Evening they returned, having not met with any Opposition, but bringing with them about seventy Oxen, and some Sheep and Goats, which were distributed amongst the Ships and Soldiers.  
The ninth in the Morning Captain Pooleman, with seven Companies of Soldiers, marched towards the Church-Bay, and several Places thereabouts, to see for more cattle, with order to stay there all Night, and return to the Fleet the next day. The same day also the Admiral, Vice-Admiral, and several others, marched with two Companies into the Country; and in the place where the Battle was, they found the fourteen forementioned dead Bodies, which were stripped of all they had by the Tartars. Soon after the Admiral returned to the Place where they had encamped themselves.  
In the Afternoon, being the tenth, the Eymuy Jonk and the three Boats came again from the Church-Bay to the Fleet; and according to the Relation of the Secretary, who the day before had marched thither by Land, and was now returned again with the Jonk, Captain Pooleman had given one whom he had taken Prisoner his Liberty, on promise that he would furnish them with cattle, and bring the Rustics to them; which he endeavoured, though to little purpose; for Pooleman got only two Cows, a Calf, and a few Poultry: But Peter Coker, who had been ashore with his three Boats full of Men before Captain Pooleman came thither, had found fifteen Iron Guns, twelve of which, that carried from three to eight pound Bullets, did formerly belong to the Hollanders; but the other three were made by the Chinese.  
Not long after Peter Coker came to the Admiral with some Prisoners and Chinese Rustics of the Country, as also twenty six Cows and Oxen.  
Lastly, the Admiral sent the forementioned Villagers and Prisoners home, with Command, as they prized his favour, to bring more cattle; and then gave them a Sack of Rice, and a Cup of Arak, for which with their Heads bowed to the Ground they cried, Camsia Compagnia, that is, We thank the Company.  
In the Evening the Admiral went aboard, but came ashore again the next Morning.  
In the Afternoon Captain Pooleman with his Soldiers having been a foraging, brought some Chinese Peasants, and twenty Cows, to the Admiral, who dismissed the Men, upon promise of bringing in daily fresh Provisions.  
The twelfth towards the Evening came about twenty five Countrymen to the Netherlanders Camp, with Goats and Poultry, for which the Admiral gave them two Bags of Rice, restored them the Prisoners, and granted them a free Pass, which was to this effect.  
SInce the People of this Country have submitted themselves, and as an earnest of Subjection, presented Us some cattle, Sheep, and such as the Country affords; therefore We have taken them into Our Protection; and We charge and command all Persons, and especially the Netherlanders, not to do them the least harm, when they of their own free Wills come with Provisions, or anything else, aboard of Our Ships.  
Dated on the great Island Pehoe. Balthasar Bort.  
The thirteenth, three Hours before day, the Fleet set Sail, and at four a Clock in the Afternoon dropped Anchor three quarters of a League North-East from the Castle Zelandia, with their fifteen Ships, besides the Jonk Eymuy, and the two Tartar Jonks.  
And now in regard the Netherlanders received no Tidings from the Shore, much less Proffers as they expected of surrendering up the Country: therefore the Admiral on the fifteenth proposed to his Council what it was best to do in carrying on their design of recovering it; whether it were best first to Parley, or begin with the Sword. Hereupon they concluded, that they had accepted of the Tartars Proposition about sending their Ambassadors with Letters from Singlamong and Lipovi to the Governors of Tayowan, according to a Result taken the eighteenth of December; in which the Chinese Commanders in Formosa and Tayowan were desired with their Soldiers to come to the Tartars and deliver up the Country to the Netherlanders, as we have before related: To which purpose the Agents were also among the Council; there to desire their Order to let them go with their Jonks, and two of the netherlands Ships to Tankoya, and there to deliver their peculiar Letters, and advise them to come over to the Tartars, alleging, That they could never do it in a better time: whereupon, after serious consideration, the Council granted their Request, and as Convoys, sent two Frigates along with them.  
Soon after the two Tartar Jonks, conducted by the two Frigates, took their Voyage to Tankoya.  
The next Morning, about two hours before Day, the Admiral set Sail with six Frigates more to the Cape of Tankoya, and two hours after Noon Rid by the Frigates that set Sail before, and the two Tartar Jonks lying Westerly about a League from the Point.  
The Tartar Agents being Landed with their Letters, they immediately met with a great company of People; who soon after ran all up into the Country, so that they saw not one Man afterwards.  
Towards the Evening the Rere-Admiral Verwei came aboard the Admiral, with news, That one of the Tartar Agents was returned, who told him that they had delivered all the Letters, to which they expected a sudden Answer, and doubted not but they should attain their Desire, four hundred Soldiers being already prepared to come over to them; of which one hundred lay at the Mountain Tankoya, and three hundred at the River of Tamsuy, where the Enemy feared that the Netherlanders would Land.  
In the Morning, being the nineteenth, the Jonk Eymuy came from Tayowan to the Admiral at Cape Tankoya, with Letters from the Vice-Admiral Huibert de Lairesse, and another from the Governors of Tayowan and Formosa, to the Netherlanders.  
The Rere-Admiral, presently after the Admiral's departure from him, Sailed with all the small Frigates within Shot of the Castle Zelandia: which his appearance wrought such effect, that those on the Shore sent the forementioned Letter to him; so that he did not think it convenient to make any farther progress with their Boats before they heard further from the Admiral. The Letter was to this effect:  
The Governors of Formosa, Kovia, Anghia, and Oenia, have received the Letter from the Hollanders, and return this Answer.  
FOrmosa belongs to us of old. The young Coxins' Father permitted the Hollanders to live and drive a Trade with them: after which the Hollanders made themselves Masters of the Country, and oppressed the Inhabitants with Taxes, who complained of it to Coxin: Whereupon he came with an Army and Conquering Tayowan took it into his possession, and after the Hollanders went from thence elected us to be Governors of it: and we have, according to the Articles of War, maintained your Prisoners, and furnished those that went to Batavia with all Necessaries. Coxin also sent a Mandarin with a Holland Ship to Quemuy, to fetch the Governor Valentine, and other Prisoners from thence: but the Hollanders did not endeavour to get thither, but carried the Mandarin with the rest to Batavia; so that the Prisoners remained in our custody, where they have wanted nothing but Liberty: but you kept the Mandarin, and carried him to the Tartars your Allies, who are a very fickle and false People, which the Hollanders have had trial of in Canton, where they first granted them to Trade, and afterwards defrauded and deceived them. Now you have received Promises from them in Hoksieu, that you may settle on Haythom and Colongsoe, and there drive a Trade. The old Coxin knew very well what treacherous People the Tartars were, therefore he would never agree with them. They have often sent Ambassadors to Treat about Peace, under which pretence some years since they had like to have taken Eymuy; but it fell not out according to their expectation, for they were beaten from thence, and all the Prisoners we took, we chopped off their Hands and Feet and so sent them home, which we suppose you are not ignorant of; but on the contrary, Coxin knows the Hollanders are a People that keep their Word, therefore he hath used the Prisoners well: but now you are joined with the Tartars, and have taken the Countries of Eymuy, Quemuy, and Goutsoe from us; yet nevertheless the Tartars dare not take them in possession, but have only burnt down the Houses; nay, they have sent Agents since that to the young Coxin, to desire him with his People to come under their Protection, which he hath refused. The Hollanders have a considerable time Sailed up and down the Coast, and have not yet obtained from the Tartars a Place to settle on, by which they may plainly perceive their treachery. Your Letter we have received, and thereby partly understand your Request, to deliver your Prisoners, which we think very fit: they are all in good health, and have a good allowance. We know that you Hollanders seek nothing but Trade, yet we are not ignorant that you will not trust us, and therefore neither credit our Sayings nor Writings: nevertheless you may believe that Sepoan, or Kimsia, would agree with you. If you are so inclined, and desire to settle in any Place, send us Ambassadors, Persons of Repute, whom we will not detain, if you do not keep ours: if you are hereto inclined, do it suddenly, that we may inform Sepoan of it, and make a League with you, that we may no longer stand in fear one of another, but Trade friendly together; for the Tartar, assure yourself, will at one time or other delude you. This our Writing you may credit, taking the Heavens to witness the truth thereof.  
In the twelfth Moon, the one and twentieth Day.  
The same Morning the Rere-Admiral Verwei came Aboard the Admiral with four Tartar Agents, and two Persons belonging to the Enemy; who being heard in the Council, declared, That they were sent from Siautongsiong, Commander in Chief of the Chinese Forces in the South part of Formosa to Treat with the Netherlanders, and make them divers friendly Proposals. Whereupon the Admiral demanded, How many Men the Colonel Siautongsiong had? they answered, Seven thousand; which so startled the Admiral, that he knew not what to resolve upon. At last he demanded, What they would desire of the Netherlanders? they replied, That they had no Order, but only that they came thither to hear what the Hollanders would proffer. Lastly, having seriously debated the Business, they resolved to proffer the Colonel five thousand Tail of japan Silver so soon as he should come to them, with a Proviso, That if the Hollanders should want his Men, they should assist them against the Enemy, which they promised, but insisted, that the Sum was too little; so that they desired, if the Netherlanders were really inclined to agree, they should send some Person of Quality to the Colonel, to Treat with him himself, proffering to leave one of their number, to stay as a Hostage till the Person whom they should send did return.  
In the afternoon the Secretary, with the Interpreter Maurice, the Tartar Agents, and one of the Messengers were sent to Siautongsiong with a Letter, in which he promised him the forementioned Sum; and another to the Dutch Prisoners, intimating to them the hopes of their Liberty.  
After the Secretary's departure, a Tartar Jonk was sent to Tayowan to Lairesse, with Orders to send the two Chinese with a Letter to the Governors there, proposing the release of their Prisoners, and offering a Treaty upon honourable terms.  
The same day the Soldiers in the eight Ships under the Admiral's Squadron, consisting in eight hundred Men, were divided into sixteen Companies and put ashore, and the day after the Tents which were pitched under the side of a Mountain, were quite finished.  
The one and twentieth about Noon, Secretary Ysbrant came back with the Interpreter Maurice, sent on the nineteenth to Siautongsiong, and related, That he had delivered him the Admiral's Letter, and discoursed with him; whereby he found that the Colonel was inclined to come with four thousand Armed Men to the Netherlanders, that so he might be carried to the Coast of China, provided the Hollanders would give him ten thousand Tail of japan Silver; of which they should pay five thousand so soon as he had given them Hostage, that he might distribute it amongst his Soldiers, and the other half (being for him and his Officers) should be paid him so soon as he came aboard their Ships, alleging, that those of Sakkam and Tayowan, being about nine thousand Armed Men, would immediately after his deserting them, endeavour to agree with them; that for a little Money they should surrender up the Castle and Forts, with all the Country thereabouts, and go to the Coast of China. And further, he desired to keep five hundred Acres of Land, and two hundred Horses, that were his own, which he would lend the Hollanders till they were Masters of the Country. Besides, at the Secretaries Request he had undertaken to deliver the netherlands Prisoners, and to that purpose advised him to send one or two Ships more from the Cape of Tankoya to Tayowan, that those of the Castle might not send out Forces, and prevent the Design.  
Whilst they were driving this Bargain, the Jonk Eymuy came to the Admiral at the Point of Tankoya, sent by the Vice-Admiral Lairesse from Tayowan, with News, That the Enemy, as he perceived with his Perspective Glasses, wrought very hard upon three Forts, which he had now finished, leading them cross from the Seashore to the Inland Water; and also that the Enemy before with eight or nine great Jonks set Sail thence.  
The two and twentieth, being Tuesday, the Interpreter Maurice went again to Siautongsiong with a Chinese Letter, in which he was promised five thousand Tail of japan Silver, so soon as he brought the netherlands Prisoners from Sakkam to their Camp, and that then he should with all his Soldiers come to the Netherlanders, and go over with them to the Main of China. And the same day two Ships were, according to his Request sent from the Fleet at Tankoya to Tayowan.  
The three and twentieth in the afternoon the Interpreter Maurice returned, with tidings, That the delivering of the netherlands Prisoners could not be effected, because Siautongsiong, before he would undertake it, would first receive five thousand Tail of Silver. But the Admiral and his Council no way approving of it, sent them and the former Hostages to their Masters, notwithstanding the Tartars endeavoured to persuade the Admiral to pay the five thousand Tail, alleging, That the Chinese at their coming over must leave their Estates behind them, therefore they ought to be persuaded thereto by Money. But the Admiral answered, That if they should have sent him the Money, they could not have been assured of his coming to them by his leaving those two inconsiderable Hostages, and thereupon resolutely declared, That if Siautongsiong desired Money, he should first deliver the netherlands Prisoners, and come to them.  
The four and twenteth in the Morning, the Zierickzee and Tertolen Frigates, sent two days before to Tayowan, came again to the Fleet at Tankoya, with Letters from the Vice-Admiral Lairesse, and the Chinese Governors in Formosa and Tayowan, in answer to the Admirals, written to them on the nineteenth. Whilst Lairesse lay with part of the Fleet before Tayowan, they perceived that those which they supposed to have been Battlements before the Castle of Zelandia, as he had advised in his first Letter, were only Nets, hung up there to dry. The Chinese Letter was to this effect:  
YOu Hollanders write to us to send two Men to Treat with you, which we are not inclined to do before you send two Persons to Treat with us first: neither do you understand our Language, which made you send two Chinese Rustics with Letters. As to what concerns the Letter written to your Prisoners, we have made them translate it in our Presence, and thereby understand your kind Salutation to them all, and also your inclination to agree with us, and cut off the League with the Tartars; with Requests moreover, that the Prisoners should be set at liberty: if your meaning be so, we shall be very glad; but the contrary hath appeared to us by a Letter brought to us ashore by Assam and another Person, viz. That the Hollanders are yet united with the Tartars, as is manifested also by Singlamong and Lipovy's Letters written to us; so that we know not what to think of this contradiction. We believe what ever you do is merely to deceive us, and to draw away our People, but we will prevent it with our greatest care. Besides, you have, according to the information of your Holland Prisoners to us, writ to them, That you are cozened by the Tartars, because you could not get a Place in possession to drive your Trade on, and therefore forced to Cruise up and down the Seas with your Ships: If this be truth, we will agree with you. If you are resolved, and desirous to Treat with us, send Assam and two other Persons of Quality to us, whom we promise to entertain nobly, and after having Treated with them, let them go freely away; and when we are agreed, we will also send your Prisoners, and give notice to the young Coxinga, otherwise called Sepoan, that we are agreed.  
The Council of War in answer to this Letter, writ to the Governors of Formosa and Tayowan the twenty fourth of january from Tankoya, to this effect:  
WE thought to have had a better Answer from you, than your Letter, which we received this instant, makes mention of; for thereby appears to us, that you will not send any body to us, neither of your own nor of our Prisoners. When we lay before Quemuy, before our coming hither, a Letter came from Sepoan, wherein you specified your inclination to agree with us: and do you now require Agents from us to Treat with you? We positively declare, that you shall first send one to us, and hear our Answer to your Proffer, to give us Quelang, Tamsui, Pehoe, or Lamoa, and then we will Treat further, and perhaps make a good Agreement: which if you will not do, and send us no Answer hereupon, we will in the space of two days put our Flag of Defiance, and use Hostility against you every where. Our got Victories before Eymuy and Quemuy, with the ruin of both Cities, as also of the Forts on Colongsoe and Goutsoe, witness our Power: therefore since we cannot do any thing to you by fair means, we will try what we can do by force of Arms; for we have that God, who is Creator of Heaven and Earth, on our sides: neither are we at such difference with the Tartars, as you suppose. We drive a Trade again in Hoksieu, and their whole Country is at our Service, and stands open for us: we may put into any of their Harbours with our Ships: nay, they promise to assist us with all their jonks and Forces, if you are stubborn and will not agree with us: Therefore consider with yourselves, and do not refuse our good Proffers whilst you may have them. Here enclosed is a Letter to our Friends, your Prisoners, which pray deliver to them: we observe that they have not well understood our meaning, of which at present we have given them better information.  
These Letters were carried to Lairesse by the Zierikzee Frigate, with Orders moreover to him, that the sending to redeem the Prisoners was come to effect; and also that the Colonel Sautongsiong had already informed those at Tayowan concerning their Treating with him, as they had perceived by their Letters.  
Upon the sending of these Letters ashore, Lairesse was ordered to stay two days for an Answer; but if then he received none, to fire a Cannon with a Bullet on the Shore, and set up a red Flag from all the Ships, and then come together to the Admiral, that they might consult together what was best to be done: But if they should, according to the Netherlanders Request, send some of their Men to Treat with them, and should desire that some of the Hollanders should go ashore again, that Lairesse should send the Factor Philip Mey.  
The twenty eighth the Ensign, Christopher Just, came to tell the Admiral, that the Enemy was that Morning come over the Inland Water on that Tract of Land, where their Men lay Encamped with a considerable Army; and being both Horse and Foot carried about seventy Colours, which he himself had told, and discovered accidentally, going with five Men more the last Night to shoot some Venison, towards the South near the River of Tamsuy.  
The Admiral immediately upon this Intelligence went ashore, where he caused the convenientest Place, about a Canonshot from the Hill (where the Netherlanders pitched their Tents,) to be Entrenched, and some great Guns to be carried thither, that therewith they might put a stop to the Enemy, if he should march forward; who about two Leagues from thence had Encamped himself, and shown many Bravadoes with his Horse, but yet durst not set upon the Netherlanders, who kept themselves in good Order at the forementioned Entrenchment, that they might not lose their advantage.  
The next Morning, being the twenty sixth, the Enemy sent three Men with a Letter to the Admiral, who gave them Audience, and read it without the Works, which were not then finished, in a Tent. The Letter was to this effect:  
Tathonling Totoksiau sends this Letter to the Dutch Admiral, from an upright heart and good inclination, to which I call the Heavens to witness.  
THe Letter written by the Admiral I have received, and understand your meaning. Our Agents also have told us what you said to them; by which I gather, th●…t you Hollanders are a People of noble Minds, and endued with Wisdom and Understanding, therefore we desire to enter into a League with you. My Intentions I have before declared to your Secretary and Interpreter Maurice: I am now come hither with my Army for my pleasure. According to a Letter sent to me from Sepoan at Tayowan, I have order to make Peace with you: To which purpose two Mandarins are sent to Tayowan to make an Agreement, and surrender such Places as you desire; so that I hope we shall be Friends: To attain which I send you this Letter, with Request, that you will send Agents to go with me by Land to Tayowan, that there they may make an inviolable League between us.  
The twelfth Moon, the nineteenth Day. Underneath was his Seal.  
Whereupon the Interpreter Maurice was sent with the two Tartar Agents to the Enemy's Camp, fully to know their Intentions, and also to tell them the Netherlanders Resolutions. The Tartars returning before, were in the Evening followed by the Interpreter, who was immediately sent back again with a Message, that the Netherlanders granted his Request, viz. To send two Persons of theirs to him, so soon as the six Hostages which he had proffered should come into their Camp, who that very Night came thither with the Interpreters.  
At the same time a Rumour was spread, and the Chinese General had also told it to the Interpreter Maurice, That the young Coxinga was gone to the Coast of China, to submit himself to the Tartars, and accordingly had commanded his Soldiers in Formosa to come to him, and surrender up the Country to the Netherlanders: But this quickly appeared nothing but a bare Report.  
The twenty seventh in the Morning, according to a Result taken by the Admiral and his Council, the Hollanders Agents were sent to the Enemy's Camp, viz. the Lieutenant Hendrick Noorden, and Factor john Renaldus, and john Melman, as Interpreter, for their Assistant. They were fetched in on Horseback, and courteously received and entertained by the Chinese General, who according to his Promise was ready with his whole Army, consisting in two thousand Armed Men, to break up that day, and go with them by Land to Tayowan.  
The Agents had these following Orders given them in writing to Read to the Chinese Governors at Tayowan.  

I. That they should deliver and surrender the whole Country of Formosa to the Netherlanders, that it might be possessed and Governed by them as formerly.  
II. Especially the Castle Zelandia in Tayowan, and the Fort Provencia, in Sakkam, with all the Guns and other Ammunition, and also Quelang.  
III. To restore the Companies Goods, Merchandizes, Moneys, and other things, which at the surrender of Tayowan they took possession of; and also satisfaction for the Charge which they had been at in coming two several years with a Fleet of Ships to their Coasts, which had cost above sixty Tun of Gold.  
IV. All Debtors to the Company, whether their Servants or Free People, shall satisfy their Creditors.  
V. Our Prisoners shall immediately be redeemed, and sent with their Goods to our Ships.  
VI On the granting and allowing of these Articles, there shall be an everlasting Peace betwixt them and us, and all things past shall be forgotten and forgiven.   
The Commissioners having Read the Articles severally to them, said, That the Netherlanders desired a speedy Answer, what they were inclined to grant or not, and also what they would have of the Netherlanders.  
Three Seamen, which were sent along with the Agents to carry some Goods, came back with two Chinese, sent from the Enemy with two live Hogs, and four Baskets of Potatoes, for a Present to the Netherlanders; who gave the Bearers two Cangans, and as much Meat as they would eat, which they devoured very greedily: He also gave them a Pass to bring Provision into our Camp.  
After the Enemy had broke up with his Army, the Admiral, according to a Resolution taken a little before, also made himself ready to go with the Hostages from Tankoya to Tayowan; to which purpose towards the Evening leaving the Shore, he went aboard of the Vlaerding Frigate, and left the chief Command to Captain Poleman, the second to Schimmel Penny, and to Bittar the third, of the sixteen Companies then ashore, viz. six under the first, and five apiece under the other two. The Camp was also in good Order, their Sconces finished, their Guns planted, and a Breast-work raised with Planks, that if occasion should require, they might easily cast up Earth against it. The Nut-tree, Naerden, Mars, Flushing, Buiksloot, with the Quemuy Jonk, remained there at an Anchor. In the Evening the Admiral, followed by one of the Tartar Jonks, set Sail, and the next Morning, without having gained much Ground, because of the strong Tide towards the South, he came to an Anchor about half a League to the Southward of Tankoya.  
The six Chinese Hostages, which were left in stead of the three Hollanders that went by Land to Tayowan, related and declared at the drinking of a Cup of Tee with the Admiral, That most of the Chinese which were then an Formosa, were not inclined to stay there long, but much rather would go to the Coast of China their native Country where they had Friends, and submit themselves to the Tartars; That the old Coxinga came to Formosa with his Soldiers, none was to be blamed but one Pinqua, who was the only Person that advised him to it: and since they did not find it on Formosa as they had been told; but on the contrary, lost a great many of their Men in the War and Sickness, occasioned from the unwholesome Air: and besides, having now lost Eymuy and Quemuy, therefore the Chineses do not at all esteem of this Pinqua: nay, the Soldiers and others have desired to cut his Flesh alive from his Bones, and every one eat a piece of it, if it might have been permitted.  
In the Evening the jonker Frigate, sent from the Haven of Tayowan by the Vice-Admiral Lairesse, brought a Letter to the Admiral from the Chinese Governors, which was to this effect:  
We the Governors of Formosa, Gamia, Siautongsiong, Koulauja, Anglauja, Owilauja, Tanlauja, and another Tanlauja, write in their Names this Letter to the Lord Admiral.  
WE desire nothing but Peace. We have received Letters from the Tartar, but will not hearken to it, nor have any thing to do with him. You write in Your Letter, which We have received, to send You two Agents. It is true, We have lost Eymuy and Quemuy, and also Goutsoe, but We care not for them; for we deserted them freely, and suffered the Tartars to come into them. We have fought against the same Tartars, and slain Bethetok, and other of their Officers. They have, 'tis true, destroyed and burnt the Towns and Habitations upon the Islands Eymuy, Quemuy, and Goutsoe, and pulled down some of the Fortresses, but have not had the courage to keep them, so that We very well know what People they are. In former times You Hollanders have Engaged with Us in the Piscadores, Baxembay, and Loakkau; so that We know Your 
By the Hollanders called The straits of Tayowan.  Customs, and You Ours. We have lost the Fight at Quemuy, and suffered Our Cities there to be taken by them, but this was done by Your help: We have lost a great many Men on Our part; but also know, that You likewise have had some loss. But now a Letter is brought to Me by two Mandarins from Sepoan, commanding that We shall endeavour to make Peace with You, and give You a Place to Trade in; Therefore if You are willing to agree with Us on that account, or not, let Us know with speed. As to what concerns Us, We have order from Sepoan to agree with the Admiral, that We may live as Friends and Brothers. We have also understood by Your Letter, that if We do not send Agents to You in two days, that then You will use Hostility against Us; seeing Your Writing was somewhat harsh, We have thought Your Proposal to be of like kind. But if You are minded to agree, We will grant Your Requests, and make a beginning whilst the two Agents from Sepoan are here; therefore what the one hath to say to the other ought now to be known. The Letter written by the Lord-Admiral to the Prisoners We have delivered to them: If You will not credit Us, send Assam ashore to examine the truth.  
This Letter was Sealed with Owiden's Seal, in the Title called Owilavia.  
The twenty ninth the Admiral set Sail again with the jonker Frigate, but the Tartar Jonks went back.  
The thirtieth in the Morning the Admiral was got two Leagues to the Northward of the Cape of Tankoya, where by contrary Tides he was again forced to an Anchor; and by two Persons that came from Tayowan, he received a Letter from the young Coxinga, otherwise called Sepoan and Kimsia, who at that time resided on Tangsoa. They also proffered the Admiral as a Present, twenty Pieces of Silk Stuffs, four Frails of japan Tobacco, and ten japan Apples, which he modestly refused, except the Apples.  
In this Letter nothing more was proffered the Netherlanders than the Island Lamoa, as appears more at large by the Letter itself, as follows:  
TSiovan, a Servant to Tsioubontok, is come back, and hath brought good tidings from the Lord-Admiral with a Relation, That the Hollanders were inclined to make Peace with us. We have received the Letter from the Admiral written to the netherlands Prisoners, and understood the Contents of it. I much rejoice at the great love which the Hollanders bear to their Prisoners. In the last Southern Mouson, the Hollanders coming with Ships into the Piscadores, they delivered a Letter to the Mandarin, who durst not of himself take upon him to grant what they desired, therefore he hath sent the Letter to Me, on which I sent one to the Admiral; wherein I desire to make Peace with the Hollanders. But my Letter coming to the Piscadores, they were gone from thence with their Ships to Hoksieu. On the Admiral's coming with his Ships to Quemuy, a Servant was sent from Tsioubontok, or Tonbeenpek, with a Letter to the Holland Admiral; to which he had sent Answer, That he had agreed with the Tartars, and therefore could not make Peace with the Chineses; nor that he had any reason to break the League with them; Therefore because we could not then agree with you we Fought together: in which Fight indeed a great many Rustics were killed in Quemuy: but we suppose that some of the Hollanders were also slain. Our intentions were not to Fight with them, but we thought to have made Peace. All the Villagers on the Islands, and those which dwell along the Sea-Coast, have been under my subjection. I also loved them, as I do your Nation. Therefore I send two Mandarins, Houpou-Thousou-Iapien, and Lungeugia Tsiouki, whom I have commanded to endeavour to agree with you; and we hope, you will not be backward in agreeing with us, which will be good for both, because we shall make good advantage by your Trade. If we agree, than you Hollanders must forsake the Tartars Friendship, that we may not fear them; and when the Peace is concluded, we will give you the Island Lamoa, and deliver you your Prisoners; then we can Trade together, and you come with your Ships to us, and we with ours to you; which to testify that I mean it from my heart, I take the Heavens to witness.  
Written in the twelfth Moon, the first Day. Underneath was fixed Sepoan's Seal.  
The Messengers that brought this Letter related, That they had first been in the Piscadores, and from thence, according to their Orders, came five days since to Tayowan: but they should have been there before, had not the bad Wether detained them some days at Tangsoa. Moreover, they had heard six days before, that the three netherlands Agents were on their Way to Tayowan; and also that all the Prisoners were in good health.  
The Admiral told them, That if they desired the Island Lamoa, they could have that when they pleased, and needed not their Proffer: and also told them, That they did not maintain the War against them for Lamoa, but for Formosa and Tayowan.  
To which they replied, If their Master Sepoan did not rightly understand their Desires, it was not his nor their fault; for the netherlands Prisoners had so explained his Letter to them, that he demanded the Island Lamoa: alleging, If the Hollanders wanted Formosa and Tayowan, they should not have taken the Islands Eymuy, Quemuy, Goutsoe, and others thereabouts, from them.  
Then the Admiral asked if they had no Commands besides the Letter, to declare any thing else to the Hollanders? whereupon they answering No, the Admiral told them, That the Netherlanders would on those terms never make Peace with them.  
Whereupon they replied again, That they might do as they saw fit: for if they could not agree, they would go and submit themselves to the Tartar, and desire of Him not to grant them to Trade there. But these Threats the Admiral not regarding, told them again, That if they were not yet weary of the War, the Hollanders would not be tired with using their Arms, till they had utterly extirpated them.  
Whereupon the Coxingans observing that they could avail nothing by harsh Speeches, after a little consideration desired the Admiral to pass by all those Discourses, for they would rather live in Friendship than at Variance, and therefore were sent to Treat; and to that end desired that he would be pleased to go with his Ship to the Harbour of Tayowan, where (after they had consulted with the Governor) they doubted not, but they should give him full satisfaction; To which the Admiral made answer, That he would endeavour to get with his Ship to Tayowan, and that then he would expect their sudden answer, what they intended to do; and if they would manifest their good intention, they should bring some of their Prisoners along with them, that the Admiral might know the reason, why they had not written to him since he came thither, because it created suspicious thoughts in him of their Welfare. Then the Admiral ased them, Why they did not send their Prisoners to them according to the Agreement at the Delivery of Tayowan: To which they replied, That they were ready to have delivered them, if they had been demanded; but because that was not done, they remained still in their power.  
But after they had promised the Admiral at their return to bring one of the netherlands Prisoners with them, and had been kindly entertained, taking their leave, they went to the Shore, and so from thence to Tayowan by Land.  
The six Chinese Hostages that were aboard the Admiral, and had the day before told him that most of the Chineses were not inclined to stay on Formosa, but would rather submit to the Tartar; informed the Interpreter Maurice, that some desired to stay and live there, of whom several were Persons of Quality.  
The one and thirtieth, the Admiral came with the Vlaerding Frigate half a League Southward of Sakkam, and the next day Anchored in the Harbour of Tayowan, before the Castle of Zelandia.  
The second against Noon, the Interpreter Melman came aboard the Admiral 
March.  in a Chinese Champan, with a Letter from the Agents Lieutenant Hendrik Noorden, and john Renaldus, written in Tayowan the Night before, in which they informed the Admiral, That after the twenty eighth of january, having removed with the Army under Siautongsiong's Command, they Road to Sakkam, where coming on the twenty ninth, on the thirtieth they were courteously entertained at Tayowan, but forbidden to speak with the netherlands Prisoners.  
The next day after their arrival in Tayowan, they had Audience granted them from the Governor Ouwilavia, before whom they were commanded, according to the Chinese manner to kneel, which they refused.  
Whereupon Ouwilavia having caused them to be asked, to what end they came to him; and being told that it was to know how he was inclined to agree with them, he answered, That he referred himself to the Letter written by the netherlands Prisoners, on the sixth of October last to the Admiral; and then asked the Agents, if they had any thing else to say? Whereupon the Agents, according to their instructions read the Proposals, which he would no ways hearken to; but said, That they were unreasonable, and not fit to be answered, averring, that the Admiral himself had written to the netherlands Prisoners, that he would be contented with Lamoa, whereupon they parted at that time.  
The first of February, the Holland Agents met with those of Sepoan, where the Letter written by the Admiral and his Council, the one and twentieth of October, to the Holland Prisoners, and in which they thought to show, That the Hollanders would have been satisfied only with Lamoa, was produced, which the Agents explained quite another way, viz. That Lamoa in comparison to the other places that were proffered to the Netherlanders, signified nothing, and that they were no ways satisfied with it.  
Mean while, being met together, the Holland Agents said, That they had understood aboard of their Ships, how their Prisoners were used to hard labour, nay, that they doubted whether they were yet living; they to manifest the contrary, brought them all out of the Castle into a Court, where the Agents looked upon them at a distance, but were not permitted to speak to them. At last, the Agents were directed to tell the Admiral, that the Mandarins of Sepoan were ready to go again to the Coast of China, and that he might now send a Letter with them to Sepoan, and make mention of some other place, and not speak any more of Tayowan and Formosa, for they were resolved not to hear any more of it.  
While Affairs stood in this posture, the Chineses told Melman, That they would not deliver the Castle of Formosa, unless forced by necessity, which they concluded with a Challenge, That if the Hollanders would give them a meeting at Sakkam, they would fairly try their Valour, and fight them Hand to Hand in Champain; and if they wanted Boats, would supply them with their own Champans, to Land as many as had a stomach to the Invitation; and if their fortune were such (which they did not fear) to lose the day, they would deliver up the Forts, and whatever else they desired; But if they got the better, which they could not doubt, yet they would be ready to a compliance; and laying all animosities aside, join in an everlasting League of Amity.  
The Netherlanders seeing by this, that the Chinese Governors on Tayowan had slighted the proposed Articles, and commanded their trusties not to make any further mention of surrendering, judged it convenient presently to send for their Agents, and break off the Treaty; only Commanding, that they should tell the Chinese at their departure, that since they had slighted his Proposals, they must now make their Addresses to Batavia, and accordingly sent them this Letter.  
BY the Letter of Our Agents which We received aboard this day, and also by the Relation given Us by the Interpreter, We understand, that you will not hearken to the surrender of Tayowan and Formosa; and since We are not impower'd without that, to conclude of any thing; therefore We desire you to send Our Agents, and to receive yours, desiring Almighty God to give you a righter understanding of your own good, that you may not deceive yourselves, trusting too much in your own Strength and Valour.  
This Letter the Interpreter Melman carried with Orders to answer their Challenge thus by word of Mouth, that if they were so hardy, to try their Fortune with the Hollanders, and put it to the hazard of a Set-day, thanking them for the offer of their Champans, they would (if they wanted Boats) rather swim to Shore, to give them their desired satisfaction; and though they knew their Valour, they should be allowed to bring two thousand into the Field against their one; and also they would spare their trouble of coming to Sakkam, by giving them a meeting and smart Entertainment at the half way.  
The Tartars Agents now resolved to return, sent one of their Servants to Baxemboy, with Order, to deliver some Letters there, and Demand answers of those sent from Singlamong and Lipovi: But he returned soon after with an Arrow in his side; which the Chineses, when they perceived that he was a Tartar, had given him ashore; nay, according to his own saying, they would have taken his Life, had he not saved himself by Swimming to his Champan.  
On the fourth in the forenoon, the Interpreter Melman came a second time with a Letter from the netherlands Agents to the Admiral; and also one from the Chinese Governors, in Answer to that, written to them on the second instant, which Translated, was to this effect.  
The Governors of Tayowan and Formosa, 
a Lauja, which is the termination of all these Names, is no other than such a one Lord, or the Lord such a one.  Koulauja, Siaulauja, Gom-lauja, Anglauja, Ouwilauja, Tanlauja, and another Tanlauja, send in their Names this Letter to the Dutch Admiral. Worthy Sir,  
WE have received three Letters from you, whose Contents We understand, being thereby well informed of your desires, heretofore you demanded only Quelang and Tamsuy to Trade in; but now, since Our Prince Sepoan hath condescended to give you Lamoa, nothing less will serve your turn than Tayowan, Sakkam, and the whole Country of Formosa, which is Our ancient Right and Patrimony; but do not deceive yourselves to believe, that We will so part with what so many years hath belonged to Us; but if you will comply, and take what you are proffered, well and good. The Prisoners are yet strong and healthy. Nor have We any thoughts to detain your Agents, for whether We conclude, or not, you need not fear but your Messengers shall be returned, so well We know the Law of Arms; but send Our Agents first, because We sent them first to you, and then your own are free to depart. Sepoan hath sent a Letter heretofore, to which he desires a speedy Answer, which also is Our Request.  
Dated the first Moon, the seventh Day; underneath it was Subscribed, Ouwiaen.  
The Holland Agents now desiring to return, were not permitted, but in stead thereof, jealousies daily increasing, a Guard was set upon them; wherefore the Dutch Prisoners earnestly desired in their Letters, That the Admiral would first use some mild way for their Deliverance, that they might not always live as Exiles amongst a Crew of Heathens, and their Wives and Children in Batavia, as miserable Widows and Orphans.  
Melman the Interpreter, according to the Admiral's Directions, delivered the Challenge, but received no other answer than, Very well; and informed them, that at his return to the Fleet, without the Castle they had lately Planted along the Shore about twenty Iron and Brass Cannon. Upon this Intelligence, Siautongsiong's Commissioners perceived that all things were not right ashore, and therefore believed, that the Hollanders would not send them before their Agents came back; neither did they desire them to go ashore there, but requested, that they might be sent to Siautongsiong at Tankoya, from whence they were brought, fearing their Landing there might cost them their Lives; the rather, because Siautongsiong refused to go to Sakkam or Tayowan; therefore if he deserted those of Tayowan, the Agents believed that he would join with the Hollanders; for the Letter from those of Tayowan to Siautongsiong seemed to express, That Sepoan had submitted to the Tartars, reforming his Hair, and sending for all his Soldiers and Officers from Formosa, with Commands, that they should come thence, and surrender up the Country to the Hollanders.  
But the contrary soon appearing, raised in the Agents a further suspect, and as many jealousies in the Hollanders, so that now the whole business was how to contrive home their Agents; and to that purpose, concluded to write to the Governors of Formosa, that since they could not surrender up the Castle in Tayowan, and the Fort in Sakkam, they would go to Treat with Kimsia or Sepoan himself at Tangsoa, and there to see if they could come to better terms with him: This Message they sent, with design to get their Agents, but never intending any such matter as the performance of it; and accordingly the Chineses believing it, dismissed the Agents, who upon the sixth in the afternoon came at last aboard again, with the Interpreter Melman, and a Letter written to the Admiral from the Governors in Tayowan to this effect:  
The Governors of Tayowan and Formosa, Gam-lauja, Siaulauja, Koulouja, Anlauja, Ouwilauja, Tanlauja, and a second Tanlauja, send in their Names this Letter to the Holland's Admiral.  
WE have perceived by the Hollanders Letter, that they are of an upright Heart, though they suspected We would detain those they sent to Treat with Us, as appears by their last, which is contrary to Our Custom, and their Opinion, who ever put it into their Heads, for We have sent them freely of Our own accords, without the Formality of meeting half way, and exchanging Ours for theirs, whereby you may perceive Our Integrity, and that We never had any such design: We repose the like Confidence in you, and know that you will not fail Us in Our expectations.  
You (as We have understood by your Letters) will entreat Sepoan to send a Mandarin with you to Batavia, and there to agree with your King, which We will acquaint Sepoan with, who knows best what is fittest for him in Honour to do: You have also received from Sepoan himself a Letter, to which be pleased to send an Answer, because he will not Treat without Letters of Credence.  
We also advise, that if you intent to Treat at Tongsoa, with Our Prince, that you would inform Us punctually of the time, that We may give him notice of your coming, and that he may the better prepare Jonks to Convoy you into safe Harbours, to prevent the losing and endangering of your Ships.  
We have no more to say, but desire Our Commissioners may be sent to Us in this Vessel.  
Hereupon the Chinese Agents were sent ashore, not to Tayowan, but according to their Request to the Southward of the fresh River in Formosa. The Admiral also Ordered Melman to bid the Men that belonged to the Champan, tell the Governors, That if they desired a Letter from him, they should send for it the next day.  
The Agents Henrick Van Noorden, and john Renaldus being come aboard of the Admiral again, informed them, That the Quarters in Tayowan, except two or three Houses, lay Ruined, and were nothing but a heap of Rubbish; but on the contrary, that Sakkam was much enlarged with Houses, and that they had seen few cattle as they passed along.  
The seventh, two hours before day, according to their resolution taken the last Night, the Admiral set Sail with seven Frigates to the Point of Tankoya, where about Noon he Anchored amongst the rest of the Fleet.  
Soon after the Admiral's arrival there, Captain Poleman coming to him, told him, That all things were well on the Shore, only some few Soldiers were sick, of which some died, and the Distemper increased. He added also, that that very day, a Captain called Lita and twenty six Soldiers with their Arms, came from the Chineses with two Colours, and one Pennon to us, to go over with our Ships to Tayowan, and offered to fight for us against the Enemy; with promise also to get more to their Party.  
This Captain Lita gave Information, that Siautongsiong did not in the least intent 
Chinese come over to the Hollanders.  to come to them, but at one time or other, would set upon them, if he could find a fit opportunity; and that the Enemy's Forces on Formosa consisted in ten thousand Armed Men, of which near five thousand belonged to this Siautongsiong, whereof he kept about him a Guard of fifteen hundred Men, the rest were distributed, some about the River Tamsuy, but the greatest part about jokan.  
In the Evening, there came six Soldiers more, belonging to the forementioned Lita, as on the next day twenty five more, furnished with Coats of Mail, Helmets, and Scytheses; and about Noon nine more, each of them only with a Scythe, who had stood on the Inland Water, making signs to be fetched over to the Dutch Camp; and as they related, had been forced to throw away their Coats and Helmets, or else they could not have gotten through the Woods.  
The forementioned Captain Lita, was according to Order Presented by Captain Poleman, with four Pieces of Cangans or Clothing, to distribute amongst his Soldiers.  
The tenth came ten other Chinese Soldiers, belonging to Lita's Company, with Tidings, That the Enemy on the other side did fortify and strengthen himself very much; to which purpose he had already gotten a great number of Baskets to be used as blinds, and placed them ready for the first opportunity to lay Guns betwixt them, and that then they threatened to come, and set upon the Netherlanders.  
There also came four Chinese from Siautongsiong, into the Dutch Camp, and in their Master's Name, presented the Admiral with two King's Fish, and a Basket with Potatoes; in like manner, two other Chineses came to the Camp, who brought some dried Fish and other Provisions to sell, which Poleman took in exchange for a Cangang; but because it was supposed that they were sent as Spies, none of them was permitted to come within the Works.  
The eleventh came four other Chineses, who affirmed what the ten which came the day before had related, concerning the Enemies Fortifying himself.  
Those Chineses that came thus to the Hollanders (to prevent them from acting any mischief) were divided amongst the Overveen, Buiksloot, and Cog Frigates, and their Arms taken away from them, viz. thirty in the Cog, nine in the Buiksloot, and twenty six in the Overveen.  
In the afternoon came a Person with a Letter from Siautongsiong, otherwise called Tatholing-Totoksiau, to the Admiral, which was to this purpose.  
Tathonling-Totoksiau sends this Letter to the Holland's Admiral.  
FOrmerly the Admiral sent his Secretary with the Interpreter Assam to My Army, who spoke with Me; My Inclinations have been for the Hollanders ever since they have been with Me; We then Discoursed of five thousand Tail to be distributed amongst My Soldiers, of which I have as yet not received one, so that I find My Expectations of receiving Money to be frustrated; nay fear, that by the long delay, My good Intentions which I have had in this business, and still have, will be prevented; therefore I desire, with the first to know your Honour's Intentions, for when I (which I would have the Hollanders take notice of) shall come to them with my Soldiers, they may be sure of the Castles and Forts, nay, the whole Country of Formosa. You formerly promised to give me five thousand Tail, when I should deliver the Holland Prisoners in Sakkam, which I never undertook, neither think it needful, because they will fall with the Country into your hands.  
And that your Honour may the better Credit Me, I promise hereby to deliver My Grandfather to go in the Holland Ships to Soanchefoe, and there Treat with Singlamong and Lipovi, concerning my coming over, and to that purpose Request, that they would be pleased to send some great Jonks hither with the Holland Frigates, which if they do, all things shall be well.  
Pray Credit my Writing, for I mean all what is here before mentioned with an upright Heart, therefore I desire it may be kept private; please to send Assam to Me, that I may hear from him what your intentions are; if that cannot be, send your Resolution in Writing, that I may Govern myself accordingly.  
Written in the first Moon, the fourteenth Day; and underneath stood Tathonling-Totoksiau his Seal.  
The same Messenger brought also two little Letters from Siautongsiong, as he pretended to the Tartar Agents; but being broken open by the Admiral, one was found to be to Tonganpek, and the other to Sibja; yet both of the following Contents.  
THe Letter sent to Me by your Servant Gom, I have received and understood your meaning; My inclinations, as you very well know, were always to leave this State and come over to the Tartars; but to do it according to your writing with the Holland Ships, I am something doubtful, fearing they might carry Me to Holland, or elsewhere: Besides there is no conveniency for My Wives and Children, neither for My Arms in those Ships, for I am near five thousand strong with My Soldiers and Officers, which are all ready and willing to come over to you; wherefore I hereby desire you, to be importunate with Singlamong, that his great Jonks with the Holland Ships may be sent at farthest on the fifteenth day of the second Month, either to Tamsuy or Tankoya; upon whose timely appearance, I will immediately put aboard My Commanders, Wives and Children; as for the Soldiers it is no great matter, they may go in the netherlands Ships: I intent to send my Grandfather to speak with you farther about this Concern, which I desire you to keep secret.  
The Admiral, by the Vice-Admiral's and Rere-Admiral's advice, returned this Answer.  
FRom your Writing, I understand anew your desire of five thousand Tail, which had you come to Us with your Soldiers, they had been paid before this time, according as We proffered: But to be plain with you, We suspect all your Actions, which are clandestinely managed; you holding a Correspondence at Tayowan, though you pretend and desire of Us, that your Letter may be kept private.  
We had also thought to have found more fair Dealings in the Governors of Tayowan, and if you were really resolved to go to the Coast of China, you would not have trifled so long, but sent some Persons of Quality to Us, to have been carried in one of Our Ships to Singlamong and Lipovi; but since We cannot by fair means, We will endeavour to bring you and those of Tayowan both to better Terms by force.  
The twelfth in the Evening, Captain Poleman with eleven Companies being in Arms, the Guns and other Ammunition was in the Night brought aboard from the Point of Tankoya; and the next day all the Tents were pulled down and put into the Ships; and soon after the Seamen and Soldiers that had been appointed to stay ashore, came from thence aboard.  
The thirteenth in the afternoon, the Admiral assembled his Council to consult what they should do further, and Proposed, That since they had no place of meeting there, nor on the Coast of China, whither they should go with the whole Fleet, to see what condition the Forts were in at Goutsoe, and if they could be repaired with little cost and trouble, then to Pitch there for the present, that they might have a place of Rendezvouz upon any occasion, and also might leave there some Frigates, to go out in the beginning of the approaching Southern Mouson, to Cruise for the japan Traders.  
Secondly, If they should fall short of Goutsoe, whether it were convenient, and the time would permit them to venture a design on the Isles Lamoa or Tangsoa, and from thence send the Cruising Frigates.  
Thirdly, If they should directly Steer from thence to Batavia, with the greatest part of the Fleet, and send only three or four Frigates with the hundred Chinese, and their Captain with the two Tartar Jonks to the Coast of China, according to their promise to Singlamong.  
These Proposals being duly weighed and considered, at last they Resolved,  
First, To examine, how the Fleet was stored with Provisions, Ammunition, Soldiers and Seamen, and then they might on better ground and with more safety, consult what they had best to do, and accordingly the whole Fleet were found to be two thousand and seventy eight Men, (nine hundred and sixty Soldiers, and one thousand one hundred and eighteen Seamen;) besides an hundred and two Soldiers, and an hundred and thirty Seamen that were sick; the number of those that were dead, was two hundred and eleven in all.  
The fourteenth the Tartars fetched twenty three more from the Shore that came running to them with their Arms, and in their Champans carried them aboard the Vlaerding Frigate.  
The same day a Party of the Enemy's Horse and Foot, consisting in about three or four hundred appeared upon the Shore, but durst not come within Shot of the nearest Frigate; and towards Evening they marched away again.  
The fifteenth they agreed to send four Frigates, under the Command of the Rere-Admiral Verwei, to the Coast of China; and that the Admiral should with the rest of the Ships go to Batavia: The Orders which Verwei was to observe, were to this Effect.  
TO Conduct the two Tartar jonks home that came with the Netherlanders from China to Formosa, and also to put ashore in China, the Renegade Chineses, being an hundred and two, besides their Captain; therefore to use all means to reach the Coast of China, and if possible, to get to Puthai, and Land them there; or if by contrary Winds be could not reach Puthai, then to run to Chinchieuw.  
To stay on the Coast till the last of February, and wait for an Answer to the Admiral's Letter, which he had given the Rere-Admiral to send by the Renegade Chineses to deliver to Singlamong and Lipovi; and if he received no Answer in that time, to go thence, without any longer delay towards Batavia, whither the Admiral would set Sail with the rest of the Fleet before.  
The Admiral's Letter to Singlamong and Lipovi, from the Fleet before Tunkoya was to this effect.  
The Holland Admiral Balthasar Bort, doth hereby present his kind Salutation to Singlamong the Viceroy, and Taising Lipovi General of the Territory of Fokien; and wishes health to their Excellencies, with a happy and prosperous Government.  
WE hoped that the Chinese Forces which remain on Tayowan and Formosa, would have accepted of your Excellency's Proffer, and accordingly come over to Us to be conveyed to China. To the Letters written by your Highness to that purpose to them, We added another, to assure them of Our Integrity and Care, We would manifest in the carrying over and furnishing them with Provisions, which was delivered by your Excellency's Agents to Siautongsiong, General of the Forces in the South part of Formosa, who pretended to be satisfied therewith, and began to Treat with Us, and Demanded five thousand Tail of Silver beforehand. But We observing, that if he should once have gotten the Money, he would have deceived Us, therefore We would not consent to it; however, upon his assurance, that Sepoan, otherwise named Kimsia their Prince, had agreed with your Excellencies, and submitted himself to his Imperial Majesty, We dispatched Agents to him, and I also went from Tankoya thither by Sea. I received a Letter from Sepoan, whereupon he offered us the Isle of Lamoa, and to make Peace with us, provided We would immediately break Our League with your Highness, and join with them, which We look upon as a business no way suiting to Our Honour; therefore We immediately Commanded Our Agents from Tayowan, and refusing all Treaties about Peace, resolved to go to Arms; but a Sickness arising amongst Our Soldiers that lay Encamped some time in Tankoya, We were necessitated to remove. Mean while Captain Lita submitted, and brought with him an hundred Men, which We have sent your Highness with this Letter, had your Excellencies sent your Jonks with Us, many more would have come over; for they pretend, that they dare not venture themselves in Our Ships: We will be here again from Batavia (whither We are now going) with a strong Fleet and Forces in the Southern Mouson, when We hope your Highnesses will also be ready, that We may fall upon the Enemy in Tangsoa and Lamoa, or where ever else he shall be, that so We may at once make an end of the Work.  
When Kitat or Lita the Commander was come aboard the Admiral, and told that he should go with four Frigates to China, with all his People, he showed great signs of joy; affirming, That Siautongsiong did not intend to come in, but only held them in Treaty to gain time, yet they might easily master Formosa and the Fortresses thereon, if they would suddenly set upon Lamoa and Tangsoa with a well Man'd Fleet, those being the only strong places which he had on the Coast of China.  
The sixteenth, the Rere-Admiral Verwei set Sail with his four Frigates, and steering Northerly along the Formosan Coast, about Noon Anchored a League from Ape-Mountain; and likewise the Admiral with eleven Ships, and the Jonk Quemuy putting forth, came to an Anchor on the one and twentieth in the Piscadores.  
In the Evening, the Rere-Admiral Verwei set Sail with the four Frigates to the Coast of China, to Land the Chinese Revolters, either on Puthay or about the River Chincheo, under the Tartars Jurisdiction.  
The twenty fifth, a Letter written by the Admiral to the young Coxin, or Sepoan, in Tangsoa, was sent ashore by a Chinese Prisoner at Pehoe, that from thence he might go thither with the first opportunity, which was to this effect.  
THe Holland Admiral Balthasar Bort wishes Health to Sepoan.  
I received your Letter at Tayowan; but the sudden departure of your Messengers would not afford me Opportunity of sending an Answer. We did at your Request send Commissioners to Tayowan; but when they motioned the Surrender of the Fort, they had a Guard put upon them. We always believed, that it was free for Us to ask, and you to deny, without such Affronts. Tsiautongsiong made Us believe, That your Highness had submitted to the Tartars, and commanded all your Soldiers from Formosa, with Order to deliver the Country to Us: Whereupon We sent Our Agents, as aforementioned: But when We received your Letter, We understood the contrary; for you advised Us to break Our League with the Tartar, and proffered Us only Lamoa for a Factory, and the Releasing of Our Prisoners: In answer to which, We advise you to unite with the Tartar, and deliver Tayowan to Us, that We may live peaceably together, and Trade flourish afresh, which you very well know is Our chief aim. I much wonder why those of Tayowan, while Our Agents were there, sent not to Me, and why yours never returned to speak with Me; perhaps they may pretend Fear, but they have no reason, for with Us 'tis usual in the midst of the sharpest War, to send Persons to Treat, and make Overtures of Peace: And themselves are able to make out, how honourably We protected them: Whereas on the contrary, those of Tayowan were so barbarously uncivil, that they would not suffer Our Agents to speak with Our Prisoners, nor take a Letter from them to Us. I have set Sail from thence, with intention to come to you at Tangsoa, in hopes to find more Civility, and withal to persuade you to send Ambassadors to Batavia; but the stormy Wether hath spent so much of the time, that to My great sorrow I could not effect My desire: Therefore I have left this Letter with the Piscadoreans, to be sent to you with the first opportunity. If you resolve to send, do it with speed.  
Balthazar Bort.  
The twenty sixth the Admiral set Sail again with his ten Ships, and ran by the high Western Island: The twenty seventh he saw the Sands; and the twenty eighth, the Macau Islands. On one of these Macau Isles stands the City Macao, of whose Beginning and Plantation this is the Account.  
The Chineses at first permitted the Portuguese to Traffic on a desolate Isle 
The Original of the City Macao.  called Sancham, or Sancian, thirty Leagues from the Continent, and ten from Macao, where they built themselves, in stead of Houses, Bowers of plashed Trees, and meanly thatched on the top. Here the Chineses came to Trade with them, after they were thus settled, nor would suffer their nearer Approaches, being terrified with the remembrance of the former Calamities they suffered by Invasions, especially of the Tartar in the Year 1208. yet fresh in their Memory. These their Fears and Jealousies increased upon them, by seeing and considering the Portuguese Ships, what huge Vessels they were, like floating Castles, big with Armed Men, and terrifying both Sea and Land with the Voice of their thundering Guns▪ Besides, the mahometans and Moors, which in great numbers daily resorted to Canton, reported, That these People (meaning the Portuguese) were Franks (for so they called all Europeans) and were a mighty People of prodigious Valour, and Conquerors of whatever they designed, and that the Borders of their Empire were extended to the Brims of the Universe. But though the Portuguese were thus represented, and appeared themselves to be too formidable, yet the Avarice of the Chinese overpowered their Fear; for the Benefit accrueing by this Commerce was so great, that it did not only redound to the Emperor's Advantage, but also the Magistrates and Common People were all Sharers; so that by Degrees they suffered it to be driven within their Dominions, yet with this Proviso, That so soon as their time of Sale was done, they should go again to India with their Commodities.  
The Portuguese Merchants had Annually two Markets or Fairs, to buy what the Indian Ships transported in january, or the japanners in june.  
The Fairs or Markets were not kept in the Haven of Macao, nor on the Isle of Sancian, as in ancient times; but in Canton itself, whither an infinite Company of People resorted; for the Portuguese went from the City Macao, with the Magistrates leave of China, to the Metropolis Canton, two days Journey by Water, against Tide, and lodged at Night in their Vessels in the Haven: Yet all things were done with such circumspection and vigilancy, that it was easy to see they were not without jealous Fits, and grudge of their former Fear. These yearly Fairs continued two Months, and sometimes longer.  
By this means that Place which was before desolate, began to be inhabited not only by the Portuguese, but also by many of the neighbouring People; so that in few Years, by the great abundance of Commodities brought thither out of Europe, India, and China itself, it grew a famous and populous City: Nay, such was the Chineses Covetousness, seeing their Wealth, that they not only dwelled there, and Traded, but Married with them, and in a short time filled the whole Isle full of rich Habitations.  
This Place is also famous amongst the Catholics, for the great resort thither of Priests, and their converting the Natives to the Christian Faith. From hence all the Voyages for the Converting of Heathens were undertaken; as to japan, China, Tunking, Cochinchina, Cambaya, Laos, and other Country's; wherefore the King of Portugal gave it the Title of a City, and by the approbation of the Pope raised it to an Episcopal See. But since the banishing of the Portuguese out of japan, this City hath much decreased.  
The twenty ninth in the Night the Fleet reached the East Point of the Isle Ainan, which, according to Bartholomew Verwei's Observation, lies much more Northerly than it is placed in the general Map. On this Isle lies the City Ingly, otherwise called Ciunchew, being fortified with very strong Walls, full of handsome Buildings, and well seated for Trade; the whole Island being in a manner surrounded with Mountains and Woods, produceth great plenty of all Necessaries for Humane Sustenance.  
On the Mountains grows the sweet-smelling Craine-Wood, and likewise Ebony, Roses, and Brasile, much used by the Dyers through all China. There are also many Indian Nuts, and a Fruit by them called jaca, which grows not on the Branches, but the Body of the Tree. Amongst others, there also grows a certain strange Herb, in the Chinese Tongue called Chitung; for the Seamen are of opinion, that they can find by its Joints or Knobs, in what Month, and how many Storms there shall be in a whole Year, saying, The fewer Joints this Herb hath, the less the number of Storms will be; and likewise from its Stalks that shoot out of the Joints from the Root upwards, they judge in what Month it will be tempestuous Wether. The Island also breeds many Hearts, and other wild and tame Beasts, besides abundance of Birds.  
Near this Island they also fish for Pearls on the Northern Shore, between this and the Main Land. There is likewise a very strange Fish caught here, with four Eyes, and six Feet, which the Chineses affirm produces also Pearls.  
There is yet another Monster in this Sea, whose Head resembles a Birds, all the rest a Fish, and yields, as they say, several Precious Stones.  
Between the City Coacheu and the Isle of Hainan they catch some Sea-Crabs, which differ not much from the other, except in this, that as soon as they come out of the Water into the Air, they are turned into Stone, yet still keeping their former Shape. The Portuguese and Chineses use them for Medicines against Burning Fevers.  
On the Southside of this Isle the Chineses catch Whales, after the same manner as we do at Greenland.  
This Island hath divers Mountains towards the South side, whereof one called Kinim, hath a Quarry of red Marble.  
Not far from Linkao, a little Town, there lies the Mountain Pisie, of which the Chineses tell strange Fictions; for they relate, That there was a Stag endued with Humane Reason, which conducted the Islanders Army through unknown ways, and brought them where they blocked up their Enemy, that came from Cochinchina to invade them, by which means they obtained a great Victory, and on the same place erected a Temple in his Honor.  
Eastward of Cincheu is a Lake, where a City stood formerly, that was swallowed up by an Earthquake.  
By the little Town jai rises a Mountain, said to be so lofty, that neither Wind nor Rain reaches the top; and therefore called Hoeifung, that is, Above the Wind.  
It is very remarkable what the Chineses relate of the Sea near the Town Cium, viz. That it neither ebbs nor flows, which is observed at the neighbouring Places; but runs one half of the Month towards the East, and the other half to the West.  
The City of Ingly is a Place of great Commerce, in which there are three Markets every day; one of which is held in a very large Place on the East side of the City, whither so soon as the Sun rises divers Merchants resort, as Arabians, Turks, Zurats, Malabars, Abyssines, and those of Pegu and Malaya, besides many of the Native Inhabitants, Indians, and Portuguese.  
After this Market is ended, which continues till nine a Clock, begins a second, which is kept before the Governor's Palace, and lasts till Noon, at which time every one retires home to their Dinners.  
In the Afternoon about three a clock the third Market begins, in a Place at the South side of the City, where those Women (for the Females drive the Trade here, and not the Men) which sell several sorts of Goods, stand apart by themselves, and separated from one another; First stand in a row the Pepper-traders; next, those that sell Betel Leaves, Onekka, Water-Melons, and Anana's; and behind them the Booksellers. In another Quarter are the Ironmongers and Braziers Shops, furnished with Armour, Poniards, Swords, and all sorts of Weapons, and likewise Sandalwood: Opposite to them stand such as vend Sugar, Honey, and all manner of Preserves: Not far distant is sold white, black, red, yellow, green, and grey Beans; and lastly appears a handsome Square, where all sorts of Herbs, either for Food or Physical use, may be bought.  
Here also those Merchants which Trade in Linen, and other Commodities by Wholesale, have their Exchange; beyond which is a Market for Poultry, as Hens, Ducks, Pigeons, Parrots, and other Birds; and likewise of Cabrito's, or Goats.  
Here are also three High Streets: In the first on the right side are some Jewellers, which sell Rubies, Hyacinths, and the like; on the left side, many Chinese Picture-drawers, intermixed with such as sell divers Colours of Sowing-Silks, Silk and Damask Stuffs, Flannel, Satin, Gold Wyre, Cloth of Tissue, Porcelain, Waxed Baskets, Copper Basins, Pots, and Cans, great and small; Quicksilver, Chests, Writing-Paper of all Colours, Almanacs, Leaf-Gold in Books, Looking-glasses, Combs, Spectacles, Brimstone, Chinese Scymiters with waxed Scabbards, China-Roots, Fans, and other Trifles. The second is full of Picture-Shops. The third is only for private use. Passing on somewhat further, you come to the Fruit-Market, and through that into the Fishmarket; and from thence turning towards the left side, to the Shambles, beyond which is a peculiar Place, where the Women sell by Retail round and long Pepper, white and black Cloves, Nutmegs, Mace, Cubebs, Cinnamon, Cummin, Ginger, Zedoar, Sandalwood, Rhubarb, Galanga, Anniseeds, and the like: On the right side is the Rice-Market; close by which, the place where they sell Pots, Bags, Mats, and Salt; and opposite to it, on the left side, Oil.  
The first of March the Fleet sailed by Tinhosa; the second, by the Cape de 
March.  Avarelles; on the third they passed over the Garden of Holland, Breda, and Ackersloot Sands, lying on the South side of the Paracelles: The fourth they sailed by Candour, and on the seventh Anchored at the Isle of Timon.  
The eighth was publicly read an Order of the Council, by which it was commanded, That none, either there or at Batavia, should sell any of the Chinese Children which the Officers, Soldiers, or Seamen had taken, either to Moors or Heathens: And for the better prevention thereof, it was ordered, That they should all be numbered; which Office was committed to the charge of Peter Suskens, Captain Adrian Mouldpenny, Secretary Henry Ysbrands, and john Renaldus. This Order was verbatim as follows.  
SInce there are many Chinese Children, as well Females as Males, in the Fleet which belong to the Officers, Seamen, and Soldiers, whom We fear they may sell either here at Poele Timon, or when they come to Batavia, either to Idolaters or mahometans, which is neither fitting nor lawful for Us Christians, but strictly forbidden by Our Superior Magistrates: Therefore We give every one knowledge and warning, not to dispose of any of the Maids or Youths, or other Chinese, either here at Poele Timon, or Batavia, to Mahumetans or Idolaters, neither to barter nor give them away to such, on pain of those Punishments decreed for such Offences: And that such Misdoers may be found out, every one shall be obliged to give an Account of how many they have, to Our appointed Officers, that they may take their Names in Writing: And this to be set up in all the Ships of the Fleet lying at an Anchor before Poele Timon. Dated the eighth of March, 1664.  
The tenth it was concluded in the Council, That since there was not Provision enough to be had for the Fleet, and that which was there, very dear, to go thence to the Isle of Laver, in hopes to be better provided: Towards which having weighed Anchor, they set Sail in the Evening, and about midnight arrived there. On his departure the Admiral left a Letter with the Inhabitants of Poele Timon, to deliver to the Rere-Admiral Verwei, in which he advised him of all what had happened since they parted.  
The twelfth it was resolved in Council that Evening to proceed on their Voyage to Batavia; according to which, they weighed Anchor, and set Sail.  
The thirteenth the Fleet sailed by Poele Panjang; and on the fourteenth passed Lingen, and Poele Saya, and in the Evening Poele Toesjouw.  
The fifteenth towards Night they passed by the Rock Frederick Hendrick, and towards Evening entered the straits of Banka.  
The twentieth the Fleet stemmed the Thousand Islands, and in the Evening Anchored in twenty eight Fathom, and were about three Leagues distant from the Isle of Edam.  
The next day, being the one and twentieth, the Fleet came to an Anchor at Batavia, with ten Ships. The Seahound Frigate, sent thither with the Quemuy Jonk, with Letters from the Piscadores, were also arrived there, and likewise two other Jonks.  
Towards Evening the Admiral Balthasar Bort, Vice-Admiral Huibert de Lairesse, the Council of War, and Commanders of all the Ships, went ashore, and were courteously received by his Excellency the Lord Maetzuiker, who inviting them to Dinner the next day, the Admiral related all his Adventures to him, delivered him also his Papers, and a List of the Prisoners and the Chinese Children, which were in all two hundred forty three; viz. fifty nine Men, a hundred forty eight Male Children, and thirty six Female.  
Mean while the Rear-Admiral Bartholomew Verwei, who on the twenty fourth 
The return of the five Ships, with the Rere-Admiral, from the Coast of China.  of February set Sail with four Ships from the Piscadores, to the Coast of China, to transport the revolted Chineses, and land them about Puthay, or the River Chincheo, the twenty sixth came to an Anchor at the Island Colongsoe, where he desired the Tartar Agents, that they would with one of their Vessels fetch away the Chinese; to which purpose he put the Agents ashore at the City Eymuy. The next day they brought a Jonk, into which they were put with their Arms, and likewise the Letters given to the Agents, to be delivered the Viceroy Singlamong and General Lipovi, with which the Agents went to the City Chincheo.  
The twenty eighth a Tartar Vessel came aboard the Rere-Admiral, in which was a shaved Chinese called Hionko, which had formerly lived in Batavia, and spoke Portuguese, who told him, That he was sent by Sitetok, with Request to Verwei, That he would please to come to him to Haytin (a Place about a League and a half from thence) to a Treat; but Verwei being sickly, put it off. This Hionko also related, That the Enemy with his Forces lay yet in Tangsoa, and durst not go to Tayowan, fearing the Dutch Ships that lay before it; and that about fourteen days since, five thousand Men came to them in sixty Jonks, which then lay at Haytan; that the Commanders which came in the said Jonks desired to inhabit the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, which if it were permitted them, the Prime of the Coxingans would come over to them: But the Viceroy Singlamong had denied, and would not hearken thereto, alleging, That when another Holland Fleet should come again on the Coast, they would then without any further trouble submit.  
The first of March the Overveen, Cog, and Buiksloot Frigates came to an Anchor by the Rere-Admiral.  
The third, being Monday, Verwei set Sail with his four Ships, that according to Order he might proceed on his Voyage to Batavia, and in the Afternoon found himself half a League beyond the Island with the Hole; his Course South-South-West.  
The fourth he descried Lammo, an Isle in the North-West, four Leagues from the Fleet, in twenty two and twenty three Fathom Water; and in the Evening the Sands, Nor-West and by West, within five Leagues.  
The fifth, being Wednesday, Verwei came amongst a Company of Chinese Fishers, of which he thought to overtake one, or by firing of a Gun make him strike; but in vain, for they by their nimble sailing got clear away.  
In the Forenoon they saw Pedro Branco, and about Noon were in twenty two Degrees eleven Minutes Northern Latitude: Towards Evening they descried the Isles Lemas, Nor-West, three Leagues from them.  
The eighth, being Saturday, in the Morning they had Tinhosa in the West, five Leagues distant, and at Noon in the Nor-West, his Course being South-South-West.  
Monday the tenth, about Sunrising, they saw Poele Canton, West-South-West four Leagues from them; and at Noon, by Observation, found themselves in fifteen Degrees and three Minutes Northern Latitude, and at Sunset descried the Box Horns in the South-West and by South.  
The eleventh they discerned the Cape Averello, in the South and by West, six Leagues from them; and Poele Cambier de Terre in the Nor-West and by West, at three Leagues distance.  
The twelfth in the Morning they reached the Round Holm, being three Leagues to the West and by North; and the Bay of Pangerang in the Nor-West, at the same distance.  
The thirteenth early they saw Poele Cecier de Mare, in the Southeast and by East, about six Leagues from them; and the fourteenth at Noon the Point of Sinques jagues' about five Leagues to the Nor-West.  
The fifteenth, being Saturday, they had still sight of the high Land of Cambodia.  
On Monday they saw Poele Candour in the Nor-West, about three League's distance.  
The twentieth in the Morning they had the Isle of Timon in the South, towards which Verwei steered his Course with the other Ships, and in the Afternoon dropped Anchor on the West side of the great Sandy Bay, in eighteen Fathom Water.  
The Inhabitants of this Place informed Verwei, That the Admiral Bort had been there ten days with the rest of the Fleet.  
The same day Verwei set Sail again about Noon from Poele Timon, and was the next day in the South-West and by South, four Leagues from Poele Panjang, which lay Nor-Nor-West two Leagues from him: The following Day the East Point of Lingen bore West-South-West from him; in the Evening, the Isle Poele Sayo Nor-West and by North; and the Northermost of the Isles, South-West and by South.  
The twenty third, being Sunday, the Fleet descried the Mountain Monapyn, in the South-South-East, five Leagues distant, in fifteen Fathom Water. In the Afternoon the Monapyn bore South-South-East three Leagues off. Here he sailed directly towards the straits of Banka, and on Monday Morning came up with Poele Nanko, driving with a Fore-Tide into the straits, and in the Evening descried the Island Lucipar East-South-East, in five Fathom and a half, from whence he steered his Course directly South-West.  
On Tuesday, being the twenty fifth, they saw the Isle with the High Trees in the West and by North, four Leagues from them: On Wednesday the North-Watchman▪ in the South-South-East, about three Leagues; and towards Evening in the South-South-East, at one League.  
The twenty seventh, being Thursday, Verwei sailed Westward, along by the Thousand Islands, and in the Afternoon ran safe to an Anchor in five Fathom Water, on the Road before Batavia, where going ashore, he went with the Commanders of the other three Ships to the Lord General Maetzuiker, and the Council, and related such Adventures as had happened to him since his departure; who for his faithful Services and valorous Conduct, gave him hearty Thanks, and promised him greater Rewards.  
Thus much of the Relation concerning what happened to the first Fleet, set out under the Command of the Admiral Balthasar Bort, and the Vice-Admiral john Van Campen, to the Coast of China, and their Expedition to the Viceroy Singlamong and General Lipovi; and likewise what Adventures befell the second Fleet. Now it is requisite to give a brief Account of what happened in Hoksieu, to the Merchant Ernest van Hogenhoek.  
Till the first of March, Anno 1664. Captain Constantine Noble had resided in 
March, 1664.  the City Hoksieu, as Agent; but then he came aboard the Finch, which he freighted with Merchandises to Batavia; in whose Place Hogenhoek was ordered to look after the Companies Business in Hoksieu, and to keep a Journal as well of State as Trading Affairs, and of all his Transactions and Services done for the Company, according to his Orders given him from the Admiral Bort and his Council.  
The same day in the Morning the Viceroy Singlamong went to Chinzieu, to receive the Enemies of the Isles Tamswa and Lamoa into Favor, except Kimsia, who was said to be gone to Tayowan.  
On Wednesday, the fifth, the General Lipovi went also to Chinzieu, that there with the Viceroy, he might receive the submitting Chineses into Favor; from whence he sent one of his Mandarins to the Netherlanders, to Compliment them, and tell them in his Name, That some Letters written by the Council of State for that Empire, were come to his Hands, and that theirs would soon follow. Not long after the General Lipovi's Chief Secretary came also with a Copy of the Council of State's Letter, which was to this effect.  
WE Lepous have showed your Letter concerning the Hollanders Trading 
A Copy of the Council of State's Letter.  here, to his Imperial Majesty.  
We Ponpous have also made your last Years Writing concerning the Hollanders, known to his Majesty.  
The Piejapous have also showed yours written to them, to his Majesty.  
The Conbon likewise hath written a Letter to the Emperor, That the promised Ships were already come; and likewise the Hollanders Request concerning Trade.  
Povi hath also written to the Zoetaysins, That the Holland Admiral was come with his Fleet of War to Hoksieu, and that his Request was to come and Trade here once a Year, and also that he might have a Place granted for the building of a Storehouse. The Express of the Conbon written to the Zoetaysins informed, That the Holland Admiral hath brought some Goods with him in his Ships, with Request that he may dispose of them to pay his Soldiers.  
On all the forementioned Writings his Majesty made Answer, You, my Lords, go and consult first about this Business; then let me know your Opinions, and I will give you my further Answer.  
The Zoetaysins, Puejapous, Lepous, Ponpous, in humble Obedience to Your Imperial Majesty do certify our Opinions in manner following.  
We have looked over ancient Records, and find that it was never used to permit any Strangers to live in our Country, or build a Factory, much less to drive a constant Trade; therefore We suppose it ought not to be granted.  
We also find, That in ancient Times it hath been accustomed, that when any Strangers came to Compliment the Emperor, their Goods which they brought with them were put into one of the Emperors own Storehouses, erected for that purpose, where one of Our Mandarins taking an Inventory thereof, sold them: But without Addresses to the Emperor with Presents, nothing was permitted.  
But since the Holland Admiral comes hither to assist the Emperor against his Enemies, We think that by way of Compensation he may this one time be suffered to sell his Goods brought along with him, first obtaining Licence from the General Lipovi, and the Conbon in Hoksieu: But hereafter the Hollanders shall first make their Addresses to the Emperor, before they shall sell their Goods.  
The Empeeor answered hereupon,  
I Conghy, the twenty seventh Day of the twelfth Moon, in the second Year of My Reign, permit the Hollanders to come every other Year and Trade: The other Points I am of the same Opinion as You, my Lords. These are the Words of the Emperor, according to which, and this Letter, you may govern yourselves.  
In the translating of this Copy of the Council of State's Letter, their manner of Style was as much as possible could be imitated.  
The forementioned Lepous and Ponpous, which had written these Letters to Singlamong and Lipovi, are Judges and Councillors of Civil Affairs, as the Piejapous are of Martial: The Zoetaysins are four Guardians in the time of his Father, placed over the young Emperor and Empire, to supervise Affairs during his Minority, being at the time of this Grant about twelve Years of Age.  
The tenth, being Monday, Hogenhoek sent the Secretary Cheko with a Letter to the Governor of Hoksieu, who promised to speed it with his Post to the netherlands Ships.  
On Wednesday, being the twelfth, the Netherlanders went all to the Pagode Conzan, being one of the greatest in all those lower Territories, situate in a most pleasant and delightful Place, about three Leagues from Hoksieu.  
Monday the seventeenth, in the Afternoon, Lepora, one of the Vice-Roys Secretaries, came to visit Hogenhoek, to whom, amongst other Discourses, he related, That the Enemies of Tanzwa and Lamao had altered their Opinions, except Ziekautia Chief General of Kimsia, who stayed with his Wives, Children, Soldiers, and Jonks, to know on what Terms he should come in, having first cut off his Hair after the Tartar Fashion.  
He also related, That there was shortly expected a Sealed Letter from his Majesty, with great Presents for the Hollanders.  
The twenty eighth, being Tuesday, Hogenhoek went to visit the Conbon and Governor, and desired him to expound the meaning of those Words, That the Hollanders might come and Trade with their Ships every other Year: To which he courteously replied, That the Great Council of State at Peking would not yet permit the Hollanders a Free Trade for ever, nor grant them a Place for the building of a Storehouse, according to their Minds declared to his Majesty; but he was assured that his Imperial Majesty, on the Proposal of the Council, had made answer, That they might come once in two Years; which was as much as to say, That the Hollanders coming from remote Places, could come but once in two Years with their Ships to Trade, at which time they should have leave to drive their Commerce: And it seemed by this Order, that Gifts and Presents were only wanting to supple the Courtiers, and soften the Counsellors of State, through whose Hands all things of this nature passed, by reason of his Majesty's Puerility: And if (continued he) you do hereafter order your Affairs accordingly, I dare promise and undertake that you may not only come once a Year, and Traffic; but twice, if you be able so to do. Whereupon, after several such like Discourses, he took his leave and departed.  
From the nineteenth, being Wednesday, till the twenty second, nothing happened of any Remark, the Netherlanders being only busy in building of one small, and two great Rooms, for the stowing their Commodities against the next Season.  
On Sunday the twenty third, the General Lipovi's Chief Secretary came to to visit the Hollanders, with whom they discoursed about the News sent from the Court in Peking; and he explained it just as the Governor had done, saying, That he had discoursed with his Master about it, who had told him, The Hollanders are sure enough in this Country: The building of a Storehouse is of small consequence; they have already a good House to Trade in. When his Majesty says, Once in two Years, they may come every Year, nay twice a Year, if they can, provided the Hobou (meaning Constantine Noble) went back to Batavia, and from thence were sent with a formal Embassy and Presents to the Court at Peking.  
Against the Evening the Governor of Hoksieu sent the forementioned Letter to Constantine Noble back again, with information that the four Ships were gone.  
On Monday the twenty fourth the Emperor's Commissioners came from Peking, to confer Titles of Honour on Tonganpek and Zibja, the Sons of Zouja, whom his Majesty had received into Favor.  
On Tuesday, being the twenty fifth, Ongsamya, Secretary to the Viceroy 
●…rse with  Singlamong, received the Netherlanders that came to visit him very courteously; and after having drank two or three Cups of Tee, and showed them his whole House, he solemnly invited them to a Dinner, where they were nobly entertained: And having passed about several Cups of their Liquor, he said to them, The Netherlanders may now be assured of a Free Trade for ever; but that they being so eminent Merchants, ought not to deal with the meaner sort of People, (as they had done the two preceding Years) who sold their Goods again by Retail, and then could scarce dispose of half of them; but that they should Trade with the Viceroy, General, and Governor, who if they wanted any thing in their Requests, might intercede for them at Court; and that then also they would be assured to carry out as much white Raw Silk (which his Majesty had prohibited on pain of death) as they desired: Whereas on the contrary, if their Highnesses were not pleased, they could not transport one Bale; therefore they ought to be wary.  
Hereupon Hogenhoek made answer, That it was certain these Proposals might be advantageous, and that they agreed with the Opinions of his Masters; but if the Hollanders should Trade with their Excellencies only, who ingross'd the Commodity, as they had done in Canton, that then they could not subsist at that rate; on which account, and for no other Reason, they had left Canton: And he would rather prosecute the Design no farther, but go to a Place of Trade, where they might dispose of their Goods at Profit: But if their Highnesses would deal with them, they should have the Refusal, and they would be very reasonable, according as the Market went.  
After this they fell into other Discourses, viz. That Ziekautya, a famous Soldier, and General to Sepoan, was come to them, accompanied with six thousand of the chiefest Coxingan Soldiers; and that one of the chief Officers, Haytan's Brother, being ashore, and repenting, intended to make his Escape again in the Jonks that lay hard by, but was overtaken by some of the Viceroy's Soldiers, who would immediately have Beheaded him, had not his Brother, who had been Governor of Haytan, begged him; yet nevertheless he was put into Prison. This Discourse being ended, and having drank a chirping Cup, he desired Hogenhoek to bear him Company for two or three Hours longer, and then gave him leave to return.  
On Wednesday the twenty sixth, the Governor of Hoksieu's Secretary came to visit the Netherlanders, with Request, amongst other Discourses, for his Lord's Cotton Quilt, promised by Constantine Noble, which Hogenhoek immediately sent him.  
The twenty eighth, being Friday, Hogenhoek went to the Conbon or Governor, with Requests to him, That since the Goods which he had left were not sold, he would grant him a Pass; for he intended to send some Goods to the Territory of Nangkin, or Chikiang, there to exchange them for wrought Silks; To which he made Answer, That he could not do it of his own accord; but that he would write to the General Lipovi, who was also concerned in it, and let him know his Answer in a Fortnight's time.  
Besides, the Governor told him, that it was their own faults, that they had not sold their Merchandizes sooner, for he was a Man of sixty Years old, in all which time he never knew Cloves sold for an hundred and sixty, or an hundred and seventy Tail; and accordingly all their other Goods were set at too high Rates, so that they would not go off, unless they sold them cheaper, although there was neither want of Buyers nor Money. The Chineses sold the Goods which they brought with them much cheaper, viz. Bags of Pepper at nine or ten; Sandalwood, twenty two; and Quicksilver, at an hundred and ten, and an hundred and twenty Tail; Coloured Clothes, at three, and three and a half the Dutch Ell; Scarlet, five and six Tail; which said he, are too great gains, according to what they are bought at Kalappa. Hogenhock answered the Governor hereupon, That it seemed not strange to him, that the Revolted Chinese sold their Goods so cheap, (for stolen Goods were always sold cheaper than those that were bought with ready Money;) at which the Governor Smiling, desired the Hollanders to excuse him, that he did not invite them to Dinner, because his youngest Wife lay a Dying, so that after having drank a Cup of Bean-Broth, they departed.  
On Tuesday, being the first of April, the Governor's Wife died, which occasioned that he gave Audience to none in fourteen days time.  
Wednesday, being the second, the Viceroy's Secretary sent the Factor Lapora with a Letter to the Hollanders, informing, That two Agents, with two Mandarins styled Tzouzou (that is, Governors) came the twenty eighth of the first Moon from Peking, and had brought with them the Emperor's Letter and Presents to the Hollanders, for their faithful Service.  
On Tuesday the twenty eighth, Haytankon Governor of Sinkzieu, with two Jonks, set Sail to the Manillaes': Their Lading consisted chiefly in Raw and Wrought Silks: And it was rumoured, That the Viceroy and General intended to send a Trading Fleet to japan, to which purpose abundance of Silk was already bought out of the upper Territories, which occasioned so small Inquiry for the netherlands Goods.  
About this time it happened that no Rain had fallen for six or seven days: Whereupon the Conbon or Governor caused the kill or eating of Swine to be forbidden by Proclamation, on pain of death; because the young Rice-plants, that should be transplanted, dried up to nothing. And on the Thursday, being the seventeenth, the Conbon, with all his Mandarins and Nobles, went in Procession on foot, (which was never seen before) into several Temples, and carried Perfumes, making great Offerings to their Idols. The Priests also went up and down every day making great Lamentations and Prayers for Rain; the more, because the Conbon had threatened them, That if no Rain fell in ten or twelve days, they should be severely beaten with Sticks.  
The sixteenth, being Wednesday, the Factor Lapora came with a Letter, copied out of the Viceroy Singlamongs, written to his Secretary Ongsamya, the Contents of which were as followeth.  
THe Holland Admiral hath by assisting Us against the Enemy gained great Honour, which I have made known to the Emperor, who hath sent two Agents from Peking, with an Imperial Letter and Presents to them: His Majesty hath also written to Us to go with your Forces and engage Tayowan, and upon the Conquering of it, to restore it to you; and also that you may come every two Years to Trade. Acquaint the Holland Hobou with this joyful News, and that the Agents are also to be in Hoksieu within fifteen or sixteen Days.  
On Friday, the eighteenth, the Netherlanders were informed, That the Viceroy and General, attended with some of the Revolted Mandarins, were gone a Voyage with their Jonks to Tanswa and Lamoa, to meet Tziekautzia, who waited there to submit, as they had been informed; but coming thither, they found no body, Kimsia being fled with all his People; yet the Tartars not daring to stay, fearing his Return, took away the Villagers, with their Wives and Children, ruining and burning all they could find.  
On Saturday, being the nineteenth, some Merchants came with Tidings that Tziekautzia had brought a great many Merchandises with him from Tayowan, and the other Islands, as Pepper, Sandalwood, Quicksilver, japan-wood, Cloves, Amber, Cloth, and the like.  
About this time the Rice (by reason of the abundance of Prisoners and Coxingan Chineses, and likewise the Army which lay there) began to grow very dear; insomuch that a Sack was sold for thirty five or thirty six Maes: Their Highnesses therefore were necessitated for some time to give leave to those Chineses that were not Soldiers, to go to Sea with their Vessels, and seek to get a Livelihood, and also Till some Ground on the Seashore.  
On Monday, the one and twentieth, News came that Houtin, one of the valiantest Soldiers belonging to Sepoan, was come to the Tartars, accompanied with eight thousand Men, whom he delivered all to the Tartars; and likewise, That Kimsia was gone to Tayowan, and Anpikya to the Piscadores; and that Kimsia resolved there to venture the Hollanders and the Tartars till the uttermost time, and was daily busy about fortifying and strengthening the Castle Zelandia, and raising another Fort on Sakkam, so to make Formosa invincible.  
On Thursday, being the twenty fourth, News came that the General Lipovi was gone from Sinchieuw to Soanchieuw, whence he was expected in ten or twelve days; likewise that a Post was come from the Court at Peking, with information, That Lipovi was made Povi, or Governor of three Provinces, viz. Fokien, Kiangsi, and Chekiang; a thing seldom done, to give the Chief Command, both in Civil and Military Affairs, of three Territories, to one Lord.  
Monday the twenty eighth, a Mandarin came in the Governors Name to compliment Hogenhoek, and to tell him, That the Emperor's Agents were expected within five or six days in Hoksieu.  
On Tuesday the twenty ninth, the Governor caused an Idol-Priest, because he had been negligent in his Prayers and Offerings for Rain (for the droughty Season still continued) to be miserably beaten with Sticks, threatening him moreover, That if none fell in five or six days after, he should be executed.  
The first of May, being Thursday, it happened to rain, to the great joy of the 
May.  Idol-Priests; and the same day the Governor sent the Mandarin Tan-lauja to tell the Netherlanders, That the Agents were expected either that day or the next, and if they would not please to go and fetch in those Lords, because they were come so great a Journey about their Business, it being the Tartars fashion, and that which Noble had also done the last Year. Hereupon, the Netherlanders prepared immediately to go to meet the Agents, and Congratulate their Welcome, as soon as they should have notice of their Arrival.  
On Saturday, being the third, in the Evening the long expected Commissioners came to Hoksieu, with a great Train of Tartar Soldiers and Servants; so that the Hollanders could not fetch them in.  
On the fourth in the Morning, Hogenhoek went with all his Attendants to the Castle, to Welcome the Emperor's Agents, who came to meet him in the Hall, and conducted him thorough two or three Chambers, where several Stools were placed, desiring him to sit down on the left hand, (by them accounted the most Honourable, which Hogenhoek refused; yet after many Ceremonies, he was forced to sit right against the Chief Agent, who would not take the Upperhand, saying, The Hollanders are Mighty Lords; and that His Majesty rejoiced very much that they had assisted him with such a great Fleet and Forces, which was taken as a great kindness at Court, for to none else but the Hollanders did his Majesty ascribe that Victory: Wherefore he was sent from the Emperor to them, with returns of Thanks, together with Sealed Letters and Presents. Then he signified, that his Majesty had granted Licence to come thither, and Traffic every other year; and besides, had written to their Excellencies the Viceroy Singlamong, the General Lipovi, and Governor of Hoksieu, to join with the netherlands Fleet and Forces, and go with them to Tayowan, which after the Conquest, should be delivered to them, that they might as Neighbouring Friends, Trade with one another.  
Then the Agents asked for the Admiral Bort, and the Fleet: Whereupon Hogenhoek replied, That for divers Reasons written to their Highnesses, he was gone to Batavia, but intended to return very shortly with fresh Recruits, and then with joint Forces to set upon Tayowan. Whereto the Agents replied, That his Majesty and the Council of State knew not, but that the Admiral and the whole Fleet had been still upon the Coast; for which reason, they had with all speed written to their Excellencies, to go with them to Tayowan, that the Hollanders might be repossessed of it, which his Majesty earnestly desired. They would willingly deliver him his Majesty's Letter now, but their Highnesses, the Viceroy Singlamong, and General Lipovi, who were also concerned in it, being absent, it could not be done: therefore they desired he would be pleased to have patience till their coming, which would be very shortly.  
Hogenhoek having drank a Cup or two of Tee, took his leave, and was conducted out at the Gates by the Agents, who professed great love to the Hollanders. In his return home, Hogenhoek met with the Conbon or Governor of Hoksieu, accompanied with divers Noblemen and Mandarins, who were all going to welcome and Compliment the Agents.  
On Monday Morning, being the fifth, one Mandarin came in the Agents name to salute Hogenhoek; and after having been entertained with Wine and Fruit, took his leave.  
Soon after, Hogenhoek went to the Governor to ask, If the opening of his Majesty's Letter must be deferred till the Vice-Roys and Generals coming home? Who answered, That it was very requisite; and because the Letter must be broke open in the presence of the foremention'd Persons, and him, he had already sent an Express about it to their Excellencies: But that it would be eighteen or twenty days before the Viceroy could return, till which time he must have Patience. Then Hogenhoek asked the Governor, if it was requisite to invite the Agents to a Treat, and some other Recreation? Whereupon he was answered, That before they had done all their Commands and Businesses, they durst not come, but when that was done, he might do his pleasure. Ask moreover, If Hogenhoek did yet doubt, whether he was a true friend to the Hollanders? And told him, That they were too hasty in the going with their Ships, and had they stayed but five or six days longer, they might (without doubt) have carried this News to the King of jacatra, (meaning Maetzuiker.) But the Admiral, for two years together, was gone so hastily, that he did not so much as take his leave of any person, which was not well taken by them, and they had written their discontent concerning it to the General and Governor of India: Which Hogenhoek answering, said, That necessity had forced them.  
After being handsomely entertained, the Netherlanders taking their leave, returned to their Quarters.  
The sixth being Tuesday, some Chinese Merchants came to the Dutch Storehouse to look upon the Commodities that were left; and afterwards asked, if the Hollanders would dispose of them by Parcels, or all together? To which Hogenhoek replied, That if they liked the whole quantity, that he would dispose of them all, and be paid for them as in Constantine Nobel's time; at which the Merchants laughing, said, That then the Goods were sold the dearer, because it was the first time that the Hollanders drove a Trade there; and also, because the Chineses were formerly forbidden on pain of Death not to buy such Commodities of Foreigners: But if they would abate something of their Price, considering the whole Parcel, than they would Treat with them; which if they would not do, they told Hogenhoek, that he might keep them a year or two longer. Whereupon Hogenhoek desired them to make a proffer, which was, an hundred and forty Tail for the Cloves; an hundred and twenty for Quicksilver; for Amber of twelve Guilders, eight Tail; for that of eleven, seven Tail and an half; for that of six, four Tail; for that of five, three Tail; for that of twenty four Stivers, nine Maes; for the best sort of Camphier, of twenty three Rials, eighteen Tail; for the second sort of twenty Rials, sixteen Tail and a half; for Scarlet, six Tail the Dutch Ell; for Crimson, four Tail; for other Colours, three Tail; and if he thought fit to dispose of them at these Rates, they would deliver him White-Raw-Silk in the sixth Month at the Market Price which should be then; to which, Hogenhoek desiring some time of consideration, they returned.  
On Thursday, being the eighth, the General Lipovi returned with all his Train to Hoksieu, where he was nobly received by the Conbon or Governor.  
Friday, the ninth, Hogenhoek sent the Factor Pedel to the General Lipovi, to Compliment and welcome him in his Name, because the Colic, wherewith he was sore afflicted, prevented him from doing it in Person.  
Being come home, he related, That the General had accepted of the excuse, and asked, if he had sold all his Goods; to which Pedel had made answer, No, and that they remained without any enquiry for them; which the Governor said, was not strange to him, because they held them at so high a rate; and if they intended to dispose of them before more came, they must set a more moderate Price, as they had done before, or else they would hereafter so stick on their Hands, that they would get nothing near so much for them as they might do now.  
The tenth, being Saturday, the General sent for a piece of Crown Serge to Hogenhoek, which being carried him, he asked, What he must pay for it? Hogenhoek answering, said, Forty Tail; to which the Factor replied, If the Merchants pay forty, my Master ought to pay but thirty eight, because he wants it for his own use, to make a Tent of it; whereupon Hogenhoek, according to his desire, let him have it.  
On Sunday towards the Evening, the Governor sent his Servant to invite Hogenhoek to come to Dine with him the next day; to which returning Thanks, he sent word, that he would come, notwithstanding he was not well.  
On Monday Morning, the twelfth, Hogenhoek went to the General Lipovi's House, to Compliment and welcome him; because at his coming he could not in Person do it, being prevented by Sickness, and now going to a Treat at the Governors, it might have been ill resented, if he had not first visited the General.  
When coming, he had immediately Audience by the General, who before he sat down, asked him concerning his Health, and why he walked abroad so soon, and that he could see by his looks that he was not perfectly cured. To which he answered, That he did it for the Reason's aforesaid, fearing if he had denied, that the Governor might perhaps have resented it ill.  
The General, after he had drank, and Presented Hogenhoek with a Cup of Milk mixed with Bean Flower and Peking Butter, he began to speak concerning the Letter that came from the Emperor, whereby he said, It appeared how the Emperor loved the Hollanders, observing, he had Commanded his Forces to go to assist them out of his own Dominions, which was never done before, neither in the Chinese nor Tartar Government. Nay, that which is more, if the Hollanders desired Tayowan, they should possess it again, and then as true and faithful Friends, to Trade and assist one another; as for their Trading there, they were ascertained; and concerning their coming every other year, they need not to take any notice thereof, but that they might upon his word come and Traffic every Year.  
But an Ambassador must without fail be sent to the Emperor, with humble Thanks and Presents for his gracious Favours; and that he had writ to his Majesty, that the old Hobou (meaning Constantine Noble) was gone to Batavia, to be Commission'd to that purpose; and therefore it would not be convenient, that any other should come in his stead. But Hogenhoek answering, that he could not assure it; the General seemed dissatisfied, however taking no further notice, asked, When the Admiral Bort would come again, because they only waited for the Fleet to go to Tayowan, to engage it with all their Forces: To which Hogenhoek replied, that he knew not certainly the time, but supposed, that the Fleet would either be there again in june, or the beginning of August, as the Admiral Bort had written at his departure to their Highnesses. But the General in return, only declared himself unsatisfied with the Holland Admiral's departure, laying the whole fault of the Enemies not being totally subdued upon him, who (he said) pretended to be more bound up, and limited by his Commission than he was.  
Hogenhoek, after many other Discourses, desired, That he might take his leave, which the General permitted, because he was invited by the Conbon or Governor; from whence as he was going, he met with a Mandarin by the way, sent by the Conbon, to tell him, That it was time to come, because the Agents were there already.  
Coming to the Court, Hogenhoek was very courteously received by the Governor, and likewise by the Agents, which being passed, they took their places: The Governor sat below the foremention'd Lords. The Stools on which they sat were covered with Damask, Embroidered with Gold. After having rested themselves a little, the Agents craved Hogenhoek's excuse, that they had not visited him, alleging, That the chief reason was, because they had not fully effected all their Commands; which should no sooner be done, but they would wait upon him in his House.  
Then having drunk a Cup or two of Milk, the Governor desired the Netherlanders to rise, and sit down at the Table, as the Stools were placed, on which they accordingly went, and seated themselves.  
Whilst they were at Dinner, the Governor had ordered some other Pastimes to be presented, so to make the Treat the nobler, which was very Magnificent of itself: After the several Chargers with variety of Meat, had been changed for greater Delicacies thirty six several times, and the Feast ended with Mirth and Entertainment, the Agents took their leave first, and afterwards the Netherlanders.  
On the twenty ninth, against the Evening, the Viceroy Singlamong returned to Hoksieu, where he was received with great signs of Rejoicing, having Conquered Tamzwa, Lamoa, and other little Isles lying thereabouts, by which the whole Coast was cleared.  
The twentieth, the Mandarins belonging to the Agents came again to the Netherlanders, to raise the Price of Silks, telling their Landlord, that they had understood by the way, that the Hollanders bought great quantities of Silk, which they sent to Batavia, a thing contrary to the Emperor's Order. But because of their Services done to the Empire, it was connived at; therefore their Masters had also bought Silk to deliver to them, which if they would not take, it might easily be wrought by the Agents means, to procure the Viceroy, General Lipovi, and Governor, to forbid them to buy any more, before they had leave from the Emperor, with several other such like Discourses; but Hogenhoek returning them the former answer, they went away unsatisfied.  
About ten a Clock, Hogenhoek with all his Company, went to the Viceroy Singlamong's Court, to Compliment and wish him joy, of the Conquest gotten against his Enemies.  
Coming thither, the Viceroy was gone about half an hour before, to visit one of his Chief Captains, that lay very sick. But his Interpreter desired the Netherlanders to stay a little in the base Court, and he would give his Highness' notice; which being accordingly done, the Viceroy, after a little stay, returned home, and immediately granted Audience to Hogenhoek, who Congratulated his happy Return, and likewise his Victory, for which his Highness returned him Thanks, and wished him Joy of the Letter and Presents sent to them from his Majesty. But after some short and Complimental Discourses, the Viceroy made fresh Complaints of the Admiral Borts sudden departure, without giving him the least notice of it, saying, it was true, that he had received a Letter from him, but it was just at his departure, when he had no time to answer it.  
He asked moreover, if the Admiral would return, or another come in his place; to which Hogenhoek made answer, That it was at the King of Iacatra's pleasure, and that he could not give his Excellency any assurance of it.  
Then the Viceroy said, That in regard he could not agree with the Admiral therefore wished, that there would come another in his stead; for had the Admiral (said he) observed my Advice, to have gone together to Tayowan, after we had Conquered Tamzwa and Lamoa, we had surely been Masters of it ere this time. But the Admiral would never believe him; but there was now Order come from his Majesty to go thither; for He did not know, but that the Fleet was there yet, and therefore for their faithful Service done to the Realm, he had likewise granted them to come and Trade every Year, which they ought to take as a great Favour, and believe, that his Majesty was very graciously inclined towards them, and therefore when an Ambassador should come with Addresses to his Majesty, he doubted not, but what ere else they desired at Court, they would obtain. They stayed only for the Fleet, which should no sooner be come, but according to his Majesty's Commands, they would go together to Tayowan. At last excusing himself, that he could not in person stay to Treat him, being still weary of his Journey, he Commanded two of his Council to bear Hogenhoek Company, and Entertain him, and when it was time to open the Emperor's Letter, they should give him notice; which said, he went in, and the Netherlanders soon after returned to their Lodgings.  
Against the Evening, being the one and twentieth, their Excellencies sent word to Hogenhoek by one of their Mandarins, that the next Morning about Sun rising, he should go to the Emperor's Poetzienzie; and accordingly at the appointed time, Hogenhoek taking Horse, went thither with all speed; where coming, and finding the whole Court Guarded, he stayed at an appointed place, till the Viceroy and Agents came with the Emperor's Letter; where, also, the General Lipovi, with the Conbon or Governor, and all the Mandarins waited.  
After they had stayed some time, the General Lipovi sent to the Factor Pedel, to tell Hogenhoek, That since he could not help to fetch in the Emperor's Letter at first; that now, when it came to the Court, he should fall on one of his Knees, to do it Reverence, because it was the Custom of the Country; Noble having also done it at the fetching in of the Letter the last Year.  
Hogenhoek having stayed an hour with patience, the Viceroy Singlamong appeared with a great Train of his Mandarins, Nobles, and Courtiers, and soon after, the Agents with the Emperor's Letters and Presents.  
Before the Emperor's Letter walked above twenty Persons, beating on Drums, and playing on divers Musical Instruments; so that it rather seemed to be a great Triumph, than for the reading of a Letter.  
As it passed by, Hogenhoek, according to the General's Request, showed Reverence to the Letter, by Bowing of his Head and Body; which done, they followed the Train into a great Hall, where their Excellencies were already Seated, and then rose up: After they had consulted a little together, Hogenhoek was again Commanded to Kneel, and so to continue Kneeling all the time, whilst it was reading.  
After the Letter had been read publicly, it was laid on Hogenhoek's Arm by the Chief Agent; for which Honour, he was forced Kneeling to bow his Head several times together, and likewise for the thousand Tail, and Silk Stuffs.  
After this, their Excellencies went to sit under a Canopy, and caused a great Tankard with Milk mixed with Peking Butter and Bean Flower, to be brought to them, whereupon they invited Hogenhock also to sit down by them; at last, the Viceroy rising and taking his leave, went to his own Court: Soon after followed the General Lipovi, and lastly, the two Agents, Netherlanders, and Governors, who advised Hogenhoek, that he should go the next day to Thank the Agents, which he accordingly promised to do.  
The Emperor's Letter Hogenhoek Commanded Lewis de Keizer to carry on his back, but the Presents were laid in Pallakins; all the way which they passed, several sorts of People, with Drums and other Musical Instruments, thronged the Streets to see them.  
Hogenhoek coming home, was welcomed by two of the Emperor's Poetzienzie, with three Volleys of Shot, and the Drums and Pipes played a whole hour before the Letter, which they did only to get Money; for Hogenhoek was directed to give somewhat more than Noble had done the Year before; and likewise the Viceroy and General Ordered Hogenhoek to go the next day to visit the Agents, and return them Thanks, because it seldom or never happened, that his Majesty gave such great Presents to any Person whatsoever.  
After Hogenhoek had been at home some time, he caused the Emperor's Letter to be Translated: Which was to this effect.  
I Conghy Emperor, send this Letter to the Holland Admiral Balthasar.  
I Love strangers who come from remote and far distant places, as an Emperor ought to do; and the more, because those that do us good, must receive good again; and those that deserve Honour, must be well rewarded. I have certainly understood that you have purchased Honour, therefore I have sent Presents to you. I have heard, that you Balthasar have justly and valiantly gone with my Officers to War, by which I perceive you mean honestly with me and my People, as appears by your subduing the Pirates, and driving them away, like a Bird which hath made a Nest to Hatch in, and is now broken to pieces. The Honour which I always expected from the Hollanders, by Conquering the Islanders, and driving them away from thence, is performed; therefore I am Obliged to Gratify you with some Gifts, and send this my Letter, desiring you to accept my Presents, and Honour my Letter.  
Conghy.  
The Presents that came with his Majesty's Letter, consisted in a thousand Tail of Chinese Silver, and sixty Pieces of several Silks and Cloth of Tissue.  
On Friday, the twenty third, Hogenhoek went in the Morning with all his Attendance to the Viceroy and General, and likewise to the Emperor's Commissioners, to acquaint them, that he was dissatisfied for that the Emperor's Letter made no mention of their Traffic, or about their staying there, much less, to go with their Fleet and Forces to Tayowan, as their Highnesses had long since promised him, as also the Admiral Bort, and Captain Noble; viz. that there were Sealed Letters expected from his Majesty about it; and likewise, that the Admiral and they had not without reason complained of their inconstancy, appeared now plainly, because not one of their Verbal Promises and Assurances were found to be true, which would be very ill resented by the Lord General, that they had been detained two years, and now received nothing but words: To which the Viceroy answered with a Grim Countenance, that ' 'tis true, his Majesty had permitted the Hollanders to Trade, but an Ambassador must every other year be sent to him; and as to the business of Tayowan, they would be ready to go with them thither to subdue it; if therefore an Ambassador should come, they would immediately dispatch him with Letters of Recommendation to Peking; Whereupon he durst assure them, that they would obtain the everlasting Trade, and leave to go and come when they pleased, and also have an Island or piece of Land allotted them, on which they might reside without Molestation.  
The like Answers Hogenhoek received from the Governor; but the General Lipovi seemed to be highly displeased, saying, That so great honour of receiving Presents, and a Sealed Letter from the Emperor, in which he attributed the Honour of Conquering the Enemy to them, was never yet known; so that they ought to have been satisfied with that only. Hogenhoek replied, That they thanked his Majesty for his Favour: But wherever the Hollanders were permitted to Trade, they received Sealed Letters from the Princes, which served as a safeguard for their Governors: Nay further, (said he) the Hollanders Trade thorough the whole World, without being limited a time; but when ere they came, they were Welcome, and Trafficked as they thought fit: Whereupon the General angrily replied, Each Country had its fashion, and so accordingly had his; if they did not like the proffer of coming every two years once, they might stay away; and if they did not come in the time limited, they should go away again without effecting any thing. Hogenhoek answered, That this Discourse seemed very strange, when as he himself had promised, that he would procure him Sealed Letters from his Majesty for it, and indeed in Honour he could do no less, their Requests being so reasonable, viz. That after the Conquering of the Islands, they might for their great Charge and trouble, only enjoy the benefit of Trade.  
The Viceroy having been silent some time, diverted the Discourse, ask Hogenhoek if Noble would return, with Addresses and Presents to his Majesty at Peking? Whereto he replied, That he could not assure it, in regard it was in the Lord General's choice, whom he would choose to Negotiate such an Affair.  
Then the General told him, as he had often done before, That he had writ to the Emperor, and at Nobles return, they would grant the Company all what they would ask; for the Emperor affected the Hollanders very much, as appeared by his Letters and Presents, which in his time had never been done to any Stranger; and the Agents must also be better gratified than Noble had done, and that without fail, the next day, because they were just upon their return to the Court.  
Hereupon Hogenhoek asked the Viceroy, that he would be pleased to tell him, how much more he should give than Noble had done? Who said, That it was at his pleasure: Then Hogenhoek taking his leave, went thence to the Agents, who courteously received him, and Discoursed with them concerning the constant Trade, saying, He hoped that they would have brought Sealed Letters from his Majesty about it. To which they replied, That they had delivered Sealed Letters about it to their Excellencies, Singlamong, Lipovi, and the Conbon or Governor of Hoksieu; to this effect, that if an Ambassador came to thank his Majesty, he should immediately travel up into the Country, and the Trade take a beginning to come every other year.  
The Agents also were of opinion, That if an Embassy was sent to the Court at Peking, that the Hollanders, if they requested any thing else, it would be granted them, in regard his Majesty bore a great affection towards them, (because they had so faithfully assisted in the War) and gave them the sole Honour of the Conquest of Eymuy and Quemuy. They also promised Hogenhoek, that when they came to the Court, they would seek to obtain a Grant from his Majesty for the constant Trade, for which he thanking them, returned to his Lodging, where he debated the General's Proposal of augmenting the Presents to be made to the Emperor's Commissioners, and at last resolved to give the prime Agent twenty two Dutch els of Scarlet, half a Chain of Blood Coral weighing six Ounces, two Pieces of Coloured Perpetuana's, six Pieces of Linen, with four rich Swords.  
The second Agent they gave seventeen els of Scarlet, half a Chain of the like Coral, weighing four Ounces, two Pieces of Coloured Perpetuana's, four Pieces of Linen, and two Swords; and likewise in their Presence, their Mandarins and other Attendants were also presented every one according to their Quality.  
On Saturday Morning, being the twenty fourth, Hogenhoek with his Servants went to the Agents to deliver the Presents, who seemed to refuse them, yet after having looked them over, and denied them several times, they at last over▪ persuaded by Hogenhoek, received them.  
At parting, Hogenhoek desired once more, that they would be pleased to seek the Hollanders advantage, before the Emperor and Council of State, in the gaining of the constant Trade, and render such an account of them, as they had found and seen during their stay; all which they faithfully promised.  
Besides, the Hollanders had some discourse about Trading into several parts of India, and what Goods were brought thither, and carried from thence by the Netherlanders, which they again Transported to other places.  
The Agents seemed to be much delighted in this Discourse, saying, If an Ambassador be sent to the Emperor, and the Enemy be driven from Tayowan, they need not fear but all things would be granted them. Here the Discourse ended, and Hogenhoek returning Thanks, took his leave and departed.  
On Monday, being the twenty sixth, the Governor or Conbon sent the Hollanders a Present, being good Table-provision; for which Hogenhoek returned him thanks by Factor Pedell.  
On Thursday the twenty ninth, the Chineses kept the Feast in Hoksieu, by them 
Feast Peelou kept by the Chinese.  called Peelou; and likewise on the same day through all China, viz. with long Boats with Oars, new Painted and tricked with Silk Flags and Pennons of several colours, with which they Challenge and Row great Matches.  
According to the Chineses relation to Hogenhoek, the Instituter of this great Festival Peelou, was formerly Governor of the Paracelles, a Country that is very fruitful, and abounds with Gold and Silver, who foretold, That that Island should be swallowed up: wherefore he and some of his Friends, and others that believed him, several days before fled from thence in their Jonks to the Main of China; where they honour him as a God of the Sea: for as they report, soon after his departure the Island sunk; in Commemoration of which they keep this annual Holiday.  
The Hollanders to observe the Custom of this Feast, as also to recreate themselves, hired a Boat to go among the rest.  
No sooner was Hogenhoek returned home, but the General Lipovi sent his Mandarin to give him notice, that the Emperor's Agents intended the next Morning to go for Peking, and that he and his Men should conduct them out of the City, and therefore to send him word what Horses he wanted, and they should be accordingly furnished.  
On Friday, being the thirtieth, about daybreak, another Mandarin, sent from Lipovi, came to Hogenhoek, to desire him that he would be at the Agents House betimes: Whereupon he and his Men went immediately thither, some on Horses, others in Pallakins; where coming they found them busy Packing up their Goods, and linking and coupling of Slaves and Slavesses, to the number of six or seven hundred, taken from the Islands Eymuy and Quemuy, and given to them by the Governors of Zing and Sanzieuw, and other Officers; wherefore the Hollanders desired to go out before, that they might not hinder the Agents; which accordingly they did: and after having stayed a considerable time at the Vice-Roys open House, the Agents came to them on Horseback▪ excusing themselves that they had made them stay so long: which they answering again with a Compliment, told them, That they had not accounted the time long, but took it for an honour to wait upon them.  
Here the Emperor's Envoys thanked Hogenhoek for the Presents, saying, That they had received them very kindly, but knew not whether his Majesty would let them keep such great Gifts without ordering to return them again. They also promised, as they had done several times before, to speak in the behalf of the Netherlanders before his Majesty and Council, and give them an account of all they had seen and heard; and also would do their utmost endeavour, and assist the Ambassador when he should come to Peking: for which Hogenhoek returning them humble thanks, Drank to them his Majesty's Health in a great Glass of Sack that he had ready for that purpose, which went merrily round. The Envoy much admiring the excellent relish of the Liquor, asked if it grew in their native Country? saying, That it must need be a brave Place, which not only produces such excellent Wine, but divers sorts of rare Commodities, desiring him to give each of their chiefest Servants also a Glass, that when they came to Peking, they might say they had drank some Dutch Liquor. This done, and the Hollanders having taken their Leave, they returned, and came towards Evening to their Quarters.  
The last, being Saturday, Hogenhoek was informed, that the General Lipovi 
Lipovi will resign his Governorship.  had shut up his great Gates, because he would not grant any more Audience; and also that he would not trouble himself any longer about business concerning his Office, being resolved to go to Peking, where his most pre-eminent Wife (Aunt to the present Emperor) resided, she having writ to him several times to come up to her.  
The Council of State (as on the twenty fourth of April is related) endeavoured preferring the General, to make him chief Governor of three Territories, which he modesty refused, being rather willing to give over all Offices of State, because (as he told Hogenhoek) his Age required case, and that to Govern was a Work too great for him; and to that purpose expected his Writ of Ease, for which he had sent five or six Posts to his Majesty and the Council, whose Answer he expected daily.  
On Tuesday, being the thirtieth of june, Hogenhoek sent Factor Pedell to the 
Hogenhoeks Request for the Emperor's Allowance.  Conbon, or Governor, telling him, That he had not received any allowance of Money for his Table from the Mandarins in two Months, and therefore desired that he would please to provide it for him. The Governor, to whom this seemed very strange, said, That his Majesty had not yet forbid, but that it should be continued. But however, on Thursday Morning early, he with all his Company went to the Viceroy and General themselves, complaining that they had not received their Table Pension these two Months: whereat they were much dissatisfied, and immediately sent Order to the two Mandarins, not to fail to pay the Arrears next day, and so at every Month's end punctually, at their peril, and thenceforward.  
On Friday, being the sixth, the Grand Mandarin Tziekautzia, came from Sinchieu 
june.  by Land to Hoksieu, with a Guard of between four and five hundred Soldiers, and the remainder of them were to come within a day or two after, with his Jonks. It was also reported, that he should go to jemping, a Town about nine days Journey from Hoksieu) to be Governor of it, though the Townsmen opposed it.  
On Wednesday, being the eleventh, Tziekautzia's Jonks arrived at Fort Minjazen, and were expected in three or four days to come up to the Bridge.  
On Friday the twentieth, Hogenhoek went to the Viceroy and General Lipovi, with Request in their General Maetzuikers' Name, for the delivery of some Holland Prisoners, that were brought thither with Tziekautzia's Jonks: whereupon they promised to inquire if it were so or not, and would give Order that they should be sent to the General Lipovi, he having the Command of the submitted Chineses.  
The Netherlanders heard this day the news of the death of Tonganpek, Zavja's Brother, and one of the Admirals, as also of the great Court Messenger.  
On Tuesday the twenty fourth, Zanzia, chief Secretary to Lipovi, came in his Master's Name to acquaint Hogenhoek, that he had sent to Tziekautzia concerning the Prisoners; who answered, That they which came to him from the Castle Zelandia in Formosa, had told him, that they would rather choose to be chopped in Pieces, than return again to their Countrymen; and that the Negro Boys refused in like manner. To which Hogenhoek made answer, That it seemed very strange to him, since every day one or other spoke to him to procure their Liberty. I hear, that since I moved the General concerning their Freedom, they have been in Fetters, and harder restraint than before. In brief, I am confident he has falsely informed the General, of which I desire you will please to acquaint him.  
The twenty fifth and twenty sixth Hogenhoek sent a Letter to the General Lipovi, but it was not received in regard of his Infirmity: but on Friday the twenty eighth it was delivered, and Answer sent, That he had read the Letter, and finding mentioned therein, That unless the Prisoners were delivered, some trouble would arise thereupon, which he understood to be Threats; therefore Hogenhoek must know that he was Lipovi, and that it lay in his power to do the Hollanders good or hurt, and desired to hear no more such calumnious words, or else to forbear the Court.  
The Sunday following the Master of the Lodgings where the Agents lay, desired him to take Tziekautzia's Goods and sell them for him, promising to give him a good Reward for so doing: The Cargo consisted in twenty four Pieces of coloured clothes, ten Picols of Amber, three hundred of Tin and Lead, thirty Birds-nests, fifty of Pepper, three hundred of japan Wood, twenty of Quicksilver, twenty five of Cloves, and one hundred Picols of Sandal Wood, besides other Commodities. But Hogenhoek refused it, alleging they had not yet put off their own Goods; wherefore he durst not undertake another Man's Business.  
The same day Lepora the Viceroy Singlamong's Secretary lying near, came to Visit the Agent, as his custom was, and discoursing with him concerning the Prisoners, and Lipovi's rough Answer, proffered his Service to acquaint the Viceroy with the Business, well knowing that he had sent two or three days before to Lipovi to let Hogenhoek have them; to which he assented. After this, through the interposition of the Viceroy, Lipovi and Hogenhoek came to a better understanding, and the distasteful Letters, and harsh Repertees, were meliorated into a Reconciliation.  
The next day General Lipovi sent his chief Secretary to Hogenhoek's House, 
Secretary Zangia come●… to Hogenhoek.  with Orders to tell him, That there had been five Holland Ships seen about the Islands Heyton, by his Jonks which had brought Rice to Sinksieu, which caused great joy amongst the Netherlanders.  
The first of july the Viceroy Singlamong sent his Physician to the Dutch 
july.  Agent, who for three Months had been troubled with the Gripes, and also desired him to send him two Chains of Blood-Coral, which accordingly he did.  
The sixth the Governor or Conbon, went to the Castle Tiolo, lying about three Leagues from Hoksieu, to Besiege Ovatunge, an old Soldier, that held out against the Tartars from the time of Iquon, Coxingas Father, being now of the age of seventy years, and having under his Command three thousand Men.  
On Tuesday the eighth, Tziekautsia went to jemping, to take the Government upon him, having four or five hundred Soldiers and eighty Jonks, with which upon the return of the Dutch Fleet they were to go to Tayowan, as the Viceroy and General had informed Hogenhoek.  
From the tenth to the eighteenth nothing happened of any remark: when the Merchants which came from Nanking out of the Territory Chekiang, carried all their Silks to Sinksieu, not coming to Hoksieu, which was to the great prejudice of the Hollanders, as well in the Goods which they Imported, as those which they intended to Export.  
Haytankon, Governor of Sinksieu, and also others, might not publicly send any Jonks to japan, the Manillas and Tayowan, but used this Invention, which Hogenhoek makes mention of in his Annotations, viz. those Jonks which they intended to send away, they load in public at the Keys, and when ready to Launch them, news comes in another, that some of the Enemy's Jonks are on the Coast: whereupon the Merchant immediately unladeth, and the Cargo is carried ashore, and their Jonk with others sent to Fight the hover Enemy, while privately in the Night they load again with prohibited Goods, which get away by daybreak; but this could not be done, but by the connivance of the Searchers, knowing the Grandees are concerned in the Freight.  
From the seventeenth, being Thursday, till the twenty sixth, nothing happened but a prodigious Storm, mixed with impetuous Showers of Rain, continually deluging for nine days, by which many Houses were torn down and washed away, and twenty People drowned in Hoksieu. It raged also in the neighbouring Parts; for in the Streets of Lamthay the Water was Knee-deep: and in Sinksieu the Water swelled so high, that they lost above four thousand People, which were overwhelmed and carried away with the Torrent, and in some Places sweeping away whole Villages: In the Fort at Sinksieu the Land-flood did rise fourteen or fifteen Foot high. Amongst others the Viceroy lost four hundred Picols of white Raw Silk, which he thought to sell to Tonganpek, which made Silk to rise two hundred Tail; and as it was reported, there was above two thousand Picols more carried away and spoiled.  
On Tuesday, being the twenty ninth, Hogenhoek gave the General a Visit; 
Hogenhoek visits Lipovi.  who, though much indisposed, rejoiced to see him, ask him why their Fleet stayed away so long? to which Hogenhoek made answer, That they had a Month good to the time of their arrival the last year: at which the General wondering said, You came in the sixth Moon: but he replied, It was because there were two sixth Moons that year; but if the General pleased to reckon the days, he would find a great difference. The General seemed to doubt whether any Ships would come thither that year, because they stayed away so long, and asked if Hogenhoek would assure him of their coming? whereupon he replied, It was without doubt, and therefore desired the General to have patience; that their Ships wanted a great deal of Repair, which required some Months before they could be fitted to go to Sea. We, said the General, are all ready so soon as we receive tidings, that the Admiral is arrived at the Piscadores, or before Tayowan, to send the great Mandarin, Tziekautsia Governor of Sinksieu, and Zietetok, and two other great Lords, to welcome and consult with him.  
On Wednesday the thirteenth of August, Hogenhoek received news, That the 
August.  General Lipovi had received his Writ of Ease from the Emperor, with Licence to come to Peking, and also that he was made a Councillor of State, for which Place he had given eight Tun of Gold, and many rich Presents: Nay, it was certain, that the Viceroy Singlamong at the same time gave twelve Tun of Gold, that his Son might succeed him in his Place.  
On Saturday, being the sixteenth, Hogenhoek had news, That one of Haytankon's Jonks, the Governor of Sinksieu, in its return from the Manillas was taken by Anpikja's Jonks, having a hundred and fifty thousand Spanish Rials in her, and that Haytankon had on the contrary taken nine Jonks loaden with Rice, to carry to Zanchieu, in which Place Rice was very scarce. None was able to apprehend these kind of dealings, in the taking one another's Jonks; yet nevertheless Traded with one another, the one is Silks and Cotton Clothes, and the other in Rice.  
Till the two and twentieth nothing happened of remark.  
The three and twentieth towards Evening, the Viceroy's Factor came to 
Hogenhoek invited by the Viceroy to Dinner.  invite Hogenhoek in his Lords Name to Dine with him the next day, which he promised to do.  
The twenty fourth, being Sunday, Hogenhoek went with all his Attendants to the Court; where coming they were immediately called into the Hall of Audience, filled with Mandarins and Lords, the Viceroy himself sitting very stately on a Stool, with a Chain about his Neck, and an Ave Mary fixed to it, bad Hogenhoek kindly welcome. Having sat a little while, he related, That 
His Discourse with him,  about three Months since he had sent a Letter to the Council of State in behalf of the Hollanders, to be delivered to his Majesty, but would not tell him of it before, because he knew not whether his Majesty or the Council would grant his Request, as he was now informed; therefore he had invited him to be merry: for which Hogenhoek humbly thanked the Viceroy. Yesterday (said the Viceroy) there came some Agents with two Mandarins from his Majesty to Hoksieu, only to inquire if there were one or two Ongs, that is Kings, in Batavia: And they understood there were two from the Letters that came from Canton; for that of Canton was in the Name of the Governor, General Maetzuiker of Batavia; and that of Hoksieu written to their Highnesses, was in the Names of Captain Moor and john Maetzuiker. He added also, that he had a Letter from the Lepous, or Council of State at Peking; in which was mentioned, That his Majesty had granted his Request, which much rejoiced the Viceroy, who promised to send them the Copy of it: for which Hogenhoek returned him humble thanks, answering, That the Lord General would think himself much obliged to hear of his great Favours. As to what concerned the Names and Titles, Hogenhoek said they were all one, and that they had but one Governor-General, which was the Lord john Maetzuiker, but by the Indians was Entitled Captain Moor, that is, Chief, or Governor over all others in India; so that both Titles were butone. Hereupon the Viceroy asked how many Councillors and petty Governors he had under him? to which Hogenhoek answered, Seventeen or eighteen: at which the Viceroy seemed to be much amazed, saying, He never thought that the Ong of Batavia had had so many Rice-Roys under him, saying, Can it be possible? Hogenhoek smiling said, He hoped that his Highness should find that it was true, and thereupon named most of them: after which the Viceroy looking steadfastly on all his Councillors and Mandarins, who bowed their Heads, showing him reverence. Then his Highness giving a Nod, all the Tables were brought in, furnished with Silver Chargers and golden Goblets, which filled with variety of Meats, made up a most noble Entertainment. The Viceroy was at this time more than ordinarily merry, beginning several Healths one after another.  
Whilst they were at Dinner, to recreate their Eyes and Ears, as well as satisfy their Appetites, exquisite Music was presented, with Masking, Dancing, and other Princely Recreations.  
After having drank very plentifully, Hogenhoek desired to take his Leave: whereupon the Viceroy commanded three great Bowls, Cut and Turned of a Rhinocerots Horn, to be fetched, one for himself, one for Hogenhoek, and a third for Factor Pedell, which they were to drink out three times one after another, before he would permit them to go, which accordingly they did.  
Lastly, standing up to return Thanks and take their Leave, his Highness said, That the Discourse which he had had with Hogenhoek he must within three or four days advise the Emperor of, because his Majesty and Council expected it. And here again he warned him to take heed that all were truth, for upon the least prevarication his Majesty and Council would be very much dissatisfied: Upon which Hogenhoek assured the Viceroy, that all was true which he had related. Whereupon he departed, and coming home in the afternoon, he heard that the General Lipovi had on the Morrow invited him to be his Guest, and also to tell him that the Letters were come from Court.  
On Monday the twentieth, Hogenhoek went with all his Train to the General Lipovi's House, where he was Entertained with the like Discourse as he had with the Viceroy. Mean while, the Copy of the Letter which the Viceroy spoke of on the twenty fourth was sent to the Agent, which being translated was to this effect:  
To His Highness Singlamong.  
YOur Letter We Lepous of the Council have received on the twenty fourth of the sixth Moon, and in the third Year of Our Emperor's Reign; which We delivered and read to Him. We have seen Your Letter and Request, and understood that the Holland Admiral is gone with his Ships, and hath left a Houbou, or Precedent, and a Tonpin, or Deputy in Fokien. Your Highness writes also that You have delivered the Presents for the Dutch Admiral to their Agents, he being gone before. You writ also, that the Admiral behaved himself bravely, having taken the Isles of Eymuy and Quemuy, for which good Service His Majesty hath Presented him: but he being subordinate to their King Maetzuiker, who Commission'd him to our Assistance, therefore he also must be Presented. This Your Highness' Request We have acquainted the Emperor with. We have all considered and made our Opinions known to His Majesty, and approved of Your Higness' Proposal; therefore We will Present the Ong of Batavia with two thousand Tail of Silver, and with a hundred Pieces of Stuffs wrought with Gold and Silk. We have already given order to Our Officers to make them up, and prepare them for Transportation, and one of Our Lepous, with the Emperor's Secretary, to go with them to Fokien, where they shall give the Silver and Stuffs to them, if they be there, but if not, then to leave them with Your Highness till their Return. We Lepous write this to Your Highness, that You may know how to govern Yourself accordingly.  
Dated the fourth Year of Our Emperor's Reign.  
On Tuesday the twenty sixth Lipovi's Secretary, with some Commissioners and Mandarins came to Visit Hogenhoek; where after a Dish of Tee, the Commissioners said, They were come thither purposely to hear the Lord General of Batavia's Name, and how he was styled, because there was some difference in the Name and Titles of the Letters, which were sent from thence to Canton. 'Tis true (said he) their Highness' Singlamong and Lipovi had already satisfied me, but I must hear it from your own Mouth, that I may the better render an account of it to his Imperial Majesty; being therefore sent hither, and that his great Master desired to know his true Title, that he might address himself the better with Presents. Hereupon the Agent drew a Letter out of his Pocket directed to him, which contained the Lord General's Title and Names, as Hogenhoek had given them to Singlamong and Lipovi, which was in these words: Captain Moor of India, john Maetzuiker, residing in Batavia: but according to their manner of writing, they had writ Captain Moor of India, Maetzuiker john, writing his Surname first, and his Christen-name afterwards. Then one of the Commissioners from Peking said, That Holland must needs be a fertile Country, from whence so many good things come; ask also some ordinary Questions, as it is usual there; which the Hollanders only answered with a Smile: whereupon the Agents and Mandarins taking their Leave went home.  
On Wednesday, being the twenty seventh, Coxingas Mother came with his Brother Sibya to Hoksieu (who had submitted herself to the Tartars that Year before the Dutch Fleet came thither) to desire their Excellencies to furnish them with Guides to go to Peking, the Emperor having sent for them to come and live there for the prevention of further trouble and inconveniences.  
The twenty eighth General Lipovi sent a Mandarin to Hogenhoek, to tell him it would be necessary for him to conduct the Emperor's Commissioners out of the City, because they had taken so great a Journey for his Business, and also to Present them with something that was handsome. Whereupon Hogenhoek asked him if his Lord had not told him what he was best to Present: to which he said, With fifty or sixty Tail of Silver, and when he delivered them, to tell them, That all his Goods were sold, and that they would except of that Sum to buy Tobacco with on the Way. Hereupon Hogenhoek making himself ready, went to take Leave of the Agents and their Retinue, taking with him sixty Tail of Silver, viz. twenty five for the first Agent, fifteen for the second, seven for the Heralds, and five for some of the Attendants: Coming to them, he presented the Money as he had put it up handsome in Papers in several Parcels; which they received very thankfully, with promises, That when they came to Peking they would not fail to Serve the Hollanders in what they could possible: whereupon Hogenhoek returned to his Lodgings.  
SInce the Province of Fokien, and the Towns and Cities belonging to it, have often been made mention of, and hereafter will be more, our Business seems here to require a brief Description thereof. 
Borders▪   
This Province, one of the fifteen which make up China, Paulus Venetus sets forth by the Name of Fugui, taken from the Metropolis Focheu: It borders the Sea from East to South; in the South-west, on Quantung; West and Nor-West conterminates Kiangsi; the remaining part from the Northwest to the North-east verges upon the Country of Chekiang.  
This Province is the smallest in the Empire of China: the Southermost part of it lies in twenty four Degrees and forty five Minutes, extending to twenty eight Degrees and thirty Minutes Northern Latitude; a Tract of sixty one Germane, or two hundred forty four English Miles.  
The Kingdom of Min, or rather several Dominions, over which the Free Lords called Min, Commanded, were anciently accounted into this Territory. They divide it into eight Shires or Counties, as we may call them, whereof Focheusu the chief, Cineucheufu, Changcheufu, Kienningfu, jenpingfu, Tingcheufu, Hinghoafu, Xaounfu, besides the small Colony of Foning: every one hath several Towns and Cities, to the number of fifty six, belonging to them, besides two fortified Cities, and many Castles and Strong-holds at the Seaside. 
Borders.   
The first County Focheufu, borders Easterly at the Sea; on the North, at Foningfu and Kienningfu; on the West, upon jenpingfu; and the South looks upon Hinghoafu.  
The Chinese Records tell us, that this Country was first planted by a Family called Cheu, and by them named Min; notwithstanding it did not then belong to the Emperor of China, but to certain Free Lords which they called the Min. The first that joined it to the Empire of China was the chief of the Family Cheu; yet the Inhabitants soon shook off that Yoke, and kept themselves free, till the fortunate and valiant Emperor Hiaou, of the Family of Han, reduced and added it to China, with all the Southern Territories, settling them in Peace, and placed a Viceroy over it, called Veuching, who kept his Court in the Metropolis thereof. Cyn, the first King thereof, called the chief City, and the Tract of Land thereto belonging, Cyngan; the next King Sui named the Country, Mencheu; but the Tangs, of another Line, Kiencheu, and not long after Focheu; which Name the Taimingian Race kept ever since.  
This Country Focheufu contains eight Cities, Focheu the Metropolis, and 
Cities.  chief of all the Country, otherwise called Hoksieu, or Hokzieuw, Cutien, Mincing, Changlo, Lienkiang, Loquen, jangfo, Focing.  
The City Focheu, by Paulus Venetus called Fugui, lieth about fifteen Leagues Westerly from the Sea, on the Southern Shore of the River Min, which with a wide Mouth falls Easterly into the Sea, and brings both great and small Vessels up to the City Walls. The convenience of this River makes the Town very populous and of great Trade: It is adorned with fair Buildings, and hath large Suburbs, called Nantai, otherwise, according to the pronunciation of the Inhabitants, Lamthay; for those in Fokien use in stead of N the Letter L. and often say Lamking in stead of Nanking: There are also many Idol Temples.  
Cross the Bay near Nantai, lies a Stone Bridge, a hundred and fifty Rods long, and one and a half broad, built all of white Freestone, resting on a hundred very high Arches; on the top of each side are Rails and Benches; adorned at an equal distance, with Lions neatly cut of Stone.  
Next this Bridge, at the South end, stands a fair and large Pagode, or Temple.  
Another Bridge not unlike this, being a hundred Rods long, may be seen at the City Focing. And many more are without and within the Walls of the chiefest Cities.  
Three Leagues from Focheu stands a Temple called Kouzan, the largest of all in the Nether Provinces.  
The second Division, Civencheufu, borders from the East to the Southeast, 
Borders.  and so to the South upon the Sea; and from the South-west to the West, touches Chancheufu; and on the North verges with jenpingfu.  
This Country formerly belonged to the Princes Min: and hath seven Cities, 
Cities.  Civencheu the chief, Nangan, Hocigan, Tehoa, Ganki, Tunygan, and jungehung.  
The City Civencheu lies near the Sea in a delightful Plain, and admits by a large Bay the greatest Ships to Ride close under the Walls, not only on one but both sides of the City, for it is built on a Promontory encompassed with Water, except on the North and Southeast sides.  
On the opposite Shore are many populous and Trading Towns, and chiefly on a Place towards the Northwest called Loyang, which may rather be looked upon as great Cities. There also is a Bridge which hath the same denomination with the Town, the whole World not showing the like; for it consists of a black Stone like Touchstone, not supported with Arches, but above three hundred square Columns, sharp above Bridge and below, the better to break the impetuous egress and regress of the Current. These Pillars are Capped, to walk upon, with five Stones of an exact breadth, each eighteen Paces long, and two broad, which successively touch one another at either Foot of the Bridge; of which there are to the number of a hundred and forty: it is certainly a Miracle of Workmanship, not only for its great number of Stones of such a bigness, that rest on those Columns, but most of all, where so many large and equal Stones could be had: on each side, to make the Passage the safer, are Rails of the same Stones, adorned with Lions, standing on Pedestals, and other Imagery.  
It is worth our observation what is written of one part of this Bridge, that is between a Village called Loyan, and a Castle built on the Bridge; for beyond the Village reaches another part, not much less than the former, and of one make: A Chinese Writer saith thus concerning it:  
This part of the Bridge Loyang, and also called Vangan, lying on the Northwest side of the City, cross the River Loyang, was built by a Governor, called Cayang: it extends in length to about three hundred and sixty Rods, and in breadth one and a half. Before this Bridge was built they crossed the River in Boats; but because every year many Vessels were by Storm cast away, Cayang resolved, for the safety of Passengers, to build a Bridge; but seeing such a great piece of Work to be too much for Mankind to undertake, and also the Water too deep to lay a Foundation in it, he invoked the Gods of the Sea (as he says) for some time to stop the Current of the Water; which (if you will believe) he obtained. After the Essluxes were stayed, and no Tides swelling the River in one and twenty days, the Foundation was laid, and forty hundred thousand Tail spent in the building of it.  
The third Province called Chancheufu, being the most Southern of all this 
Borders.  Territory, borders in the North-East and East with Civenchufu; on the East Southeast and South, with the Sea; on the South-West touches the Country of Quantung; on the West and North-West, and North, at Tingcheufu.  
It contains ten Cities, of which Chancheu is the chiefest; the rest are Changpu, 
Towns.  Lugnien, Nancing, Changtai, Changping, Pingho, Chaogang, Huicing, and Ningyang.  
The Name of Chancheu was first given to this Metropolis and Country by 
Names.  the Family of the Tangle, from the River Change, on whose Western Shore situate, and was then allowed the privilege of a small City; but the juem made her afterwards a Metropolis; and at the same time built the small City Nancing: from whence Father Martin concludes, that then all these Places were much frequented by Navigators, and that Paulus Venetus his Zerte must needs be thereabouts.  
On the Southside, where the River also washes the City, is a large Bridge of Hew'n-stone, with thirty six high Arches, and so broad, that on each side are divers Tradesmen and Artificers Shops, in which they sell every day all manner of rich and foreign Commodities, which are brought thither from Hiamuen.  
The fourth called Kienningfu, a very wide and spacious piece of Land, borders 
Borders.  on the North and North-East, upon Chekiang; on the East, with Foningfu; on the South, at Focheufu and jenpingfu; on the West, at Xaonufu; on the North; West and North, upon Kiangsi.  
This Division belonged anciently to the Princes Min; after which the Family 
Names.  Tangle gave it the Name of Kiencheu; and Sung, another Race, that which it hath at present.  
Here are seven Towns, whereof Kienning is the chiefest; the rest are Cungan, 
Towns.  Puchiang, Chingo, Sunghi, and Xeuning.  
The City Kienning lying on the Eastern Shore of the River Min, is no way inferior, either in beauty or worth, or bigness, to the Metropolis. Father Martin affirms this City to be Venetus his Quelingfu.  
In this last Tartarick War this City suffered much damage; for having revolted from the Tartars, it was taken after a long Siege, and laid in Ashes, and all the Inhabitants put to the Sword. The Fire consumed here a Bridge over the swift River Min, the Pillars whereof were of an exceeding height of Freestone, the other parts of Wood, beautified on the top with Houses and Shops on each side: but since by re-building it hath regained somewhat of former lustre. Beyond the Bridge, on the opposite Shore, stands a stately Pagode.  
Most of the new Buildings fall short of their old beauty, notwithstanding the Chinese Towns that are consumed by Fire, are much more easily rebuilt than those in Europe, because most of them are nothing but Wood  
Near the City Kienning is another fair Bridge, with Shops and Houses on both sides.  
This City Kienning is a Place of great Trade; for all those Commodities that come either up or down the River must pass through it. When they come to the City Pucing, they are taken out of the Vessels, and by Porters carried to a Village called Pinghu, belonging to the City Kiangxan, over high Mountains and deep Valleys four days Journey: In like manner they are carried from Pinghu to Puching. The whole Way, as much as is possible to be done by the Art or Labour of Man, is made even, and Paved with square Stones, along whose sides are built many Houses and Villages, only to entertain Travellers. The Merchandises being first weighed, are delivered to the Master of the Inn, which send them for a certain Gratuity by Porters to other Places, where the Merchant without any trouble receives them: If any thing chance to be lost, the Host is bound to make it good. Here are always above ten thousand Porters ready, which wait to receive the Goods, and carry them over the Mountains. Because of this Carriage of so many Goods, a House stands erected for the receiving a small Custom, or Duty, towards the maintaining and reparation of the Highways.  
The fifth Tract of Land, called jenpingfu, makes the Centre of this Territory, and borders in the East, at the chief County Focheufu; in the South and South-West, at Civencheufu and Kancheufu; on the West and North at Tingcheufu, Xaounfu, and Kienningfu.  
King Cyn was the first that called the chief City, and the Country thereto belonging, jenping; the Family Tangle named it Kiencheu; that of Sung, Nankien; but Taiming restored its ancient Name jenping.  
This jenpingfu contains seven Towns and Cities, of which jenping is the chiefest, next Cianglo, Xa, Yonki, Xunchan, jungan, and Tatien.  
The City jenping lieth on the Western Shore of the River Min, from whence it rises with its Buildings up the Hills, rendering a delightful Prospect to those that pass by, and though none of the biggest, yet it is beautified with several fair Houses: The Walls exceed in height the neighbouring Ascents, which on the outsides are inaccessible, making the City very strong, and indeed the Key to the whole Territory.  
On the East-side is a Lake made by the Rivers Min and Si. Almost every House is furnished with Water, conveyed to them through Pipes from the Mountains, which Convenience no other Place in China hath.  
Not far distant lay over the Rivers Min and Si two fair Bridges, near which are two Temples.  
The Town of Xa lieth on the Northern Shore of the River Taisu, (though formerly on the Southern Shore) but was by the Emperor's Order pulled down to the Ground, and left desolate, because in it a young Man had Murdered his Father.  
The sixth Division being Tingcheufu, is the most Western of this Territory: 
Borders.  borders Easterly on jenpingfu; on the Southeast, at Quantung; on the West, at that of Kiangsi; and on the North, Xaounfu.  
This Country belonged also heretofore to the Princes Min: King Cyn gave it 
Names.  the Name of Sinlo; and the Tang Family that which it bears at present: in which Tincheufu was only a small Town, but the Taimingian Family made it a chief City.  
This Country contains eight Towns and Cities, viz. Tingcheu the chief▪ 
Towns.  Winghon, Xanghang, Vuping, Cinglieu, Lienching, Queihon, and jungting.  
The seventh County, called Hinghaofu, is a small, yet fruitful Country, and 
Borders.  borders on the East and Southeast, with the Sea; on the South, at Civencheufu; on the West, at jenpingfu; on the North, at the Tract of Land belonging to the Metropolis Focheu.  
King Sui gave it first the Name of Putien; the Family Sung, that of Hinghoa, 
Names.  which signifies A Budding Flower; afterwards the same Family called it Hingan; but by the Taimingian the ancient Name of Hinghoa was restored.  
This Shire hath only two Cities, whereof Hinghoa is the chief; the other 
Towns.  called Sienlieu is but small: but the Country abounds with Villages and Hamlets. All the Ways, being sixty Stadia's long, and a Rod in breadth, are Paved with square Freestone.  
The City Hinghoa is very neatly built and adorned with many triumphal Arches, and full of Colleges for the training up of Youth in Literature, and encouragement of Learning.  
At the Foot of the Mount Hocung, South-Eastwards from Hinghoa, lies a Village, in splendour and bigness of Buildings like a great City, but hath neither Walls nor any Privileges belonging to it; yet many rich Merchants reside there, which Traffic through all China.  
On the Shore of the Lake Ching, lying at the Foot of the Mount Chiniven, Northward from Hinghoa, stands a great Palace, with ten Gardens belonging to it; in which, before either Rain or tempestuous Wether happens, as the Chineses say, is a ringing noise heard like the sound of a Bell.  
The eighth County, being Xaounfu, borders Easterly at Kienningfu; in the South, at jenpingfeu and Tingcheufeu; in the West, North-West and North, at the Territory Kiangsia.  
This Division reckons four Cities, the chief of which is Xaouw, the rest 
Borders.  Quangce, Taining, and Kienning.  
The City Xaouw, the most Northern of this Territory, was anciently a mean Place, under the Princes of Mins Jurisdiction, and was first fortified with Walls, and the Title of City given it by the Family called Tangle; yet hath ever preserved its Name of Xaouw. It lies Westerly of the River Cuckoe, and is cut through by the River Ciao, which pours its Streams into the Cuckoe, and from thence by several small Channels waters the City.  
Because this County is a firm and profitable Soil, and on the Borders of Country's, whose Passage is troublesome, it is fortified with several Castles Garrisoned with Soldiers.  
The small Tract of Land belonging to the City Foning, a Mountainous 
The smallest Tract of Land belonging to the City Foning.  Country, and the most Eastern of this Territory, borders in the East and Southeast, at the Sea; in the South and South-West, at Fochenfu; in the West, at Kiennunfu; in the North, at the Territory of Chekiang. It contains three Towns, Foning, Fogang, and Mingte.  
The Ways through the Mountains are very scraggy, and scarce passable, especially towards the North and Southeast.  
The City Foning itself is fair and large, lying near the Sea, to its great benefit and advantage, having to the pleasure of the Prospect an Idol-Temple.  
On the North-side of the City Xaouw a fair Bridge leads over the River Cuyun, sixty three Rods long, of the same fashion as those mentioned before. There are also two large Temples.  
This Province, or Kingdom of Fokien, hath many strong Holds, especially 
Fortresses.  on the Seashore, against any Invasion of Enemies; the chiefest, built formerly by the Chinese against the Incursions of the Tartar, are two, Ganbai and Hiamuen.  
The Castle Ganhai hath a convenient and safe Haven for Ships.  
On the East-side of the City is a fair Bridge, two hundred and fifty Paces in length, built of black Stone, and supported with divers Arches.  
The Garrison of Hiamuen lies on an Island North-West from Quemuy.  
Both these Forts, for the beautifulness of their Building, Populousness and Trade, exceed divers great Cities in China; for from thence all sorts of Commodities are Transported through all India, and foreign Goods brought thither.  
Some years since the famous Pirate Iquon, otherwise called Coxinga, (well known to the Hollanders, Portuguese, and Spaniards) possessed both these Places, and was also very powerful at Sea, having a Fleet of three thousand great Chinese Jonks.  
The other Forts for a defence of the Sea-Coast, are Pumien, Foning, Tinghai, Muthon, Xe, Huckeu, Vangun, Chungxe, Tungxan, Hivenchung, jungting.  
Anno 1662. the Tartars having Conquered the Empire of China, caused all the Towns and Strong-holds to be pulled down, to prevent the Invasions of the Enemy, and hinder them from having any Supplies from thence by their Party which might reside in them.  
Thus ends the Continuation of the second Embassy.   

A THIRD EMBASSY TO THE EMPEROR OF China and East-Tartary, Under the Conduct of the Lord PIETER VAN HOORN, CONTAINING Several Remarks in their Journey through the Provinces of Fokien, Chekiang, Xantung, and Nanking, to the Imperial Court at Peking.  
Sent from Batavia, Anno 1666. the third of june; whither he returned Anno 1668. in january, etc.  
WHat Troubles, Charges, and Endeavours the netherlands East-India Company, and their Magistrates in India, have some Years since used from time to time, on several Occasions, for the gaining of their so long wished for Chinese Trade, it would be needless here to describe, because we may plainly perceive it from other Discourses, especially by the former Embassies and Expeditions under the Conduct of Peter de Goyer and jacob de Keizer, sent out Anno 1655. and 1656. And likewise from those of Balthasar Bort, john van Campen, and Constantine Noble, in Anno 1662.  
Yet after long Referring, Debates, and serious Considerations, it was at last again concluded, on the twenty eighth of May, Anno 1666, by the Lord General and Council of India, to send a Magnificent Embassy, with rich Presents, to the Tartars Court, to the Great Emperor of China and East-Tartary, that if possible, they might at last attain to their so long desired Free Trade through the whole Realm of China.  
To this purpose was elected and chosen his Excellency the Lord Peter van Hoorn, Privy Counsellor and Chief Treasurer of India, as he was entitled in his Commission, given him the third of july in the same Year.  
Constantine Noble was also chosen as Chief Counsel in the Embassy, and Prime Head and Governor of the Trade in Hoksieu, or Focheu, the Metropolis of the Territory Fokien. He also was commanded, for several Reasons, to travel in the Degree beforementioned up to Peking, and upon the Ambassadors Decease, to succeed him in his Place, and Negotiate that Affair to the Companies best Advantage.  
Furthermore, the Embassy was by the Lord General and his Council ordered to consist in the following Persons.  

The Lord Peter van Hoorn.  
Constantine Noble Chief Counsellor in the Embassy, and Governor of the Trade.  
john Putman Factor, and Master of the Ceremonies.  
john vander Does Secretary.  
Gysbert Ruwenoort Steward.  
Six Gentlemen, viz. 

Banning,  
Berkman,  
Frents, and  
Ruysser,  
Van Alteren,  
Van Doorn.    
A Chirurgeon.  
Six Men for a Guard.  
Two Trumpeters, and  
One Cook.   
During their Journey up to Peking, it was ordered, That David Harthower, Cornelius Bartelsz, and Maurice, should provide all things below in Hoksieu.  
On the third of june beforementioned, the Commissions were read aboard the Vlaerding, by the following Lords,  

His Excellency the Lord General Maetzuiker.  
Charles Hertzing Chief controller. 

Usual Counsellors of India.  
Nicholas Verburgh,  
Laurence Pit,  
Matthew vander Brook,    


Counsellors Extraordinary.  
john Thysz,  
john van Dam,     
After a kind Farewell, the forementioned Persons returned ashore.  
For the more Honourable carrying on of this Embassy, a Fleet of five Sail, Laden with Presents and Merchandise, and Manned with Soldiers and Seamen, was fitted out from Batavia, consisting in these Ships, viz.  
The Vlaerding, Afen, Constance, Gilded Tiger, and The Blyswiik Frigate, Commanded by john vander Werf. john Naelhout. john Hendricks. Henry Bommer. Peter jansz.  
Several Chineses also Shipped themselves in the Fleet, to return to their Native Country, from whence they came some Years before, and had settled themselves in Batavia.  
The fourth, being Sunday, in the Morning the Fleet set Sail, and lying by the Lee about the Islands, they stayed for some ready Moneys, and other Necessaries, which about seven a clock were brought them by one Simon de Danser, Master of the Exchequer. Then the Fleet weighing Anchor again, ran Easterly, between the Isles Edam and Alkmaer, that they might have the advantage of the Eastern Mouson (but the Wind, on the contrary, in the Afternoon came about to the West) and then tacked to and again, having the Wind about seven a clock at Night to the South-West; then they steered their Course Northerly, and so proceeded in the same Course as we have fully mentioned in their former Journals from Batavia; and therefore we think not fit to trouble the Reader with needless Repetitions of the same things.  
The fifth of August about Noon they came to the Netherland-Haven, where a Tartar came aboard of the Ambassador in a small Vessel, who said that he was sent from the Governor of Minjazen, to inquire what People and Ships they were, and also from whence they came, and what Persons of Quality were in them? Whereupon being answered accordingly, the Tartar returned ashore, to give an Account thereof, having first informed them of the General Lipovi's Death.  
The sixth in the Morning, while they still road at an Anchor, waiting for the Fleet to carry them into the netherlands Haven, there also came a Tartar Vessel aboard, with the third Person of Minjazen, to ask in the Governor's Name, What Ships they were, and if an Ambassador was come with them to the Emperor? Whereupon the Ambassador answered him accordingly, and also told him, That they intended to send the Master of the Ceremonies, and Mr. Ruwenoort, with the Interpreter De Hase, to Hoksieu, with Letters to the Viceroy Singlamong, and the new General which was come from Peking in the deceased Lipovi's Place: To whom the Mandarin proffered his Service to carry them to Hoksieu, alleging, That he was sent from the Governor for that purpose.  
After having received Thanks from the Ambassador, he returned with the foremention'd Persons aboard of the Blyswiik, where the Letter was translated into the Chinese Tongue: The Contents were to this purpose.  
That this Letter was to advise their Excellencies from the Lord Ambassador, of the coming of five Ships, laden with several Merchandises, and Presents for his Majesty, and their Excellencies the Viceroy, General, and Conbon, or Governor, and likewise of his coming from Batavia in the beginning of the last Month, with the Merchant Constantine Noble, and their safe Arrival in the beginning of the New Moon before the River of Hoksieu.  
Their Highnesses also were desired to permit the Merchant Constantine Noble with the first opportunity to come to Hoksieu, to compliment their Excellencies from the Ambassador, and acquaint them with his Intentions.  
About Noon the Holland Ambassador arrived in safety in the Netherland-Haven, where he dropped Anchor with the Vlaerding and Blyswiik, and was visited by the chief Pilot of the Tiger, with a Letter from Hendrick Bommer Master of the Tiger, written to the Ambassador, signifying, That the Pilot beforemention'd, having been several times in the Netherland-Haven, made no question to bring the Tiger thither; so that he desired his Order, because the Ship would be safer there than in the Bay of Sothia. On which the Ambassador made answer, That he ought to govern himself according to the Agreement made on the fifth Instant, of which the Copy was sent him, and first steer his Course to the Bay of Sothia, till further Order came from above.  
The Ambassador observing, That the entering into the Mouth of the River Hoksieu was dangerous, because of the Rocks called the Pyramids, commanded all the Masters and Pilots to consult about it, and give their Opinions in Writing, that other Ships that should come after, might make use thereof.  
The seventh against Noon three Mandarins were sent from the new General Siangpovi, to see how many Ships and Men were come, and likewise what Presents they had brought, from whence the Ambassador came, and what Retinue he intended should go with him to Peking. But the Ambassador did not think it convenient to inform him of all things, because the Master of the Ceremonies and Interpreter were not yet come from Hoksieu; therefore he told the Mandarins only, That he was come thither with five Ships, of which three lay in the Bay of Sothia, and two in the netherlands Haven; and that he had four hundred Men aboard: but as to the Presents, he could not readily give an Account, because he must first unpack them, and then draw an Inventory in Chinese: neither could he yet tell them the Number of the Persons that were to attend him to the Court; but if they pleased to stay till to morrow (when he expected the Master of the Ceremonies and Interpreter would be there) he would resolve them. Then the Mandarins asked, If there were no more Ships that had put into other Harbours on the Coast of China? To which they were answered No. Then they demanded further, From whom the Lord Ambassador was addressed? to which they received a suitable Answer. The Ambassador had also a Chinese Letter given him from the Governor of Minjazen, the Contents being only to congratulate his Welcome, which the Ambassador answered civilly in like manner. Hereupon the Mandarins departed, saying, they would send one on the Morrow to know the Quantity and Quality of the Presents.  
The Ambassador soon after was informed by Noble, That the Mandarin which bore the chief Command over the Jonks that lay there, had understood the day before, that the Emperor was inclined to allow the Hollanders and Tartars the Isles Eymuy and Quemuy, to set up their Factories and Trade.  
The eighth the Master of the Ceremonies, Mr. Ruwenoort, and the Interpreter De Hase, came aboard again, relating, That they had been at Hoksieu, and there delivered the Ambassadors Letters to the Governors: The General, who first granted them Audience, had after the reading of the Letter asked them several Questions, as amongst others, Whither they had a Design upon Formosa, or came only upon Embassy? To which they answered, That the Ambassador was come thither but with five Ships, of which two lay in the netherlands Haven, and three at Tinhay; and that they had no other Design but to wait upon the Emperor, according to the Contents of their Credential Letters and Commission. After this, they gave the Conbon or Governor of Hoksieu a Visit, who showed himself very joyful at the news of their arrival. And next they visited the General, and gave him an Account of the Ambassadors arrival, who sent two Mandarins to go along them.  
About Midnight in their Return they came before the Castle of Minjazen, where they lay till the next Morning, and then desired the Governor to furnish them with a Vessel to carry them aboard, to which he very willingly condescended.  
The ninth Noble, Harthower, Secretary Ʋander Does, and the Mandarins which came down the next day in a Pleasure-Boat sent to the Fleet for that purpose, were carried aboard, having a Letter of Advice with them, to make use of when occasion should serve.  
The same Day this Present was prepared for the Governor of Minjazen.  

A Pair of Pistols,  
A small Quilt,  
Four Pieces of fine Linen.  
Two Swords,  
Two great Pieces of Sandalwood.   
From that time nothing happened of remark, only some Jonks came to an Anchor close by the Ambassador, to watch the Netherlanders Transactions, as had been done from the beginning, ever since they arrived; sometimes fresh Jonks relieving others.  
The eleventh in the Morning, the Ambassador sent the Blyswiik's Boat to the Bay of Sothia, with a Letter; by which he Commanded the Captains of the three Ships, the Alfen, Tiger, and Constance, to come to him with the first fair Wether, to consult once more about the bringing in of the Ships to Hoksieu.  
The twelfth, the Captains came according to the Ambassadors Letter aboard his Ship in their Sloop, and just at low Water they went with Captain Ʋander Werff, and Peter jansz Vlieg, to the River of Hoksieu, to know the Soundings and the breadth of the Channel.  
Afternoon, Siangpovi's Interpreter came aboard with some Tartars, to tell the Ambassador, that Noble Landed the Night before in Hoksieu, and that Horses were provided against the Morning to carry him to the Governors to have Audience. Moreover he told him, that he was sent from the General Siangpovi, to inquire about the Ambassadors Health, and if he wanted any thing, or if any surly People slighted or neglected, to supply them with what necessaries were fit, and they required.  
The Ambassador caused his Interpreter De Hase to ask the Tartars, How the Governor of Hoksieu resented the Hollanders, and whether he should be civilly received? Whereupon he replied, That he needed not question his glad Reception.  
Furthermore, he doubted not but that they should have all their desires granted when so ere they arrived at Peking.  
The Tartar Interpreter also acquainted the Ambassador, that it would be convenient to invite the Captain of the Jonks that lay to watch to a Treat; which some hours afterwards was performed by Putmen, and the Interpreter De Hase; who coming to the Captain, and Mandarin, were kindly entertained, with answer, that according to their Requests, they and some other Mandarins would wait upon them the day following: They also sent a Present to the Ambassador, of Capons, Geese, and a Vessel of Chinese strong Drink.  
Towards Evening, the Masters and Pilots came aboard again to the Ambassador, and told him, That he had searched the Bay of Hoksieu, of which they would give an account in writing, how the Ships should get in and out with most safety, as was done the day following.  
In the afternoon the Vlaerdings Boat brought a supply from Hoksieu, of Beefs, Porkers, good Liquor, and several Fruits, with Letters from Noble, Harthower, and Ʋander Does, that on the eleventh they were arrived at the Bridge of Lamthay; and at their passing by, the Governors of Minjazen Treated them kindly; and at Hoksieu they were presently admitted to the Presence of the General Siangpovi, the Viceroy, and the Conbon or Governor.  
All these Visits were passed with many kindnesses, and upon the delivery of their Letters from Batavia, with an Inventory of the Presents, were told, That the Ambassador was Welcome, and according to his Request should be honourably and kindly Entertained, and that he would be pleased presently to come ashore, that they might the better inform his Imperial Majesty of his arrival; with which, the Ambassador being acquainted, gave Order for his Landing the next day.  
The next day they were to Treat about Commerce, which they supposed to be of great Consequence; the more, because by Proclamation every one was on pain of Death forbidden to Trade with the Hollanders without Licence.  
When a rumour was spread in Hoksieu, that the Fort Quelang in Formosa had been Besieged two Months by three thousand Tayowan Chineses; but at last were forced to Retreat to Tamsuy, with the loss of their General, etc.  
The fifteenth, being Sunday, nothing happened of remark to the Ambassador, but only expected further Tidings from Noble, and his other Friends in Hoksieu.  
The sixteenth, four Mandarins came from the General Siangpovi and the Conbon, sent to the Ambassador to Present him with an hundred and twenty Canasters, or four Tun of Rice, thirty couple of Capons, as many Ducks, forty great Vessels of their best Drink, six fat Beefs, twenty Porkers, a Score and a half of Geese, and a hundred Water-Lemons.  
Because the Name of Chinese Beer will be often used, it will be requisite to give a short Description of it.  
THe Drinks which the Chineses use are many: The first called Samfoe, or Sampe, made of Rice, is of a clear Colour, like white Wine; wherefore they also name it, Sampe, signifying pure White.  
The second called Looszioe, is of a brown Colour like Dutch Beer, of a pleasant Taste, but very strong.  
The third named Tzonzui, and by some held for the best and strongest Liquor in all China; is of a bright Brown, very clear, and resembles Brunswick-Mum, yet tastes like Sack, and as strong in its Operation.  
Which Liquor Vulgarly the Hollanders generally call Mandarins and Chinese Beer.  
The fourth being a sort of Distilled Water, is called Hotzioe, and is not only clearer, but much stronger than Brandy, therefore by the Netherlanders called Strong Arak.  
The fifth Drink is called Kietzjoe, and by the Hollanders Kniep; and is also a Water Distilled, yet not so strong as the former, of a ruddy Colour, and much drank in the Chinese and Holland Ships, during their stay on the Coast of China.  
Most of all these Liquors are made and Extracted out of Rice.  
They say, That in the Emperor Yu's Reign, above two thousand Years before 
Martin Histor. Sinen. l. 2. pag. 54.  the Birth of our Saviour, this famous Chinese Drink, Extracted of Rice, was first made: The Inventor thereof was called Ilie, who having Presented the Emperor with the new and pleasant Liquor, when he had well tasted it, said, What great Misfortune hath brought this Drink into the Realm? Now I foresee the fall of my Family, and the ruin of the Empire by this inebriating Drink: Whereupon, he strait, instead of reward and honouring him for his happy Invention, being such an assistant to weaken Nature, banished him the Empire for ever; and Commanded further upon pain of Death, that none should imitate or experiment the same: But though Thou Banished the first finder, yet he could not prevent the Art of making it, from spreading through his whole Dominions.  
Besides these Drinks, there is an ordinary sort boiled of the Root Tee, or Cha; and likewise another, by the Netherlanders called Bean Broth, which, as some say, is Milk mixed with Peking Butter.  
The Chineses also Press several sorts of Juices, or Wines out of Fruit; as among other out of the Fruit Lichi.  
Yet in no place, do they know any Liquor made of Grapes; that kind of Tope only belonging to the Province of Xensi, though they have store of Grapes and Vineyards in other parts of China; for the Chineses either dry or Preserve their Grapes, to eat them in Winter, which they do by Boiling in a great Pot, and then pour dissolved Sugar upon them.  
Upon the delivery of the foremention'd Presents, Singlamong was not once made mention of, which occasioned some jealous thoughts.  
And now, because the Ambassador expected that he should Land shortly, he made an Order for his Attendants, and Information to the controller, to be observed at his Landing, thereby to shun all Confusions, according to which every one was to govern himself.  

Orders for the Attendants of the Embassy.  
OF what concern this Embassy is, every one may apprehend: How circumspectly it ought to be performed, in respect to ourselves; and also how much Honour and Profit our Nation may reap by it, cannot be sufficiently expressed.  
Therefore since the good Orders, Virtue, and fair Carriage of the Persons that shall attend us, must be observed and maintained as the Chief Point, it may be judged what care and diligence ought to be used in it, that our bad Conversation may not hinder a good Event.  
This being considered of, we have thought it necessary and fitting to prescribe some short Orders to all our Followers, with express Commands, that every one shall exactly observe them upon their Perils.  

I. Coming ashore, every one shall go to the appointed place, without separating himself, or going from the Train without special Orders from the Ambassador.  
II. Every one shall look to his Office, and be diligent and careful in what he is employed.  
III. None shall go out of the Ambassadors Lodging, without his, or the Secretary's knowledge.  
IV. The controller Ruwenoort shall have the second Command over the Gentlemen and Soldiers, but no Power to send any one out, or Discharge him without the Secretary's knowledge, who shall, if it be requisite, acquaint the Ambassador therewith.  
V. Every one, of what Degree soever, shall have a special care, and abstain from too much Drinking and Quarrelling, which oftentimes arise from it, on forfeiture of three months' Wages the first time, and the second, of all his Pay, loss of his Place, and be sent to Batavia; he that shall occasion a Quarrel or Contest between any Person, shall receive the same Punishment.  
VI Every person shall carry himself very humble, and be bare headed in the Ambassadors Presence; as also, the Gentlemen, Soldiers, and other Officers shall be Dutiful and Obedient; but above all, be very Courteous and kind to the Chinese.  
VII. Putmans' being Master of the Gifts and Presents, shall have a great care of the packing and dividing of them, that they may be looked after and secured from spoiling, or Rain, and keep an exact account of all, by entering them down in a Book of Presents; he shall also, as Master of the Ceremonies, observe that good Orders he kept in that concern.  
VIII. On the Ringing of a Bell ashore, or by the way, every one shall come to Prayers in his peculiar place, which shall be in the Evening at seven a Clock, performed by the Secretary or some Person else, on forfeiture of a Rix-Doller, for those that without great reason stay from it.   

Information for the controller.  
I. OF the controller is required, that he take upon him a Grave Formality, neither showing a lightness in his Behaviour or Conversation, and justly to pay every one their Due; he is to be Governor of the Gentlemen, Clerks, Assistants, and Soldiers, and so necessarily required to be a good Example in Virtue to others; and also to be Courteous and Civil to all Persons, especially to the Chinese and Tartars, with whom lies our greatest Concern.  
II. The Comptrollers Office and Government shall consist in Domestic Affairs, that all things may be done orderly, and kept clean; to which purpose are allowed him as Assistants, Frents, as Chief Butler, and Banning as Steward, who shall act in their Offices according to Putman's Direction, and take care not to waste and lavish, but to see that nothing be lost: Also two Assistants more are allowed Putman, to look after all the Travelling Utensils and Necessaries, viz. Cuiper, and Van Altern, which shall look to the Bedding, Householdstuff, and other things thereto belonging, and keep an exact account thereof, at the Shipping or using, that they may not be damnified, that when the Ambassador shall resolve to Land, or go, and come from one place to another, and the Secretary acquainting them with it, they shall presently order the getting of them ready.  
Three Tables shall daily be kept and furnished at twelve a Clock at Noon, and eight at Night, viz.  
The first Table being the Ambassadors, shall be Oval, with room for eight or ten Persons; at this shall Eat the Ambassador; at his right Hand Noble, Putman's, and Ʋander Does the Secretary; at his left Hand, john Van Hoorn, the Ambassadors Son, and as many more Plates shall be laid ready for Strangers. This Table shall be attended by the controller Ruwenoort, who must stand behind the Ambassador; besides two Gentlemen, viz. Frents, and Doornik; at every Course serving up, the Trumpeters shall Sound, and betwixt, the other Musicians play.  
The second, being the Comptrollers Table, Mr. Ruwenoort shall sit, with six Gentlemen, who shall all be attended by the Negro Boys, except a Soldier to Wait upon the controller.  
The third Table shall consist in six of the prime of our Guard, the Interpreter and Master-Cook, who rising, the under Waiters shall take the remainder.  
About the Dressing of the Meat, and the quantity, great care must be used. To which purpose Putmen, the Secretary Ʋander Does, and the controller Ruwenoort shall first consult about the Bill of Fare, and then give order for it.  
Every Week the controller shall deliver a Bill of his Charge to the Secretary, which when looked over, shall be entered in their due places.  
Berkman shall be as Master of the Horse, and therefore is to look over them, that they have their Provender in due season, and that it be good and not Musty; and likewise be careful of their Furniture, that all things may be kept clean and in repair.  
At their Landing and going up to the Court at Hoksieu this order shall be observed:  
First, Two Trumpets shall Ride before, than six Soldiers with Carbines and Swords, next Captain Ʋander Werf, and Pilot Peter jansz de Vlieg, than the Lord Ambassador himself; after him Bekmans and john Dubon Halberdiers; john Van Hoorn, the Ambassadors Son; Noble and Putmen; Ʋander Does and Ruwenoort; after these the six Gentlemen, Banning, Ruysser, Berkman, Van Alteren, Frents, Van Doorn, and lastly, Hans and Sluiter.   
The same day nothing happened of remark, only the General Povi's Interpreter came to visit the Ambassador, and tell him, That the Vessels which were to take in the Steeds, would either come that Night, or early in the Morning.  
The following day, soon after Sunrising, the forementioned Interpreter, with two Captains belonging to the Jonks, came aboard of the Ambassador, to acquaint him of the two Vessels arrival, to fetch the Emperor's Presents, the Horses and Oxen.  
After some Discourse it was concluded, That the forementioned Captains should the next Ebb go and fetch the Horses with their great Jonks; to which purpose, the controller Ruwenoort was sent with them.  
In the afternoon, the Ambassadors Boat came again from above the River, with the Secretary Ʋander Does, who besides his own Relations, brought two Letters, one from Noble alone, and the other Signed by three, in which was written, That they had acquainted his Highness of the Ambassadors intentions to Land, whereupon they had obtained leave to send the Secretary Ʋander Does with the Boat.  
In which were also brought a dozen Porkers, four Baskets with Artichokes, two with Cucumbers, and fifty Pots of 
a A Chinese Strong-Water.  Chamchoe; and that it was concluded, that twelve Men should first go ashore with the Ambassador, and that he should bring the Emperor's Letter with him.  
By the same Letters they also informed him, That the General had desired them to procure some Glasses, Quilts, Blood-Coral, and several other things for him which they had aboard, and could have wished, that they had been Shipped uppermost, because his Favour was of great concern, and they might do some good with him by the way of Presents, as they were informed, he being of a more affable Character than his Predecessor. And Noble and Harthower told him, That the Ambassador was not concerned in the Trade, but it was entrusted wholly to them; so that without doubt, the Ambassador would not be troubled about it; therefore they would on this first undertaking so prosecute their business, that it might tend to his Honour; so that they desired he would please to leave it to their care. They added further, that they esteemed themselves happy by the Ambassadors grave counsel to be provided against the Chinese Treachery. In the Trade nothing was to be done, but to use care and prudence, as in former times. If they intended to effect any thing, they must wait, yet not depend too much upon it. The Jonks which were should the Horses at Minjazen, were judged to be unfit to go to Sothia; therefore the Tartars desired, that they might be brought into the netherlands Haven, in one of the Ships, from whence they would convey them up the River.  
The Governors had lately chosen a place on the other side of the River, where they intended to request of the Emperor, that the Hollanders might build a Storehouse; but they knew not whether it was done out of their own inclination, or by the Emperor's Order, (which perhaps had long since granted it.) They were informed, that about eight or ten days since, a Mastless Vessel ran into the Storm-Bay, and soon after went away again, and that the Commanders of her said, that they were sent from Batavia to japan, and likewise that an Ambassador was come thither with nine Ships; by which they supposed, that it was the Newpoort, because no other Ships knew of the Ambassadors coming.  
There went also a rumour, That some Portuguese Ships were arrived at Makaw, and of an Ambassadors going to Peking, that came over in them.  
The single Letter from Noble was to this purpose: That Hopes and a good Heart was half their Business, and he much rejoiced at what the Ambassador had been pleased to write; but nothing more concerned him, than the promoting and making the Embassy more Honourable, that it might be performed with all fitting Splendour and Magnificence, of which there were fair appearances. But because nothing could be assured from the Chineses looks, therefore time must produce it.  
They declared, that all the Governors were exceedingly rejoiced at the Ambassadors coming, and had never shown such great encouragements to their Design.  
The nineteenth, the great Jonk which went the same day to fetch the Horses, returned, and brought a Letter from the Commander to this effect.  
That that Morning he had received the Ambassadors Order, for the sending of the Horses and Oxen; according to which he had Shipped them in the Jonks, with three Chests full of Saddles, all in good condition, and that at their putting off, he had fired seven Guns in Honour of the Emperor, and the Ambassador, which he hoped he would opprove off.  
His Excellency Commanded Ruwenoort, that so soon as it was Flood, he should go up with the Horses to Hocksieu, which was performed accordingly; and the Ambassador writ a Letter to Noble and Harthouwer, advising them, that he had received theirs by the Secretary, and prepared himself to go in the expected Vessels to Hoksieu; and in the mean while, had sent the Horses and Oxen, as also their Saddles, and the Coach provided for the Emperor.  
The twentieth, nothing happened of remark.  
The one and twentieth in the Morning, two Pleasure-Boats came with three Mandarins, two from the Viceroy and General, and one from the Governor of Minjazen, to attend and bring in the Ambassador, who desired two days for the fitting and accommodating all things for his more convenient Landing.  
The three and twentieth in the Morning, the two Pleasure-Boats beforementioned, that came with the three Mandarins, were ready to take in the Ambassador, but proved much too little to carry him, his Attendants and Goods up the River. And because they proffered as many Jonks on the one and twentieth as he should need, therefore they were desired to procure one more, which they scrupling, he said he had been told, that they were a well Governed Nation, and therefore wondered that they kept not their own promise, that he should have as many as he needed; therefore he would send one up to Hoksieu to fetch written Orders from the General, according to which he would Govern himself. Upon the news thereof, without any more ado, they sent a Jonk to carry his Goods, or any thing else; whereupon he gave Order for the Shipping of his Goods and Attendants.  
At Noon, the Ambassador Embarked himself to go up to Hoksieu, and about three a Clock arrived at Minjazen; of which place the Governor sent him a Complimental Letter, informing him of his indispos'dness, which prevented him from giving the civility of a meeting. Moreover, he caused the Ambassador and his Retinue to be Entertained with 
a As the Dutch call it.  Bean-Broth, and Baked Meats.  
The Governor of Minjazen also sent to desire the Ambassador to stay some short time, because he would send a Letter with him; and soon after, some Mandarins coming aboard said, That they were sent from the Governor to search all Chests and Trunks, which was so ill resented by the Ambassador, that he said with a displeased Countenance, the Mandarins had promised him, That his Goods should without trouble or molestation be delivered; and if they could not, he would rather return aboared, than suffer such affronts, which words made them wave their received Orders; yet he went away in the Evening without a Letter. The Ambassador, by reason of the Ebb meeting him, was forced to Anchor at Lamthay, and about Flood setting forward again, about Day light arrived at the Bridge of Lamthay. Here the Mandarins went to acquaint the General of the Ambassadors arrival, and also to know, if it pleased his Highness, that he should first go into the Netherlanders Inn, or come to his Highness: The Ambassador also made his coming immediately known to Noble and Harthouwer, who came to welcome him; of whom he demanding, in what Postures Affairs stood; They told him, they had no present cause of dissatisfaction, because the last Night Singlamong's Secretary had come and told them, that seven hundred Bales of Silk lay in store, which were to be exchanged for the netherlands Commodities, and also that Singlamong would have half a share in the Trade; The General two third parts in the other half, and the Conbon a third part.  
The four and twentieth, after several Houses shown, and denied, a Mandarin came to ask if the Ambassador would be pleased to send one of his Servants to see the House which was chosen for him. Whereupon he sent Noble, Putmen, and Ruwenoort to the General, to desire him, to give Order for a House.  
The Mandarins which had fetched the Ambassador, and were that Morning gone to the General, to make his coming known, returned with Horses to conduct him to the Viceroy Singlamong.  
And Noble, Putmen, and Ruwenoort came with the foremention'd Mandarins, to tell the Ambassador, that a House was making ready for him; also that his Highness expected him at Court, and before the Ambassador should have done his business with his Highness, the House would be ready.  
The General also said, That if they had known of the Ambassadors coming from Batavia before hand, the Emperor would have given Order for the building a new House.  
And accordingly, although it Reigned very hard, yet the Ambassador prepared himself to go to his Highness.  
First, between the sound of several Instruments, he was conducted to the Viceroy Singlamong, who bade him Welcome, and showed him to sit on a Bench at his left Hand, (by the Tartar accounted the upper) and next him Noble, Harthouwer, Putmen, and the Secretary Ʋander Does, on a piece of Cloth spread on the Ground.  
Then the Viceroy wished the Ambassador much joy, for which the Ambassador with many Ceremonies thanked him; so that this first Visit ended only in Coplements.  
He at last asked, If he had about him the Letter from his King to their Emperor; and also, that with the first opportunity, they should give an account to the General, how many Chests and Trunks they wanted to carry up their Goods, that they might be got ready against the appointed time.  
And likewise, that the General might give Order for the Jonks and Vessels to fetch the Presents for the Emperor ashore: To which the Ambassador answered, That he had not brought the Letter with him, because of the badness of the Wether, but his Highness might Command it when he pleased; the number of Cases and Chests, he would also give an account of, as they had occasion, and so soon as they could come at the Presents, acquaint his Highness with it.  
Moreover, The Ambassador desired the Viceroy's advice, and instruction in this Embassy, which he would be sure to observe, and other such like Discourses. To which the Viceroy answered, That he would invite the Ambassador to his Court, and then they would further consult concerning all affairs.  
From thence they went to the General, who enquired after the Ambassadors Health, and how all Friends fared in Batavia? To which the Ambassador answered, and returned him Thanks for sending the Mandarins to fetch him in, and also for the fresh Provisions. Then he asked the same question as the Viceroy had done before, whereon the Ambassador replied, That the Goods which were to be sold, lay upon the Presents; but he would give Order to Noble to fetch them up, that they might be seen, and if they were damnified, they should immediately be shown to his Highness; which said, his Highness was well satisfied, saying, That he would then write concerning it to the Court at Peking. The Ambassador also desired his Highness' advice, because he knew not the Customs and Fashions of the Country.  
Moreover the Ambassador said, That he would on the Morrow present his Highness with some Glasses, and other such like Rarities, which he desired he would please to accept. His Highness enquired also of the Ambassador, if he had left good Orders on board, that his People used no Outrages, nor carried any Goods privately ashore; to which, the Ambassador said, Yes, and if any one should break such Orders, he should be severely punished.  
The General showed the Ambassador two Mandarins, which (said he) shall wait upon you, when I intent to acquaint you with any thing of consequence, therefore desired him to grant them Audience. On which the Ambassador taking leave, was entreated by his Highness to Eat with him first, which was performed, and at Table said, That he would with the first opportunity invite the Ambassador to his Court, to Discourse with him concerning the Embassy.  
From hence they went to the Conbon, whither they came about the Evening, and were kindly received and bid Welcome by him.  
Moreover, the Conbon said, That the Ambassadors coming would prove an advantageous business to them, promising to assist him in all things he would desire. Whereupon the Ambassador taking leave, came to his Lodging about eight a Clock; about ten arose a mighty Storm out of the North, which lasted till Midnight.  
The twenty fifth in the Morning, they received the bad news, that the Jonks Laden with all their Travelling Necessaries was cast away, driven from the Anchor, and shattered in pieces against the Bridge of Lamthay. But Putmen and the Secretary were sent to see what could be saved of the Damnified Goods. Towards Noon, the Viceroy and General sent them in all sorts of Kitchen Provision, of what the Country afforded, and some Vessels of their best Liquor.  
The General sent likewise a Pass to the Ambassador, for the fetching ashore the Emperor's Presents; to which the Ambassador replied, That it could not be done before he Traded: But the Mandarin answered, That it must be, or else the General could not write to Peking: Whereupon the Ambassador told him, That he would visit the General on the morrow, and discourse with him about it; on which he went away.  
Next Morning Captain Putmen went to Compliment his Highness Singlamong, and in the Ambassadors Name to present him with some Rarities, who himself was ready to repair to the Court, where a Mandarin gave him notice, That he was immediately expected; whither instantly going, and after some Compliments had passed, he delivered him the Copy of the Letter to his Imperial Majesty, with a List of the Persons Names that were to go to Peking with him; and also a Schedule, being an Abstract of the Embassy, which was to this purpose.  
That the Lord General Maetzuiker and the Council of India say, That the Hollanders look upon it as the best way of effecting Business, to be just, and endeavour Friendship; which hath been hitherto attested by all People that have dealt with us, either upon the score of Alliance, Commerce, or both: But the way of Traffic is looked upon as the best Foundation, whence sprouting, it may grow up and branch like a Tree, so to enrich each other in Peace, and assist in all Exigencies of War.  
That the Hollanders have many years endeavoured both Traffic and Alliance with the Chineses; to which purpose the General and Council of India ten years since sent their Ambassadors with Presents to the Emperor in Peking, which were kindly received, and his Majesty accepted of the Hollanders as Friends, and declared them so publicly.  
The Hollanders have now again by the Lord General and Indian Council addressed their Ambassador with Presents to the Emperor, with hearty wishes, That his Imperial Majesty may live for ever, and that this their desired Affinity may last as long as the Sun and Moon endureth.  
The Ambassador desires of the Viceroy, General, and Conbon, That they would assist him in this Negotiation, because their Mediation may facilitate, and so the sooner effect the Business.  
This being translated, was, together with a Copy of the Batavian Missives to the Emperor, presented unto the General, who after inquiry concerning the brave Horses and Oxen which were to be given to the Emperor, desiring to see them, they fell into other Discourses concerning the Presents, and about landing the Merchandise, upon which there had like to have happened some Contrast; but the Ambassadors discretion seasonably broke it off, and so departing, went from thence to the Viceroy, where they were conducted through another Gate than they went the day before, into the Inner Court, or Privy Chamber, in which the Ambassador, after having showed Reverence to the Viceroy, was by him bid to sit on his left Hand, on a small Bench, and next him his Prime Officers; to all whom the Viceroy seemed to be somewhat more affable than the General, saying, That the Hollanders were now no Strangers, and that he had been acquainted with them in Canton, and done them several good Offices in their Negotiation there; and that he was as ready now to serve them as heretofore, especially because a Person of greater Quality was employed with like Addresses to his Imperial Majesty. Whereupon the Ambassador modestly replied, That he had been well informed of his Highness former Affection and Favour to their Nation at Canton, and also of the late continuation of the same Civility and Goodness to Constantine Noble, ever since his residing there, for which he returned him especial Thanks, not doubting but he would keep up his Hospitable Character to Strangers, in assisting them in this their present Embassy, in which they desired nothing but what was Just and Honourable, and might be beneficial to both Nations: Which he promised very seriously, and that he would write in the Ambassadors behalf to all his Correspondents in the Council of State at Peking: Then the Viceroy enquiring in the same manner as the other did about the Presents and the Lading, the Ambassador fearing that some Contest might arise, as formerly with the General, waved the Dispute, only replying, That they would be all ready in good Season; but the Merchandise he did not concern himself with: Whereupon the Viceroy said, Well, let it pass; but desired the Ambassador to lend him his Chirurgeon for a day or two, which he promised, when Dinner being upon the Table, breaking off all further Discourse, the Viceroy desired them to sit at his own Table, on his left Hand, which is there the chief place, where they did eat in the same Dish, and drank in the same Bowl with the Viceroy: So having been plentifully treated, they took their leave, and returned to their Lodging.  
At their going away, two Mandarins followed the Ambassador, telling him, That the Viceroy returned him many Thanks for the Presents which he had sent in the Morning, but durst not receive them as yet; therefore he desired him to send for them home till they went to Peking: Whereto the Ambassador made Answer, That they were only a few Trifles for his Children; and desired that they would please to proffer them once more to his Highness, which they promised to do; but however, towards Evening they were returned again with the same Excuse.  
Next Morning, being the twenty seventh, the Ambassador consulted with his Council of what had happened to him the day before, and asked what was further to be done for the advancing of this great Embassy; and also read over the Instructions given him in Batavia: after which, having seriously considered, they unanimously concluded and agreed, That Noble and Harthouwer should that Morning go to the General, to tell his Highness, That the Ambassador endeavouring to satisfy him in all Points whatsoever, therefore desired that the Blyswiik and two Jonks might come up thither with the Merchandise and Presents, and that then he should receive them.  
But whilst they were yet busy about this their Resolution, three Mandarins came to desire Noble to come to the Viceroy, where the General also expected him; thither he and Harthouwer went immediately.  
At this time the Governor of Soansifoe sent the Ambassador as a Present a couple of fat Oxen, besides other good Kitchen Provision.  
Mean while Noble and Harthouwer came back from the Court, and related, That they still desired that the Merchandise and Presents might be brought ashore; which they excused, urging the several Inconveniences; but told them that all should be done in good time, when the Presents and Frigates might by unlading be lest damnified, concerning which they would come and Treat with his Highness to Morrow.  
The twenty eighth in the Morning, about daylight, the Secretary carried the Message to the General, who at his return told, That having stayed an Hour ere he was admitted to his Presence, and having complemented his Highness in the Ambassadors Name, he answered him roughly, saying in a tasty manner, That he had spoke with the Ambassador two days since, and granted him as many Jonks as he desired, for the unloading of his Goods; and come you now to ask more? Let it be so (said he); I will supply them with Twenties, and if that will not serve, with Hundreds; but in brief, none of their Ships shall come up the River. Tell your Master (continued he) that I am a Man that keep my Word, no Promise-breaker; therefore what I grant, they may be assured of. I know that you are come hither from remote Countries, through long and turbulent Seas, with Ships freighted with Merchandise; How then should I be so inhuman as not to serve you in what I may towards the accomplishing of your Desires? But first land your Presents, and when I have seen them, I will write in your behalf to Peking. And the more to manifest my good Intentions, and the Love I have for the Ambassador, I will suffer one of his Ships to come up to the Bridge, but accompanied with my Jonks; for which Favour the Secretary returned him thanks in the Ambassadors Name, promising to give his Master an Account thereof.  
The Ambassador ordered Noble and Harthower to go to the General so soon as it was possible, and thanking him for his Kindness, further to request a Pass to bring up the Blyswiik Frigate, and send two Mandarins to help them, that all things might be done according to his desire.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning the controller Ruwenoort went with the Chirurgeon Hans Voorechter to the Court, to carry their Highnesses the following Letters, and desire their Answers. The first being to the Vice▪ Roy Singlamong, contained, That the Ambassador had sent his Chirurgeon to his Highness' Service. The rest was written to the same purpose with the other three, viz. That the Ambassador desired to know when his Highness pleased to accept of a Visit, and treat about the Embassy.  
The thirtieth nothing happened of Remark.  
Next Morning two of the General's Officers came to the Ambassador, and in their Lords Name privately proffered him three hundred Tail (which they had brought with them) for the Chain of Blood-Corral and Quilt, Goods which he desired to be sent; on which the Ambassador smiling, returned, That he was no Merchant, neither bought nor sold; but if the General would please to accept of those Trifles as a Present, he would take their Reception as a high Honour; and if his Highness hereafter might have a fancy to buy any Goods belonging to the Hollanders, that their Merchant Noble should furnish him: With which Answers the forementioned Persons returned, to give an Account thereof to the General.  
In the Afternoon the Vice-Roys Officers returned with many Thanks to the Ambassador for his Presents, which his Highness had kindly received, and as a grateful Return, had sent him eight Pieces of Chinese Brocadoes, which they desired the Ambassador to accept, and he courteously received, though not valued at above eighty Tail of Silver.  
In the Evening after Prayer the controller Ruwenoort delivered his first Account of Charges and Expense, which the Ambassador gave to Putmen and the Secretary Ʋander Does to look over, and also to inquire if the Provision should be brought in by greater quantities than they used to have it before, it might not be had at a cheaper Rate; thereby to be as saving as they could.  
The first and second of September nothing happened worthy recounting.  
The third in the Morning the Viceroy Singlamong's Intepreter sent the Chinese Gienso to ask the Ambassador when he pleased to come to visit his Highness, and show him the brave Horses, that he might give his Lord an Account of it; Whereupon he was answered, That it was left to the Choice and Pleasure of his Highness, and that the Ambassador was always ready at his Command.  
In the Afternoon two of the Vice-Roys chief Factors came to Noble, and told him, That they had Order from his Highness to ask if the Company desired to have much White Raw Silk; which if they had, his Highness would endeavour to persuade the General, because the Transportation was strictly forbidden by the Emperor; and that it might be observed, five Persons of Quality were sent into every Territory bordering the Sea, from Peking; so that it would be very difficult to get their Consents: Therefore they asked (a Price never heard of) two hundred and fifty Tail for a Picol, desiring to have an Answer upon it immediately, that they might give an Account to his Highness. Whereto Noble made answer, That notwithstanding the time did not permit to send to Japan, yet they would exchange those Merchandises which they had brought with them, for a Parcel of Silk, to carry to their Native Country; but he would have them to know, not at such Prices; and therefore if they would not come nearer to the matter, he would neither Treat about it, nor make any Proffer, desiring them to be better advised: Whereupon they replied, That they had no other Order, and therefore desired the Hollanders to consider of it, and so let it rest for that time.  
Mean while the General and Conbon's Factors also came thither, but made no mention of the forementioned Business. The Ambassador to oblige them, and that they might seek to get their Masters to affect the Hollanders, invited them to Dinner; which ending, they, after they had been handsomely treated, with kind Thanks took their leaves.  
Not long after the General also sent two Mandarins to tell the Ambassador, That he had been informed how the Hollanders in the netherlands Haven would not hasten the unlading of the Emperors Presents as they should, because they had only loaden three Jonks full of Merchandise, and would not make use of the other Jonks, which made their Highness' doubt (as they said) whether the Ambassador would go up to Peking, or not: They had writ to the Emperor of the Ambassadors arrival; but now they must assure him, that they had seen the Presents; therefore they desired a second time, that his Excellency would please to send Order to the Ships, with one of their Vessels, that they might immediately go about that Business: On which they were answered, That such Orders had already been given, and that their Highnesses need not doubt of the care and diligence that should be used in the Embassy; yet however, that he was inclined for their satisfaction to send another Letter thither, which they promising to tell the General, took their leave.  
The fourth against the Evening four Jonks with Pepper arrived at the Bridge at Lamthay, which they had taken out of the Blyswiik and Vlaerding Frigates. The Persons that came with them gave an Account, That the Blyswiik Frigate lay at Anchor between the Tower and the Bridge of Lamthay, and hoped that before the next Morning she would also come up to the Bridge; and likewise that the Constance was come safe into the netherlands Haven, and that all things were in good Condition with the Ships, which the Ambassador was glad to hear.  
The same day two Mandarins came to the Ambassador in the General's name, to inquire how many Men there were in the Blyswiik Frigate? If any Soldiers came in her? And why they brought so many? To which they were answered, That there were no Soldiers in her, and but forty seven Men in all, which were required to govern the Ship, and other Employments: Whereupon they returned.  
Mean while two eminent Mandarins sent from the General came to look after the unlading of the Goods, for which the Hollanders prepared Boats and other Vessels. The forementioned Mandarins said also, That if the Ship did not come up to the Bridge that day, they would on the morrow fetch out the Presents with their Barks, and then send her down again to fetch others.  
All the Factors belonging to his Highness, except the chiefest, came likewise to tell Noble, That their Masters had agreed to deliver their Silks to the Company; and that it was now time to Trade, because some Commissioners were expected daily from Peking, at whose coming there would be no likelihood to transport one Catty of Silk: Whereto Noble made answer, That he would willingly deal with them, but he must first see the Silk, and likewise agree about the Merchandise; but if they demanded two hundred and fifty Tail, as they had done the third Instant, it would not be worth the speaking of it. They having (as they said) no other Order, departed.  
On the twenty ninth of July a Flyboat named the Poelsnip, the thirtieth, the Nieuport Pink; and the fifth of August, the Overveen, came thither without their Masts, which they had lost in a Storm about the Macaw Islands, and going afterwards to repair their Breaches at the Isle of Quemuy, the Tartar-Chineses told the Commanders, That the Coxingan-Chineses had Besieged Quelang; and many other things concerning that Isle.  
The sixth in the Morning two Mandarins came to tell the Ambassador from the General, That the Governor of Minjazen had advised him▪ that another Dutch Ship had arrived in the netherlands Haven, which made his Highness desirous to know what Ship it was, and if it came from Quelang, which if it did, it should immediately return.  
In answer to which, they were told, That the Occasion of the coming of this Ship would be made known to his Highness by a Letter which was writing.  
According to the Resolution taken the last Night, the Secretary went to the Court to deliver the Letter, the Contents whereof were to this effect.  
That the Ambassador could not but acquaint their Excellencies, That a small Ship was arrived there from Quelang, bringing News, That four Months since the Coxingans had Besieged the Fort there, but were beaten off with great loss: Then he desired that he might send the said Ship again to Quelang with some Necessaries, as Tar, Kadjang, Timber, and the like Necessaries. And lastly, That all diligence was now used to get the Emperors Presents ashore, the greatest part of them being already arrived at the Bridge in the small Holland Vessel; concerning which, or aught else, he would be glad to speak with their Highnesses, when they pleased to command him.  
The Secretary came first to the General; but he having some Mandarins with him, could not in Person grant him Audience, but sent one of his Factors to the Secretary for the Letter, which was given him, and a speedy Answer desired upon it.  
After an hours stay, the forementioned Factor came to the Secretary, to present him in the General's Name with a Cup of Bean-broth, and tell him in answer to the Letter, That so soon as the Mandarins (that were with his Highness) went away, he would consult on their Request, and acquaintthe Ambassador with his Resolution by his Mandarins.  
From hence the Secretary went to the Viceroy Singlamong, where the Letter, as at the Generals, was received by a Servant, under pretence, That the Viceroy being indisposed, could not grant him Audience.  
An Hour after, the Interpreter came also to give the Secretary a Cup of Bean-broth, and tell him, That the Viceroy had understood the Ambassador's Mind by his Letter, and had granted his Request, nay, would have done it, had it been of greater concernment; but the Hollanders must first seek the General's Consent, which he doubted not but they might easily obtain: Whereupon the Secretary acquainted his Highness with the General's Answer, who said, That it was well, and he would speak with him about it.  
His Highness also caused him to be asked, Why the Horses and Oxen were not brought to his Court, since he had a great fancy to see them? and to desire that it might be done about two days after. To which the Secretary replied, That it was true, they had promised his Highness; but he had sent word, That they should refer it till all the Presents were ashore, and that then he would see them together: Whereupon his Highness told them, That the General had made that Answer, and not He; and therefore desired, as before, to see them, whether the Presents were ashore or not, two days thence: Which the Secretary promised to acquaint the Ambassador with; and rising to depart, two Mandarins came from the General, to inform the Viceroy of the Ambassadors Request, so that he was commanded to stay a little. The Mandarins going away again, the Viceroy sent him word, That the General had understood that those of Quelang were by the Netherlanders furnished with Provisions and Water; but as for the transporting of Timber, Stones, Tiles, and Nails, it could not be granted: However he had prevailed so much, (alleging that they were but Trifles, which since Quelang had been besieged, were wanting for the Repairing of the Houses) that by the said Mandarins they had in the Generals Name granted the Ambassadors Request; for which Kindness the Secretary humbly thanking his Highness in the Ambassadors Name, took his leave.  
In the Afternoon two Mandarins came again to the Ambassador, to give him an Answer to his Request which he had made in the Morning, which they delivered, after some Compliments, in this manner: That the Netherlanders were Licenced to transport what Provisions they had desired, Timber and Nails excepted, to which his Highness could not consent; which contradicted that which the Vice-Roys Interpreter had told the Secretary, viz. That the General and the Viceroy had permitted it: But there were daily Commissioners expected from Peking, to search those Havens; and that his Highness did not doubt but they would grant it him.  
Towards Evening the Blyswiik Frigate arrived at the Bridge of Lamthay, with the Presents: The Ambassador also sent a Letter, with the Constance's Boat, to the Merchant David Harthouwer, informing him, That the four Jonks laden with Pepper out of the Vlaerding and Blyswiik, arrived there yesterday, but were not all weighed: The Blyswiik Frigate had also been in sight, but durst not come to the Bridge. The Proposal to unlade the Alphen into the Flyboat, was liked very well, and that then she might be brought in with care, and more safety; to which purpose they should send the Polesnip to Sothia, to take in the Alphens' Goods (so to give little or no suspicion to the Tartars) and take as much Pepper and other Goods out of her, as they could conveniently carry, and then let her come up the River with it, because the forementioned Vessel should in few days go with Provisions to Quelang.  
The Ambassador judged it fit, and it would be convenient in that juncture of time, to have a strict Eye upon the Concerns of Quelang, and therefore advised them to Consult about it; to which purpose Harthouwer, Captain Vanderwerf, with the Commander de Vlieg, were sent for to come up in the Blyswiik, and likewise Captain Bitter.  
The Blyswiik that Evening came up to the Bridge, and in the Morning intended to Unlade her Presents, and two days after (if it were possible) she should be sent to fetch the rest.  
The seventh about Sunrising the Boat set Sail, and Orders was also given for the Unlading of the Blyswiik.  
In the Afternoon a Mandarin coming from the General, asked the Ambassador if he would send the Provisions to Quelang by the Blyswiik, because his Highness had not known that that Ship would have come up so high? On which he was answered, That it should be done so soon as the Blyswiik had made one Turn more to fetch the remaining Presents.  
Towards Evening all the Goods designed for Presents were Landed out of the Blyswiik, but it being too late to bring them into the Merchant's Lodge, they were forced under good Guards to lie in the Barks all Night: but in the Morning, being the eighth, they were all brought into the Lodge.  
The same day Putmen, Master of the Ceremonies, and the controller, went with the Horses and Oxen to the Court, to show them to their Highnesses, according to their Request two days since. Coming home again they related, That they had pleased their Highness' exceeding well, and that Singlamong, to whose view they went first, asked if they were wild or tame? to which they had answered, Tame: He had also highly commended the Oxen, and had caused them to be carried and shown to his Women, by whom they were beheld with great admiration: his Son had also been Mounted on one of the Horses. After which his Father asked concerning the Ambassador's Health; and also desired his Chirurgeon might come to him the next day. The General had also viewed and liked them; ask likewise about the Ambassadors Health, if he had any good Doctors? for if he had not, he would send his; and why the Hollanders sent down the Boat without leave, since he never had refused to grant them any of their Requests? and withal when the Blyswiik Frigate went again to fetch the rest of the Presents? Whereupon Captain Putmen replied, That the Ambassador was pretty well recovered, and he knew not any thing to the contrary but that he had a good Doctor; yet humbly thanked his Highness in the Ambassadors behalf for his kind Proffer: why the Boat went down without leave he could not give any account; but as to the Blyswiik Frigate, she was now Unlading her Pepper, and would at farthest be gone again within two days.  
The Commander of the Blyswiik Frigate complained to Noble, that the Tartars hindered him in the Unlading of the Pepper, he having called two Barque-men aboard, which accordingly came; but the Tartars seeing them took them, notwithstanding he interceded for them, and said that he was the occasion of their coming, and caused them to be carried to Prison in Fetters, which made Noble send jenko to complain to the Commission'd Mandarins about it.  
Mean while a Factor was sent to Noble from the General, to inquire about the Ambassadors Health, and if he had any good Physicians, because his Highness would else send him his.  
In the Afternoon the Interpreter jenko came with some Mandarins and Merchants to the Blyswiik Frigate, to redeem the Prisoners, and give order for the Unlading of her, which was begun immediately.  
Next Morning, being the ninth, the Ambassador sent to the Viceroy Singlamong, to excuse him, that he could not accommodate him with his Chirurgeon, because he also was indisposed, but so soon as he amended he should be immediately sent to him.  
In the interim the Tiger Sloop arrived there with a Letter from the Merchant David Harthouwer; in which the Ambassador was informed, that with the other Officers he had thought it convenient not to let the Ship Alphen come into netherlands Haven, because it was too dangerous to come thither against Wind and Tide: which Resolution they acquainted the Commander of her with, that when he thought convenient he might remove from Sothia to Tinhay; who had sent an Answer, That he would observe it, and consider with his Officers about it, and then send his approbation.  
The fifteen Chests brought hither by the Polesnip, were put into the Constance, and in the room of them they had Laden her full of Pepper out of the Constance and Tiger, which weighed forty nine thousand six hundred sixty eight Catties; by which means the Ships had made so much room, that they could not conveniently come at all the Goods designed for Presents, so that they only waited for the Blyswiik to Ship them in her.  
The Polesnip Flyboat was now ready to come up, if they had leave and a Pass for her; but the Povi's Commissioners would not permit it without Orders from above.  
The Vlaerding had on the sixth instant Unladen thirty two thousand one hundred forty five Catty of Pepper into a Chinese Jonk, which lay there still; so that at last with great trouble they got to the Sandal Wood that was to be Presented.  
In the Afternoon two Merchants were sent from the General, to inquire after the Ambassador's health; which Visit he ordered his controller to requite, by giving them six Hens, five Gammons of Bacon, some Pomegranates, Chestnuts, and Pears.  
The same day the Ambassador desired the General, that he might have the use of his Doctor but for a Day, because he was much troubled with Gripes in his Bowels; upon which Request he came immediately and prescribed him something, which he had no sooner taken, but found present ease.  
The tenth in the Morning the Doctor came again to give the Ambassador some more Physic. A Factor came also to inquire of his health, and if the Medicines the Doctor had given had done him any good) to which he was answered, Yes, and that the Ambassador had found great ease by it, desiring the Factor to thank his Highness in his behalf; which he promised to do.  
The Bliswyk and the Tigers Sloop were put off from going that day, and ordered to stay till the next, because some Mandarins scrupled the carrying away of so much Provision; about which they would first speak with the General.  
In the Afternoon two Mandarins came into the Lodge with a Pass for the Bliswyk Frigate, and the Tigers Sloop; and said also, That they were sent to Sail down with the Frigate.  
The eleventh the Frigate and Sloop set Sail to netherlands Haven.  
On Sunday Noon, being the twelfth, two Factors came to the Lodge, to present the Ambassador in the General's Name with some 
a Chinese Suckets.  Connemomy, and to tell him, That the Ambassador had been a considerable time ashore, and that the Emperor's Presents were not yet Landed: then the Ambassador desired that his Highness would please to give order that they might be suddenly delivered, because he much longed to see them; nor that they could proceed in any Trade before the Goods were ashore, and likewise that then preparations should be made for his Journey to Peking.  
Whereupon the Ambassador sent this Answer, That the rest of the Presents would suddenly be ashore, and that he thanked his Highness for his Connemomy, and in requital of it desired him to take a few Conserves of Nuts, Cloves, and the like: So having been well entertained by the Ambassador, the Factors took their Leave.  
In the Evening it was considered, That for several Reasons which the Governors had alleged by their Factors, it might happen, so soon as news came from Peking for the Ambassador to take his Journey thither, that their Highnesses might press his going, and that they (nothing being as yet in readiness, and all in a hurry) might be put to a great inconvenience; Therefore the Ambassador, to begin betimes, proposed, If it would not be necessary to acquaint their Highness' to morrow, That most of the Presents were ashore, and the rest expected in few days; if therefore they might begin to Pack them, and cause Chests to be made for them; of what bigness the Chests must be, and how many Men must carry them, and also the Saddles and Furniture for the Horses; and likewise if their Highnesses would please to send Commissioners before the Presents? if the Sandal Wood, being very big, could be carried by Land as it was, or in what Pieces it ought to be cut? that they must also carry several other Goods with them to Peking to give to the Council of State, and other eminent Persons; if they saw it convenient, to desire their Highnesses to accept of the last Presents, being only Trifles, sent to them by the Ambassador, because they had no Place in the Lodge to keep them; If their Highnesses should chance to speak of Trading, to press it forward, and to order that two Ships might about two Months hence be sent to Batavia, and from thence to Holland, to give an account of the Ambassador's Proceedings, and the like.  
This the Ambassador and his Council agreed upon, and Noble and Putmen ordered to go and acquaint their Highnesses with it.  
The thirteenth in the Morning Noble and Putmen (according to the Resolution taken the Night before) went to the Court to speak with their Highnesses. About Noon coming home again they related, That they had not seen them, it being their Fullmoon, and Singlamong indisposed; yet they had sent their Business to them by their Interpreters, and received in answer, That when all the Presents were brought ashore, their Highnesses must be informed of it, and that then they would send their Commissioners, to see and be present at the Packing of them; The Chests might be made for them, and about the bigness to contain a hundred Catty weight; The Sandal Wood must not be cut, but sent as it came from the Lord General Maetzuiker; The other Goods which the Hollanders would carry with them to give away when an occasion did present, should be set down with the Chests and Packs, that they might know exactly how many Porters they should want.  
The forementioned Trifles they could not receive before all the Emperor's Presents were brought up. Because they did not speak with their Highnesses themselves, they had not made any mention of the Business concerning Trade.  
The fourteenth about Noon the Vlaerdings Sloop arrived there from netherlands Haven, with Harthouwer and Captain Ʋander Werf, who related, That all things as well in Sothia as netherlands Haven, were in good condition at their departure from thence, and that all the rest of the Presents were taken out of the Constance and Tiger, and put into the Bliswyk Frigate.  
The fifteenth the Bliswyk arrived there with the rest of the Presents, and also the Jonks with three hundred forty four Bags of Pepper out of the Vlaerding. In the Blyswiik Frigate also came Captain de Bittor, who had been Governor in Quelang.  
A general report also went, that nine English Ships were on the Coast of China, about the Isles Eymuy and Quemuy, and that they had been in Canton, and desired to Trade there; but the Tartar-Chineses, not willing to take four hundred Tail for the granting of them their Trade, were sent away from thence, and were now come afresh to prosecute their old Design.  
The Governor having sent word to the Ambassador by Noble and Putmen on the thirteenth instant, That so soon as the Presents were all Landed, he should inform them of it; therefore he judged it convenient to advise their Highnesses of the arrival of the remaining Presents in a Letter by the Secretary, that if they pleased (about two days hence, when they were sorted) they might come and see them in Person, or send their Commissioners, that they might make fit preparations for them.  
The sixteenth in the Morning the Secretary went first to the General, to deliver him the following Letter in the Ambassadors Name, that the rest of the Presents were now come ashore, and that the next day they would all be put in order; therefore if his Highness pleased to come in Person, the Ambassador would most kindly entertain him; or else send his Commissioners to see them.  
In like manner he desired a Pass for the Boat, that she might go up and down without being stopped to inquire the certainty of the News concerning the English Ships.  
No sooner was the Secretary's coming made known to the General, but he sent for the Letter, and an hour after gave this Answer; That it was not customary for the General to come in Person to see the Goods, but he would send his Interpreter if the Presents were as the Hollanders had reported them, and then consult whom he should send: as to what concerned the Boat, he would send a Pass for her by his Mandarins.  
The rumour was at Court, that the General intended that Afternoon to see the Dutch Ship; to which purpose several Flags, Halberds, and the like, were stuck in the Street.  
From thence the Secretary went to the Viceroy's Court, where after some stay he was brought into the Presence in a back Hall. His Highness having asked concerning the Ambassador's health, and the Secretary given him a respective Answer, delivered his Highness the Ambassador's Letter, advising him that all the Presents were now Landed, and if his Highness pleased, to send Commissioners to see them. Whereupon his Highness made Answer, That he was glad to hear that the Presents were all safe ashore, and that he would not fail to send his Commissioners the next day to see them: And after having drunk to him in a Cup of Bean-broth, and entertained some frivolous Discourses within, the Viceroy gave him leave to depart.  
Mean while the General's Interpreter came with some Factors into the Lodge, to bring an Answer on the Letter that was brought in the Morning to his Court, which was after this manner: That a Pass should be brought for the Boat the next Morning; but when she had made one Voyage, that they should always bring the Pass to his Highness again, and at her departure ask for a new one. Moreover the Interpreter said, That the General was not well pleased that the Ambassador should desire him to come and see the Presents in his own Person; yet the Interpreter had appeased and satisfied him.  
Hereupon the Ambassador answered the Interpreter, That by the Discourse of the People he had heard that the General would come himself to see the Presents, and therefore had written, that he should esteem himself happy if it might be so; but had he known, that either the Viceroy or General would have been angry, he should not have done it. With which Answer the Interpreter took his leave.  
The remaining Presents were this day all brought out of the Blyswiik Frigate into the Lodge.  
The seventeenth in the Morning the same Interpreter that had been there the day before came to the Lodge, to ask if the Presents were Landed; on which he was answered Yes, and that they were brought thither the last Night, and they only stayed till the Mandarin saw them.  
At Noon an eminent Mandarin came to tell the Ambassador from the General, That his Highness had heard that all the Emperor's Presents were going to be brought to his Court, therefore asked him how many Coelis, which are Porters, could carry them: Whereupon the Ambassador answered, That he knew nothing of it; and withal, that the bringing of them to the General's Court could not well be done, because of the bigness of the Packs of Sandal Wood, and other things: but if his Highness desired it, he entreated him to send a written Order by his Mandarins, they being not his, but the Emperor's Presents, and also that he would not bear the blame if any of the Goods should chance to be damnified by their Carriage thither. Which Discourse prevailed so much, that the Mandarin said, His Highness should only send for a Piece of each sort to see them. To which the Ambassador answered, That all which his Highness should give order for in Writing he would obey. Hereupon the Mandarin rising up replied, That his Highness should send a written Order.  
The eighteenth in the Morning, another Factor came into the Lodge, sent from the Viceroy, to ask concerning the Ambassador's health: and amongst other Discourses Noble asked him what they should do concerning Trade? all the Presents were now ashore, and the time come which their Highnesses had limited: To which the Factor answered, That it would be convenient to send a Letter to Singlamong about it, and therein express, That his Highness had for three years together given them leave to Trade, and that he would also be pleased to do it now, and assist them in it; and that Noble might be admitted to speak with him more at large about it; so made no question but all things would fall out according to his desire. He asked moreover if the Hollanders would sell the two hundred Bags of Pepper lying in the Storehouse to him. To which Noble answered, Yes, if they could agree. Mean while two Mandarins came into the Merchant's Lodgings from the General, telling them that all the clothes, Perpetuana's, Crown-Serges, and other Goods belonging to the Emperor's Presents, should on the morrow (if the Wether permitted) by an Order from the Governors be fetched to the Viceroy Singlamong's Palace, where all the great Persons would be ready to see them; the Chests to fetch the Presents in were making ready, and as for the bulky Packs that were not so curious, they should not trouble themselves.  
The forementioned Mandarins were also impower'd by the General (as they said) to search the Holland Ships, if there were no more Pepper, or other Merchandise in them, desiring that two of the Netherlanders would please to go along with them, who at their Return related that all things were according to the Cargo.  
Since now, according to the Governor's desires, the Emperor's Presents were brought ashore, and they had promised that the Hollanders should begin to Trade, of which as yet they saw no likelihood, therefore Captain Noble was on Sunday the nineteenth sent with the following Letters from the Ambassador to the Viceroy Singlamong and General, being to this purpose, viz.  
That the Viceroy had known the Hollanders several years, and always showed them respect and favour, and assisted them in obtaining Dispatches in their Affairs. The 
a Captain Noble.  Houpou understood the last year from the Viceroy and Lipovi, That an Ambassador must of necessity address himself to the Emperor this very year, whereupon they should immediately drive their Trade; which the Houpou gave account of to the General in Batavia; who thereupon hath sent a Person of Honour, one of his Council as Ambassador, and brought the Emperor's Presents ashore upon your Highness' desire, and promise, that so soon as that should be done they would begin to Traffic; therefore the Houpou humbly desires, that his Highness would be pleased to permit it, and give order to the Factors and Merchants about it, that the Houpou may be the sooner ready to go with the Ambassador to Peking, and the rather, because that two Months after the Date thereof, two Ships must go to Batavia; by which the Ambassador must give an account to the General there, and also to the Province of Holland, of his success in that Empire. The Houpou was very desirous to send some Goods with those two Ships, which he would buy of the Factors; therefore he humbly requested that the Trade might now commence.  
To which Noble received an Answer from Singlamong, That he wondered at the Hollanders hastiness, since the Ambassador was not to travel up to Peking till the new Year, and that an Answer was expected from thence in twenty days; therefore they must stay till that time, because the Cargo that they had brought (which in respect of what the Hollanders carried into the Empire of japan was very small) could be sold in five days; and that the forementioned Ships might then go away time enough. However, his Highness by Nobel's persuasions granted that they might conclude with the Factors about the Prices for the Goods which the Hollanders intended to Vend there, and for those which they should receive in Barter for them, and drive their Trade privately, without publishing it before Orders came from Peking, because he knew not but that the Emperor might desire all, or a part of their Commodities.  
The General Siangpovi, to seem resolute and bountiful, promised to Noble, That so soon as he had seen the Presents, he would send his Factors to the Lodge to agree with him concerning his Merchandise, provided the Hollanders asked modestly, and not more than the value for them. He also boasted much of his good inclination towards the Hollanders, because he had lent them his Jonks to bring their Merchandise ashore, of which they had lost nothing; and that he resolved from that time forward to continue his kindness, and endeavour by all means possible to advance them. About the sending of the two Ships for Batavia he seemed somewhat backward, because according to his judgement nothing of consequence could be advised by them: but being somewhat better informed about it, made answer, That the first Orders were expected from the Emperor in fifteen days, therefore would have them stay till then. Their Highnesses also asked courteously concerning the Ambassadors Health; and hearing of his Recovery, seemed much to rejoice at it.  
The Mandarin Han lauja came also to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador, that the General had ordered him to go along with his Excellency as Guide to Peking, and that four Standards must be made to be carried before the Ambassador in his Journey, out of which two must be marked with Dutch, and two with Chinese Characters; and moreover, that he had been informed the Governors in few days would grant the Trade.  
The one and twentieth and two and twentieth nothing happened worthy of note.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning, a Mandarin came to the Lodge, ask if the Ambassador did not know when the Chineses that came from Batavia went away? and from what Place? if they were first carried over with the Holland Ships? and what was their native Country and Names?  
The Mandarin received in answer, That some went over the last year as Servants with Noble and Pedel to Batavia; and as to what concerned the rest, they came thither from Canton, Tayowan, Chinkfieuw, Hoksieu, and other Places, both in Ships and Jonks, but the Places of their Birth and Names were unknown to him, because he had never enquired after them. They desired at Batavia to be Transported to their native Country again, which was accordingly granted them.  
The same Mandarin had a Letter given him, in which a Pass was desired from the General, for the Blyswiik Frigate to carry down some Goods that were to be sent to Quelang, and come up again with Merchandise; and likewise from the Vlaerding Sloop.  
The twenty fifth about Noon a Mandarin brought a Pass for the forementioned Ship and Boat to go up and down the River.  
The twenty sixth in the Morning the controller made several Complaints to the Ambassador, That the Chinese at the buying of the Necessaries for Quelang (appointed by the General) had prevented the Person, who daily brought him Flesh, Fish, Herbs, and the like, into the Lodge, from bringing any more as he used to do, and had complained of him, and made him so odious to the Mandarins, that they had put him and the Coelies Master (which had assisted the Netherlanders in buying of Provisions for their Ships) into Irons; by which means the Coelies, and other labouring People that worked in the Lodge, durst not come any more thither, which put the Hollanders to a great inconvenience.  
There also came an eminent Mandarin to the Lodge, to give order for the Pressing of Jonks at Minjazen, to fetch the Merchandises out of the Ships.  
In the Afternoon, it being fair Wether, the Blyswiik Frigate went away with the Necessaries that were to be sent to Quelang, and also for fresh Provisions for the Ships in netherlands Haven.  
In the same Frigate Captain Ʋander Werf, and Ʋander Does the Secretary, went down to take an account of those Chinese Goods which came over in the Dutch Ships from Batavia, and seize on all their Moneys and Merchandise of any value, because on the two and twentieth the Ambassador had found in one of the Chinese Chests to the value of a thousand Rixdollers in Money, consisting in Spanish Dollars and japan Boat-Silver, which was strictly forbidden in Batavia.  
The Merchants Noble and Harthouwer went in the Afternoon by the Viceroy, General, and Conbon's direction, to Treat about the Trade. When among other things Harthouwer and Noble proposed, That upon Sale they must fetch the Pepper and Sandal Wood out of the netherlands Ships in the Haven; which the Factors refused, saying, That the Goods should be delivered to them in the Ambassador's Lodge. But at last they agreed, That the Goods being fetched out of the netherlands Ships, and brought up the River in Jonks by the General's Order, were to be delivered on the Shore, on the hither side of the Bridge, after the same manner as in former years. Then they desired the particular Parcels of the Merchandise brought thither by the Netherlanders, and how many, and what Goods they would have in Return of them; which they writ down accordingly in their Notes, as China Root, ordinary Tee, Galya, Allom, Preserved Ginger, Hatten, Gold, etc.  
Seeing the great quantity of Allom and Gold Wyer, besides Gold which the Hollanders desired, they seemed to be much amazed, and judged, that the two first sorts could never be afforded for the Prizes that were set down for them by the Netherlanders; and demanded, why the Hollanders had not asked for Silk: To which they were answered, That it could not be done before the Prizes were settled on the Dutch Commodities, and that then an account might be made of their Stock; which they seeming to approve of, soon after departed.  
The twenty eight in the Morning, two of the General Povi's Factor came into the Lodge, of which, one being Povi's Intimate, went with the Interpreter Apari to the Ambassador, and desired him to give him some account of what he had yesterday written to Povi: Whereupon his Excellency made answer, That amongst other things, he would willingly speak with Povi concerning the Trade, and also his going up to Peking: To which he replied, That he being his Favourite, could do much in it; but he would advise to present him with some more Blood Coral, which he dust assure would not be lost, and that about two days after, the Ambassador might come to visit Lipovi, because that and the next were kept as Fast-Days of the first Moon. The Ambassador hereupon answered, That he depended upon the Noble and Heroic Disposition of the General, and therefore desired his Highness to repose Confidence in him, as being a Person of so clear a Spirit, as would endeavour to retaliate the General's Favours. So the Factor being Presented with ten Yards of Red Cloth, and Vowing to serve the Ambassador to the utmost of his Power, took his leave and departed.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning, Putmen went with the Interpreter jenko to the General, to inquire if he was any ways busy, because that was the appointed time for the Ambassador to visit him: Whereupon they were answered, That the General was always employed, but that the Ambassador might come when he pleased; which they at their return acquainting his Excellency, he instantly went to Court, and Presented some Blood Coral to the General. Whereupon his Highness told him, That he well knew the generous Nature of the Ambassador: Who replied, That he esteemed the Favours and kind Receptions which he had received from the General, that he was obliged to study Requital.  
Then the Ambassador desired to know the time, when, and which way he should go to Peking. Whereto he answered, That it was now the ninth Moon, and that he might set forward on his Journey very suddenly.  
Next, the Ambassador desired that they might begin to open Trade, that the Houpou (meaning Noble) might be ready to go along with him. To which was answered, That the Presents must first be viewed, and that the Mandarins thereto employed, had been four days busy about their Orders, which was now done, and the Presents should be looked over in two or three days, and then the Trade should Commence. Their Discourse ended, after a handsome Treat, the Ambassador went very well satisfied to his Lodgings.  
Coming to the Lodge, they were soon after visited by the General's intimate Factor, to tell them, that the General had considered about the Coral Chain, and durst not accept of it; yet at length through his persuasions, and that it came from the Ambassadors own Hand, he had taken it. The Factor likewise desired a great Blood Coral, which was given him, in hopes that he might assist them in their Trade.  
The thirtieth in the Morning, the Ambassador sent a Letter by Putmen, and the Interpreter jenko, to the Viceroy Singlamong to this purpose.  
THe Ambassador had long since heard, and now understood, that Singlamong had a kindness for the Hollanders; therefore he hoped, that he would please to assist him in all things hereafter, which would be no small Obligation only to himself, but also to his Masters, and desired to visit his Highness, to speak with him about the Journey to Peking.  
Against Noon, Putmen came again to the Lodge, relating, That he could not speak with the Viceroy, but after delivery of the Letter received answer, That he should be busy four or five days, so that he could not give the Ambassador Audience, and that nothing could be said about the Journey to Peking, till the Presents were looked over, which would be done in few days; with which answer Putmen took his leave.  
Against the Evening, the General Povi's Interpreter came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador from his Master, that when the Presents were viewed, (which should be done in a day or two,) he would desire the Ambassador to be free as he would be to him, and to ask freely for what ever he wanted, who gave the Interpreter five Yards of Red Cloth for his Message.  
The first of October in the afternoon, the Mandarin Liu-lauja came with Orders 
October.  from the General, to fetch all the Chinese from the Dutch Ships with their Goods; and to that purpose desired a Note to the Commanders of them, to which he was answered, that the netherlands Secretary was gone thither to search their Goods, which Liu-lauja desired might be brought into the Lodge; whereupon the Ambassador gave the Mandarin two Letters, one to Captain Ʋander Werf, and one to the Secretary Ʋander Does, advising them, that the Chineses might be delivered, provided they had been searched and examined before by the Secretary, who if he found any thing of concern, should according to his last Letter, secure it aboard till further Order, with which the Mandarin departed.  
The second and third being Sunday and Monday nothing happened of note.  
The fourth, the Ambassador had Audience granted him by the Viceroy, who after Salutations, complained, that he was indisposed, having great pains in his Head and Back.  
The Ambassador first thanking him for the Honour he received by his presence; then desired to know the time when, and what way he should travel to Peking: To which his Highness answered, That if news came from Peking that day, he might go on the morrow; whereupon the Ambassador desired that the Trade might Commence, that Noble and he might be in a readiness: To which the Viceroy answered, That the Ambassador need not to trouble himself about the Trade, because the sale of all the Goods they had brought might be dispatched in four or five days; but they must first Pack up all the Emperor's Presents, and bring them to the Royal House, and that day on which they were brought they might begin their Trade on the next. On this the Ambassador replied, He would depend on his Highness' Royal Word, and therefore would not trouble him any farther, but that he would give Order, that the Presents should with all speed be brought into his Palace.  
Then the Ambassador's Son presented him for his Daughters a great and small Chain of Blood Coral, which he accepted; yet said, he durst not receive, but that they were a Present from the Ambassador's Son, for his Children; and though himself was much indisposed, yet he desired, that the Ambassador would stay and refresh himself a little; which being performed, after Dinner, just at his Departure, the Viceroy's Daughters, as a thankful return for the Coral, Presented the Ambassadors Son with six Rolls of Silk Stuffs.  
Coming to the Lodge, the Ambassador gave Order for the making of sixteen Cases against the next day, to Pack the Presents in, and carry them to Singlamong's Palace. Soon after, Liu-lauja came to visit the Lord Van Hoorn, telling him, that he should go with him to Peking, but the time when, was yet unknown.  
The fifteenth in the Morning, 
a The Ambassador.  his Lordship sent a Letter by the Interpreter jenko to the Conbon, advising him:  
THat he knew very well the good Inclination which he bore to his Countrymen, and also that he had always assisted them, which they would ever acknowledge with much Thankfulness, in regard the Conbon had for some time been very busy, that he could not have the Honour to speak with him; now he desired, that he might come to proffer his Service to him.  
The Interpreter for all this civility, after their Proud manner, brought only in return, an excuse of indisposition, and that in three or four days he might give him a visit.  
The sixth in the Evening, jenko the Interpreter came to tell the Ambassador, that the Mandarin Liu-lauja was come with all the Chinese from the Ships up to Lamthay Bridg, and desired to know why he had detained some of their Goods; On which the Ambassador answered, that he had express Order from the General and Council of India, that he should do it, because the Chineses desired that they might be only brought over with their Necessaries; therefore, if either Money or Merchandise was found by them, it was forfeited, as it was likewise with his own Men: Whereupon he replied, That the General resented, and that the Mandarin Liu-lauja would speak with the Ambassador about it the next day.  
Noble also informed the Ambassador, that the Factor had told him that very day, that he had privately been informed, that they would have suddenly news from Peking; and also that the Ambassador should not go thither himself, but that the Presents should be sent thither, and that he should stay in Hoksieu, to Treat with the Governors about the Trade, which the Hollanders looked upon as a Discourse without Truth or Reason.  
The seventh and eighth, nothing happened of remark, but only some false rumours that troubled the Ambassador, that the Emperor had ordered the Presents to be brought to Peking, and he to stay at Hoksieu; and on the other side, Singlamong was as much concerned at the seizure of the Chinese Money, which was forfeited according to the Maritime Law.  
The ninth about Noon, they received an account, that all things remained in a good condition at Tinghay, and netherlands Haven, only some new Disputes with the Mandarins and Messages concerning the Chineses forfeited Goods, which were for the most part Silver, Camphire, Coral, and Seed-Pearl.  
The tenth, the Blyswiik Frigate arrived at Lamthay Bridge, laden with Pepper, taken out of another Vessel, and also the remaining Necessaries for the Ambassador and his Retinue, likewise some Packs for his private occasions. The Mandarins (which as Commissioners) had been down with the Frigate, and returned in her, coming to the Lodge, were by the Ambassador presented with as much Cloth, as would make each of them an upper Garment.  
The eleventh, it was resolved in Council, to unlade the Tiger and Constance with the first, and send them to Tinghay, there to make themselves ready to go for Batavia, at the latter end of the Month.  
Lapora the Factor informed the Ambassador, that the next day the Presents would be brought to the Viceroy Singlamong's, there to be viewed; in order to which all things were prepared.  
The twelfth in the Morning, about Day light, the Netherlanders prepared all the Presents in a fit manner to be carried to Court, expecting the Mandarins; but in stead of them, the Factor Lapora brought what they little expected, that they should not bring the Presents to Court, till further Order; by which Dilatoriness, he perceived, that they were not willing as yet, to suffer them to open and vend their Cargo: Therefore he proposed to his Council, If it would not be convenient, for these Delays that he should show his Dislike by Letter; and withal desired, that he might return aboard, until they had liberty to Vend their Goods, or received Orders for their Journey to Peking, which they approved.  
But next Day, while he was preparing the Letter, Lapora coming to the Lodge, he told him what he was about to Write, and resolved to send immediately; who desired him by all means to forbear two or three days longer, to which he was persuaded, which fell out the better; for the next Morning he sent for the Presents.  
At this time, the Ambassador heard there were many Vessels making ready at Lamthay Bridge, whereby he judged, that they were preparing, that when tidings came for him to come to Peking, than they might hurry him away upon a sudden, which made him ask what Vessels they were, and who was to go with them? To which the Interpreter replied, That they were in few days to go with some Tartar Lords, and perhaps with the Ambassador to Peking; for which, and that he might be the freer hereafter to acquaint him with the like, he made a Present of five Yards of Red Cloth.  
The fourteenth, in the Forenoon, the Emperor's Presents were carried to the Viceroy's Court, accompanied with the Ambassador, Noble, Harthouwer, Putmen, the Secretary, and the whole Train, the Presents being carried before, were followed by the Ambassador and his Retinue; who coming to the Palace were brought to the Common-Hall, to stay there while the General's coming, at last they were called into the Presence Chamber, where the Viceroy and General sat on Stools one by another, and next them on their left Hands, three Commissioners sent from Peking, to inquire what Chineses had carried themselves valiantly at the Conquering of Eymuy and Quemuy; which also after the Hollanders were entered, took their leave, being Conducted by the Viceroy to the Stairs descending into the Court, by which they supposed them to be great Lords: The Ambassador was also desired to sit down on a low Stool at the Viceroy's right Hand, and his Attendants in order next him; opposite to them sat the Poetzjensy, the Magistrates of the City and other great Mandarins; the Chests with the Presents standing just without in a Gallery. When the Viceroy began with their usual Compliment to inquire of his Health, afterwards the Chests and Packs with the Presents being opened, the Goods were taken out in several Parcels, brought and laid before their Highnesses to see them; seeming to be well pleased with them, especially some curious Lanterns, and Celestial and Terrestrial Spheres and Globes: Having satisfied their longings, and pleased their curiosity with viewing and re-viewing, they commanded them to be laid up handsomely, and in good order again: Which done, after some familiar Discourses, they Treated them very pleasantly with store of good Liquor; when on a sudden the General went away, being Complemented by the Viceroy to the middle of the Stairs descending into the Court. But the Viceroy returning again into the Hall, gave leave to the Netherlanders to depart; whereupon they also went away: At their going out, Noble was desired by Singlamong's Factor, that he and Harthouwer would be pleased to come to his House, that they might Treat with him concerning the Trade, which they promised to do. The Ambassador having sent a Roundlet of Sack to the Viceroy, desired him to accept of it, which he did, and returned him Thanks.  
According to the Factors Request to Noble the day before, he and Harthouwer went the fifteenth in the Morning to his House, to Discourse with him about the Trade: Soon after their coming, the Factor Road to Singlamong's Palace; from whence he in an hours time returned again, but could not come to any absolute Resolution, only telling them, that he had a Parcel of Silk of about forty Pikol, which he would willingly sell: Who said, That it might be done, but that he would consider, that they could not send any Silk to japan that Year, but that they must first carry it from thence to Batavia, and then send it to japan the next Year, so that they should run a great Risk in sending of it to and fro; yet nevertheless, if they would deal reasonably, they would take a considerable quantity; ask the Price, which the Factor durst not tell, because the Generals and Conbon's Factors were not there present, but promised to consult about it, and let them know their resolution on the Morrow, when they would come to the Lodge, and let them know the Prizes of all their Goods, and so begin to Trade.  
He also advised the Dutch Merchants, that they should go to the General, or to his Factors, and give him an account of what they had done, which the Hollanders did not think convenient, because they had not been with the Viceroy, but went to his Factors, who also promised to come to them on the Morrow, desiring that they would also acquaint the Conbon's Factor with it, which was performed accordingly.  
The Ambassador by the Interpreter De Hase, sent the General a small Roundlet of Sack, which he kindly received.  
Then calling to mind, that the Conbon was not at the looking over of the Presents, and also having understood that he was not well pleased, the Ambassador sending for his Factor, desired to know the reason: To which they replied, That the occasion was, because his Presents which were delivered on August 26. were much less than the Viceroy's or General's, which he took very ill, being as great a Lord as Povi. The Ambassador somewhat troubled at this Relation, entreated his Factors to desire their Lord that he would please to admit, that he might wait upon him, and endeavour to give satisfaction; with which they promised to acquaint him, and bring an answer the next Morning, as he did, letting the Ambassador know he might come to his Master two days after.  
The Interpreter Maurice having again been with Sibontok, to present him with three Swords in the Ambassadors Name, which receiving with Thanks, he promised to do the Hollanders what Service he could; and withal, gave notice, that having Dined the day before at the Generals, He there understood of some Mandarins, that the Netherlanders were in ten or twelve days to travel to Peking, and that he had received his Commands to go before, and to wait for the Ambassador at jemping, being his Dominion through which they were to pass. He therefore desired, that the Ambassador would please to bring with him some Coral, Amber, Sword-Blades, Pistols, Muskets, Cloth, Perpetuanaes', Linen, Looking-Glasses, some Gold Rings, and Sparks or Pebbles, which he had an intent and desire to buy of him.  
All the Governor's Factors, except Singlamong's chiefest, came that day to the Lodge to give the Prizes of their Commodities, and endeavour to make a Bargain. Noble and Harthouwer gave them account of these Merchandizes, viz. Pepper, Sandalwood, Arek, Cloves, Nutmegs, Led, Tin, Calicutor-Wood,, etc.  
The Commodities which the Factors gave the Dutch an account of, consisted in Gold Wyer, China Root, course Tee, Galiga, Allom, Quicksilver, Cubebs, Preserved Ginger, Hatten, Gold: As for raw Silk, one of Povi's Factors said, that the Netherlanders could carry none from thence that year.  
Not long after, the Stewards appeared with a Pass for the Constance Boat, and the Vlaerdings Ship, which set Sail at high Water, Laden with Provisions to the Ships in netherlands Haven.  
The eighteenth, the Ambassador went to visit the Conbon, where he was nobly entertained; and after Dinner, the Cups merrily went round, Health pressing Health, so long, till both sides began to yield to the Intoxicating Liquor.  
The nineteenth about Noon, two Factors sent from the General, came to the Lodge to present the Ambassador in their Master's Name with six Pots of Liquor, in requital for the Roundlet of Sack, which they said was very acceptable to him.  
The Ambassador ask them if they knew not whether any News was come from Peking: They replied, That they knew of none, but that it was expected there in five days time.  
The twentieth in the Morning, the Governor's Factors came a second time to Noble and Harthouwer, to agree about the Price of the Goods, but parted without coming to a Conclusion.  
In the Evening, a Seaman came ashore from Minjazen without the Tartars knowledge, with a Letter sent from Captain Naelhout, who informed the Netherlanders, That yesterday he was coming up in the Vlaerdings Sloop, but was stopped at Minjazen, which necessitated him to go again to the Ships, and had in the Night undertaken the Journey anew, hoping in the Dark to have passed by Minjazen; but that also fell out contrary to his expectation, because the Chineses that kept the Watch in a Jonk that lay in the middle of the Water, had perceived and kept them there; so that they were detained at Minjazen, therefore desired a Pass from the Ambassador to come to him, without which they saw no likelihood of getting thither.  
The Mariner further related, That all things about the Ships were in a good condition, only the Tiger's Men going ashore in the Crab-Hole, to cut Wood, one of them was suddenly seized on, and devoured by a Tiger.  
The Ambassador causing the Interpreter jenko to be called, commanded him to go betimes the next Morning to the Governor of Minjazen's Lodgings (who was yet there) to ask him why he detained his People at Minjazen? And desire him, to give Order, that his Men might pass; which if he refused, the Ambassador must be forced to complain to the General about it.  
The one and twentieth in the Morning, the Interpreter jenko brought answer, That the Governor of Minjazen was gone thither the last Night. The Ambassador considering that the time appointed for the Ships setting forth to Batavia began to approach, thought fit the next day to send a Letter about it to the General; and also to desire a Pass for a Boat to go up and down the River, that they might hear daily from the Ships, which then much concerned the Hollanders.  
The two and twentieth, the Ambassador went to visit Singlamong's Son, and present him with two Pieces of Black Crown Serge, four of fine Stuffs, four of Linen; one Piece of Amber, weighing one Pound and an half, half a dozen of Sword Blades; one Pair of Pistols, and a firelock, the Stock In-laid with Silver. All which he received very courteously, and Entertained the Ambassador after a Princely manner.  
Mean while, the Secretary Ʋander Does went according to the Resolution taken the day before, to deliver him the following Letter, viz.  
It is very acceptable to the Ambassador to understand, that the Hollanders should by him be esteemed as Children and Friends of one Family, of which the Ambassador did not doubt, because Talavja's Word (from whom he had it) was like a Rock, never to be moved; therefore he desired that the little Holland Vessel might be delivered here, and sent down, because a Ship must be sent to Batavia in eight days. He also requested, that his small Boat may come up again; and to that purpose, that he might have a Pass, as in former Years.  
To which the Secretary brought answer: That after he had made his coming known to the General, he stayed three or four Hours upon promise of Admission; yet at last the Interpreter came to tell him, that Talauja was so extraordinary busy, that he could not give him Audience; and therefore if his business was such that he could not send his Message, he must come some other time: Whereupon, the Secretary not being willing to lose his labour, gave the Letter to the Interpreter, to deliver to the General, and desired him to tell Talauja, that the Netherlanders at that time wanted a Pass, more than ordinary, for the free going up and down of their Boats.  
To which the Interpreter brought answer from Talauja, That he had read and understood the Letter, but that some days since he had given a Pass for the Boat and Sloop; which the Secretary answering said, That it was true, but that Pass mentioned nothing, but to go from thence down the River, but not that they might come up again; which appeared by one of them who was returning to Hoksieu with the Commander of the Ship Riding at Tinghay, and was stopped at Minjazen; and withal told him, That if the Ambassador had a Pass for a Vessel to go and return, he must not deliver it but on an extraordinary occasion.  
The Interpreter having related this to the General, his Highness sent word to the Secretary, that he would send for the Mandarin Liu-lauja, and by him send the Netherlanders such a Pass as they had the last year, with which they might go and come when they pleased.  
The twenty third, nothing happened worthy relating.  
On Sunday, being the twenty fourth, because the promised Pass was not come to the controller, Ruwenoort and Interpreter De Hase, were sent to the Mandarin Liu-lauja, to see if he had it ready, and if not, to repair to the General for it. These coming to the Mandarins' House, not finding him at home, went to the General, and let him know the occasion of their coming; Who sent them answer, That they should go to the Mandarin Liu-lauja, he having Orders to give out the Passes: To whom making application, the Mandarin told them, That he would come to the Lodge, and bring them a Pass for a Boat to Sail up and down the River; but when they intended to send any Provisions down, they should only send him word by their Stewards, and he would grant them a particular Pass for that purpose. The General also sent back his Interpreter with the Hollanders, to tell the Ambassador, that no Ships might go to Batavia, before they heard from Peking. But to this they answered nothing, as knowing, that the General could not prevent the going away of their Ships, but that they were highly prejudiced by not having a Pass, they being desirous to know the condition of their Ships every day; and that he would please to make Talauja sensible of the injury he should suffer by it.  
The twenty fifth in the Morning, Liu-lauja and Haykong came to the Lodge, bringing with them a Pass for a small Vessel or Boat to go and come empty, up and down the River, which they gave to the Ambassador, saying, That when a Vessel had been down, and up again, they must return the Pass to Liu-lauja, till another went away, and that then they need only to fetch it again, which the Ambassador promised to do.  
About Noon, the Factor Lapora came with a Tartar to the Lodge, to acquaint the Ambassador, that a small Letter was come thither from Peking, and that his Excellency might now prepare himself for his Journey; because upon the coming of the Emperor's Letter he would immediately be sent away, and the Trade should Commence.  
The six and twentieth in the Morning, the Secretary went to Singlamong's Court, to request him, If Noble might be permitted to speak with his Highness about some business of great Concern: He was also Ordered as he passed by to go to the Conbon, and to Present him with some Elephant's Teeth in the Ambassador's Name; Who refusing them, said, He durst not as yet receive them, but he humbly thanked the Ambassador for his kindness.  
At the Secretaries coming to the Court, he was informed, That the Viceroy was gone to the Generals, so that he returned home without effect.  
The twenty seventh in the Morning, the Secretary went again to the Viceroy, to entreat his Highness, that Noble might come to visit him; whereof being told by the Interpreter, he sent word, that being troubled with Gripes, he could not grant him Audience; and also that he should be busy for four or five days about extraordinary Occasions, and therefore could not let the Houpou come to speak with him; but so soon as the News came from Peking, which was daily expected, the Viceroy would so order his Affairs, that the Houpou might come and see him when he pleased. The Secretary was also commanded to call on the Mandarin Liu-lauja, for a Pass for the Blyswiik to carry down Provisions for the Ships: To which Liu-lauja made answer, That he could give Passes for small Vessels to carry Provisions to the Fleet, but not for so great a Ship; yet he would go to the General to procure a Pass for her, which if he could get, he would send it by a Mandarin that should go down with the Frigate on the morrow following.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning the Viceroy Singlamong's Chief Counsellor came to the Lodge, with three other great Lords, to see the Horses and Oxen, which they were much pleased with, and were entertained very nobly by the Hollanders.  
In the afternoon arrived the Vlaerding and Blyswiik's Sloops, from netherlands Haven, with Captain john Naelhout, informing them, That all things were in safety and good condition, both in netherlands Haven, and at Tinghay.  
The thirtieth, because the promised Pass for the Blyswiik did not come, Noble went to the General to desire it, and also to give Order for the making a Ship ready to sail to Batavia (which ought to have been gone fourteen days before) that so soon as News came from Peking, she might set Sail, alleging, it required two or three Weeks before she would be fit to go to Sea. He went likewise to the Mandarin Liu-lauja, to show him the Pass which was brought back by the Sloop, according as they had promised him, and to desire it again, because another Boat was to be sent down the next morning.  
But Noble could not come to speak with the General, being very busy about other Occasions; but was informed, That the Mandarin Liu-lauja had Order to prepare the Passes: Whereupon Noble going to the Mandarin, was told, That the Pass for the Ships had been writ some days, and was at the Generals to be Signed, which he would not fail to bring as soon as done.  
The one and thirtieth, being Sunday, the Ambassador sent jenko once more to desire the Pass for the Ships from the General, but could not come to speak with him, which made him go to Liu-lauja, who had promised to bring it.  
The Viceroy Singlamong's Factor came the same day to tell Noble, That his Highness for some days had been very busy, which had prevented him from granting Audience; but now being somewhat better at leisure, he desired, That if he had any thing to request, he would come to him.  
The first of November in the Morning Singlamong's chief Factor sent a Messenger 
November.  to Noble, that according to the appointment made the day before he might come to Court, where he was expected; whereupon he immediately went thither, with Captain Naelhout, that according to the Ambassadors Order they might acquaint his Highness, First, That they were informed no Silk could be transported from thence that Year; and also, that others, on the contrary, said, That the Factors should not Trade with the Netherlanders, unless they would take their Raw Silks at high Rates against the Dutch Commodities: Besides, that he understood, that the Ambassador upon the receipt of the Emperor's expected Letter, should immediately begin his Journey; and that therefore he must be in a readiness, which was impossible to be done, because Noble, who necessarily must go up to Peking with him, must first be there present at the driving and finishing of the Trade; besides, that in the four following Months the River could not be Navigated, because of the Ice. Lastly, 
Four Months the River Hoksieu in China not navigable.  to desire his Highness, That he would be pleased to assist the Hollanders in the Trade, that so the Ships might be sent to their respective Places; the more, because two of them must on necessity go to Holland. After which, the Viceroy asked concerning the Ambassador's Health, and then answered, That the Emperor was very glad that the Hollanders came to Trade in his Dominions: As to what concerned Silk, it was forbid to be transported; but if the Factors could agree with the Hollanders for a Price that might be to their satisfaction, they would allow the Transportation of it. He wished also, That the Prices of their several Commodities might be speedily agreed on. Hereupon Noble (in regard the Factors seemed so shy in bidding a good Price, told the Viceroy, That if he had brought too much Pepper or Sandalwood thither, they might only take as much as they wanted, and that he would carry the rest away again; adding moreover, That it was but reason the Hollanders should sell for advantage now, in regard of the vast Expense of their present Embassy. This was immediately answered by his Highness, saying, That they might be supplied by him, as he had done in Canton to former Ambassadors. Concerning the Ambassador's Journey to Peking, which will be in the approaching Winter, he ought to furnish himself with good Furred Clothes; and where they could not go by Water, they should have Horses and Palakins to travel by Land: And that the Hollanders ought rather to bring more of their Commodities thither, than carry any away from thence. Whereupon Noble presented his Highness, in the Ambassadors Name, with the Chain of Blood-Corral, which he so long desired, and accepted with many Thanks: Then taking his leave, he was conducted into another Chamber, and treated very nobly with variety of Dainties.  
In the afternoon the Steward Onquemoy came to the Lodge to acquaint the Ambassador, That the Pass was brought for the Ship to go down with the Provisions; but that the Governor of Minjazen had it, to whom it must have been delivered at its passing by Minjazen: Whereupon the Ambassador sent the Interpreter De Hase to the forementioned Governor, to ask if any thing was specified in the Pass, for a Boat to come up again, to bring News from the Ships: To which the Interpreter Hase at his Return brought this Answer, That he could not speak with the Governor himself, but his Secretary had told him, That the Pass made mention of nothing else, but to let the Ship and Sloop go down, but not come up again.  
The Ambassador not satisfied with such an answer, the next morning sent the Secretary Ʋander Does to know the Contents of the Pass; but not being permitted to speak with the Governor, he only brought back word, That the Pass contained no more than what was told the Interpreter the day before; and therefore if the Netherlanders desired another Pass, they must go to the General for it. Whereupon the Secretary was immediately sent to the Mandarin Liulauja, to desire the standing Pass which he had promised to make, for the Boat to go up and down the River, and send it together with that for the Ship; and withal tell him, how necessary it was for them constantly to know the Condition of their Ships and People: But the Secretary coming thither, and being informed that he was gone to the Lodge, returned home.  
In the afternoon the forementioned Mandarin came with the desired Pass, drawn after the same manner as the former had been; but a while after the Interpreter jenko, sent from Liu-lauja, came to fetch the Pass again, under pretence that a Name was forgotten, which must needs be put into it, promising to return it immediately.  
The same day the Factors came to the Dutch Merchants Lodgings, to conclude an Agreement about the Prizes of their Merchandise; but parted again, without making an end.  
In the evening the Ambassador sending for the Interpreter jenko, showed himself much dissatisfied that he did not return the Pass for the Vessels to go to and again, he having promised, That so soon as a Name was put in, it should be redelivered: To which he answered, That Liu-lauja had commanded him to ask for it, because the Mandarins' Name which was to go down with it, was to be inserted; and why it was not brought again, he knew not.  
The same day Captain john vander Werf set Sail in the Blyswiik to netherlands Haven, where by the Ambassadors Election he was to bear the chief Command, and observe all Transactions, and keep things in good order.  
The Treasurer acquainted the Ambassador, That the fifty Picol of Kadjang, and twenty Gammons of Bacon, were not yet brought for the Ships, because the Steward had told him, That there was an Order that no Kadjang nor Gammons of Bacon might be transported: Whereby the Ambassador seeing, that seldom any Provision was sent to the Ships without the greatest trouble imaginable, judged it convenient to write a Letter to the General, to this purpose.  That the Ambassador had always found Talauja kind and affable, and therefore thanked him: That he likewise knew that he had much Business, wherefore he would not be troublesome to him: That the Holland Seamen must in this Mouson be provided for with Meat and Drink, or else they could not live: That the Ambassador had continually been put to much trouble to get fresh Provisions; therefore he desired, that the Husbandmen might every eight days carry Porkers, and the like fresh Provisions, with their own Vessels, and sell them to the Ships, which would save both him and Talauja a great deal of trouble. 
This Letter Noble and the Secretary Ʋander Does carried to Court, to deliver it to the General; but coming to the City Gates, they were stopped by the Watch, who said, That Order was come from the General, not to let any Hollanders into the Town; whereupon they resolved to return, which the Guards seeing, called them back, and suffered them to pass to the Generals, whither coming, they sent him word of their being there, for which he sent to know the Reason; whereupon they delivered the Ambassadors Letter to his Interpreter, who brought them this answer, That Talauja was very busy, and could not grant them Audience; but that he permitted the Netherlanders to carry as much Provision out as they pleased, first giving an account of it to the Mandarin Liu-lauja, that the General might afterwards sign it▪ But he did not understand that any Person should buy all manner of Goods, and carry them aboard, without being willing that the Waiters should perform their Office, in searching the Ship, whereby they should give an account of what they transported; and likewise, that they must use their own, and not Chinese Vessels.  
Mean while the Interpreter jenko brought back the Pass for the Sloop to go up and down the River. The Blyswiik Frigate, the Water being somewhat fallen, stuck about a Canonshot from the Bridge, where she was forced to stay till High-water.  
The fourth there was nothing done, but a Dispute concerning the Waiters stopping the Frigate, and clapping her aboard with four or five of their best Jonks, and that some Mandarins desired she might be brought back to the Bridge.  
The next day all the Governor's Factors came to the Lodge, but went away again without speaking any thing concerning the Trade.  
In the evening the Vlaerding Sloop arrived there again from netherlands Haven, with a Letter from Captain john Ʋander Werf, where he found the Polesnip that came from Quelang riding at an Anchor; wherefore he thought it convenient to send his Book-keeper thither, to acquaint his Excellency with it by a Letter, and to advise him, That all things about the Ships were in good condition, and also that they had not seen any Ships either going to or coming from japan.  
The fifth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Interpreter jenko to the General, to acquaint him with the Fly-boats arrival, and also to desire that Noble might come and speak with him. The Interpreter returning with two Mandarins, told the Ambassador, That the General was so busy about some private Concerns of the Empire, that he could not give any public Audience. Mean while a Ship did afterwards come thither from Quelang, which the General had privately permitted to go away again with Provisions and other Necessaries; but she was now returned, which his Highness did not understand, and therefore the Ambassador must give immediate Order for her to be gone. Hereupon the Ambassador answered the Mandarins, That it should be done; and desired them to bring a Pass for the Sloop to go to and fro to carry Tidings, which they promised without fail to perform.  
The sixth, a Servant bringing a Pass from the Mandarin Liu-lauja, for a Vessel to carry Provisions to and again, said, That the Sloop must at farthest go away the next Morning.  
The seventh against noon, with the Ebb, the Vlaerdings Sloop went down with certain Writings, kept by Caroli their Clerk and Maurice the Interpreter; but they returned again, telling, That the Governor of Minjazen would not suffer any fresh Provisions, as Hogs and Fruitage, to be carried down; whereupon the Ambassador commanded them to take nothing but the Papers and Writings.  
The tenth in the morning jenko the Interpreter related, That a Chinese Jonk sent from Batavia to Hoksieu with Pepper and Sandalwood, was forced (not being able for contrary Winds to reach her desired Port) to put into Huiting, there being about forty Chinese in her: The Master of her coming by Land, had been in Hoksieu to attend the General, but was returned with his Letters, without effecting any of his proposed Designs.  
In the afternoon a Clerk belonging to the Conbon's Secretary came to bring the Hollanders a Copy of what had been done concerning their Business in Peking, and also said, That a Currier was come before with Letters, and that in a few days the express Orders would be there; which News he supposing would be very acceptable to the Hollanders, he had endeavoured to be the first Person that should bring it. The Ambassador gave little credit to this Report, by reason of the meanness of the Person that brought it; but told him, If his News were true, he would remember him with a Present, which he supposed he wanted.  
In the evening the Conbon's Factor came, confirming the News which the Poor Man brought in the morning, and wished the Ambassador Joy in his Master's Name with the Good Tidings: Whereupon the Ambassador immediately sent to the Mandarin Liu-lauja for a Pass for the Blyswiiks Sloop, that she might go and see if the Flyboat which was ordered to stay at Tinghay till the twelfth Instant, could yet be found to carry this News to Batavia: To which purpose he immediately wrote a Letter, enclosing the Copy which came from Peking, to be Translated at Batavia, he having no time to do it himself: But the desired Pass came not.  
The twelfth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Blyswiik's Sloop down with the forementioned Letter, to which he added the Reason why he could not send before. Mean while all the Governor's Factors came to wish the Ambassador Joy with the Good Tidings he had received from Peking, moreover desiring, that they might have leave to Trade with the first.  
It was also reported, That Commissioners were come to Compliment the Liquean Agents, and Present them in the Emperor's Name, because it was not thought convenient to let him come to Peking.  
In the Afternoon the Vlaerding's Boat, with the Blyswiik's Sloop, returned, coming too late to overtake the Polesnip, she having set Sail for Batavia that morning.  
In the evening the Interpreter jenko told Noble, That he was ordered the next Morning to go to the Commissioners that were come from Peking to Compliment the Liquean Agents; but what it was for, he knew not.  
The thirteenth the Ambassador sent jenko to the Mandarin Liu-lauja, to know the Reason why no Provision might be sent down in the Boat: In Answer to which, he brought word, That Liu-lauja promised on the morrow to go to the General in their behalf.  
On Sunday in the evening, being the fourteenth, jenko informed Noble, That the General had sent for him to go to the Commissioners about the Liquean Business, because he had not been there the day before, according to their Request: But now going thither, the Commissioners asked him if the Hollanders had no Blood-Corral, little Dogs, and other Trifles to sell: To which jenko had replied, That he knew not; but was sure they had Pepper, Sandalwood, Cloth, Crown-Serge, and other such like Commodities.  
The fifteenth against Noon, Singlamong's Interpreter came to the Ambassadors Lodging, who asked him concerning the News that on the eleventh Instant came thither from Peking, and what the Viceroy thought of it; but he seemed to be ignorant thereof, which made the Ambassador show him the Letter, and ask him a second time whither it was true or not, desiring him to take the Copy, and show it to the Viceroy.  
And because the Pass for the Boat to carry down Fresh Provisions was not yet brought, and that the Steward which furnished the Hollanders with all such Necessaries, had so often deceived them by delays; therefore it was judged fit to send a Letter to the General, and therein advise him what trouble they had continually before they could get any Provision sent down.  
The seventeenth in the morning the Mandarin Han-lauja came to visit the Ambassador, who among other Discourse asked him, If when he desired to speak with the General, he must send notice into the City? To which he replied, That such was Talauja his Order.  
Against Noon the Pass was brought for the Boat, so that the Provisions were immediately put aboard, That she might be ready to go off at High Water.  
The Ambassador wrote a Letter with the Provision to Captain Ʋander Werf, advising him of the whole Intrigues of that Place: Notwithstanding all which, in the Evening Stulburgh and Smitsen came to tell them, That the Chineses would not let the 
a A kind of Corn.  Kadjang pass, saying, It must first be growned, before the Netherlanders should transport it; supposing, since they carried such great Quantities out, that they might sow it in some other place: Whereupon although the Ambassador himself went to the Steward Onquemoy, yet he prevailed no more, but that the Kadjang was weighed, and ten Picol sent aboard, with some other Provision for the Ships.  
The same day the Commissioner sent from Peking to meet the Liquean Agents, came to the Lodge to see the Horses and Oxen, whom the Hollanders civilly entertained.  
The eighteenth in the morning Hanlauja the Mandarin came to acquaint the Ambassador, That the General would speak with him as soon as he pleased, and that he might bring the Presents.  
In the afternoon the General sent the Ambassador two Letters written from the Emperor at Peking, concerning his Business; which having perused, they consulted about the delivery of the Presents.  
It was judged fit, that those intended for the Viceroy Singlamong, should be delivered to him first, he being the Chief in Quality: Upon which Result, the Ambassador immediately sent Factor Lapra thither, to compliment his Highness, and deliver him the Presents sent from Batavia: But the Viceroy being busied about entertaining the Emperor's Commissioner, nothing for the present was done in it.  
The nineteenth in the forenoon the Netherlanders preparing themselves, first went to the General with his Presents, where coming, and being seated as formerly, after complimental Salutes, the Ambassador thanked him for his kind Writing in the Hollanders behalf to Peking, and told him, that they had brought the Presents along with them, sent to his Highness from the Lord General and Indian Council, which they entreated him to accept: But Siangpovi refusing, said, That till such time as the Emperor had his, and they were returned from Peking, he could not receive them; but advised the Ambassador to have all things in a readiness for his Repair to Peking, which he believed would be within ten or twelve days. Whereupon the Ambassador desired, That in regard of the present Winter, and for that the Trade was not finished, it might be put off till February. To which Talauja answered, That in the Journey the Emperor's Orders must be followed and observed in all Points, and that the Ambassador ought to have all things in readiness: As to what concerned the Trade, he would be assistant to him, that it might speedily be finished: And notwithstanding it was a Custom, that the Ambassadors must first deliver their Presents, before they were permitted to Trade; yet because the Hollanders were come from such remote Countries, and also that they might the better defray their Expenses, he granted them to Trade before they went. Then after a handsome Treat, with many thanks to his Highness for his Kindness towards them, they returned to the Lodge.  
The twentieth about daybreak the Vlaerding's Boat arrived there from netherlands Haven, with the Commanders Hendrick Bommer and Peter johnz de Vlieg: The Pilots Mate also delivered a Letter to the Ambassador from Captain Ʋander Werf, advising him, That he had received all the Provisions sent with the Boat in safety; but he doubted that they lay in some danger, because several Jonks of War came daily Cruising there, and several Guards were placed between the Straits of Minjazen, and more Guns planted every where.  
The same day, according to Order, the Lord Hoorn went with the Presents to Singlamong's Palace; where coming, and some Compliments passed, the Ambassador requested his Highness to accept of what he had brought; to which he answered, That since the Business went well at Peking, he kindly accepted of them, and ordered them to be delivered to him. Then he asked Noble, who was there present, if he had not put them in the right way, when he told them, That if they sent an Ambassador to the Emperor, they could not miss their Desires? and that for the future they might rely on his Judgement. The Ambassador ask his Highness how he would please to Order his Journey, and when it would be? replied, That the Letter from the Hopous and Pingtouws was expected there in five or six days, to provide Coelies, which are Porters, Vessels, and other Necessaries for his accommodation, and that then he should know exactly when he was to set forth. After the Presents were opened before him, and he seeming to be well pleased with them, he asked the Ambassador, spying some rich Furs amongst the Goods, if there was cold Wether in his Country? who answered Yes; and pointing at the Furs, said he should Cloth himself well with them. After a sleight Caress the Hollanders desired leave to depart, which was granted them, his Highness excusing himself, that because of his Distemper he could not be present to Entertain the Ambassador, who with all his Attendants went again to the Lodge.  
The one and twentieth the Conbon's Factor came to tell the Ambassador, That if he pleased, he might that day come and speak with his Master: whereupon the Ambassador laying hold of the opportunity, went immediately thither; coming to his Palace, and the first Ceremonies passed, the Ambassador desired him to accept the Presents, which with much persuasions and many arguments he did. Then the Ambassador desired him, that since he had always assisted the Hollanders, he would now also be pleased to continue his favour by Letters of Recommendation to Peking in their behalf; which he promised.  
The one and twentieth and two and twentieth the Governor's Factors came again to Noble to Treat with him about the Price of their Goods, yet returned without making any Conclusion.  
The twenty third nothing happened worth observation.  
The twenty fourth the General's Factors came to fetch their Majesty's Presents.  
And now in regard the time began to approach when the Dutch Ships were to Sail from the Coast, and the Emperor's Letter came thither the eighteenth Instant, yet the Ambassador had not received the least benefit of it more than before, because the Chinese Merchants, so long as no other Bills were put up before the Lodge than what had been there ever since his coming, they durst not come to buy the netherlands Commodities; therefore he wrote a Letter to the General, That since the Emperor's Letter was come from Peking, he did not doubt but the Trade might be driven, and Proclamations of his Majesty's Letters be put up, as in their former Years; and also that the little Ship might be suffered to go down to fetch some Merchandise. This Letter translated into the Chinese Tongue the Interpreter would not carry; neither were the Hollanders suffered by the General's Order to come into the City; wherefore it was unanimously concluded, That the Ambassador should immediately in Person go to the General, and tell him the Contents of it verbatim, with many other things; and if his Excellency should be stopped at the City Gates, he should return without taking any further notice, and then send away the Blyswiik without a Pass.  
The Ambassador hereupon made himself ready to go to the Court; but going to sit in his Sedan, or Palakin, there were no Coelies, or Porters to be had to carry it, the Mandarin that kept the Guard at the Lodge having forbidden them: Yet resolving to prosecute his Design, he went thither on foot, notwithstanding it was above an hours Walk: coming to the City Gates he was stopped a little, because the Soldiers that were on the Guard would first send to acquaint the General with it before they would let him in: whereupon he going back a little, asked the Guards if they had order to keep him out? who though they made the former Answer, yet suffered him to pass; whereupon sending notice to the General of his being there, after several Excuses he was admitted and brought before him; by whom being placed, he desired him to excuse the Hollanders for being thus troublesome to him, as being forced thereto: for whereas they hoped, that after the coming of the Emperor's Letter they should have been permitted to drive their Trade, and enjoy more freedom than before; on the contrary, it was worse and worse: for their Letters could not be delivered, nor their People admitted into the City: nay more, the Mandarin that had the Guard of the Lodge had forbid the Coelies to do their duty to himself. To which the General answered, That he never forbid the Coelies, nor had given order to keep him out at the Gates; but that it was only meant to the Seamen, that came to buy several things in the City which he would not suffer. Then the Ambassador delivered him the Letter writ that Morning; which having read, he answered, That the little Ship might go down freely; to which purpose he would send either a Pass or a Mandarin. The Trade granted by the Emperor he also permitted them in the same manner. Moreover he would order other Bills to be writ, and put before the Lodge, that the Netherlanders might Trade with whom they would; but they must remember not to buy any Goods which in the Proclamation were forbidden to be Transported, viz. Silk, Pelangs, Panjes, and the like Stuffs. And as concerning their Merchandise, they held them up too high, etc.  
Noble hearing him speak of Trade (which was his Business) answered, That they did not set too high a value on their Commodities, but that the Factors would not give so much for them now as heretofore, and if they should dispose of their Goods at their Rates they should lose by them; therefore desired his Highness to send other People to deal with them, not being willing to have to do with his Factors.  
Hereupon the General seeming to be somewhat displeased, diverted the Discourse, ask the Ambassador when he would take his Journey? he replied, When the Trade was finished; also that several Goods to be given to the Council must be fetched from netherlands Haven: To which he made no Answer, but looked strange when he heard the Council of State mentioned.  
Then the Ambassador told him by his Interpreter, That as he would be obedient to his Highness in all things, and govern himself, according to the Custom of the Country; so he hoped the General would give order that he might not lose his Reputation, nor be slighted; desiring his Highness to take notice, that he was the Representative of the netherlands Nation, and would rather die than his Masters, the States of Holland, should suffer any Reproach through his miscarriage. To which he replied, That no such thing was intended, that should either be a prejudice to their Honour, or dissatisfaction to himself as their Ambassador. Whereupon he requested, that his Highness would give order to his Factor for the sudden dispatch of the Trade, as he would also to Noble.  
In the Afternoon the Mandarin Liu-lauja came to the Lodge, being sent from the General to the Ambassador, with two exact Copies of the Letters from Peking, who asked him if he would sell all his Commodities there, or carry them to Peking? To which he answered, That he would vend them there. Moreover, the Mandarin desired to have a List of his Followers that were to attend him in his Embassy to Peking, that he might provide Coelies for him. He promised also to bring a Pass for the Ship the next Morning; and likewise Bills to stick up before the Lodge.  
The twenty ninth and thirtieth nothing happened of note.  
In the Evening the first of December the Blyswiik set Sail, Laden with several 
December.  fresh Provisions for the Ships in netherlands Haven and at Tenhay.  
Next Morning Harthouwer and Ʋander Does went with the Boat to netherlands Haven, to take an exact account of all the Money and Goods seized on and taken from the Chineses, and to send them with the ten Chests of Silver belonging to the Company, with the Blyswiik Frigate to Lamthay near Hoksieu, where the Ambassador resided with his Retinue.  
The fourth the Factors, after having some days before agreed on the Prices of the Goods, began in the presence of the two Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja, to weigh and receive the Pepper at the Lodge.  
The Ambassador also the same day writ to the General to this effect:  
THe Prices of the Merchandise are now agreed on, and the two Ships may come into the River up to the Town; but the great Ship at Tenhay must deliver her Goods there: That the Ambassador depends upon Talavja's goodness; wherefore he was emboldened to request, that the two Ships might come one by one up to the Tower: to which purpose he desired they might have Passes, that so the Merchandise might be taken out of them with the more convenience and celerity: That if Talauja would please to order, that the Pepper and Sandal Wood might be weighed by the Factors below in the Ships, the Ambassador would take it as a great favour.  
This being carried by the Interpreter de Hase, he received this Answer, That the General would speak with the Factors about it, and then send his Resolution.  
The fifth they spent in weighing of Pepper.  
The sixth the two Chinese from Batavia came to the Ambassador, desiring that they might go with him as Interpreters to Peking, having been detained with the rest of the Prisoners two Months in a Spanish Jonk in Hoksieu, and now set at liberty upon Security.  
The seventh nothing was done.  
The eighth in the Morning the Ambassador sent the Interpreter de Hase to the General, to have an Answer of the Letter sent to him the fourth Instant.  
The same day Harthouwer and the Secretary Ʋander Does came with the Vlaerding Boat from netherlands Haven, and gave an Account to the Ambassador, That they had done all things there according to his Excellency's Order; that the Vlaerding was Unladen of all her Pepper, and the Blyswiik Laden full with Calicutor and Sandal Wood, so that there was nothing remaining in the Vlaerding but a little of the forementioned Woods, a small parcel of Tin, and some Lead, with which they had left the Blyswiik at the great Tower. The seized Chinese Goods and Moneys they had opened, and added the Coin to the Ambassador's Accounts. When going down to netherlands Haven they saw Warlike Preparations, of which making enquiry, they told them that thirty Coxingan Jonks were seen hover near the Point of Hoitang: whereupon the Governor of Minjazen received order, not only to put himself in a posture of Defence, but also to drive them from the Coast. From thence being got to netherlands Haven, towards the Evening the Mandarin which kept Guard with the Jonks came aboard the Vlaerding, to inform them, That several Coxingan Jonks were come to Tenhay, who counterfeiting themselves carried the Tartars Colours, and that two of them had put in to netherlands Haven, and he left them there at his coming from thence: Wherefore the Vlaerdings Boat went thither with the Secretary by the Night-tyde, to give notice thereof to the Alphen, one of their Vessels, Riding at an Anchor there, to keep good Watches, and be very careful. When the Secretary arrived at Tenhay, the Seamen of the Alphen informed him, That the Night before fifteen Coxingan Coya's (which are little Vessels of forty and sixty Tun, with a single Mast) had viewed their Ship, but at the firing five Guns at them they all fled; besides twenty four great Jonks, which only showed themselves about the Islands, without making any attempt upon their Ship.  
The fifth in the Morning fifteen Tartar Jonks coming out of the Hole, Sailed to the Crocodile Islands, and returned again in the Evening, with intention to run in at Tenhay; but those of the Alphen firing their Cannon prevented their Design.  
The same day the Interpreter de Hase (who had been sent the fourth Instant to the General) came back with his Interpreter, to tell the Ambassador in his Master's Name, That the Ship might freely come up to the Tower, and that he would write about it to the Governor of Minjazen; and asked moreover, if the Ambassador would be ready against the twenty fifth Instant to repair to Peking: To which the Ambassador sent the following Letter as an Answer to the General, which was to this effect:  
THe Ambassador thanks Talauja for his good Inclinations. The Pepper which was in the Lodge, being about two thousand three hundred Picols, hath been delivered to the Factors; therefore the Ambassador desires that Talauja will be pleased to order the Factors, that the Allom, Gold-wyre, and other Commodities may be delivered to the Hopou; that in a little time one of the Ships may Sail to Batavia, and the Ambassador make himself ready for his Journey to Peking.  
About three days after the Ambassador and his whole Retinue were invited to come to the Viceroy on the eleventh Instant to a Wayang, desiring him also to bring his Musicians along with him, because he had a great desire to hear them.  
The eleventh in the Morning Singlamong's Factor came to the Lodge to wait upon the Ambassador according to the Invitation: who coming to the Court, and being conducted to the common Hall, there came some Chineses to him, which two years since had deserted Coxinga, and submitted to the Tartars; who with the Netherlanders were also conducted into the Presence, and placed opposite to each other on his right Hand. He having enquired after the Ambassador's Health, said that he had no time till then to entertain his Lordship, but seeing so fair an opportunity, of relaxing from public Concerns, he desired that they might rejoice and be merry together. Whereupon the Tables being spread with variety of Dishes, whilstt hey sat and pleased their Palates with diversity of Acates; their Eyes also were feasted with mimic Entries of several Antimasques; when the Viceroy desired some of their Music, and to hear their Musicians Play, which filled up the Intermeans with great satisfaction. Thus having spent most part of the day with a continued Feast, and variety of Divertisements, the Ambassador returning Thanks, and they being all in good humour, took his Leave, and in the Evening went to his Lodgings.  
About Noon the next day the Mandarins, Liu and Lauja, came to demand the detained Chinese Goods, urging many Reasons to that purpose. But the Ambassador answered, That he neither could nor durst restore them, till he had Orders from Batavia. Which Demand and Answer raised a great Heat on both sides: Whereupon the Ambassador, by the advice of his Council, sent a Letter to Talauja, the substance whereof follows:  
THat the Ambassador hath always received favour and respect from Talauja, for which he is very thankful; yet he hath now sent twice to command him to restore the Goods belonging to the Chineses that came from Batavia: The General well knows, he was desired to take notice, that the Chineses have driven a private Trade formerly in the Holland Ships, and with their Commodities; therefore the Lord General had directed the Ambassador to observe them strictly and prevent it: That his Highness would be pleased to consider, that the Ambassador cannot restore them without order from his Masters; therefore he desires the General to have patience till he had writ to them and received their Answer: That he shall, according to Talavja's Pleasure, use all means possible to persuade that the Goods may be restored, and then he shall be satisfied, and the Ambassador be blameless.  
The General's Factor came the same day to invite the Ambassador to another Feast or Wayang, and desired him in his Master's behalf that he would bring his Music with him, because he was very desirous to hear them. To which he answered, That he would be there at the appointed time, and satisfy his Master's Request.  
The fifteenth in the Morning the Interpreter jenko went with the forementioned Letter to the Court, to show it the General: from whence returning he brought in Answer, That his Highness expected him at Dinner, and then he would talk further. But before he went he advised with his Council, what was best to be answered, if the General should first move the Business, and ask where the Goods were? what they amounted to? where they would leave them while they took their Journey to Peking? and if they intended to restore them or not? 'Twas judged convenient, that to the General's Question, Where the Goods were? the Ambassador should answer, Aboard the several Ships: The value of them, and what they were? They would give an account of at convenient time: concerning the restoring them, he should say, That it could not be done without order from Batavia: and if he asked where they would leave them? to reply, That the Money should be made use of for their Expenses; but withal to assure him, that no part of it should be diminished, but upon Orders from Batavia be repaid.  
Hereupon the Ambassador went to the Court with all his Attendants: where coming, and having stayed a short space in the common Hall, they were conducted into an Antichamber near the public Place of Audience: where the General sat on a Stool before a Table, with other Tables standing on both sides of him, furnished with several Dishes. The Ambassador was placed next Talauja, and his chief Followers on Benches on each Hand of him; when being all seated, they were served very plentifully with variety of Meats and Drinks, and betwixt their Courses Farces presented to them, whilst the General drank very freely, and pressed the Hollanders to turn up their Bowls and be merry. After having spent some time, the Ambassador's Music was ordered to Play; with which the General was much delighted. The time approaching for their departure, the Interpreter bid the Ambassador speak to his Highness about the Chinese Goods: which caused him to ask if he had received the Letter which he had sent to him in the Morning? who replied, Yes, he had, and understood the Contents. Moreover he said, That in the time of the War some of the Chinese Inhabitants fled, which now in time of Peace came to their Country again, bringing with them what by long trouble and labour they had got together: He had spoke with the Viceroy about it, who also thought it was an unhandsome action to detain their Goods; and therefore he would have them restored, having an Inventory of them from the poor Men they were taken from.  
The Ambassador in answer thereto replied, That he would not contest with the General, but that he could not, nor durst restore them, but if he would take them by force he might. To which the General making no reply, changed his Discourse, saying, That a Chinese Jonk coming from Batavia was cast away before Canton, whose chief Commander very well knew the Ambassador and Constantine Noble: wherefore he asked if that Jonk came in company with them from Batavia? and if the Ambassador knew any thing concerning it? who answered, That he was ignorant of it, much less that they came with them from Batavia. Which Discourse ended, the Ambassador desired leave to depart, which was accordingly granted.  
The same day the Conbon's Factors came to invite him on the sixteenth to a Feast, or Wayang, to which he promised to come.  
The sixteenth nothing passed worthy of observation, only the Factors delivered some Allom.  
According to the Invitation on the fifteenth by the Conbon's Factors, the Ambassador went thither with his Attendants; and coming to his Palace he was conducted into a Hall, when after a short stay, because some Mandarins were busy with the Conbon, he was called into the Presence Chamber, where the Tables were ready covered; and being bid Welcome, was desired to sit down at a Table, standing on the left Hand, and his Attendants each in their respective Place, where they passed the time in Feasting till the Evening, when the Ambassador took his Leave of the Conbon and departed.  
BUt now to digress a little concerning their Chinese Wayangs, or stageplays; 
Trigaut.  Trigaut reports that they are strangely delighted with such Divertisements; and the Actors on the other side have an extraordinary faculty therein, so that an incredible number of their Youth maintain themselves by Acting, every where showing both Comic and Tragic Presentations.  
The eighteenth nothing happened of any note, being spent only in the receiving of China Roots and Quicksilver.  
The nineteenth the Secretary at his going out met accidentally with two Hollanders, which seemed to be Strangers, and were carrryed on travelling Chairs made of Canes, who saluted the Secretary with taking off their Hats, but passing by a great pace, as in transitu, he had no time to speak to them.  
The Interpreter de Hase acquainted the Ambassador, that he had heard from some Chineses, that a Holland Ship was arrived at Sincheu; who making enquiry after it, was informed that two Holland Ships lay at Sanchefoe; and also that two Hollanders belonging to the said Ships were that Morning gone to the General.  
In the Afternoon the Mandarin Liu-lauja came to tell the Ambassador from the General, that he was to take but twenty of his Train with him to Hoksieu: whereupon the Ambassador asked if the Horses and Oxen should not be brought up to Peking▪ for than more Men would be necessarily required? but he would leave it to the General to order as many as he pleased. He also asked if there had been no Hollanders with the General? he replied, That when he came from Talavja's Court he saw two Hollanders stand at the Door, which were come thither by Land from Sincheu, but that he knew not in what Ship they came thither.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning the General's Interpreter came to the Lodge, to tell the Ambassador from his Lord, that the Vessels, Horses, Coelies, and all things necessary for the Journey were now ready, therefore asked when he would please to set forward? Moreover he said, That a Mandarin was come from the Viceroy Singlamong, to know the time; and that he did m●…h wonder what made the Netherlanders so dilatory in the Journey, which at first they were so hasty for; therefore he desired them to appoint the certain Day, that he might acquaint his Master. Which the Ambassador thus answered, That there were some Goods yet remaining in the Ships which were for the Lipovies, that must be unladen and packed up before he could go; and also the Trade must be finished, and the Factor's Goods be delivered, because the Hopou Noble must go with him. On which the Interpreter asked, how long time it required before all could be finished? In a short time, replied the Ambassador, it may be done, if they ascertain their Weights, and deliver their Silk according to the Patterns.  
While they were arguing these Matters, the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja came to the Lodge with Orders from the General; in which he commanded that the Netherlanders should restore the seized Chinese Goods; which were to this purpose:  
THe General of Fokien helps his Natives. Liu and Liu-lauja, both Mandarins, have acquainted the General in Writing concerning the Batavian Chinese Goods, detained in the netherlands Ships; which the General sends this Mandarin to fetch thence: To which purpose the Ambassador is hereby desired to send one of his Servants to go down with him to show the Goods, that they may be taken away: When they are come hither, the Chineses shall set them down Piece by Piece, and show them to the General; then after further Orders from the Emperor they shall be delivered to the Owners. The Chineses are also commanded to keep an exact account of what Goods are brought up of theirs in the Bark to Lamthay.  
Hereupon the Ambassador told them, that Noble, Harthouwer, and Ʋander Does should go to the General, to ask if that were his Will and Command: To which the Mandarins replied, That they would stay and go with them, to hear Talavja's Order, and govern themselves accordingly. The Mandarin Liu-lauja also said, That two Hollanders which had been at Tayowan, were now at the Generals, and asked if the Ambassador knew them? who answered, How should he know them, when he had never seen them; but desired that they might be shown to some of his Servants, who might perhaps know them.  
Dinner being ended, Noble, Harthouwer, and the Secretary Ʋander Does, went with the forementioned Orders to the General; into whose Presence after some stay being admitted, they asked if that was his Highness' Writing and Order? whereupon he answering Yes, pointed to the Seal, saying, That it was his, and none else gave such a Mark; and therefore he wondered why they detained the Goods; but there were two Hollanders come thither, which he would give them. To which they replied, That as to what concerned their Countrymen, if his Highness did restore them, they would be thankful for it; but they could not deliver the Chinese Goods without Orders from Batavia; that the Ambassador had seized them in the Lord Maetzuiker's Name, being brought by the Chinese against his Order, in stead of Necessaries; therefore if the Ambassador could restore them again without his knowledge, they desired his Highness to consider: who replied, That he was a great Lord, and also one of the Lipous, he did not desire the Goods, but was obliged, they being his Subjects, to speak for them: whereto was answered, That the Ambassador was also a Person of Quality, and one of the Indian Council, neither did he desire the Goods, nay, rather wished they had not been brought aboard; but since it was so, he could not let them go without Order: whereupon the General said, He should let the Business rest, till News came about it from the Emperor; but when his Imperial Majesty commanded the Netherlanders, than they must restore them whether they were willing or not: then changing his Discourse, asked when the Ambassador would go his Journey; and all the Coelies, Horses, and Vessels being now ready, he could not imagine what was now wanting; he had writ to the Emperor three times that the Ambassador should come up, but he saw as yet no likelihood of it, therefore knew not what he might think; whatever they had requested of him he had granted, yet still they came with new Desires, so that he knew not how to deal with them, nor could imagine why they came thither; and that they now gave him cause to think they were a People, on whose Words was no depending, saying one thing to day, and another to morrow. Hereupon he was answered, That they stayed only for the Trade, because the Hopou Noble must go to Peking, but before he could go the Trade must be finished. To which the General replied, That he had granted them to Trade, he had provided Barks and Jonks for the unlading of their Commodities; nay more, that one of the Ships might come up to the Tower, that they might make the quicker dispatch: and it was true, that he had commanded no Quicksilver should be Transported, because the Emperor had forbid it; however, he would have winked at it; but because the Netherlanders had told some of his Mandarins, that they had got it from the Viceroy, he would have it taken away again, and not suffer one Conderin weight to be Transported. As to what concerned the other Commodities 
A Conderin is a small Chinese Weight.  which were not prohibited, the Netherlanders might carry out as many as they pleased. Whereupon he was answered, That they did not know who had told any of his Mandarins that the Quicksilver was bought of the Viceroy, but that the Factors were the occasion of all those Differences, because they hindered them in their Business: the Ship lying at the Tower would by this time have been unladen, if they had proceeded in weighing the Goods as they ought; but they used false Weights, which the Netherlanders finding out, left the Ship and went ashore. To which the General answered, That the Pepper in the Ship was mixed with Sand, and therefore the Factors had used such Weights: The Netherlanders (said he) would have the repute of fair Dealers, but they are none; for to mingle their Pepper with Sand and Water was no honest part. To which they answered, That they knew nothing concerning any such thing, therefore they would willingly go with any of his Factors Aboard to view the Pepper, in which if they found either Sand or Water, they would undergo both the penalty and scandal: In the mean time they urged that they might carry out the Quicksilver for that time, since it was already Shipped. To which the General made no Reply, but only that his Factors should the next Morning go Aboard and agree with them, that the Ambassador might the sooner go set forth to Peking.  
The two Europeans were according to Liu-lavja's Promise shown to the Netherlanders, and found to be Renegadoes; the one being the first, that deserting the Castle Zelandia, on the Island Formosa, went to the Chinese; which at the first questioning they acknowledged. And according to their Relation, they were on the eighth Day of the twelfth Moon, in Formosa, and were come in a Chinese Vessel from thence to Trade to the Coast of China; that only one Renegado was alive in Tayowan. But the Netherlanders being just at that instant called to the General, had not time to examine them further; but taking their leave of him, they desired that they might take the Renegadoes along with them to the Lodge; which the General refusing, said that he must first examine them.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning came the Mandarin Liu-lauja to the Lodge, with Orders from the General to fetch the Quicksilver out of the Blyswiik Frigate. Whereupon the Ambassador desiring him to stay a little, wrote the following Letter to the General.  
THe Ambassador knows very well that Talauja is a Person of Honour, and just▪ and therefore he is assured, that when he shall be rightly informed of all things, he will be satisfied. And as to the Quicksilver and Pepper, he hoped that Dispute was over; That the Ambassador wishes to go to Peking with the first opportunity, and therefore desires that the Factors may hasten the unlading of the Ships, that the Presents which are for the Lipous and Lavja's may be Packed, and put into a readiness.  
With this Letter the Interpreter de Hase went to the General, but brought no other Answer than this, That the Ambassador should shortly know his Mind.  
The Emperor's Factors having been with Noble, they told him, That they would not deliver any Silk, but pay him for his Commodities with ready Money; and likewise that they would not go to the Tiger Frigate for any more Pepper.  
A Mandarin came also to tell the Ambassador in the General's behalf, That he must so order his Business, that within ten days he might go to Peking; and likewise asked for the Names of those that were to go with him.  
The twenty fifth in the Morning the Council resolved to make preparation for the Packing of the Presents, according to the Inventory written by Noble on the eleventh Instant, that the General might see the Ambassador resolved to go; and also that Noble and Harthouwer should go to the Factors, and ask them if they would go down to receive any more Pepper or not? and likewise to speak with Singlamong's prime Factors concerning the Silk, and tell him, That the Ambassador was to take his Journey a few days hence; therefore they must in short declare their Intentions, that the Hollanders might govern themselves accordingly; and also endeavour to make them abate the Price of the course Silk; in which Case they should be impower'd to make an Agreement. Moreover it was concluded, that a List of the Names of those Persons that were to go to Peking should be sent to Talauja, being in number twenty seven Hollanders and six Blacks; all which was accordingly performed.  
In the Afternoon two Interpreters came to the Lodge from the General to tell the Ambassador, That the Quicksilver must be taken out of the Ships again, because it was publicly known, and would come to the Emperor's Ear, who had prohibited it: but hereafter if they kept it private, the Netherlanders might carry out as much as they would. To which the Ambassador answered, That there were Mandarins gone to the Ships to fetch it out; and if the Ship should chance to be gone to netherlands Haven, he would give order that the Quicksilver should be kept in it and brought up again; for which he promised to be Security till it was done. Moreover the Ambassador bid them tell Talauja, That they were now busily Packing up their Goods, to be ready against the limited time of ten days; therefore he desired him to command his Factors to make an end of the Trade.  
In the Afternoon, a Seaman came in a Batziang from netherlands Haven, with a Letter from Captain john Ʋander Werf, Dated the twenty fifth instant, from the Vlaerding Frigate; by which he advised the Ambassador, that three Mandarins were come from the General aboard the Vlaerding, and commanded him, that he should not take the Quicksilver out of the Blyswiik, till further Order; Wherefore he desired to know, what he was to do in that affair.  
Hereupon the Ambassador wrote immediately an answer: That since the General had prohibited Quicksilver, he might let it remain in the Blyswiik, and with the rest of the Goods out of the Vlaerding; and what was more wanting, to make up her full Lading, he might take out of the Constance, and (as soon as he could) also come himself.  
The six and twentieth, the Lord Van Hoorn observing that the sending away of the Vlaerding could be no longer put off, wrote a Letter concerning it to this purpose to the General.  
THe Ambassador shall never fail to acknowledge Talavja's Favours in all 
A Letter to the General Talauja.  things, and accordingly, makes himself ready, that he may with the first opportunity go to Peking, and therefore as a token of his Respect, he gives notice to Talauja, that in four days time, a Ship shall go to Batavia; as also, two more a little after; therefore if his Highness will please to write to the Lord General and Indian Council in Batavia, it will be well, but it is at his own option.  
With this Letter Harthouwer went to Talauja, who being busy about other affairs, so that he could not speak with himself, he sent the Letter by his Interpreter, and bid him tell his Master, that the reason why they had some days since desired that the other Ship might come up to the Tower was, because the Factors would not receive the Pepper out of that Ship there present.  
The Interpreter coming back, brought this answer.  
THat having received the Ambassador's Letter, and understood the Contents 
The General's Answer.  of it, he would the next Morning send him an answer by some of his Mandarins; but let him know before, that not above twenty Persons in all could go with the Ambassador to Peking, because the Emperor had so Commanded.  
He also caused the two Mandarins that were to go with the Hollanders to tell Harthouwer, that if they had aught else to request of the General, they should do it speedily, because they had Order to grant it.  
Mean while, Noble went to the Governor's Factors to receive Money of them in stead of Silk; Who answered him, That they would pay their Debt within three or four days.  
At the same time, the Viceroy and General's Interpreters came to tell the Ambassador, that it would be necessary to be ready for his intended Journey in five days. To which Van Hoorn answered, That he would endeavour (if possible) to obey their Highness' Commands, having already put the business in good forwardness.  
The two Mandarins which were appointed to go to Peking, came to have the List of the Names of his Attendants. 
Noble desires a Pass for the Blyswiik Frigate.   
In the Morning, being the twenty ninth, Noble according to their resolution taken the day before, went to the General with a Letter, to desire a Pass of him for the Blyswiik Frigate to go down again: The Contents of which were as followeth.  
THe Ambassador hopes that Talauja will not be offended for coming again 
Nobel's Request to the General.  to beg a Request of him, being now ready to set forth towards Peking; in which regard, and for that he must write all his business at large to the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia; therefore the Ambassador desires, that the small Vessel may go again to Tinghay, to take the Goods out of the great Ship, and that he will please to grant a Pass for her, and the Boat with fresh Provisions; and also that he will send half a dozen Jonks with them to fetch Goods from Tinghay to Lamthay, that then they might finish their Trade, and the Ships go away; for which the Ambassador shall most highly be obliged to Talauja and the Emperor.  
The Ambassador hath understood by the Hopou, that two Netherlanders are brought Prisoners to Talauja, which he desires may be permitted to come and speak with him.  
Noble coming back, related that he could not speak with the General, but sent him the Letter by his Interpreter; Who brought answer, That he should not fail to hear from him in the Afternoon; which was accordingly performed: for the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja, came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador, That the netherlands Ships must be unladen in five days, and the Constance Frigate might freely come up to the Tower, that they might the sooner be unfreighted; but no Ship might go away before the seized on Chinese Goods were come ashore; that all things must be ready for their Journey in fifteen days; and that three and twenty Hollanders might go to Peking, but not more. The Secretary, because he was a Scholar, might not go to Peking with the Ambassador, but the General would give order for two Interpreters. For the unlading of the Alphen at Tenhay the General would send six Jonks thither with the Blyswiik; and likewise a Pass for the forementioned Frigate to go down again.  
To the rest of their Desires Talauja had sent them no Answer.  
The General's trusty or chief Factor, called Liu, came two several times to 
The General's Factor's Proffer to Noble.  Noble the same day with another Story, That if they would, they should only address themselves to him, and he would do their Business; and that his Master had so much ready kindness for them, that he aimed at nothing more than to please their King Maetzuiker, by giving them all the dispatch and satisfaction he might.  
To this civil Proffer (which the other Factors had chosen him to present) 
Nobel's Answer.  Noble replied, That they would willingly deal for some Silks, if they would let them have the best, as they would do by them. Whereupon the Factor replied, That he would consult with the rest, and doubted not but to please them.  
But as to that part of Siangpovi's Resolve, That nothing should be done unless the Chinese Goods were restored, the Ambassador and his Council considering, unanimously agreed, That the Goods should be put into such a posture, that they might take them and convey them from thence, as if by force, leaving an outward Door locked, on purpose to be broke open.  
The thirtieth in the Morning the Interpreter de Hase, according to yesterday Resolution, went to Talavja's Court to him with a Letter, which was to this effect:  
THat the Ambassador congratulates Talavja's noble Disposition, in granting that the Ships shall be unfreighted. The Ambassador will endeavour to be ready to go to Peking in fifteen days. He will satisfy Talauja about the Chinese Goods, that then the Holland Ships may go to Batavia; upon which he desires some private Conference.  
This Letter was no sooner delivered, but there came Orders quite contrary, That the term of fifteen days was too long for their departure; That no Ships should Sail from thence before the Ambassador's return from Peking: At which the Ambassador much startled, replied, That it seemed very strange to him; for yesterday the Mandarins, Liu and Liulauja, had told him quite otherwise; so that he knew not what to say, or which to believe, for sure they could not both be the General's Order.  
On the one and thirtieth the Ambassador sent Noble and Ʋander Does to the General, to ask him if he would write any thing to the Lord Maetzuiker by the Ship that was the next Morning to set Sail for Batavia, and to assure him, that since he had been pleased to command no Ship might go to Batavia, before the seized on Chinese Goods were brought ashore to the Lodge, That the forementioned Goods were not in that Ship; but if he would please to send any of his Mandarins they should be shown him where they were, that if he would he might take them, and they satisfy Talauja in all Points; and likewise that the Ambassador would be ready in eight days to go to Peking; in the mean while desiring him to give order for the six promised Jonks, and a Pass for the Blyswiik, that with the Jonks she might go to Tenhay, and there unlade the great Ship.  
Noble and Ʋander Does going to the Court, and having acquainted Talauja with their coming, he sent for his chief Factor Liu to receive their Message; 
Novel and Ʋander Does Discourse with the General.  of which having notice they were admitted, when the General told them, That as to what concerned the Ship, it could not go away before the Ambassador went to Peking, it being customary there, that any Vessel which brought an Ambassador, could not be dismissed till he had made his Address in Person to the Emperor. To which they replied, That the Ship was sent to Batavia only to give an account of their Proceedings hitherto; which ought to have been done two Months since, according to their Orders, but it was put off upon his Highness' desire; but now it neither must nor could be any longer delayed, because the Lord General, during the Ambassador's arrival there, having received no news of his Excellency's Adventures and success in his Embassy, would not know what to think, and they coming to Batavia, suffer for their supine negligence.  
The General replied, He advised the Hollanders not to let the Ship go away 
His Answer.  without his Order, because there were Jonks in netherlands Haven to prevent her; which would cause some clashing, and perhaps mischief might be done, which was much better to be avoided; neither should their stay be longer than two days at most: in which time the Viceroy Singlamong would come home again, with whom he would consult, and then send for Noble to the Court, and give him their Resolution. Concerning the Chinese Goods, he desired them not, they might leave them aboard, or bring them ashore as they pleased themselves, till Orders came from the Emperor. That he had given order for the Jonks, and also a Pass for the Blyswiik, but he made no mention of the time limited for the Ambassador's departure, only that when he came to Peking, he should strictly observe what he said or did.  
Then the Hollanders ask the General for the two Renegadoes, he replied, That they were conveyed to Canton, where, they said, their Parents and Friends lived; and withal, that they were no Hollanders.  
Whilst Noble and Ʋander Does were at the General's, the Mandarin Liu-lauja came again to the Lodge about the Chinese Goods, but was sent away again till their return; when they were informed of Talavja's Order, and told, that it was convenient to take the Goods out of the Blyswiik (in which they were) and bring them ashore: whereupon Liu-lauja desired to go thither, that having seen them, he could give the better account thereof to Talauja; which being granted, he and two other Mandarins went with Noble and Ʋander Does to the Blyswiik, lying about half a League from the Bridge; from whence they returned with the Goods in the Evening.  
The first of january, Anno 1667. the Blyswiik Frigate set Sail, laden with Goods 
january 1667.  for the Coast of Coromandel, consisting in course Tee, Chests of Gold-wyre, 
Blyswiik Frigate sets Sail.  Allom, and likewise Quicksilver, sent Aboard by the Factors the day before. The Commanders of the Frigate had order, that after the delivery of the Goods into the Vlaerding, they should immediately steer to Tenhay, to unlade the Ship Alphen into the six Jonks.  
The second in the Morning Captain john Vanderwerf went with a Batsiang to netherlands Haven, to make himself ready, and prepare the Vlaerding to Sail for the Coast of Coromandel so soon as the Ambassador should give order. He had also three Letters given him; one for the Master of the Alphen lying at Tenhay, to acquaint him of the six Jonks coming to unlade his Ship, and likewise to order him to hasten the Business; the second was to the Master of the Constance, Peter jansz de Vlieg, by which he was commanded with all speed to come to the great Tower to unlade there, that the Ships might be cleared for their departure; the third was to the Governor and chief of the Council at Malacca; by which he was advised of the Ambassador's arrival in China on the third of August, and his Landing on the twenty fourth at Hoksieu; on which day he also had Audience granted him by the three prime Governors; that an Order was come from Peking; the Trade driven, and so brought to pass, that the Vlaerding Frigate was got ready with her Lading on the first of january, to set Sail for Malacca.  
About Noon the Mandarin Liu-lauja came to the Lodge, being sent (as he said) 
Liu-lauja comes to the Netherlanders in the Lodge.  to see the Chinese Goods and tell their Money; which the Ambassador would not suffer him to do, saying, That if Talauja would take the Goods from him, they might do what they would with them. Moreover, this Mandarin told them, that the Hollanders must be ready in eight days to go to Peking, and that not above twenty four Persons should go along with him; and that three days hence he would come and take an account of all their Packs and Chests.  
The third nothing happened, but that a Parcel of Pepper and Sandal Wood was delivered to the Factors, as also the next day after.  
Furthermore, the General promised, so soon as the Viceroy Singlamong was come home, to speak about the Ships going to the Coast of Coromandel, and that then he sending to Noble would give him an account of it: But this was hitherto not done, and three days already passed since Singlamong's coming home, and no Person come from Talauja to call Noble; Therefore it was judged convenient (since the utmost time for the Ships departure was at hand, and that it already was the fourth of january) to send Noble and the Secretary Ʋander Does the next Morning to the General's, to put him in mind of his Promise, and also tell him that the Ship must go away the day following, though no order was given, which they desired his Highness would not take ill. 
Noble and Ʋander Does go to the General.   
The fifth in the Morning Noble and the Secretary went to the General, but found him not at home, being gone to the Viceroy's; but having stayed a little while, he returning: by his Interpreters they acquainted him with the occasion of their coming. To which he answered, That he had spoke with the Viceroy about the Ships going away, who would not by any means permit it; and advised them to go to him themselves, to see if they could persuade him to it, which they did; but coming thither could not be admitted to his Presence: for Singlamong, informed of their coming, sent them word, that they should come again the next Morning (because at that time he was troubled with the Gripes, and weary with Travel) and that then he would give them Audience. On which it was resolved to give their Highness' full satisfaction, and to put off the Vlaerdings departure so long.  
Mean while the General's Factor called Thesin, came to tell the Ambassador, That he had understood of his Master, that the Ship might be gone, but that Hogenhoek must first speak with the Governor of Minjazen about it.  
In the Afternoon the two Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja, came to the Lodge with an Order from the General, to fetch all the Chinese Goods from thence, which was to this effect:  
I Give order to Thesin and Haykong, that they carry the Batavian Chineses to the 
The General's Order for the seized Batavian Chinese Goods.  Ambassador, that they may see their Goods; and that then these Mandarins shall deliver them Parcel by Parcel to Tsiong and Sinshong, who shall be careful to look after them till farther order, that they may not be diminished. If the Hollanders have opened the Chests, and taken any thing out of them, it is very ill done; therefore if any of them be missing, Thesin and Haykong must speak with the Ambassador about it, and desire him to restore them. Moreover an Order is expected from the Emperor, which when it comes, the Goods shall be again restored to the Batavian Chineses.  
On which Order, without ask for them, they took away those Goods 
Are carried away.  that were nearest at hand, and of small consequence, opening the Chests, and carrying them to their appointed Places; which they also thought to do with the Money and primest Commodities, standing in the Secretary's Chamber, had not the Ambassador prevented them; for the Netherlanders would not deliver those themselves, but only showed them where they were; from whence they fetched their own Servants, and went to convey them out of the Lodge; which again was hindered by the Ambassador, who would first have the Goods weighed, and the Money told to them: He would moreover have a Receipt of them for so many several sorts of Commodities and Money for the use of the Batavian Chineses, which the Mandarins after having looked them over performed, and then went away with them.  
These Goods taken away by force, and the General's Order, it was thought convenient to Copy out the Receipt signed by the Mandarins, and carry it the next Morning when Noble and Ʋander Does went to the Viceroy, to the General, and to tell him that the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja, had by his Order taken the Goods out of the Lodge, of whose number and quantity they had, according to the Mandarins' Receipt, brought him an account and Copy, that if the Goods hereafter should be diminished, the Netherlanders might be blameless.  
The sixteenth in the Morning Noble and the Secretary went to the Viceroy 
Noble and Ʋander Does come to the Viceroy.  Singlamong, to speak with him about the Ship; before whom after a little stay they were brought to have Audience. After he had, according to the Tartars Custom, enquired of the Ambassador's Health, Noble and Ʋander Does told him the occasion of their coming, viz. That the next day a Ship must go to Batavia. To which at first he said nothing else, but that they must speak with Talauja about it, till which time they must defer her going. Whereupon the Netherlanders told him, that the Ship must upon necessity go to Batavia, and her going could not be put off any longer, because, according to the Lord Maetzuiker's Order to the Ambassador, the Ship should have been gone two Month's sooner, to carry news of their safe arrival, and what they had done in the Trade▪ and that the Ambassador was to take his Journey to Peking in four or five days, at which the Lord General would be highly pleased. To which the Viceroy replied, That they might let the Ship go away privately without telling any Person of it, and make themselves ready for their Journey; which done the Viceroy would impart something to them. Morever his earnest Request was, That nothing might be writ to Batavia of what had hitherto happened.  
From thence Noble and Harthouwer went to the General, that according to 
Noble and Harthouwer go to the General.  yesterday Resolution they might show him the Receipt for the Chinese Goods; but before they went thither they sent a Soldier to the Ambassador, to tell him the Viceroy's Answer. Coming to the General's they were forced to stay a considerable time before any Person came to them; yet at last one passing by, they took occasion to send notice of their attendance: who brought them answer, That he knew of the fetching of the Goods by the Mandarins, Liu and Liu-lauja, in which they had done very well; and withal that he was busy about his Offerings, therefore could not grant them Audience, which 
Cannot be admitted 〈◊〉 have Audience.  made them not deliver the Receipt, but return home.  
Van Hoorn being informed of the Viceroy's Answer about the Ship, returned, being on his Way going to Singlamong's prime Factor, who had invited him to a Feast and Wayang, or Play, in Person to send away the Vlaerdings Boat, which waited only for order when the forementioned Ship should set Sail. To which purpose he wrote a Letter to Captain Ʋander Werf, That the Viceroy had at last consented that he might set Sail with his Ship, therefore he should put to Sea with as much silence as he could, without looking for any thing.  
The Indian Council at Batavia seemed much concerned to hear News of the Ambassador's success in China; whom at his coming from thence they had commanded, that he should endeavour from Peking by Moskou, if it were possible, to send advice to the States of Holland. Therefore it was judged convenient on the fourth to send with the Vlaerding (for because of the Differences between the Governor's Factors and the Hollanders, about the receiving of the Goods and delivering of Silks, they had lost their hopes of sending the Tiger time enough to Batavia, that from thence she might Sail with the last Ships 
Letters sent to Holland.  that were bound for Holland) a Copy of the Letter written to Batavia, and sent by the Polesnip on the eleventh of October, that from Malacca it might be sent through Persia by Land to Holland: and likewise the Copies of the Letters which had been written were also sent to go thither with the Tiger. Besides which Van Hoorn also sent a Letter apart to the Lords before mentioned, which served as a cover for all the other. The said Letters, though open, were sent to the Governors Balthasar Bort and Paviljon, with Orders to send them away with all speed. Bort was also commanded, that if an opportunity did present itself there, to send Copies of those Letters that were directed for Holland, to the Indian Council at Batavia. 
Van Hoorn Dines with the chief Factor.   
After the Boat was sent away with the forementioned Letters, Van Hoorn went again to the chief Factor's House, where he was nobly entertained. At their departure Noble and Harthouwer led the Factor into a private Room, and asked him if he would let them have any other Silk? which he much scrupled at, fearing lest it might be discovered; yet if they would faithfully promise not to speak of any such thing, or make mention thereof at Peking, he would deliver them some: which the Hollanders on the other side as much scrupling, they broke off farther Discourse, and so parted.  
The next Morning they went again to the Factor about the same Business, and told him, That before their Journey to Peking the Hopou must make all things even; that the Tiger being unladen, must go again to netherlands Haven; and the Alphen would also be suddenly delivered, therefore they must now either receive Money or Silks to divide and lad into the Ships. Moreover, as they passed by they called at the Viceroy's, and asked him when his Highness would be at leisure to permit the Ambassador to come and confer with him about his addressing himself to the Court. Whereupon the prime Factor seeming to be somewhat dissatisfied, asked if ever they remained in their debt, that the Hopou should so much press their settling and making even of Accounts before he went to Peking, with many other Discourses to the like purpose; yet at last promised they should have Money the next Morning, it lying ready for them: with this Answer the Netherlanders took their leave; and as they passed by went to the Viceroy's Court, who sent them word that the Ambassador might within two days come and speak with him about the Embassy.  
Mean while two Mandarins came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador from the General, That he must make himself ready for his departure at farthest in seven days, demanding a List of the Names of the Persons, and number of the Packs, Chests, and other things that were to go with him; which immediately was delivered to them. 
The Ambassador receives order to go his Journey.   
In the Morning, being the nineteenth, four Mandarins came to the Lodge, two sent from the General, and two from the Viceroy, to drink to the Ambassador's health and good success in their Journey, and at Peking also, informing them how they should carry themselves there: and also two Interpreters, jenko and Liulako, which came with the Mandarins, being sent by their Highnesses to observe the Hollanders Transactions; nay, they were to do nothing without their advice, because they knew the Custom of the Country, and also what was best to be done, or otherwise. The Netherlanders willing to be led by them, answered, That they would endeavour in all things to give the Viceroy and General satisfaction: Whereupon the Mandarins took their leave, being Presented each of them with a Piece of Crown Serge.  
The Merchant Harthouwer had a written Order given him, according to which he was to govern himself during the Ambassador's absence, and likewise the Names and numbers of the Persons that were to stay with him in Hoksieu.  
The twentieth in the Morning, after all their Goods and Necessaries were 
Leave Hoksieu.  Shipped in thirty eight Barks, they went away with the Flood, and came about Noon to Hoksantiouw Bridge, two Leagues distant from Lamthay, the Suburbs of Hoksieu; where they found the Vessels, with their Mandarin and Guides lying at Anchor. Here the Netherlanders were forced to stay till all their Barks came thither. Harthouwer and some other Persons which had accompanied the Ambassador to this Place, returned in the Evening.  
They were no sooner gone, but several Mandarins came to ask the Netherlanders 
But twenty four Hollanders are suffered to go to Peking.  how many their Train consisted of, being two and thirty, whereof five were Negro Boys. To which they replied, That neither the Viceroy nor General would suffer above twenty four Persons in all to go, because it was written to the Emperor so many should come.  
In the Afternoon about four a Clock the Hollanders, being twenty four in 
Ambassador proceeds on his Journey.  number, that belonged to several Offices, went at the Flood with about fifty Barks Westerly up the River Min▪ and came in the Evening about seven a Clock to an Isle, lying about a Canonshot from the Village called Unwono, where they stayed that Night, being got a League to the Westward.  
The two and twentieth at daybreak they set Sail again, and about nine a Clock passed Howtong, a Village lying on the rightside of the River, In the Afternoon they Sailed by Petjong, Hongia, and Tiksoya on the same Shore; they came in the Dusk of the Evening before Congimon, having that day by Rowing and Sailing gotten five Leagues more to the Westward.  
All the forementioned Villages were thick built with Houses, that were little better than our Huts or hovel, but the adjacent Fields abounding with Rice and store of other Grain.  
The three and twentieth in the Morning they proceeded, (the Wind still favouring them) and about nine a Clock passed by Binkin, a Village by some called Mincing, three Leagues from Congimon, standing behind a Hill a little up in the Country, on the left-side of the River Min.  
This Town is adorned with fair Buildings, and a high Steeple, which appears with its Spiry top above the Mountain, and seen by all those that pass by it.  
In the Afternoon they had in view Anike, Siaivang, and Twavigh; the first of which Towns lies on the right, and the other two on the left Hand, the last being about three Leagues from Binkin: at four after Noon they arrived at Chukaw, where they rested that Night, to get Coelies to Tow their Boats, because the Stream ran very slack, having that day made six Leagues and a half more Westerly.  
The Verges of the River here are nothing but hilly and barren Cliffs.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning, the Wind at North-East, they got two Coelies for every Vessel, and going on their Journey about eight a Clock passed by Caukawa, a Village on the left side of the River, a League from Chukaw, and in the Evening Landed at Poutcham, where they saw some decayed Houses, having that day gained, though with no small danger of Rocks and strong Water-falls, three Leagues.  
The next Morning, being the twenty fifth, they left Poutcham, and about two a Clock in the Afternoon passed by Tiongopan and junchiam, both lying on the left side of the River, the last being two Leagues distant from Poutcham; and in the Evening they came over against Ukekaun near a Watch-house, having not gotten above three Leagues all that day, because of the Shoals and contrary Current.  
The twenty sixth in the Morning putting forward, they were drawn up over Shoals and Rocks, which by the violent Precipes and fall of the Stream seemed very dreadful, and not without imminent danger, as appeared by the Bark in which the controller Ruwenort was, which Rowing about as they supposed for advantage, ran on a Rock and sunk immediately; yet most of the Goods were saved, though we●…. In the Afternoon they reached Kantang and Poinpang, Villages standing on the right side going up, and in the Evening Landed near a Watch-house called Bokkay; where they reposed that Night, having gone but two Leagues and a half that day, and with great trouble.  
The twenty seventh about daybreak they weighed, and before Noon saw several Priests Houses and Hamlets, built on the hangings or declivings of the Mountains, and in the Afternoon about four a Clock they came to Seghia and Siong, two Villages opposite one to the other, about two Leagues from Bokkay; from whence passing on they arrived at another Watch-house called Soujong, where they stayed the following Night, having with great danger gotten two Leagues and a half to the West.  
The twenty eighth in the Morning they came between two great Towers about nine a Clock, each standing on a Summit fronting the other on the side of the River; behind which appears the City jemping, or jenping, or jenpingsoe. The Ambassador passing through the Bridge, was by two Mandarins, sent from the General of that Place, called Sioubontok, invited to Dinner to his Palace; whither he went with some of his Attendants: So soon as he came with his Bark to one of the City Gates, he was kindly received by Sioubontok, and nobly Entertained after the Chinese manner with variety of Dishes, and several Entries of their Wayangs, or stageplays.  
No Discourse of any concern happened here, only Sioubontok asked if the Netherlanders had Quelang? and how many Men kept the Place? Which the Ambassador answering according, and taking his leave, went in the Evening Aboard; where they sound some fresh Provisions, sent thither by the General's Order, consisting in Oxen, Swine, Hens, Ducks, and Herbs, for which the Beaters received five Crowns of Silver; and the Ambassador, according to the Custom of the Country, gave the Wayang Actors, and also the Servants that attended him at the Table, five Dollars apiece.  
In the Evening Sioubontok came in Person Aboard, and a little after the Governor of the City, being a comely proper Man, with a long Beard, Habited after the Chinese manner in Mourning for a deceased Relation, both welcoming the Ambassador and Haulavia the Mandarin that was sent with him as his Guide, who would not come to Sioubontok's Feast, though invited several times. After the Netherlanders had given them a taste of their Spanish Wine, and they viewed the Horses and Oxen, and Sandal Wood that were to be presented to the Emperor, they took their leave and walked to their several Houses in the Dusk of the Evening. Sioubontok after his departure sent the Ambassador some Geese, and six Picol of Rice. After which he sent the Interpreter Maurice jansz Vis, to the General Sioubontok, to inquire how the Netherlanders Business stood at Peking, because Maurice was very familiar with him, having been his Servant when he was a Prisoner amongst the Chinese. Maurice at his coming back brought word from Sioubontok, That the Netherlanders were in great esteem at Court, and that he doubted not but they would obtain what ever they desired: but there were some great Persons at Peking which they must seek to please and get their favour, by which they need not doubt to have all their Requests granted. Moreover he desired Maurice to entreat the Ambassador in his behalf, that when the Emperor should chance to speak with him about the conquering of Tayowan, (which without doubt he would do) that he would please to speak in his behalf, that he might go with them to the subduing of the Place, because he had a Wife and Children, and several Goods there.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning, Sioubontok sent more fresh Provisions, as Poultry, Swine, Salad Herbs, and Provender for the Horses; for all which the Secretary Ʋander Does went and presented him in the Ambassadors Name with a Fowling-piece, a Pair of Pistols, a Couple of Knives, a Chain of Amber Beads, one Piece of Amber weighing ten Ounces, ten Dutch els of fine Cloth, and likewise an Inventory of the Presents designed for him, which if he would not accept now, he might receive them at the Ambassador's Return. The Secretary was also commanded to desire Sioubontok to instruct the Netherlanders how they should carry themselves to the four Zoetaysings which he had spoken of to the Interpreter Maurice, and likewise inform them of some other Lords that might assist them in their Business in Peking.  
The Secretary at his Return related, That he had shown Sioubontok the Inventory of his Presents, who said he would receive them with many thanks; proffering moreover his Service to assist the Hollanders in what ever they pleased to desire of him. After some Discourse the Secretary asked him concerning the four Zoetaysings, or Great Men, and what Lords they were best to address themselves to in Peking? Whereupon commanding all his Attendants to avoid the Presence, he replied, That when the Netherlanders came to Peking, they must endeavour to gain the four chief Councillors, or Zoetaysings favour, (who during the Emperor's Minority were Guardians, or Protectors of the Empire) which was very easily be done, if they did but employ some faithful Persons to intercede for them, and in their Name Present them with Money and Gifts, which they loved very well: To which purpose, that he might assist them, he would send a Letter with them to Peking, to a certain Mandarin which was in great Repute there, and was formerly one of his Deputies, who would on his Recommendation be very serviceable to them; and that he had also Presented some prime Councillors each with a Negro Boy, which were also his Friends, and would aid the Hollanders in their Business; They should not repose too much confidence in the Proffers of several Persons pretending to belong to the Court; for many cunning Villains would come and persuade them to believe that they were such and such great Lords which they were not, as he himself had found when there in Person, therefore they ought to have a great care that their Followers were not talkative, which might prove a great disadvantage to their Business: but if they could get into the four Councillors of State's favour, they could but ask and have; for whatever they requested would certainly be granted them. There are also (said he) several Officers belonging to the Council, to which he would recommend them and their Business. Whereupon the Secretary taking his leave, thanked him for his good advice, and so went Aboard.  
The Presents designed for Sioubontok being brought to Land, though not without some difficulty, were by Captain Putmen carried to him, who sent the Ambassador twenty Pieces of Stuff for the Clothing of his Retinue, and some Fruits, in return for them; whereupon the Stuffs were immediately distributed amongst the Men.  
In the Afternoon Lunlakko the Interpreter brought the Ambassador from his 
Ambassador's Expenses.  Mandarin twelve Pieces of Chinese Boat-Silver, to bear his Expenses, telling him it was by the Emperor's order; and also that the Ambassador was at such Places to have twelve Condarins, or fifteen Stuivers; Noble, fourteen Condarins, or twelve Stuivers; Putmen, twelve Condarins, or ten Stuivers; all which Money it was thought fit to refuse: but because the Mandarins and Interpreters durst not receive it again, saying, That what the Emperor had commanded must be obeyed; and if they would not accept of it, they might keep it and return it in Peking: Whereupon it was delivered to the controller Ruwenoort to keep till they came thither.  
The City jenping, or jenpingfoe, the next to the prime City, or Metropolis of 
The City jenping.  the Province of Fokien, lies at the going up of the Stream on the right Hand, or on the Westerly Shore of the River Min; from whence it maketh a handsome Prospect on the side of a Hill, the Edifices rising gently by degrees.  
This Mountain is for the most part inaccessible, making the City rather a Fortress, and to be esteemed as the Key of the whole Province.  
The City is a League long, but not above a Mile and a half broad, full of fair and large Buildings. Every House is furnished with Water conveyed from the Mountains in Cane Pipes, the like not elsewhere to be seen in China.  
All Provisions are to be had there in great abundance, and at a cheap Rate; the Streets and Houses also thronged with Inhabitants.  
On the East side of the City two great Rivers, the Min and Zi, uniting their Waters, make a great Lake; through which Ships come thither from all parts of the adjacent Country. Each of these Rivers hath a fair Bridge; and in the City are three beautiful Temples.  
Most of the course China Paper is made here; but the whitest and finest sort in a Village called Siege, three Leagues beyond more Westerly, which is all that is there of remark; only this City boasts that her Inhabitants speak the most elegant Phrase of all the Chinese, and therefore it is called the Mandarins, or Court Language.  
That Night the Netherlanders lay a little from the City near the opposite Shore; from whence they Rowed and set Sail the thirtieth in the Morning to Honjong, a Village about a League from jenping, where all their Fleet Rendezvouzed, having had a narrow and dangerous Passage thither. Hence they set Sail again about nine a Clock, and in the Afternoon▪ passed by Louquon, Hoeyong, Linkentome, and Tafa; the two first of which lie on the right, and the two last on the left side of the River, about half a League distant one from another.  
In the Evening they anchored before Ongsoutow, having that day gained three Leagues in a Northerly Course.  
The one and thirtieth in the Morning setting Sail again, they passed by a long Village called Bonsjouko about eight a Clock, and at ten by the Village Liucuir, Posjen, and Ubaka; the first and last on the right side, and the second on the left.  
In Ubaka much Paper is made, which appeared by several Vessels that lay Freighted only with such Goods to go up the River.  
About Noon they saw Konchian, Sioeukke, and Tayping; the two first on the right, and the third on the left side of the Stream, close by one another.  
In the Afternoon about three a Clock they came to Chiakiang, where they Road till the next day.  
The next Morning, being the first of February, they set Sail again, and in 
February.  the Afternoon passed by five Villages, viz. Siejokaun, Itantauw, Bayapo, Siema, and Filictauw; the two first lying on the right, and the two last on the left side of the River; and about Noon they arrived at the City of Kienning, or Kienningfoe, where the Horses were immediately put ashore, because the Barks in which they came were judged too big to carry them up any higher; but not getting any smaller that day, they were set up till the next Morning.  
Here the Netherlanders had the Gates shut against them, being not permitted to enter the City; so that they were not able to get any fresh Provisions; nay, none were suffered to sell any thing to the Netherlanders without the Interpreters leave, who acted as Comptrollers wherever they came, and especially jenko, as appeared by a Soldier that belonged to Sioubontok, General of the City▪ jenping; who having bought some Fruit for the Ambassador, and bringing it to him, was, so soon as the Interpreters were informed of it, taken by the Mandarins' Order, and tied Neck and Heels together, and had not the Ambassador interceded for him, they had sent him a Prisoner to Hoksieu, where he would have been severely punished; but the Ambassador at last prevailed so much that he was set at liberty.  
The second, after the Vessels were prepared to carry the Horses, they were immediately embarked again, and all safely put Aboard; the Tartars being highly pleased with them, had dressed them so neatly, that they were slick as Glass.  
In the Evening the Mandarins which were the Netherlanders Guides, presented them with some boiled and roasted Meats.  
Thus having gotten all things in a readiness, they left the City Kienningfoe on the third, the Governors thereof being so surly, that they not once bid the Ambassador welcome, or wished him a good Journey at his going from thence, nor presented him with the least Provision, which no way grieved them, who by that means kept their Chests locked.  
This Kienningfoe being the fourth, and so one of the most eminent Cities in 
The City Kienningfoe.  Fokien, lying on the Eastern Shore of the River Min, is something inferior in Beauty and Riches, but not in bigness to the Metropolis Focheu, and larger than jenping, but not so close built, because several Cornfields are enclosed within her Walls. The Streets are all Paved with Pibble, and very full of Inhabitants, that drive no other Trade but making of course Paper. They are Ruled by two Governors, which sway alternately, the one not so much as once daring to contradict the other in his time.  
China affords several sorts of Paper, made of several Materials, viz. of the Body and Leaves of Cane-tree, Cotton, Silk, and Flaxen Clothes: that which is made of Cotton is not altogether so white as our French Paper.  
In the County of Vuchaufu, belonging to the Country of Huquang: They make also great quantities of Paper, of the Canes and Leaves, which grow there in great abundance.  
In the Forenoon having left Kienningfoe, they passed by Gaetchan, Maschetany, and Petchin, Villages lying close together on the left side of the River; the last lying about a League from Kienningfoe. In the Afternoon they saw by the Village Kekau, Vazoeo and Gautauw; the two first on the right, and the last on the left side of the River. Towards Evening they came before, and Landed at a ruin'd and decayed Village called Chiaphong, where they remained all Night. Here they directed their Course almost North, having a little of the West.  
The next Morning, being the fourth, leaving Chiaphong, they passed by Chincheuw, seated on the right side of the River, a League from Chiaphong; and in the Afternoon by several Hamlets, Houses and Pagodes, that stood here and there apart from the rest, along the Margins of the River. In the Evening they arrived at a ruinous Town called Sjovova, on the right side of the River, having that day gained but two Leagues with great trouble.  
The fifth in the Morning setting Sail again, they left the Villages Tachoe and Pagou on their left hand, and in the Afternoon passed by Swinckin, situate on their right hand; and arriving at Suchiap about three a Clock they Landed, having that day gained two Leagues and a 〈◊〉.  
The sixth in the Morning leaving Sichiap (where they had changed their Coelies, or Pugs, for the Towing forward of their Vessels,) they passed by Tintenna, Cholunga, and Leantong, three Villages seated on the right hand. In the Afternoon they ran by the Villages Losjouwa and Sichem, built on the same side; and towards Evening anchored opposite to the Village Hochiechien, having gained three Leagues that day.  
The seventh proceeding on their Journey, they passed Hoesuna and Nagan, and at Noon arrived at Quiquan; where they stayed for the Vessels that brought the Horses, which by reason of the shallow Water could not get up the River so fast; but at last arriving, the Masters of them complained, that by drawing over the Sands they were grown very leaky, and that it was impossible to go any further with them before they were mended and trimmed up a new; for which cause it was judged convenient to put the Horses ashore, and send them by Land to Poutchin, by others called Puchin, a good Town not above five Leagues from Quiquan. The Horses being got safe ashore were set up till next Morning. The controller Ruwenoort, Interpreter Maurice, and the four Grooms, were ordered to Ride them thither; and also twelve Chinese Soldiers by order of their Mandarins were sent to conduct them. That Night the Vessels lay at Anchor before Quiquan.  
The eighth they left Quiquan at daybreak, and about Noon passed by the Village Souswenna, standing on the left hand: soon after they got sight of a great▪ Town called Swipia, near which appeared several ruin'd Houses, and also a large, but broken and decayed Stone Bridge; and about four a Clock they came before Chintewa, a Village lying on their left hand, a Mile from Swipia, and towards Evening dropped Anchor near a Watch-Tower, about which were built a few Houses, having that day with great danger gained three Leagues.  
The ninth in the Morning weighing, they passed by two Villages called Gotanga and Quotinha, the first lying on the right, and the second on the left hand: at Noon they saw a Temple, which being built over a Moat, or Sluice like a Bridge, under which at High-water Vessels might pass, was round about adorned, after the Chinese manner, with Imagery, to which they ascended by a pair of Stairs raised on one side of it. After Noon they passed Saloekia, and several other Places ruined in the last War, only some Pieces of Walls remaining. The Night approaching, they cast Anchor before a Sandy Plain, about a League from Poutchinfoe, having with much ado that day gained three Leagues.  
The tenth in the Morning they set Sail about eight a Clock through a broken Bridge, formerly laid cross the River, and about Noon came to Poutchin, 
The City Poutchin.  the fourth eminentest City belonging to Kienningfoe. Here the controller Ruwenoort came to the Ambassador, to tell him that the Horses came safely thither the last Night, and were put into a Stable joined to the House, prepared for them to stay in, till the Coelies were come to carry the Emperor's Presents. The Ambassador commanded the Secretary to ask the Mandarins that were come with him, because the Houses prepared for him and his Attendants were very old and rotten, and scarce fit to Lodge in, if he might stay so long in the Barks till such time as the Coelies were come up, and they ready to go farther. But the Mandarins said that it could not be, because all the Goods must be taken an account of, that they might see how many Coelies they should want to carry them. Whereupon they found it convenient to Land all their Goods the next Morning, and put the Oxen ashore that Afternoon. In the Evening the Netherlanders were presented with some fresh Provisions, by some Mandarins belonging to the Conbon of Hoksieu, and likewise by their Mandarine Guides; for which Van Hoorn (they having presented him several times before) gave them a small Piece of Plate.  
The eleventh in the Morning all the Presents were unladen and carried to 
Presents Landed▪  the House prepared for that purpose, which was not only very old, but of no convenience, the Rooms being so bad and so few, seeming rather a Hogsty than a Dwellinghouse: but they no way able to better themselves were forced to be contented. In the Evening order was given to watch the Goods, because they were constrained to lie in open Places, incident to filching Pilferers. Every Person was also strictly commanded not to stir abroad without the Ambassador's leave, thereby to show the Chinese, who had forbid the Hollanders from going into the City, that they did not value it, there being nothing to do for them.  
The thirteenth the chief of the Coelies, as the Mandarins their Guides informed the Ambassador, came to his Lodging to take an account of the number of the Chests and Packs, and to see how many Coelies would be requisite to carry them: after the weight and number were written down, they found that they should want six hundred Coelies for the carrying of the Presents and other Goods.  
The fourteenth in the Morning both the Mandarins came again, with jenko and Liulako the Interpreters, to the Netherlanders in their Lodging, to tell them that the number of the Coelies for the carrying of the Goods far exceeded the number expressed in their Warrant given them by the General, because only two Persons were allowed for the carrying of a Pack or Case, whereas now there were several amongst them which two Men were not able to carry, and thereupon would want two hundred Porters: and moreover, that the Mandarins of the City durst not do contrary to the General's Order; in allowing them more Coelies than was expressed in their Warrant. Whereupon Van Hoorn replied, That if the Hopou and Pimpous in Peking had given such Order, it was well: Moreover, he would pay for the Carriage of what was over and above that which was mentioned in the Pass; and that it seemed strange to him, since in Hoksieu the number of the Cases and Packs that belonged to the Embassy were delivered in Writing to the General's Officers, which had seen them, and might well have discerned that there were several Chests amongst them which could not be carried by two Men: but it was no great matter, for if they got no Coelies they were the less obliged: Nay, he knew the former Ambassadors never wanted Men to carry their Goods, and had also much more honour and respect shown them than was done to him, never travelling through any Place but they were fetched in, and nobly entertained by the Governors thereof; whereas now on the contrary the Gates were shut up against him, and he forbid to come into the City. To which the Mandarins made no Reply.  
Mean while the City Mandarin who commanded the Coelies, came in Person to the Ambassador; whereupon a Contest begun between him and the Mandarine Guides; which being no way pleasing to the Ambassador, he said that he would have no Quarrel about the Emperor's and his Goods, for he would pay those Coelies which were wanting above the number expressed in the General's Warrant: Whereupon as many Coelies were provided as they wanted; and the Ambassador wrote a Letter to the General in Hoksieu to this effect:  
THat the Ambassador would never forget the many great Favours which he received from his Highness in Hoksieu, and doth not doubt but that he will continue the same: In return whereof, he desires that Talauja might be assured, that neither in the Court at Peking, nor any other Place in the World, he would seek or do any thing to his disliking or disparagement. That himself hath well arrived at Chinkon in Pouchin, and finds that he wants more Coelies than are expressed in the Pay or Warrant granted him, whom if his Excellency think fit, he will cause to be paid by the Hopou in Hoksieu.  
This Letter delivered to the Mandarins, the Ambassador asked when they should proceed on their Journey? to which they answered, Two days hence. Then he enquired if the Horses and Oxen might not be sent away before, because the Oxen travelled but slowly: which being granted, they prepared all things accordingly. But in the Evening a Chinese Secretary, called Sinko, said that the Mandarins caused Frames to be made to carry the Oxen, because it would be impossible for them to go over the Mountains: at which the Ambassador seemed very well satisfied, and accordingly put off their going.  
In the Morning, being the sixteenth, Hiu-lauja, one of the Netherlanders Mandarine Guides came with the Frames for the Oxen to the Ambassador's Lodgings; who ask him when they should go from thence? replied, Two days hence: Then he desired to know the reason why they must stay so long, because the Mandarin had on the fourteenth Instant also told him, That he should go two days hence: Whereupon he said, That it was because the Coelies which they wanted above the number mentioned in the Pass granted by Talauja, was not yet allowed by the City Mandarins, who had promised, that within two days all things should be ready, himself wishing that the Hollanders were gone. To which the Ambassador replied, That he knew that the Lepous were somewhat displeased about their so long tarrying at Hoksieu, being detained there by the Viceroy, therefore it would be very inconvenient to lose more time there; so that if the Lepous should chance to ask him about it in Peking, he could freely declare that it was not his, but the Mandarins' fault, who made him wait for Coelies. Which Discourse prevailed so much, that Porters were immediately sent to carry the Sandal Wood, with which they walked before, it being very troublesome for its length and heaviness to be got over the Mountains.  
The eighth in the Morning an hundred Coelies came to the Ambassador's Lodging, to tie and pack up the Presents to be carried in Burdens, and to go with their Loads before with the Horses and Oxen; with which the Secretary Ʋander Does was also ordered to Travel before; the Ambassador, Noble, and the rest intending to follow them in the Afternoon: but because one of the Horses had received a hurt on his Head above the left Eye, the Ambassador thought it convenient to stay a day or two longer in Poutchin, and to keep one Horse more besides the forementioned, to see in that time what could be done to him, and then give order for his stay, or taking along with him. Whereupon the Secretary, with two Horses, the Oxen, and the hundred Coelies, with their Loads went before, Noble and Putmen being ordered to follow him in the Afternoon; but because the tying up of the Goods spent too much time, it was deferred till the next Morning.  
The Horse being pretty well recovered, the Ambassador went from Poutchin 
The Ambassador leaves Poutchin.  the one and twentieth in the Morning; and having travelled half a League by the Village Olian, and in the Afternoon by Sisanly and Singan, and some Pagodes or Temples, towards Evening came to Guliaen, where they reposed that Night.  
The next day being Snowy and Rainy, they rested themselves in expectation of fair Wether.  
The twenty third the Sky being pretty well cleared, notwithstanding the Mountains were still covered with Snow, the Ambassador leaving Guliaen proceeded on his Journey, and in the Morning passed over a high Hill, and so through Huysjounton, Hangsion, Outangay, Ontongne, Kieumoe, and Ousalinga; from whence they saw divers Pagodes built on the Declivings of several Mountains. In the Afternoon they travelled in sight of the Villages Movana, Loutiatona, Golinga, Longkia, Kiekova, and divers Hamlets and Temples, of which very many stand all along this Road; amongst whom they saw one on the top of the Mountain Liougtouw, and called by the same Name.  
Here are the utmost Limits of the Province of Fokien and Chekiang, or Chetchiang, between both which the forementioned Temple stands; so that now leaving Fokien, they entered into that of Chekiang, and going on came towards the Evening to a Village called Limathova, having that day travelled five Leagues, four in the Territory of Fokien, and one in that of Chekiang.  
This Province, though less than others, yet exceeds all the rest in fertility 
Territory▪ Chekiang.  of Soil, delightfulness of Prospects and Riches, beginning in the South under twenty seven Degrees and five Minutes Northern Latitude, and extending Northerly to thirty one Degrees and twenty five Minutes, a Tract of sixty five Leagues, the greatest breadth from East to West being almost of the same length. It borders Easterly on the Sea, where the shortest Cut is to japan, and not above a days Sailing, as some say, with a fresh Gale of Wind; in the South and South-West, upon Fokien; in the West and North, upon Nanking, and likewise touches with a small part upon Kiangsi. It is divided into eleven great 
Division.  Counties, almost as large as some Provinces (for one of them being Hancheufu, and the chiefest of them, is ample and powerful enough to be a Province or Kingdom) viz. Hangcheufu, Kiahingfu, Hucheugfu, Nienchufu, Kinhoafu, Kieucheufu, Chucheufu, Xaohiugfu, Ningpofu, Taicuheufu, and Vencheufu, having several great and small Towns, to the number of eighty three, belonging to them, besides unwalled Places, and an incredible number of Castles and populous Villages.  
The chief Tract of Land called Hangcheufu, borders Northerly on Hucheufu, and Kianhingfu; in the East, at the River Chee, between Kianhingfu and Xaohingfu; in the South, at Nienchufu; and in the West, at Nanking.  
In ancient times this County belonged to the Viceroy of V. and was afterwards possessed by the King of Cuckoe, and by the Family of Chin named Cientang: by the Emperor Sui it was first styled Hangcheu; by the Family Tangle, juhang; by Sung, Lingan; but the Taimingian Family restored this Country to its old Name.  
This Division contains eight Cities, of which Hancheu is the chiefest, the rest▪ are Huining, Tiuquang, Inlang, Liugany, Yuum, Sinching, and Changhoa.  
The second County called Kiahingfu, every where watered with Rivers and Lakes, borders in the East, upon the Sea; in the South, upon a part of the Ocean, and part of Hangcheufu; Westward at Hucheufu; and in the North, at Sucheufu and Sungkiangfu, the Territory of Nanking, and a part of the Lake called Tai.  
This Shire contains six Cities, viz. Kiahing, Kiaxeny, Hayeni, Pinghu, Cungte, and Tungchiang.  
The Metropolis Kiahing was formerly a small City, and subject to Sucheu; but growing in Riches and Greatness in the Reign of the Taimingian Family, it was made the Head City, or Metropolis, and changed its former Name Siucheu to Kiahing.  
The City Kiahang, being the most Northern of the whole Province, lies as if it were Moated about with Rivulets of Water, full of stately and well built Structures, flourishing with variety of its own Product, having in all Places Riches and Plenty. All the Streets of the City are Arched, under which they walk as in a Piatzo, or Exchange, free from Wind and Wether, and sheltered from Sun and Rain. Without the City are several Triumphal Arches erected; and on the West side near the River, in one peculiar Place which they Sail by with their Ships or Vessels, stand sixteen of these Arches in a Square, all built of Marble. Athwart the River stands a Bridge of Marble, with many Arches, seventy Paces long, and likewise a Tower thrusting forth towards the Sky, nine Pinnacles or Spires. All the Shores without the City are wharfed with square Freestone; of which also the lesser Bridges are made that lead over them: There are forty more fair Bridges leading to several parts of the City, besides a great many less, scarce to be numbered.  
The third County being Hucheufu borders in the East with Kiahingfu; in the South, upon Hangcheufu; in the West, verges the Province of Nanking; in the North, at the Lake Tai.  
This was formerly a Kingdom of itself, and nominated Tung; which first was possessed by King V. and afterwards by Ine, then by Cu.  
The Family Cyn gave this County and its Head City the Name of Uching; that of Tangle called it Hucheu, that is, The City of the Lake, because of the neighbouring Lake Tai; for Hu signifies a Lake, and Cheu a City: the Royal Line of Sung named it Chaoking; but the Taimingian Family restored the old Name Hucheu.  
Here are five Temples, the chiefest of which stands within the City Walls: they were founded in honour of the five first Emperors.  
This Division contains six Cities, viz. Hucheu, Changhing, Tecing, Hiaosung, Unkang, and Gankie. Hucheu is not only the chief, but reckoned one of the biggest, and flourishes in Trade and Riches: It is adorned with many beautiful and large Buildings.  
The fourth Niencheufu, is a mountainous and rough Country, and borders Eastward on the River Chee; South, at Kincheufu; the West, on Nanking; and the North, on Hancheufu. It was formerly called Suntu; next by the Family of Han, Lecheu; and lastly by that of Sung, Niencheufu. It contains six Cities, Niencheu, Xungan, Tungliu, Suigan, Xeuchang, and Fuentui.  
The Metropolis Niencheu stands upon a rising Ground, between the Singan and Chee; which two Navigable Rivers before the Walls conjoin their Waters.  
The fifth Kinhoafu, touches North and East upon Xaohingfu and Taiche●…fu; in the South, upon Chuche●…fu; in the West, conterminates with Kincheufu; and the remainder bounded by the River Chee. 
Names.   
King Loang called this with its Metropolis first by the Name of Kinhoa, that is, Venus' Flower; for the Chineses say that the Goddess Venus striving here with another which they call Vuniu, (that is a Masculine Woman, and the same which the Poets call Pallas) a Flower; which obtaining, they styled her Kingsing, that is, Golden Star, and the City received the Name of Kinhoa, that is, Venus' Flower.  
This City Kinhoa was formerly very populous, and full of well built Edifices; but in the late Tartar War, in which they held out a considerable time, was in a manner buried in Ruins: yet nevertheless it is almost re-erected, and especially one Stone Bridge on the West side hath obtained its former lustre.  
This County hath eight Cities, Kinhoa, Lanki, Tungagang, Yui, jungkang, Vuy, 
Cities.  Pukiang, and Tanki.  
Near the small City Lanki you may see another Bridge over the Chee, some few years since rebuilt, and now much better than the former burnt by the Tartars.  
The sixth called Kincheufu, being the most Southern of all this Province, 
Borders.  borders in the East at Kinhoafu; in the Southeast, at Chincheufu; in the South-West, upon Fokien; in the West, on that of Nanking; and in the North, at Niencheufu.  
In the time of the King's Reigns, this Province with the two former suffered divers great Changes and Alterations: the Family Cyn, after they had taken all China, called its Metropolis Taimo; Han named it Singuan; and the Family Tangle gave it the Name which it now hath. It contains five Cities, viz. Kincheu, Lungyeu, Changxan, Kiangzan, and Kaihoa.  
The City Kincheu lies on the Eastern Shore of the River Changyo, three days Journey from Fokien, between steep and troublesome Mountains to pass over.  
Paulus Venetus calls this City Kugui, according to the Tartar pronunciation, (with whom he travelled in an Embassy thither) who in stead of Cheu, say Gui, both Words signifying Great City; wherefore Paulus may easily have made Kugui to be Kuicheu.  
The seventh Division or Shire Chucheufu, environed with several high Mountains, 
Borders.  borders in the East at Veucheufu; in the South-West, at Fokien; in the North-West, at Kuicheufu; in the North, upon the County Kinhaofu.  
In the time of the Kings this Country was also subject to various Revolutions and strange Alterations: The Family Tangle gave it the Name of Hocheu; the Taimingian, that of Chucheu.  
This Chucheufu contains ten Cities, of which Cheucheu is the Metropolis; the 
Towns.  rest are Cingtien, Ciniquun, Sungyang, Sunchang, Lunguven, Kingyven, junko, Sivenping, and Kingning, besides three famous Temples.  
The City of Chincheu, which is very populous, lieth upon the River Tung, which falls into the Sea, and able to carry Ships of good burden.  
The eighth Tract of Land, being Xaohingfu, borders in the East, with Ningpofu; 
Borders.  North, upon the River Cientang; in the West, at that of Chee, and opposite to Hangcheufu; in the South, at Kinhoafu and Taicheufu.  
The Family Sung first gave this Country the present Name Xoahing; but it was formerly by the Family Tangle called jucheu. It reckons seven Cities, 
Towns.  Xaohing, Siaoxan, Chuki, Yuyae, Xangyu, Xing, Sinchang.  
The City of Xoahing, though not so big, yet in handsome Buildings exceeds the Metropolis; being seated in a pleasant Plain Moated with fresh Water, very much resembling Venice, the Water gliding through every Street, which are all curiously Paved, and the Walls of the Houses all built of Freestone, which in China is very rare, and scarce to be seen in any other Place in the whole Empire. The Bridges also over which they pass the River and Lake, are all built in the same manner, being very numerous. The Banks of the River, which extends itself to three days Journey, are on each side wharfed and walled in with Stone of the Quarre: at the end of which appears a great Dam, that receives and keeps the Waters, which swelling to a convenient height, Vessels that come thither, are with little help floated over into another Stream.  
This Current serves only to bring small Vessels up to the City Ningpo, for the great ones go about by Sea.  
Near this City are also many Triumphal Arches; for building of which they have ready accommodation, because the Quarres that serve all China are close by their Doors.  
The ninth Division called Ningpofu, borders in the East with the Sea; in the 
Borders.  West, with Xaochingfu; South, upon a River flowing between this and the County Tancheufu.  
The Kings Iue gave this and its Metropolis the Name of jungtung; the Family of Yang, Nungcheu; those of Sung, Kingchyven; but at last by the Taimingian, Ningpo, that is, Reconciler of Strife.  
The Kings of Han brought this Country under the Territory of Huiki.  
Ningpofu hath five Cities, viz, Ningpo, Cuki, Funghoa, Finghai, and Siangxan.  
Not far from Ningpo lies a Promontory, which the Portuguese formerly very 
Towns.  much frequented, who corrupted the Name to Liampo.  
Some say, that from this Point in serene Wether they can discern the Mountains of japan; whereas the most exact Chinese Cards or Maps make the Sea much broader than to discover any such Prospect.  
The Metropolis Ningpo, situated close by the River In, boasts store of handsome Buildings. On whose Eastern Shore stand several Triumphal Arches, and two Steeples with seven Galleries one over another: The Banks of the said River are all raised of Freestone; at the end the Water is also stopped with a Stone Dam, over which they hale the Vessels into a larger Channel.  
In the little City Cuky are two Bridges, one with Stone Supporters, and great Pieces of Timber three hundred Rods long: another which is very high, and all of Stone, stands on three Arches.  
The tenth County called Taicheufu, being a great Tract of Land, verges 
Borders.  Eastward with the Sea; Southward, with Vencheufu; Westward, with Kinhoaf●…; Northward, with Xaohingfu and Ningpofu.  
In the time of the Kings this Country belonged to V. afterwards to Iue; but was at last by the Family Cyn brought under the Territory of Minching. The Family Han gave it the Name of Changan; Tangle, of Haicheu; and soon after 
Names.  that of Taicheu, which it retains to this day.  
This Country comprehends six Cities, viz. Taicheu, Hoanguien, Tientai, Cienkiu, 
Towns.  Ninghai, Taiping.  
This City Taicheu is situate on a Hill, lying on the East side of the River San.  
The eleventh called Veucheufu, conterminates in the East at the Sea; in the 
Borders.  South, with the Territory of Fokien; in the West, at Cucheufu; in the North, at Taicheufu.  
This Country is for the most part very mountainous, but hath in the South, before you approach the Hills of Fokien, a large and spacious Plain.  
Formerly this Country belonged to the Kings of Iue; afterwards to those of V. King Loang gave it the Name of jungkia; and was by the House of Tangle first called Tunkia; and soon after Voucheu; by Sung, Xuigan; and lastly by the Taimingian, Veucheu.  
This Province Veucheu possesses six Cities, viz. Veucheu, Xuigan, Locing, Ping, 
Towns.  Yang, and Taixium.  
The City of Veucheu, seated on the River jungkia, because it is also like the Metropolis Hangcheu, standing on a Morass Soil, and adorned with many fair Edifices, is by the Inhabitants called Little Hancheu.  
The City is very populous, and a Residence for many Merchants, whose Ships find good and safe Harbours in the great River jungkia; the Sea ebbing and flowing up to the City Walls.  
Near the Seashore in this Territory are fifteen Garrisons, built against the 
Fortresses.  Incursions of the japanners, and safeguard of the Sea, viz. in Veucheufu, Nan, Ningtung, Sinning, Huigan, Tunchi, Cumen, Puohin, Xetic; in Taicheufu, Sinho, Cioki, Ninghai; in Ningpofu only Tinghai; in Kiahinfu, Hiacing, Kinexan, and Chincam.  
Several Isles neighbour this Country, inhabited by Husbandmen and 
Islands.  Fishermen, of which Cheuxan is the greatest; the next are Chanque, Chaopao, besides several other lesser. Cheuxan lies directly East from the Metropolis Hancheu, opposite to the River Cientang, in thirty one and thirty two Degrees Northern Latitude, thirteen Leagues from the Main Land, and hath in length from North to South sixteen, and in breadth eight Leagues. When anciently the Chinese King Lui, worsted by the Tartars, and flying with his scattered Forces to this Isle, from all Parts many of the Chineses flocked thither, so that ever since, what was before inconsiderable, hath been a populous and well planted Isle, for they number in this small Isle above seventy Towns and Villages, most of them verging the Sea in such Places where Inlets and Bays make convenient Harbours: neither wants their King a considerable Fleet, which keep his Coast safe from the Incursions and Landing of the Tartars Horse, wherein they are most formidable. And the Tartars as much in awe of the Islanders, keep continual Guard in the Fort of Tinghay, raised on the Main Land, with a Fleet of Crusing Chineses.  
Before the Province Taicheufu, near the Garrison Cioki, lies an Island called Ychoan, which is, Precious Circle, so called for its convenient Havens, the whole being in a manner so surrounded with Mountains; it breaks off all Winds, leaving only a Gap, or Entrance for Ships to come in at.  
The whole Province of Chekiang is every where cut through with Rivers, Rivulets, and murmuring Streams, some brought in by Art, others of their own accord.  
Most of the Channels of those Rivers which run Southward, fall in such order, as if Nature on purpose had contrived their Course; so that the Traveller may pass through the whole Territory either by Land or Water which way he will, still supplied with all conveniencies.  
The River Che, from whence this Country hath its Name, runs from the 
River Che.  South to the North, and divides it exactly in the middle, in an Eastern and Western Canton: but it changeth its Name at Hangcheu, and there is called Cientang; and again where it takes its original out of the Mountains in the Province Hoeicheufu, they name it Singan.  
The eighteenth day of the eighth Moon (which is our October) a prodigigious Springtide happens worthy of admiration; for it is only on that day, and begins to flow exactly at four a Clock in the Afternoon, and comes with a Head at the first appearance, high and strangely mounted above the Waters, and suddenly turns Topsiturvy what ever either by neglect or carelessness lies in the Way; roaring extremely in his ascent, beyond the loud murmur of Cataracts or Water-breaches, to which, as a wonderful spectacle, where they have secure places, the Magistrates, Strangers, and a great number of People resort to see (though horrid) the annual Spectacle.  
The River Honorio takes its Original near Cinijuw, the third substitute City to the seventh Province Chucheufu, and from thence follows by the Metropolis Kuihoa to the City Lanki, where it disembogues in the Stream Che.  
The Rivulet Lung begins Westward of the City Seuchang, from whence it flows to Chucheu, where it cometh with its Waters near the River Tung, and there is called Vonxa.  
In the Prime County Hancheufu, near the City Changhoa, on the Mountain Cienking, is a Lake, though not very great, yet famous for the Golden-coloured Fishes taken there, which the Chineses from their colour call, Kinyu.  
In the same Shire, Eastward from the Metropolis, lies the famous Lake Sikin; 
Lake Sikin.  between which and the City Walls is a fair Street, Paved with Stone, and almost a Mile long, where they divertise themselves, in stead of Walks of Pleasure. The whole Lake Walled in, comprises about five English Miles in compass, and upon the adjacent Hills, (supplied with various Rivulets and Fountains) appear several Temples, Palaces, Cloisters, Colleges, and the like. The Banks of the Lake, which is the Foot of the Mountain, are Paved on the top with Freestone, and ath wart the Lake lie several Bridges, so that they may walk over it, and see the Lake in all places. The forementioned Ways are all Planted with divers shading Trees, and accommodated with Benches, Arbours, and the like, for the conveniency of such as walk there, when they are weary to sit down and repose. The Water in the Lake being so translucent and clear, that they may see the smallest Stone in the bottom.  
This Lake hath no Out or Inlet for Vessels to pass, but only a Sluice, by which the Water swollen too high by assiduous Showers, is discharged: Yet nevertheless, it bears many Pleasure-Boats, built on purpose, which may rather be called Golden floating Palaces, being so richly Gilt, and also curiously Painted; in which they accustom to keep their great Feasts, Revels, and other delightful Pastimes.  
These Vessels thus furnished, Sail about the Lake without fear of Wrack or Tempest, so that it is no wonder, why the Chineses call this place and City A Delightful Garden, or Earthly Paradise.  
In the County of Kincheufu, near the City Kaihoa, is a little Lake called Pehiai, 
Lake Pehiai.  from the white Crabs which it produceth, for Pehiai signifies White Crabs.  
In the Territory of Ningpofu, near the City of Tunghoa, appears Yapou a small 
Pool Papou its strange quality.  Pool, but very deep, whose Water, if the Chinese Writers may be believed, has this quality, that when they have a mild and prudent Governor, it becomes much clearer than Crystal; but if a Tyrant or an Oppressor of the People, dark and Cloudy.  
In the County of Kiahingfu, the Chineses catch a Bird in Harvest which they 
Bird Hoangcio.  call Hoangcio, that is, Yellow Bird, which being killed, they steep in Wine made of Rice, and is sold as a Dainty all the Year.  
The Territory of Ningpofu hath by reason of its nearness to the Sea, great plenty of Fish, which they dry in the Sun without Salting. They also have abundance of Oysters, Crabs, and Lobsters, with which they supply the whole Empire of China. The Shepherd Fish they catch all the year, and in the beginning of the Spring, another Fish called Hoang, that is yellow, which will not keep an 
Fish Hoang.  hour out of the Water without tainting. But because the Chineses account them a great Dainty, and an excellent Fish, they preserve them with Ice, and so bring them to the Market.  
The Country of Chekiang abounds with Tigers; those on the Mountains 
A strange quality of a Mountain.  near Kutien, do no hurt to Humane Creatures; whereas on the contrary, those that frequent the Neighbouring Woods are very Ravenous and Wild, which taken and brought to the foremention'd Mountains, become tame and innocent as the former.  
In a Pond of about two hundred Paces in Circumference, lying on Mount Sienking, in the County of Hiangchefue, the Chineses catch Fish of a Gold Colour, wherefore they call them Kinyu, for Kin signifies Gold, and Thou, Fish) with a bright and glistering Skin; but chiefly their Backs are speckled as with Gold; they are never bigger than a Man's Finger, and have a three forked Tail, but not dangerous; the Chinese account them as a great rarity, preserving them in their Houses and Gardens, in several Vessels made for that purpose. The Grandees often take these Fishes with their own Hands, which in their presence (as if they knew who was their Lord, and what a pleasure they did to their owners, by sometimes showing themselves) often play, and leap up and down above the Water. One of them though so small, costs commonly three or four Crowns.  
In the eleventh County Veucheufu, are a strange kind of small Oysters, which 
Oysters.  are sowed there in Marshy Grounds; for taking the Oysters they first dry, then stamp them small, which Powder they cast up and down the Fields like Seed, from whence grow other Oysters of a most delicious taste.  
Through all the Country are plenty of Swine, Sheep, Poultry, and Fowl both tame and wild.  
In the County of Kiahing, belonging to the Province Chekiang, grows in 
Fruit Peci, its strange quality.  standing Waters, a round Fruit called Peu, which is not much bigger than a Chestnut; the Kernel lies covered with a grey Skin, but appears very White in the middle, full of Juice, and of a pleasing taste, somewhat harder than an ordinary Apple, and tartish: If you put a piece of Copper with this in your Mouth, it will so mollify the Metal, that you may chew it with the Fruit, as we do Bread with our Meat.  
In the County of Kinhaofu grows a small Tree with a Flower, which the 
Hour Mogorin.  Portuguese in India call Mogorin; it is very white, not unlike the jasmyn, though much fuller of Leaves, and of a more pleasing scent; so that a few of these Flowers perfume a whole House, wherefore it is not undeservedly held in great esteem by the Chinese, who in the Winter preserve the Tree in Pots filled with Earth. In the same Country grows another Plant, called Kievyen, which 
Tallow Tree.  produces a kind of Fat, of which like Tallow, very good and white Candles are made, not Greasing the Hands when touched like the ordinary Tallow Candles.  
This Tree is of a pretty bigness, and in Leaves and shape not much unlike a Pear-Tree; it bears white Blossoms, which when fallen off, a round Cod succeeds as big as a Cherry, covered with a blackish thin Skin; under which is a white Pulp, which when grown Ripe, and the Skin breaks, appears; these being pulled off, are boiled in Water, which melting, the Body turns to Fat, and when grown cold, becomes hard like perfect Tallow: From the remaining Kernels, they Extract very good lamp-oil, so that this Plant supplies them, both with Lamps and Candle light. In the Winter, the Leaves become red, which looks very pleasant, because many of them growing together, show like a blushing Wood Last, the Leaves falling off are a most excellent Food, because of their fatness, for Sheep and Cows, which by Eating them, thrive in an extraordinary manner.  
In the County of Chucheufu, near the City Kingning, grow great Thickets of Canes and Rushes in the River Lupeu, by the Chinese with a general name called I, (for there are several sorts of them) and by the Indians, Mambu, which the Portuguese have turned to Bambu, and the Netherlanders to Bamboes'. There also grows in most places all manner of Herbage and Grain, and in the County of Kinhoafu many great Plums, which they Transport to other parts.  
In the seventh Shire, being Chucheufu are many Woods and Wildernesses of Pine-Trees, whence the Chineses have their Timber for the Building of Houses and Ships: They say, that near the City Sunghiang, that is, Earth of Pine, there are such thick ones found, that eighty Men cannot Fathom; nay, some whose hollow Wombs contain thirty or forty Men.  
In the County of Ninchufu, their Hills produce store of Copper Mines.  
In Kinhoafu, they make the best Drink that is in all China of Rice and Water; and in the same place are also the chiefest Gammons of Bacon, which bear a great esteem through all the Empire. There is likewise a sort of Gum, in the Chinese Tongue called Cie, or Cia; and in the Portuguese, Cairo, which drops out of the Trees, and is very like Turpentine; the Chinese gather and colour it how they please, the best bears a Gold colour, and the next to that Black; before it is quite dry, it yields an infectious Smoke or Damp, which causes a swelling in the Faces of those that are not used to it.  
The curiosity and excellency of this shining Gum, Europe hath long since been acquainted with by those Chests and Coffers brought thither out of japan and China, for they both colour all their Wood-work over with it, and also their Ships, Houses, Tables, Bedsteds, and other Householdstuff.  
The Revenue which this Province pays yearly to the Emperor amounts to 
Reven●…es paid by this Province to the Emperor.  what may seem an incredible sum of Money, viz. two hundred fifty one thousand two hundred ninety nine Bags of Rice; three hundred and seventy thousand four hundred sixty six Pound of raw Silk; two thousand five hundred seventy four Rolls of Silk Stuffs; seventy eight hundred thousand four hundred ninety one Bundles of Straw; besides the ordinary Customs paid to the two Custom-Houses, standing in the Metropolis Hangcheu: First, for the Merchandise in the North part of the City. Secondly, for the Wood in the South part; for the Chineses use much Wood for the building of their Houses, Ships, Coffins, and the like; and the Wood-Merchants being vast rich People, pay no small part of their gain to the Emperor. Moreover, this Province sends yearly four Imperial Ships, called Lung-ychuen to the Emperor's Court, laden with Silk Clothes or Stuffs, wrought after a peculiar manner.  
These Silk Stuffs are interwove with Gold and Silver, and also with the Pictures of the Bird called Funguang, Dragons, and the like: None are permitted to wear these Stuffs, but only the Emperor, and those of Imperial Blood; unless his Majesty out of a peculiar favour, gives them leave; and these badges of Clothes distinguish them from meaner People, as much as our Badges of the Cross and Garter, or the like, be marks of Noble Orders.  
There are those that reckon the yearly Revenue of this Province to amount to above fifteen Millions of Crowns, fifteen hundred thousand Ducats, or seven hundred and fifty thousand Pound Sterling.  
BUt to return again to our Ambassador, who proceeded on his Journey the 
Mountains jakoling.  twenty ninth of February, travelling over the Mountains of jakoling, which because of their steep ascent make carriage difficult and dangerous. On the tops and sides stood several Pagodes or Temples, built after a strange manner, and surrounded with Trees: But at last leaving them behind, they passed through the Villages Sambathova, Sagebatauw, Longhia, Longzango, Poangtiou, and Hachova, where they were drawn upon a float of Canes, over a River, which divided Hachova into a Southern and Northern part, in which last the Hollanders took their repose that Night, having that day gained a League and a half to the North.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning, leaving Hachova, they travelled the following part of the day through Kolontja, Quanimg, and Souzinhova, and in the afternoon came to Pinhoea, where Putmen, Ʋander Does, and the rest that travelled before, met the Ambassador, and told him of their safe arrival there the day preceding, and also that the Goods designed for Presents were already Shipped in twenty seven Vessels, and that others lay ready to take in him, and the rest of the Goods: Whereupon, Van Hoorn was no sooner come into the Village beforementioned, but he gave order for all his Necessaries to be Shipped off immediately, and likewise caused the Oxen to be Embarked, that they might go forward on their Journey the next Morning. The Horses were forced to go five Leagues further by Land, because there wanted convenient Vessels to carry them.  
The twenty sixth about Noon, after all things were ready, they set Sail from Puchoeu, going North-East up the River Change, with a Fleet of about forty Vessels, amongst which were ten that carried the Mandarins' Guides.  
About three a Clock, they came to the City Tjanchia, otherwise called Changxa; 
T●…anchia, Sunthia▪  and having Sunthia, a pretty Village on their Larboard, cast Anchor that Night about three quarters of a League from Tjanchia, before a Sandy Plain, having gained two Leagues that afternoon.  
The twenty eighth in the Morning about daybreak, they set Sail again, and at nine a Clock Landed at the City Kitsjouw, or Kutchieuw, otherwise called Kiucheu; here they changed their Vessels.  
The first of March, all the Goods were Shipped again into other Vessels. At 
March.  Noon, two private Persons of the City presented the Ambassador with some fresh Provisions; in return for which, they received six els of Gingerline coloured Cloth, which Putmen carried them; for which, they again in the Evening sent twelve Tail of ready Money, and three Silver Cups; but the Ambassadors modestly refused the Presents, and thanking, sent them back.  
Kiucheu, the sixth City of the Province Chekiang, lying on the Eastern-Shore 
City Kiucheu.  of the River Change, three days Journey by Land from the Territory Tiokien, over steep and difficult Mountains, seems pretty large, yet but meanly Inhabited, and of small Concourse, and so having little or no Trade, yet the Streets are handsomely Paved, and all Provisions very cheap.  
The second in the Morning, they left Kiucheu, and about nine a Clock passed by Sigajum, a Village lying on the right side, at the going up the River, in a pleasant place, surrounded with Arable Grounds: The remaining part of the day, they Sailed by abundance of Villages standing along the River, a little way up into the Country, and in the Dusk of the Evening arrived at Loujujenne, where they stayed that Night, having that Day gained five Leagues on several Courses.  
From Loujujenne, having gotten two Coelies to Tow every Bark, they Weighed again the third in the Morning; and coming a little way from the Village, they saw a stately Tower built after the Chinese manner, with jutting Stories.  
The Country every where well Manured, was also full of populous Villages. In the afternoon they came to Lanqui, where their Goods and Persons were again to be put aboard other Barks. Soon after their arrival at this place, the Governor came to welcome the Ambassador, and present him with some fresh Provisions. This being the first Town where the Hollanders had received so much civility from the Governors; their Journey that day was three Leagues.  
The Shipping of the Goods into other Vessels was referred till the fourth, because of the Rainy Wether. In the afternoon, the Lord Ambassador entertained the Governor, who in the mean while sent him in a Calf and a fat Wether, and other Provisions, besides four Vessels of their Beer. This Mandarin showed himself very courteous to the Hollanders, for which kindnesses he was presented with five els of fine Cloth.  
The fifth in the Morning, the adjacent Hills were all covered with Snow; but the Wether growing fair, their Goods were put aboard, and all things made ready to go away the next day.  
The sixth, they left Lancqui before day.  
This place, though not large, yet makes a handsome show, being well built, and very populous, occasioned by the many Trading Vessels that come thither. It is pleasantly seated all along the River side: Hither abundance of Allom is brought from Humsie.  
In the forenoon, they passed by the City Sansjenne, a League and a half from 
City jansjenne.  Lacqui: On the left side as they went up the River, the Shore near the Water rises very high, and not inhabited, but in the Valleys stand some few Houses and Villages.  
In the Evening they came to Ponkousong, where they stayed all Night, leaving the City Niencheufu on their left Hand a quarter of a League, having that day gained five Leagues.  
The next Morning, two hours before day, the Mandarin Guides caused the Drum to be beaten, that all might be ready to be gone immediately, which they did; but the Vessel in which the Ambassador was, struck upon a Sand, so that the rest which were behind, were ready to fall foul upon his Ship, such was the force of the Current; but daylight coming on, they got off again, and passed by divers Villages, Temples, and Hamlets, and also by a Pagode, in which stands the Image of a Philosopher, called Nienchlin.  
With the Dusk of the Evening, they arrived at Tungh, where they stayed that Night, having gotten seven Leagues that day, by Steering several Courses.  
The eighth in the Morning they set Sail again, and in the forenoon saw on their left Hand the River Tu, which glides towards the City Cinsung, or Sinchung, which having passed it, divides into two Branches, and at last discharges his Water into the Grand Che.  
This City being the seventh, in order to the Metropolis Hancheu, lies on the 
City Sinching.  North side of the Tutor, pretty close built, and surrounded with Ploughed Lands.  
In the Evening they arrived at the City Fojang, or Fujang, situate on the West 
City Fujang.  side of the River Che, and Northward from the Stream Fuchun, which takes its Original a little Westward from the City Liengan, and joineth its Waters Southward from Fujang, with those of the Che. The Ambassador having gotten five Leagues forwarder on his Journey that day, lodged in Fujang that right.  
The ninth in the Morning, they left Fujang before day.  
Here the River I is about two English Miles broad, yet hath but few Villages on its Banks, most of them standing more up into the Country, by reason of his overflowing in great Rains; every where Manured and Planted with Fruit-Trees.  
In the Evening they arrived at the South Suburb of Hangcheu, or Hancsieuw, 
Chankeeuw, the Suburb of Hancheu.  called Chankeeuw, half a League's distance from Hangcheu; here all the Goods were forced to be Landed, then carried to the North Suburb of Hangcheu, where they were again Shipped, so that they stayed there the following Night.  
The next Morning, being the tenth, Huilauja, one of the Mandarin Guides, went to acquaint the Governor of the City with the Netherlanders coming, and to desire Barks for their further Voyage: He returning again in the Evening, told the Ambassador, That the forementioned Governor intended to invite his Excellency the next day to Dinner, and that the Pinghtouw, or third Person in Office would do the like the day after, and give speedy Order for the preparing of the Barks.  
The same day, the Mandarin Guides, for the trouble they had already had, and to oblige them the more, were by the Ambassador, each of them, presented with five els of Cloth.  
Ten els of Red Cloth, two Pieces of Perpetuanaes', four Pieces of Linen, a Fowling-Piece, a pair of Pistols, two Sword Blades, two Perspective Glasses, and a String of Blood Coral.  
But the Invitation came not that day, because Huilauja said a grand Tartar was come from Peking, with whom the Governor was in private consulting about State Affairs.  
Some Mandarins coming to visit and welcome the Ambassadors, were kindly entertained by him. The same day, above six hundred Horse were Ferried over the River Che.  
The twelfth in the Morning, the Pinghtouw, or third Person of State in Hancheu, 
Pingtouw visits the Ambassador.  which had the Command over all the Vessels, came aboard the Ambassador to bid him Welcome, and also present him with a fat Wether, a Porker, some Poultry, Rice, and other fresh Provisions; desiring to be excused for his delay in not coming to visit the Ambassador sooner, being hindered by some grand Mandarins, that were lately gone up from thence to Peking, who had taken all the greatest Vessels with them, yet he should be careful, that the Ambassador should be well Accommodated, and that he would willingly invite his Excellency to Dinner, but durst not, before he had been at the Governors, but then he would be bold to desire him to come and be his Guest; for which kind proffers, he was civilly Entertained; and having seen the Horses and Oxen, he took his leave.  
In the afternoon, the Interpreter Genko came to tell the Netherlanders, that the Governor of Hancheu had enquired of him how the Ambassador was placed at his Entertainment by the General in Hoksieu.  
The next Morning, being the thirteenth, several Horses came to the Ambassadors 
The Ambassador goes to the General.  Vessel, to fetch Him and his Retinue to the Governor's Court, whither he went in a stately Equipage; taking those Presents with them, which they resolved to give him two days before. Coming to his Palace, they were after a little stay brought to his Presence, and the Ambassador Welcomed by the Governor; who said, this Embassy would be very pleasing to the Emperor. Then he asked where the Pepper and Sandalwood grew? How big Holland was? How far distant from China? If there was any Silk in Holland? and many more such Questions, to which his Excellency answered him accordingly. Then the Tables being spread, they were desired to sit, and plentifully entertained.  
Thus having spent some time, the Ambassador delivered him a Note of the foremention'd Presents, and with a Compliment, desired him to accept them; which having read over, he excused himself, that he could not accept the Presents, because he had never done the Hollanders any such Service, as the Viceroy and General in Hoksieu had done. Moreover, That they would have enough to do, in giving Presents at Peking, for there, every one gaped for something; and thereupon gave the Note again to the Interpreter Genko, which was again taken from him by one of the Governor's Secretaries which stood by him, and kept it. Whereupon the Ambassador desired, that the Governor would only please to accept of the Presents, as a sign of his good Inclination 
The Governor refuses the Presents.  towards him; and that hereafter, an opportunity might present, wherein he might assist the Hollanders. Moreover, the Ambassador Commanded the Interpreter Gemko to tell the Governor, and desire him in his behalf, That when any of the netherlands Ships should accidentally by Storms or Tempestuous Wether, be forced to put into this River, or to Ningpo, that he would please to look upon them as Friends, and be assisting to them. The Interpreter seeming not to understand it well, was again Commanded by the Ambassador to Interpret it right, or else he would get another that should do it: Whereupon, telling it to his Highness, he made answer, That this was also the Emperor's Haven and Country, and his Imperial Majesty's Order should be observed in it: Moreover, he could not accept of the Presents, but he would consider till the happy return from Peking.  
A little after, the Ambassador giving him many thanks for his kind Entertainment, took his leave; and upon the Governor's advice, he went to visit the Conbon of the City, who courteously received him with many Compliments, and a Cup of Bean Broth.  
No Questions of remark did he propose to the Ambassador, only he related, That in their eighth Month, (which is our October) the last Year a Ship was at Priest's Island, he desired to know whether it was a Dutch▪ Man or not? To which the Ambassador replied, That he knew nothing of it, but that perhaps it might be a Hollander Sailing to japan: Whereupon taking his leave, the Conbon advised him to go and Compliment the Tartar Manchu, who had the chief Command over all the Militia in Hancheu; whither he accordingly went, but could not get admittance, being excused by his indisposition, so that in the Evening he returned again to his Vessels.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning, the Ambassador writ Complementing Letters to the Governor, Conbon, and Manchu, and presented the two last with some Gifts, thereby to win their Favour and good Opinion; the Letter to the Chief Governor was to this effect:  
THe Ambassador is much obliged to the Governor, for his generous Inclination 
Complementing Letter to the General.  and Nobleness to him, and hopes to express his Thanks, more by Deeds than Words; to which he doubts not, but the Heavens will grant him a fit Opportunity. He desires his Highness to accelerate his Journey to Peking, with the Chinkon, that he may the sooner return and find him in good Health.  
The Conbon's Letter was to this purpose:  
THat the Ambassador did not expect so soon to have had an occasion to 
To the Conbon.  present his Service to him, and desires he would be pleased to accept of these Presents, as a sign of his good Inclination, and for such his Favour, he shall exceedingly rejoice.  
That to the Manchu was of the same effect.  
With these Letters was sent an Inventory of the Presents; those to the Conbon consisted in five els of Cloth, one piece of Perpetuanaes', two pieces of Linen, one string of Amber, one piece of Amber, and two Rhinocerots Horns.  
Those to the Manchu, two Knives with Gilded Hafts, one firelock, one Carbine, one string of Amber, one Quilt, and five els of Cloth.  
These Letters and Inventories, Noble and Ʋander Does were ordered to go to the several places, and deliver; but because of the Rainy Wether, it was referred.  
Mean while, a Mandarin came with one of the Conbon's Factors, to present the Ambassador in his Master's Name with two Hogs, two Sheep, four Geese, 
Presents sent from the Conbon to he Ambassador.  eight Hens, two Pots of Liquor, Rice, and some other Provisions, which the Netherlanders received with many Thanks, and judged it convenient, to deliver the Notes of the Presents to them, to give to ●…eir Masters: But the Factor and the Mandarin being scrupulous to take it without some of the Netherlanders went with them; it was judged convenient since it still Reigned very hard, and it being above an hours walk, to keep it till dry Wether, that then it might be carried with the rest, as before mentioned.  
In the Evening, Hiulauja came to tell the Hollanders, that he had been with the Barks lying on the other side of the City, which were all ready, so that the Goods might be sent aboard the next Morning: If there should not be Coelis or Porters enough to carry them all in one day, they should send away as many as they could, and leave the rest till the day after: Whereupon, the Hollanders gave immediate Order, for the getting of all things ready against the next Morning, yet they were hindered by the great Rain, the Ways being made (in a manner) unpassable thereby.  
Mean while, the Ambassador considering the Prime Governors answer to his Motion about Ships having liberty to put in there in Stormy Wether, Proposed to the Council, If it would not be for their advantage, to make a trial of it, and Order one of the Frigates, which from Batavia were expected at Hoksieu to come to Ningpo, with a Lading of such Goods, as they should think convenient, to be Bartered for Silk; and this trial in his judgement could never be made in a better time, than whilst they were there present: Whereupon it was concluded, that Noble and the Secretary, when they carried the Letters to the Governor and Conbon, they should again speak to them concerning the coming thither of a Ship, and then they might govern themselves accordingly.  
The sixteenth in the Morning, the Hollanders were by the Chief Governor's 
General's Present.  Order presented with two fat Wethers, two Porkers, some Poultry, and other Provisions; which they received, and gave the Bearers some Money for a Gratuity. So soon as the Wether began to grow fair, as many Goods were unladen, as there were Coelis to carry them, with which Putman's went to the other side of the City to give Order for their reimbarquing.  
Mean while, Noble and the Secretary Ʋander Does went to the Governor of 
Noble and Ʋander Does go to the General.  the City, to deliver the forementioned Letters. They took the Horses also with them, because one of the Guides had told the Ambassador, that his Highness was desirous to see them; whither being come, after a short stay, and the Governor having viewed the Horses with great delight, Noble and Ʋander Does delivered his Highness the Letter, and returned him humble Thanks for the Presents which he had sent the Ambassador the day before.  
Then they also asked, (it suiting with their present Discourse) If it should happen that a Holland's Ship should come thither, if it would be Welcome to his Highness, and the People used as courteously as they were? To which the General answered, That such strangers as they, which come from remote Countries, to seek Friendship, and Present the Emperor, aught to have kindness shown them; therefore what reason should he have to deal discourteously with the Netherlanders, when ever they come thither? They might rest satisfied, for he assured them, that if they came into his Jurisdiction, he would take care for them, and show them all the kindness he could.  
After which answer, the Netherlanders taking their leave went to the Conbon, 
Goes also to the Conbon.  to whom they also delivered the Ambassador's Letter and Note of the Presents, telling him, that no Blood Coral was mentioned in the Note, because they had none at the present, but they hoped, that a Ship would shortly come thither, and that then, they would furnish his Highness with what quantity he pleased; using this Discourse purposely, because they would have the better opportunity to speak of the Ship. Then they desired, that if a Holland Vessel should chance to come thither, whether he would be courteous to the Netherlanders? To which he answered as the General had done, adding, That the Hollanders must Command their People to use no Hostility where ever they came with their Ships.  
The Presents designed for him he would not accept of, till they returned from Peking. From thence they went to the Manchu, but could not (because of 
And to Manchu.  his indisposition) come to speak with him, but sent them in answer to the Letter and Note of the Presents, that he thanked the Ambassador, but he durst not accept the Presents; with which answer, the Netherlanders returned.  
This forementioned Reply of the General and Conbon, and that of the thirteenth 
They concluded to send for a Ship with Merchandise, and from Hoksieu to Ningpo.  instant, made to the Netherlanders, being consulted on in the Council, it was unanimously agreed on, to send for the smallest Vessel expected from Batavia at Hoksieu, to come to Ningpo, (under pretence, that she should go to japan) with a Lading of convenient Merchandise, as Sandalwood, Pepper, Frankincense, Myrrh, Cloves, Led, Caliatur-Wood, Black Paragon, and Scarlet-Cloth, some Blood Coral in strings, and the like.  
To which purpose Van Hoorn wrote a Letter to Harthouwer in Hoksieu, that 
Van Hoorn writes to Harthouwer concerning it.  he had found it convenient, that one of the smallest Vessels which were expected from Batavia in the Bay of Sothia, under a pretence to Sail to japan, should come to Ningpo: But however, the Ship was not to stay any longer than the first of September at Ningpo, and then, whether the Goods were sold or not, set Sail to japan, that the forementioned Commodities might come time enough, to be disposed of in japan, and so prevent all manner of Losses or Damages that might happen. Mean while, the Wether being pretty fair, the remaining Presents and other Goods were unladen and carried to the North side of the City.  
The Ambassador, Noble, and the rest of the Retinue following them through the City of Hanchu, and the Suburbs, came in the Afternoon to the places where the Barks lay, being above a League distant from the other in which they came.  
The eighteenth, it was thought convenient to Present the Pingtow, which had furnished the Netherlanders with Barks; and likewise in requital for his Presents, sent them the twelfth instant, five Dutch els of Red Cloth, one 
Presents for the Pingtouw.  Piece of Perpetuana's, one string of Amber Beads, six Flasks of Rose-Water, one Perspective Glass, and some Spectacles, which the Secretary setting down in a Note, proffered to him: Who returning, brought word, that the Pingtow would receive the four first sorts of Goods; but as for the Perspective Glasses and Spectacles, he knew not what to do with them; and sent also his Servant back with the Secretary, to Present the Ambassador with two Bottles of Tee, and to fetch the Presents, because he was fearful to receive them, if they should be brought by the Netherlanders, and delivered in the presence of other Persons, because the General and Conbon did not accept of theirs.  
In the Evening, the Horse were Embarked in the prepared Vessels, and all things were made ready for their departure the next day.  
The nineteenth in the Morning, the Ambassador leaving Hanchu, came in the Evening to Tangseeuw, a handsome Village, where they stayed all that Night, having that day Sailed three Leagues.  
Soon after their arrival there, the Interpreter jenko came to tell the Ambassador, 
Orders not to Transport Silk.  that he was informed, that the Emperor, besides his Order of not Transporting any Silk, had strictly forbidden, that no Silk should be carried out of the Province Chekiang to any other Territory.  
The twentieth in the Morning they left Tangseeuw, and were that day Towed by many Rustics Houses, which were built along the Banks of a deep Trench or Graff. The Country hereabouts is all Champain, well Manured, and in many places Planted with Mulberry-Trees, which yield food for their Silkworms, 
Chekiang produces much Silk.  for no place in all China breeds more than this Province of Chekiang; for it not only furnishes its own Counties, and all China with all sorts of Silk Stuffs, but also the Neighbouring Isles of japan, the Spaniards in the Philipines', nay, all India, and the remotest parts of Europe, for the Hollanders buy much Silk in Hoksieu, lying in the Province of Fokien, which is all brought thither from Chekiang. The Silk Stuffs made in this Province are esteemed the best in all China, and are to be had at such low Rates, that ten Men may better be maintained there in Silk, than one Man with Cloth in Europe. They cut the Mulberry Trees generally once a year, as in Europe we do our Vines, and suffer them not to shoot up to any great height, because by long experience they have found that the Leaves of the smallest and youngest Trees produce the best Silk, which difference they know in the Spinning of the first and second Threads; for the first is that which comes from the fresh budding little Leaves, and the second comes from the strong and full grown Summer Leaves, which alteration of Food given to the Worms, makes the difference in the Silk. Which is also perhaps the reason, that the Silk which is made in Europe, is generally much thicker and courser than that in China.  
Between the Prizes of the first and second Spinning, the Chineses make a great difference, notwithstanding the greatest Silk-Throsters in Europe have no knowledge to distinguish the one from the other: The best Silk they Spin in Lent, and the coursest and biggest in june, so that both sorts are made in one Year. The breeding of these Worms is all one trouble, and requires as much care as they do in any places of Europe. Wherefore it is a mere Fable, that all the Silk in China is made by the Silk Worms upon the Trees, without the labour or industry of Man.  
Martinius tell us, That the breeding of Silk Worms, and the manner of making 
Histor. China.  Cotton and Silk, is an ancient invention of the Chinese; for they say, that the Emperor Ya's Consort, who Reigned before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 2375. was the first that used it, and afterwards taught it her Subjects: For though the breeding and ordering of the Silk Worms was not unknown to the Chineses before that time, yet they were ignorant of that Art, to make Silk Clothes of them, as generally at the first Discovery of things, we are unskilful in the proper use. But however, the Chineses may justly claim the honour, that from them, as the chief Fountain, the Art of making Silk was carried to other remote Countries in Europe.  
BUt to return: The Ambassador having passed many beautiful Stone Bridges, in the Afternoon they came to the City of Kunghti, or Cunghte, the fifth substitute City of the second Metropolis Kiahing, in the sixth Province, lying on the left side of the River, and in the Evening arrived at a Village called Summingsing, where they stayed that Night, having that day gotten four Leagues further.  
In the Morning, leaving Summingsing, they Sailed, as the day before, by many Rustics Houses; and about the Evening arrived at Chiangfoe, otherwise Kiahing, the sixth City in this Province, along which they ran Westerly to the North Suburb, where they stayed that Night to get other Coelies to Tow them, having that day made four Leagues forward in a Northerly Course.  
The two and twentieth in the Morning, they proceeded, and were Towed, coming about a Cannon shot from the Suburb of Kiating, between two Fortresses, and so to the Village jankanking, seaving it on their Lar-board; in the Afternoon, by Pinghaw; on the South side of which lies a small Lake called Fuen, which separates the Province Chekiang, from that of Nanking, so that they entered the Province of Nanking.  
After the Netherlanders were arrived about Noon, in the Village Pingchwan, they from thence past by Ukiam, and leaving it about a Cannon shot from them on their left hand, they went up to the Suburbs, where they cast Anchor to stay that Night, and provide themselves with other Men to Tow their Barks, having that day passed four Leagues, of which, two in the Province of Nanking.  
This great Province of Nanking, by the Tartars at this day called Kiangnam, 
Borders of the Province Nanking.  being the chiefest of the nine Southrens, Verges in the East and Southeast with the Sea, in the South it borders upon Chekiang, in the South-West upon that of Kiangsi, in the West touches Huquang, in the North-West Honan, and the remainder, the Territory of Quantung.  
Although the Chineses reckon (except the chief Province of Peking, wherein 
Worth:  the Court and Seat of the Emperor is kept) that of Kiangnang the next in honour and order, yet setting aside the Emperor's residence there, it cannot be compared to this of Nanking, either in Magnitude, Fertility, or aught else; nay, their Histories affirm, that the ancient Chinese Emperors, as V, Cyn, Sun, Ci, Leang, Chin, and the Family Tangle, first Planted the Seat of the Empire in this Province, although afterwards, Transported thence to Peking, by the Taymingian Family, the better, and with the more ease to oppose the Tartars incursions, being nearest to their Borders.  
The whole Province is divided into fourteen great Territories, viz. Kiangningsu, 
Division▪  or Nankingfu, Fungyangfu, Suchenfu, Sunkiangfu, Changcheufu, Chingkiangfu, Yancheufu, Hoaiganfu, Lucheufu, Gankingfu, Taipingfu, Ningquefu, Chicheufu, Hoeicheufu, besides four small Counties, as Quangte, Hocheu, Chucheu, Siuchtu, every one having great and small Towns in them, to the number of an hundred and ten.  
The first County Kiangningfu, hath for boundaries on the North-East, Yancheufu; 
Borders.  in the East, Changcheufu, and Sucheufu; in the South, Ningquefu; in the West, Taipingfu, and Hocheufu; in the North, and North-West, Cheuchufu.  
This County contains seven Towns, viz. Nanking, or Kiangning, the chief 
Towns.  and Metropolis of the whole Province, Kucyung, Lieyang, Lieuxui, Caoxun, Kiangpu, and Loho.  
The first Builder of the City of Nanking was Guoi, King of Cuckoe, who called 
Names.  her Kinling, that is, Gilded Tract of Land, The first Raiser of the Family Cyn named it afterwards Moling; the King's V. which kept their Court there, Kienye; the House of Tangle, Kiangning; but the Taimingian Family changed the Name of Kiangning to that of Ingtien; but at last the Tartars, after having harrased the whole Empire of China, restored it the ancient Name Kiangning.  
This Kiangning lieth in thirty two Degrees and fifteen Minutes Northern Latitude, about six Leagues from the Eastern Shore of the River Kiang, in a pleasant and delightful Plain; for the River Kiang flows through broad and deep digged Graffs, not only by the City Walls, but also into it with several Navigable Channels.  
In like manner the East side of the City, lying in a pleasant Valley, is interwoven with broad Graffs, by which means they may as well come to this part of the City in Barges, as to that side which verges with the River Kiang, and may there likewise lad and unlade Vessels of ordinary Burden.  
Over all these Graffs lead several Stone Bridges, supported on divers Arches.  
Over the forementioned Channel, which runs from the River Kiang into the City, is a Bridge with fourteen Arches.  
According to the opinion of the Chinese Geographers, this City doth not only exceed all other Cities on the Earth in bigness, but also in beauty; and indeed she is inferior to few: for as to what concerns her inward part is most plain, except some pleasant and easy Ascents. It stands surrounded with a 
Walls.  double Wall; the first and innermost of which is six Germane Miles in circumference, or according to Trigaut and Martinius, eighteen Italian Miles; yet the City itself is not above six Leagues in circumference.  
This Wall encloseth the Palace, and most part of the City.  
The second, or outward Wall is much bigger, but not continued round, or joined together in all places, but stands only as a Defence in those places where the City is weakest. When two Troopers (for so the Chineses describe this Wall) are sent from one another in the Morning to Ride about the City, they meet not again till Night; by which may easily be judged the bigness of the Wall and City. Notwithstanding within the circumference of this Wall there are great and spacious Gardens, Lakes, Mounts and Warrens, yet the greatest part thereof is full of Inhabitants.  
The first Wall, which is above thirty Foot high, whose under part consists of Freestone, but the upper only of baked Stones, or Bricks, is raised very even, and hath Battlements, round about strengthened with Redoubts and Watch-houses. It reckons thirteen Gates, some of which have four, and 
Gates.  others five Posterns, whose Doors are covered with Iron Plates. Every one of these Gates are continually Guarded by strong Parties of Soldiers. The chiefest Streets are about twenty eight Paces broad, and being as direct as a Line, are in the middle Paved with broad blue Stones, and on each side with Pebbles. The common Citizens Houses are neither fair nor costly, but mean and without Conveniences, being but one Story high, standing all with their Gable-ends towards the Streets, with only one Door. The Front hath a square Hole in stead of a Window, before which they have a wooden Shutter, which they let down, and those that drive any Trade lay their Commodities upon them to sell, and to prevent People from looking in, they generally hang a Rush Mat before it in stead of a Glass Window. The whole House on the outside is from top to bottom Plastered with very white Mortar or Lime, and the sloaping Roof covered with white Tiles. In most of the Houses are Shops, filled with all manner of Chinese Commodities, as Cotton, Silk-Stuffs, Porcelain, Pearls, Diamonds, and other rich Merchandises: others also have Peddling Wares. Before every Shop stands a Plank or Board, and before some two, on which the Master of the House his Name is written in Letters of Gold, and what Commodities he hath to sell: Next these Board's stands also a Post, or rather a Pole, which is higher than the House, on which they put a Penon, or Flag, whereby they may distinguish every one's Habitation, as here in Europe they do by Signs.  
Here are also many fair Edifices, as Temples, stately Triumphal Arches, Palaces, and other public Buildings.  
There was formerly a very magnificent Palace, built square, being the 
An ancient Palac●… of the Emperors.  Court and Residence of the ancient Chinese Emperors, but now lies ruined on the South part of the City; one side of it may still be measured, and bears an Italian Mile and two hundred Paces in length, and is enclosed within the inner Wall, which encompasseth the greatest part of the City. It was formerly surrounded with three Walls, and deep Moats. According to the remaining part of this Wall, the forementioned Trigaut reckons the circumference to be four or five Italian Miles. In the middle there yet appears a broad Way Paved with Freestone, which runs through the whole Work like a Cross. On each side of it may be seen curious Carved Stones, which stand four Foot high, and behind them a little Rivulet of clear Water. The Tiles on the Roof were of hard Stone, wrought with Dragons, and the Emperor's Arms Painted in a Gold colour, so that when the Sun shined upon them they glittered like Gold.  
In the last Tartar Wars this stately Edifice and Court was burnt and pulled down to the Ground, so turning that which before was the wonder of the World into a heap of Rubbish; yet no other way bereaving the City of her ancient lustre: which was done out of a peculiar hatred that the Tartar bore to the Taimingian Family, because Hamvu, or I, the first promoter of that Family, drove the Tartars out of the Empire, after they had possessed it a hundred and eight years, and planted the Branches of their own Stock in the Throne in this forementioned Palace, till such time as it was removed from thence to Peking.  
The City is very populous, and said to be inhabited by ten hundred thousand, or a Million of Souls, besides a Garrison of forty thousand Tartars: for the Governor of the Southern Provinces Resides here in the Emperor's Name.  
But above all we ought not to forget a Tower, built on a high Hill, which 
A strange Tower.  may justly be called A Tower of Art, because three artificial Pieces of Work are kept in it, the like of which are not in the whole World: The first a Celestial Globe, distinguished by its Equinoctial, and other equidistant Lines; the second is an Armilla aquatoria, consisting in a Perspective Glass, with two Circles, each movable upon their Point; the third is a Sphaera armillarii, very like our European; every one of them hath twelve Feet upon the Aequator, or middle Line, made of Copper, Gilt and curiously wrought: They stand upon Dragons cut of Copper, and are so exact and artificially made, that the most experienced Astronomer cannot discern the least fault in them: and notwithstanding the Tartars of the Family juen placed them there three hundred and seventy years since, yet they retain their ancient lustre, as if but newly made.  
In the middle of the Plain, to which they ascend by twelve Steps, stands 
Porcelain Tower  a high Tower of Porcelain, which for costliness and all manner of rare workmanship, hath not its parallel in all China. It consists in nine (though according to Semedo scarce in six) Vaulted Stories, to be ascended on the inside by a hundred and four Steps. Round about every Story is a Gallery, curiously adorned with Images and Windows; on both sides of which are square Holes for the Light to come in at, with Ivory Bars; all the Work on the outside Polished or Glazed with divers Colours, as Red, Green, and Yellow: The whole Structure made of several Pieces so curiously Cemented together, that it seems to be one entire thing. Between the Galleries are Jutting out, made like Penthouses, and coloured with Green; at each corner whereof hang small Copper Bells, which moved by the Wind make a continual and pleasant tinkling. The upper part of the Tower, to which none can get, unless they climb up the outside, is Crowned, as the Chineses say, with a great Pineapple of Massy Gold: from which upper Gallery they may see, not only over the whole City of Nanking, but all the adjacent Plains, as far as the Eye can reach. They say, that when the Tartars, Anno 1200. first conquered the Empire of China, they forced them to build this Structure in commemoration of their Victory: for which reason, as it appears, the Tartars, when in our Age they conquered the Empire a second time, they never offered to deface it, but let it stand in its full glory, when as they pulled down all other ancient Monuments, Buildings, and Chinese Emperors Tombs to the Ground.  
Without the Walls of the City are the Tombs of the antique Kings; near which stands a Grove of lofty Pines, surrounded with a Wall of three Germane Miles in circumference.  
Within this Enclosure also appears a Hill, whereon likewise are erected several Tombs; and not far distant a most magnificent Temple, a Royal Building, as well for its Prospect as State: It consists for the most part of Wood, except the Walls, which are of Brick, and stands on a Summit environed with Freestone: you go into it by four pair of Stairs, opening to the sour Winds: It hath five Galleries, about which stand two Rows of wooden Pillars, each thirty six Foot high, and above two Fathom thick: On these rest great Pieces of cross Timber, and on them stand other lesser Pillars, whereon lies the Roof, of Carved and Gilt Board's: The Doors are Figured with Laurel Leaves, and covered with Gilded Plates. The Imagery of the outer Galleries and Windows are encircled with Gilded Wires to keep the Birds from either making their Nests, or defiling them; yet the Wires are so thin and wide, that they may easily see through: which is also observed in all great Buildings, especially the Emperor's Palaces. In the middle of the Temple stand two Thrones, wrought with great Art, and beset with Pearls, and all manner of Precious Gems; on them stand two Chairs, in one of which the Emperor sits when he makes Offerings; to do which none else is permitted; and the other stands empty for their Deity, who they say, sits therein, and receives the Offering. Without the Temple stand many Altars of Red Marble▪ which represent the Moon, Sun, Hills and Floods: and according to the Chineses Relations, all these Altars are placed without the Temple, that none might worship them, but that every one should know they are of the same Structure which the Emperor worships in the Temple. Round about are several Chambers, or rather Cells, which formerly, as they say, were used as Bannia's, in which the Emperor, when he went to Offer, Bathed himself with his Attendants.  
To this Temple, and to the Emperor's Tombs, lead very broad Ways, on each side planted with five Rows of Pine-trees, at equal distance, and in a direct Line; from which none might break a Bough on pain of death.  
All these Buildings were ruined in the late Tartar Wars, the Trees plucked up, the Tombs defaced, and the Temples and Palaces utterly laid waste.  
The County of Fungiangfu, a great Tract of Land, gives Limits in the 
Borders.  East and North-East to Hoaiganfu; in the East, to the Lake Piexe and Chucheufu; in the South and South-West to Hocheufu and Lucheufu; in the West, to the Territory of Honan.  
This pleasant and fruitful Country, veined by several great Rivers, is famous, because two of her Natives of mean Extract were raised to the highest degree of Honour; the first called Lieupang, bred among the scum of the Commonalty, nay, among Robbers and Rebels, subdued the Imperial Family Cyn, and raised that of Han.  
The second being Humvu, or Chu, was a mean Priests Son; who at first turning Robber, soon after the expulsion of the Tartars got into the Throne, and established the Crown on the Taimingian Family.  
The Emperor Thou also did not a little enrich this Country, when by his Predecessor Ya he was Crowned King in the City of Mao. It is also said that Lahu, the first Inventor of the Epicurean Learning, which lived before the great Philosopher Confut was born in that City of Mao.  
The County Fungyangfu contains eighteen Towns, of which Fungyang is the chiefest, the next are Liuhoai, Hoaiyven, Tingyven, Uho, Hung, Hokieu, Munching, Su, Hiutai, Tienchang, So, Lingpi, Ing, Tacho, Hao, Ingxan, Su, So, Ing, Hao, all great Places.  
The Metropolis Fungyang lying on a Mountain, encloseth many Hills within its Walls, built with fair Edifices, both public and private.  
This Division was by the Emperor Thou brought and joined to the Province of Yang, to be Governed by Teu.  
In the time of the Kings this part of the Country was called The Kingdom of Tuxam; which the Kings of Cuckoe afterwards included in their Dominions: but the Family Han made it again Tributary, called Chungly: yet this Place was not honoured with the Title of Teu, or Metropopolis, until the forementioned Chu, which raised the Taimingian Family, and was born in this City, enlarged it, building new and strong Walls, fifty Furlongs in circumference, and adorning the Tombs of his Predecessors, and gave it the Name of Metropolis, setting over it a Viceroy, giving it Jurisdiction over other Cities, intituling it Fungyang, that is, Nobleness of the Phoenix.  
The third Sucheufu, conterminates in the North and North-East with the Mouth of the River Kiang; in the East, with the Sea; in the South, with Sunkiang and Kiahingfu; the West borders Kiangningfu; and the North-West, Chancheufu.  
The first which inhabited this Country amongst the Chinese, was one Taipe, of the Family Cheu, who coming out of the North planted his Seat here, and reduced those that formerly were wild and savage, to be rational and understanding People.  
In the Emperor Vu's time this County obtained Royal Dignity, being called The Kingdom of V. after whose Death it was taken by the Kingdom of Iue, who possessed it but a little while, being routed by Cuckoe, who subdued the Country.  
Lastly, the promoter of the Family Cyn conquered all those Kingdoms; and brought them under the Province of Hoeiki.  
The first which called this Country and its Metropolis Sucheu was King 
Names.  Sui: the Family of Tangle gave it the Name of Changcheu; Sung, that of Pnkiang; but the Taimingian Family restored the old Name Sucheu.  
The Country is in all Places interlaced with Branches of Rivers and Graffs, along which they may Sail from the City to the Sea.  
Sucheufu contains seven Towns, of which Sucheu is the chiefest; the rest are 
Towns.  Quengxan, Changxoe, Ukiang, Kiating, Taicing, Cungmung, and Cungming, which lies on an Island in the Sea.  
The fourth Tract of Land being Sunghiangfu, is a small County, yet fruitful 
Borders.  and a good Soil, bordering in the North with Sucheufu; in the East, with the Sea and Hangcheufu; in the South and West at Hangcheufu only; and the remainder on Sucheufu.  
This Country, as the former, lies most in Water, the East part of it being washed by the Sea, and the rest surrounded by Rivers, which with their Branches cutting through the middle, and all Places else of it make the whole Navigable: It contains only three Towns, which in bigness, populosity, and 
Towns.  variety of Commodities may stand in competition with many more eminent Cities; the first and chiefest is Sunkiang, the other two Langhai and Cingpai.  
The City Sunkiang verges with the Sea on the Northern Shore of a River, which at its Mouth is fortified with a strong Castle, from whence they may Sail to japan.  
In ancient times this Country and City before mentioned shared also in the Tartars Cruelties. The Family of Tangle called it Houting; the Tartars of the 
Names.  House of juen not only gave it the present Name, but also the Title of Furio, or Great City, having formerly but the Privileges and Name of a mean Town▪ and belonged to the third County Sucheufu.  
The fifth County Changcheufu reckons for Limits in the North and North-East, 
Borders.  the River Kiang; in the South, Sucheufu; in the South and South-West, the Lake Tai; in the West, Yancheufu.  
This County contains five Towns, viz. Changcheu, Vufie, Kiangyn, and Ginkiang.  
There are also five Temples, of which one built near the City Vufie, in honour to Taipe, the Supporter of the People, exceeds all the other.  
The City Changcheu lies near the forementioned Moat, which runs from the City Sucheu to the River Kiang: the Stone Banks of which near this City, are much more curious and artificial than any where else. There are also some Triumphal Arches, which add a great beauty to the City. It hath received its Denomination Guihing from the exceeding fineness of the Earth, of which the Tee Cups are made, for Guihing signifies Rare Earth.  
The sixth Territory Chinkiangfu borders in the North at the River Kiang; 
Towns.  in the East, at Changcheufu; in the South, at the Lake Tai; and in the West, at Kiangnangfu.  
This County reckons three Cities, viz. Chinkiang, Tanyang, and Kintan. 
Towns.   
Chinkiang, by Martinius taken for Cingiam so called by Paulus Venetus, lies Northward from the River Kiang, on the East side of a Channel, which falls into the Kiang. On the other side of the Channel to the West lies a Suburb, neither lesser nor emptier of People than the City itself. Between these lie several Bridges, over which they pass out of one into another: beyond the Bridges the Channel extends itself to a greater breadth, and receives Water from several Places; which makes so great a Navigation by that City, that it cannot be expressed; for all the Ships or Vessels that come from the Province of Chekiang and the other Eastern Towns, to go to Peking and other Places, must stop here, to put up their Masts, and hold out their Sails, not being able hitherto to use them, because of the many Bridges in that Channel; for from hence to the Grand Metropolis Peking no Bridge is suffered excepting one to draw up.  
This City by some justly called Kinkeu, that is, The Mouth of the Court, because there are continually Freighted Vessels going from hence to Peking.  
The seventh Division called Yangcheufu, borders in the North, at the River 
Borders.  Hoai; East, at the Sea; Southward, upon the Stream of Kiang; West, on Nankingfu, and the little County Chucheufu; and the North and by West conterminates with Fungyangfu.  
This contains ten Cities, viz. Y●…ngcheu, Ychin, Taihing, Kaoyeu, Hinghoa, Paoing, Tai, jucao, Fung, and Haimuen, of which Kaoyeu and Tai are the biggest.  
Northward over the River Kiang is a great Sluice near the Garrison Quacheu, where the forementioned Channel takes its beginning; along which they Row up to the City Yangcheu, which lies on the East-side of it, as on the West the Suburb, which formerly stretched a Germane League, but was ruined in the last Tartar War.  
The City Yancheu is full of large and stately buildings and in many Places moistened with Graffs of fresh Water, over which lead Stone Bridges, consisting of twenty four Arches, besides many lesser, not to be reckoned. There is also a Custom-house for the Emperor's use.  
The chief Trade which the Inhabitants follow is the dealing in Salt; for in the East of this County near the Sea are many Salt-pits.  
The eighth, being Hoaiganfu, Confines in the East, upon the Sea; in the South, with the River Hoai; in the South-West and West, with Fungyangfu and Sucheufu; and in the North, with the Province of Xantung. The whole Tract of Land is cut through with Rivers and Lakes. It contains ten Towns, Hoaigan the chief, Cingho, Gantung, Taoyven, Moyang, Hai, Canyu, Pi, Souven, and Ciuning; Hai and Pi are great Cities.  
In the time of the Emperor Thou this County belonged to that of jancheu, under the Government Ten, and belonged first to King V. afterwards to Iue, then to Cu.  
In the time of the Family Hun the City Hoaigan was only a small Town 
Names.  called Hoaiyu; afterwards Han called her Linhoan; but the present Name and Title the House of Sung gave her.  
This City lying on the Eastern Shore of the digged Channel is divided into two Parts, a Southern and a Northern, yet both enclosed in one Wall; of which the South side bears the Name of Hoaigan, and the North of Yeuching. The one side is enlarged with a Suburb, which extends in length along the Banks of the Channel a Germane Mile; out of which they enter into the Yellow River.  
In the Suburb are two Custom-houses, in the one the Customs for Goods are paid, and in the other for Ships according to their Burden; all which Money is kept and bestowed upon the repairing of their Sluices in the Channel against the force of the Water (for to the Northward of this City are three Water-falls;) yet nevertheless a great part of it goes to the Emperor's Treasury.  
In this City the Viceroy, being the Emperor's Purveyor, hath his Residence; who Commands with arbitrary Power over the seven Southern Provinces.  
The ninth Lucheufu, borders in the North at Fungyangfu; in the East, at 
Borders.  Hocheufu and the River Kiang; in the South, at Gankingfu; and in the West, at the Province of Huquang and Honan. It contains eight Cities, Lucheu the chief, 
Towns.  the rest Xuching, Lukiang, Vuguei, Cao, Logan, jugran, Hoxan, most of them lying on the Shore of the famous Lake Cao; Vuguei and Logan are the biggest.  
In ancient Times this Country stood like the former, subject to the Family Cheu, under whom it became an entire Kingdom, and named Lucu; but soon after was taken from them by the Kings Cu. In the time of the Family Han it was with its chief City called Lukiang; but the present Name given by the Emperor Sui.  
Near the small City Logan are two stately Temples and a large Bridge.  
The tenth County Gankingfu borders in the North at Lucheufu; in the East and Southeast, at the River Kiang; in the West and North-West, at the Province of Huquang.  
This Country contains six Towns, viz. Ganking, Tunchiang, Cienxan, Taihu, Sosung, Vangkiang, was formerly called Von, and subdued by King Cuckoe; after which the Family of Tangle named it Sucheu; that of Sung, Ganking.  
The City Ganking stands situate on the Eastern Shore of the River Ganking, and for Wealth and Trade compares with the famousest Cities in this Province; for all that comes out of the other County to go to Nanking, comes first hither.  
Because this Tract of Land joins the three Provinces, Kiangsi, Huquang, and Nanking, and lies well for any Warlike Undertaking, it hath a Viceroy, who maintains a strong Garrison in the Castle Haimusen, for a defence of the Lake Poyang and the River Kiang.  
The Family Tangle caused an Iron Pillar to be erected there of three Rods high, and of a proportionable thickness, Anviled out of an entire Piece.  
The eleventh Shire, being Taipingfu, is surrounded with the River Kiang, or 
Borders.  rather lies between two of her Branches; and moreover verges in the East with a part of the Lake Tanyang, where it borders with the County of Kiangning.  
This County belonged formerly to the Kingdom of V. afterwards to Iue, next to Cuckoe, but was at last by the Family of Cyn reduced under that of Chang. The House of Han called it Tanyang; Tangle, Nanyu: Sung first named it Pingnan; 
Names.  and lastly, Taiping; which Name it retains to this day. It contains three Cities, viz. Taiping, Vehu, and Fachang; of which Vehu, the biggest and richest, hath also a Custom-house, and lies on an Island between the two Arms of the River Kiang, which afterwards join together at the City of Nanking.  
The twelfth, being Ningquefu, borders in the North, at the River Kiang; in 
Borders.  the East, at Quanghefu; in the South, at Hoecheufu; and in the West, at Chicheufu. It is a mountainous Country, and contains six Towns, viz. Ningque the 
Towns.  Great, and Ningque the Less, King, Taiping, Cingte, Nanling.  
The chief City Ninque lies on the Eastern Shore of the River Von.  
Within her Walls are pleasant Hills, Warrens, magnificent Buildings, and abundance of Chesnut and Pear-trees.  
Nea●… the little City King stands a fair Chapel, in the Chinese Tongue called Hiangsi, that is, A sweet smelling Hart, and is Dedicated to five Maidens, which when they were taken by Pirates, would rather endure death than suffer their Honour to be blemished.  
The thirteenth County Chicheufu, borders in the East upon Ningquefu; in the 
Borders.  Southeast touches Hoeicheufu; in the South-West lies the Province Kiangsi; the North-West hath the River Kiang; and in the North, a Promontory at the same River for Boundaries.  
This Country was formerly under the Kingdom of V. soon after under Iue; next under Cu. King Loang called it Nanling; Siu, Cieupu; and the Family 
Towns.  of Tangle, the present Name Chicheufu. It comprehends six Towns, viz. Chicheu the chief, Cinyang, Tungling, Xetai, Kiente, Tunglieu, and four stately Temples.  
The City Chicheu stands seated on the Southern Shore of the River Kiang.  
The fourteenth Division Hoeicheufu, being the most Southern of all this 
Borders.  Province, conterminates in the East, with the Province of Chekiang; in the South, with a Promontory; in the South-West, with that of Kiangsi; in the North-West, with Chicheufu; and in the North, with Ningquefu.  
This Country in the time of the Kings suffered the same misfortune as the 
Names.  forementioned. The Name Hoeichu it received of the Family Sung, and possesseth six Towns, viz. Hoeichu the chiefest, the rest are Hicuning, Vuyveng, Kimuen, 
Towns.  In, Cieki.  
This Hoeichu is a Place of great Trade, especially famous for making the best Chinese Ink and waxed Chests.  
The four small Territories of this Province are Quangte, Hochen, Chucheu, and Siucheu, every one called by the Name of their principal City.  
The first of them being Quangte, borders Eastward upon the prime County Kiangningfu, and Hangcheufu; in the South, upon Hoeicheufu; in the West, looks at Ningquefu; and in the North runs with a Point to the River Kiang.  
This County hath two Towns, Quangte the chief, and Kienping, both situate at the Foot of a pleasant Mountain called Hung and Ling.  
The City Quangte is not only fair, but also abounds with Silk.  
The second called Hocheu, hath for Limits in the North, the third small, and twelfth great Territory Chucheu; in the East and South; Kiangningfu; and in the West, Lucheufu.  
This Shire contains two Cities, of which Hocheu is the chiefest, and Hawxan.  
The City of Hocheu is famous, because heretofore the Residence of a great Robber Chu, who Anno 1368. driven the Tartars out of China.  
The third little County in which the great City Cheucheu stands, whose Denomination it bears, verges in the North and West with the second Territory Pungyangfu; in the East, with the Lake Piexe and the seventh great Shire Yangcheufu; in the South, with Kiangningfu and the two little Territories of the City Hocheu.  
This County contains three Cities, of which Chucheu is the chiefest and biggest, and the other two much less are Civenciao and Laigan.  
The fourth small County, in which the great Siucheu is situate, is the most Northern of this Province, and borders in the East, upon Hoaiganfu; in the South, upon Tunyangfu; in the West, upon Honan; in the North, at that of Xantung. In the middle it is cut through by the Yellow River, and is of great consequence, because it conterminates with four Provinces, and contains five Cities, Sieuchu, Siao, Tangxang, Fung, and Poi.  
On the North-West side of the City Siucheu lies a Bridge, made of thirty five Ships linked together with Iron Chains.  
Here also is another Bridge that runs athwart the River Pieu.  
This City Sieucheu is also famous, because the Emperor Lieupang, promoter of the Family of Han, after he had taken the City of Poi, set forth from hence to conquer the Empire.  
Thus much of the Province of Nanking; now we will return to our Embassy.  
AFter the Netherlanders had gotten fresh Men to Tow them, they set forward 
Come to Sucheu.  again over the River Sung on the twenty fifth, and Landed about ten a Clock at the City Sucheu, where they changed their Barks. No sooner they arrived at the West Gate of the City, where they were to Embark again; but the Mandarin who had the Command of the Vessels, came to bid them welcome, and invited them to Dine with him the next day; and moreover, presented them with two Porkers, as many Sheep, four Hens, two Pots of Drink, several sorts of Fruit, and twelve Pices of Silk-Stuffs, which were all delivered to the Ambassador himself, with request that he would please to accept them. Van Hoorn thanking him for his good inclination and trouble which he had taken upon him; and also for the Presents said, That he would accept of the Provision (because he would not seem to despise them) but as for the Stuffs he could not do it, because it was not customary, therefore he desired them to excuse him: Moreover, that he could not possibly come to Dine with him the next Morning, partly for his indisposition, being tired with his Journey, and partly fearing to displease the Conbon of the City, if he went any where to a Feast before he went to him; with which Excuses they seeming to be satisfied took their leave.  
The next Morning, being the twenty sixth, the Horses (being till that time prevented by Stormy Wether) were Landed and put in Stables ashore.  
The twenty seventh nothing happened of note, only some Mandarins came from the Viceroy Singlamong (who keeps in this City to the number of twenty five) to Compliment and Welcome the Ambassador, whilst the Netherlanders waited for fresh Vessels to be gone again, of which they then saw no likelihood, notwithstanding the Mandarine Guides had told them the day before, that without fail they should have them as that day. They also saw little hopes of their going, there being no convenient Vessels to be had to carry their Horses.  
The Conbon having the day before sent to ask the Hollanders, if they had no Pistols, nor Sword-blades to dispose of? it was judged fit on the twenty eighth, (observing what Courtesies the forementioned Lord might do them in their coming thither) to present him with a pair of Pistols, two Sword-blades, five els of Scarlet, one String of Amber, two Pieces of Linen, and a Quilt: But the Conbon would not accept any thing of the Presents, which were carried to him by the Secretary, only the Pistols and Sword-blades; so that the rest he brought back again.  
In the Evening a Mandarin, sent from the Conbon, came to Present the Ambassador, 
The Conbon Presents the Ambassador.  in requital for his Pistols and Sword-blades, with twelve Pieces of Silk-Stuffs, four Porkers, four Goats, Geese, Hens, and other fresh Provisions, which were accepted, but the Silk-Stuffs sent back again.  
The twenty ninth Genko the Interpreter informed the Ambassador, that at his coming an Envoy had been there, who just before was sent from the Emperor at Peking, to bring the Chineses of Tayowan, under his Obedience. 
Shift the Goods.   
The same day more Presents, and also the Oxen, were put into new Barks; and likewise the Horses were Embarked again into the same Vessels which they came in, there being no convenient Vessels to be got for them there. Soon after they prepared all things to be gone the next day, only staying for Fodder for the Horses, of which at this Place they were to provide themselves quite to Peking.  
The thirtieth in the Forenoon the Conbon sent the Ambassador by one of his 
The Conbon sends Provender.  Mandarins ten Picols of Hay for a Present, which since none could be bought for Money, was accepted with many thanks, and a reward to the Mandarin that brought it.  
In the Afternoon a Grand Mandarin, who had the Command over the Militia 
The Ambassador Complemented by a Mandarin.  and the Emperor's Wardrobe in this City, came to Compliment and Welcome the Ambassador; who having presented him with a Glass of Wine, and showed him the Horses and Oxen, took his leave.  
The one and thirtieth in the Morning, being furnished with all Necessaries, 
Leave Siucheu.  they left Siucheu, and were Towed along a digged Channel, which reaches from Siucheu, Eastward of the Lake Tai, to the City Chinkiang, and disembogues itself into the great River Kiang. Having stayed eight days for new Vessels to Embark themselves in, and yet not able to get enough, were forced to keep four of their Hanksieu Barks, two for the Horses, and two for the Presents.  
The two Masters of the Havens, sent by the General of Hanksieu to conduct 
Haven Masters belonging to Hanksieu depart.  the Netherlanders, took their leave at the North Suburb of Siucheu, where leaving the Ambassador they intended to Sail again to Hanksieu; Van Hoorn for their care which they had over the Vessels, gave each of them a Piece of Perpetuana; and also with this opportunity sent the following Letter to the General of Hanksieu, and the Conbon.  
GRatitude is accounted the greatest Virtue amongst the Hollanders. The 
The Ambassador's Letter to the General and Conbon of Hanksieu.  Ambassador cannot forget the many Favours which the generousness and Civility of Talauja had conferred on him. The Ambassador cannot find words to express his hearty thanks, but hopes at his Return from Peking and for the future to manifest by Deeds, how much the Realm of Holland and the Ambassador are obliged to Talauja.  
The whole City Siucheu hath its Situation on the Banks of a great standing River, which cuts through the City cross-ways, and is Navigable both for small and great Vessels. The Walls of the City, according to the Chinese Geographers, are forty Chinese Furlongs in circumference, and with the Suburbs above a hundred: As the Netherlanders were informed, the City covers a Spot of three Leagues in circumference. Without and within are many stately Bridges of Stone, resting on several Arches. It is but thinly built, and the Houses are erected on Pinetree Masts, many of them being very sleight.  
Siucheu, because of its nearness to the Sea and the River Kiang, is a Place of great Trade, and hath many Ships belonging to it; nay, the Netherlanders saw so many Boats in all Places, that there was scarce room to get through them.  
Much Amber is used in this City: for the Hollanders passing through several Streets, saw none but Workers of Amber.  
All things, not only for the subsistence of Man, but also for pleasure, may be had here in great plenty. It is one of the famousest Places in all China, because all the Portugese, Indian, japan, and other Commodities that come from foreign Countries, are brought thither not only by Strangers, but the Chineses themselves. There also come many Merchants from Nanking and other Places to Trade, which makes, that from year to year there is a continual Trade here, and Ships going from hence to other Provinces and Cities: and because the Ships should not be in danger when they Sail cross the neighbouring Lake Tai, there is a Channel made on the North side of the Lake, which runs from the City Sucheu to that of Chinkiang; so that it discharges its Waters in the River Kiang; but yet the Course of it is stopped up there by a Sluice, which is drawn up, or let down when they please. But as they travel from Sucheu to Ukiang, or from Ukiang to Sucheu, is a Stone Bridge, resting on three hundred Arches, by which the Channel is divided from the Lake Tai. On this Bridge they draw their Vessels along by a Line, it being built for that purpose, that they need not lie still there with their Ships.  
Without the Walls of the City stands a Custom-house, where they pay no Custom for Goods, but for the Ships according to their Burden: and it is said that this Custom comes Annually to ten hundred thousand Ducats, or five hundred thousand Pound Sterling; whereby it may easily be judged how many Ships go constantly up and down this River; whereas all the Emperor's Vessels, or those that carry any thing to the Court, pay nothing.  
Many of the Emperor's greatest Barks, called Lunchyven, passed by whilst the Hollanders Rid at Anchor there.  
The City is Governed by a Conbon or Governor, who at that time was a Leaohing Chinese, and highly beloved by all Persons.  
After the Netherlanders were gone about a League from the City they passed by Xuciquan, a large Village, and in the Afternoon saw two hundred of the Emperor's great Barks lying at Anchor. In the Evening they arrived at the Southeast side of the Suburb Usie, having that day with Sailing and Towing passed six Leagues in several Courses.  
Usie, the second substitute City to the fifth Metropolis Changcheu, signifies 
The City▪ Usie.  Wanting of Tin; for formerly on Mount Sie near Fusie, the Chineses found a great deal of that Metal; but in the beginning of the Reign of the Imperial Family of Han, most of the Mines were exhausted, for which reason the City received that Denomination.  
Here the Hollanders found many Stone Ovens, in which they Bake, or harden with Heat to that purpose, all manner of Stone.  
In the Morning, being the first of April, they proceeded on their Journey, 
April.  and Sailing about a Musquet-shot from the Walls of Usie, which leaving on their Lar-board, they arrived at the North-Suburb; where having stayed some time for Coelies, or Men to Tow them, they went forward again. About Noon they Sailed through Unquouw, a Village situate on both sides of the Channel, where they saw divers Vessels full of Indigo (which the Masters of them said was to be had at Sinchian and Sucheu,) and towards the Evening arrived at the Village Gongling, where they stayed all that Night, having that day Sailed three Leagues and a half in a Northerly Course.  
The second in the Morning leaving the Village Gongling, and after half a Leagues Towing through the Village Syksiovyem they dropped Anchor in the Evening on the North side of the City Siucheuw, otherwise called Cbangcheu, that there they might furnish themselves with fresh Coelies; but none being to be had there so suddenly, they were forced to stay that Night, having not gained above two Leagues in a North-West Course all that day: The reason why they made no greater speed was, because the Channel was very full of the Emperor's Barks, which by reason of their Bulk and deep Lading made but little way, and the Channel so narrow, that they could not pass them.  
The sides of this Channel near the City are raised with much braver Stone than the other parts.  
The third in the Morning going on farther, and passing through the Village Laytschem, they arrived at Luesinga in the Evening; where dropping Anchor they stayed all Night to get fresh Coelies to Tow their Vessels, with which they came that day but three Leagues, because of the slow progress of the Emperor's Barks.  
The fourth leaving Luesinga, they came, after they had been Towed through the Village called Sucouw, to the City Tanyang: in the Afternoon Sailing along 
City Tanyang.  the Walls thereof to the East Suburb, where they stayed that Night to get new Coelies, having that day Sailed and been Towed in a Northerly Course three Leagues.  
The fifth in the Morning they set forth again with fresh Coelies, and leaving the City Tanyang, passed by a Lake, which by three Sluices empties her Waters into this Channel. In the Afternoon they came to a little Village called Hongunpek, where they spent some time in resting themselves, being much tired by slippery Ways, and the Wind being against the Vessels, whose high building had the greater force of them. So soon as they had eaten they went away again, and in the Evening arrived at the Village Singfon, where they were forced by tempestuous Wether to drop Anchor, having that day by several Courses been Towed two Leagues and a half.  
The sixth in the Morning leaving Singhfon, they saw several Stone Ovens: about Noon passing by the Walls of the City Sinkiang, or Chinkiang, they dropped 
City Chinkiang.  Anchor at the North Suburb, to make preparation for their going up the Nanking Stream, or River Kiang, and likewise (as their Mandarine Guides said) to exchange some Barks, having this day been Towed about two Leagues.  
The seventh in the Morning several Tartar Mandarins came to Compliment the Ambassador, and bid him welcome, whilst he entertained them with a Glass of Wine. One of them after his departure sent the the Ambassador a Porker, a Goat, and some Fruit, which he thankfully received, and in return sent him some counterfeit Pearls, which he would else have bought. The Ambassador 
The Ambassador is invited to the Governor.  was also by a Mandarin invited to Dinner with the Governor of that Place; whither he went in the Afternoon (another Mandarin coming from the forementioned Governor with Horses to fetch him) with Putmen the Secretary, and all his Retinue, except Noble, who could not go because of his indisposition; and coming to the Governor they were courteously received and welcomed.  
This Lord gazed so exceedingly upon the netherlands Ambassador and his Retinue, that he forgot his Eating and Drinking; by which means also no Discourse happened amongst them of any remark; so that the Netherlanders after a civil Entertainment took their leave.  
In the Evening the Interpreters, jenko and Liulako, came to tell the Ambassador, that they had a second time been sent for to the forementioned Governor, who asked them for the number and quality of the Emperor's Presents, which as far as they knew they had given him an account of in Writing, whereat he was exceedingly amazed, saying, That without doubt they would be very acceptable. Moreover, he asked them if the Ambassador had no Blood-Coral, Pistols, Sword-blades, counterfeit Pearls, and the like? because he would willingly buy some of them, and therefore desired that they would please to speak to the Ambassador: Which being considered by the Netherlanders, and observed that this was a Tartar, and a Man of great Quality, who in and about the City bore the Command over a great number of Soldiers, and that he might do much for their advantage at Peking, they judged it convenient in the Morning to send and present him with five els and a half of Stammel, 
Presents to the Governor.  five of Sky-coloured Cloth, a Perspective Glass, two Pieces of Linen, one String of Amber Beads, and some counterfeit Pearls; and with them were sent a Complementing Letter to this effect:  
THe Ambassador is extremely satisfied with, and obliged for Talavja's or his Lordship's Civilities, and desires him to accept of these small Gifts as a token of Friendship; and in so doing will farther oblige the Hollanders:  
Captain Putmen was ordered to carry the Governor the forementioned Presents and Letter that Morning, but saw him come early Riding towards the Barks; so that it was thought fit to stay till his Return. Mean while the Ambassador's Son went with the Pilot and Interpreter Maurice a Fowling on the Banks of the River Kiang. The Governor returning, in the Afternoon came with four of his chiefest Lords to see the Oxen and Horses, and also to visit the Ambassador, protesting he could not avoid waiting on him, being so much pleased with his Conversation: Whereupon the Ambassador called for his Music; with the pleasure of which he seemed even ravished: After which being entertained with Spanish Wine and Sweetmeats, he departed.  
The Gifts designed for the Governor were now ready to be presented; but he modestly refused them, saying, He could not accept of them as yet, giving him many thanks in the mean time. Then ask Genko and Liulako the Interpreters, who were there present, if the Geveral of Hanksieu, and Conbon of Seucheu had received any Presents of the Ambassador? To which they answered, That the General of Hanksieu had not, but the Conbon of Sucheu was pleased to cull out a couple of Swords: Whereupon he a second time refused the Gifts; but adding, That if any Swords had been mentioned in the Note, he would have been glad of them. Wherefore the Ambassador after his departure chose a Sword from a peculiar Parcel, (for they had but few) and in stead of a Pistol, of which also they had no great store, (for all the enquiring was for those two sorts of Arms) added a Carbine to the Presents. Which done, Putmen went a second time to the Governor with them. The Swords, Carbine, Sky-coloured Cloth, and counterfeit Pearl he received, but the rest he sent back; when several of the General's Children coming to see the Ambassador in his Bark, were in respect to their Parents presented with Amber Necklaces and other Trifles.  
After the Netherlanders had stayed till towards the Evening waiting for Vessels to Ferry them over the River Kiang (for there were none but a great Boat, which the Mandarin Guide Hiulauja kept for himself, under pretence that that which he came in was grown leaky) they went with all their Vessels to the Mouth of the Haven before a Pagode, where they stayed all that Night, whilst the Guide Mandarins offered a Goat and a Swine to their Deity, before which, as they say, they durst not Sail up the River.  
The chiefest of them went into the Pagode or Temple, carrying the slain Sacrifice to lay it on the Altar; when the Priest at their approach fell devoutly upon his Knees, and began to Mutter and Pray to himself. In the Temple, being Painted Red, hung several Lamps, which burned Night and Day for the Deceased Souls: On one side of the Altar stood a Trough, wherein they laid the Victim; and on the other, a Rush Box with small pieces of Canes, which were the Sorts or Lots cast by the Priests, to know future Events.  
Presently after Noon, the Governor of Sinkian came with a Train of great Lords to the same Temple; which he was no sooner entered, but he sent for the Ambassador, desiring him, he would Command his Music with him, which the Ambassador did; and so repairing to the Temple, the Governor Entertained them with Bean-Broth, and the Ambassador on the other side, Cordialled them with Preserved Nutmegs, which the Governor and his Mandarins having never tasted of before, Eat with great delight, while the Musicians played on their several Instruments.  
After some stay, the Governor desired to see the Horses, which the Ambassador caused to be brought out of the Barks, which they all beheld with great admiration, saying, That they had never seen the like, therefore they doubted not, but they would be very acceptable to the Emperor; after they had seen the Horses, the Governor returned again to the City, and the Hollanders to their Barks.  
On Sunday, being the tenth, and Easterday, they set Sail with a Southeast Wind from the City of Sinkiun; the Ambassador with twelve Barks more, went Northerly cross the River Kiang, and after having Tacked too and again about an hour, they arrived at the North-side of the River, about a quarter of a League distant from the Garrison of Quasieu, or Quacheu, through a great Stone Sluice, in an artificial Channel, running Northerly by the seventh Metropolis Xangcheu, to the Lake Piexe. This Trench is digged directly through the Country, to make a way for Shipping out of the River Kiang, (which in that place sends no Branches to the North, but runs direct East towards the Sea) into the Yellow River.  
It was at first in the Embassy of Peter de Goyer, and jacob de Keys, by Nieuhof called, The Royal Channel, partly for her breadth and pleasantness, and partly, because it was built at the King's Charge.  
They were Towed thorough the same in several Courses, having divers Reaches and Windings in half a League: At the end of which they arrived at a Village called Tongnanghong, where they rested a little, whilst the Ambassador walked ashore to see the forementioned Sluices; and going also towards a Temple, was met by two Mandarins, (one a Sinksieuwan, and according to his own saying, the second Person of Quasieu, and the other a Tartar, and Governor of that Village) who both civilly welcomed him, for which he returned them Thanks. He of Sincksieuw being asked by the Ambassador concerning 
Discourse between the Ambassador and two Mandarins.  Tayowan, whether it would be delivered, answered, That he was well satisfied, that this Embassy, and chiefly the Presents which the Netherlanders brought, would be very acceptable to the Emperor; and that he doubted not of their good success in their Business, and that all their Wishes were, that the Netherlanders were entered into a League with the Tartars, in the Country of China, and that they might come there to Trade with them, and then they should hope, that the Foreign Traffic would again be permitted as formerly; whereas, because of the strict Watches at the Seaport Towns, nothing could be done; and that the Country People could not put off their Commodities; and if you Fee the Courtiers well, nothing will be denied at Peking▪  
As to what concerned Tayowan, it was in a mean condition, because they were obstructed from Trading to any place in China, and likewise all their best People were gone; therefore if the Emperor would only join twenty Jonks to the netherlands Ships, it might easily be taken.  
That about five Months since, a Messenger had been there from the Emperor, to bring all the Chineses there present under Subjection, who had also Order, that if those of Tayowan did not hearken to his Proposals, that then at his return he should destroy all the Seaport Towns which were yet in being, and to give strict Orders in all places, that not one Jonk should either come in, or go out, but if they would submit themselves to the Emperor, that then all places should be left as they were. Now this Messenger being returned fruitless, there was such Orders given in all the Havens, that not one Vessel can either come out or in to them, which was formerly winked at.  
Not many days since, another Messenger was sent to Tayowan (being the same of whom jenko the Interpreter had informed the Ambassador at Sucheu) whose return they much longed for.  
The Ambassador after this Discourse invited the Mandarins, with some other that came thither in the interim to this Bark, where they were entertained with a Glass of Spanish Wine, which having drank they departed.  
This Mandarin of Sincksieuw, sent the Ambassador as a Present, one Porker, one Sheep, four Hens, two Geese, a Vessel of their Drink, and some Herbs, and the Governor of the Village some Dishes of Meat ready dressed.  
Afternoon, the Vessels going thorough the foremention'd Sluices, the Mandarin Guide Hiu Lauja came to an Anchor at the end of the Village, before a Pagode, and from thence Road to make merry at the City of Quazieu; wherefore the Ambassador seeing that this day would be spent idly, went with the Barks wherein the Presents were Laden, to the Village Palipoe, and stayed all Night; but the Mandarin informed of the Netherlander's departure, soon after followed them to the foremention'd Villages.  
This day they gained about three Leagues.  
The eleventh in the Morning, they set Sail again, and passed by several small Towns and Villages, and also by a great Tower, with seven jutting Galleries, standing on the Southside of Tongnaphan; between which and the forementioned Tower, a Channel runs up Westward into the Country.  
Against Noon they came to the South Suburb of jamcefu, otherwise called jancheu, the third City of Note in this Territory, where was also a Tower with four Galleries, by which being Towed to the City Walls, they resolved to change their Coelies, having given those that brought them thither, leave to go home, notwithstanding it was late before they got new Men; yet they went away, and passed through a Bridge with six Arches, opposite to a Customhouse, and so Eastward, having that day been Towed up the River two Leagues and a half.  
In the Morning, being the twelfth, they proceeded on their Journey about daybreak, from Yancheu, against the Stream, by and through Wantoe, a Village separated by a Channel that runs up into the Country of Wayopoe, or 
Wayopoe.  Stone Bakers, from the abundance of Kilns that are there; the West part of it being under Water, represented a great Pool, or Lake.  
At Noon they passed by Sjopouzink, a Village that a far off seems a City, and also three Sluices, thorough which the Water runs out of this Channel into the Manured Grounds.  
Towards the Evening, coming to a small Village of seven or eight Houses, called Louting, where was a Cloister of their Votaresses or Nuns, they dropped Anchor, having gained five Leagues on several Courses.  
The thirteenth in the Morning, leaving the Village Louting, they passed by many Cottages, standing on the East-side of this Channel, to the Westward of which the Country lay all drowned.  
In the Afternoon they arrived at Kayoven, or Kaoyeu, the fourth City of Note 
City Kayoven.  next Hangcheu, where they were forced to stay, because their Coelies could not pass, the Ways being so deep by continual falling of Rain.  
The City Kaoyeu lieth on the East-side of this Channel, on the brinks of the Lake Piexe, which supplies the Stream with Water.  
Formerly, all the Ships that would go from Nanking, and the other Southern Territories along the River Kiang, and this Channel up to Peking, and so to the Northern Province, were forced to cross the forementioned Lake, to their great hindrance and inconveniency, being in Stormy Wether many times compelled to stay at Kaoyeu for fair Wether.  
But in process of time, to prevent this trouble, and that at all times the Ships might proceed on their Journey, and not be necessitated to cross the Lake, a broad Channel was digged of seventy Furlongs, on the East-side of it, and Wharffed or Enclosed on each side with Freestone: The City stands on a Clay Ground, the same with the adjacent Country, very good for Rice, which they have there in abundance.  
The Country to the West of this Channel lies most under Water, yet produceth abundance of Canes, which serve for Fuel, for no other Wood grows here.  
The fourteenth in the Morning, they set Sail with a stiff Gale of Wind out of the North-North-East, from the South Suburb of Kayoven, and for a quarter of a League, they had the City on their Starboard, and the Lake on their Larboard, till they were past the North Suburb; then Steering a Northerly Course up the Royal Channel, they left the forementioned Lake on their Larboard.  
Between this Lake and the Channel, is only a narrow Bank of three Foot high, which separates the one from the other: On their left Hand, the Country lay all under Water, yet in some places stood a few small Huts dry, being the Residence of Country People.  
In the Afternoon, they passed by the Village Loantsia, which lay on their Starboard; here the Country on the East-side began to show somewhat pleasanter, being Tilled in several places.  
In the Evening they Anchored at a Village called Kuisjo.  
The fifteenth in the Morning, leaving Kuisjo, they passed by Laensui, and Loujapou, 
City Paoing.  and in the Afternoon Landed at Paoing, the sixth City of Note under the seventh Metropolis Yangsheu; it lieth on the East-side of this Channel, and is surrounded with strong Walls, about a League and a half in Circumference: On the North-side of the City stands a fair Temple, neatly built after the Chinese manner.  
Here they stayed sometime waiting for fresh Coelies, which having gotten, they went farther, and in the Evening arrived at Kinho, where they stayed all Night, having that day by several Courses gained five Leagues.  
Between the City Paoing and the Village Kinho, the Bank Westward of the Channel which separates that and the Lake Piexe, is broken in several places, through which the Water rushes with such a force out of the Channel into the Lake, that they had great labour to keep the Vessels from falling there into.  
The sixteenth about daybreak, proceeding on their Journey, they passed through and by many Villages and Hamlets, lying on each side of the Channel; and about Noon, arrived at the West Gate of the City Hoaigan, having by Noon 
Arrive at Hoaigan.  been Towed and Sailed three Leagues and a half in a Northerly Course. Here (as the Mandarin Guides told them) all their Vessels in which they came were to be changed; whereupon they immediately applied themselves to the Commissary of that place, that they might be dispatched with what speed possible.  
No sooner were they come to an Anchor with all their Barks, but there also Landed the Masters of the Haven of Hanksieu, which on the last of March, went from Sucheu with the Ambassador's Letter to the General, which Letter they said, they had safely delivered.  
Their business, for which they came thither, was to fetch back the four Hanksieu Jonks, which were yet amongst the Fleet.  
Some Mandarins also came to Compliment and bid the Ambassador Welcome, in the name of the Governor of that place; for which Civility they were Entertained with two or three Glasses of Spanish Wine.  
In the Night there arose a great Storm out of the North mixed with Thunder and Lightning, which continued all the next day.  
The eighteenth, the forementioned Governor invited the Ambassador and 
The Ambassador is entertained by the Governor of Hoaigan.  his whole Retinue to a Feast, in a great House, at the West-Gate of the City, before which they lay with their Vessels, whither they accordingly went about Noon, and were no sooner come there, but they were brought to the Governor's Presence, who kindly Congratulated the Ambassador's Arrival and Health. After some other Compliments were passed, every one was placed at a peculiar Table, and plentifully served.  
Among their Table-talk at Dinner the Governor asked, What the Ambassador thought of China, and if it was not a great Country? Who replied, Yes Sir, not only a great, but a very fair Country, full of Fertile Grounds, and Delightful Objects: Then he began to Discourse with the Guide Mandarins (which were there present) about the Vessels: Wherefore the Ambassador desired the Governor (being informed before, that there were few Barks to be had there) that since he was come so far with the Emperor's Presents, having never wanted any Conveniencies, that he would be pleased to take care, to procure them good Vessels so soon as possible, (because he was yet to go the most dangerous part of the way) having already spent so long a time in their Journey. All which this Lord promised, and excusing the meanness of the present Treat, hoping when they came back from Peking, to be provided for their better Entertainment. On which Van Hoorn proffered to Present him with a parting Cup of Spanish Wine, which he modestly refusing, would not suffer.  
Thus the Netherlanders taking their leaves, and departing to their several Barks, two Mandarins came to them, (which had, whilst the Netherlanders were Entertained at the foremention'd Lords, sat just over against them) to ask in the Governor's Name, if their Entertainment had pleased them? whereupon the Ambassador, in respect to their Master, Presented each of them with five els and a half of Red Cloth, which after some Compliments they accepted.  
The nineteenth in the Morning, according to the usual Custom, the Secretary Ʋander Does went with a Complementing Letter to the Commissary, and to Thank him for his kind Entertainment: The Contents were these.  
THe Ambassador so highly esteems Talavja's Civility, that he cannot express 
A Complementing Letter from the Ambassador to the Commissary.  his Thankfulness in these few Lines; but at his return from Peking, He hopes to find Him in good Health, when he will manifest and confess himself much obliged by his Lordship's Favours.  
The Ambassador was informed by the Mandarin Guides, that notwithstanding the Commissary had promised Yesterday, that he would take care to provide Vessels for his farther Journey: The Touwatja had said, That there were none to be had, therefore the Secretary was commanded, that when he came to the Commissary, to desire him a second time to assist them, that they might depart with all speed, and then to go from thence to Touwatja, and ask him if any Vessels were to be had? and if he answered no, he should acquaint him, that they would hire Vessels themselves, for they could wait no longer; and if he replied, there were, then to desire him, that they might be sent to them that very day.  
The Secretary at his return, informed that he had been at the Commissary's House, but could not be admitted to speak with him; but that he had given the Letter, and whatever else he had to say, to his Servant, who presenting it to his Master, brought answer, That his Lordship thanked the Ambassador for his kind Wishes; as to what concerned the Vessels, he knew no otherwise but that the Ambassador was already furnished, but since they were not, he would immediately send to the Touwatja, and Order him, to procure them; which if he did not do, he would complain to the Emperor of his neglect. The Secretary had also been with the Touwatja, and enquired of him concerning the Barks: To which he was answered, That there were Vessels enough, but they lay at Sinkianso, a Village at least three Leagues from thence, and that he would send some of his Men thither with the Guide Mandarins, to look upon them, and if they were Equipt and Tied, to hire them.  
But because the Ambassador supposed the Guides Mandarins not to be very expert in Naval business, he sent his Secretary with them; who returning in the Evening, brought word, That he had chose two convenient Barks for the purpose, which Touwatja had promised to hire, but he could find none to carry the Horses, Oxen, and their Persons, therefore the Touwatja believed it convenient, that the Ambassador and Noble should remain in those Barks which brought them thither, and go up farther in them; and the Touwatja would satisfy the Owners of them for it, and also furnish them with all other Necessaries for their Journey.  
As for Barks to carry the Horses, he would send for them from the other side of the Yellow River, which with the two Barks that the Secretary had chosen, would be there the next Morning; to which purpose, Lakka the Interpreter was left there, that he might come down with them.  
The twentieth in the Morning, the Mandarins (which the day before had 
Presents to the Ambassador.  been Presented with five els and a half of Red Cloth) came in return to Present the Ambassador with two Cows, two Sheep, six Ducks, six Hens, four Steans of Chinese Drink, seven Pieces of Silk Stuffs, and two Silver Cups.  
The Provisions were kindly accepted of, but the Silver Cups and Silk Stuffs he returned.  
In the Afternoon, the Interpreter Lakka came back without any Barks from the Village Sinkiansoe, with news, that the Touwatja's People wrangled, and would not agree with the Owner of the two Barks which the Secretary had chosen, offering them less than their Fare; whereupon Noble went immediately to the Touwatja, to ask him a second time, What he intended to do about the Barks, and withal tell him, That he if he did not suddenly provide them with Barks, they would go and hire some themselves, or else go away with them in which they were.  
Noble at his return brought the Touwatja along with him, who excused himself, that he could not yet provide Vessels for them; and desired, that the Ambassador would please to have patience till the next Morning, against which, he would send to all places, and if he could find none, they might remain in those wherein they were, and so go on in them at least two days after.  
The next day being the one and twentieth, no likelihood of any preparation appearing, Van Hoorn judged it convenient to write to the Governor to this effect.  
THe Viceroy Singlamong hath earnestly desired, that the Ambassador 
Letter to the Governor for Barks.  should hasten his Journey to Peking, because the Lipous were somewhat dissatisfied at his long stay; now the Ambassador hath already been three Months from Fokien.  
The Horses, Oxen, and other Goods of the 
a Presents.  Chinkon, are subject to hurt, and may suffer in their Transporting.  
And because the Emperor's Favour is concerned in this Chinkon, the Ambassador desires, that his Lordship would please to give Order for the speedy procuring of Vessels for the Chinkon to go up to Peking, or that the Ambassador himself may hire, because he can neither well answer his long stay to the Emperor, nor his Master the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia.  
To this Letter carried by Putmen, the Governor answered.  
THat he had just cause to complain; also that he himself had sent some Barges, and that he would take further care to accommodate the Ambassador so soon as it was possible.  
In the Evening the Touwatja came again to the Ambassador, to promise and assure him, that he should be provided the next Morning for his Journey, and therefore entreated his patience till then: To which Van Hoorn answered, That if he performed his promise, he would take it kindly.  
The two and twentieth, the Mandarin Guides came to tell the Ambassador, that the Vessels were come to take in the Horses, and Oxen, and that the Shipwrights were busy in mending and repairing the Decks. The Commissary having sent them as his own, and likewise a great Boat to put the Presents in out of those Vessels which were not in condition to go further.  
The Netherlanders immediately going to see the forementioned Barges, and finding them to be pretty good, they immediately gave order for the removing of them into those Vessels, and so, all things being ready, they left the City Haoigan with seven Vessels, which carried their Goods and Persons, besides eight more for the Mandarins and Interpreters. Coming beyond the North Suburb of Haoigan, the Governor of the City, who was there busy receiving the Emperor's Customs and Tribute, Drank to the Netherlanders good Voyage in a Cup of Bean-Broth, which he sent Aboard by his own Servants; for which as they passed by him they returned him many thanks, and gratified the Servants with two Rixdollars.  
Haoigan, the eighth City of prime remark in the Province of Nanking, lieth on the East side of the Channel on a Plain, being all a Morass, not far from the Sea, and in the North near the Yellow River. It is but one City, yet consisting of two Parts, both which are enclosed within one Wall: that which lies to the South is properly called Haoigan, and that to the North-East Yenching: It is enlarged by a Suburb, which on each side of the Channel extends itself above a League.  
In this City the Viceroy of that Province hath his Residence, who takes care, as Purveyor, for the Emperor's Annual Provisions, and Commands with arbitrary Power over the Southern Provinces. His Office is to send for Provisions and other Necessaries from the adjacent Country, which in an incredible number of the Emperor's Jonks are sent from thence to Peking. When they come to this City they are all searched and measured by the Vice Roy's Order, who afterwards sends them to the Court.  
In this Suburb are also two Custom-houses, one for Merchandises, and the other for Ships, but not for the Emperor's use. The Money which is hereby raised is bestowed on the repairing of Sluices, Graffs, and Banks near several Water-falls; yet notwithstanding a great part thereof goes to the Emperor's Exchequer. On the North side of the City in this Channel are three Water-falls, of which the first and nearest to the River Hoai is the most troublesome, because out of this River the Water comes with great force; which is stopped by nine great Banks, that it may not overflow the whole Country.  
Not far from Haoigan the Netherlanders passed by Pantja and several other Villages, and also by a great number of the Emperor's Jonks laden with Tributary Goods. In the Evening they arrived at Zinkhiunzoe, where they were to pass by a Sluice, having by Noon been Towed almost three Leagues.  
The twenty fifth about Noon leaving Namemio, they crossed the Yellow River, 
Come to the Yellow River.  which runs Southeast and North-West by the forementioned Village to the Western Shore, on which the Coelies were Landed, opposite to the Village Singho, and then towed them North-North-West up the Yellow River, till they came to the Village beforementioned, where they stayed for fresh Men.  
Mean while a Siampan or Boat came aboard with a Priest, and two Persons 
Weather-makers.  calling themselves Magicians, or Cunning-men, one of them having a Bodkin stuck through his Cheek, and continually shaked their Bodies, as if they had been possessed, which they made the poor People believe, also telling the Men in the Ambassadors Vessel, That they should have a fair Wind the next day, and a successful Voyage; whereupon the Master, who stood quaking before them, gave them some Silver (which was all they desired) and also some Gold and Silver Paper, which he entreated them to offer to their Deity: Van Hoorn also to be rid of them, gave them some Money.  
There are many of these sort of People in China, which by strange Gestures, and scourging of themselves after a peculiar manner, so get Alms from the Charity of the People.  
Some lay red-hot Cinders on their bald Heads, where they let them burn so 
Jugl●…rs▪  long, till the stench of the Broiling offends the Spectators, whilst they by crying, wring of their Hands, and the like, enduring so great Torment, move all that are present to a charitable Benevolence.  
There accustom also in the chiefest Cities, and Places of greatest Commerce, especially at Annual Fairs, whole Companies of blind Beggars, which at the uttering of some Words which they mutter, strike themselves so violently with a sharp and cutting Stone on their Breasts, that sometimes the Blood trickles down their Bellies.  
Others knock their Foreheads one against another with such violence, that they seem to crack one another's Skulls; which they continue till fainting they fall in a Swoon, unless prevented by a considerable Alms. Some again lying along on the Ground, beat their Heads against the Stones till they have great Swellings as big as Eggs upon their Foreheads.  
Besides these, there are many other Idle People in China, who by several Cheats maintain themselves by the Gifts of Charitable Persons. The Beggars amongst others go up and down in Companies, as our Gipsies, who for their debauched living are accounted as the most infamous of the Nation. Most of them are deformed, either born so, or else made so wilfully by their Parents in their Infancy, with incredible Torture; for there are some with wry Necks or Mouths, crook Backs, long hooked Noses, or squint Eyes, and lame Arms or Legs.  
There are likewise many Mountebanks, who use several wild Beasts, especially Tigers, made tame by Degrees, on which, to the admiration of the Beholders, they sit and ride through many Cities and Villages, which walk along the Streets very softly, with a Branch in its Mouth, which holding wide open, is very fearful to look upon, besides his Tail, which he swings to and fro, yet hurts none.  
The Rider, who knows without either Bit or Bridle to govern the Tiger, only by moving his Body and Feet, hath a wide Coat over his under Clothes, with Sleeves so large, that they hang down half way to the Calves of his Legs: Over his right Shoulder comes a Girdle, which is made fast under his left Arm, in manner like a Scarf▪ In his left Hand he grasps a Sword, with which he cuts the Air, and now waves it over his Head, and then side-ways, crying and extolling, like our Stage-Doctors, his Balsams, Unguents, and Plasters, good against all Wounds and Distempers whatsoever.  
This Mountebank is generally accompanied with many deformed People, some following him on Crutches, others with Rattles; most of them go naked; others again wear wide Coats, full of Patches of divers Colours and Stuffs; others, which is strange to behold, have stiff Wings on their Temples, on each side of their Heads.  
IT was late in the Afternoon before fresh Toers came from the Village Singo; nevertheless the Netherlanders going forward, passed by Sinkiazuan, and about Night arrived at another small Village, containing about ten or twelve Houses, called joupou, where they dropped Anchor, having that day been towed but two Leagues and a half.  
The twenty six they went by break of day from joupou, and came, having passed Conghiveao, Tsantzan, and Govetchia, the two first on the East, and the last on the West side of a River, about a Canonshot Southward from the City Taujenjeen, where they were forced to stay for fresh Coelies, having that day gained 
The City Taujenjeen.  three Leagues and a quarter, according to the Course of the Yellow River.  
Taujenjeen, otherwise called Taoyven, situate on the Western Shore of the Yellow River, is surrounded with broad and strong Mud or Earthen Walls, fortified above with Stone Breast-works.  
The twenty seventh they proceeded on their Journey with fresh Toers, and leaving the City Taujenjeen, went on Easterly, and at Noon passed by Suytsien, lying on the East side of the Yellow River, and also by divers Rustics Houses, which stood on each side thereof. At Noon they came to a nameless Hamlet, of seven or eight Houses, on the West side of the Stream, where they stayed all Night, because the Mandarins, it beginning to blow somewhat hard, durst not venture further. This day they were got about three Leagues onwards of their Journey.  
The next Morning, being the twenty eighth, they reached the Villages Goesjan, Pojancho, and Gousuntu, the one on the East, and two last on the Western Shore of the Stream. In the Afternoon they arrived at Tsinsing, where they lay still expecting fresh Coelies, being got three Leagues and a half that day on several Courses. Somewhat Easterly from Tsinsing appears a fair Castle, within a Wall, which towards the North takes in a Mount.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning weighing from Tsinsing, they came, having sailed a League Westerly, to Kousango, a Village where the Channel called jun takes its beginning, and discharges its Waters through a Sluice; viz. This Channel jun begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Peking, in the Territory Hoaiganfu, Northward from the City Socien, on the North side of the Yellow River; out of which the Ships that go to all Places in the Northern part of the Empire, are brought into the Channel jun, which spreads itself North-West from thence through the second County jencheufu, in the Province of Xantung to the City Cining, Southward of the Lake Nanyang, then through those of Tungchunfu, and through the Nanyang, and lastly at the end of that Territory it disembogues in the River Guei, which separates the Provinces of Xantung and Peking.  
But because this Channel in many Places is too shallow for Vessels of Burden, there are above twenty Sluices, which they call Tungoa, built artificially with Stone: every Sluice hath a large Water-gate, which is opened when any small Boats or Vessels are to pass, and strongly barred up with Posts and Planks to keep up the Water. These forementioned Gates are opened with an Engine, or Wheelwork, with little trouble, to let the Water through, and so from one to another till they have passed through, like the Sluices at our new River at Guildford. But half way before they come to the City Cining, they let as much Water out of the Lake Usianghoe, or Can, through a very great Water-gate, as they have occasion for them, locking it again, that the Lake may not be quite exhausted.  
When the Ships come to the Lake Change they cross it not, but go with greater ease along a Channel made near the side, and Confined with two broad Banks. At every Water-gate are People, which for small consideration pull the Vessels through with Ropes. In this manner the Ships go out of the Yellow River to Peking.  
Certainly if the European Builders, or Layers of Watercourses, did come along this Channel jun, and behold the thickness and height of the Banks on both sides, and the stately Water-gates, which are also of Freestone, or the firmness of the Work, they would justly admire the Contrivance and Art of the Chinese in this their way of Aqueduct, not to be paralleled by the prime Pieces of the best Masters in Europe.  
After all the Boats were Towed through the forementioned Water-gates, they Sailed up the Channel jun, in a Northerly Course with a fair Wind by the Villages Mochoctan and Uwtaotchou, the first on the West, and the last on the East side of the Channel, and in the Evening came to Maulovao on the Western Shore, having this day wrought out six Leagues and a half.  
Here they they were forced to exchange their Coelies, because the other that came from Sinsing (a Place two Leagues and a half distance from thence) had gone their Stage.  
Van Hoorn no way satisfied with these delays, told the Mandarin Guides, that 
Van Hoorn is displeased for staying.  they ought to have sent Coelies before, that they might have been ready against his coming thither, and then rehearsed the long time which he had already spent, when as they might have finished their Journey in six Weeks; all which (said he) you can scarce answer in Peking, if the Emperor's Presents should be any ways damnified, which they are subject to.  
The thirtieth at Noon, no Coelies coming, they went with some Soldiers into the Country to Press some of the Rustics; which was done so leisurely, that it was almost Night before they got from Maulovao, and Sailed the whole Night, though with a slow pace, because their Vessels often raked upon the Sand.  
In the Morning the first of May they passed by Kiakio and Sankomiao, two decayed 
May.  Villages on the East side of the Channel somewhat up into the Country, and about Noon passed by Thoetsuang; beyond which they lay still a little while till their Toers had Dined. Then going on again they arrived in the Evening at a small Village called Sjousincha, and Anchored before a Water-gate, having since the last Night gained six Leagues in several Courses.  
The second in the Morning about nine a Clock they passed through the Water-gate, before which they lay the Night before, being hindered there by a strong North-West Wind. In the Afternoon coming to Twansingiao, they again lay before one of the Water-gates till the Wind was something abated. Whilst they lay there, one of the Emperor's Barks, laden with Tributary Goods, just to the Northward of the Village, was accidentally set on fire, but soon quenched, only burning her Stern, and very little of her Lading. Towards Evening they passed the forementioned Water-gate, and Sailed in the Moonshine through Singhjamiao and its Water-gates, and about Midnight Anchored before Wansensua, having that day gained but a League and a half. About daylight they got through the forementioned Sluice, and at Noon arrived at Milanchia, where they were to pass another, but because the Wind blew very hard they cast Anchor before it.  
This Village of Milanchia separates the Province of Nanking from that of Xantung, being seated on their Borders. Against the Evening, the Wether growing more calm, they went with their Vessels through the Water-gate beyond the Village, at the end of which they stayed, having the whole day not gained above three quarters of a League, and passed out of the Province of Nanking into that of Xantung.  
The Province of Xantung, being the fourth of the Northern, verges Southeast and North with the Sea; and on the West side surrounded with Rivers: in the North it borders upon the Province of Peking; in the South, on that of Nanking, from which separated by the Yellow River. The remainder thereof lies enclosed within the Rivers of jun and Guei.  
The fourth in the Morning weighing again, they passed through Tsingchia and Hanghsuansa, and also through two Water-gates.  
To the Westward, or behind this Village, a great Lake, by the Chineses called Yzianghoe, takes its beginning, and through two Sluices discharges Waters into those of jun.  
In the Evening, though late, they came to the Village Tzizang, where they stayed all Night, being got three Leagues and a half farther in several Courses that day.  
The fifth about daybreak they went forward, and about Noon reached jaixinho, or jaxhinno, a little Town consisting of thirty six Houses, all built like Forts, or defensive Towers. Here they stayed some time for fresh Coelies, who being come they weighed again, and first passed through a Water-gate, lying in the forementioned jaixinho; afterwards through Tsonoiacha, and two Water-gates more. In the Evening they arrived at Maaliaeao, where they stayed all Night, having gained four Leagues that day.  
Here, as before, began to appear a Lake on the East side of the Channel. The Country to the Hills seeming to lie thereabouts under Water.  
The sixth in the Morning before day setting forward again they passed 
Pass by several Villages.  through ten Floodgates, and also by and through Tsouteucha and Naeyang, Loutchiajeen, Tongnang-fong, Tsiongiaceen, Chinkio, Sinchia, Tsoufee, and Sohousum. In the Evening they arrived at the South Suburb Tzinningfoe, or Cinning, and Anchored 
City Cinning.  before a Floodgate, through which they were to pass. This day they had gained eight Leagues.  
Here, according to the Mandarin Guides Saying, the Hoaigan Barks, which were in the Fleet, must be changed, and therefore they must stay till the Governor of the City had provided others for them.  
Here the Ambassador, to oblige Hiulauja, one of his Guides, that he might make haste, gave him a String of Blood-Coral.  
The eighth in the Morning the Governor of the Militia of that Place, being a Tartar, came to Compliment the Ambassador; for which Civility he was entertained with a Glass of Wine, and at his going away saw the Horses and Oxen, which he much admired.  
In the Afternoon the Mandarin Guide Hiulauja came with the two Vessels to shift and take in the Horses and Oxen, but the Netherlanders searching them, found them to be very old and crazy, and therefore sent them back again.  
The ninth in the Morning a Grand Mandarin, a Native Chinese, came with Hiulauja to visit the Ambassador, who kindly entertained them: amongst other Questions the Ambassador asked them when they should go forward on their Journey; whereupon Hiulauja answered, That the City had not yet provided Toers, Rice, Money, and other Necessaries, which should be gotten with all expedition, that they might have the least hindrance possible. But the Ambassador suspecting it to be only delays, judged it convenient to send the following Letter to the Conbon, or Governor of that Place, to this effect:  
THe Ambassador is arrived here from a remote Ploce with the 
a Presents.  Chinkon, and therefore hopes that his Lordship will forward the journey; for they have been a long time on the Way, and the Presents are subject to receive hurt and damage, therefore the Ambassador desires Talauja, that he would please to give order that there may be good Barks prepared for the Horses and Oxen, and that the Ambassador may be dispatched to go with all speed to Peking.  
This Letter being carried to the Conbon by the Secretary Ʋander Does, and read over, he replied, That it was never known, nor customary either going to, or coming from Peking, to change Vessels in that Place. To which the Secretary rnswered, That he hoped he would excuse the Ambassador, because he knew not the Custom, as being a Stranger; he had made this Request on the advice of his Mandarin Guides, who made him believe that the Hoaigan Barges must be changed here. The Conbon after this Discourse said, That all the Emperor's Goods should remain in the same Barks in which they came thither, and that he would give order that the Barks should be furnished with all Necessaries; that the Hollanders might depart when they pleased. He also in the Secretary's presence sent a Mandarin to the Touwatja, or Master of the Vessels, with Commands that he should immediately furnish the Barks with all manner of Necessaries, and by no means detain the Hollanders.  
The tenth in the Morning a Mandarin, sent from the Conbon of that Place, 
Conbon presents the Ambassador.  came to present the Ambassador with two Hogs, two Sheep, two Ducks, six Hens, two Pots of Chamzoe, or Zamzou, that is, Liquor of Rice, and some other fresh Provisions; which were all kindly accepted of, and the Bearers rewarded with three Tail of Silver.  
About Noon they passed through the Water-gates, before which they had lain with all their Vessels, and lay still before another Sluice till the eleventh in the Evening; then setting forward again they arrived at Cinning, or Tzinning, or Cuningsiu, the fourteenth City of note under Yengche●….  
This is a pleasant, though an ancient City, lying on the East Shore of the Channel jun, in a plain and Morassy Soil. The Suburbs thereto belonging, which spread themselves on each side of the Channel, are very large and populous, and hath on each side of the Trench two strong Water-gates.  
In the dark they Sailed by the Villages Oeling, Siliphoe, and Ghansu; and in the Afternoon dropped Anchor at the Village Poetuen, a League and three quarters from the City Tzinning.  
The twelfth in the Morning weighing again, they shot three Water-gates, and also passed by and through two Villages, Longhwanghmuao and Nangwangao, lying close by one another, near the Place where the River Onghoo runs into this Channel, so that the Current which had hitherto in this Graff been against them, was now somewhat with them, by which means they reached the Village Poelcely that Evening; and not long after arrived at Koygoeva, where they Anchored before two Sluices, having that day gained about four Leagues.  
The thirteenth they passed the Sluices, and so leaving Koygoeva they Sailed through three Floodgates, and by the Villages Inlako, Tsinti, Kingkiacouw, and Oesienno: coming beyond the last, the Wind began to blow very hard out of the North, so that they were forced to Anchor near the Shore to expect fairer Wether, having this day Sailed four Leagues.  
The fourteenth being calmer they weighed again, and Sailed about three quarters of a League, when they came before a Floodgate in the Village Oesienno, where they lay till the Evening, because the Mandarins said there was not Water enough to float the Vessels. Towards Evening they weighed again, and in the Dusk passed by Siliphoe, Ulchelapoe, and Oeliphoe; and in the Afternoon arriving at Toukjamtuao, they dropped Anchor before a Water-gate, two Leagues and a quarter from Oesienno.  
The fifteenth in the Morning about nine a Clock they passed the Sluices, and leaving the Village Tunkjamtuao, they came about Noon to Xantsuy, a City, where they stayed a little while for fresh Coelies; which when come to them, they immediately went on.  
The City of Xantsuy lies on each side of the Channel jun, which on the West side at the going up of the Trench, and fortified with strong Castles built square, and about an hours walking in circumference; the Walls of Stone, strengthened with Stone Breast-works: there are also many stately Buildings, which for want of Inhabitants are fallen to decay. Amongst other Edifices appears a famous Pagode, or Temple, Teywan Miao, enclosed within a Wall raised half with Freestone, and the other half with red and green Bricks. The Temple itself consists all of Freestone; the Roof on the inside is of a Vermilion colour, and on the top covered with yellow glazed Tiles; without the Walls is a standing Water, where, according to the Relation of the Chinese, some years since a stately Temple suddenly sunk, with the whole Congregation, Priests and People.  
Towards the Evening they came to Kimonsa, and dropped Anchor before a Water-gate, having that day gained three Leagues and a half.  
The sixteenth in the Morning they shot the Sluices with all their Vessels, before which they had lain that Night, and came to another about a Musket Shot thence; through which they could not get till the Afternoon, because of the shallow Water. From thence they arrived before another in the Village Oasting, which they went through in the Evening; and in the Dusk arrived at Tsaotsing before a Floodgate, having that day been Towed but three quarters of a League; it was very difficult too for the great Vessels to get through these Sluices, which were in a manner quite dry on the North side, and on the South side not above three Foot and a half of Water, which being let out, there would not remain a Foot and a quarter, when as the great Barges drew two Foot and a half so that the Water must at least be a Foot higher before they could get through; wherefore they lay still two days, viz. the seventeenth and eighteenth; but on the nineteenth they got through, and after a little Sailing coming to the Village Gihaatsysy they dropped Anchor before a Water gate, having this half day been Towed somewhat more than a League.  
The twentieth in the Morning they went through the Sluice, and at Noon another; and also by the Village Zoatiajeen, In the Afternoon arriving at Lieghayway they Anchored before a Water-gate, having gained two Leagues this day.  
The one and twentieth in the Morning having shot the last Sluice, they arrived about nine a Clock at the South Suburb of Tungjanfoe, otherwise called Tungchang, the third City of eminency in the Province of Xantung.  
This little City of Tungchang stands in a Valley, built square, and about an 
The City Tunchang.  hours walking in circumference, with defensive Walls. In it are two eminent Streets, which run cross through the Town, in the middle of which stands a Triumphal Arch, or a high Structure with four Vaulted Posterns, and as many Roofs one above another. The Gates are very strong, and have on each side four Bulwarks, which they can, when Stormed, clear and make good. On the North side is a Bridge of a hundred and thirty Paces long, leading cross a Water that incircles the City. On the South is a very populous Suburb of great Trade. On the East stands an Iron Pillar, four Fathom and a half thick, and about twenty Foot high, Engraven at the bottom with several Chinese Characters, which according to their Relation was set up there seven hundred years before, as a Monument; under which lay the Body of an Hero, famous for his valorous Achievements, and good Service done his Country.  
The two and twentieth in the Morning they left the South Suburb of Tunghang, having gotten fresh Toers, for which they stayed, and Sailing a Musket Shot Eastward by the City, came about Noon to Sinsia, where they Anchored before a Sluice, having Sailed above a League this half day.  
Here they were forced to lie all the Afternoon and the next day, before they could get through for want of Water.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning they shot the forementioned Sluices, and about Noon another; and also passed by Xoesu, Liancotsue, Liancotza. In the Afternoon they came to Toetsao, where they Anchored before a Water-gate, having been Towed above a League that day.  
The twenty fifth setting forth again, they passed another Sluice, and about Noon they came to Woersjavaan; where taking fresh Toers they went away immediately, with hopes to reach the City of Linsing that day; but being past Ooetsjaven, Taykiasa and Tayhiaven, they saw that the Channel lay full of the Emperor's Vessels, laden with Tributary Goods; which by reason of its narrowness and sholeness in some places they could not pass by, which forced them (though but half a League from Linsing) to stay till the Water grew higher, having that day gained three Leagues.  
The twenty sixth in the Morning they went forward again, and about nine a Clock they arrived at Linsing; into which they went with their Barges (for the Channel runs through the middle of it) till they came before a Floodgate, through which they were to pass, having this Morning been Towed half a League in a Northerly Course. All Places hereabouts lay full of the Emperor's Barges.  
The Governor of this Place, as the Mandarin Guides related, was deposed, and a new one expected in two or three days from Tungchianfoe; for which reason they could not pass the Sluice before which they lay, it being locked up with Iron Chains.  
The twenty seventh and twenty eighth nothing happened of remark.  
The twenty ninth, being Whitsunday, the Ambassador was told, that the Governor of Tungchanfoe was come, and had taken possession of his Place; so that he thought fit the thirtieth in the Morning, for the hastening of his Journey, to write the following Letter to him.  
THe Holland Ambassador is come from remote Countries, and hath stayed here at Linsing above four days. The Chinkon hath been a long time a coming, and by that means subject to be spoiled; therefore the Ambassador desires, that they may with all speed go to Peking; and to that purpose the Sluices may be opened, which will be serviceable to the Emperor, and a great kindness to the Ambassador.  
Noble carrying this Letter, related at his return, that he had been with the new Governor, who in answer to the Ambassador's Letter had told him, That he was sensible how far a Journey the Netherlanders were come, and that he knew (having two years since been at Emuy and Quemuy) what service they had done for the Emperor; therefore he would not detain them, but send a Mandarin to search the Barges (because there being a Custom-house, no Goods but the Emperors were to pass through without paying) in which the Emperor's Goods were, to see if any other private Commodities were in them, or not; which should no sooner be done, but he would give them leave to be gone, and accordingly a Mandarin was forthwith sent, who at first was very earnest about searching of the Goods: But when the Ambassador answered him, that he might do it and begin at his Vessel, but he would permit no Chests nor Cases to be opened, he went away without looking upon them; being first presented by the Ambassador with two Pieces of Linen, which was all he aimed at.  
The next Morning about daybreak, passing the Sluice with all the Vessels, 
Leave Linsing.  they went through the City of Linsing, till they came to the River Guei, or Geu, which comes from the South to another part of the City.  
Thus they left the Channel jun, in which they had passed through forty seven Sluices, or Floodgates, not without great trouble, and Expense of two and thirty days time; yet according to the Chineses saying, they were gotten happily and speedily out of it, because some years since, there was so little Water in that Channel, that the ordinary Vessels had been forty five, and fifty days coming from Tunchiangfoe, and Linching; which places are not above six Leagues distant one from another.  
In the Afternoon they got beyond Linsing, which exceeds all other Cities in 
City Linsing.  this County for Populousness, fair Buildings, (though on the West side it is much decayed) and Traffic; nay, it need not give place to any City in the whole Empire, for it stands at the end of the Channel jun, where the forementioned Channel and the River Guei commix their Waters; by which means there is extraordinary Conveniencies for Shipping, the Vessels and Barks that come Laden to this City with all sorts of Merchandise, from most places in China, here pay Custom to three Treasurers chosen for that purpose.  
On the North side, you may see a Bridge with nine Arches, over which they pass from one part of the City to the other; one of which Arches is made so artificially, that it may be removed, and give Passage to the biggest Vessels, after they have paid their Custom.  
The City (seated in a plain and Sandy Soil) hath a Mudwall, Fortified on the top with Stone Breast-works, having on the North side fifteen Bulwarks, and two Redoubts. 
Porcelin Tower of Linsing.   
Half a League from the Walls, on the North side of the City, is an exceeding high Tower, built with eight corners, rising from the Ground with nine Galleries, every one nine Cubits above another, so that the whole height amounts to ninety Cubits. The Outwall consists of fine Porcelain Earth, curiously adorned with Imagery and Painting; the Inner, of various coloured Marble, Polished as smooth as Glass, especially the Black: The Ascent is by a pair of winding Stairs, not made in the middle, but betwixt two Walls, which hath its Entrance at every Story, and from thence to the Marble Galleries, and Gilded Iron Rails, which as an Ornament are made round about the Galleries; at whose corners hang little Bells, in such a manner, that being moved by the Wind they make a pleasing sound: On the uppermost Story stands a great Image, thirty Foot high, Cast of Copper, and Gilt, to which, being a Goddess, the Tower is Dedicated: From the upper Gallery, the whole City, with the adjacent Country, yield a pleasing and delightful Prospect.  
On one side of this Tower stands a fair Pagode or Temple, worth the seeing, for the great Gilded Images which are in it.  
In the Afternoon they were Towed along the River Guei, through the Village Wantouwo; and in the dusk of the Evening, they arrived at Ifong, a little Village, where they Anchored, being gotten three Leagues with the Tide from Linsing.  
This River Guei takes its Original on the West side of Gueihoei, the fourth City 
River Guei.  of Eminency in the Province of Honan, and from thence runs with many crooked Meanders, between Xantung and Peking; and at the Castle Tiencin disembogues into a Bay called Cang, which borders on the great Indian Ocean.  
The first of june, Weighing again, by break of Day they had sight of Oepoeye, 
june.  and Wankelo, two pretty Villages; at Noon they were Towed Easterly by the City of Vohincheen, but without stay; so in the Afternoon passing Sangnes, about the Evening they arrived at Chianmaing, where they were to change their Toers, having that day gained five Leagues in several Courses.  
The second in the Morning, having gotten fresh Coelies, they set out from Chiamaing, and past by Tsasuang and Singkiakouw; and in the Evening they arrived at the City of Oesingjeen, or Uciening, otherwise called Vuching, the fourteenth City belonging to the Metropolis Tungchang, in the Province of Xantung, where they cast Anchor.  
Vuching lies Enclosed with a square Wall on the East side of the River, having 
Vuching.  on the same a well-built Suburb.  
This day they gained five Leagues and a half, according to the Course of the Stream, which thereabouts is full of windings and shallow Water.  
The third in the Morning they reached the Villages Thunloo, Soenusoe, and Teckchiouw; and at Noon arrived at the City Taatchiouw, otherwise called Tachu. 
Tachu.   
This City lieth in a Square, (as most of the other Cities in China) built on the right side of the River Guei, as you go up the same; it is enlarged with a fair and Populous Suburb: The City itself, though full of handsome Houses, yet hath lost much of his former Luster, suffering in the last Tartar Wars.  
The Wall is about thirty Foot high, well built, and Fortified with Bulwarks and Breast-works.  
The chiefest Trade of the Inhabitants consists in the Brewing of (as we may call it) Chinese Beer, which the Tartars Transport from thence to other places. Here they lay still a little while, waiting for fresh Toers, which having gotten, they Weighed again, and came that Evening to Soukuntang, a Village, where they stayed to change their Toers again, having this day gained six Leagues and a half.  
The next Morning, being the fourth, having gotten other Coelies, they proceeded on their Journey, and past by some Vessels that were come from Peking, in one of which was the General of the Province of Quantung, sent thither to succeed him that was then there, having (in regard of his great Age) desired a Writ of Ease.  
About nine a Clock they Landed at Sangjueen, where they tarried some time; from thence going on in the Afternoon, they came to Ghanning and Seufeukhouw; and against the Evening at Lienuchoe, where they Anchored, having that day gone six Leagues.  
According to the information of the Villagers, here the Province of Xantung parted from that of Peking; though others will have it, that those two Provinces are separated by the City Taatchiouw.  
The fifth in the Morning, they Weighed at break of Day, and Sailing down the River with a fair Wind from Lienuhoe, they passed about eight a Clock by Taloeveen, at nine a Clock Westward, by the City Tonquangchien, or Tungquiang, on the South side of the River Guei, about a Musket shot up into the Country.  
This City (as the rest) built Square, contains about an Hours walk in Circumference, Environed with strong Walls, and deep Moats: In the Marketplace, in the middle of the City stands a great Iron Lion; and the Country about is planted with all manner of Trees, pleasant to behold.  
At Noon they Landed at jeusang; in the Evening, at Poethouw, where they dropped Anchor, waiting for new Toers, having this Day Sailed four Leagues in the Province of Peking.  
The next Morning, so soon as Daylight appeared, they left Poethouw with a fair Wind and new Toers; and in the Forenoon, past Suskiajeen, Sjenzoctan, Swykvao, Sakkiavoy, Siensiteen, Fonkiakoul, Sangui, and Suangcho; and at Noon arrived at the City of Siangchiouw, where they found other Toers ready, with which they immediately went away again, and past that Afternoon by Paliswang, Zaysisung, Ulchilitung, Soucoulthon, Suckiaswun, Sang, Isuang, Ul, and Vly, besides many Pagodes and Hamlets of decayed Houses, and arrived in the Evening at the City of Chinche, where they lay still that Night, to be furnished with fresh Coelies.  
The seventh, before Daylight, new Coelies coming, they immediately went on their Journey, and very early passed by and through several Villages, viz. Sanquesucan, jaquacouw, Tonchekouw, Palisuang; and about eight a Clock, they went Eastward along by the City Chingchee. By this City, a River running up into the Country, takes its Course to the South; soon after, they went by Sayetwang, Masang, Haysoemat, and Suang.  
At Noon, they passed thorough Lioucho, where they should have changed their Toers; but the Wind blowing very fair, they passed by without striking Sail, which favouring them all the Afternoon, they went by nine Villages, viz. Soucoulthung, Koutche, Tankoulthung, Soutouwa, Gehockia, Chingsuan, Likiathue, Sinceatheen, Canthea, Suatheen; and in the Evening, to the City of Chinchay, lying on the Eastern Shore of this River, where they dropped Anchor to stay all Night, having this day Sailed eight Leagues and a half.  
The eighth they set out again with fresh Coelies and a South Wind, from the City of Chinchay; and in the Forenoon, as they had done the day before, they passed by many Villages, lying on each side of the River, as Oelifoang, Loulysuang, Thouliouw, Taywansuang, Oekiamiao, Boatsaac, t' Zongkiasuaan, Sangjue, jangleotzing, Liekiatwang, Tzautsocauw, and Piechie; and in the Afternoon arrived at the City of 
Come to Tienciu.  Tjensinghway, otherwise called Tiencin, where they dropped Anchor, having that day Sailed six Leagues.  
The General of the Militia in this place, being a Tartar, and a Man of great 
Are Complemented by the General.  Quality, whose Sister was one of the present Emperor's Fathers Concubines, came to Compliment and welcome the Ambassador, and also to invite him the next day to a Treat, for which civility the Ambassador returning Thanks, said, That he was tired and indisposed, and therefore durst not venture to go out, but desired his Highness to excuse him. Whereupon the General replied, That he would prepare the Entertainment in one of his Barks, and come and lie with it by the Ambassadors, that he might not trouble himself to go ashore: On which, Van Hoorn seeing that it could not be otherwise, provided to come.  
The ninth in the Morning, the General sent for the Ambassador, whereon, he, with Noble, Putmen, and the Secretary Ʋander Does, went with some of the Retinue to his Bark, lying a little behind the Ambassadors, where they were courteously received, and immediately placed at Tables which stood all 
Entertained at a Dinner.  ready before their coming; soon after came also the Toya or Governor of the City, who also seemed to be invited there, and was placed by the General at his own Table: Then the word being given, the Dishes were brought in, filled with variety of Meats, dressed after the Chinese manner: The General urging no Discourse, nor ask the Netherlanders any Questions, only used his endeavour to persuade them to be Merry, and Eat and Drink freely.  
After the Hollanders had well Feasted, and Thanked the General for his kind Entertainment, they took their leave: When the Ambassador judged it convenient, in Requital of the General's kindness, to Present him with two Pieces 
Presents sent to the General of Tiencin.  of Linen, a String of Amber Beads, five els of Stammel, one Piece of Perpetuanaes', a Perspective Glass, and two Bottles of Rose-Water; all which, with a Letter, Putmen was to carry the next Morning: The Letter was written to this effect.  
THe Ambassador returns humble Thanks for his kind Entertainment, and lets his Lordship know, that since that, he is recovered again, and in good Health.  
The Ambassador shall always remember his Honour's Favours; in Requital of which, and as a sign of his good inclination, he Requests, that he will please to accept of these Presents, which will highly oblige him.  
Putmans' returning, brought word, that the General would not accept of 
Will not accept of them.  them, but had desired him to refer it till they came back from Peking; thanking the Ambassador with a Complementing Letter.  
The City or Garrison of Tienein lies in a Triangular form, at the Promontory of Xang, where all the Rivers of the Province of Peking meet; and after having passed her high Walls, disembogue themselves into the Sea.  
The Inhabitants of this City Trade much, for which it stands very convenient: all the Ships that come out of the Sea, or from any Inland places which will go up to Peking, must pass by it, wherefore there is always an incredible many Vessels; there is also generally the choice of all Merchandise, because this City is free for any one to Trade in, and pay no Custom.  
The City itself is surrounded with high, defensive Walls, and defended by a strong Garrison.  
Against Noon, leaving Tiensingway, after they had Sailed a little way, though still in the Suburb, they left the River Guei, which had helped them very much by her Ebbing Water, and went into another, which came out of the North into that of Guei; so that they had both Wind and Tide against them, and by that means went but very slowly; yet by Toing, they got passed Quanfa, Sijkoelda, jangsang, and Peytsang, lying on each side of this River; and in the Evening dropped Anchor at P'Hoekoel, having since their departure from Tiensingway, Sailed about a League and a half.  
The eleventh in the Evening, they left P'Hoekoel, and went that day with Sailing and Towing, by Thanquasue, Poecue, Ganchol, P'Hoekhouw, Hangchue, and Mactiachoa.  
The Country hereabouts is plain, Manured, and full of Houses.  
In the afternoon they arrived at a great Village, called jangtzin, where they waited for fresh Toers, having this day gained three Leagues on several Courses, twice or thrice surrounding the Compass.  
The twelfth in the Morning, the Mandarin Guide Hinlauja, sent to acquaint the Netherlanders, that there were no Coelies to be had there, therefore asked the Ambassador if he would hire Men. But Van Hoorn answered, That since he had not done it all this Journey, he would not do it now; so that they went away with a good Wind, which at first proved successful to them, but some turning, by reason of the crooked Windings of the River, they were forced by all the Coelies, to be Towed one after another; yet notwithstanding this, they passed that day by Zeetiatwangh, Phinkoulutin, t' Zatzuen, and three other Villages. In the Evening they dropped Anchor at Gosathun, where they stayed that Night, having this Day Sailed two Leagues and a half.  
The next Morning, being the thirteenth, the Wind blowing fair, they set Sail again; yet the Barks often sticking fast on the Ground, they made but little way; yet having past Wankafan and Sitiafoe, they came late in the Evening 
Arrive at the City of Gioechioe.  to the City of Gioechioe, where they stayed all Night, having this day Sailed but two Leagues and three quarters.  
About nine a Clock in the Evening, the Mandarin Guide Hanlauja, and the Chinese Secretary Soukjen, and the two Interpreters jenko and Liulako, came in a small Boat to the Ambassadors Barge, telling him, that they were going to meet the new General that came from Peking, and was hard by (as the Netherlanders could see by the Lights in his Boats) going to Hoksieu, to Depose the there present Tziangpovi.  
This news was not very strange to the Hollanders, having been often told by the Guide Mandarins and their Interpreters, that the forementioned General in Hoksieu was Deposed, and that the Viceroy Singlamong was condemned to pay two thousand Tail of Silver, because he had let the netherlands Ships go away without the Emperor's leave, (which the Hollanders looked upon (it being mixed with no true words) to be only a Tale; but that perhaps (since they saw that another came to Depose him) he might for some Misdemeanour or other, be sent for to Peking.  
At Midnight, the forementioned Hanlauja, the Secretary, and Interpreters came aboard to tell the Ambassador, That they could not speak with his Excellency that Evening, he being gone to sleep before they came, but they would go to him early the next Morning; as accordingly they did; desiring to know of the Ambassador what time he might wait upon him. But returning, they brought word, That his Excellency durst not permit it, because he had not yet had Audience from the Emperor. Mean time his Highness Sailed by the Netherlanders, accompanied with twenty great Barges.  
The City Gioechioe is a Ruined place, buried almost in heaps of Rubbish, occasioned by the last War.  
After they had gotten Coelies, they left that City, though with slow advance, 
Leave Gioechioe.  because the River (notwithstanding the Wind was good) in many places (as they had seen the day before) was full of dry Sands; yet at last, passing by Sanghkiatwangh, they could (because of the Night coming on) get no further than Wanghiapan, where they came to an Anchor, having, notwithstanding they had a good Wind, Sailed but two Leagues and a little more.  
The fifteenth in the Morning they Weighed again, and with Sailing and Towing, past by Ponsinghou and Googothien; and in the Afternoon arrived at Goechin, where they stayed all Night, having this day gained three Leagues.  
About half a League from Goechin, lies the City Goeycen, North-West into the Country, which appeared but little to the Netherlanders, (for they did not put in to it) but seemed rather like a large Castle than a City.  
A little before they arrived at Goechien, a grand Mandarin, a Tartar (as it was said) Nephew to the present Emperor, came to Compliment and Visit the Ambassador in his Barge; where he was entertained with a Glass of Spanish Wine, which having drank, and seen the Horses, he took his leave.  
The sixteenth, leaving Goechien, they proceeded on their Journey, and passed by many Houses, built on both sides of the River; and also by some Villages, as Kongidieen, t' Santan, Nainaimeao, jaumeao, and Xantiento, the Suburb of Sangsinghwey; and in the Evening, arrived on the East side of the same City, before a great Plain, lying between the City Walls and the River; having this day Sailed three Leagues.  
Here they were to lie (because the River being in a manner dry, they could get no higher) till the Emperor's Order came to unlade the Presents, and go with them by Land to Peking, which was four Leagues distance.  
The seventeenth, nothing happened of remark.  
The eighteenth, several Mandarins came to Visit and Welcome the Ambassador; and likewise that Mandarin which was with him on the fifteenth, which was said to be the Emperor's Nephew, who gave the Ambassador two Sheep for a firelock, which he much desired.  
Amongst other Discourses, Van Hoorn asked this Lord, If no other Ambassadors from any other place were in Peking? To which he answered, None, but some from the Corean Isles, which were shortly to return.  
There happened little of note here, only the Mandarin Guide came to acquaint the Ambassador, that the next Morning Carts and Coelies would come to carry the Goods to Peking, and that one of the Lipous would be at a Town called Tonghsieuw, four Leagues from thence, to receive the Ambassador in the Emperor's Name, and conduct him to Peking.  
The next Morning, being the nineteenth, many Carts, Coelies, and Horses came to fetch the Presents, with all the Persons belonging to the Embassy, and their Goods, to Peking by Land; whereupon, the Ambassador gave immediate Order for the unlading of them, in which they spent all the Morning.  
The Ambassador gave the Bargemen (though every one apart) which came with him and his Retinue from Sucheu and Hoaigan, eighty six Tail of Silver, with which they were very well contented.  
About Noon, the Netherlanders set forward on their Journey to Tongsieuw, with the Presents and their other Goods, which were guarded by some Troopers, and between a concourse of thousands of Townsmen, Rustics, Women, and Children.  
About three a Clock, coming to Tongsieuw, all the Goods were put into an 
Tongsieuw.  old decayed House, where the Netherlanders also Lodged, but found small conveniencies.  
The twentieth, setting forth by Daylight, and having Rid thorough Palikua, Swango, and Kapucheen, they came within half a League of Peking, where they were Welcomed by one of the Lipous, called Liu Lauja, a Native Tartar, who kindly received them; and after some Compliments, conducted them to the City, which they entered just about Noon in good order.  
Coming within the Gates of Peking, they thanked God for his Mercy, in 
Come to Peking.  bringing them so great a Journey all in good Health, being a Way of many Leagues, in which they had spent six Months, Travelling both by Water and Land, by and thorough thirty seven Cities, three hundred thirty five Villages and thirty four Temples.  
They were led by the Emperor's Palace to the Tartars or Prime Chancellor's Court, standing behind the Emperors, where all his Imperial Majesty's Presents, according to order were to be left; and then the Hollanders to go to their Lodgings prepared for them.  
The Streets through which they passed swarmed with People, thousands standing on each side of the way, which made so great a Dust (to which inconveniency the Streets in Peking are very subject) that they could scarcely see; wherefore they were bid to sit down under the Gate or entrance of the Court, from amongst the crowd of the People, which by thousands stood before it, there to stay for the Presents which were left somewhat behind in their Riding through the City.  
Having stayed about a quarter of an Hour under the Gate, and drank a Cup of Tee, the Goods came; whereupon the Hollanders were led into a Chamber, leaving Putmen and some of the Retinue to look to, and separate the Emperor's Presents from the other.  
The Ambassador and Noble, with the rest, coming into the Chamber, they found some Secretaries sitting on a Table, which pointed to Van Hoorn to sit on the Floor; but he said, he could better stand, which they observing, bid him sit on the same Table where they sat, which he accordingly did.  
Then the forementioned Secretaries began to ask the Ambassador, by Order 
Questions to the Ambassador.  of the Lipous, the following Questions, viz. Concerning his Quality: From whence the Horses and Oxen came? How old they were, and how many Miles every Horse could go in a Day? To all which Questions he gave them fitting answers.  
They likewise asked who was the chief in Quality? Whether the Ambassadors Son or Noble? because the General of Hoksieu had placed the Ambassadors Son first: To which was answered, That the Lord Van Hoorn's Son, was according to the Lord General's Order in Batavia, to have the upper place; besides many other frivolous Questions, not worthy rehearsal.  
Mean while, the Lipou which had fetched in the Netherlanders, came to bring them some Meat dressed after the Chinese manner, which they kindly accepted of, having eaten nothing all that day before.  
Putmans' also came to tell the Ambassador, that after the Netherlanders had taken nineteen Chests with the Emperors Presents out of the Carts, the Tatan or Prime Chancellor coming thither with another Person of Quality, had forbid them to unlade any more, and that they would have the Emperor's Letter, 
The Generals and Counsels Letter from Batavia is delivered.  which after much trouble, being found, having happily a day or two before been wrapped up in a yellow Cloth; the Ambassador bore Headed, bowing himself three times, laid it with both Hands on a Table covered with Red Cloth, (behind which stood the first and second Tatan) not having time to deliver it in a Silver Charger, or any thing else of value; which done, the Netherlanders were again conducted into the Room in which they were before, without a Word spoke on either side.  
Soon after, the remaining Presents, Horses, Oxen, and other Goods were disposed into proper places.  
As they went to their Lodings, they were told that the Horses must be Saddled, 
Horses and Oxen are commanded to come to the Court.  and the Oxen put into their Wagon, to be brought to Court the next Morning; because the Emperor had designed to see them.  
And now the Ambassador coming to his new prepared Lodging, was much amazed that there was not so much room as would hold the Goods, Horses, and Oxen, nor no convenience for himself nor his People; Whereupon chiding the Mandarins that brought him thither, he asked, if that was a House fit for an Ambassador which came so great a Journey, and had brought such Rich Presents, and whose Countrymen had done the Emperor such remarkable Service; Withal, that it was impossible for him in that place, to take out the Saddles for the Horses, and also the Coach; yet nevertheless he would do his endeavour, although he feared much that it could not be done.  
The Mandarins observing the small conveniencies that the Netherlanders would have in that place, said, That they would acquaint their Master with it, and persuade them that they might have better Lodgings next day; meanwhile, the Ambassador must by no means fail to Saddle the Horses, and fit the Oxen, that they might be brought to the Court next Morning; but the Ambassador telling him that it was no way possible, unless they wrought the whole Night; The Mandarins took their leave.  
About Midnight two Mandarins came again to the Ambassador's Lodging, sent from the Lipous to tell him, that the Horses and Oxen must be brought to the Court before Day, and if they could not be Saddled, to bring them without, for the Emperor would be there in Person to see them, which would be no small Honor.  
The one and twentieth, about three a Clock in the Morning, one of the Lipous came to fetch the Horses and Oxen to the Court; whereupon, they were immediately Caparisoned and Harnessed, but the Chariot being fitted up, could not come out of the Door, so that being forced to leave it, Noble and the Secretary, conducted by the Lipous, went with the Horses and Oxen to the Court; from whence returning, at nine a Clock, they gave the Ambassador the following account:  
That entering the Emperor's Court at break of Day, they passed through four strong Gates, than they walked along by the Walls of the forementioned Palace, about a quarter of a Mile, at the end of which they went through a fifth Gate into the inner Court, where the Horses and Oxen were first viewed by the chief Zoutaizin or Councillor of State, who was a brown Tartar, with one Eye, and a White Beard, about sixty years old, who, as they said, by his conduct Valour and Prudence, Governed almost the whole Realm. He also told Noble and the Secretary, that they should go and stand back a little, for the Emperor was coming in Person to see the Horses and Oxen, and that when his Imperial Majesty came out, they should Kneel. But the Horses stood still, held by four Hollanders, in the same place where the beforementioned Zoutaizin had seen them; and the Oxen also held by two, were about twenty Paces from the place where the Emperor afterward came to view them: The Grooms were likewise commanded to Kneel; a little while after, four Horses with Yellow Saddles came in at the inner Court Gate, on one of which the Emperor sitting, stood still, just without the middle Gate of the inner Court.  
The Emperor, according to Noble and the Secretary's Relation, was a Person 
Shape of the Emperor.  of a middle Stature, pretty White, and about sixteen Years of age, not gorgeously Habited, having only a Blue Silk Damask Coat on, Embroidered before, behind, and on the shoulders, with Yellow Boats, looking steadfastly upon the Horses for a considerable time; at length, drawing his Eyes from them, smiling, he spoke to the forementioned Governor about them, by which the Hollanders perceived that his Majesty was well pleased with them. Then the Emperor gave Order, that two of the Horses should be Rid by the Commissary Berkman, and one Horse and an Ox be brought nearer him, where he looked upon them with a more curious Eye.  
After which, the Horses and Oxen being led a little way thence, his Imperial Majesty alighting, sat down on a little Bench, in the same place where he had stood with his Horse; and likewise the two first Zautaizins, or Councillors of State, sat down about four or five Paces from the Emperor, on his left Hand, on Carpets of Cloth; the first of the two, was the Person that had seen the Horses and Oxen alone; the other was also a Tartar: When upon his Majesty's Order a Cup of Bean Broth was given him, and also to the Netherlanders, who drank it on their Knees: Moreover, the Emperor Commanded to ask them, How far Holland was from Batavia, and Batavia from Hoksieu? and also, by whom the Ambassador was sent? To which they replied, That Holland was eight Months Sailing from Batavia, and Batavia 
Emperor's Questions.  about six Weeks from Hoksieu; and likewise, that the Ambassador by Orders of their Prince in Holland, was sent from the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia, which was all that was asked them; But the Horses and Oxen on the Emperor's Order, taken from them, and led into a Stable, opposite to the Gate of the inner Court; after which, the Netherlanders had leave to depart (when to their full satisfaction, they had seen the Emperor above half an hour) the same way they came, leaving his Imperial Majesty sitting in the forementioned place.  
Soon after, Noble and the Secretaries return with the remaining Attendance, two Mandarins sent from the Emperor, came to desire two Hollanders, one to dress the Horses, and another the Oxen, and show his Grooms the manner of it, which the Ambassador immediately granted.  
The Lipou Liu-lauja, which had the day before fetched in the Ambassador, 
Remaining Presents are sent for to the Court.  came also to his Lodgings to tell him, That the remaining Presents must immediately be made ready to be carried to the Court; to which purpose Carts would immediately be brought thither to fetch them; likewise, that the Lord Ambassador, his Son, and as many Persons more as he pleased, might come along with them, because he ought to be Present when the Goods were looked over, to see if none were wanting, which was not needful at the Horses and Oxen, and therefore they were accepted of; whereupon, the Ambassador making himself ready, Ordered the Presents to be put into the Carts, and went with Noble, Putmen, the Secretary, and eleven Persons of his Retinue, towards the Court; but was first carried to the Council of State's House, where he had left the nineteen Chests with Presents: Here having sorted all the Goods (except five Chests with White Pepper, which the Tatan said were needless) they were sent to the Emperor's Palace; whither soon after the Tatan (who Rid before through another Gate with the Goods) the Ambassador and all his Retinue followed.  
Coming to the inner Court, where the Emperor saw the Horses in the Morning, they found the Carts with the Goods there before them, and also the Tatan sitting in the open Court. Here the Ambassador and his Attendance were also shown to sit down on the Ground behind him, which they accordingly did, on Coats brought with them for that purpose.  
Having stayed about half an hour, the two Prime Councillors or Zoutaizins of the Emperor, came also thither, and seated themselves on their Pieces of Cloth on the Ground; and having rested themselves a little, they called the Tatan, who kneeling before them, received their Commands, which was, to tell the Ambassador, That the Emperor asked if the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia was in good Health? To which kneeling on one Knee, he answered, that he was.  
Then the Councillors asked, If they were all four Persian Horses, and the Oxen Bengael? And also, If the Netherlanders were at Peace with the Persian and Bengael? To which the Ambassador replied, That they were, and had many years lived like Brothers, and real Friends. They also asked, What sorts of Grain there grew in Holland? To which they gave a fitting account. Then the Oxen were ordered to be put into the Chariot, and the Ambassadors Son to come and show him Reverence.  
Soon after the Presents, except the Lanterns, were carried away again without the Emperor's coming to look upon them, and leave granted to the Ambassador to return to his Lodgings.  
Mean while, Putmen and Ruwenoort stayed in the Court to undo the Lanterns, which the Emperor, after the Ambassador's departure came to see; and likewise the Oxen drawing the Chariot, in which he Ordered two of his Attendants to sit, and be drawn in it; so that Putmen and Ruwenoort also saw the Emperor.  
Several grand Mandarins went to Visit the Ambassador in his Lodgings; all which he Entertained with great kindness, and according to the conveniency of the place.  
The two and twentieth, early in the Morning a Secretary belonging to the Lipous, came to the Ambassador's Lodgings, to tell him, That Putmen must come to the Tatan's House to unpack the Emperor's Presents, and look them over; whereupon, Putmen accordingly went thither.  
This Secretary humbly proffered his Service to the Ambassador, saying, He would rejoice, if by his advice, or aught else, he might be serviceable to his Excellency; for which he received many Thanks from the Ambassador, who answered him, That he would slip no opportunity to make use of him.  
The same day, jenko the Interpreter informed the Ambassador, That he had been told from credible Persons, that he should be brought within three days before the Imperial Throne, to have Audience granted him, which although he did not absolutely believe, yet he prepared all things in a readiness.  
There also came a Commissioner with four Mandarins, sent from the Prime Counsellor, or Zoutaizin of the Emperors, to ask the Ambassador if he had no Blood-Coral, Perpetuana's, or other Goods to Sell, because the Emperor would perhaps buy some of them? Whereupon the Ambassador replied, That the Ong, or General of Batavia, had strictly forbid him to sell any thing, but what he had was at the Emperor's Service: which said, they took their leave.  
There likewise came two Mandarins to keep Watch in the Ambassador's 
Ambassador is strictly Guarded.  Lodgings; so that the Netherlanders were then Guarded by four Mandarins, and twenty Soldiers, that every one was kept from going out (except those whom they pleased) or coming into the House. The Mandarin Guides also, which since their coming thither had been Lodged there, were removed to another Place; but the Chinese Interpreter Soukjen, stayed with them.  
At Noon Putmen returning, said, That he had again been in the Tatans' House, and laid a Piece of every sort of Goods to view, all which was Sealed up in a Chest to show the Emperor, and that the rest were left in Chests to be looked over.  
In the Afternoon one of the Lipous Secretaries came on Horseback to the Gate of the Ambassador's Lodging, saying only to the Interpreters, That the Lord Ambassador must make himself ready against Midnight, to appear before the Emperor, and to deliver the Presents himself to his Majesty: which said, he immediately hasted away again without any Answer. Van Hoorn made himself ready against the forementioned time.  
The same Afternoon Putmen was again sent for to the Tatan, that he might (as they said) take the rest of Presents out of the Packs, that they might be shown to the Emperor altogether the next Morning, and be in readiness to be delivered by the Ambassador to his Imperial Majesty.  
Putmans' returning very late in the Night related, That he had been with the Tatan, and had taken all the Goods out of the Chests, yet laid them in again. Moreover, he was commanded to tell the Ambassador, that he should make himself ready betimes to go to the Court the following Night.  
The twenty eighth, two hours before Daylight, the Ambassador was with 
The Presents must be shown to the Emperor.  all his Retinue fetched to the Court by some prime Mandarins, being led through three other Gates than those which they passed the day before, to an inner Court: having passed the third Gate, they saw in a great Plain before the Portals of a stately House, all the Presents set on the Ground, and close by them the second Tatan, who also pointed to them to sit down by the Presents, which they did.  
About half an hour after the Ambassadors from the Corean Isles, being three 
Corean Agents.  in number, came also thither with fifty Attendants, Habited after the Chinese manner, with long Hair, yet poorly Dressed, and of mean Aspects; which were ordered to sit a good way behind the Netherlanders, on the left side of the going in at the Door.  
In the interim, whilst the Netherlanders stayed above two hours, some Discourse 
A Discourse between the Lipou Lilauja and the Ambassador.  passed between the Lipou Lilauja and the Ambassador, about a Letter which the Interpreter Genko said the Ambassador would deliver to the Emperor; which the Lipou advised him not to do, saying, That it was not customary there; for if they would Request any thing of the Emperor, they must first acquaint the Lipou with it, that they might again impart it at convenient times to the Emperor: Whereupon the Ambassador replied, That he would do nothing but what he advised him to, because he was a Stranger and knew not their Customs. As to what concerned the Letter which the Interpreter had told him of, it was nothing else but a Compliment of thankfulness to his Imperial Majesty, which he designed to speak to him, and whether it would be fit to deliver it to the Emperor before all his Business was done.  
There likewise came another Lipou to the Ambassador, saying, That he had understood by one of the Zoutaisins, that it might happen, that the Emperor would ask the Ambassador some Questions, which if he did, he advised him to make short and brief Answers.  
Lastly, the Ambassador was told, that he might again return to his Lodging, because the Emperor would not that day come out to see the Presents; yet that Putmen must stay there to see the Chests and Packs opened, if any thing should be ordered to be taken out of them; all which was accordingly performed: But the Ambassador being in the last Gate to go out of the Court, was desired to stay a little, where Putmen came to him, saying, That Genko the Interpreter had demanded the Keys of the Chest in which the Presents were, which having opened he was ordered to follow the Ambassador. A little after he was told, that he might go home with his Retinue, which he did, and was no sooner come thither, but he found a List written in the Chinese Tongue; in which was set down the Provision that the Emperor allowed the Ambassador every day, viz.  
For the Ambassador, his Son john Van Hoorn, and Noble, two Geese, four 
A List of the Emperor's allowance to the Ambassador's.  Hens, three Fish, six Catty of Meal, three Tail of black Tee, a pound and a half of Waetsjoe, one of Mesoe, one of Soya, one of Oil, nine Catty of Herbs and Garlic, six Cans of Liquor, and every five days a hundred Pears, five Catty of Grapes, or Raisins, five Catty of dried Prunes, a hundred and fifty Apricocks, and likewise every other day a Sheep.  
For six Men every day twelve Catty of Pork, six of Meal, six of Tauwhoe, three Tail of black Woetsjoe, one Catty and a half of Misoe, the like of Soya, the like of Oil, and six great Vessels of Drink.  
For fifteen Persons every day seven Catty and a half of Pork, two of Herbs, one of Salt, five Jugs of Liquor.  
In the Afternoon Genko the Interpreter came to acquaint the Ambassador, That all the Presents being taken out of the Chests and Packs, were brought before the Emperor in his Court, where his Imperial Majesty had seen them, and accepted of them; which did not a little rejoice the Netherlanders, when they heard that all the Presents were delivered without any of them being damnified, except some flaws in the Lantern.  
There also came two Commission'd Mandarins from the Lipous, to ask if the Ambassador could about two days hence go to Zamboie, that is Compliment the Emperor? and withal, to go for the Emperor's Privy Seal the next Morning? To which he answered, That he was ready at all times to obey his Imperial Majesty's Command.  
The Ambassador also asked these Mandarins whether the Emperor had accepted of the Presents? and if he had done with them? To which they replied, Yes. Whereupon the Ambassador said, That he was sorry, his House being so small, he could not entertain them according to his good inclination: To which they answered, That the Ambassador's good will was sufficient, and that three days hence he should remove into a great House, which was preparing for him.  
The next day, being the four and twentieth, about nine a Clock a Mandarin came to the Ambassador's Lodging, to tell him that it was time to go and show Reverence to his Imperial Majesty's Seal: Whereupon he went thither, with his Son, Noble, Putmen, the Secretary, and five of his Attendants, whom the fore▪ mentioned Mandarin conducted into an old great Mandarins' House that stood behind the Tatans'; which when entered, they saw through one of the Palace Gates the Place where the Seal is kept, being a little eight corner'd House, and were directed to sit under the Gate, to defend themselves from the heat of the Sun; where, having stayed half an hour, they heard a Voice bidding them Ascend; having passed on about fifteen Paces they heard the same Voice crying, Kneel; and afterwards again, Bow your Heads three times together, which done you may rise; soon after it said, Kneel down again, and once more bow your Heads three times; so that they were to bow eighteen times and kneel six; all which being passed over, they cried, Stand up, and go to your Lodgings, which accordingly they did.  
After the Ambassador had been at home about half an hour, he was told, that the chief Councillor of State, or Tatan, would be there presently: whereupon they made themselves all ready to entertain his Highness, who soon after came thither with two Lipous: They asked the Netherlanders by an Interpreter several Questions, viz. How long Holland had been in being? Near what Kingdoms it bordered? What Goods and Merchandises were to be had from thence? To all which his Highness received satisfactory Answers: So having spent half an hour in ask Questions, and it beginning to grow very hot in the Ambassador's little House, it being about Noon, he said that he would go home, and leave the two forementioned Lipous there, to be resolved of some more Questions by the Ambassador; who caused two Pistols, one Firelock, and two Sword Blades to be shown to his Highness, with Request that he would take them with him in commemoration of Holland; but he excusing 
Refuses Presents.  himself, said, That the Ambassador's good inclination was enough; which said, he departed.  
The two Lipous asked him many frivolous Questions, not forgetting the least 
The two Lipous Questions.  thing; nay, desired to know what Tails the Sheep and Hares had in Holland: in which Discourse they spent most part of the Day, the Ambassador giving them their desired Answers. After their Secretary had written down all things, they took their leave: The Ambassador proffered them some Presents, thereby to draw their inclinations towards him, but they refused them like the Tatan.  
Mean while the Emperor sent eighteen Tartar Saddles, with all their Furniture, to the Ambassador's Lodging, to use whilst he stayed there.  
The four Watch Mandarins were the same day presented by the Ambassador with a Piece of Perpetuana, and five Tail of Silver.  
The twenty fifth the prime Secretary to the Lipous came with two Mandarins 
The Ambassador makes Obeisance before the Emperor's Throne.  (all three Habited after a stately manner, fit to show obedience to the Emperor) to the Ambassador's Lodgings after Midnight, to tell him, that it was time to go to the Palace: Whereupon the Ambassador went thither with most of his Retinue, which were all led through three Gates into the same Plain wherein they sat the Morning before, and there ordered to stay till Daylight, when the Emperor would appear sitting in his Throne. Having spent two hours, and the Day beginning to appear, they saw the Plain full of Mandarins' richly Habited, that were come thither to Zamboie, or show Obedience to the Emperor; so that the Hollanders divertised themselves with looking upon the Multitude. Having sat till half an hour after daybreak, they were conducted farther to a fourth Gate; about fifteen Paces from which they saw five Elephants, with Gilded Towers on their Backs, (three on the right, and two on the left side of the Entrance,) and likewise four of the Emperor's wains without Horses, standing on both sides of this Gate, which hath three Passages. They were conducted through the left Gate between the Elephants, which they had no sooner passed but they saw a fifth Gate, built like the fourth, but▪ somewhat higher; to which they went by an ascent, and found it also to have three Passages, through the middlemost of which (where on the right side stood the Emperor's Palakin) they go directly to the Imperial Throne: but they were, as at the fourth Gate, led through the third Entry (because none dare go through the middlemost but the Emperor himself;) which having passed, they came into a spacious Court; at the end whereof stood the Palace wherein the Throne was erected; to which they ascend by Marble Steps. The Court was full of Mandarins, Clothed after the best manner, sitting in Rows one by another. On each side of the Throne stood many Umbrellas, Flags and Standards, of yellow, 
State before the Emperor's Throne.  blue, and white; below the Marble Steps, on each side of the Ascent of the Throne stood about thirty Persons in a Row, Clothed in the Emperor's Livery, being Yellow, and also ten white Horses with yellow Saddles, five on each side. The Ambassador and all his Retinue were placed on the left side of the Throne, at the end of the first Row of Mandarins; where having sat a very little while, they were forced to rise up to make way for some Grand Lords that were going to the Throne. About half an hour after a small Bell was heard to Ring, and four Persons making a noise, or flacking with Whips, which was just as if a Field of Canes had been set on fire. Soon after they heard a Voice, which proclaimed something in the Tartar Language; whereupon many prime Lords and Great Persons went and stood directly before the Throne between some blue Stones (which were laid there about half a Foot high, to the number of eighteen or twenty) and upon the Proclamation of a Herald they showed their Obeisance to the Throne, by thrice Kneeling, and nine times bowing of their Heads: During this, a sweet Harmony was heard of several sorts of Instruments. When these Grand Lords had made their Obeisance, the Ambassador, being called by the Herald, was by two Lipous led with his Assistants between the forementioned blue Stones, and placed just behind the sixteenth, where they could neither see the Emperor nor Throne, yet made Obeisance in the same manner as the others had done before, the Music beginning to Play when they Kneel. This done, the Lipous went again to their Places where they sat before; but the Ambassador, his Son, and Noble, were through a by-way led up the Marble Steps that ascended to the House where the Throne stood; where they were placed next to the second Tatan, or Chancellor, from whence they saw the glittering Throne, and the Emperor in Cloth of Gold, the Imperial Stool not being above fourteen Paces from the Place where the Ambassador sat. Soon after Van Hoorn, his Son, and Noble, were presented with a Cup of Imperial Bean-Broth; which they had no sooner drank, but the Emperor rising from his Throne, seemed to come to them, but 
The Emperor rises.  went out behind the Throne. He being a brown slender Youth, about sixteen years old, had, as the Netherlanders were informed, twelve Kings for his Guard. After his Imperial Majesty's departure, the Ambassador also went soon after 
And likewise the Ambassador.  with all his Retinue to his Lodgings, not without great joy (because he found himself somewhat indisposed) that he had made an end of this grand Business.  
Having been at home half an hour, the prime Secretary to the Lipous came thither, to ask him how far such and such Places were distant from Holland? and if there were any Tigers, or other ravenous Beasts in Holland? To which having received due Answers, he took his leave.  
To the Mandarin that provided Horses for the Netherlanders, and conducted them to the Court, the Ambassador gave five els and a half of Stammel, which he accepted of, and used great diligence to get it out of the Ambbassador's Lodgings.  
Since the Council in Batavia had expressly commanded, that when the Emperor had been Complemented, and his Presents delivered to him, they should also present the Taisins, or Councillors of State, therefore the Ambassador proposed in Council, in what manner it was best to be done, and to which Persons: whereupon it was judged convenient, that it should be to the following Persons, because they were to assist the Netherlanders during the Emperor's Minority, viz. the four Zoutaizins, being of his Imperial Majesty's Privy Council, 
Presents to the Zoutaizins.  who Governed the Empire during his Nonage, should be presented with half a Piece of Scarlet, half a Piece of black Cloth, and half a Piece of Sky-coloured Cloth, two Pieces of Crown-Serge, three of Cloth-Serge, ten els of Holland Velvet, one Quilt, ten Pieces of fine Linen, two of fine Guinee Linen, two large Carpets, two fine Chitsen, one Piece of Sandalwood, twelve Pieces of Blood-Coral, four Pieces of great Amber, one Firelock, one pair of Pistols, two Swords with rich Gilded Handles, one pair of Pocket-Pistols, two Pieces of Whalebone, two Rhinocerots Horns, two Unicorns Horns, six pair of Spectacles, one Perspective Glass.  
To each of the three other Tatans', or Chancellors, the chief in the Lipous Assembly, that they might impart the Hollanders Requests to the Emperor, were presented half a Piece of Crimson, half a Piece of black, and half a Piece of sky-coloured Cloth, one Piece of black Cloth▪ Serge, one of Crown-Serge, one Piece of Sandal Wood, ten els of green Velvet, six Pieces of Adathiis, two of fine Guinee Linen, two Carpets, one String of Amber Beads, three Pieces of great, and three of small Blood-Coral, two great Pieces of Amber, one Sword-Blade, one pair of Pistols, two Unicorns Horns, two Rhinocerots Horns, one Perspective Glass, six pair of Spectacles, and some Glass▪ works.  
To each of the three Lipous, or Speakers for Strangers, acting in all Ambassador's 
Presents to the Lipous.  Affairs, were presented half a Piece of Crimson, half a Piece of black, and half a Piece of sky-coloured Cloth, one Piece of Cloth-Serge, one of black Crown-Serge, ten Dutch Silk-Stuffs, four Pieces of Adathiis, one of Guinee Linen, one Carpet, one ordinary String of Amber Beads, six Pieces of Blood-Coral, one great Piece of Amber, one pair of Pistols, one Carbine, one Sword-Blade, and two Rhinocerots Horns.  
Every one of the Secretaries belonging to the Lipous were presented with ten 
Presents for the Secretaries.  els of Stammel, one Piece of Cloth-Serge, one of Perpetuana, one Carpet, two Pieces of Adathiis, one of Guinee Linen, one String of ordinary Amber Beads, one Sword-Blade, two Rhinocerots Horns, one Carbine, and one Piece of Crown-Serge.  
And that the Inventories of the Presents should be safely delivered, and the Ambassador no way cheated therein, it was ordered that Noble should go thither with the first opportunity, to deliver them in his own Person, and send a Dutch Letter with them, that they might show it by such Person as they pleased the Ambassador should deliver their Presents to.  
The twenty sixth in the Morning, Noble and Putmen were sent for to the 
Noble and Putmen are sent for to the Lipous.  Assembly of the Lipous; whither (having acquainted the Ambassador with it) they went, and at their Return related, That they had been before the three Lipous, who sat in Consultation of their Business; where they were asked if the Ambassador had aught to request of the Emperor, by order of the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia? and if he intended to present the Emperor with any thing else? if so, he should write down his Requests, and the Presents which he would give, and come with Noble the next Morning to their Assembly and deliver it himself, that hereafter he might not trouble them with any more Requests. Moreover, they asked if the Lord Maetzuiker had written a Letter to the Pou of Hoksieu? To which they replying Yes, said that the Contents thereof was unknown to them, but that the Ambassador might perhaps inform them of it. They enquired also the difference in Quality between the Ambassador's Son and Noble, which was answered according to the truth. The Lipous also said, that Carts and Coelies should come the next day to fetch their Goods out of their straitened Lodgings, and carry them to a greater.  
Noble and Putmen acquainting the Ambassador herewith, he called his Council, where they seriously considered their Instructions: whereupon it was first judged no way convenient to complain of the Viceroy Singlamong, as was mentioned in them, because of the great Power which he had in that Place, by which means there might arise a confusion, and a hatred against them, and a great prejudice if the Trade should be forbid them in Hoksieu. Moreover, since the General there was already deposed, and the Viceroy condemned to pay two thousand Tail for suffering the netherlands Ships to go away, they ought by no means to be the occasion to bring any more trouble upon him. Nay, though the Ambassador would have fulfilled his Instructions he could not do it, because none (as fearing to incur displeasure) would have translated it into the Chinese Tongue.  
Many other Complaints mentioned in the Instructions were thought fit not to be taken notice of till a more convenient opportunity, they being commanded to set down only what they had to request of the Emperor. All which being rightly considered of, it was concluded to write the following Points, and get them translated into the Chinese Tongue, that the Ambassador and Noble might the next Morning carry them to the Lipous, viz.  
The Realm of Holland, and the General of Batavia have commanded the 
Requests of the Ambassador to the Emperor.  Ambassador to request of his Imperial Majesty the following Points:  

I. THat the Hollanders may always, and every year come with as many Ships as shall be requisite, to Traffic in the Realm of Tayzing.  
II. That the Holland Ships may come and Trade at Quantung, Singcheu, Hoksieu, Ningpo, and Hanksieu.  
III. That the Hollanders may Trade with all Persons, and Buy and Sell without being forced to deliver their Merchandise against their wills.  
IV. That the Silk and Silk-Stuffs may be Bought and Transported by the Hollanders, as also all other Merchandise, except those which the Emperor pleases to prohibit, of which the Ambassador desires he may have knowledge, that they may obey the Emperor's Will and Pleasure.  
V. That the Holland Ships, so soon as they are arrived, may Trade and go away again when they are ready.  
VI That all manner of Provisions, and other Necessaries, may be bought by the Hollanders and carried to their Ships.  
VII. That the Hollanders when they come to Trade, may have a convenient Habitation for their Money, to stow their Merchandise in and sell them, and also to preserve them from Fire; because the Chinkon was in great danger at Hoksieu.  
VIII. That the forementioned Particulars may be ratified with Sealed Letters from the Emperor, and that his Vice-Roys may be commanded to observe and take notice of them: Which if the Emperor grant, the Ambassador hath Order to consult farther about the Chinkon.   
Moreover, the Ambassador proposed, if he ought not for his particular part to present the Emperor (because it was customary there;) which being approved of, they set down the following Presents, viz. four Strings of Amber 
Presents to the Emperor.  Beads, one Amber Box, one Silver Charger, one Silver Box with Mother of Pearl, four Casuaris Eggs, ten Pieces of yellow Cloth, two double Barreled Pistols, two Pocket Pistols, two Sword Blades, one Buff Coat, twenty Flasks of Rose-water, four Perspective Glasses, six Pieces of Calamback Wood, two Unicorns Horns, one Piece of Amber, one Copper Horse upon a Pedestal, one Copper Lion, two Copper Dogs, one Copper Mount, one Persian Quilt, two small Mortarpieces.  
The twenty seventh in the Morning the Ambassador and Noble were fetched by a Mandarin to the Lipous Assembly; where coming, they were led into an Antichamber, and from thence, after half an hours stay, to the Lipous; to whom, after the delivery of the several Requests, and Inventory of the Presents, they were again led to the forementioned Chamber, without a word speaking on either part.  
A little while after there came two Lipous to ask the Ambassador some 
Several Questions of two Lipous to the Ambassador.  Questions by the Tatans' Order, viz. That the Holland Ambassadors were in the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte ordered to come by Quantung, and he was now in the fifth Year of Conchi come thither from Hoksieu, why he did not come by Quantung? also which way was nearest, from Quantung or Hoksieu? The Ambassador answering these, desired that if they had any more Questions to ask him, they would please to deliver them to him in Writing, that he might answer them again in the same manner, that by that means all mistakes, which might happen to arise by the Interpretation of them, might be prevented. This the Lipous willingly consenting to, delivered them a Paper written in the Chinese Tongue, in which the Questions were all set down.  
Van Hoorn and Noble going from thence went to their new Lodgings, which 
Ambassador goes to his new Lodgings.  were the same wherein the Ambassadors Goyer and Keizer had Lodged thirteen years before, and now also the four Corean Ambassador, who went from thence the day before, having been there a whole Month.  
The Place whereon this House was built being of a large circumference, was surrounded with Stone Walls, and full of Chambers and other Apartments; yet very inconvenient, though better than where they were before.  
Soon after their coming into this their new Habitation, the Lipous which had been there before, came again with their Secretary, to tell the Ambassador, that the Tatan would come in Person and see those Presents which the Ambassador would present to the Emperor apart, that he might give the better account of them to his Imperial Majesty. To which the Ambassador replied, That so soon as the Goods came thither, he would lay them ready for him.  
Not long after Putmen and Ʋander Does came thither with all the remaining Presents and other Goods: whereupon the Ambassador gave immediate order, that those new Presents which he had designed to give the Emperor, should be taken out of their several Chests: which was no sooner done, but the Tatan came with several great Lords; where looking on all the Goods, he asked from whence this or that came, and what use it was for? to which Question having received an Answer, he took his leave; but coming just without the Gate he sent one of his Secretaries to tell the Ambassador, that he must get the Presents all in readiness against the next Morning, if the Emperor should chance to send for them.  
The twenty eighth about daybreak, a Mandarin came to the Ambassador to have a written Answer to the Questions delivered in Writing the day before by the Chancellor and Lipous to the Ambassador and Noble: whereupon the Ambassador causing them immediately to be translated, found them to be as followeth; and thereupon judged it convenient to answer according to what was there written, under every Question.   

The Emperor and Lipous ask of the Ambassador and Hopou these following Questions.  
I. Question. In the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte, the Holland Ambassadors came to Quantung. The Lipous in the same Year writ to the Emperor, and he hath granted that the Ambassadors shall always come by the way of Canton. In the fifth Year of the Emperor Conghi, the Ambassador is come from Hoksieu; and why did he not come from Canton?  
Answer. Because the Hollanders in the Wars, and routing of the Pirate Coxinga, put into Hoksieu.  
II. Qu. Which Way is nearest, from Quantung, or Hoksieu?  
Answ. The Way from Quantung is three or four days nearer; yet that is according as the Wind's blow.  
III. Qu. If the Way from Quantung be three or four days nearer than from Hoksieu, why did not the Ambassador come from thence?  
Answ. The reasons thereof are mentioned in the Answer to the first Question.  
IV. Qu. In the thirteenth Year of the Emperor Zungte, the Holland Ships were in Quantung, and since there are many Shelves and Rocks, how did they get through them?  
Answ. Concerning the Rocks, and being at Quantung, we can say nothing of them, because neither the Hopou nor Ambassador were there; but yet they both know that some of the Holland Ships were cast away there.  
Whilst they were answering these Questions, two Lipous came to the Ambassadors 
Two Lipous ask several Questions of the Ambassador.  House, ask a Pattern of each sort of the peculiar Presents which the Ambassador intended to give to the Emperor, that they might show it; which being given them, they again asked some other Questions, from whence this thing or that came? and what use it was for? as the Tatan had done the day before. To which they received Answers as formerly. Soon after they began to Pack up all the Goods to be carried to the Court.  
The Ambassador taking hold of this opportunity, judged it convenient (since two days before he could not have any time) to deliver the Zoutaizins, Tatans', and others, the Inventories of their Presents; which was done accordingly, after the Ambassador had taken both of them apart from the other Mandarins: but they (notwithstanding all the arguments that could be used to persuade them to accept of them) excused themselves, saying they could not as yet take them, alleging that they would stay till they had done the Ambassador's Business. This said, they asked if the Ambassador had brought any thing to sell? and also if any of his Retinue had any thing to dispose of, which if they had, they should give them the quantity of them in Writing, before they sold their Goods, which (as they said) was the Custom there of all Strangers. Whereupon the Ambassador gave them the same Answer as he had done on the two and twentieth, viz. That they had nothing to sell, but that which they brought with them was to give away to Persons that assisted them in the obtaining of their Desires. Whereupon they looking upon one another, said nothing, but that they durst not accept of the Presents.  
Moreover, the Ambassador requested that they would please to order him 
Ambassador's Requests▪  a certain Purveyor, to buy all his Provisions and other Necessaries for him and his Retinue, because they could not agree with those that were there then, by reason they were changed every day; and likewise that they might have a Carpenter to make some Conveniences for them. The first they granted, telling them of two Persons which should assist them; but the second they could not consent to, because (as they said) none might come into the Ambassador's House whilst the Emperor's Presents were there.  
They also asked for an Answer to their Questions made the day before; to which the Ambassador replied, That it was ready to be delivered to them so soon as it was Translated: To which they answered, That when it was done they should deliver it to the Mandarins whom they would send; which soon after was performed: and they took their leave without taking any of the Emperor's Presents with them, which the Ambassador had Packed up: neither was it done till the twenty third, when by three Secretaries belonging to the Lipous, they were with the rest of the Presents (according as they said) to be delivered all together to the Emperor.  
The thirtieth the Ambassador and Noble were sent for to the Lipous, and carried 
Ambassador and Noble brought before the Lipous.  to the chief Tatan's House, where they commonly assembled; whither coming, after a little waiting, they were asked by the Tatan if they had any Goods to buy or to sell? To which they answered, No; and that it was not customary for any Ambassador to trouble himself with Merchandizing. Whereupon the Tatan asked how it was with the Ambassador's Health: after which his Excellency and Noble were carried into an Antichamber; where being seated, they asked the Ambassador concerning his Son's Quality? and if 
Several Questions.  he came upon order and knowledge of the Lord General. To which Van Hoorn replied, That his Son was of no Quality more than as being his, and that he only came to bear his Father Company, which the General had given him leave to do. Moreover, they asked why this Embassy did not come by Quantung and Canton, but from Hoksieu, alleging that they were not well satisfied in the written Answer to this Question, because they had not asked about the War with the Coxingans, and if they were come thither by that means; but why the Embassy did not now come by Quantung? and if they and the Lord Maetzuiker did not know that the former Emperor's Order was, that all Embassies must come from Quantung? Whereupon after consultation they answered, That they knew not of the former Emperor's Order; and that according to the Lord Generals Command they were come by Hoksieu, and whether or not he knew the former Emperor's Order they could not tell. Which Answer they said was sufficient, and accordingly written down. They also asked concerning Putmen and the Secretary's Quality; which being resolved, the Ambassador and Noble took their leave.  
The first of june in the Morning one of the Lipous called Songlauja, and four 
june.  Grand Mandarins, came to the Ambassador's House, with Request that he would command his Music to Play, which they much desired to hear. He knowing the Lavja's to be very civil People, entertained them nobly, and ordered his Musicians to Play their best Tunes; which pleased them so well, that they returned him many thanks, and at last took their leave.  
In the Evening the Ambassador proposed, That they had made some Inventories 
Consult about presenting the Council of State.  of Presents for the four Zoutaizins, three Tartar Tatans', three Lipous, and four Secretaries; and that their Letter of Requests was, as they reported, already delivered to the Emperor, and that in a short time they might have an Answer; that also in their Instructions they were ordered to present the Councillors of State before their chief Business was done, as the Ambassador had already used some endeavour to deliver the Schedule of the Presents, without being able to do it; as also by one of their Mandarin Guides to the Zoutaizins, which likewise came to no effect: Whereupon considering, that they could trust none without being cheated, it was therefore proposed what way would be best to present the Councillors: After serious Debate it was resolved, that Noble and Putmen should the next Morning go to the Lipous, and acquaint them, That the Ambassador rejoiced at the Emperor's kind acceptance of all the Presents, and withal desired, there being some Presents for the Zoutaizins and other Grandees, sent them from the General, that they might be acquainted with it, and they admitted to deliver them. Whereupon the Mandarins of the Guard were called, and desired by the Ambassador, that they would go to the Lipous in the Morning, and request of them, that Noble and Putmen might be admitted to impart something to them; which they promised to do, and said they would bring the Ambassador an Answer at their Return.  
The second in the Morning the Mandarins returned to tell the Ambassador, that Noble and Putmen might freely go to the Assembly, and that a Mandarin was come to conduct them thither. Whereupon they immediately went, and at their Return related, That they were carried by the forementioned Mandarins to the Tatans' House into a Chamber, by the Lipou Songlauja, who had asked them if they would acquaint him only with their Requests, or the whole Assembly? to which they answered, That they would do as he pleased: whereupon he desired that they should only impart it to him, which was done after the same manner as it was agreed on the Night before: which having heard, he went in, and after half an hours stay coming out again, and sending away all his Servants, he told them, That for that time the Lipous were risen, but the Tatan had promised to propose it to the Assembly in the Afternoon, and would send them an Answer the next Morning, whethe Noble should come to the Assembly or not; and if no Messenger came, he might tstay at home. Songlauja had also asked several times if the Lord General had sent the Presents? and if there were no Letters with them. To which Noble replying, said, That there were none; but he knew that the Ambassador was commanded by the Lord Maetzuiker to present all the forementioned Grandees: which said, they took their leave.  
The third, two Mandarins came to tell the Ambassador, That the Lipous on the Proposal of the Presents made yesterday by Noble and Putmen, desired that he would write the Persons Names which he intended to present, and if they were sent from the General, or given only by the Ambassador: To which he sent an Answer in these following terms:  
THe General of Batavia hath commanded the Ambassador, after the delivery of 
A Letter to the Taisins concerning the Presents.  the Chinkon to the Emperor, also to Present the Taizins; for he being ignorant of the Customs here, hath ordered the Ambassador to do according as he shall find it convenient.  
With which Letter Noble and Putmen went to the Lipous Assembly, and at their Return brought word, That they had again, as yesterday, been at the Tatans' House, and by two Lipous led into a private Chamber, where they delivered the forementioned Letter; which when they had read they delivered to Noble again. Whereupon Noble desired of the Lipou Songlauja (which was one of the two) that he would be pleased to assist the Ambassador, he not knowing their Customs, and advise him what was best to be done: At which seeming not to be well pleased, he went to the Council, whither Noble and Putmen was also called: There they saw three Tatans', being two Tartars and one Chinese, to whom they again delivered the forementioned Letter: The Tatans' having read it, asked to whom they would deliver the Presents? Noble and Putmen desired that they might speak with the Ambassador about it: But they making no Answer went away without effecting their Business, the Letter being also by the Tatans' demanded from the Interpreter de Hase, to whom they had first given it.  
In the Afternoon a Mandarin, whom Van Hoorn had some days since presented with five els of Stammel, came and brought it again, saying, When the Ambassador's Business was done he would take it, but now he durst not keep it. He also informed the Ambassador, that he was come of his own accord to tell him, that the Letter to the Lipous to present the Zoutaizins did not please them; nay, that they would perhaps send some Lavjas, to ask how and where the Ambassador heard of the Zoutaizins? and advised him to answer them, That he supposed the Zoutaizins, Tatans', and Lipous, were all one.  
The Ambassador looked upon this as a strange Discourse, because he had seen the Zoutaizins, and they asked him concerning the General's Health; so that he supposed the Lipous did this only to prevent him from presenting the Zoutaizins, and get the Presents amongst themselves.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning Van Hoorn and Noble were sent for to the 
Ambassador and Noble appear before the Lipous.  Lipous, and carried before their Bench, where they were asked what Lords the Ambassador meant by the Name of Zoutaizins? and how they knew that there were any? To which he answered, That he had seen two of them in the Emperor's Palace, and they told him that there were two more, which were then sick; and also that he had spoke to them when they asked him about the General's Health. To which the Lipous said, Mean you them? Whereto Van Hoorn replied, So he understood his Orders.  
Moreover they desired that the Ambassador would declare what Lipous he meant by the other, and that he would express the Lipous thereby; which was done accordingly. This pleasing them, the Ambassador was by some of the Lipous led out of the Council Chamber into a private Room, and there told, That in the second Year of the Emperor Conghi, a Mandarin called Tanghlauja, had been in Hoksieu impower'd as Taizin, and had brought word that they would every year come to Peking; whether or no that was true? To which Van Hoorn answered, That that was not the meaning, but that they would come every year to Trade. So after several other Questions of small consequence, the Ambassador and Noble took their leave.  
The fifth in the Morning the Ambassador and Noble were again sent for to 
Ambassador and Noble again sent, for to the Assembly of the Lipous.  the Lipous, and coming to the Tatans' House were led into an Apartment, out of which after two hours stay they were called before the Assembly; where the Tatan first asked concerning the Ambassador's Health, and afterwards said, That it had often happened that Ambassadors proffered to present the Zoutaizins and Lipous, but it was not customary there to receive them, therefore the Ambassador must not credit those which told him so, and that they had not advised him well: after these and such like Discourses were ended, they departed.  
In the Evening the Mandarin, who had hitherto been chief Steward for the Ambassador's Provisions that were allowed him and his Retinue by the Emperor, came to tell him, That being preferred to a greater Place, he could not wait upon him any longer, but that another would supply his Room: The Ambassador to gratify him for his former care, gave him five els of Stammel.  
The sixth in the Afternoon came four Mandarins to the Ambassador, to tell him that they were expressly sent from the Emperor, to have his Answer to the following Questions, viz. First, from whence the Rose-water came, and 
Several Questions of four Mandarins to the Ambassador.  what it was for? likewise the Unicorns Horns and the Copper Mount, which were amongst the Bengale Copper-works? Moreover, what Birds the Casuaris were? all which the Ambassador answered to the best of his knowledge; which they having set down, went away again.  
The seventh and eighth nothing happened, nor saw they any Strangers.  
The ninth in the Afternoon Genko the Interpreter informed the Ambassador, That he and the Mandarin Guides were that Morning sent for to the Lipous, where they had understood that the Ambassador and all his Retinue should about three days after be invited to the Emperor's first Feast, and perhaps within ten days go away again.  
The Hollanders were much pleased to see the Lipous and other Lords eat so heartily thereof; also observing the manner used by the Tartars at Meals, which was rather like Beasts than rational Creatures: Having spent some time in Eating, the Soldiers taking away the Meat from the Tables, the Netherlanders rising and kneeling, bowed their Heads, with the Tartars, three times towards the Emperor's Court, and so returned to their own Lodgings.  
No sooner was the Ambassador come home, but Genko the Interpreter 
Interpreter Genko's information.  informed him, That he was Commanded to tell the Ambassador, that four days hence, (being the twentieth of ours, and the six and twentieth of their Moon) there would be a second Feast, and two days after, the last, or third: Moreover, that two or three days after that, he should depart, which being observed by the Ambassador in his Council; and also, that it might be designed, that just at their departure, the Emperor's Answer on their Requests might be 
The Ambassador and his Council consult about it.  made known to them; after which time there would be no opportunity to alter any thing that might not agree with their Instructions; therefore they thought fit to entreat, that the Merchandise which would come in those Ships that should fetch the Ambassador, might be sold at their arrival: Whereupon they wrote the following Letter to the Assembly of the Lipous.  
THe Ambassador hopes, that the Lipous have well understood his Letter of Requests, 
The Ambassadors Request to the Lipous.  and hopes for a good Answer from the Emperor: Now his further Desire is, that he may receive the Commands, and Answer of the Emperor, ten days before he goes away, that he may the better (having time to consider) understand his Imperial Majesty's Will and Pleasure, and may faithfully render an account thereof to the General in Batavia; and that the Hollanders may for the future, Obey, and faithfully perform the Emperor's Commands, as well in the Chinkon, as aught else.  
Noble and Putmen went with this Letter to the Lipous Assembly, and were directed to use such persuasive arguments, as they should think fit, to make them understand the Ambassador's Request; to which purpose, the Mandarins of the Guard were desired by Van Hoorn to go for him to the Assembly of the Lipous, and desire of them, that Noble and Putmen might be admitted into their Presence; which they promising to do, related at their return, that the Lipous had told them, that the Ambassador on the twenty sixth of their Moon (which was the sixth of july) when he should be Entertained at the Emperor's second Banquet, might then acquaint them with what he had to Request.  
The fourteenth, nothing happened of Note.  
The fifteenth in the Forenoon, the Lipou Songlauja came with two Mandarins to the Ambassador's Lodging, to ask him what his Requests were about, which he desired to speak with the Council; Whereupon Van Hoorn gave him the Letter written two days before, but he was afraid to take it, until the Chinese Secretary Soukjen had explained it to him: The Ambassador ordering him to read it, which being done, he answered, The Ambassador is come hither with a Letter to the Emperor, therefore his Majesty will not let him go away without another, and as soon as the Emperor had resolved on his Business, he should not fail to have his answer in Writing delivered him with the Emperor's Letter to the General; To which the Ambassador replied, That is all I desire, and therefore asked the Lipous, if he might to Morrow show the Tatan the forementioned Letter, or not? Whereto Songlauja replied, That he might, if he pleased, but it was all one, since he knew the Contents of it; and that he would speak with him further about it to Morrow, at the Emperor's second Feast.  
Mean while, six grand Mandarins more came to the Ambassadors House, at which the Lipou Songlauja taking his leave, advised the Ambassador to entertain the six Laujas, which he performed, by keeping them to Dinner, and delighting their Ears with his Music; after which they departed well satisfied.  
The next Morning early, being the sixteenth, the Lipous Mandarins came to 
Emperor's second Feast.  give notice to the Ambassador, to make himself ready to go to the Emperor's second Feast: Which the Hollanders immediately performed, and were again conducted thither, and entertained after the same manner, as on the twelfth instant, without any alteration, only they did not Kneel before the Tatan: Who by the Interpreter Genko told the Ambassador, that he need not deliver the Letter of Requests which he had brought with him, because he had understood the Contents of the same from the Lipou Songlauja, which made him keep it; and taking his leave, went away, without ask or speaking any thing else, with all his Retinue: Where he was no sooner come, but the Mandarin which in the Morning had fetched him to the Court, came and told the Ambassador, That he and his Retinue must make themselves ready, that they might go to Morrow Morning before Daylight, to the Emperor's Palace, to receive his Imperial Majesty's Presents; which the Ambassador promised to do. This Mandarin said also, That his Excellency should on the thirtieth of their Moon (being the tenth of our july) come to the third Imperial Feast, and three days after that go away, which made the Ambassador long for the Emperor's resolution on his Request.  
The seventeenth in the Morning, two hours before Day, he was fetched with his Retinue to the Court, to receive the Imperial Presents, and conduct them through three Gates into the Emperor's Court, on a Plain, before the fourth Gate, which faces the Throne; where, on june the 23. they had seen the Coreans show Reverence to the Emperor, and their Presents lie on a Table. Here the Netherlanders rested till Daylight; about an hour after they saw some Lipous dressed after a stately manner coming into the Court; and soon after, a Table was brought in, covered with a Piece of Red Cloth, which was set in the same place where the Corean Ambassadors stood; only this stood before the Gate at the Tartars upper Hand; when as that of the Coreans stood on the left. A little while after, some Stuffs and Money was laid upon it, which done, the Ambassador, his Son, Noble, Putmen, and the Secretary, were called and placed just before the middle Gate, which was opposite to the Throne; yet they could not there discern the least glimpse of it; for that the fifth Gate stands so high, that although it be open, yet they can see nothing belonging to the Throne.  
After they had faced the Throne, and upon the Order of a Herald, kneeled thrice, and bowed their Heads nine times; they brought the Ambassador first those Presents that were for the Lord General, which he received kneeling; and afterwards, those which were for himself: This done, Noble received his likewise; next Putmen, than the Secretary, and the rest of the Retinue, every one what was ordered for them: Which finished, the Mandarin Guide, Hiu and Huilauja, the Chinese Interpreters and Soldiers which came with them, received theirs.  
The Presents which they received from the Emperor were as followeth:  
For the Lord General three hundred Guilders of fine Silver, consisting in six 
Presents for the General.  Boats, two Pieces of Chinese Cloth of Gold, two more of the same with Dragons, four Pieces of flowered Silk, with Dragons; two Pieces of Flannel, twelve Pieces of divers Coloured Satin, eight Pieces of Damask▪ Silk, ten Pieces of rich flowered Stuff, ten Pieces of Pelangs, and ten Pieces of Pansjes.  
For the Ambassador an hundred Guilders of fine Silver▪ four Pieces of Pelangs, four Pieces of Pansjes, four raw Pieces of Hokjens, three Pieces of Blue single Satin, six Pieces of single Damask, two Pieces of Cloth of Gold, with Dragons.  
For his Son, one Piece of black Flannel, fifteen Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of Raw Gazen, two Pieces of single Damask Silk.  
For Noble, fifty Guilders of fine Silver, one Piece of Chinese Cloth of Gold, one Piece of Flannel, three of Damask Silk, one Piece of Satin, two of Gazen, two of Pelangs, and two of Pansjes.  
For Putmen and Ʋander Does, which had both alike, were forty Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of Damask Silk, one of Flannel, one of Satin, one of Pelangs, one of Pansjes, one of single sleight Damask, and one Piece of White Goes.  
The Interpreters, Maurice jansz Vish, and Dirk de Hase, had each two Pieces of Black Satin, two of White Goes, two of Pansjes, two of single sleight Damask.  
For every one of the Retinue, fifteen Guilders of fine Silver, two Pieces of raw Gazen, and two of single Damask.  
For the Guide Mandarin Hiu Lauja, one Horse without a Saddle.  
For the Guide Mandarin Hanlauja, and the two Chinese Interpreters, one Silk Damask Coat, Edged about with Gold, which they were immediately to put on, and for each of the Soldiers that came with the Ambassador, one sleight Silk Damask Coat.  
After every one had received what was laid out for them, the Ambassador was with his Retinue led back to the place where he Kneeled before, and did it again, as a sign of thankfulness; after which he was by the Mandarin Song-lauja, and some other Mandarins conducted out of the Court; whereat, the Ambassador asked of the Lipou Song-lauja, when the Emperor's Letter to the Lord General, and his answer on their Requests would be delivered? To which he replied, All in good time, yet it should be three or four days before his departure: Whereupon, the Netherlanders returned again to their Lodgings.  
In the Afternoon, a young Viceroy, not above twenty years old, and Nephew to the present Emperor, came to visit the Ambassador, and to hear his Music; which having delighted his Ears, and tasted two or three Glasses of Sack, he took his leave, seeming very well satisfied.  
The nineteenth in the afternoon, another grand Lord, who had the Command over the Nobility at the Court, came to the same purpose, which was accordingly granted him, and entertained with a Banquet; which ended, he departed.  
The fourth instant, the Tatan told the Ambassador and Noble expressly, that none there might receive any Presents, and those who told him otherwise did very ill: Wherefore the Ambassador seeing them to be in earnest, sent a Letter to the Lipous and Zoutaisins, to desire, that those Goods which he had brought with him to give away, since they would not accept of them, he might have leave to sell them; but he could get no answer upon it.  
The twentieth, the Ambassador was fetched to the third Feast of the Emperor, and again, as before, conducted to the third Tatans' Court, where he was entertained after the same manner, as on the sixteenth.  
The Ambassador, after all this trouble and Expense, both of time and otherwise, gained no more, but to be at last dismissed, with a Sealed Letter from the Emperor, to the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia.  
So on the fifth of August, he set forth from the Imperial City Peking, to measure back his former tedious Journey; and first reached a Temple about a League from the Town of Tonsjouw, and two from Peking, where they lay all that Night.  
AS to what concerns the Metropolis Peking, it shall be with its whole Province at large described in our following Discourse of the Empire of China or Taising.  
The great Citizens, and other Prime Court-Ladies, are here, as also through all China, seldom seen to walk in the Streets, but are carried in close Sedans, or Palakyns, accompanied by a great Train of Waiting-Women, and other Servants.  
In the Houses, their Lodgings are apart from the Men, where likewise they have Wildernesses, Groves, and pleasant Gardens, where they delight themselves in Planting curious Flowers, and keeping all manner of Singing-Birds.  
The sixth they proceeded on their Journey from Tongsjouw, and at Noon came to the Vessels lying at the City of Siensingway, where the same Boats received them that brought them thither.  
The seventh, leaving Siensingway, and passing by many Hamlets and Villages, they Anchored before some Houses, about a League from Giochioe.  
The ninth about daybreak, Weighing again, they arrived in the Forenoon at the forementioned City, from whence, after they had gotten fresh Toers, they set Sail at Noon, and dropped Anchor that Night before the Village of janzin.  
The eleventh, they came to the City of Siensingway about Noon, where they waited for more Toers, because the Current was against them, and the stronger, by reason of the Rain lately fallen.  
The next Morning, Putmen went to the Sienkin of that place, to proffer him the Presents which were laid out for him on the tenth of june, in their Journey up to Peking, which he had then refused, and put off the accepting of, till their return: From whence he sent the following Letter, with the Goods.  
THe Ambassador is safely arrived here: The Civilities which he hath received of your Lordship, shall not be forgotten: The Lipous have Commanded the Ambassador to make what speed he could possible in this his journey for Fokien and Batavia, there to deliver the Emperor's Letter; therefore the Emperor desires Talauja, that he would give speedy order, and dispatch.  
Putmen at his return informed, That the Talauja had accepted of the five els of Stammel▪ and two Flasks of Rose-Water, but sent the rest back again; and as to what concerned their speedy departure, he took no notice of, because it did not concern him, he having only the Command over the Soldiers.  
Soon after, the Sionkins' Interpreter came to tell the Ambassador, That his Master, in requital for the Presents, had sent him two Hogs, two Sheep, one Pikol of Rice, and some Fruit, with Request, That his Excellency would please to accept of them: Whereupon the Ambassador replied, That he would receive it, on condition, his Highness would also take the rest of the Presents; which the Interpreter promised to tell him, and at his return, acquaint the Ambassador with his answer. Not long after, coming back, he said, That Talauja was double satisfied with those Presents which he had already received; yet however, to please his Excellency, he would accept of a Piece of Green Perpetuana, if they had it, which he gave immediate Order to lay out, but was forgotten by the Interpreter.  
Also the Interpreter was Presented by the Ambassador, with two Pieces of Linen, and two Flasks of Rose-Water, because he had asked to buy them.  
The Netherlanders Weighing Anchor, went with their Vessels to the South side of the City, that they might proceed on their Journey the next Morning.  
The Toya also sent them some Presents thither, viz. Sheep, Apples, Pears, and the like, for which he returned him the Piece of Perpetuana, which Sionkins Interpreter had left behind him; But his Servants soon after brought it back again, saying, that their Master judged it too much, but if the Ambassador had any Sword-blades, Pistols, or such like things, he would willingly accept of them; Whereupon, the Ambassador sent him by the Interpreter Maurice, a Carbine, a Sword, and a handsome Knife, which he received with many Thanks.  
After Noon, having been nobly entertained in one of the Sionkin's Barks, they Weighed from the Suburb, and the next Morning being the fourth, set Sail from the City of Tiensingway, and in the Evening Anchored at Sangjue.  
The following day, in the Afternoon, they arrived at the City of Chinchay, where having stayed about an hour and half, they set Sail again, and at Night dropped Anchor before Sincoacheen.  
The seventeenth they proceeded on their Journey, and in the Evening arrived at Chiuche.  
The eighteenth at Noon, they passed by the City of Siangsjouw, without putting in, but in the Evening Anchored at the Village Talodueen.  
The nineteenth they rested at Poethouw.  
The twentieth in the Afternoon, they passed by Tunquancheen, and stayed all Night near Lienulhoe, where the Province of Peking, and that of Xantung is separated.  
The one and twentieth, they Sailed six Leagues in the Province of Xantung, and dropped Anchor at a Village called Lonkuntang; and next day, after Noon, stayed for fresh Toers in Tuatchiouw, which having gotten, they set forward, and on the three and twentieth arrived at Chinjeen.  
The twenty fifth, passing by Uchincheen, they dropped Anchor that Night at Oepoeso.  
The six and twentieth, going on again, about Daylight they came in the Evening to Linsing, being got out of the River Guei, in the Royal Channel jun; and that Evening passed through the first Sluice, as in the Morning they did the second, made in Linsing, and dropped Anchor before the Custom-house, where a Chain was put cross the Channel, that no Vessels might pass without paying.  
The Governor of this place came in the forenoon to visit the Netherlanders in their Vessel, and bid them Welcome; who, after having been well entertained, took his leave.  
After his departure, sending the Ambassador some Presents, Putmen was ordered to carry him a Pair of Pistols, a Sword Blade, a Piece of Perpetuana, and a Piece of Say in return.  
The forementioned Lord received many Letters in Putmans' presence, advising him, that the Emperor had Reigned three days, and that his own Chiap or Seal was abroad.  
The Guide Mandarins' informed the Netherlanders, that all the Governors, as well Povis, Conbons, Poutsensies or Farmers, which were up and down in the Provinces were sent for, and that Tartars were to be put in their places.  
In the Afternoon, the Governors of this place came to invite the Netherlanders to a Banquet, which they would willingly have refused; but that they being very importunate with them, were forced to grant their Request; so that the Ambassador told them, that so soon as the Chain was unlocked, and his Vessels passed through, he would come and wait upon them: To which they replied, That they would give immediate Order for it, as accordingly was done, and the Vessels permitted to pass.  
Against the Evening, Messengers came to fetch the Ambassador to the Governors: But he excusing himself, said, That he could not go out of his Bark in the Night; wherefore the Governors sent him several Dishes with prepared Meats to his Vessel, which was distributed amongst the Bargemen. Mean while the chief Commander of this place sent the Ambassador some Silk Stuffs, which he returned again.  
The twenty ninth in the Morning, they set out from the City of Linsing. In the Evening they Anchored at Linancotsue, which leaving on the thirtieth, they passed by Tungsjaufoe, and lay that Night before Gihautchie, having passed through five Water-gates that day.  
The one and thirtieth, Weighing Anchor, they came to Xansui; and in the Evening arrived at Gansjan, through six Sluices, which they all found open to their great advantage.  
The first of September they left the Gansjan, and shooting that day four Water-gates, 
September.  they dropped Anchor in the Evening at a Village called Kaygoeva.  
The next Morning, being the second, setting Sail again, they passed that Forenoon by Namwang, and a Pagode thereto belonging, called Longwangmiao, where the River unites with this Channel; so that they had the Tide with them, by which means they reached Sinning that Night, having passed through three Sluices, when they Anchored before the fourth and last in the Western Suburb of the City Sinning, expecting when it should be opened, that they might get through that also, which being not before the Afternoon, they went only a Canon shot from thence, and lay still for that Night.  
In the Morning, the Toya of the City coming to Visit and Welcome the Ambassador, Presented him with some fresh Provisions, which he accepting, sent Putmen after him with five els of Stammel, in Requital of his Favour.  
The fourth in the Morning, leaving Sinning, and having a fair Gale of Wind, they got to a Village called Naogang that afternoon, where they waited for fresh Toers, having that day shot seven Sluices or Floodgates.  
The fifth, setting Sail again, they arrived in the Evening at jaxinho, passing through seven Water-gates that day.  
The next day they lay still, wanting Toers.  
The seventh in the Morning, leaving jaxinho, they Anchored towards Evening at the Village Miliancho, where the Province of Xantung is separated from that of Nanking.  
The eighth they entered the Province of Nanking, and lay the next Night before Kiakia; which leaving on the ninth, they arrived that Morning with a fair Wind at Maulovao, three Leagues and three quarters from Kiakia, where they changed their Toers, which came not till the Evening, because they were fetched from Singsing a League and a half distant from thence.  
The tenth in the Afternoon, setting Sail again, they arrived in the Evening before the Mouth of the Lake Usantjouw, into which the Yellow River disembogues.  
The Bank in this place being broken, they had made a Dam in the River Geu, which takes its Original in a Village a League and a half from thence; here the Ambassador dropped Anchor, to stay for some of his Barks to come up with him, which were a good way behind. Towards Night they arrived at a little Village, opposite to the City Taujenjeen, which leaving again in the Morning, they reached the Village Namemiao at Noon, and withal got out of the Yellow River, which has so swift a Current as creates much danger.  
The thirteenth, putting forward again, they came to the great Village Sinkianpoe at Noon, where the Conbon of Hoksieu, according to the Information of the Guide Mandarins, arrived the same day, being on his own Request rid of his Office to come thither.  
The Ambassador writing a Complimental Letter to him, he sent to invite his Excellency to come to him; Whereupon, he immediately going thither, was kindly received and entertained by his Highness; who told the Ambassador, that it was a great Honour, that the Netherlanders had been with and seen the Emperor, and that he had left some Presents in his Factor's hands in Hoksieu for to be delivered to the Ambassador, for the Lord General and himself, which the Ambassador would find there at his coming: The Conbon also commended himself for the good inclination which he had boar to the Hollanders in the time of his Governorship: To which the Ambassador answered, That he was very sensible of it, and that they should ever be obliged to his Highness for it. Lastly, The Conbon said, that he was desirous to make one small Present more to the Ambassador, being only four Hogs, some Geese, and other Poultry, which he desired his Excellency would be pleased to accept; whereon the Ambassador promised he would, provided his Highness would again receive the like Present from him: Which last the Interpreters durst not tell the Conbon, because several other Lords stood about him, so that there was no mention made of it.  
So after a handsome Entertainment, the Ambassador took his leave.  
The fourteenth in the Morning, the Ambassador in Requital of his Friendly Reception the day before, sent a Letter to the Conbon, and judged it convenient, since he might do much by his Recommendation in Peking, to the benefit of the Company, to present him with ten els of Stammel, ten of black Cloth, ten of Blue, one Piece of Say, one of Crown-Serge, four Pieces of Linen, two of Guinny Linen, one fine Carpet, one String of Blood Coral, and two pair of Spectacles; and the Ambassador to oblige his Interpreter, and that he might put his Master in mind of the Hollanders, gave him five els of Stammel, one Sword-blade, and a pair of Spectacles.  
This done, leaving the great Village Sinkianpoe, they passed by the Conbon's Barks, which consisted of fifty six great and small.  
In the Afternoon they came to the North-Suburb of Haoigan, where they lay still before a Bridge, till the Townsmen had furnished them with Provisions.  
The sixteenth, against Noon, the Ambassador was presented with some Pieces of Stuffs, by the Toya of that place, who was Brother to the new General at Hoksieu; which the Ambassador judged not convenient to accept, but sent them back again, and with them five els of Stammel, partly, because he might assist the Hollanders, and do much for them by writing a Letter in their behalf to his Brother; and secondly, that they might be speedily dispatched from thence; which prevailed so much, that the Netherlanders left the City Haòigan in the afternoon, and arrived in the Evening at Paoing. The next Morning, going from thence again, at Noon they met with a Factor belonging to the General, called Tziang Povi Thesia, who according to his Relation, came from Hoksieu the fifth of August, and was going for Peking; who informed the Ambassador, that three Ships were arrived from Batavia at Sothia, and that four more were gone to Tamfui and Quelang: Moreover, that all things were well with the Hollanders in Hoksieu, only none might go to the new arrived Ships, nor any come ashore out of them, neither was any Provision permitted to be sent to them.  
The Viceroy Singlamong and General were coming to Peking, being sent for, because they let the Netherlands Ships go away, and that the new General which was to Depose his Master met him near Lancquy: The Ambassador ask him if he had brought any Letters from Harthouwer, he answered, No: but that fourteen days before he came from thence, two Letters were writ to the Ambassador by Harthouwer, and sent with that which the General dispatched to Peking, about the arrival of the foremention'd Ships: After his departure, the Netherlanders putting forward, they arrived in the Evening at the City of Kayoven, where they stayed all Night.  
The next Morning, being the eighteenth, they left the City, and with Sailing and Toing, reached the City of janchefoe about Noon, where they lay before a Custom-house.  
The following day, the Ambassador judged it convenient to procure a speedy dispatch, by Presenting the Toya of that place with five els of Stammel, one Piece of Perpetuana, two Adathys, and a Book Looking-glass; with these he sent a Complementing Letter by Putmen, yet he accepted of nothing but the two Adathys, and the Looking-glasses; in return of which, he sent one Hog, one Pikol of Meal and Rice, and a parcel of Fruit; of which the Ambassador accepted only the Fruit, and sent back the rest; yet the civility of their offer availed so much, that the Hollanders were permitted to pass by the Custom-house, and in the Afternoon Sailing by the City janchefoe, arrived at Quasui.  
A Captain who had the Command over a thousand Men in this City, and had Presented the Ambassador with some Provision, came to bid him Welcome; for which Civility he received five els of Stammel.  
The one and twentieth, in the Morning, leaving the City of Sinksianfoe, they Sailed along the outside of it, where they saw abundance of Jonks and Cojas, (as at janchufoe) which were newly repaired; of which, the Netherlanders ask the reason, received answer, that it was customary for all Towns to repair their Vessels once in three years.  
In the Evening they arrived at Tayanchcheen, where casting Anchor for that Night, they Weighed again the next Morning, being the two and twentieth: Upon the way, the Ambassador was informed by some Bargemen that came from Suchu, that the Viceroy Singlamong was arrived there with his Train to go from thence up to Peking.  
In the Afternoon they reached the City of Yanghsu, and the next day Anchored at the City of Uchinopeen, and on the twenty fourth at Xuciquan, a Village two Leagues from Suchu, before a Custom-house, where they lay all Night.  
The next Morning passing the Boome, they arrived in the Afternoon at the City of Suchu, where two Blacks belonging to the Viceroy Singlamong's two Sons, came aboard the Ambassador, to tell him, that their Masters were a Month since gone by Land to Peking, and that they followed with their Goods; adding moreover, that Singlamong was yet in Hoksieu, and was to remain there, so that the Barge-mens' relation proved false. In the Afternoon about three a Clock, they arrived at the West-gate of the City of Suchu.  
Here the Hollanders were met by two Conjurers, one a Man, and the other a Woman, both in handsome Apparel, of which there are great numbers in all parts of China, that for a small reward, proffer their Service to foretell all future Events, and procure a good Wind; they also came to the Netherlanders, to put their Art in practice, to hasten or shorten their Journey; but they not approving of such Magical assistance, sent them away with a small Gift.  
This Conjuring is at large described in the following Description of the Empire of China.  
The Governor of this place came to visit the Ambassador, and Present him and the chiefest of his Retinue, as Noble and Putmen, with a well-tasted Liquor, for which he received some els of Stammel.  
Divers sorts of Liquors made of Rice, are drank by the Chinese.  
In the fifth▪ Territory, Fuencheufu, in the Province of Xensi, is a very pleasant Drink, and not inferior to either French or Rhenish Wine, being made of Rice and Kid's flesh, which last being bruised, is laid to soak in the Juice of the Rice. This Liquor is highly esteemed by the Chinese, being strong of operation, and of a sweet and pleasing taste to the Palate.  
In the fifth County Hinhoa, of the Province of Chekiang, they boil the best Liquor in all China, of Rice and Water.  
The six and twentieth in the Morning, the Netherlanders left the great City Suchu with a fair Wind, and came that Evening to the South Suburb of Ukiajeen, which City is neatly built, and though not very big, yet it is surrounded with strong▪ Walls. The Inhabitants thereof maintain themselves with Merchandizing and Husbandry.  
In the Morning setting Sail from thence, and having got about three Leagues and a half farther, they were forced, the Evening coming suddenly upon them, to make to their Harbour.  
The twenty eighth in the Morning, they set Sail again from thence, and in the Afternoon passed by Kiangfoe, where they went out of the Province of Nanking, into that of Chekiang, and in the Evening arrived at a Village called Sinning.  
The twenty ninth, Weighing again, they had in sight the City of Ukiajeen, which having passed, in the Evening they rested at Tangheg.  
The thirtieth they came to the North-Suburb of Hanksieu, before a Custom-house, where the Channel being shut up by a Gate under a Bridge, the Ambassador sent to desire that it might be opened, and the Barks suffered to go through; but the Watchmen answered, That they must first have order from the Poutsjensy, or the Emperor's Farmer; so that the Secretary Ʋander Does was sent to the Governor and Conbon at Hanksieu with a Letter, in which the Ambassador desired to be speedily dispatched, and if their Highnesses pleased, he would come to Compliment them. Moreover, the Secretary was Commanded to ask them, If their Highnesses would permit the Ambassador to come and speak with them, and bring those Presents, of which their Highnesses had received the Inventory at their Journey up to Peking.  
In the Morning, the first of October, the Gate being opened, the Ambassador went through with his whole Retinue: Soon after, the Secretary coming aboard again, related, That he had been at the Generals the last Night, but could not be admitted to Audience. To the Letter which he sent him by his Clerk, he had returned answer, That he would send a Mandarin early the next Morning, to let the Ambassador through the Gate, and withal, conduct him to his House; but it being too late for the Secretary to go to the Conbon that Night, he went thither the next Morning, to deliver his Highness the Ambassador's Letter, and met him as he was coming out of his Courtgate, (to Compliment a great Lord, which the day before came thither from Hoksieu) and received in answer, that his Highness humbly thanked the Ambassador for his Civility, and that he would expect him.  
Mean while, the Vessels went so far into the Suburb, that they came to Anchor against a Bank.  
The second, the Toya of that place came to Welcome the Ambassador in his Vessel.  
The third, nothing happened of remark.  
The fourth, all the Goods were taken out of these, and put into six other Barks, lying on the other side of the Bank; with which Putmen and Ʋander Does went the next Morning to the other side of the City, there to Reimbarque; the Ambassador, Noble, and some of the Retinue going before by Land, to give order for Shipping of the Goods.  
On the seventh in the Morning, leaving the South-Suburb of Hanksieu, they arrived in the Afternoon at Foejenjeen; the ninth at Nienchefoe; and the tenth at Lanqui, where the great Barks were changed for small; because here the River began to be very shallow.  
The Governor of this Village invited them to Dinner, which in regard they could not put off, they went thither, and were very kindly entertained, with various Meats, Music, and Drolls, towards Evening taking leave.  
On the twelfth in the Morning, they left Lanqui; and on the thirteenth came to the City of Longuen; as on the fourteenth, to Kietsieu.  
The sixteenth in the Evening, the Ambassador came with his Vessel to Sinhoe; but the rest stayed behind, not able to follow for the shallowness of the Water, and strong contrary Tide; yet on the seventeenth in the Morning, they arrived there in safety.  
The Ambassador and his Retinue were also lodged in the same House, wherein they lay at their Journey going up.  
Here all things were prepared to travel over the Mountains, when the Ambassador finding that there wanted three hundred and fifty Coelies to carry the Goods and People, he asked the Mandarin Guides how many Coelies were allowed by the Emperor's Order, for the carrying of the Goods, and prepared by the Pimpous? To which they replied, an hundred and eighty nine; and because one of the General of Hanksieu's People had told the Ambassador at Fojenjeen, that he should find so many Porter's ready to carry the Goods over the Mountains, he sent the Secretary on the eighteenth in the Morning to Tjangtjen, a League and a half from thence, to inquire of the Mandarin, who had the Command of that Village, and there Resident, what Orders he had from the General of Hanksieu? Whereupon he declared, That he had no other Order concerning any Coelies, than what he had from the Pimpous; so that the Ambassador gave immediate Order for the hiring of an hundred and fifty Coelies, with which he went on the next day; and on the two and twentieth came to Poutchinfoe in the Province of Fokieu; and on the three and twentieth, Noble, Putmen, and Ʋander Does, returned Thanks to the Almighty, for helping them safe over the steep Mountains.  
The twenty fifth, having Shipped their Goods, and Embarked themselves, they set Sail with the Tide, from the City of Poutchinfoe, and rested before a Watch-House at the Village Siphea.  
The twenty sixth, going forward, they came, having Sailed two Leagues, to a Rocky place, where the River was very shallow; by the strong Current, one of the Ambassadors and one of the Mandarin Hiulavja's Barks were beaten against a Rock, whereby they grew very Leaky. This Night they also lay still before a Village, wherein was also a Watch-house.  
The twenty eighth, they dropped Anchor again before another Watch-house, and on the twenty ninth arrived at the City of Kienningfoe, where staying till the next day, they set Sail again on the thirtieth, and arrived on the last at jenpingfoe, which since their departure from thence in March, was above a third part consumed by fire.  
The first of November, the Ambassador and his Retinue proceeding on their 
November.  Journey, were unexpectedly in the Afternoon about twenty Lys from a Village called Sukauw, met by the Merchant David Harthouwer, and some other from Hoksieu, informing him of the condition of their Affairs. Towards Evening they came to Sukauw, where they lay all Night▪  
On the second before Daylight, going from thence, they came in the Afternoon to Lamthay, the Suburb of Hoksieu, after a Journey of nine Months, and twelve days.  
Going all together to their old Inn, they found there the Toucy Liulauja, who told and showed them a written Order from the General, That all those Goods which they had brought with them must be searched: Whereupon the Ambassador answered, That this manner seemed very strange to him, and that he had never heard of any that searched an Ambassadors Goods; nay, that it was not done in Peking, nor any place else in all their Journey: But if the General would have it so, he might follow his Order, and begin with the Ambassador's Chest first.  
This Answer somewhat changed his Intentions, granting moreover, That the Ambassador's, and other Persons of Quality's Chests, should not be searched, but those of the Retinue, and in which the Presents were, could not pass without; whereupon, they being all brought in and opened, all things that were in them were set down; in which Toucy Liulauja spent all the Afternoon.  
The fourth in the Morning, one Lapora and the Mandarin of the Inn came to tell the Ambassador, That the Viceroy Singlamong had sent for his Excellency to the Court, to bid him Welcome; whereupon they all went thither, and were kindly received by his Highness. After many Compliments passed on both sides, the Viceroy asked the Ambassador, If he had not told them the truth of all their Adventures before they went to Peking? They would not believe him then, but now having been in Peking, themselves might judge that he was a Man of Truth: To which the Ambassador answered, That his Majesty's real Intentions had sufficiently appeared, and the Lord Maetzuiker in Batavia, would without doubt be thankful to him for his Favours: They were also sensible, that the King's Envoy in Peking had been a great instrument, and helped much in their receiving of great Honours from the Emperor, Taisins, Kings, Lipous, and other grand Lords: Moreover, he hoped that from this Embassy there would follow more Friendship, to the profit of both Nations, than had hitherto been: Whereupon Singlamong replied, That those were only outward businesses, but he had done so much for the Hollanders, that it cost him two thousand Tail, and the General his Place. To which the Ambassador answered, As to what concerned himself, he would do all that lay in his power to serve the Viceroy, but as for the two thousand Tail or the General, he knew nothing of it; but he was heartily sorry that no better News was come from above. The Viceroy replied, That he had only told it cursorily to the Ambassador, and that they should henceforth speak no more of it. Soon after the Tables being furnished with Meat, and the Ambassador having eaten a little took his leave, the Viceroy advising him to go and visit the General. Coming into the Viceroy's base Court, a Mandarin that was to conduct him to the General told him, that if his Highness were not at leisure to speak with him, that then he might return to his Lodgings; so that the Ambassador staying in the Viceroy's Court, sent the Secretary Ʋander Does, with the Interpreter de Hase, to inquire if the General were at leisure to grant the Ambassador Audience: Not long after returning, he said that the General had sent Answer, That it was not customary to make an Address to him the same day that they had been at the Viceroy's, therefore his Excellency would do well to come the next Morning, and then he would grant him a Hearing. Whereupon the Netherlanders going to their Lodging, found the Mandarin Liulauja with express Order from the General, That the rest of the Chests that were not searched must be opened, which the Ambassador suffered to be done without any contradiction.  
At Night it was judged convenient for divers reasons, that their intended Visit to the General the following Day, should only be Complimental, without speaking a word of any Business; but to tell him, that what the Ambassador had to impart to his Highness should hereafter be done in Writing.  
The fifth in the Morning they went to the General, who after some stay permitted them to come into his Presence; where the Ambassador was placed on his left Hand (but the upper among the Tartars) on a Stool a little distance from his, and Noble, Harthouwer, and others on his right Hand, on Stools and Benches. Being thus seated, the Ambassador (the General being silent) said, That he was very joyful to see Talauja in good health, and that he was permitted into his Presence. To which he replied, That it was but his Duty to grant Audience to all Strangers. Then the Ambassador proceeding said, That the Embassy was now finished, and that he had the Emperor's and Lipous Letters by him, which being Sealed must be delivered to the Lord Maetzuiker; so that now, since Talavja's Word was as much there as the Emperor's, they would seek in all things possible to obey him. To which the General making no Reply, after a little silence, asked for the Ambassador's Son: to whom the Interpreter said, That if the Ambassador had any thing to request of his Highness, he should acquaint him with it now. Whereupon he desired that the Merchants might fetch in their Debts, and balance their Accounts; and that the rest of the Goods of the last Year, and those which they had brought back with them from Peking, might be sold, that he might prepare himself for his Return to Batavia. To which the General said, He knew very well that the Debts must be paid; but he had received a Letter from the Emperor, in which the Hollanders were forbid to sell their Goods. Whereupon the Ambassador replied, That in Peking it was meant the new-come Goods, but his Desire was only that the last years Trade which was granted by the Emperor, might be finished. Moreover, that they might lay out the Silver which they had brought from Peking, that by that means it might remain in the Country, which else would be carried away. The General answered again, That he must observe the Emperor's Orders, as the Ambassador the Lord Maetzuikers, and that they might not sell prohibited Goods; not but that he judged it better for the Silver to stay in the Land, than to be carried out from thence. Lastly, the Ambassador desired that he might only send some Provisions to the Ships; which the General granted, giving him a Note of them. Then the Ambassador saying he durst not detain Talauja any longer, desired to take his leave: The General replied, That he was glad to hear such civil Expressions from him; and so they parted.  
The Ambassador coming to his Lodgings, judged it convenient, since he was permitted to send some Provisions to the Ships, to take hold of the opportunity, and to send the Hilversan Flyboat with all the Papers and Answers to Batavia, with a Letter to advise the Council there of their success. Likewise, that he might oblige the Conbon and General to be assisting in their Business, he thought good to present the General with half a Piece of Purple Cloth, one String of Blood Coral, six Pieces of Linen, two of Sesse, two of Amber, two of Cloth-Serge, one Gun with a Stock of Palm-Wood, two Swords, a pair of Pistols, one Sword-Blade, ten Flasks of Rose-Water, and one Piece of black Cloth. To the Conbon they intended one Piece of red Cloth, six Pieces of Linen, two of Sesse, two of great Amber, two of Cloth-Serge, one String of Blood Coral, one Gun, two Swords, one Piece of Perpetuana, ten Flasks of Rose-Water.  
The same day Noble, according to their Resolution, went to the Factor Lapora, to inquire if any Silks could be bought for Silver or Merchandise; but Lapora telling him the difficulty of it, they attempted no farther.  
The sixth in the Morning the Ambassador and the chiefest of his Retinue went to the Conbon's Court to Compliment his Highness; before whom being brought, having waited a considerable time, several Compliments passed as at the Generals, viz. That the Ambassador was glad to see Talauja in health, and that he had the favour to appear in his Presence; adding, That the Hollanders had received many Civilities from the late Conbon, and hoped that they should also participate of his Highness' Favours. Whereupon the Conbon asked if the Ambassador enjoyed his Health in his Journey to and from Peking? whereto he answered Yes; and that he had received great Honour there, and was come away in Friendship, desiring nothing more, than to leave Hoksieu also in Love and Amity, for which he desired his Highness' assistance. The Conbon replying said, That the Ambassador had brought the Chinkon to Peking, wherein the Emperor had taken great pleasure, why then should not he be kind to him? he did not meet him by the Way, therefore he would now send him some Provisions for a Present. Soon after the Conbon asked the Ambassador when he intended to go from thence? To which he answered, When the General and Conbon pleased; and that he never doubted but the Goods of last Year might have been sold with freedom, and they might also lay out their Silver for Commodities; but since he understood that it could not be permitted, he therefore desired to avoid all trouble, that he might be gone so soon as it was possible, and would rather suffer damage, than do contrary to the Emperor's Order. Hereupon the Conbon said, that he was not well informed therein; and withal asked the Ambassador if he would immediately be gone, or stay a little longer? To which the Ambassador replied, That so soon as the Merchants had received their Debts, and all things balanced, than he would be gone, the sooner the better. After which no other Discourse passing, the Netherlanders took their leave.  
Mean while Putmen went to the General's Court with an Inventory of the Presents which the Ambassador had designed for him the Day before, to show it to his Highness, but was forced to return without Audience, being ordered to come again the following Day: wherefore the Ambassador sent Noble and Putmen again on the seventh, and also to proffer the Conbon his Presents, but they had as ill success as Putmen the Day before, for they could not be permitted to Audience.  
After the Interpreter had taken the Inventory of the General's Presents from them, and showed it to his Highness, he brought Answer, That the General would accept no Presents.  
Towards the Evening the Interpreter Kako came to the Lodge, with Commands to search the Blyswiik Frigate.  
The eighth in the Morning the Viceroy Singlamong's Interpreter, and his prime Factor called jongsavija, came to bring the following Presents: First, for the Lord Maetzuiker sixteen Pieces of Satin, twenty of Sarsnet, four Brokkadoes, six hundred and ten Pieces of Porcelain, one Picol of Tee.  
For the Ambassador, eight Pieces of Satin, two Brokkadoes, ten Pieces of Sarsnet, a hundred Pieces of Porcelain, and one Picol of Tee.  
For Harthouwer, six Pieces of Sarsnet, two Brokkadoes, eight Pieces of Satin, half a Picol of Tee, and a hundred Tee Cups.  
Moreover, they said that the Viceroy at that time had no such fine Goods by him as he could have wished for, to have presented the Lord Maetzuiker and the Ambassador withal; desiring that his Excellency would not refuse these Trifles; adding also, That their Lord was very sorry the Hollanders had no better success in their Business at the Court of Peking, and that he declared it was not his fault; but on the contrary, had used his utmost endeavour to assist them for the obtaining of their Desires: but since it so fell out that the Emperor would not grant them, they must have patience (because nothing could be done against the Emperor's Order) and hope for a better Event. To which the Ambassador answered, That he humbly thanked the Viceroy, and since he could not refuse his Kindness, he would accept of the Stuffs: but as to their Business he knew nothing of it, because the Emperor's and Lipous Letters were delivered to him Sealed, and he commanded in that manner to deliver them at Batavia; and that the Orders therein mentioned (whatever they were) should be strictly observed. Furthermore the Ambassador said, That he desired nothing else now, but that he might sell the Commodities which were remaining of the last Year, and afterwards go away, without being willing to request the disposal of those Commodities which were come since, because he would not stay for an Answer from the Emperor; or that they might not write to him about it. To which they replied, That they would acquaint the Viceroy with it; yet it was a Business which did not concern him, but the General and Conbon, therefore the Ambassador must request it of them. The Ambassador replying said, That there would immediately be a Letter ready for that purpose, to be carried to the General and Conbon. Some Compliments passing on both sides, and the Ambassador giving them a Gratuity, they returned.  
Soon after the Ambassador sent Putmen with the following Letter to the General, which was to this effect:  
THe Ambassador hath understood by a Letter from your Highness, that three Holland Ships are arrived at Tenhay to fetch the Ambassador; and also that a Ship at her going by to Japan put in there for Letters from him. Talauja hath commanded that the Ambassador should send down thither to command the going away of the three Ships. The Ambassador hath acquainted the Lipous in Peking, that three Ships were to come from Batavia to fetch him. The Ambassador knew not but that the Trade granted the last Year by the Emperor might be finished; wherefore he desires that he may dispose of the rest of those Goods (of which he here sends an Inventory) in such manner as was done in Peking; and that then the Ambassador would immediately go away with all his Ships and Men. The Ambassador would be very sorry if any more trouble should happen. And to manifest that the Ambassador will not only obey and serve Talauja in words, but in deeds, he humbly desires, that if the remaining Goods may not be sold, that he may obtain leave of your Highness to go away with all his Retinue and Goods with the first opportunity, and that in few days after no more Ships should be seen.  
Putmans' returning said, That he not only could not be admitted to Audience, but that the General would not take the Letter.  
The ninth in the Morning the Ambassador sent a Letter by the Factor Lapora to the Viceroy Singlamong, being to return him thanks for the Presents received the Day before, which was to this effect:  
THat the Ambassador hath found sufficiently since his Return to Hoksieu, his Highness' good Inclinations. That the Honour and Friendship which the Ambassador received in Peking he believes did proceed from the Viceroy's Recommendation. The Ambassador declares, that he hath endeavoured in this Chinkon as much as possible he could, to preserve the Honour of the Realm of Holland, the General in Batavia, and also his own Reputation. The Ambassador is exceedingly rejoiced, that the Viceroy Singlamong's Heart is really inclined to him, and therefore esteems his Presents, being from so great a King, very much. That the King in Batavia hath been pleased to present the General is his Highness' Civility. The Ambassador is very well satisfied, and exceeding thankful for them; but he finds that this satisfaction is mixed with a great desire to know how and after what manner he shall manifest his thanks; therefore wishes that he may be informed either by his Highness, or some Person else, if the Ambassador during his stay there, or in Batavia, or wherever it might be, could do the King any acceptable Service, which if it be in the Ambassador's power, he will account it a great happiness, that he may manifest that he esteems more to do well, than to write or speak well.  
The thirteenth in the Morning the Secretary Ʋander Does, Nicholas Berkman, and the Interpreter Maurice, went with a Chinese Vessel down to netherlands Haven and Tenhay, that according to their Resolution the Night before they might dispatch the Helverzum Flyboat, and the Pimpel Pinks, and likewise take a view of the Ships.  
After their departure the Toucy came to tell the Ambassador, That the General and Conbon would buy all the rest of the Goods, and that he should write down the lowest Prices of them on a piece of Paper, and that than their Factors should come to receive and pay for them with ready Money. The Ambassador hereupon showed him to the Merchants, who were busy making an invoice of them, which when done was given to him.  
The fourteenth and fifteenth nothing happened of note.  
The sixteenth a Servant sent from the Toucy brought a written Order (as he said) from the General, that the Storehouses must be searched, because some Counterband Goods were come with the Embassy, and the like▪ Whereupon the Ambassador immediately sent the Merchant Harthouwer and Interpreter de Hase to the Toucy, with Commands to tell him,  

1. That the Toucy would be pleased to pay that which he owed to the Company, being seven hundred Tail.  
2. That the Toucy knew very well, that the Debt which was owing from the late Talauja, or General, and others, was above four thousand Tail; also that he should seek to procure the payment thereof, and bring the Silver to the Lodge.  
3. That the Ambassador would henceforth suffer no more Searching, except by express Order from the General.  
4. That if he had searched the Ambassador's Chest by the General's Order, it was well; but if not, the Ambassador had suffered disgrace by it, because he had not been so served in Peking, nor any other Place in China.   
At his Return Harthouwer related, That the Toucy excused himself to the Ambassador, alleging that it was not his fault; the last written Order was not sent to him, but to the Interpreter, to see for some Bundles of Gazen, which were not set down by his People: Moreover, that he received nothing but civility from the Ambassador; and as for the Searching, it was by the General's Order; that he would come the next Morning to pay his Debts, and also lay out some Goods for the General and Conbon to buy; that the rest might be sold to other People; likewise that the other Debts should be brought to the Lodge.  
The seventeenth the Toucy Liulauja came with a Note of the rest of the Presents, with the Prices at which the General and Conbon would buy the Goods.  
The Ambassador ordered Harthouwer to tell the Toucy, That he did not credit him, neither would he have any thing to do with him, but would send to the General himself to know if those Prices were set down for them, and that then he should have an Answer. Whereupon the Toucy desired Harthouwer to come to his House the next Morning, and then he would go with him to the Conbon to ask the Question.  
In the Afternoon the Secretary Ʋander Does, Nicholas Berkman, and Maurice, arrived from Tenhay and netherlands Haven, with relation of the good condition of all things about the Ships, and that the Men longed only for fresh Provisions.  
The twenty fourth the Ambassador commanded Noble and Harthouwer, that they should go to the Toucy's House the next Morning, that according to his Request they might go together to the General and Conbon, and to ask if the Prices were for their Highnesses? and likewise to whom they would have their Presents delivered, that they might not be defrauded, and in the last place earnestly to desire, that they might have liberty to send fresh Provisions to the Ships, otherwise the Ambassador would desire to be gone with all the speed possible.  
The eighteenth in the Morning Noble and Harthouwer went to the Toucy, and coming with him to the Conbon's they stayed till Noon, yet could get no Audience; but the Conbon sent them word, that they should deliver the Presents, and also the rest of the Merchandise to the Toucy Liulauja, except the Strings of Blood Coral, which they must deliver to himself the next day, when he would grant them Audience.  
Against the Evening the Toucy Liulauja coming to the Lodge to fetch the forementioned Goods, said that Noble and Harthouwer need not come with the Blood Coral the next day, but that the Ambassador must in Person appear at the Conbon's Court about six days hence, and then bring the Coral, and also an Account of those Debts that were owing, along with him, and then the Netherlanders would have Orders to be gone within ten days.  
The remaining Goods with the Presents being accordingly delivered to him, for the most part he carried away that Night, and fetched the remainder the next Morning.  
The nineteenth Poutsiensy, Assensy, and the General's Interpreter came to the Lodge, to ask when the Ambassador would be ready for his departure? Whereto he answered, That so soon as the Accounts of the owing Debts, being Audited, were paid, he would give them no farther trouble, but take Shipping immediately. Whereupon they replied, Would he please only to give them a Schedule thereof, and they would take care that satisfaction should be made in three or four days. The Ambassador answered, That if what they promised were cetarin, he should be clear for his Voyage within a Week. Then the Ambassador asked if the Hollanders might buy no manner of Goods? To which they answered, That he might buy course Commodities, as Porcelain and the like; but they must first acquaint the General with it; mean while the Hollanders should draw up what Provisions they wanted for their Voyage, which was immediately done, and delivered to the Mandarin Liulauja.  
The twentieth in the Morning the Ambassador sent Noble and Harthouwer to Court with this following Letter.  
THe Ambassador seeks in all things to obey Talauja, and give him satisfaction. 
a Officers that provide for Strangers.  The Poutsiensy and Assensy have easked him what day he would be gone? to which he answered, That he could be ready on the twelfth of this Moon, and therefore desires that the Provisions for their Voyage may be brought according to the enclosed Bill, and sent down to the Ship at Nanthay, and likewise the Silver and Porcelain. The Ambassador requests likewise that he may buy and carry the following Goods along with him, viz. China Roots, Tee, Aniseed, course Porcelain, some Stuffs, Stools, Cabinets, and other Trifles.  
Noble and Harthouwer returning in the Afternoon gave account, That they could not be admitted to Audience by the General, but after the Letter being delivered to him by his Interpreter, he permitted the Ambassador to buy the Provisions which he desired, but nothing else.  
Soon after the Toucies', Liulauja and Hayongloja came again to tell the Ambassador, That the General considering better on his Request, had granted that he might buy eight or ten Picol of China Root.  
The one and twentieth nothing happened of any note.  
The two and twentieth the forementioned Toucies' came to the Lodge to tell the Ambassador, That his Retinue▪ which came with him from Peking, must produce all those Stuffs which they had bought by the Way, because they would buy them again: This they said was the General's Order, which if they would not obey, he would search their Chests, and if he found any Stuffs in them, he would seize them as Forfeit.  
The Ambassador hereupon calling his Attendants together, commanded them, whoever they were, excepting none (because he would not come in any trouble) to bring out all their Stuffs, and deliver them to the forementioned Lavja's; which being accordingly done, their Mandarins taking them, put them into a Chest, and carried them out of the Lodge.  
At Noon, according to the Resolution taken the Night before, Noble went to the Viceroy's Court, to proffer his Highness a String of Blood Coral; which he freely and kindly accepted in the Presence of all his Attendants.  
Mean while the Mandarin Liulauja came to the Lodge from the General and Conbon, bringing Money with him for the remaining Goods which they had bought.  
This Mandarin also informed, that the Overveen Frigate, and Balfour, who had brought some Renegade Chineses from Quelang, might not go away with the Ambassador, but must stay there till they had order from the Emperor concerning it. Moreover, the Ambassador must go to the Conbon the next Morning, and afterwards to the Assensy, and two days hence to the General and Poutsiensy, to speak with them about the forementioned, and what other Business else: which the Ambassador promised the next Morning to observe.  
The next Morning, being the twenty third, the Ambassador went with Noble, Harthouwer, and others, to the Conbon, taking with him a Note of the sold Merchandise, and also the String of Blood Coral, which on the fifth Instan they resolved amongst other Goods to present to his Highness, as the Toucy Liulauja had told the Netherlanders on the eighteenth. Coming to the usual Hall they found the Toucy Liulauja, who soon after was called to the Conbon, and at his Return told the Ambassador privately, That because there were so many People with him, his Highness had judged it best, that the Ambassador should deliver the Chain of Coral to him, that he might deliver it to his Highness, who was afraid to receive it in the presence of so many Persons, and for the weight thereof, and Pieces of Coral, he might place in the Note amongst the other Merchandise if he would not trust him with them, which the Ambassador also did. His Highness, as Liulauja said at his return, had received the Coral with many thanks. Not long after the Ambassador was also called in, and seated by his Highness, who after some Compliments said, That he would willingly have Entertained the Ambassador now, but because he had not been Treated by the General, he would stay till that was over. The Ambassador thanking him for his Civility, desired, that since he intended to be gone very suddenly, and his Servants were now busy Packing up their Goods, that his Highness would please to excuse him from coming to his Feast, and that he esteemed this Visit as much as the greatest Entertainment. To which his Highness replied, That he would consider of it, and if he did not invite him, he would send the Dishes prepared to the Lodge. Then he asked when he thought he should be ready to go his Voyage? who replied, Against the twelfth of their Moon, or the twenty sixth of ours: which pleasing his Highness very well he said, That he could not assist the Hollanders in the Transporting some Silk-Stuffs, alleging that it was none of his fault, but the Emperor's Order, who had strictly forbid it. Then the Ambassador gave him the Inventory of the Goods that were sold, and an Account of the Moneys that were owing; likewise a Note of the Gifts ready to be presented, adding that he humbly thanked his Highness for permitting him to sell the remaining Goods. After having looked over the Note of the Presents, the Ambassador told his Highness, that the Mandarin Liulauja had the day before informed him, That the Ship come thither with the Renegade Chineses and David Balfour, might not go away with the Ambassador, but must stay in netherlands Haven, and Balfour at Lamthay, till Order came from the Emperor about it, to whom they had written: The Ambassador therefore desired, since the Vessel was very old, not being fit to stay there, that she might go away with him; but if this could not be granted, he would be obedient, and press no farther, but leave her behind. Whereupon his Highness in excuse said they had contrived to dismiss all the Ships together, but the Mansjuwee would not consent till they had an Answer from Peking.  
The Ambassador also asked a second time if they would please to dismiss them all from Lamthay. Whereupon his Highness answered him, That the Ambassador should not trouble himself about the Ship, for he would take care that it should be furnished with all Necessaries; nay, if the Emperor would not be at the Charge, he would pay it out of his own Purse; ask besides, if the Person that came with the Chineses from Quelang was at Lamthay? To which being answered, He was, he said that he would consult with the General if any others should stay, or all have their Passport.  
Then the Ambassador demanded if he might not deal for some fine Porcelain or Tee? To which his Highness first answered as if he permitted it; but afterwards beginning to retract, he changed his Discourse, beginning to inquire how many Men they had, that thereby they might the better accommodate them with Provision: which said, the Ambassador took his leave, and went away.  
Coming into the outer Court, he found the Mandarin Liulauja, whom he asked if he should now go to the Assensy? To which he was answered, No, because he had not been Entertained by the Conbon; but he must go to the General's Court the next Morning.  
After this Noble acquainted the Ambassador, that he had spoke with Lapora and one of Singlamong's Factors, about Bartering for Silk, and that Lapora had told him the Viceroy would deliver Silk to the Netherlanders at Tenhay, provided they would leave Money for Security at Hoksieu.  
The twenty fourth in the Morning the Ambassador went to the General, into whose Presence he was brought, after a stay of half an hour in the Court; being placed by him, the General said, That the Embassy now was complete, and he might depart when he pleased; for he had received a Letter from the Emperor, in which he was commanded not to detain, but to dispatch him so soon as possible; so that his Excellency had already stayed beyond the limited time. To which the Ambassador answered, He would now therefore endeavour to part in Friendship, and as he had said before, be gone by the twelfth of that instant Moon, which if his Highness judged too long, he would go sooner: who strait replied, That if the Ambassador went away by that time, it would be very well; but he must carry no Silk-Stuffs with him, because they were Counterband Goods: yet the Ambassador being come a remote Journey, he granted him to carry Porcelain, and the like Trifles; for which he returned thanks: which pleasing his Highness, he said, That he knew not of the Ambassador's coming, which if he had, he would have prepared something for his Entertainment; but however he hoped he would accept of a Collation at his Lodgings. Then the Ambassador thanking his Highness, and seeing that the General did not make mention of the Overveens stay, said (as he had done the day before to the Conbon,) That the Toucies' had told him, that the Ship which was come with the Renegade Chineses from Quelang, and likewise the Company that Manned it must stay there; therefore the Ambassador desired, if it were possible, that the Ship might go along with him. The General having considered a little answered, That the Ship must stay; but if his Lordship would leave any body at Lamthay, was in his own choice: After some Discourse concerning it, the Ambassador said, That if his Highness would please to credit him, it was all one to him whether he left any one at Lamthay or not.  
Mean while the Conbon coming thither went first into a private Chamber, and a little while after placed himself by the General. Then the Ambassador began again to speak of the staying of the Ship: To which the General answered, The Ambassador need not be afraid, he would take care concerning the Vessel, that nothing of any harm should befall the Hollanders. Which Answer satisfying the Ambassador, he delivered such another List of the remaining Goods that were to be sold, and his Presents, as the day before he had done to the Conbon; after which taking his leave he departed.  
In the Afternoon the General's Interpreter came to tell the Ambassador, That the General, Conbon, and Manichuer would come in Person to the Lodge to search the Goods.  
In the Evening it was resolved, since the General had put it to the Ambassador's choice, to leave any of his People there or not, to leave none; but if any farther mention should be made, to pretend as if they would willingly leave some there, because it was known that the Tartars always did contrary to the Hollanders Desires: Moreover that Noble should the next Morning go to the Poutsiensy and Assensy, and proffer them each their several Presents; and because they had asked to buy some Blood Coral, Noble should take two Strings along with him, and ask but an ordinary Rate for them.  
The twenty fifth Noble, according to the Resolution taken the day before, went with the Presents to the Poutsiensy and Assensy, to deliver them the two Strings of Coral; and at his Return related, That they had received the Presents with many thanks, and the Strings of Coral at a certain Price.  
Mean while the Mandarin Liulauja came to the Lodge, saying that the General would not come that day, but the following Morning to see the Goods, and that the Ambassador might Ship off all his bulky Commodities. Concerning the China Root which the Ambassador had requested to carry out, the General would permit him to Transport but six Picol. The Ambassador, according to the Mandarins Request, Shipped of all his great Goods, but said, that if the General would not grant him to carry more than six Picol, he would not trouble himself with any.  
The twenty sixth the Ambassador Shipped the Money, and all such Goods as could not be sold, and likewise their travelling Necessaries.  
The Poutsiensy and Assensy came to the Lodge with some Grand Mandarins, to thank the Ambassador for the Presents which he had sent them, and withal to tell him, That all those who had Chests or Trunks in the Barks, must go to the Bridge to open them, because the Conbon was there in Person to see them, which accordingly was done. Noble and some others going thither, at their Return said, That the Conbon causing some Chests to be carried into the Governor of Minjazen's House, had opened and searched them there, and also looked upon several Gifts which the Emperor had presented them with; which not satisfying, he went Aboard the Blyswiik Frigate, and opened all the Chests there one after another, yet found nothing of any Counterband Goods. Then he said that the Ship which was come from Quelang should stay there, and that the Governor of Minjazen would tell the Netherlanders when they came thither, whether Balfour should remain there or not. To which Noble answered him, That he would acquaint the Ambassador with it: Whereupon taking his leave, the Blyswiik at his going away fired three Guns.  
Because the Ambassador could not come to the Viceroy Singlamong the two last days, in regard he was told that the General, Conbon, and Manchuwer, would come to the Lodge to search his Goods, and that it was now done the day before by the Conbon only, the Ambassador, Noble, and Harthouwer went thither the twenty sixth in the Morning to take their leaves; where he was no sooner come, but had Audience immediately granted, and soon after dispatched; so that the Netherlanders took their leave without urging a word of any thing. Returning to the Lodge, they found the Toucy Liulauja, who hastened their departure, because the limited time was already expired: Whereupon all things that were yet ashore were put into the Vessels, and they likewise Embarked themselves to be gone at High-water.  
In the Evening the old Conbon's Factor came to deliver the Ambassador twenty four Pieces of Silk-Stuffs, which he said were left him by his Lord to give to his Excellency, being half for himself, and the other half for the Lord Maetzuiker: These Stuffs the Ambassador gave to several Persons.  
Not long after the Chinese Secretary Soukjen brought a written Order from the General, that Balfour must stay behind. To which the Ambassador answered, That so soon as they were Aboard the Blyfwiik Frigate, he would speak with the Mandarins about it.  
In the Afternoon the Netherlanders arrived Aboard the Blyswiik, into which upon the Mandarins command all the Goods were Shipped out of the Barks, because the Mansjuwer (of whom they were very fearful) should not see, nor search the Goods a second time; which was accordingly performed on a sudden: but the Provisions they permitted to lie somewhat longer in the Barks, that the cattle might the better be preserved alive, because the Ship was so full.  
The twenty eighth in the Morning some Mandarins coming to the Barks with Provisions, caused all things that were in them to be thrown into the Ship, by which means a great many of the cattle died; all which the Netherlanders endured with patience, stowing their Goods as well as they could.  
Soon after the Hollanders set Sail with a fair Wind, and a Tide of Ebb, which coming stronger in the Afternoon, they got within a quarter of a League from the Losantat or great Tower, where they came to an Anchor; which was no sooner done but several Mandarins came Aboard them, saying that Balfour must stay, and not go from thence before an Answer came from the Emperor. To which the Ambassador answered, That the General had left the staying of Balfour to his choice, on which he relied, therefore did not believe the Mandarins. Moreover, as to what concerned the Ship, they should believe him, that she should stay there on condition they would furnish her with Provisions; which if they would not do, she should go. The Mandarins used many arguments to persuade the Ambassador to let Balfour, or some Person else stay in his stead: But the Ambassador not varying from his first Resolution, they took their leaves.  
Moreover, besides several sorts of other Vessels (as is at large related in the Description) most of the Rivers are Navigated by Champan and Batsiangs, which are small Vessels. They rise up round with a broad Head; the Stern is not joined together, but on the top is separated; between which a Mat holds an Oar, wherewith he makes swift Way; the middle is covered with a Mat of Rushes: He which Steers (as represented in the Sculp) is Habited in a Coat made of Coco Leaves, and he in the Head hath a kind of Umbrella on his Head against the Rain.  
The Chineses also keep great Feasts in their Vessels on the River, making Merry with varieties of Meat and strong Liquor; in which manner the greatest Mandarins often recreate themselves, but in bigger Boats than the common People use, with a fine Covering over them, on each end of which stands generally a Man with a crooked Horn.  
Against the Evening the Tide of Ebb being spent, they dropped Anchor about half a League from the Overueen Frigate, lying in netherlands Haven; whither the Ambassador immediately sent his Sloop, with Orders for her Boat to come and take out some of the cattle, and likewise that the Sloop should go to the rest of the Ships to hasten their Boats to fetch Provisions.  
In the Evening the Overveens' Boat coming thither, they loaded her full of living cattle, with which they sent her again Aboard.  
The first of December nothing happened. 
December.   
The second, the Ambassador hoping to put off some more of their Goods, wrote the following Letter to the General at Hoksieu, viz.  
The Hollanders have sufficiently testified their Reality; and the Ambassador esteems nothing more than to show, that what he hath promised to Talauja may be performed. Your Lordship hath been pleased to command, that the Ship from Quelang, and the Commander Balfour should stay here till an Answer came from Peking; now the Ambassador desires to know how long the Ship must stay. Besides, since his coming hither he hath found some Goods, viz. Blood Coral, Amber, Cloth, and other Merchandise, brought in the Ships from Batavia, and likely to be carried back again thither, unless Your Lordship will be pleased this one time to give leave to sell them, because they were included in this Chinkon. The Ambassador hopes that the Emperor's Letters to the Lord Maetzuiker will bring him good tidings, therefore he could not but acquaint Talauja herewith, and desire his Answer upon it, especially having seen by some Letters which he found in the Ships, that the General of Batavia might be moved to deliver the Castle of Quelang to the Emperor, if he would grant the Hollanders a free Trade in China.  
Noble and the Secretary Ʋander Does were sent to the Chinese Jonks lying in the Crab-hole, to inquire if there were none Aboard that could Translate the forementioned Letter, and deliver it to the General, which if there were they should leave it with them. But their coming amongst the Jonks caused great amazement amongst them, neither could they be accommodated; so they went to the Jonks which lay within the second Strait, where finding some Mandarins and a Secretary with them, they did their Business according to their desire.  
This Letter being Translated Noble sent with a Batsiang up to Hoksieu, with promise to return with an Answer within two days; so that the Ambassador judged it convenient to stay so long with the Blyswiik in netherlands Haven.  
The third in the Morning, the Mandarins of the Jonks came aboard the Bleiswyk, saying, That they durst not carry the Letter which Noble had given them the day before, except a Hollander went with them to Hoksieu: Whereupon, the Ambassador answered, That if they would not deliver the Letters, they knew what they had to do; if any thing other than well did come of it, it was not his fault.  
This, startling, made them change their resolution, ask if they should deliver the Letter, and the General should desire, that a Hollander should come to him, if the Ambassador would then promise them to send one thither, of which they would willingly be assured, that they might give his Highness a positive answer.  
The Ambassador, after serious consideration, judged it convenient to answer, That they should Request of the Governor of Minjazeen, in the Ambassador's Name, if he would please to send any one with that Letter to the Sontok, and if they had an answer upon it, and that Talauja Commanded, that an Hollander should come to him, that then they would consider of it; with which answer going away, they took the Letter with them.  
The fourth, it was thought meet by the Ambassador and his Council, since they had nothing more to do there, only to wait for News from above, to set Sail for Tinghay, to make all things ready there; but Noble was ordered to stay there with the Overveen, that if any News should come from Hoksieu, he might inform the Ambassador of it, and give such Orders as should be requisite.  
In the Afternoon the Ambassador fell down with the Bleiswyk to the first Strait, behind the Pyramids, where they dropped Anchor till the next Ebb, but were forced by a strong Gale out of the North-East, to remove beyond the first Shoal, and wait for better Wether.  
The fifth in the Night, the Bleiswyk set Sail again with a Northerly Wind and Ebbing Water; and getting beyond the Calf Sands, came on the seventh in the Morning, by Daylight, before Sotias' Bay, within the Turret's Isles, that in the Afternoon, with a Sea breeze, he might put into the Bay of Tinghay.  
Having cast Anchor, the Ambassador went with the Bleiswyk's Sloop aboard the Victoria, to stay and go over in her.  
Here it was judged convenient, that Noble and Putmen, with the Ship Batavia, and Harthouwer, and Bartolz with the Crane, if no other News came from Hoksieu, should set Sail for Batavia.  
In the Afternoon, the Bleiswyk Frigate came also to Tinghay, where the Ambassador immediately unladed part of her, distributing the Provisions and Money amongst the Ships Victoria, Batavia, and Crane, that so he might not run the hazard of all in one Ship.  
The eighth in the Afternoon, the Overveen's Boat arrived at Tinghay from netherlands Haven, with a Letter from Noble, Dated the Night before, the Contents of which were:  
That two Commanders had been aboard him, with a Letter from the General of Hoksieu, to the Governor of Minjazeen, of which he had sent the Translation Enclosed.  
The Superscription they could not give to Noble, for want of some to write it; the Povi, as they said, had accounted himself too good to answer the Ambassador, but had writ to the Governor of Minjazeen, not expecting any further answer from the Ambassador, as might be seen by the last Clause.  
To the Proposal of Quelang, he had sent no manner of answer, But that the Lord General, according to the foremention'd Commanders sayings, must the ensuing Year write himself to the Emperor, concerning that or the like business.  
And in like manner, about the selling of the Merchandise, as appears by the second Clause; by which they may plainly see, that the Ships with their Merchandise must be gone again, which was strongly affirmed by the third Clause, as appears by the Translation.  
In the Translation, no mention was made in how many days an answer would be there from Peking, as the Ambassador had desired to know; besides, no body came to look after the Overveen, to furnish her with Provisions, which they had so faithfully promised, and to his judgement there was no staying for it: The Tides and Wether were good, which with the approaching New Moon, according to the general course of that season, might turn to be bad and tempestuous.  
Therefore he expected the Ambassador's Order, whether the Overveen should stay longer in netherlands Haven, or go to Tinhay: The forementioned Translation written by the General of Hoksieu, to the Governor of Minjazeen, was to this effect.  

I. THe Povi hath received the Letter from the Holland Ambassador, wherein he desired to know, how many days Balfour should lie there with his Ship: My Answer thereupon is, that he shall stay till Order comes from the Emperor.  
II. The Foreign Commodities are forbid by the Emperor to be sold, therefore I cannot grant the Ambassadors Request; but when the Lord General shall send Letters the following Year, than I will write to the Emperor about it.  
III. According to the Emperor's Command, it is not well done, that the Ambassador stays so long, because it will not be good for their business the ensuing Year, when they would come thither again.  
IU. Lastly, I Command you to deliver this Letter to the Ambassador, and to acquaint me so soon as he is gone from our Coast: Hereupon I expect a speedy Answer.   
Nobel's writing concerning the Overveen, being by the Ambassador and his Council considered on, it was judged convenient to send for the Frigate to Tinghay.  
Therefore the Ambassador informed Noble, that he had received his Letter with the Translation, and thereby understood, that Povi had answered very slightly concerning Balfours and the Overveens staying, without being able to depend upon it; their hopes of venting their Merchandise, was also now quite vanished, so that he resolved, and had found it convenient to send for the Overveen to Tinghay, because the Governors did not keep their promise in furnishing her with Provisions.  
If the Chineses should ask him the reason of the Ships going away, he should answer them, that it should lie under Tinghay, so long as they had any Provisions left whereby he might see if they intended to keep her there any longer, and govern himself accordingly.  
Theninth nothing happened of remark.  
The tenth, three Chinese Jonks that came out of the North Sailed by the Ambassador in the Victoria, up the Channel of Hoksieu. In the Afternoon Noble arrived at Tinghay in the Overveen, and having dropped Anchor, he went aboard of the Ambassador, to tell him, That the eighth instant in the Evening, some petty Officers were come aboard from the Chinese Jonks, to ask when the Ambassador would set Sail, and Noble go from thence with the Frigate? To which he had answered, That the Ambassador would leave that place with the first fair Wether, and that he would be gone from thence with the Overveen the next Morning, with which they seeming to be pleased, took their leave.  
The twelfth, it was resolved in Council, upon the Ambassador's Proposal on the seventeenth instant, if good Wether, to set Sail for Batavia, without urging the Governors any more to permit them to Trade, because they saw, by all Circumstances, that no good was to be done there that year.  
The fourteenth, the Overveen Frigate set Sail by Siam to Batavia, according to their resolution taken on the twelfth: Soon after her departure, two Chinese Coya's came to Tinghay, where some Officers coming to the Ambassador said, That they were sent by the Governor of Minjazeen, to inquire when the Ambassador would be gone: Who answering, said, That he had been indisposed, or else he would have been gone ere that time, but that he resolved three or four days hence to set Sail from Tinghay.  
Moreover, the Ambassador told them, that it was very strange to him, that no advice came from Peking, about the coming of the Ships, because he had acquainted the Lipous, that he expected Ships to come to Hoksieu with Merchandise, and also to fetch him, and that the Lipous had answered him, that so soon as they received advice from the General, they would consult, and give Order concerning it: But since no order was come from the Lipous, it was a sign that the General or Governor of Minjazeen had not yet written about it to Peking; and considering he had informed the Lipous of it himself, they would resent it very ill, when they should hear of the Ships being there, and they were not acquainted with it, and serve this General and the Governor of Minjazeen, as the former General had been; for it would be a business of great Consequence, to let the Ambassador go away with three such deep laden Vessels. Hereupon the Officers making no reply, said, That if the Ambassador did stay some days longer, that several Mandarins would come to him in great Jonks from the General in Hoksieu: To which the Ambassador replied, That they, and who ere else came, should be welcome to him, and received as friends, desiring that they would acquaint the Governor of Minjazeen with what he had said; which they promising to do, asked to know the day on which the Ambassador would depart, which he said, would be the third from that, and if any one came to him in the interim, it was well, but if none came, he would assuredly be gone; with which answer they returned.  
The fifth in the Morning, the Netherlanders saw four Jonks, and two Coya's coming out of the Channel of Hoksieu, which the next Morning were seen about the Wood-Bay, where they stood to and again without coming nearer to the Ships: But the Coya's came close to them, out of one of which, a Servant belonging to the Governor of Minjazeen, came in a Champan or small Boat aboard the Ambassador, sent to him from his Master, to inquire concerning his Excellency's Health, and when he would set Sail; and said moreover, that the Povi had writ to the Emperor, that the Ambassador went away from thence the twelfth of the last Moon, and now it was publicly known, that his Excellency was not yet gone; therefore he came to know the certain time, when the Ambassador would set Sail, and withal, to tell him, that if he intended to stay any longer, he should go and lie between the Isles, without the sight of the main Land; and to declare his mind, whether he would be gone, or not. To which the Ambassador answered, That he would set Sail from thence, but that the General and Governor of Minjazeen might perhaps answer for it, that they let the Ambassador go away with three such deep laden Vessels; with which answer, the Servant took his leave.  
When the Netherlanders saw that the Jonks which kept without shot from them, made into the Channel again with their Coya's, they according to their resolution taken on the twelfth, made Preparations to set Sail for Batavia.  
The seventeenth in the Morning, the Ambassador set Sail with four Ships, viz. the Victoria, Batavia, Crane, and Bleiswyk, from the ruin'd City Tinghay; and Steering his Course East-South-East, between the Turret-Isles, close by the Island Naerd, and about Midnight, guessing themselves to be past the Rough-Isle, they Steered South-West and by West: In the middle of the Morning-Watch, the Wind began to rise, and the next day proved very Stormy, when as they supposed they saw the Isle of Quemuy; as the following day they judged from their Soundings, that they were near the Sandy Banks.  
The twentieth, passing the Makaw Islands, they Steered their Course to the Isle of Ainan, which was descried on the two and twentieth, having Tinhosa about Noon, two Leagues and a half Northward from them.  
The Ambassador having been indisposed for some days, and beginning daily to grow weaker, by reason of the hollow Seas, and small Breezes, which made the Ship roll much, he sent the Bleiswyk on the twenty fourth to the Overveen and Crane, to tell them, that they should keep together, and he would with the Bleiswyk go before to the Island Pulo Timaon, where he would stay for them.  
In the Evening, there being a Serene Sky, the Ambassador saw the Mountain of Sinesecuwe on his side, and in the Morning the Cape Avarelles Valze. The Wind being at North-East, and their Course along the shore South and by West, and South-South-West, they came in the Evening up with the Point of Holland▪ from whence they Steered South-West and by South, to raise Paul Candour, which Isle they saw in the West, on the six and twentieth in the Afternoon; and the next Evening, Anchored behind the Goat's Horns, where the Crane also arrived the following day.  
The last of October, the Batavia Frigate arrived at the Southeast side of Paulo Timaon, but the Wind shrinking, she was forced to drop Anchor half a League from that wherein the Ambassador was aboard.  
Here the Ambassador gave Order to take the Silver out of the Victoria and Crane, and put it into the Bleiswyk again, and likewise sent his Sloops to the Batavia, to fetch the Silver out of her: Whereupon, the Bleiswyk was according to their Excellency's Order in Batavia, sent with all the Silver, Gold, and other Commodities to Malakka, to the Governor Balthasar Bort, to be sent from thence to Bengale.  
The Ambassador informed him by Letters, that he was received with all kindness at the Court in Peking, and left the same with much Honour and Friendship; but could not inform him, what was obtained by this Embassy, because the Emperor had sent his Letters Sealed to the Lord General; but that it was certain, that for the future they should Trade in Canton, and not in Hoksieu; in the removal of which, if all things else were well, he found little trouble.  
The first of january, the Fleet left Paulo Timaon, and in the Afternoon, the 
january.  Bleiswyk taking leave of the Fleet, steered her Course to the straits of Sinkkapura. In the Evening, the Ambassador saw Pulo Aura, a League and a half North-East from him.  
The second in the Morning, he stemmed the Mountain Monapyn; and on the third had Pulo Lingen on his Stern.  
The fourth, entering the straits of Banka, he arrived on the seventh before Batavia, where the Ambassador delivered the Emperor's Sealed Letter to the Lord General, and gave him an account of all his Adventures.  
Thus having brought the Embassy out of China to Batavia, we will return thither again, and declare what properly concerns the Chinese, and their Country; and first begin with their Entertainments and Diet.   

Feasts, or Entertainments.  
THe Chineses, according to Alvarez Semedo, spend most of their time in Feasting, with extraordinary Costs and Charges. On the meeting of Friends, and good success in any Business, they prepare a Feast; and sometimes also in Troubles and Adversities, in which they come to comfort each other; nay, at Entertainments, are the Consultations of the Chinese, advising with one another at Meals what they shall take in Hand.  
This is the usual life of the Common People, and especially of Handicraftsmen, which are divided into Companies, which they call Mane, because in every Company are thirty Masters, (as many as there are days in a Month) which make a Feast every day by turns.  
If they have not Conveniencies in their own Houses, they may hire public Halls, in which are all manner of Necessaries, being built for that purpose; or if they will keep their Feasts in their own Houses, without any further trouble, than they only set down the number of the Persons, Guests, and Retinue, and what Dishes they will please to order, which are punctually served in, according to the Bill of Fare.  
The Northern Chineses differ much in their Customs from the Southern, who are in general, more civilised than the other.  
The Southern Chineses, in their Feasts esteem of a Quelque-chose, or of Minced Meats and Hashes, more than great Joints and standing Dishes, entertaining more upon the score of good Society than Debauches; yet they will do their parts well at their Trencher, and as sufficiently at the turning off their Glasses: They are entertained with Wine before Dinner, of which they take and taste till they refuse; then they fall to their Rice, and neither speak nor Drink till pretty well satisfied.  
The manner of the Northern Chineses is quite otherwise, for they are not Ceremonious nor Complimental, but delight in well-filled Tables, with great and full Dishes.  
After the usual Ceremony which is observed through all China, they begin first with Eating, every one taking as much as he can on his Trencher, of what he likes best, which they eat without Drinking.  
Rice is their Banquet.  
After Meals, they spend an hour in talking, which ended, they seat themselves again, at Tables filled with Potation-Dishes, and Salt-Meats, as Gammons of Bacon, dried Tongues, and the like, which they do not without cause call Ushers, or Vehiculums, preparers of the way, that the Tope may the better go down; for they no sooner take a Relishing Bit, but a lusty Go-down follows.  
They keep their Breakfasts at seven a Clock in the Morning, and their Dinners at five in the Afternoon, but drink no Wine at either: Only at Night, at a light Supper of relishing Meat, they give themselves full liberty and fresh scope of good Fellowship; therefore their Feasts are Nocturnal, spending the Day upon their serious, either Business, Exercise, or Studies.  
In the Winter Nights they use Candles made of Oil mixed with Wax, but their Summer Lights are of three sorts of Wax, one of Bees, another of certain Snakes, which is very white, and the third comes from a Tree called Kieujeu, but that is not so good as our European, yet much better than our Tallow, and their Candles likewise exceed ours.  
Persons of Quality make great Preparations for their Feasts, Erecting Banqueting Houses for that purpose, both in the Cities, and at their Country Houses, furnished with Pictures and other Rarities: And though the use of Hangings be very rare, yet if those that are invited to a Feast be Officers or Noblemen, they furnish their Houses with Tapestry, from the top to the bottom: The number of Tables is a testimony of the greatness of their Entertainment: They generally place no more than four Persons at a Table; but at very grand Meetings, every Guest hath a peculiar and sometimes two Tables, one to sit at, and the other to set away his empty Dishes.  
The Tables are neither covered with Clothes nor Napkins, but Varnished with the Wax of the Gum called Cie: They use no Knives, for all their Meat, except Eggs, Fish, and the like, is brought before them ready Hash'd: Neither use they Forks nor Spoons, but two small Sticks two handfuls long, with which they very dexterously and neatly take up their Meat; nay, put a single Corn of Rice, either raw or boiled to their Mouth, without letting it fall. They never put Salt, Pepper, nor Vinegar or Verjuice amongst their Meat, but Mustard and the like Ingredients, which they Compound with extraordinary Art, having several of them of a curious relish.  
Their common Dishes are Flesh and Fish, boiled, or broiled on Grid-Irons, and fried in Pans, with variety of Sauces, not unpleasing to the Palate.  
Their Pottages, of which they are great lovers, are never made without either Flesh or Fish.  
The Emperor Che, who began his Reign before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 1150. first used Sticks of Ivory to Eat with, and Ivory Dishes; but these Sticks are not always made of Ivory, but sometimes of Ebony, or some other such like Materials, and tipped only at the ends, with which they touch the Meat, with Silver or Gold; yet the Inhabitants of the Counties junningfu, in the Province of junnan, a Rustic and Savage People, use not the forementioned Sticks, but put the Meat into their Mouths, sooping it down by whole handfuls.  
The Chineses sit at their Tables, on high and artificial wrought Stools, and not crosslegged like the Tartars.  
Anciently they used neither Stools nor Tables, but sat on the Ground crosslegged, after the same manner as most of the Asiatic and African People yet do, insomuch, that they have but one Character for a Table and a Carpet.  
Tables were first brought in use among the Chinese, near the Reign of the Emperor Han, which ever since they have observed, and have them and their Stools very curious.  
They use many Ceremonies, as well in the middle, as in the beginning o●… ending of their Feasts: The Master of the House, as their Taster, first sitting down, when he hath taken a Morsel and tasted the Liquor, then recommending, invites his Friends to sit down, and do the like. In the middle of their Feast they change their small Dishes into great, and all present, Masters, and whatsoever, have the freedom of drinking what they please, but none enforced to more.  
Persons of Quality make Feasts when they return from a Journey, and it often happens, that one Man will go to seven or eight Feasts in a day, only to oblige his Friends by his Presence. When they have time, they send some days before Letters to peculiar Friends, desiring them to come to their Feasts, which if they cannot, being otherwise engaged, than they excuse themselves again by a Letter, and they put off their Feasts till they can come; with which they acquaint them by another Letter, called A Letter of Request: At the day appointed, those that are there first, stay without in a Hall till all the rest are come, than they go into the Dining-Room, where the Master of the House using some Ceremonies, puts all things in a readiness, which done every one seats himself according to his Quality; and the Invitor sits down in State, to animate his Guests to Eat and Drink: They sit a lo●…g while at Table; for besides their Discourses, they have Music and Comedians, who straight Personate whatever they call for or desire.  
Their Feasts end in many Compliments, which the Guests make to the Master, to whom they send a Letter the next Morning, extolling the noble Entertainment, and all things thereto belonging, and hearty thanks for the honour which they received by it.  
The Chineses, as Trigaut witnesseth, eat all manner of Dainties which we have in Europe, and very well know how to dress and prepare them, but they bring but very little of a sort to their Tables; for they account the glory of their Feast to consist in the variety of Petits and Hotch-potches: neither do they eat Flesh and Fish apart, as we, but mix them together.  
Moreover, no manner of Meat being once put on the Table is taken away till Dinner is ended; wherefore they not only fill the Tables, setting one Dish by another, but heap them up like their own Turrets. No Bread nor Rice is set on the Table before the Guests, except at some small Feasts, or towards the latter end; if there be, than they drink no Wine, for the Chineses drink not any before Rice.  
They have also several Games at their Feasts, like ours, where every one that loseth is forced to take up his Cup, at which all the rest rejoice and clap their Hands.  
The Chineses are very mannerly at Meals, and keep their Dinners early. Mushrooms they account a great Dainty, sending for them from the Mountain Tienno, lying in the County of Hancheufu, belonging to the Province of Chekiang, near the small City Lingan. They are carried through all China, and being Salted and dried last good a whole year: They steep them first in Water before they boil them, by which means they become as fresh again as when first gathered.  
In no place in all China is more Butter and Milk used than in the City of 
Atl. Si●…euf.  Sucheu, in the Province of Nanking; for Martinius relates, that he saw none in any place else.  
The Inhabitants of this City exceed the other Chineses in preparing their Meats with Sugar, Salt, Vinegar, Wine, and Herbs.  
The Inhabitants of the twelfth County Xunningfu, in the Province of junnan, a savage People, stick not to eat, according to the forementioned Martinius, all manner of Creatures that are not venomous.  
The People of the fourth Territory Chingvenfu, in the Province of Queicheu, have no Salt, but use the Ashes of an Herb called Kine in stead thereof.  
Amongst those of the Province Kiangsi are some, which all the year long gather up the Bones of dead cattle, and lay them in Porcelain Dishes at their Feasts, to fill up their empty Platters, that their Dishes may be heaped one upon another, according to the Custom of the Country.   

Marriages and Matrimonial Ceremonies.  
THree thousand years since to this day, according to an inviolable Law, Marriages have been observed in China. Anciently they used many Ceremonies in Betrothing each other; and amongst others, to give their Hands as we do; but most of them are changed, some quite extinguished, and others new. At this day they observe two kinds of Marriages, one firm, as with us, not to be dissolved but by the Death of one or both. In this the Woman is conducted with many Ceremonies to her Husband's House. The second is a kind of Concubinate, yet suffered by that Country amongst such as have no Children; but that limitation is a mere pretence, for the Rich take Concubines or Mistresses, without any scruple, though they have several Children.  
In this the Betrothing differs much from that of a true and lawful Marriage; for here they Treat with the reputed Father or foster's of a Maiden, which in truth having no Relation, but have only brought them up with intent to sell them to the first amorous Chapman. But to speak properly this is no Marriage, because neither any Promises, nor Matrimonial Ceremonies pass between them; for the Law of the Country permit all Women to take any other Man, if the first hath put her off. Besides, these Concubines eat apart by themselves in peculiar Rooms, and are under obedience of the lawful Wives, being at their Command as Servants on all occasions: Neither do their Children show that obedience to them, as those of the lawful Wives do, neither call them by the Name of Mother. At their Death those Children which are born of them, are not obliged to Mourn three years, nor desist from their Study, nor leave their Employment or Government, as the legitimate Issue do at their Fathers or Mother's Death.  
At the Man's Decease the legal Wife and Children possess the Estate in common; but if the Wife die, the Concubine still remains with the Husband, and so do the Children if she hath any.  
There are some that take Mistresses only to beget Sons; whom when grown and mature, if the lawful Wife do not affect, they are sent abroad, or else Married to some other; yet the Child that is thus Begotten and Born, acknowledges no other Mother than the true and lawful Wife.  
Widows are permitted to Marry if they please; but modest and chaste Women seldom do, though young and without Children, but live retired in their Fathers-in-law House, for which they are highly esteemed.  
In lawful Marriages they commonly observe the Constitutions, Qualities, Conditions, and Likeness of the Persons; but in the other they look only upon Beauty and Breeding.  
None, according to their Laws, may Marry their Father's Relation, in what Degree soever, nor with a Person of the same Name, but freely with their Mother's Friends, though never so near Allied.  
A Virgin seldom Marries a Widower, they being called, The Bed and Pleasure of the House.  
No Marriages are Contracted without a Procurator, though they have been never so great Friends; to which purpose one is chosen out of the number of those Men and Women who folllow no other Trade.  
The Bridegroom never sees his Bride but at the going in of the Door, where he receives her as his Wife.  
The Fathers bestow their Children in Marriage when they are very young, and sometimes in their Infancy, nay before they are Born, whether Male or Female: Their Promises in this kind are faithfully performed, notwithstanding the Father dies before the time, except one of the betrothed happens to be defamed and lose his Estate, or both Parties disagree. If the Son for some private Reasons will not perform his Father's Commands, he may be forced to it by the Laws of the Country.  
No mention is made of the Bride or Bridegroom's Portion till their Father's Death.  
Amongst Persons of meaner Quality it is not customary to buy Women, but only they give their Bride's Father a piece of Money to buy her Garments and Attires, according to their Capacity; from whence perhaps some have averred by mistake that the Chineses buy their Wives.  
Persons of Quality never speak of the Bride's Portion, because her Father is obliged by the Laws of the Country to do what he can, and to provide them Householdstuff from the Door (as they say there) to the top of the Chimney, except the Bed; all which seldom amounts to above fifty Crowns, so low a Price do Goods bear in China. Besides which the Father gives his Daughter two or three Maids to wait upon her, and some Silver, but never Lands or Houses, unless he be very rich, or else Marries her to a Person of Quality, or that he hath no Heir Male himself. After they are Betrothed, with their Parents consents, then begin their Compliments and Courtships: And first, the Bridegroom sends the Bride a Present of some delicate Meat, Wine, and Fruit; Secondly, the Marriage-Day is pitched upon by Astronomers with great Ceremonies; Thirdly, the Brides Name enquired for; Lastly, the Bridegroom must send her some Jewels, Pendants, and Precious Gems.  
The day before the Bride comes home to her Husband's House, her Goods are carried thither from her Fathers at Noonday by certain People employed for that purpose, who walk two by two, some carrying Tables, others Chests, Curtains, Hangings, and the like.  
The next day, as it is customary in some Provinces, the new Married Man, his Father and nearest Relations, go to seek the Bride, whom having found, they conduct home in State in a Sedan.  
In other Provinces more to the South, the Man sends one in the Evening to fetch his Bride in a Sedan made for that purpose, richly Lined; behind follow a great number of People with Torches and Lanterns.  
After the Mother hath done the last Offices for her that she shall do as a Maid, and bid her farewell, than she is locked up in the Sedan, and the Key sent before to her Husband's Mother. As she goes along, the nearest Relations walk before, and the Servant-Maids given her by her Father, go on each side of their Mistress. When they come thither, her Mother-in-law unlocks the Sedan, and desiring her to come forth, presents her to her Husband: Which done, they both walk to a private Chapel, in which the Images of their Predecessors are erected; where having kneeled four times, according to the Custom in those Ceremonies, they come and show the same Reverence to their Fathers, sitting in a large Hall on Stools.  
Then the Bride goes away with her Mother-in-law, Chambermaid's, and Matchmakers, into the women's Lodgings, which are kept so strictly that none dare offer to look into them, no not the Father-in-law himself, or her own Brothers; so that when a Father will punish his Son for an Offence, which is often done notwithstanding he is Married, he is safe as in a Sanctuary, if he can but get into his Wife's Chamber, because his Father dare not come thither, nor speak with his Son's Wife, except on some extraordinary occasions, such is their care for the preservation of Modesty, and the Honour of the Women.  
They are also seldom permitted to go abroad, except on necessity, and then are carried in a Sedan, made for that purpose, and when locked up, not the least Cranny through which she can peep.  
The Women in their Privacies, to pass away the time, entertain themselves with little Dogs, Birds, and the like pleasers of Fancy.  
A Month after the Marriage Day the Bride returns to her own House, which they call Queinim, that is, Returning to Rest.  
All the Sons have equal shares of their Father's Goods, and those of the Concubines as the begotten of lawful Wives; for in this case the Father is the only Person that is considered: but as for the Daughters, they receive nothing but what is given them on their Marriage Day.  
If the Father dies before he hath Married his Daughter, than her Brothers are to provide for her; and likewise if her Father hath wasted, or given away all his Estate by Marrying of his Children, than the Brothers are obliged to maintain themselves.  
There are some peculiar Families, whereof the eldest Inherits, notwithstanding he hath several other Brothers. The Children are called Quecun, Chu-Hui, Heupe Cheihei.  
And with many Ceremonies, as Trigaut witnesseth, they Betrothe one another, which is done by the Parents when they are in their Infancy: But one thing they chiefly observe, which is, that the Bridegroom differs not many years in the age of the Bride. This Promising or Betrothing, the Parents make between themselves, without acquainting the Children, who nevertheless always consent.  
All Persons of Quality Mary with their Equals, choosing their Wives of as good Families as themselves.  
As to what concerns the Concubines, which every one keeps according to his pleasure, the fairest and most beautiful are in greatest esteem, not regarding Birth or Riches; for they buy them for a hundred Ducats a piece, and sometimes less.  
The common People or the Poor buy Wives for a small Sum, and sell them again when they please; but the Emperor and his Family in their Marriages look only upon the Beauty of a Person, without regarding whether she be of Royal Extraction or not: But Women of Quality shun this Choice, partly because the Emperor's Women are of no authority for their lifetimes, being locked up in the Palace, and secluded from the Eyes of all Friends and Relations; and partly because the Magistrates of Marriages choose but few out of many to be the Emperor's lawful Wives.  
This is not only usual with the Emperor and his Family, but likewise customary through the whole Empire. The prime Wife sits with her Husband at the Table, and all the rest (especially those that are not related to the Imperial Blood) are Servants to the Husband's Father, and Waiting-Maids to the lawful Wife, not daring to sit in the presence of either. The Sons acknowledge not their real Mother, but the prime Matron, and Mourn only when she dies three whole years, and follow no Employment during that time, which they mind not at the Death of their Mother which bore them.  
They strictly observe that no Man Marry a Woman that hath the same Surname which he hath, though they are no way allied to one another; not in the least minding how near they are a Kin to each other, if their Names do but differ; nay, the Fathers Mary their Sons to their Mother's nearest Relations.  
The Bride brings no Portion with her; and though at that day when she is carried to the Bridegrooms House, she takes so much Householdstuff with her, that whole Streets are stopped up with it, yet all this is bought at the Bridegroom's Charge, who some Months before sends her a Sum of Money to that purpose. Thus far Trigaut.  
The Household generally consists in Stools, Benches, Chests, and Umbrella's. Moreover, the Bride must bring the Bridegroom a Horse and Bridle, four Servant Maids, and two Boys: The Bridegroom also furnishes the Kitchen with all Provision, presents the Bride with several Pieces of Silk-Stuffs, Cotton-Cloth, and a Garland of Flowers, with a Gold Bodkin; for which she, as a sign of her constant Love, gives him a Suit of Cloth of Gold, or rich Silk. The Bridegroom also gives to her Father a hundred, and to her Mother fifty Tail of Silver: which done, the Wedding begins, first Entertaining each other eight days in the Bridegroom's House, and three days more at the Brides.  
Their Weddings are very expensive, being celebrated in great State, and ended with Comedies, Masques, Music, and the like, to the great admiration of Strangers.  
The day after the Wedding, the new Married Woman is conducted in a stately manner, attended by a great number of her Friends and nearest Relations to her Husband's House, either by Water in a Pleasure▪ boat, or by Land in a Sedan, or Chair. Upon the side of the Shore walk several Musicians and Singers, Playing on Instruments and Singing. Upon the Brides approach the Priests hold up at a distance some Golden Halfmoons, which they give to the Bride, wishing she may not change like the Moon, but embrace him with a pure and constant Affection: A great assurance they have of these Halfmoons, believing that as long as the Woman keeps them, she will never change her Love to her Husband.  
When China was Governed by several Kings and Lords, they took one another's 
Emperor's Marriages. Semedo.  Daughters to Wife as in Europe: but since those Governments were united, the Emperor hath been forced in his own Realm to take one or other of his Subjects Daughters, it being contrary to their Law, that the Emperor should Marry any Woman out of his own Dominions. But though the Emperor be so bound up, yet Persons of Quality do not willingly Marry their Daughters to him, because upon trial and dislike he may send them home again. Neither may he Betrothe himself to a Maid of his Alliance; therefore they search through the whole Empire for a Virgin of twelve or fourteen years of age, beautiful, and endued with all manner of Virtues and Breeding, after the same manner as sacred Writ testifies they sought for Abishag the Shunamite for David, and Hester for Ahasuerus: When they have found such a one according to their liking, she is put into the custody of two Ladies of Honour, ancient Matrons, who search her, to see if she hath no imperfections about her Body. When those after all their Search have found her faultless, she is conducted to the Court with a great Train, and being accepted as a Person which from that time belongs to the Emperor, she is shown to his Majesty in his Palace. The Emperor after the usual Ceremonies passed▪ gives her as Wife to the young Prince his Son, from which instant she is the true and lawful Queen. In the Palace also they order some chaste and virtuous Women to attend her; who being endued with all manner of Virtues, instruct her in all Courtly Behaviour, that she may justly deserve the Name of a Queen, which they call Chemu, that is, Mother of the Empire.  
If we would speak of them according to their Historians, all the Empresses thus brought up, have been Women of great Merits, charitable to the Poor, very Prudent, and of quick Apprehension.  
Such a one was the Daughter of a Bricklayer, who being brought to the Dignity of Empress, always kept her Father's Trowel by her; and when the Prince her Son began to grow too ambitious, she showed him this Trowel which her Father had used, whereby she brought him to Obedience.  
The Maiden's Relations are immediately advanced to high Dignity, and Places of Honour, and her House and Family afterwards accounted Rich, and of great Quality, and the more she wins upon the Emperor's Affection, the higher their Friends are raised.  
The Marrying of the Empero's younger Sons is much after the same manner, only they use not so much care in the choice of their Wives: but the manner of bestowing their Daughters is several; for they send for twelve young Men of seventeen or eighteen years old, the tallest and handsomest that can be found, to come to the Palace, and set them in a Place where the Princess may see them; whom having viewed, she takes peculiar notice of two; which being shown to the Emperor, he elects one of them for his Son-in-law.  
When the Emperor Vanlie, Grandfather to the Emperor Theumchin, who Reigned about Anno 40. having two Youths brought before him on the forementioned account, saw one of them very richly Habited, and the other, though comelier, in poor Apparel, asked him why he was not so well Habited as his Companion? whereto he answered, O Emperor, the poor Estate of my Father will not permit me to appear in a better Condition: The Emperor replied, Because you are poor I will take you for my Son-in-law.  
The other Youths are sent back again, and accounted Noble, because they were allotted to this Choice.  
The Emperor's Son-in-law hath immediately a Fumme set over him, being two Learned Mandarins of the Court to be his Tutors, and instruct him in all Princely affairs.  
Till the Woman hath Children, the Man is bound to show Reverence three times a day with bended Knees, but when she is Delivered of a Child this Duty ceases: Yet there are many Ceremonies and Shows of Obedience that continue; for which reason Persons of Quality shun to be the Emperor's Sons-in-law; and this Custom of choosing twelve is no more observed.  
Is the Emperor accidentally casts his Eye on a Person of Quality, or a Learned Person, to make him his Son-in-law, they humbly desire and beg to be excused of it, fearing to live discontentedly all his life-time, if the Princess should take any dislike against him.  
As to what concerns the Emperor's prime Wife, who is called by the Title of Hoamheu, which is Empress, she hath her Seat behind the Emperor: the other six, and the next in Degree, are called Queens, and in great esteem.  
Besides these, the Emperor hath thirty Ladies of Honour, the rest being Concubines, to the number of three thousand, are young and beautiful Women, brought thither from all parts of the Empire, whom the Emperor visits at his pleasure, as his Fancy leads, or their Beauty attract.  
The Emperor Theumchim being a Chaste Man, they said of him, Pu thou cuin, that is, He goes not into the Palaces of Women; and some others such there have been: as on the contrary, there have been more, whose wand'ring Affections have been so unsatisfiable, that not pleased with their own Fancies to choose a Mate, they kept a little Wagon, drawn by Goats, letting them run whither they would, and into what Chamber soever they went and stood still, there the Emperor pitched for his amorous Dalliance.  
Another that would not take that trouble to go into the women's Palaces, caused them all to be presented to him in Pictures, and her whom he liked best he sent for. Thus far Semedo.  
The Tartar Emperor which at this day Governs, being a Youth of eighteen Years, hath twelve Empresses for his Service.   

Funerals▪ and Mourning for the Dead.  
ALl the Chinese Books which Treat of their Customs, endeavour nothing 
●…igant 〈◊〉▪  more than to incite Children to show Obedience to their Parents, and Respect to their Ancestors; which they show in nothing more than in their Funerals and Obsequies: for they not only Habit themselves in Mourning, but bestow great Cost on a Coffin.  
In the preparing for their Funerals, which may rather be called a glorious Show, they strive to exceed one another according to their State and Quality; nay, often go beyond their Capacity. They Mourn not in black, but White. The Sons at their Parent's Death wear a course Flaxen Coat, or rather Frock, which reaches down to their Feet, their Hats and Shoes are also very pitiful to behold; and they tie a Cord about their Wastes like the Franciscan Monks. This Mourning, according to an inviolable Law, for Father or Mother is strictly observed by the Children three whole years, for this reason (as they say in their Books,) that they should requite their Parents, and as a testimony of thankfulness that they have carried them three years in their Arms, and brought them up with great trouble during their Infancy. But the time which they Mourn for other Relations is much shorter; for some leave off Mourning within the Year, others in three Months, as in Europe.  
The lawful time to Mourn for the Emperor or Empress, is also three years, which all the Subjects observe through the whole Empire: But now upon the Emperor's permission, made known by Proclamation, Days are reckoned for Months, and so the whole Realm in a Month's time express their Sorrow for the Emperor's Death in Mourning.  
The Funeral Ceremonies and Customs of the Chinese observed at Burials, are written in a large Book, wherefore upon any one's Decease, those that are to take care to Inter the Body repair to that, wherein their Mourning Clothes, Shoes, Caps, Girdles, and the like, are not only described in it, but also represented in Pictures.  
When a Person of Quality happens to die, the Son of the Deceased, or nearest Kinsman, acquaints all the other Relations and Friends with it by a Book written in a mournful Style. Mean while the Coffin is made, and the Body put into it, and likewise the Hall or Chamber in which the Corpse stands, hung, and covered with white Cloth; in the middle of the Chamber is an Altar, on which stands the Coffin, and the Effigies of the Deceased.  
Into this Chamber on certain Days come all the Kindred of the Deceased clad in Mourning; whither they bring Rice, and setting two Wax-Candles on the Altar, burn Perfumes to the Honour of the Deceased. When the Candles are lighted, than they show Reverence to the Dead by bowing their Bodies and Kneeling four times: but they first put Frankincense into a Perfuming Pot with Fire, which is placed against the Coffin and the forementioned Image. Whilst these Ceremonies are performing, one or more Sons of the Deceased stand on each side of the Chest crying and lamenting; behind the Coffin all the Women of his Alliance, standing behind a Curtain, cry without ceasing. The Priests have ordained a Custom to burn Papers, cut after a peculiar fashion, as also white Silk-Stuffs; which is done (they say) that thereby the Deceased may be provided of Clothes in the other World.  
The Children oftentimes keep their dead-fathers' and Mother's in a Coffin in the House three or four years together, without the least nauseating smell coming through the Crannies, being coloured all over with the Gum which they call Cie. All which time they set before them every day Meat and Drink as if they were alive.  
The Sons during this time of Mourning do not sit on their usual Stools, but on low Benches covered with white Cloth; neither do they sleep on Beds, but on Mats of Straw, spread over the Floor near the Coffin. They eat no Flesh, nor drink, but upon pure necessity, not being suffered to be at any Feasts, nor for some Months to go abroad publicly, but are carried in Sedans covered with Mourning Cloth.  
Many other things they observe, which would be too tedious to relate.  
At the Day when the Corpse is to be carried out, the Friends and Relations are invited by another Book, and meet all in white Apparel to attend the Funeral; which is performed like the Romans Processioning; several Shapes of Men, Women, Elephants, Tigers, and Lions, made of Paper, but curiously Gilt and Painted, being carried before, and afterwards burnt at the Grave. The Priests mumbling their Heathen Prayers, follow the Corpse also in a long Train, and use several Ceremonies by the Way, beating on Drums, playing on Pipes, Cymbals, Bells, and the like. Before go likewise several Men, carrying of great Copper Perfuming-Pots on their Shoulders.  
Lastly, the Bier on which the Corpse lieth, is brought in great State under an Arched Canopy, made very artificially of Wood, and hung with Flannel, which is carried by forty, and sometimes by fifty Men.  
Behind the Bier follow the Sons on Foot, every one leaning on a Crutch, as if fainting with sorrow. Next follow the Women Kindred in Sedans hung with white Curtains, so that none can see them. The other Women which are not so nearly Allied to the Deceased, are also carried in Mourning Sedans.  
All their Curch-Yards and Tombs are near the City.  
If it happen that the Sons at their Parents Deaths are from home, than the Funeral is deferred till their Return.  
Also when a Son is informed of his Father's Death, he prepares, if he be a Man of an Estate, a great Feast, to which he invites, and makes mournful Complaints to all his Friends; then returning home with the first opportunity, he renews the same Ceremonies again in order as before; nay, a Son is obliged by the Law, though he enjoy the greatest Office in the Empire, or be one of the prime Council in Peking, or of the Colaos, who is the next Person of the Emperor, yet he must come home and spend three years in Mourning, before he is permitted to go again to his former Employment.  
But this is only to be understood for their Parents, and not for any other Relations.  
Only Generals and Magistrates are free from this Law at the Death of their Parents.  
If any one die out of his native Country, than he who is left to take care of the Corpse uses all endeavours, without sparing either Cost or Charges, to carry it home, that there he may be Interred in the Grave of his Ancestors; for every Family hath a peculiar Burying place on some Hill in the Suburb of the City. The Sepulchers are large, built of Marble, and adorned with several Shapes of Men and Beasts. They also erect great and stately Tombstones, on which are Engraven in a noble Style the famous Acts of their Predecessors.  
In this manner hath Trigaut described their Mourning; but we will also annex what Alvares Semedo, Adrianus de las Cortes, and Adam Scall have written concerning the same.  
In many things concerning the Life of Man, the Chineses agree with the European Philosophers, but differ much about the Concerns of the Dead. The Europeans make little ado about their Funerals, whereas the Chineses esteem nothing more, and are very careful in their Life-time to give Order to their Children for them, who show all obedience and dutifulness in performing the same after their Deaths.  
It is a general Custom in China, not to bury the Dead naked, though a Child of two years old, but put it into a Coffin, according to every one's Capacity; in which the richer sort, notwithstanding the Chineses are of a covetous disposition, strive to exceed one another, endeavouring to get the best and sweetest Wood that grows.  
Those that have no Children, spare not to give a thousand Crowns for the Wood of a Coffin, though it be nothing near so much worth; which being made and beautified with Ornamentals of Gold, Silver, Painting, Imagery, and the like, is brought home, and oftentimes set in their Chambers to delight them by looking upon it. On the contrary, those which being stricken in years have no Coffins, are always sad and melancholy.  
This Custom they generally observe through the whole Empire; and as they received their Religion from the Indians, they have likewise borrowed many other things of them, imitating them especially in three sorts of Burials, viz. in the Earth, in the Water, and in the Fire; for the japanners will some throw themselves headlong from the tops of Mountains; others tying Stones about their Necks, leap into Rivers; and do many other things to shorten their Lives: But the Chineses have not such stout Hearts to bury themselves alive; but poor People, who have not wherewith to purchase a Coffin, burn the Corpse, and bury the Ashes.  
In the Province of Suchuen the Dead are burned, and the Ashes gathered and put into Vessels, and so thrown into the Rivers or Brooks.  
Their Coffins are made of hard black Planks, the Seams covered with jews-glue, or Gum, by the Portuguese called Charan, or Giaro, and by the Chinese, Cie and Cia.  
Every one hath his peculiar Place, or Tomb, without the Wall of the City, for they are not permitted within.  
Some build handsome Houses there, walling them round, and planting Cypress, and other Trees, according to the nature of the Soyl.  
These Places are valued according to the opinion which they have of the Ground; for if a Conjurer hath judged it to be lucky to Build on, they exceedingly enhanse the value thereof: nor do they ever buy any Land without the advice of those People.  
At their Burials they observe one Order, to put the chief Corpse of the Family at the upper end, and set the other side by side according to their Degrees.  
Their Graves are neatly hewn out of Stone, and on the top adorned with Shapes of Beasts, as Hearts, Elephants, and Lions, with Encomiastic Inscriptions.  
Persons of Quality, especially those that are single, bestow more Cost, building stately Palaces and Rooms under Ground like Cells; which are made very convenient to lay the Corpse in.  
Here all the Relations meet at the time of their Deaths, to do their Offerings and other Ceremonies.  
For the Poor which have not Money to buy a peculiar Burying-place, there is a common Churchyard in every City, wherein they lie buried all together.  
They chiefly desire to be buried in their Predecessors Graves, though never so far from the Place where they die, as it often happens to Governors of remote Provinces of the Empire, and thither their Friends, to do them the last honour, convey them.  
The first Ceremony observed at any one's Departure is, that the Sick, when dying, is carried on a Mat to give up the Ghost in a Hall: Yet Persons of Quality are not removed, but die on their Beds.  
When a Father dies, than the eldest Son plucks off his Cap from his Head, and comes with his Hair dishevelled to the Bed, and tearing the Curtains and Sheets in Pieces, lays them on the Corpse; then the Body (if a Male, by Men, if a Female, by Women) is according to their Custom washed; which done, they lay it in a Cotton Cloth, or else in Silk, and put on his best Apparel; next to the Corpse they lay the Badges of his Office, and Degrees of his Learning which he attained in his Life-time. The Body thus Garnished, is laid in a Coffin, which stands in a Hall hung round about with black. The Effigies of the Deceased drawn to the Life, with his Arms and Livery, are all placed at the Head of the Coffin, and at the Feet stands a Table covered with a Carpet, before which is a Curtain drawn for the Women to stand behind unseen. The Children and Nephews sit mournfully on Straw. In the first Gallery leading to the Entrance into the Hall, stand several Trumpeters on both sides, and two with Tabers at the Gate of the House in the inside; before the House in the Street hangs a Bundle of Pieces of Paper made fast to a Stick which reaches down to the Ground, as a sign of their new-begun Mourning, and to give notice to their Neighbours: Afterwards the Children of the Deceased acquaint their nearest Relations and others by a Letter of their Loss; who thereupon come to visit them in this Order: First the Visitant walks into the outer Court before the House, and there puts on Mourning, the Drums beating the whilst; which done the Trumpets sounds as he passes through the Gallery: so soon as he enters the Hall the Women behind the Curtain begin to cry, and then approaching the Table he lays a Paper Purse of Money upon it, to defray some of the Charges; after he hath bowed his Head three or four times on the Corpse, and kneeled down, the Childring lifting him up, place him on their left sides, and show the same Reverence to him: After all these Ceremonies passed, every one seats himself without speaking a word.  
All those Friends which come thither as Visitants are received by one of the Deceased's Relations, Clad in a Mourning Garb, who conducts them into an Antichamber, where desiring them to sit, proffers them Tee, dried Fruit and Sweetmeats, of which they eating but little, take and put it into their Nets and go away.  
These Civilities are so strictly observed, that Friends, though they dwell not near, but in some other Cities, come Riding thither; or if it be too far, they send one of their Family to excuse them.  
These Ceremonies ended, the eldest Son is obliged to go and visit every one in the City, which came to Mourn with him; yet to shun so much trouble he goes only to their Doors, where leaving a Letter he proceeds to the next. Then they speak of the Funeral if their Purses be able to hold out, if not, they keep the Coffin in the House till the next opportunity, which happens sometimes not in a whole year. At the time appointed all the Friends are advised thereof by a Thu, or Letter; who when met, go to the House: Before them are carried great Images of Men, Horses, Elephants, Lions, Tigers, and other Beasts, made of Gilt Paper; then follow other Shapes, viz. of Wagons, triumphal Arches, Pyramids, and the like, adorned with Silk and Roses of divers colours: all which things are burned when the Coffin is put into the Ground, if it be a Person of Quality. These Images are followed by great numbers of People that come out of curiosity to see the Funeral: Next walk the Friends all in Mourning, than the Bonzi Singing their Prayers, and Taboring on Basins; who are followed by a second sort of Bonzies, that let their Hair and Beards grow, and play on several sorts of Instruments; these again by a third, that shaving their Hair, differ in their Doctrine from the rest; then come the Acquaintance, and the nearest Relations; the last are the Children and Nephews all in close Mourning barefooted, hanging down their Heads, and carrying a Stick of two Foot long in their Hands. All this Company walk before the Corpse, which is carried (if of costly Wood, Gilt and Varnished with their Charan) uncovered, on a great Bier, by thirty, forty, or fifty Men, for the greatness of the Funeral consists in the number of Bearers. Behind the Coffin the Women follow Crying, being locked up in their Sedans, and covered with Mourning. When they are come to the Grave, they use many Ceremonies before they put the Corpse into the Ground; amongst which one, and none of the least, is a great Feast for all the Company in a stately large House; which done, every one returns home, and observes the time of Mourning and the usual Ceremonies, which are as followeth, viz.  
Three whole years this Sorrow continues, during which time the Children sit only on little Benches, covered with White. They eat not at Tables, nor sleep on a Bedstead, but on a Mat, laid upon the Floor. They also abstain from Wine and Flesh; neither do they go to Baths or Feasts, nor abroad but in a close Mourning Sedan. But that which is more, they never converse (as they say) with their Wives all that time; nor are employed in any public Business of State: and if they have any Employment, though a Viceroy or Colao, they are forced to forsake it to attend the Obsequies, and spend their time in Mourning; which when expired, they not only enjoy their Places again, but are after promoted to higher Dignities. This time they account so holy, that they receive no Pay, though Captains of Companies.  
Some years since it happened, that a Commander of the Province of Canton, who was more desirous to follow his Employment than keep the full time of his Mourning, made his Account so, that the time which he spent in his Journey to the Court should be part of his Mourning time, which he wanted to make up the three years: but coming to the Court with intention to enter into his Office again, he was sent back to his House, to spend the remaining time of his Mourning, before he might appear there.  
The number of three years is strictly observed, for an acknowledgement that the three first years they were carried more in their Parents Arms than on their own Legs; wherefore as a sign of Obedience they may not err from that Order which their Predecessors maintained.  
The Women Mourn but one year, the near Relations three Months, and the Acquaintance three days: And because these accidents often happen, there are few but what have Mourning Coats lying ready by them. Thus far Semedo.  
Father Adrian de las Cortes, makes mention of the Chineses Mourning for their Parents after this manner, viz. The ordinary Mourning Coat, which both Men and Women wear, is very wide, made of course white Hemp, raveled and full of Patches. The Sons carry a Cane in their Hands, on which they lean when their Fathers die; but when their Mothers die, a Stick or Truncheon of Wood On their Heads the Men wear a Bonnet of course Linen; from whence a great raveled Cloth hangs down over their ●…aces. The Maids wear a Coif on their Heads of course Linen; a Girdle of Tow ●…y'd about their Middle hangs down with one end to the Ground.  
Their time of Mourning for their Father and Mother is three years, in requital (as we said) of their three first years, in which their Parents suckled, and carried them in their Arms.  
For the Death of Friends they Mourn a longer or shorter time, according to their acquaintance and obligations.  
The Friends of the Deceased go not with covered Faces, nor Sticks in their Hands like the Sons, as appears by the inserted Sculps and Directions of the following Letters and Figures.  

Mourning Habit for Father and Mother.  
A An ordinary wide Coat raveled, and with many Patches.  
B A Mourning Cane, serving for a Crutch when a Father dies.  
C A Mourning Stick for a Mother.  
D A Mourning Cap or Bonnet of Hemp for the Death of Father or Mother.  
E A Coif of the same.  
F A Veil for Women for their Father or Mother.  
G A Girdle of Tow for a Father.  
H A Girdle of Tow for a Mother.   

Mourning for Relations which are neither Fathers nor Mothers.  
1 A course Coif of white Linen.  
2 Ordinary Mourning Stockings raveled out.  
3 A Bonnet like a Mitre, of course Hemp.  
4 An ordinary Mourning Girdle.  
5 Raveled Mourning Shoes.  
6 A wide Coat much raveled.  
7 An Apron much raveled.   
After the Death of either Father or Mother, amongst other Ceremonies which they observe, especially at the Funeral, they have a Custom not to sit on Stools for a certain time, nor sleep on Beds, nor eat Flesh, nor drink Wine, keep from their Wives, speak not aloud, go not out of their Houses, except in Sedans covered with course Linen, and many other things more, till time hath worn away Sorrow.  
Except Militia Officers, all Persons are obliged, though the prime Colao's, to forsake their Offices for three years for their Father or Mother's Death, which time they are to spend in Mourning for them. Thus far De las Cortes.  
In this manner the Chineses perform their Funerals, or Inter their Dead; but the Tartars, who at this day Govern the Realm of China, observe quite another manner. The jesuit Adam Scall describes them both in the following words:  
Both Tartars and Chinese (saith he) take a peculiar care for the burying of their Dead; for they imagine that all the happiness of their Successors dedepends upon it: wherefore they often lay by three, four, five hundred, nay a thousand Crowns in their life-time to be bestowed on their Graves: To which purpose they also gather Planks of Cedar, and other like lasting Woods, which they send for two or three hundred Leagues off, to make them Coffins, wherein they may for ever, as they suppose, lie secure; which the jesuit Martinius testifies in these words:  
It is (saith he) by them accounted a great happiness for him, who before his 
Histor. Sinens. lib. 5.  Death makes himself a Coffin of the best and strongest Wood, some of which costs sometimes two thousand Crowns; for they send for the most durable and best Wood out of remote Countries, so that there is no City but there are Coffins to be sold in it, nay most People buy them before their Deaths, and keep them in their Houses.  
The upper Planks (saith Scall) of the Tartars Coffins are sloping like a Roof, and Painted on the outside, not regarding the thickness of the Planks, because they put their Coffins to no other use, than to hold the Body for a short time, and carry them out in; for coming to their Funeral Piles, they burn the Coffins with the Corpse. But those of the Chineses are narrower at the Feet, and broader and higher at the Head, the upper Plank smooth, and reaching over the sides, that the thickness thereof may be seen, which is chiefly observed and taken notice of. They are very careful to choose a Burying-place; for if they have not Land of their own, than they purchase it at a great Rate. Those Places are principally made choice of in a dry Soil, where no Rivers nor Highways are near, nor any Temples or Towers, but must be on a Plain, which neither rises before nor behind. Such a Place being chosen, they surround it with a Bank of Earth like a Half-Moon, which rises in the Middle, and runs sloping down on both sides, yet not smooth but scollope-like; at the upper end of which they bury the eldest, and below him on each side the Sons and Nephews, not in one Grave, but every one apart under a little Hillock, and the chief of the Family under the highest Hill: In the middle on a Stone Table are placed variety of Provisions, Perfumes, and other things, in honour of the Deceased.  
Any one that amongst a Family is raised to a higher degree of Honour than his Predecessors, erects his own Tomb in his life-time; whereon they Carve the Shapes of Men or Beasts, according to every Man's Quality and Estate, Planting the remaining part of the Ground with Cedar Trees, and Walled round.  
The Tartars differ herein; for though they, according to the conveniency and Place, require the same things as the Chineses, yet they observe not the same manner in their Burial; for the old People are buried apart, and the younger by themselves.  
The Chineses also erect a Tombstone, on which is Engraven the Age of the Deceased, his Office, and the Emperor's Favours to him: and to prevent the Characters from being defaced, and the remembrance of the Deceased's Exploits from being worn out; besides the Tombstone they bury another square Stone in the Ground with the same Inscription, that when the first is worn out, that may appear perfect, and serve as a Memorial of all his Achievements.  
When any one dies, whoever he be, all the Friends and Relations come about the Corpse, crying and Mourning over it.  
Persons of Quality send a piece of very thin white Linen, with a Letter to their Friends, to acquaint them of the dead Corpse, who at an appointed day come thither, bringing with them Perfumes, Wax-Candles, and Money; coming into the House they go to a Table, placed opposite to the Coffin in the midst of the Hall; having set fire on the Perfumes that stand upon the Table, they step a little backwardand show Reverence to the Effigies of the Deceased, Painted at the Head of the Coffin, by kneeling four times, and bowing their Heads to the Ground, whilst they make a mournful Cry.  
These Ceremonies being performed, the nearest Relations appear also on one side of the Coffin between the Curtains; and coming forth show the same Reverence, also kneeling, and bowing their Heads four times to the Ground. The time of Visiting ended, the nearest Kindred come the next day into the House of Mourning, from whence they convey the Corpse to the Grave, or at least to the City Gates; for which Kindness the Children go from House to House in Sackcloth, and with their Faces looking down on the Ground, return Thanks, by showing Reverence to their Visitants, who on purpose stand at their Doors.  
But the Tartars observe quite another way of Interring their Dead, viz. on the same day that any one dies, the Corpse being put in a Coffin, and the Friends having Wept over it in the House, they carry it away, except the Deceased was a Viceroy or Governor.  
The Relations accompany the Hearse, and afterwards placing themselves in Rows, on each side of the Funeral Pyre; those of her Family set fire of the Wood, and so burn the Body, whose Ashes on the third day are gathered, and put into a Porcelain Urn, to be buried.  
Yet far greater Honour is shown to the Vice-Roys, whether Tartars or Chinese, for when a Tartar King dies, his Servants, after some formal Lamentations, are placed on each side of the Ourt-gate, that they may be seen, holding his Achievements; for some have Helmets, others Bonnets, those Girdles, others again Swords, Belts, Bows, Quivers, and other like things in which he delighted. Thus ordered, they make a continual doleful noise all the time of their standing there.  
In the same Order his Horses stand to be seen, held by his Grooms, with rich Saddles, and Caparisons of Velvet.  
There stand also Camels handsomely Harnesed, and loaden with the Goods that are to be used at the Funeral, and by them, under the Gates Drummers and Trumpeters.  
At the appointed day the Corpse is carried out, before which ride Trumpeters Sounding mournfully, then follow twenty or thirty choice Camels, with Silk Bridles and Saddles hanging at their Necks, and loaden with Tents and other Furniture, to be carried to the Grave; next follow such as bear Silk Umbrella's, and Painted and Gilded Fans; then Ensigns, Flags, Pennons, and the like, with Silver Chargers; after those, richly Caparisoned Horses, laden with his best Householdstuff, and led by Grooms; and lastly, the Sedans which the Viceroy used.  
The place of Burial is encompassed with a Mat in stead of a Wall, within whose Enclosure stand Tents, furnished with rich Goods, to be burnt. In the middle appears a great Hall, also made of Mats, to put the body in: Those that were the last that attended the Train, appear by this Hall first, and behind them stand the rest, each, according to their Qualities: The remaining vacancy within this Enclosure, and behind the Hall, being for the Women: When they are all within, standing for a considerable time, they make a hideous noise, more like howling than weeping; which done, and all things ready for the Offering, the Priests, or other Persons appointed, Garnishing Tables with Fruits and Preserves, and Meat in great Silver Chargers, they deliver a Cup with Wine to the chiefest Viceroy there present, who holds it up three times as an Offering to the Deceased.  
Mean while, a Letter of Recommendation from the Emperor is produced, wherein the Merits of the Deceased are set forth, and he Honoured with a Noble Title.  
The chiefest of the present Councillors, having read this Letter with a loud Voice, throws it into the fire and burns it; so bowing their Heads three times, they rise again, and begin to cry: Then those of his Family set fire on a Paper Mountain, covered all over with Purple Flannel, into which they throw the richest Clothes, Hats, Saddles, Gold and Silver Vessels, Sedans and Beds of the Deceased, which being consumed, they gather the melted Gold and Silver, and putting it into Paper, on the third day throw it into the fire again, adding to it other Riches, till all be burnt: The Horses bereaved o their Caparisons, are let loose, and bought by those that please for half their worth.  
This done, all the Invited depart, being conducted by one of the Viceroy's, out at the Gate, where he thanks them.  
But the Tartars are not satisfied with this one Funeral, for seven days after they renew it again, and a third time seven days after that, till all things be consumed that the Deceased loved and esteemed.  
Moreover, if the Deceased had a more than ordinary belov'd Concubine, or Prime Favourite, they murder themselves; for the Concubine, whether willing or unwilling, is forced to Hang herself, to comfort, delight, and accompany (as these ignorant People say) the Deceased in the other World: Yet the more understanding Persons, being somewhat better instructed, have of late, dreading such horrid Murders, Petitioned the Emperor, by his Proclamation, to forbid such Cruelties; and likewise the wasting and burning of Householdstuff, and other Materials, which his Imperial Majesty hath accordingly Ordered, so that in stead of rich Cloth of Tissue, they only burn Gilded Paper, and have in a manner left off the Barbarous Custom of killing themselves at the Grave.  
Having ended their Offerings, and crying a second or third time in the presence of all those that are afresh come to the Funeral-Pyre; they erect a Hall or Court, being the Tomb, (as if for a live Person) surrounding it with Walls, along whose sides are several Apartments, after the same manner, like those in which the Deceased in his life time recreated himself; in these they place the faithfullest Servants: In the middle thereof, they make the Tomb of Bricks, on a square Mount, round about which they place the Cushions and Sedans of the Deceased, on the Walls on each side hang his Girdle, Sword, Belt, a Quiver full of Arrows, and a Bow: In this Hall, for a whole year, they bring Meat every day, which they put at the Foot of the Mount for the Deceased, as if he were to feed upon it, whilst those that bring it, stand on one side crying. These are for the Great Ones; but the Tartars of meaner quality, wanting Estates, build no Hall over their Graves, but placing only Meat, or Tee near the same, go away again.  
The Chineses on the contrary, after their Friends and Relations are met, and having shown the usual Reverence to the Deceased, go out of the House in this Order: Before on a long Stick is carried a Red Silk Cloth, whereon is written the Name, Titles, Age, and Quality of the Deceased, in Silver Characters; then follow a great number of Children, who carry all manner of Flowers, made of coloured Paper, upon Canes, besides Representations of Men, Beasts, Gardens, Houses, and the like, Painted on Paper to delight the Eye: If the Deceased in his life time was famous for his Zeal in Religion, than his Images (curiously Painted) are born before him; after which comes next in order the Effigies of the Deceased, on a rich Bier, followed by the Bonzues, Playing on Tabers, Cymbals, and other Instruments; then Antics and Stage-players come Riding on Horseback, in the same Habits they are to Act in at the Grave, and all the way as they pass, showing Tricks and using other Mimic Gestures: The Orphans walk just behind the Corpse, leaning on Sticks, and supported under their Arms by their Servants, as if excess of sorrow had thus weakened them: The Bier on which the Corpse stands, covered with rich Silk Clothes, is carried by eight, sixteen, nay sometimes thirty two Bearers. When they come to the Grave, those that have attended the Funerals, throw what they have carried on a heap of Paper, which setting on fire, they go to the Tables that stand before the Corpse, Garnished with several Fruits and Perfumes, besides a scalded Hogg and Lamb at each end; then three or four of the Eminentest set fire of the Perfumes before the whole company. Lastly, They step aside and make room for him who is to write on a Board made before, being three Fingers broad, and an Ell long, the Name and Quality of the Deceased, first they set down this Mark 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifies Emperor; and for this cause they that are to do this, must be clad in such Apparel, as any of Quality might appear in before the Emperor. This Person with the Pencil in his Hand, craves pardon of all the Spectators, for his bold attempt, excusing his unworthiness of that Office; then he writes over the first Mark, on the upper end of the Board with black Ink, another in this manner 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 for then that which signified Emperor is changed, and is as much as Lord; so that in this manner, with the first under written Name of the Deceased, a full Sentence is made, viz. The Lord N. N. This Board the Deceased's Friends carry with his Image to his House, that it may be yearly Worshipped and remembered by his Predecessors. So soon as this Inscription is finished, the Writer goes by them all, having Bowed and Kneeled four times: But before the Friends depart, they are either entertained in a House, raised of Mats, or in the next Chapel, at a Noble Treat, at which the first Cup is given to the Children, as they say, to wipe off their Tears. At their return home, some Tausus or Conjurers come to the Mourning House, that by the sprinkling of certain Water, they may drive away (as they say) evil Spirits, and bring Peace and Quiet to the House.  
The Chinese and Tartars use one Colour, but not one Fashion for their Mourning.  
All the Tartars, both Friends and Relations, wear a long Coat of Sackcloth, reaching down to their Feet, and gird it about their Middle with a Hempen Cord; they put on their oldest Buskins, and worst Hats, without the red Silk-Fringe, which at other times they wear for an Ornament.  
The Hair of their Head or Beard is not shaved in all that time.  
After the expiration of a Month, every one throws in a fire of Paper, and other such like Materials, their Mourning Girdle, with which they judge their Mourning to be ended, and Habit themselves again in their usual Apparel.  
Neighbours and acquaintance show that they Mourn by pulling their Silk Fringe from their Hats.  
The Tartar Women, in the time of Mourning, change their Apparel, being usually Black, into White; their Coifs, which else are covered with their Hair, resemble a White Cap, with Tassels that hang over their Shoulders.  
The Chineses Mourning altars yearly, their first year, both Men and Women wear all over their Bodies a Suit of Sackcloth full of holes, with Shoes of White Cloth, and a Rope about their Wastes, seeming thus by the carelessness of their Garb, to express their sorrow for the Death of their Parents. The second year their Habit is made of sleight Cloth, their Hat of the usual Fashion, but of another Colour, their Shoes handsomer, and their Girdles of Hemp left off. The third year they may wear Silk Clothes, and their Hats of the same Stuff, but White, or else of the usual Colour, which is generally Black.  
In this time they follow no employment, though of the greatest concern, nor may sit opposite to or by the Visitants, as others, but on a low Bench.  
In the first Months, they not only abstain (as is usual in Fast) from Flesh, Fish, Milk, Wine, and the like, but eat very unsavoury things, neither seasoned with Salt nor Herbs: And as the time of Mourning for a Wife, Brother, more distant Relations or Friends is much shorter, so is also their Apparel and Meat better.  
The children's Mourning for their Parents is three year, which time the Wife must observe for the death of her Husband; the eldest Son, or his Wife, is by his Parents Mourned for a year, and as long a time the Man Mourns for his Wife, and one Brother for another.  
This long time of Mourning, observed by the Children, for the Death of 
Histor. Sin. l. 1. c. 23.  their Parents, hath (as Martinius tell us) been observed by the Chineses ever since the Emperor Xun's time, who Mourned for▪ his Predecessor Ya, being his Father, three whole years at his Grave, without stirring thence, and intrusting the care of his Realm (during that time) to his Vice-Roys; and as the same Martinius adds, from thence it is, that they Mourn in that manner for their Parents, always staying in their Houses, laying down all Offices, changing their Meat and Furniture to meaner, and always sitting on a low Bench; upon this account also they drink no Wine, but live only on Potherbs: Their Clothes are very Fantastic, made of Sackcloth; their Lodging Rooms meaner, nay, they frame their manner of speaking to a much more sorrowful Tone, and whereas before they used to write with Red on Paper streaked with Vermilion, now they use only Yellow or Blue Colours, as a token of their Sorrow.  
It is very strange to observe the Duty and Reverence which the Children show to their Dead Parents, wherein no other People may be compared to them, for many (though Magistrates) when observing that their Parents being grown very old, have need of their help, they desire the Emperor to excuse them from their Office, without urging any thing, but that according to their Duty they may go to assist their aged Father, which the Emperor seldom refuses.  
As to what concerns their Mourning three years, the Chinese Philosophers give this reason, That it is most fit, those which in their first three years have received their Parent's Love, should spend so much time after their Death in Mourning and bewailing their loss; therefore it is no marvel, that the Chineses count it the greatest misfortune in the world to have no Children, because they know that no body will look after them in their Age, nor at their Death Mourn for them.  
The reasons why they make White to be Mourning, and not Black, is, as themselves say, because White is Natural, when as all other things are Died, or Artificial; by which, as they say, is signified, that in Sorrow, neither Art nor Pride must be shown, for where a true Sorrow is, Nature sufficiently expresses it. Thus far Martinius.  
With great preparation and Pomp the Emperor Zungte, Father to this present Emperor 
a Adam Schall.  was Interred.  
The next day being the eighth of their first Moon, after the Emperor's Death, his Corpse was put into the Coffin about Noon: There was not one Tartar in all Peking that served in public Affairs, but he went thither with his Wife and Daughters, which so thronged the Courts, that none were able to get thorough: The eldest were received into the first Court, next the Emperor's Lodging, where they all together bewailed his Death, with many loud Shrieks and Cries; in which (to admiration) they obse●…e an exact time, with stops and pauses, as in Music.  
After all, the Tartars divided into eight Companies, let into the Emperor's Hall by two and two, there bewailed his Death, they went away, and made room for others, so that the Cry continued without any cessation, the Multitudes still going out, and coming in.  
Mean while, there were not a few that fasted three days, not daring to go out of the Gates, nor their Servants suffered to bring them any Refreshment.  
Father john Adam Schall at that time present, there taking compassion of the People, which were ready to perish for Hunger and Thirst, Petitioned the Governors, either to furnish them with Provisions on the public Account, or else set the Multitude return home; alleging, that there were Women amongst them, and that their weak Sex was not able to endure such Inconveniencies, and likewise ancient People, that worn out with sicknesses, were not used to undergo such hardship.  
No sooner was Schals Petition delivered, but the Governors looking upon his Request to be just, let all the People go away, with resolution, that all the Mandarins should every Morning for the seven following days, Weep half an hour in the Emperor's Chamber; after which, every one should retire and observe the established Month of Fasting for the Emperor.  
The fourteenth of the first new Moon, they gave the new Emperor Konchi his Oath, at the performance whereof, every Bench were in particular led into a Hall.  
The chief of the first and second Order went to the upper Hall, where having with the rest lamented over the Deceased Emperor's Body, the Oath was publicly read before them all; to which they all showed Reverence by thrice Kneeling and bowing their Heads to the Ground, and calling upon the Dead to witness the same.  
Then going from the Court, they went to an Idol-Temple, where they gave him the Oath again, and finished their begins Work with the same Ceremonies.  
When on the seventh day, after the Emperor's Death, the slight Roofs made of Mats were taken away, the chief Funeral-Priest seated himself in the open Court; after which, the chiefest being called into the Hall, and the rest standing at the Door, they began again to Cry, which dured longer than ordinary, because the Queen-Mother was there present, and began first with all her Women. Then many Silver and Gold Vessels were brought out of a Tent erected for the Corpse; and Tables being also set about the Coffin, richly Garnished with Sweetmeats in Silver Chargers, all which was thrown into the Fire. The remaining time, as from the first day when they went to lament, the City Servants and petty Governors holding all that had belonged to the Emperor, as his Horses, Achievements, Flags, and other things of State, stood in a Row at the Entrance of the Palace, from whence they stirred not till the Mandarins went away. On the first of the second Moon the Crying and forementioned Ceremonies were again renewed, early in the Morning in the presence of the Queen-Mother, and the Tables, which four Men could scarce carry, were again with Clothes, Carpets, and the like, thrown into the Fire. The last day they met to accompany the Corpse, which was placed behind the Palace in a Hall on a neighbouring Mount, which abounds with Deer, Hearts, Stags, and the like Beasts for the Emperor's Recreations, till the Imperial Tomb should be made ready in some other Place. First the Way, which from the Palace runs to the Mount, was Grabelled and laid plain, to prevent the rising of the Dust, to which inconvenience the Streets in Peking are very subject. Thither came all the Grandees Habited in white Mourning, to accompany the Corpse; before went nine Elephants with Turrets on their Backs; forty Camels, caparisoned with red clothes and Bridles plated with Gold, and rich Symiters hanging down by their Necks, were loaden with Tents and other Furniture: then followed an hundred Horses, led by yellow Bridles, without Gold, except the Buckles, which were only Gilded: next in order were Drums, Trumpets, and others with Instrumental Music to the number of a hundred; behind which were carried fifty Gilded Hammers, and above an hundred Flags of several colours, with wild Beasts, Birds, and twenty eight Stars, stitched with Thr●… of Gold; then again fifty Hammers, after which were led a hundred Saddled Horses, the last thirty laden with rich Flannel, and the Emperor's Clothes condemned to the Fire; next these came twenty Youths, every one holding an Imperial Quiver, embossed with Pearls and Precious Stones, besides Bows and Arrows, and just before them walked twelve Greyhounds; behind these came the Emperor's Sedan, born by sixteen Men, in which when living he used to be carried, richly Gilt, and on the top adorned with a Golden Ball; the Bearers were clad in a Livery of a Saffron colour, Embroidered with Roses of Gold▪ next them were carried several Gold and Silver Chargers; behind which followed the Bier with the Emperor's Corpse, covered with Cloth of Tissue, Embroidered with blue Clouds and Flowers, supported by thirty two Bearers, all in a Saffron-coloured Livery, and adorned with Golden Roses; behind the Corpse came Soldiers with Pikes and other Arms; then the Emperor's Mother in a Sedan covered with Purple-Silk; next hers, seven more covered with white Cotton, in every one of which was a Queen, or Concubine of the Emperor's; than followed many Grandees on Foot; lastly, all the Magistrates, and those that showed Reverence by kneeling and bowing to the Corpse as it passed by, followed disorderly one among another to the Grave, which was environed with a Wall, but the multitude pulling it down, quickly made room for all comers.  
The Governors of the first Degree going into the base Court before the Hall, where the Bearers had set down the Corpse, stood and cried all together, as likewise those that stood about them; at length one of the chiefest Vice-Roys lifting up a Golden Cup with Wine three times, they all bowed their Heads down to the Ground: then the Viceroy offered the forementioned Cup as an Oblation: Before the Corpse stood a Table strowed full of Silver and Gold Flowers, and all sorts of Perfumes: Then they began again to cry till they all went away, leaving the rest of the Ceremonies to be performed the next Morning. At every Gate the chief Viceroy Offered before the Coffin a Cup with Wine, which he lifted up three times as before, and then delivered it to a prime Councillor, who put it aside to be Offered again at last with the rest.  
The next Morning, being the twenty seventh day after the Emperor's Death, they all met again by the Corpse, and every one standing in their appointed Places began their general Lamentation. Having performed all Ceremonies as on the day before, the Letter given by the Emperor to his Son, containing the Praise due to the Deceased, was publicly read; whereupon the Magistrates doubling their Shrieks and Cries, returned into the base Court, whilst four of the chiefest Persons of Quality going to the Paper Mountain, covered with yellow Silk, carried in an open Cloth, a Sable Suit of the deceased Emperor, with his Hat raised on the Crown with Pearls and Diamonds, and likewise a Sable Quilt whereon to lay his Head. Others in ten Carpets bore ten several Suits more of the Emperor's; and Saddles and Caparisons for Horses were also laid on the Heap, besides Flags, Fans, Gold Plates, and the Emperor's Sedan; all which being brought to the Heap of Paper, covered with yellow Silk, they set on fire, and threw in the Tables full of Flannel Clothes, many Gold and Silver Vessels, which being melted streamed down the Hill like a Rivulet. Then the Governors untied their Girdles, which being of white Cloth, they had fastened about their Middle, and so throwing them into the Flame they were released of their Mourning. Lastly, they pulled off all their Mourning Habit, and leaving it there went home.  
Three days after the prime Governors of the first Order came thither with the Tartars (the Chinese being locked out) and prepared a new Funeral, at which they used the same Ceremonies, carrying Fans, and leading Horses and Camels. The same four Grandees brought another Suit of the Emperor's, and a Hat, having only one great Pearl on the Crown, which they, as before, threw on Paper Heaps, and likewise some Saddles beset with Pearls and Diamonds, which done every one returned home.  
All these Ceremonies are renewed from day to day till the hundredth day; during which time no Music may be heard, nor any Plays acted through all the City; and they continue mourning after the hundredth, for the Tartars watch by the Coffin continually.  
After the expiration of two years, when the time was come to carry the Corpse to the appointed Grave, twenty four Leagues from the City of Peking, all the Mandarins conducted the Corpse on Foot out of the City, where they took leave of it on their bended Knees.  
Zungte the Emperor of China and Tartary, made some years since a very great 
Adam Scall.  Funeral for one of his Concubines which was after this manner:  
He accompanied the Corpse in Person out of his Palace Gates, where the Body was laid in State till the expiration of a hundred days, at the end of which to be burnt, and by his Order to have Offerings made for it every fourth day; the Materials for which, besides the other Preparations, cost the Emperor above ten thousand Ducats. Amongst other wasteful Ceremonies he caused all the Tables, with their Silken clothes to be thrown into the Fire. The Bier followed, as we said, before, by the Emperor, was covered with Velvet; before it were carried three Sedans, seeming to be all Gold, though only Gilt, which being beset with Precious Stones, made a glorious show; before the Sedans went three Wains drawn by Horses, which being covered on the top, were also richly Gilded: thousands of People made daily a great Cry, and the rest of the Ceremonies were all like the forementioned, in which, they say, was spent eight hundred thousand Ducats.  
With a peculiar magnificence and splendour was formerly solemnised the Funeral of a Chinese Emperor and Empress. Semedo describes that of the Empress, Mother to the Emperor Vanlie, who deceased Anno 1614 on the last of May, in the following words:  

I. That all the Mandarins, as well Military as Civil, should on the following day appear in the Palace to Mourn for the Empresses Death, which being done, they should immediately go again to their Houses and Courts of Judicature, and there spend three days in abstaining from Flesh, Fish, Eggs, and Wine; that the following three days they should attend at the Palace Gate, and one by one come and visit the Corpse, with due Reverence and shows of great Sorrow; after which every one might return home.  
II. That all the Mandarins Wives of the four first Orders, should for three days be there present in Mourning Apparel from Head to Foot, and bewail the Empresses Death, strictly forbidding to Dress themselves, or wear Jewels in their Houses during twenty seven days.  
III. That those of the Emperor's Council, called Hanlim, should make Epitaphs and Funeral Orations in praise of the Empress.  
IV. That the Quanlosu, which are the Overseers of the Emperor's Treasury, should without delay pay all the Charge which would be requisite for the Offerings and Funeral.  
V. That the Bonzies should Toll the Bells of their several Temples, as a sign of Mourning and Sorrow.  
VI That no Meat should be sold in the Markets for seventeen days, and every one Fast, according to the Emperor's Example, who for the three first days did eat only a little Rice and Water, and all his Retinue nothing but Roots.  
VII. The prime Councillor of their Laws was commanded to give Mourning to all Ambassadors and Agents then present at the Court, and bring them to the Palace to show Reverence to the Corpse according to the Custom of the Country.  
VIII. That all the Mandarins which had Served out the time of their Employments, or those that aimed at other Places, should also come to the Palace and show Reverence, and perform their Duty in Mourning over the Corpse three days.  
IX. That the Freemen of the City should come every Morning and Evening for the space of a whole Week to the chief Governor's Palace, and there show Reverence.   
They also sent Letters to all the Mandarins distributed through all the Provinces and Cities of the Empire, that after they had received tidings of the Empresses Decease, they should use all means possible to make their Relations, both Men, Women and Children show Reverence, by three times kneeling and bowing of their Heads, and besides other Ceremonies Mourn twenty seven days.  
This Order is expressly given to all Mandarins, as well those that are in Office as others, whether Civil or Military. It is likewise Ordered, that the Burgesses shall wear a Mourning Hat for the space of thirty days. They also forbid that any Instruments should be touched, either in the Mandarins Palaces or Houses, or in any Place wherein Travellers are Lodged upon the Emperor's Charge. This was proclaimed by certain Mandarins that follow no other Employment.  
After all these Ceremonies before the Funeral, the great Magician at the Court in Peking, was commanded to choose the Days wherein the remaining Funeral Pomp was to be solemnised. After much study and care he pitched upon the ninth day of the sixth Moon, being four Months after the Empresses Death, for the Coffin to be carried out of the Palace, and the fifteenth of the same Month to the Grave. The time being come, the following Order was published, to be observed at the Funeral.  

I. That all the Mandarins of the Court should with the chief Councillors, six days before go out of their Houses into their several Chambers at Court, and there fast three days, as is before mentioned.  
II. That the Receivers of the Emperor's Revenues should prepare all Neçessaries, as Torches, Perfumes, Images of Men, Horses, Lions, Elephants, Silk Umbrella's, and other Ornamentals, to be burnt at the Grave: The Charge whereof was said to amount to thirty thousand Escus.  
III. That the Lords of the Council Hanlim should make new Funeral Elegies.  
IV. Because the Emperor intending to accompany the Corpse to the Grave about seven Leagues from the Palace, happened to be somewhat indisposed, he would send a Grand Courtier in his stead, to perform that necessary Duty.  
V. The Martial Officers must keep Watch in the City, and by the Grave, and also to guard the Corpse thither. 
At every Gate of the City (which were nine) stood a thousand Armed Men, from the Place where the Corpse lay to the Grave, the way on both sides was Guarded by Soldiers. Three thousand conducted the Body, and forty thousand were chosen to Watch by the Grave during the whole time of the Funeral Ceremonies.   
VI All the Streets from the Palace to the Grave must be Railed in, that there may be a free Passage on each side to prevent crowding; and likewise at the end of every twenty Paces must stand Baskets with yellow Sand, to damp the Dust from rising in those Places through which the Corpse was to be carried, besides Tents and Pavilions for the convenience of those that followed the Horse.  
VII. The Commanders of the Treasury had Order to provide Money to pay the Mandarins, Relations, Commanders, Soldiers, and all those that attended the Funeral.  
VIII. That three days before the Burial they should renew their Mourning, showing Reverence, and making Offerings as they had done at the beginning.   
All things thus prepared, the Emperor and the Prince his Son, went with all his Officers to the Temple of their Predecessors, which is in the Imperial Palace, where the Emperor in close Mourning showed Reverence to the first raiser of his Family, and Offered many Silk Coats and Wine to the Deceased. Then he caused a Book to be read, which had been written in the praise of them; which being with many other Ceremonies performed, they returned to the Palace, whilst by the Emperor's Order, Coats and other Ornamentals were thrown into the Fire and burnt.  
During the eight days which were yet remaining they Offered to the Heavens, Earth, Planets, Mountains and Streams. Then Reverence was also shown by the Emperor's Order to the Spiritual Protectors of the nine Palace Gates, through which the Corpse was to be carried. The like also was done to the six Bridges of the River which runs before the Palace, Offering at all those Places Beasts, Wine, and Perfumes.  
The Coffin with the Corpse was placed on a triumphal Arch, richly wrought and hung with Silk, interwoven with Gold, and in many places Plated with Gold, Engraven with Lions, Dragons, and the like; about it stood a great many Torches, and Vessels with Perfumes. The fifth day appointed by the Magician to carry out the Corpse, the Emperor appeared, with his Wives, Children, and Allies, at the Place where the Chariot stood. Having cried for the Deceased, he Offered to their God of the Spirits so to conduct her, that she might have a happy Journey to the Enjoyments of Peace and Quietness. Those that were commanded to attend the Corpse in the Name and Place of the Emperor, and to make Offerings at the appointed Places, were all in a readiness under the first Gate, where they no sooner received the Hearse, but they began to walk in such a handsome Order, State, and Silence, as was wonderful to behold: Getting that day no farther than without the Walls, where stopping at the appointed Place they put the Corpse under a Pavilion, made Offerings on Tables placed for that purpose, burnt Perfumes, and performed all other Ceremonies; which no sooner done, but a Messenger was sent to the Emperor, to inform him that they were got thither and had performed their Duties. The following day they began with those Ceremonies with which they had ended the last Night, and then proceeded on their Journey, which lasted thirteen days, because of the Offerings and stops which they made by the Way to the Mount, where the Emperor's Tombs are. The concourse of People from all Places was so great, that they were past number. When the whole Train was come thither, the Corpse was taken off from the Chariot, and placed upon another stately and triumphal one, no less costly than the first. Then they offered a Steer, which they sprinkled with Wine, besides Coats and Perfumes, to the honour of the Earth, with Prayers to the God of the Spirits, that he would receive the Corpse. At the same time nine Mandarins, sent from the Emperor, observed the like Ceremonies, and Offered to all the Emperor's Predecessors that lay in that Place. On the Funeral day, being the fifteenth day of the sixth Moon, they made several Offerings to conclude their Ceremonies; of which, and what they had done by the Way, they gave an Account to the Emperor, who showed his bounty to those that had been careful in the observing of them, and expressed his Affection to his Mother in showing Reverence to her after her Death, and for her sake released all Prisoners that had committed but small Crimes. It was also Ordered, that those Provinces which were too highly Taxed should have an Abatement. He took off likewise many Impositions laid upon Imported Goods, and distributed with his own Hands many thousands of Ducats, wrapped up in Paper according to the Custom of the Country, being all in honour to the Soul of the Deceased.  
With the same Ceremonies a Chinese Emperor's Funeral was solemnised.  
When an Emperor lies on his Deathbed, and that the Physicians begin to 
Semedo.  despair of his Recovery, the Colaos or chief Relations, and the prime Controller of the Palace, called Suikien, come to visit him, and to know his will and pleasure from his own Mouth, and the Contents of his Testament: Then they privately go to the Prince which is Heir to the Crown, and consult with him, that they may do nothing against his will, who is ready to enter on the Throne. Being thus informed of the one thing and the other, they write down the Will and bring it to the Emperor, that he may approve and allow of it: from thence they go and show it to the prime Councillor called Hanhyven, who ingrosses all the Emperor's Business; which being done, the Will is Sealed with the Imperial Seal, and kept in the Star-Chamber belonging to the Emperor●… Council so long as the Emperor lives.: after his Decease they show it to the Court of Judicatory, that they may proclaim it in all Places of the Empire, and observe it punctually.  
Most of the Inhabitants in the Province of junnan, by reason of their Neighbourhood 
Mart. A●…l. Sin.  with the Indians, lay the dead Corpse on Heaps of Wood, and burn it; but those that study the Chinese Philosophy observe the Customs of the other Chineses, and use Coffins. But though they burn their Dead, yet they consume not living Persons with them as the Indians do; for the Chineses account it barbarous, and not to be admitted amongst the Laws of civilised Men.  
The Inhabitants of the City Sintien, in the Province of Queicheu, express great sorrow for either Father or Mother's Death, by cutting off the Hair of their Heads.  
The Chineses, as Martinius witnesseth, are no less curious than superstitious in choosing the Ground for their Graves, judging that all their Fortune and Happiness depends upon it, because of a Being for the Dragon, to whom they ascribe their Salvation; wherefore they observe the shapes of the Hills on which they intent to make their Graves, and Dig up the Ground, not sparing either Cost or Charge, hoping to find the Head, Heart, or Tail of a Dragon: for they believe that thereby all Happiness and good Fortune will attend the Deceased's Successors.  
Many People experienced in this Art, go through all China, and observe the shapes of Hills, just as the Astronomers take their view of the Stars.   

Government.  
IN the first Age before the general Deluge, the Government of China was divided amongst Tribes or Families, and the chief of every Tribe had his own Government, after the same manner as the ancient Fathers Abraham and Lot; but since Anno 2952. before the Birth of our Saviour, they have been Governed by one sole Monarch or Emperor: for the Names of the two other Forms of Government, viz. Aristocracy and Democracy, the Chineses had never heard of: Nay, the netherlands Agents that were sent Anno 1655. to the Great Cham, Emperor of East-Tartary and China, had great trouble with the Chinese and Tartars, to make them understand the two last Forms of Government, which they could not apprehend.  
The Emperor of China is sole Master of the Lives, Goods and Chattels of all his Subjects, he only being chief Lord of all; wherefore the Empire of China may justly be called A perfect and absolute Monarchy.  
It is without doubt, that in ancient times under one supreme Governor 
Trigaut.  were several substitute Lords, as Dukes, Marquesses, Earls, and the like; but eighteen or nineteen hundred years since those Titles of peculiar Governments and Power, were at once taken away and rooted out: only in the Province of junnan are free Lords or Dukes to this day, that have their peculiar Dominions, which is in no Place else in China: Yet they acknowledge the Emperor, but Govern with an arbitrary Power over their Countries, and succeed each other in their Government.  
The Emperors, according to an ancient Custom yet in force, regard not 
Martin▪ Histor. Sin. l. 7.  their Subjects, but look upon them as Slaves, though they are or have been never so great Magistrates: for because the sole Government consists in the Power of one only, they esteem themselves Masters of every Man's Goods, and likewise of the Lives of their Subjects; therefore no Honour or Preeminency is given but by the Emperor, neither is the ascent to the greatest Place of Dignity locked up from any sort of People, though the scum of the Commonalty, but opened to every one at the Emperor's pleasure▪ for which reason he is by every one honoured as a God, on whom all things depend, and by his severe Government is terrible, and to be feared. From hence it often proceeds, that for the smallest occasion, the most deserving Persons are by him bereaved of their Employments, and others punished with Death, especially those whose Valour and Experience in Martial Affairs may upon the least suspicion be feared. This is not unknown to Colonels and Generals, especially the Grandees which Command great Armies; who for that reason are no less mistrustful of the Emperor than he suspicious of them: from whence they often rise to a Rebellion or Mutiny; for if they after a Conquest against their Enemy have discharged their Soldiers, they know they cannot escape death: which not deserving, they will rather choose to make themselves to be feared by their valiant and heroic Exploits: from whence in the time of War arise continual Mutinies in China; and the greater the Mutinies be, the fiercer they are maintained by every one without respect of faithfulness.  
The Chineses, before the Europeans coming thither, firmly believed that their 
Martin.  Empire contained almost the whole World: not reckoning their neighbouring Kingdoms, they made their Emperor Governor of the whole terrestrial Globe and called him Lord of all.  
According to Semedo, the Ladies of Honour, Relations and others belonging to the Palace, call the Emperor Chu, and sometimes Tienzu, that is, Son of Heaven; not that they believe him to be born in Heaven, but that they look upon the Empire as the Gift of Heaven: and also to make the Respect due to the Imperial Majesty the greater, and to seem sacred.  
The Chinese Emperor, saith Father Martin, is by his Subjects called Tienzu, that is, Son of Heaven; not that they derive his Original from thence, or that he was born there; but they call him Son of Heaven, because he is beloved above all other Men, and hath on Earth given him (as they say) the greatest Dignity Heaven can afford: And because the Chineses oftentimes take Heaven, God, and the supreme Godhead to be all one, therefore The Son of Heaven is as much as to say with them, The Son of God. Thus far Martinius.  
But the common and most esteemed Name of the Emperor is Hoangti, or Hoamti, that is, according to Semedo and Trigaut, Emperor, or Supreme Emperor; but according to Martinius, Sole Emperor, or Emperor of the Earth; which they say is of a yellow colour, for a distinction from Zangti, that is, Supreme Emperor, or God, the Governor of Heaven and Earth.  
The first Emperor which was called Hoangti, Reigned in Anno 2690. before the Birth of our Saviour, for whose excellent Virtues and public Inventions, the pleasing sound of his Name was so beloved, that ever since all their Princes have been called Hoangti, as the Germane Emperors from their first, Caesar.  
There are yet two other Names which have the same signification of King, 
Semedo.  or Emperor, the one being Kium, which they use to name strange Kings by; and the other Vam, which is a Name for the Emperor's Children; to which by adding the word Kium they make a compound word Kiumvam, which signifies Imperial.  
It is also to be observed, that a new chosen Emperor changes his Name, like a new elected Pope, who takes upon him the Name of some of his Predecessors in stead of his own.  
This Name of the Emperors, which they write in all manner of Proclamations, and on their Coin, is taken from a peculiar Person, Extracted of Royal-Blood.  
Martinius tells us, That all those of the Imperial Blood, or Family, are by 
Atl. Simns.  the Chineses called Fansu, as also by the Tartars, only with addition of the Letter r, which the Chinese cannot pronounce, and that Fansur, or Facsur; and Fansu or Fansur signifies a Royal or Imperial House.  
The Empire of China, from Anno 2207. before the Birth of our Saviour, hath had a Successive and Hereditary Government; for at the Father's Death, the eldest Son Succeeds; and if there be no Male-Heir, than the nearest Relation.  
If the Empress, (saith Semedo) the lawful Wife of the Emperor hath a Son, in what time soever he be Born, he takes place before all those that are Begotten by his Concubines, though Born before him; but if the Empress hath no Son, than the Firstborn, or eldest of a Concubine (who e'er she be) is always Elected.  
But Anciently, from Anno 2992. to Anno 2207. before the Birth of our Saviour, the nine first Emperors were elective and chosen by the most Voices, and took not by Succession; but after the Death of the ninth Emperor, Thou, his Son Khi, the Founder of the Family of Hia, was for his goodness and great Deserts, by general Suffrage, confirmed Emperor in his Father's stead; so that the Custom of Election was changed to true and lawful Succession by Birth.  
Sometimes it hath happened (though very seldom) that the youngest Son, contrary both to the Laws of Nature and the Realm, was declared Emperor, either for his extraordinary Valour or Prudence; as Anno 209. before the Birth of Christ, it happened to the Emperor Ulxi, who after his Father Cin's Death, was chosen Emperor in stead of his eldest Brother F●…sa.  
When the eldest Son hath taken Possession of the Throne, the rest only boast of their Princely Alliance, for they have not in the least any Authority; yet the Emperor gives them each a City to reside in, with a Magnificent Palace, Attendants, and Revenues, where they keep Court in great State, and are served accordingly, yet have no Command of the Citizens; and that they might not have so much together, as to enable them to raise a Commotion, the Emperor's Allowance is paid them every three Months, and on forfeiture of their Lives, they may not stir out of the Limits of the City, so designed for their subsistence.  
The Empire hath sometimes also been Governed by a Woman, for Anno 490. 
Martin. Histor. Sini●….  before the Nativity of Christ, the Emperor Lieupang's Consort, after the Death of Hoci her Son, Governed the Country eight years.  
At the Election of a new Emperor, thirteen Contingencies are to be 
〈◊〉.  observed.  
The first is the alteration of annual Accounts, for they begin to reckon from the Inauguration of their new Emperor, which they use not only in common Discourses, but in their Letters, and all manner of Writings: The Emperor also gives his Name to that Year in which he begins to Reign; for we must 
Martin.  observe, that all the Years of any Emperor's Reign, when soe'er they die, are reckoned for whole Years, and so make his Coronation the New-Years-Day, that is, the beginning of the Year; and yet, though the Chineses immediately, and in the same Year have another, yet they still show Honour and Obedience to the late Emperor, though Dead, till the Years end, doing all things in his Name; and likewise all Edicts and Proclamations are Sealed and Marked with the same Signets, as if he were still living; but the Successor gives his Name to the following Year.  
The second, they instantly Coin new Money, with the Letters of his Name, 
Semed●….  which doth not abate any thing of the value of the old Coyn.  
The third, his Lawful Wife is Crowned Empress.  
The fourth, they give the Name of Queen to six of his Concubines.  
The fifth, they make Offerings to the Heavens, Earth, and Spirits.  
The sixth, they bestow great Alms on the Poor.  
The seventh, all Prisoners are set at liberty.  
The eighth, all the Magistrates are nobly Treated.  
The ninth, all the Women that were Concubines before, are put out of the Palace.  
The tenth, the Seraglioes, which are four in number, are filled with fresh Beauties fetched from all parts of the Empire; during which time there are many Marriages, because every one seeks to free his Daughter from such a retired Life.  
The eleventh, Persons of Quality, if not all, at least those of Cities, either come themselves, or send Agents to show Obedience, and acknowledge the new Emperor.  
The twelfth, all Officers from the Vice-Roys to the inferior Governors of Cities, go in Person to the Court, to show the same Obedience, and take the Oath of Allegiance in behalf of their Towns and Provinces.  
The thirteenth is, that the Emperor changes his own Name, as is beforementioned.  
The Reverence which the Chineses anciently showed to their Kings, they performed in this manner.  
They Prostrate themselves to him, bowing down their Bodies, and looking 
Martin Sin▪ Histor. l. 4.  with their Faces to the North, for they say, that their Kings look always to the South; for which reason all the Gates of their Palaces, Doors of Chambers, and all Draw-Bridges face the South; from whence proceeds a Proverb, That the Chinese, though at great distance, always honour their King, when with usual Ceremonies they receive their Guests.  
They say, that the Tartar Prince, who at this day possesseth the Country of China, and resides in the Metropolis Peking, is not the great Cham or Lord of all Tartary, as hath hitherto been believed, but a mean Prince of the Tartars, whose Grandfather was the first King of his Family, promoted to that Dignity by the Inhabitants of his Country, which was only a small Province in Tartary called Muncheu.  
The Father of this present Emperor, called Zunchi, was the fifth of his Family; his Fortune seemed to be so strange in the Eyes of other Princes of his Country, that they compared him to 
a As the Rom●…s called Scip●…o Africanus the Thunderbolt of War.  Lightning, when e'er they spoke of him, for they usually said, that the Gods and Heavens could only prevent him in any thing.  
The present Emperor Zunchi's Son is called Konchi, a Youth, of about sixteen years.  
The first Ruler, of whom the Chineses make mention in their Histories, was named Puoncu; and after him Tienhoang, Ginhoang, and Yonjui; but in those times the Provinces were governed by the Heads of their Princical Families.  
The first Emperors that before the Birth of our Saviour Governed China, and were Elected and set on the Throne by most Voices, were eight in number, viz. from the Year before the Nativity of Christ 2952. to the Year 2207. before which the Chineses allow of none in their Histories, which in that time are stuffed with many strange and fabulous Relations, as well concerning the Age of Men, as Years of the Governors; for if we will credit their Writers, the World stood many Thousands of Years before the Deluge.  
The first Emperor was  
Before Christ's Birth. Reigned Years. 2952 I. Fohi 115 2837 II. Xinnung 140 2697 III. Hoangti 100 2597 IV. Xaohau 84 2513 V. Chuenhio 78 2435 VI Ko 70 2357 VII. Ya 90 2258 VIII. Xan 33  
After Xun, the Empire was Governed by Hereditary Succession, and the first House or Family Hia was raised under the Emperor Thou, which continued four hundred Years under seventeen Emperors, viz.  
Before Christ's Nativity. Reigned Years. 2207 I. Thou 10 2197 II. Khi 9 2188 III. Taikang 29 2159 IU. Chumkang 13 2146 V. Siang 27 2058 VI Xaokang 22 2057 VII. Chu 17 2040 VIII. Hoai 26 2014 IX. Mang 18 1996 X: Is 16 1980 XI. Pukiang 59 1821 XII. Kung 21 1800 XIII. Kin 21 1769 XIV. Cungkia 31 1848 XV. Ka 11 1838 XVI. Fau 19 1818 XVII. Kie 52  
After the Family Hia, the House of Xang succeeded, being first raised by the Emperor Tangle, from whom sprung twenty eight Emperors, viz.  
Before the Birth of Christ. Reigned Years. 1766 I. Tangle 13  II. Taikia 33 1720 III. Voting 92 1691 IV. Taikeng 25 1666 V. Siaokia 17 1659. VI jungie 12 1641 VII. Taiu 75 1562 VIII. Chungting 13 1549 IX. Vaigni 15 1534 X. Hotankia 9 1525 XI. Zuie 19 1506 XII. Zusini 16 1490 XIII. Vokia 25 1464 XIV. Zuting 32 1433 XV. Nankeng 25 1408 XVI. Yangkia 7 1401 XVII. Puonkeng 28 1373 XVIII. Siaosini 21 3352 XIX. Siaoye 18 1324 XX. Vuting 59 1265 XXI. Zukeng 7 1258 XXII. Zukia 2 1225 XXIII. Linsin 63 1219 XXIV. Kenting 21 1198 XXV. Uvye 4 1194 XXVI. Taiting 3 1191 XXVII. Tiye 37 1154 XXVIII. Che 33  
After the subduing of the House of Xang, rose the Family Cheu, Anno 1122. and flourished till Anno 247. before our Saviors Nativity, under thirty seven Emperors.  
The first of them was a Prince called Fa, who when he enjoyed the Crown, changed his Name to V, which signifies Valiant; and they say, that from him all the Emperors since, at their entering on the Throne change their Names.  
He possessed, in the Province Xensi, a Country named Cheu, from whence the Family received their Denomination.  
Before Christ's Birth. Reigned Years. 1078 I. Fa, or U, 7 1115 II. Ching 38 1122 III. Kang 26 1056 IV. Cham 51 1001 V. Mother 55 946 VI Cung 12 934 VII. Is 25 894 VIII. Hia 15 896 IX. Is 16 878 X. Li 38 827 XI. Siveni 46 781 XII. je 11 770 XIII. Ping 51 719 XIV. You 23 696 XV. Chuang 15 631 XVI. Li 5 676 XVII. Hoei 25 651 XVIII. Siang 33 618 XIX. Hiang 6 612 XX. Quang 6 606 XXI. Fing 21 585 XXII. Kien 14 571 XXIII. Ling 27 544 XXIV. King 25 519 XXV. King 44  
Between which was the Emperor Menguen, who Reigned scarce a Month.  
 Reigned  Years. 475 XXVI. Yuen 7 468 XXVII. Chinting 27 440 XXX. Ka 15  
Ka is accounted the thirtieth, for after Chintung's Death, his other Sons being Kiucie and Xocie, attempted for the Empire, and in that regard were accounted, as being two, viz. the twenty eighth and twenty ninth, because they acted for some time; but at last. Ka mastering them, became absolute, and so was reckoned the thirtieth.  
 Reigned Years. 542 XXXI Gueilie 24 401 XXXII 'Gan 26 375 XXXIII Lie 7 368 XXXIV Hien 48 322 XXXV Xicini 6 314 XXXVI Foe 59 254 XXXVII Cheukuni 9  
After the House of Cheu, came the Family Cin, under their Advancer Ching, who was afterwards called Xi, in the Year 246. and continued but to Anno 206.  
 Reigned Years. 246 I. Ching, or Xi 37 209 II. Ulxi 3 206 III. Ing 46  
After the Family Cin, the House of Han followed, which flourished till Anno 264. after Christ. The first Raiser of this House, was  
Before the Nativity. Reigned Years. 206 I. Lieupang, or Kaozu 17 194 II. Hoei 7 187 III. Liuheva, a Woman 8 179 IV. Veni 23 156 V. Hiaoking 16 140 VI Hiaou 54 86 VII. Hiaoche 12 74 VIII. Ho 7 73 IX. Siveni 25 48 X. juen 16 32 XI. Ching 26 6 XII. Ngay 6  
These are the Names of the Emperors, every one in their Families, before the Birth of our Saviour, according as they are written in the Chinese Chronicles, Translated into Latin by Father Martin; but those that have Reigned since the Incarnation, I have received no account of, being not yet rendered to us in any other Language.  
After the Family of Han arose that of Cyn, and flourished after the Birth of Christ, till Anno 1419. At the same time were also five Kings, called Utai, which maintained War against one another, till by their Ruin, the Family Tangle took upon them the sole Government of China, which they kept till Anno 618.  
In the Year 923. the Family Sung succeeded that of Tangle, and Reigned over all China, till Anno 1278. when this House was utterly subdued by the Tartars, who set up the Family of juen, which Governed China till 1368. in which Year rose the House of Taiming, from a Priest called Chu, who drove the Tartars out of China; but this Family was 
a The Monarch of England, and Empire of China, ●…anslated and changed at once.  Anno 1644. destroyed, and by a huge Rebellion, the East Tartars of Munchu, were invited to Aid the Prince, but the way once opened, they swallowed all, and from their Prince named the whole Empire of China, Taising.  
The Magistrates or Governors in China, taken in general, are of two Degrees or Orders; the first are such, as not only in the Metropolis officiate the places of Privy Councillors, but from thence have influence over the whole Empire; the other are such as Govern peculiar Provinces or Cities.  
The general Government, or that of the first Degree, are by Alvarez Semedo described in the following words:  
The Prime Government of China consists in six Benches, Chambers, or Courts, which by a general Name are called 
a Like our King's-Bench, or Superior Courts of Judicature.  Pu, that is, The King's Benches.  
These manage not only the Affairs of the Realm, in the Courts where they reside, but like the Head, on which all the other depend, Rule, and give Orders to them, according to their several places.  
Every Council hath his Precedent, which they call Chamxu, with two Assistants, the one named Koxilam, who is the Chief, and sits on the left Hand, (by them counted most honourable;) and the other Yeuxilam.  
These are the first and most profitable Offices of the Empire, except that of Kolao's; so that a Tutang or Viceroy of what Province so ere it be, after he hath given Testimony of his Capacity, if he would be Promoted, thinks himself well provided for, though not a Prime Councillor, to be only one of the Assistants, that sit on the left, or right Hand.  
Besides these, there is a Council of Ten, which are of equal Dignity, only distinguished by several Titles, and deciding of different Causes: To these are to be added, the vast numbers of greater and lesser Officers, as Notaries, Secretaries, Clerks, Servants, Officers, and such as we call Bailiffs, besides many others, not known in Europe,  
The first Council or Court which have the greatest Command, and receive the highest Presents and greatest Fees, are the Council of State, called Lipu, that is properly, Council of Magistrates, for Pu signifies a Council, and Li Magistrates.  
To these belong all the Offices in the Empire, to change or promote them; for he who is once in an Employment, rises continually by degrees to higher Dignities.  
They have also Power to restore those to their Employments that are displaced; as if a Mandarin is for some Misdemeanour put out of his place, he may easily obtain it again, if he be in favour with this Council.  
The second Bench is called Pimpu, that is, Council of War, which have as great a Command as those of State, viz. over all the Militia, with the Schools and Academies, and for instruction of Youth in Martial Discipline, and the Exercise of Arms.  
The third is of the Customs, called Limpu, which though not of great Commands, yet they are of no less Quality, for the Mandarins in which it consists, are chosen out of the Emperor's Council Hanlin, which are next to the Kolao's, the Prime place of Honour in China.  
This Council hath knowledge of all Letters, and likewise of Ecclesiastical Affairs, Bonzies, Strangers, and the like.  
The fourth Council is that of the Emperor's Revenues, called Hupu, which take care to get in the Emperor's Treasure, Customs, Farms, and in general, all things that bring in Money.  
The fifth, called Cumpu, look after all business of Building and Architecture, and especially what belongs to the Emperor's Palace, or those of his Children and Officers; as also the Walls and Gates of the City, Highways, and Bridges.  
The same Council are also to take care that the Rivers be cleansed, and Ships furnished with Necessaries, when sent out upon the Emperor's Service.  
The sixth Chamber called Himpiu, that is, Council of justice, are to punish Malefactors, and pass Sentence of Life and Death on Criminals.  
The same Counsels or Chambers the Jesuit Nicolas Trigaut hath described almost after the same manner in the following words.  
The Prime Councillors or Courts are six in number.  
The first called Lipu, signifies, The Bench of the Magistrates.  
This Council exeeeds all the rest, for they name or choose all the Magistrates of the Philosophic, or Learned Order of the whole Realm, which are accounted the most eminent, and continually rise higher and higher, if they have in their Inferior Offices made but the least Proofs of their Virtue and good Behaviour; and on the contrary, if they commit but one Fault, they are bereaved of their Employments, or put into meaner Offices.  
The first choice consists in the excellent Writing in Chinese Characters, of which, this Court judges.  
The second Council (by Semedo the fourth) is called Hopu, that is, The Court of Revenue, or Exchequer, which have the Command of the Empire's Revenue and Taxes, gathering Customs, paying Soldiers, and the like.  
The third Council is called Lipu, that is, The Council, or Court of Ceremonies, which takes care for Common Offerings, Temples, Priests, the Emperor's Women, Schools, examining of the Learned, Weddings, and other Ceremonies to be performed to the Emperor, on certain times and occasions.  
The same Council also give Titles of Honour to deserving Persons; encourage Artificers; send Noblemen to meet Ambassadors, and return Answers to Letters directed to the Emperor; who looks upon it as a great disgrace to write a Letter with his own Hand, either to one in, or without his Dominions.  
The fourth called Pimpu, which signifies, Council of War, Command over Civil and Military Affairs, which concern the Safety and Defence of the Empire, yet they cannot resolve on any thing, without the Emperor's consent and knowledge.  
This Council bestows all Military Offices, removing Cowards, and putting in Valiant Men; and likewise, honour the deserved with great Titles.  
The fifth called Cumpu, that is, The Council over all manner of Buildings, look to the Erecting of public Structures and Palaces, for the Emperor, his Allies, and Magistrates; and likewise to the building of his Ships, and Rigging out of whole Navies, and the repair of Bridges and Walls about the City.  
The sixth Council, called Humpu, are Judges, to Determine and Debate of Criminals, and all manner of Differences: The whole business of Judicatory in all the Empire depending on this Court, for they have in every Province and City, appointed Magistrates and Clerks, which advise them faithfully of all Transactions; so that they in this their Office, being of great concern, have no small trouble, but that the great number of Deputies which they employ under them, ease them of the most part; for there is a Chief-Justice of the whole Court, whom they call Ciamcui, which hath two Assistants, one sits on his right, and the other on his left Hand, being named Cilam, which three Persons in the Metropolis Peking, are accounted amongst the greatest in Quality, and according to their pleasure, every Court is divided into several Degrees; besides these, all Courts have their Secretaries, Clerks, Messengers, and other Servants.  
The Emperor Ya, who began to Reign before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 2357. first established these six Courts, according to the Relation of Father Martin, in his first Book of the History of China, wherein he says,  
Afterwards the Emperor Ya brought the State of China to a new and better form, by establishing six Courts: One of which is called Lipu, which takes Cognizance of the Well-behaving, or Mis-behaving of the Magistrates, and to bestow on every one according to their Merits, either higher Dignities, or else bereave them of their Places.  
The second is called Pingpu, that is, Council of War, or Prime Martial Court, which have the same Command over the Martial Officers, as the former over the Civil.  
The third is Lipu, that is, A Court of Ceremonies, or Customs, who Supervise Ecclesiastic Affairs, Offerings, entertaining foreign Ambassadors, and other such like Businesses.  
The fourth is called Hupu, which Receive, and render an Account of the Emperor's Revenue.  
The fifth is called Cumpu, which take care to look after the Repairing and Building of public Structures, the Emperor's Palaces, Walls of the Cities, Rivers, Ships, and Highways, that they may not be Dirty or Incommodious.  
The sixth is Hingpu, or Court of justice, where all Causes relating to Life and Death are Determined; which Courts being so Constituted by the Emperor Ya, Govern the whole Empire of China in good Order, and acknowledge no Superior but the Emperor and the Kolaos.  
According to others, the Privy-Councel consists in six Persons, who never Consult but about Weighty Matters of State. This Council or Assembly is called Loepol; each of these hath his peculiar Chamber, and is also the Head of another Court, in which the businesses of his Camber are Debated: These Councillors take as many to their Assistants as they judge necessary.  
The first of these is Precedent of the Council of State, and his Assembly is called Lipol.  
The second hath Charge of all Warlike businesses, Revenues of the Empire, and hath also Power to give Commissions.  
The third looks after Architecture, keeping an account of what Edifices are yearly built in the Empire; and likewise of the Charges expended in Repairing of Towns, Forts, Highways, Streets, and Moats: This is called Congpol.  
The fourth, which takes care of the Customs and Taxes of the Empire, are named Olpol.  
The fifth is (as we may call him) Lord-Chief-Justice, and Pronounces the Sentences resolved on in his Court, called Ungpol.  
The sixth and last hath the Command of all Places and Offices of the Magistrates, and gives them to those, who by their Learning, good Deportment, and civil Carriage, are accounted the most Worthy.  
In this manner the Government of China hath continued many Ages, which after the first Conquest by the Tartars, under the Emperor Xunchi, was not changed; except, only adding to every one of the six Chinese Councillors, a Person of his own Country; so that the Grand Council of the Realm consisted in twelve Persons, all equally Commission'd as before-said.  
These Councillors of State beforementioned, cannot resolve on any thing without a general consent; therefore no business is concluded on, but by Plurality of Voices: When the Assembly is broke up, and every Councillor consults with his private Cabal; then a Tartar (as we said) is added to them; but since that, in the Reign of the Emperor Konchi, the Chineses are put out of all Offices, and the Tartars have wholly Appropriated them to themselves.  
Besides these six, there are nine other Chambers or Benches, called Kieukim, 
Semedo.  whose Offices are several, but they chiefly take care of the Emperor's Household.  
The first called Thailisu, that is, The Grand Exchequer, consists in thirteen Mandarins, viz. one Prime Councillor, two Assistants, and ten inferior Judges; This resembles the Chancery of the Realm, perusing all the Judgements given in other Courts, and according to Equity disallowing or confirming the same.  
The second called Quanlosu, that is, comptroller of the Court, taking care for the Emperor's Table, observing the Transactions of the Empress, Concubines, and paying Wages to all Court-Officers, and others that follow public Employments; entertaining foreign Ambassadors and the like Persons of Quality, and consists of one Prime Councillor, two Assistants, and six petty Judges.  
The third, Thaipocusu, is like the Master of the Horse, and takes care, not only for the Horses for the Emperor's Service, but likewise (as Post-Master-General) for all Posts, and in general, for all others which serve the whole Empire. This consists in one prime Councillor, and six Assistants.  
The fourth is that of the Ceremonies, performing all manner of Duties, requisite at public Treats of the Emperor, Festivals, and at all other times and occasions; and likewise those which are duly observed every Morning at the going in and out of the Palace; and consists in one Prime Councillor, two Grand, and six Inferior Assistants.  
The fifth is that of the Customs in peculiar businesses; and though this differs from the first, yet they observe the same things by the help of their Assistants. They also take care to see due Offerings performed at the Emperor's Grave; for Artificial Hills, Woods, and all things else; as likewise for Singing-Boys, Musicians, and Beasts for the Oblations.  
There is yet another Court of Justice, whose business is only to present the Emperor with all manner of Memorials, and bringing them all together into the Chancery, like the King's Remembrancers.  
All manner of Businesses are shown the Emperor in Writing, according to 
Martin▪ Histor▪ Sinic. l 9  an ancient Custom of the Emperor Suven, who Reigned before the Birth of our Saviour, Anno 73. that the Emperor having considered thereof, he might the better return his Answer in Writing; for it often happened (said he) that People by fine Words, and pleasing Language, might persuade him to any thing, which granting in a sudden humour, they had often cause to repent: From whence it happens, that though the Emperors do seldom appear to their People, yet they continually converse with them by Petitions or Letters.  
To the six Councillors are to be added three more, the same in manner or fashion, though differing in Offices and Employments.  
Besides all these, there are yet two more; the one called Qholi, and the other Tauli, and though both have their eyes over several Provinces, and every one concern themselves with Businesses within their peculiar Spheres and Offices, minding all Transactions and Disorders in the Empire. These Councillors, as it is easy to tell of others men's Faults, act them with great freedom, and oftentimes commit many unjust Actions. Their manner of complaining in this kind, is to make a Copy thereof, and to show it to the Emperor: Immediately after the same (as they say, is Facheo) that is, Copied out and delivered to Clerks appointed for that purpose, which make several Writings of it, and send them by Messengers through all the Empire, so that it is immediately known by, and against what Person those Writings are published, and a large Description of what he is. These Letters, which the Chineses call juen, thus published, the Accused against whom it is written must immediately, Volens Nolens, do two things, the first of which is to write a Petition, not to justify or excuse himself, but to acknowledge that the Tauli had great Reason, and he in Fault; that he hath offended, for which he is sorrowful, and ready to undergo such Punishment as they please to inflict upon him: The next is speedily to be gone and leave his Place without farther intermeddling, till the Emperor hath given his Answer to the Petition, which sometimes proves favourable, being permitted to re-enjoy his Office; but otherwhiles the Emperor commands him to be punished according to the greatness of his Crime.  
It often happens, that a Mandarin by diligence in his Office, and observing his Business more than ordinary, begets Enemies; and if any of these be acquainted with, or allied to any Officers of these two Courts, then theydo his Business immediately at Court, and send the Memorials from one to another, so that the poor Mandarin is in a miserable condition, and especially if he be a Judge, Deputy-Governor, or over the Militia. Yet far greater trouble they have with the Tauli and Qholi, who neglect not the least opportunity to prosecute to such height, that the Emperor himself, though he have an inclination, cannot free them.  
Trigaut describes these two Councils, Qholi and Tauli, in the following manner:  
Every one of them consists in above sixty Persons, all Philosophers, aged and wise People, which before have made no small proofs of their Loyalty to the Emperor and Realm.  
These Consult of all private and public Affairs, which they Judge and Determine, being thereto authorised by the Emperor's special Commission, which makes them to be not a little honoured and respected by the People. But above all, their chiefest Office is to inform the Emperor by Letters, if any thing be acted against the Laws, and also to tell the Emperor and his Allies of their Faults.  
This Office, in my Opinion, differs not much from the Lacedaemonian Ephori; for they never regard the Magistrates, nor miss to tell the Emperor of his Misdemeanours, such is their Authority and Respect: And notwithstanding the Emperor is often displeased with them, yet they cease not to admonish then by words, till they have persuaded and made them sensible of their Errors.  
This is likewise by the power of the Law privileged to all Magistrates, and not only to them, but every particular Substitute; yet the Petitions of the Qholi and Tauli are most esteemed, because they do it merely as being their Employment. The Copies of the Petitions, and the Emperor's Answer thereon, are Printed in great quantities, whereby all Court Businesses are soon known in several Places. There are those which make a Book of all the Petitions, Printed as before; nay, if any thing be remarkable in them for their Predecessors, it is writin the Chronicles.  
These Governors used formerly an undaunted freedom and confidence in the admonishing of their Kings and Emperors, when they saw them wander from the way of Virtue, to the great admiration of the People of Europe, which are debarred of this freedom. It is certain that these Governors understand the Mysteries of Philosophy, and endeavour by all means possible to extol the Heavens by Praises, and other acts of Devotion. It was not only in ancient times, but now also customary amongst the Chinese, that the Governors, when their good admonishment was not regarded by the Emperor, they laid down their Apparel and Badges of their Offices before him, declaring publicly, that they would no longer Serve in their Places; and the more boldly they throw them down, if the Emperor designs any thing which they fear may prove prejudicial to the Realm, and that he will not hearken to them.  
It happened some years since, that the Emperor Vanlie, who clouded all his Achievements by his insatiably lustful desires; for notwithstanding he had a lawful Son, yet he would declare a Bastard to be Heir of the Empire: but the Peers and Governors being against it, said they would not suffer so base an Election; yet the Emperor not regarding their Saying, all the Magistrates that were in the City, being to the number of two thousand, went to the Palace, and forced him against his will, by laying off their Liveries, to declare the lawful Heir to be Successor.  
The like occasion happened Anno 1651. for when after the Death of the Guardian and Uncle to the young Emperor, another Tartar would Govern, alleging that the Emperor's Age was not fit for such a Management, all the Governors laid down their Badges, whereby he was forced to desist: and in this manner a Youth of sixteen years old called Xunghi, being the true Heir, took upon him the Government.  
Besides these Magistrates, or Privy-Councellors at the Court, there are several 
Trigaut.  other Offices, or Council-Chambers, for divers Businesses, but the chiefest and most honourable is that which is called Hanlinyven, into which none but Learned Doctors are admitted.  
Those which are in this Imperial Office, do nothing but Read several Books, and may not trouble themselves with public Concerns, when as nevertheless they exceed those that sit at the Helm, wherefore many endeavour greatly to get into their Society. Their Business is only to write the Emperor's Letters, Annual Chronicles, and to make Laws and Ordinances. Out of these are also chose the Tutors for the Emperor's and Princes.  
In this Society are several degrees of Honour, which every one attains to by their writing a good Style; after which they are raised to the highest Preferment within the Court. None are chose to be of that most eminent Office of Colao, but out of them.  
Those that are in this Society make great advantages by writing Epistles and Encomiums of their Friends; nay, every one accounts himself happy if he can but get them, bestowing great Charge and trouble to that end: for if they have but the Name that they are made by them, they are accounted excellent, though never so bad.  
Lastly, those that are of this Society, are chief Councillors and Judges in the Examinations of Causes, both Divine and Moral, and are by the Professors of Sciences accounted Masters of Literature.  
Besides all these Courts, there is one supreme Court, which is the chief in 
Semedo.  the whole Empire. None can be received into this, unless they have been of the Imperial Society called Hanlin, or Hanlinyven before mentioned, and after they have a considerable time been in Places of Government, and made sufficient proofs of their Mildness, Policy and Prudence, and that no Letters of Complaint have been set out against them. This Court consists of four, or at most of six Persons, which are called Colaos and Coglogs.  
The Emperor Vanlie, Grandfather to the Emperor Zunchin, would never suffer more than one Colao, alleging that the rest were needless.  
The Quality of Colao, to speak properly, is no peculiar Office, because they take care of the general Government of the State, and are just like Supreme Judges of all Courts and Dominions in the whole Empire, though they are never all together but when they dispatch grand Business for the Emperor, who being not always present upon the concluding, they are many times forced to be in the Palace to answer those Petitions which are hourly brought to the Emperor. This done, they are necessitated to find out the Emperor, and inform him of their several Results; which having heard, he doth Justice to the Parties, and pronounces the ultimate Sentence, by either confirming or altering their Conclusions.  
These Colaos are in the highest esteem, and above all the Counsels or Magistrates, who at a certain time come and show Reverence to them as their Superiors, in an open Hall. The Colaos during this Ceremony stand up, and all the Officers according to their Degrees walk cross the Hall; coming before them they turn about, and bow their Heads down to the Ground: which Ceremony is called Quo Tham, that is, Passing through the Hall.  
There is also a great difference betwixt the Colaos Robes and those of the other Magistrates, for their Girdles are beset with Precious Stones, which they call Yuxe, which none but Colaos may wear in the whole Empire; nay, they receive their Orders by the Emperor's own Hand, as the Knights amongst us their Honour from the King himself.  
Father Nicholas Trigaut describes the Colaos Authority and Office in the following words:  
Besides these six Courts there is another, the most eminent in the whole Realm and the Emperor's Palace: those which belong to it are called Colaos, and are generally three or four in number, and sometimes six. They have charge of no particular Business, but mind the general Concerns of the Empire, and sit in private Consultation with the Emperor daily in his Palace. And in regard the Emperor at present doth not appear in Person at Treaties of public Affairs of the Realm, which he formerly used to dispatch, they stay the whole day in the Palace, and answer Petitions, which in great numbers are brought, according as they think fit: with which Answers they go to the Emperor, who Regio Nutu, by his Beck either confirms or altars them. Thus far Trigaut.  
The like Quality and Office Father Martin ascribes to them in the following 
〈◊〉. Hist. Sinens●…s  words:  
The six Courts, viz. Lypu, Hupu, Pingpu, Cungpu, Hingpu, are not concerned in public Matters of the whole Realm, but only with private Consultations: for the Governors make their Requests to the Emperor by way of Petition, who having considered of the Business, sends them to every Court to which they belong, the Assistants whereof, after serious Consideration, acquaint the Emperor with their Opinons in Writing, which he then, according to his pleasure, 
I●…m Histor. Sinic.  either vacates or affirms; which that he may the better be able to do, he chooses some of the prime Philosophers in the whole Empire for his Assistants, who are called Colaos, or Caising, that is, Assistants in Government. These are in the 
H●…stor. Sinic.  next Degree to the Emperor, and aid him in dispatching of Business, Consulting with him in Person, as being his Privy-Council, for he is seldom seen by any other Magistrates, Judges, Justices, or Councillors. Thus far Martin.  
Those which the Chineses call Colao, we (if we observe the original of the Name) should term Assistants to the Emperor; partly for their honourable Employment, and partly as being next the Emperor, the prime Governors of the whole Realm.  
Thus far of the general Government and Councils, or Offices of the Realm, which so long as the Empire was Governed by the Chinese, had their Residence at the Courts in Nanking and Peking, for all the Councils and Magistrates which are at the Imperial Court in Peking, were formerly (except the Colaos) in Nanking, the Metropolis and Court of the ancient Chinese Princes; but they were far below those in Peking, because of the Emperor's absence, who held his Court in Peking, as at this day the Tartar, Emperor of China. The Court was removed from Peking on this occasion:  
The Emperor Humvu having driven out the Tartars Anno 1368. planted the 
Trigaut.  Seat of the Empire in Nanking. After his Decease one of his Nephews called Yunlo, who in the Northern Provinces lay with an Army in the Borders of the Empire as Viceroy, there to be a Guard against the Tartars, concluded to bereave Humvu's Heir of the Crown, and make himself Master of it: To which purpose having gotten the Northern Provinces to join with him, he came with his Army to Nanking, and got the other. Provinces either by Policy, Strength or Presents, and expelled Humvus Son. But because Yunlo's greatest Strength and Dependence was in the Northern Provinces, and that it was to be believed, that the Tartars to regain the Empire would fall in on that Place, he settled himself in that part of the Country, and in the same City in which the Tartar Emperors, when they Governed the Chinese, had their Residence, there to resist the Enemy if he should make any Attempt; yet still continued the Emperor's Palace and the Magistrates in Nanking. But after the Conquest of China by the Tartars, Anno 1644. the City of Nanking was bereaved of her Imperial Title, and all the Magistrates belonging to the Emperor's Court; nay, the Palace of the ancient Chinese Emperors, besides many stately Memorials were all pulled down to the Ground, without any other damage to the City. The Tartars also changed the Name of the City and Province, and in stead of Nanking called it Kiangnan; and the City which formerly was called Intien, Kiangning. All which was done by the Tartars out of an inveterate hatred against the Taimingian Family, because Humvu, or Chu, the first raiser of that House, drove them or their Predecessors shamefully out of the Empire, after they had possessed it a hundred and eight years.  
All the Magistrates, as well belonging to the Learned Council as Martial Affairs, are by a general Name in the Chinese Tongue called Quonfu, that is, To set before: but for their Quality and not their Office they are called Lavye, or Lausu, or Lavja's, which signifies Lords, or Parents. The Netherlanders, according to the example of the Portuguese, call them Mandarins, that is, Commanders, or Governors, derived from the Portuguese word Mandarim, which is, A Commander.  
Notwithstanding all the Magistrates or Governors fly at the Emperor's Beck, and have Orders amongst themselves, yet every one Serves in his Office with full Power, except he be commanded to the contrary by his Superiors. There are so many Governors in China, and Magistrates (they being, according to Martinius, to the number of eleven thousand) that it is hard to know their several Orders. For this reason five or six Books of a considerable bigness are to be bought through the whole Empire, containing the Names of the public Magistrates, and Governors of Provinces, with the Places of their Birth, Employments and Quality. These Books, according to Martinius, are reprinted every three Months; which must be done of necessity, for in such great numbers of Magistrates, without putting those into the Books that are of less Quality, are daily great Changes, some dying, others put out of their Employments, some degraded into lesser Offices, or losing their Parents; by reason of which last Accident they are forced to desert their Government, though never so great, and travel home, and there Mourn three years, and therefore great numbers are continually at the Court of Peking, in hopes to succeed in the vacant Places.  
As to what concerns the Government of the Provinces in particular, it 
Semedo.  stands in this manner:  
The supreme Government of a Province is generally managed in the Metropolis, and consists in Societies, that have a general Power over the whole Province. Amongst these are two prime Courts, to which all the other, as as well of Towns as Villages, must submit, because they receive their Commissions from the Imperial Court. This Court consists in one sole Judge, without any Assistants or other Officers, which is the Viceroy of the Province, in the Chinese Tongue called Tutham, or Kiu-Muen, whose Command extends over all the Magistrates and People of the Province. During his time of Government, which lasts three years, he keeps several Messengers, which go to, and come from the Court at certain times, to give an account of what hath passed in his Jurisdiction. He is received with great State into his Dominions. After his departure from Court his Councillors and other Officers go before, and he is conducted from City to City by the Inhabitants. Some Commanders with three thousand Soldiers, besides all the Magistrates and Commonalty come to meet and receive him three Leagues from the Metropolis, where he is to keep his Court.  
The second Tutang, who is of no less Power, but stays but one year in his Employment, is called Chayven. He is much respected and feared, for he takes an account of all manner of Business, Military or Civil, Condemns or Reprieves Malefactors, and also looks after the Emperor's Revenue: He Examines all the Magistrates, nay the Tutang himself, and hath also Power to punish Judges, and put great and mean Mandarins out of their Employments: The Miscarriages of the grand Mandarins he informs the Emperor of by Letters, and puts them out of their Places till he hath received an Answer from his Majesty. He also pronounces the Sentences of Death which are given in all Places of the Province, and appoints for that purpose the Day and Town whither all the Malefactors must be carried, that he may know the number and Names of them, and marks six or seven with a Pencil, and if more, he is accounted a bloodthirsty and tyrannous Man. Those that are thus marked are Executed in the Field, and the other carried again to Prison. He is also to look after the repairing of the City Walls, Castles and other Structures. He never goes out but with a great Train, that carry Court Badges, and other marks of severity.  
There is yet sometime another Extraordinary Chayven, made at the Empresses Request. He hath an absolute Power, but it extends no farther than to Pardon or Reprieve; for he Visits all the Prisons in the whole Province, sets those Prisoners at Liberty which for petty Crimes lie there, and have no Adversaries; and likewise such as are not able to free themselves. He Pleads in all desperate Causes, and assists People that are helpless; recalls a rashly pronounced Sentence, and is defender of the Poor. In short, his whole Office and Employment extends to Mercy. For which reason these Magistrates are during their time of Government much respected by the common People.  
The third Employment is Treasurer, who takes care of the Emperor's Revenue in his Province, being Employed by the Court of Exchequer, which sit at the Emperor's Palace. He hath two Councillors allowed him, one of which sits on his right, and the other on his left Hand, besides twenty six Mandarins, and several other Officers. His Business is to look after the Customs, Farms, and all Revenues whatsoever belonging to the Crown. He Seals the Weights and Measures, decides all Differences concerning Moneys, punishing the guilty, or sending them (if he think fit) to higher Courts, pays the Magistrates, Allies to the Emperor, Commanders and Soldiers, provides Liveries and Marks of Honour which are given to famous Scholars, pays the Money for the repairing of Highways, Bridges, Courts or Palaces of the chief Mandarins, and Ships of War. Lastly, this Treasurer hath the Command of all what comes in or goes out of the Treasury. He also receives the Emperor's Presents from the Judges, Governors, and Tauli, which every one makes according to their Employments, being in Silver Coin or Bullion, all which is by him melted into Bars, each to the value of fifty Crowns, and stamped with the Imperial Mark and the Melter's Name, that thereby he may know whom to accuse, if the Silver should be falsified. In this manner it is carried into the Emperor's Treasury.  
The fourth Court is called Gandchasci, that is, The Court of Life and Death. In 
Something▪ like our Judges of ●…yer and Termi●…er.  it are two Assistants, or Tauli, whose care is to Visit, and go from Town to Town to decide all Differences, punish the guilty, perform o●…r Duties belonging to their Offices, which extend over the Militia, and Affairs, in such Provinces that lie near the Sea.  
The fifth resembles a College of Learned Men, ordained to Examine 
Like our Visitation o the Clergy or Heraldry.  Youths how they profit in their Studies, and especially to observe their Masters of Art till such time as they have received their Bonnet and Orders to be Directors. The prime of this famous Society is a Chancellor, who from time to time goes to Towns and Villages to inquire after the Carriage, Deportment and Conversation of the Learned, and to punish or chastise them according to their several Offences.  
There are yet two Persons in every City called Hioquon, that is, Mandarins, or Magistrates of Knowledge, which also belong to the forementioned five Courts, whose Command extends only over the Students of the City: and though they have not Power to give the Degrees due to deserving Persons, but only to chastise them, yet nevertheless they are very strict and severe, because they continually reside in one Place, and like Proctors in our Universities, come and Examine the Scholars.  
All these forementioned Courts Command over the whole Province, and the Cities, Towns and Villages contained therein.  
Moreover, every City hath peculiar Governors as here in Europe, being four eminent Mandarins, or Aldermen, as one of them is like a Mayor, which is by them called Chifu; Chi signifies Lord, or Governor, and Furio, A Manor, or Tract of Land; the other three are his Assistants, and called Tumchu, Tumphuon, and Cheuquon; every one hath his pecular Court and Officers.  
Besides these are nineteen lesser Magistrates, which look after the Towns: two of them have a prime Councillor and four inferior Assistants; the other nine only one Councillor and one Assistant; the other eight have one supreme Head, who Commands over their whole Society.  
The Villages have also each of them a Judge and three Justices; the Judge is called Chihien, the first Justice Honchin, the second Chufu, and the third Tunfu: All these have their several Courts, or Council-Chambers, and likewise Secretaries, Clerks, and other inferior Officers. The Judge may pronounce Sentence of Death, but cannot execute it.  
Beside these Mandarins which reside in Towns and Villages, there are some which have neither power to Condemn nor Punish, but only to give their Judgements to the Society.  
The great Castles that lie distant from Towns and Villages, have also Mandarins, or Magistrates, chosen from amongst the Clerks; for the least Office that any Person of Quality aims at, is to be Judge or Justice in a Village.  
Trigaut declares the General Government of every Province, as it was in his time, after the following manner.  
The Towns which belong to the prime Provinces of Peking and Nanking, are Governed after the same manner as all the Cities and Towns in the other Provinces. The Government of each of the thirteen Provinces consists in a Magistrate called Pucinsu, and another named Nanganzasu; the first determines Civil Causes, and the other Criminal: They keep their Courts in great State, and reside in the Metropolis of the Province. To both these belong several petty Officers, and also the chief Magistrates, which are called Tauli; but because they Command over several Cities they are sometimes absent from the Metropolis.  
Every Fu ●…r County (for a Province is divided into divers Counties) hath a peculiar Governor called Chifu, that is, Lord of the County; and likewise over every great City, or Cheu, and over each Town, or Hien, is a Governor, the first called Chicheu, and the last Cihien.  
These Governors of all the Counties, and chief Rulers of Cities, have every one four Assistants, which aid them in all Businesses that happen in their Jurisdiction, being all their Deputies.  
The Chifu, or Governor of the County, hath his Residence in one of the Cities, and determineth all things as Chief; for when any Businesses are consultof by the Chicheu and Cihien, they acquaint him therewith as their Superior, and in the first Degree.  
It is to be observed, that the Chifu, or Governors of the Territories, and his Court, and the whole County receive their Denomination from the City in which they reside: as for example, the Governor keeps his Court in the City Nunciang, and that City gives denomination to the whole County, Governor and Court, so that they are called Nunciangers.  
Besides these Magistrates, there are many others in Cities, Towns and Villages, as also many Generals and Colonels through the whole Empire, but especially in Places bordering the Sea, and Garrisons. Thus far Trigaut.  
All the Magistrates (saith the same Trigaut) are under nine Orders; all comprehended under the Philosopher and Military Man. Every one in these Orders receives his Revenue from the public Stock either in Rice or Money, though but little in respect of their Authority; for the Salary of the prime and chief Order amounts not to above a thousand Ducats yearly. Those which are of the same Order receive Wages alike, whether Philosophers or Military Persons; for the chief of the Soldiers get as much as the Supreme of the Learned.  
All the Magistrates have a private Seal of their Office, given them by the 
Mandarins' Seal.  Emperor Humvu. What they write in their Law they Seal only with Red, which is a kind of Earth, so Red, that it is like a Vermilion, and digged out of the Mountain Tape, near the City Lingkien in the Province of Xanso. This Mark the Mandarins keep with great care, for upon the loss of it they are not only put out of their Employments, but severely punished; wherefore when e'er they go out they carry it with them in a Box, or Cabinet, Locked up and Sealed, which they never suffer to be out of their sights.  
There is an excellent harmony, as Trigaut witnesseth, betwixt the superior and inferior Magistrates, and between the Governors and Privy-Council, and other Grandees and the Emperor; which they not only manifest by their readiness in obeying him, but also by outward appearance: for they never neglect their usual Visits at certain times, nor the Ceremony of Presenting. Neither do the meaner Magistrates speak with the higher before the Bench, or elsewhere, but upon their bended Knees, and with peculiar Reverence. The same Ceremony the Subjects use to the Governors of their Cities, notwithstanding they know that they never took their Degrees in Learning, and before their entrance to be Magistrates were chosen from amongst the meanest of the Commonalty.  
All Chineses, if they follow any honourable Employment, though they are Mandarins, put on the Bonnet of their Office when they will speak, show Reverence, or appear before any of a higher Quality; for to come without, would be accounted uncivil.  
The Mandarins Stools are round like Surgeons Chairs, the Back and Arms thereof covered with a Tiger's Skin, or some other Beast. Their Beards are also set after the same manner, as may appear in the Sculp, wearing them very thin, and letting them grow down without either Clipping or Shaving their Mustachoes hanging downwards; they also shoot forth close by their Ears, but grow not down to their Lips, nor under their Chin, but most frequently with three Whiskers on each side, and one underneath.  
The Mandarins and other Grandees, nay the Emperor himself, let their Nails grow long, which they account no small sign of Gentility and Ornament. Some Ladies, because they would not break them, wear little Cases over them.  
None of the Magistrates Officiate above three years in a public Employment, except he be new Commission'd by the Emperor, but is generally promoted to a higher Dignity. This is done because none should get too many Friends, or gain too much upon the Hearts of the People, in dependency of which he might practise against the State, as it hath often happened.  
The chiefest Governors of the Provinces, Counties and Cities, as the Pucinfu, Naganzafu, Cifu, Ciceu, Cihien, and the like, must every three years, according to the Emperor's Order, appear at the Court in Peking, and there show Reverence and Obeisance to the Emperor.  
At the same time a general Muster is made at the Court of all the Magistrates, which through the whole Realm are placed in the several Provinces, as well of those that are there present as of those that are absent, where a strict Enquiry is made of their Behaviour: From which Enquiry they conclude whom to depose, whom to promote, and whom to punish, without regarding or respecting of Persons; and the Emperor himself cannot alter any thing resolved on by the forementioned Judges in this general Scrutiny.  
Those that are to be punished are not the meanest, nor the fewest, but sometimes to the number of four thousand, whose Names are set down in a Book, which is afterwards Printed and published to the whole Empire. Moreover, the Condemned are, according to Trigaut, divided into five Parties, or according to Semedo, the chiefest Misdemeanours for which the Mandarins are punished, are chiefly seven: The first contains the Covetous, which have violated the Law by Bribes, and defrauded the Commonalty, and appropriated the Lands, Goods or Chattels of their Subjects unjustly to themselves: for which Offence they are not only bereaved of their Employments for ever, but also all the Marks and Privileges of Magistracy. Amongst the second are reckoned such as have not punished the Criminals according to their desert, but connived for favour or affection: these are also bereaved of their Places, Liveries and Privileges. The third are very aged People, and those that are too negligent and slothful in their Offices; for which they lose their Employments, yet not their Marks and Privileges. Amongst the fourth are reckoned those which are heedless and hasty, pronouncing Sentence without any consideration, and go unadvisedly about public Affairs: these are put into meaner Offices, or else sent to such Places in the Realm which are supposed to be of a more easy Government. Amongst the last are those which Govern others and their own Families indiscreetly, and live debauched, contrary to the gravity of Magistrates: these are bereaved of their Office and Quality for ever.  
The same Examination is also performed with the Magistrate at the Court but once every year: And after the same manner, and at the same time with great strictness the Officers of the Soldiers are likewise Mustered.  
None in the whole Realm is Commission'd to Rule in that Province wherein he was born, except only Military Officers: This is done because the first should not favour their Friends or Relations; but the last out of a love to their native Country should defend it more carefully.  
When any Lord Serves as Magistrate, none of his Sons or Servants may go out of the House, make Visits, Converse with any Persons, or Treat about any Business, for fear they should be suspected to take Bribes; but he is attended by Servants given to all Magistrates upon the public Account. When he goes out himself, he Seals the Doors (either of public or private Houses, wherein Justice is administered) with a Seal, that none of the Household can come out without his knowledge.  
The whole Realm in the time of the Chineses was Governed by Philosophers; to whom all the Soldiers and Commanders showed great Reverence, and a peculiar Ceremony and Respect. Of these Philosophers consisted the chief Council of War, their Designs and Contrivances being better respected by the Emperor than those of the Militia Officers, which seldom or never were called to Council: Wherefore none that were of a noble Mind and respected, concerned themselves about Warlike Affairs, but rather endeavoured to have the least Degree in the Council of Philosophers, than to be the greatest Commander in Martial Concerns; the Philosophers enjoying the greater Estates, and being held in much higher esteem by the People. But since the Tartars Conquest of China, the Military Affairs are in greater Request, and the Chineses exercise themselves so much in Arms with the Tartars, that they lay aside their Learning.  
Very strictly they observe the Governors and Commanders; for besides the Tauli and Quauli, which according to their Offices take cognisance of all Transactions, and inform the Emperor thereof. Every Province hath a peculiar Visitor, which is to punish or accuse Offenders.  
Above on the left side of Hoaquan appears a Dragon, as it were flying out from the Clouds; besides, all manner of horrid Representations stand either at the Entrance of the Temple, or behind the Images.  
Another Idol called Vitek, and by others Ninifo, whom they suppose to have been a very wise Man, the Chineses honour with peculiar Reverence and bended Knees, which is performed by the grandest Mandarins, placing his Image on the Altars in the Temples, with burning Lamps and Perfuming-pans round about him. The Idol, a deformed Monster, is often represented after that manner, as appears by the inserted Sculp, with his Breast bare, a very great Head, large Teats, and Tunbelly, the left hand holding a Garland, and great Iron Rings in the Ears, from whence, they say, the use of Earrings came first into China. Other Images are made sitting with their Legs across under them, after the Eastern manner: Some pick their Ears with an Ear-picker, under which they hide a great Mystery; others with a Tool like a Currycomb, scrape their Shoulders and Necks; all which the Chineses, especially the vulgar, worship for great Saints, and Offer Perfumes, Meat, and several other things to them.  
These Priests are accounted the meanest of the People, and Raff of the whole Empire, because they are all Extracted from the Vulgar: for in their Infancy being sold as Servants to the Osiams, they become Scholars, and succeed their Tutors in their Office and Service, an Invention found out by them to advance themselves; for there is never any found, that of his own free will, resolving to live a holy Life, that will go into the Cloisters amongst such Company.  
Through Ignorance and ill Breeding the Slave-Pupils seldom improve themselves beyond their Tutors, but are just the same in their whole Demeanour; and as by Nature we have a propensity to Vice, not being cultivated, so they from time to time degenerate, growing worse; wherefore they learn no Morality, nor attain to the knowledge of Literature, except accidentally some, though very few, which naturally inclined to Learning, endeavour the same by their own Industry. Notwithstanding they have no Wives, they are so inclined to the Female Sex, that they cannot be kept from conversing with common Strumpets but by great punishments, viz. those that attempt it are, if taken in the Act, burnt with a hot Iron through the Neck or Leg, in which they put an Iron Chain of eight or ten Fathom long, besides great Shackles; in which manner the Offender must walk naked along the Streets till he hath begged ten Tail of Silver for the benefit of his Cloister: And that he may perform this Penance, one of his Fraternity goes along with him, and with a Whip severely draws Blood from his naked Skin: The Chain by reason of its great weight is also so troublesome to his Wound, that Blood and Corruption gushes out of it. Others are for several days put into little Houses like our Cages, driven full of Nails with the Points inward, wherein the Offender not being able to lie down, is forced to stand upright, without either Meat or Drink.  
The Cloisters of these Osciams are built in Enclosures according to every one's bigness: every Enclosure hath a constant Treasurer or Governor, whom his Scholars which he hath bought for his Servants (whereof he hath as many as he will or can maintain) succeed as by Inheritance.  
They acknowledge no Superior in these Cloisters; and every one erects as many Huts or Booths in his appointed Apartment as he can, which is customary through the whole Empire, yet chiefly in the Metropolis of Peking. The Cells when built they Let to their great advantage, to Strangers which come thither to Trade, which makes these Cloisters rather seem public Inns than Places of Sanctity, regarding nothing less than the worshipping of Idols, or teaching that wicked Doctrine.  
Though the Condition of the Inhabitants of these Cloisters is mean and despicable, yet nevertheless they are by many hired for a small Reward to perform Funeral Ceremonies, and some other such like Offices.  
Now at present this Doctrine is not a little come into request again, many Temples being erected for the same. All the Followers thereof are either Eunuches, Women, or ignorant People. Yet besides these there are some which boast themselves the prime Maintainers of this Doctrine, and are called Ciaicum, that is, Abstinentiaries, for they refrain in their Houses all their Lifetimes from eating either Flesh or Fish, and reverently worship with Offerings and Prayers a row of Images, and sometime are sent for to their Neighbour's Houses to Pray with them.  
The Women, separated from the Men, maintain this retired Life in Cloisters, and shaving the Hair from the Crown of their Heads, despise Marriage. The Chineses call them Nicu, which signifies A Nun; but not many of them live together, and are far less in number than the Men. Thus far Trigaut.  
These Cloisters (according to Semedo) are very large; the Walls which surround them makes them seem like a City, divided into Streets, open places, and inhabited Houses, in each of which two or three have their Residences, viz. a Master and his Scholars, which are sufficiently provided for; and also all the Houses receive an equal proportion of the Emperor's Allowance.  
The Governor of the Cloister, who hath the general Command over all, takes no cognisance but of peculiar Businesses which are brought before him; and what concerns other things, and the Government of their Houses, he leaves to themselves. Yet nevertheless he gives Offices, and Titles to those that are to receive Strangers, whoever he be that comes to see their Cloisters, and beat on a Drum that stands at the Gate; they are obliged to go before him to the number of thirty in their Ceremonial Habit: Coming to him they Salute him, and walk before him to the Place where he desires to be; which they do again at his Return. They are under the Jurisdiction of the Council of Customs; but upon the Executing of Punishments, when deserved, they are used more favourably than when Tried by the common Law. 
Semedo.   
The Disciples or Followers of this Doctrine, which at this Day are in great numbers, live together, never Mary, let the Hair of their Head and Beards grow very long, and wear ordinary Clothes, which differ little from the other in fashion, except in one thing, which shows that they are in Service; for in stead of a Bonnet they wear a little Garland, which covers just the Crown of their Heads. They account the last and greatest Good of Mankind to consist in bodily Goods, and the enjoyment of a quiet and peaceable Life, without toil or trouble; They acknowledge two Deities, the one more powerful than the other; They allow one Paradise and a Hell: the Paradise, which (according to their saying is joined to the satisfaction of the Body) is not only for another Life, but also for this on Earth, and consists herein, that by means of a certain Exercise and Obedience, some that are old may become young Children; others may make themselves Xinsien, that is, Happy on Earth, to possess what they please speedily with a wish, fly from one place to another, though very remote, and go to Feasts, and the like. They are lovers of Music, and use several Instruments; on which account they are invited to Funerals and public Solemnities, and serve the Emperor and Mandarins in making their Offerings; They boast themselves to be Soothsayers, and promise to procure Rain, and clear Houses haunted by Spirits.  
All the Chineses are strangely inclined to Superstition, but especially the Followers of this second Sect, and give great credit to Sorcery, and Predictions of future things.  
The Emperor's Astronomers (according to Semedo) do not a little uphold this Superstition, because they foreshow ensuing Events from the colour of the Heavens and tempestuous Wether, Thunder out of Season, by several aspects of the Sun, which they reckon to be twenty two, and from sixteen other Appearances; with all which they acquaint the Emperor: And they chiefly employ their time in foretelling either Peace or War; as also Sicknesses, Death, Changes, Insurrections, and the like: to which purpose they make Almanacs, or yearly Prognostications, which are divided into Moons, and the Moons again into Days, the Days into fortunate or unfortunate Hours, either to undertake any thing or let it alone, as to go a Journey, remove out of a House, Marry, bury the Dead, build Houses, and the like.  
By this manner of Cheating the Chineses are so deluded, and so strictly do 
Martin▪ Hist. Sinic.  they follow these Observations, that they govern themselves wholly thereby; for if the Almanac commands to do any thing on such a Day, though all the Elements were against it, they will not neglect it.  
These Astronomers, according to a very ancient Custom, are punished with Death, if they through neglect do not foretell the Eclipse of the Sun and Moon, or accidentally commit any mistakes in their Prognostication: for the Chineses account it a deadly sin not to assist the Sun or Moon when they are darkened, with Offerings and beating of Drums, and other noise, fearing else they would be devoured by a Dog or Dragon: wherefore the Emperor informed by People experienced in the Course of the Heavens, of the approaching Darkness, immediately sends Messenger's Post through all the Cities of the Empire to give notice of the Day and Hour on which the Eclipse will happen: whereupon the Magistrates and Citizens carefully watch for the time, and prevent the threatening danger by beating on divers tinkling and Copper Basins.  
They have Temples that are drawn or Carriages made for that purpose, in which the Women deliver out their Almanacs; wherein a Receipt is written how they may Conceive.  
Trigaut saith, that no superstitious Custom hath spread itself so far through the whole Empire, as that in the observation of fortunate and unfortunate Days and Hours; so that the Chinese in all their Actions observe the time exactly: To which purpose two sorts of Almanacs are Printed every year, which upon the Emperor's Command are dispersed through the whole Empire, which makes the Fallacy the more believed.  
These annual Prognostications are sold in such abundance, that most Houses have them: In them they find what they too punctually observe, not only the critical Days, but the precise Hours and Minutes at what time they shall begin or desist in any Negotiation or Business whatsoever. Besides, these Writers of the annual Predictions go higher, Composing for their profit Books more puzzling and mysterious, with large Comments on the good and evil Days, with more accurate Directions, especially concerning Buildings, Marriages, or Travel, and the like Business of consequence; and though it often happens that the Wether fall out tempestuous, let it Thunder and Lighten, Blow or Rain, yet they will begin, though they make never so little progress.  
Nasirodin, a Persian Author, who flourished Anno 1265. tells us, that the Chinese, by him called Katayans, have a Circle of twelve Days, which according to the Instruction of the Astronomers, they use in choosing the time to undertake or delay any Business of consequenc.  
These twelve Days are by the Chineses called as followeth:  

Ching, that is, Perfecting.  
Xeu, that is, Receiving.  
Caiazzo, that is, Opening.  
Pi, that is, Locking.  
Ting, that is, Affirming.  
Che, that is, Serving.  
Po, that is, Breaking.  
Vi, that is, Running danger.  
Kin, that is, Raising.  
Chu, that is, Dividing.  
Muen, that is, Exchanging.  
Ping, that is, Making even.   
Four of these twelve Days are called He, that is Black, and are accounted unfortunate; four Hoang, that is, Yellow, which are lucky, and promise some good; two Hoen, that is, Brown and Dark, and esteemed ominous.  
The Romans and Greeks agreed herein with the Chinese, and most of it is at this day used amongst them: one thing there is which may properly be said to be the Chinese; it consists in the choosing of Land to build private or public Structures upon, or bury the Dead in, choosing it by the likeness of the Head, Tail and Feet of several Dragons, which they suppose to live under Ground, and believe, that on them the welfare, not only of Families, but also of Cities, Provinces, and the whole Empire depends.  
The Chineses account one Dragon, whom they call Lung, for the greatest forerunner of good Luck.  
Before the time of the Family of Hia, nay, the Emperor Fohi, who began his Reign Anno 2952. before the Birth of Christ, it is said, That a Dragon was seen flying from a Pool; and to make the Business seem of greater consequence and consideration, they added, That they had observed sixty four Marks or Characters on his Back, which, according to their Sages, have mysterious significations.  
The Chineses in a manner ascribe all things to a Dragon, and believe, that not only all humane Fortune, but also Rain, Hail, Thunder and Lightning, are as that Monster orders. They also affirm, That there is a Dragon under the Earth, but chiefly under the Mountains; and this is the reason why with such great Care and Charge they observe the parts of the Dragon in the making of their Graves; for according to the goodness of the Earth they value the Riches and Fortune of the whole Family; just as the Astronomers, from the Conjunction of several Planets, prognosticate future Events. For this reason also the Chinese Emperors bear a Dragon in their Arms, as the Romans an Eagle; nay, the Emperor's Apparel is Embroidered with Dragons, and likewise on all the Furniture for his Table and whole House is Engraven the same; nay, the whole Court is every where full of painted Dragons.  
But above all it is to be admired, that the Chineses paint five Claws at the Feet of the Emperor's Dragons. None but those who are of Imperial Blood, or peculiar Favourites of the Emperor, may bear a Dragon in his Coat of Arms: yet if others do use this same Bearing, they must on pain of Death not give above four Claws.  
They say that the Foam of a Dragon impregnated one of the Emperor Ie's Concubines without the use of a Man: which Fable the Chineses thus relate:  
In the time of the Family of Hia (say they) a Dragon was seen, which vanished on a sudden, and left a Froth on the Earth: This Froth being of a Dragon, was like a costly, nay, that which is more, a holy Relic, and locked up in a golden Coffer, and preserved till the Reign of the Emperor Siveni; when afterward at his Command, without knowing wherefore, the Chest was opened, and this Slime leaped forth as if it had been living, and ran to and again through the Palace, none being able to hold it, and at last got into the Seraglio, and there divirginated one of great Beauty, kept for the Emperor; from hence, after the full time (as the Chineses relate) she was delivered of a fair Female: The Mother fearing to gain an ill Name, and the Emperor's displeasure, laid down the Infant, which two Married People, that accidentally walked by there, hearing it cry, took up, and carrying it home, brought it up as their own Child.  
In the third Year of the Emperor Ie's Reign the forementioned Infant being grown Marriageable, her Foster-father was on some occasion accused of a certain Crime, and put in Prison: whereupon he proffering the Virgin (who was endued with incomparable Beauty) for his Ransom to the Emperor, was not only released, but returned home with great Riches. But the Emperor was so strangely surprised with the exceeding Beauty of his new Mistress, that he was in a manner distracted, and forsook the lawful Empress, and his Son born by her, and took Paosua (for so the Virgin was called) for his Spouse, and elected Pefo, the Son of Paosua, in stead of Ikie, the lawful Son of the Empress, to succeed him in the Throne, against the consent of all his Substitute Governors.  
Ikie the true Heir, being enraged by the great wrong which he had suffered, fled from his Father to his Uncle King Xin, in the South part of the Province of Xensi, at the place where the City Nanyang stands at this day.  
Paosua during this time dwelled with the Emperor in all prosperity; but one thing he observed, that he never saw her Laugh, which was very unpleasing to him; therefore he tried several ways to win a Smile from her. At the same time a Difference arising, and overtures and threatenings of War being betwixt him and the Tartars, he put his Militia in a posture of Defence; which done, and to teach them Alarms, he fired his Beacons when there was no need: whereupon the Palaces, and all places every where were thronged with the gathered Soldiers; which too often repeating, and no appearance of any Enemy, gave her occasion to laugh heartily, to the great joy of the fond Emperor: Which false Alarms being so commonly, when they came to be real, and not being believed, brought on that negligent carelessness in not obeying, that it lost him his Life and Empire.  
Amongst other things also, Paosua took great delight in the noise which Silk makes when torn by force; wherefore the Emperor to recreate her, always spent his time in her Presence, with tearing and rending of Silk.  
Mean while the Emperor sent a Party to King Xin to fetch his fled Son again; but Xin refused to deliver the Prince, unless he should be declared Heir to the Empire: The Emperor enraged thereat, marched with an Army against Xin; who unequal to the Emperor, yet of greater Policy, joined with the Tartars, and in the Night falls suddenly on the Emperor's Quarters: whereupon the Beacons being fired as before, the Soldiers seeing the Flame, supposed that the Emperor as formerly was only caressing of his Empress, neglected their Duties; and therefore making no resistance, most of them were taken sleeping by the Enemy, and the Emperor himself slain by his Brother and Son.  
But to return; As Trigaut tells us, several eminent Persons Study this My. 
Trigaut.  stery of Dragon-Knowledge, and are sent for from remote Places to advise withal when public Buildings are to be erected, that they may so lay their Platform suiting with the benevolent Signatures from the posture of the Dragon, that the Edifice may for ever after be more free from Casualties: for these Astronomers, as our Astrologers, observe the good and evil Aspects of the Planets, with the several Configurations of the fixed Stars, so they take their Marks from the situation of Mountains and Rivers, and whatever else makes a variety, that signifies good success, on which they say, not only the preservation of the House, but the welfare and Honour of the Family depends.  
Semedo calls these Surveyors Tili. Others (saith he) which they call Tili, endeavour to to observe, not only the Situation of the Earth, but the Positions of the Planetary Aspects in the celestial Houses, so to make more happy their terrestrial Habitations.  
It is a very ancient Custom, and used to this day, to take their Observations of good or ill success, from the Colour, Spots, Motions, Legs, and Shell of a Tortoise. And likewise, as the Augurs of old, from the Notes of Birds, and noise of Beasts, and also whate'er they meet with in the Morning, the reflecting shadows of the Sun on peculiar Houses; for if at their going out in the Morning they meet any one in Mourning Apparel at their Door, Bonzies or the like, they look upon it as an ill Omen. In short, whatsoever inconvenience happens to peculiar Houses, Cities, Provinces, or the whole Empire, they ascribe it to their miserable Fortune, or something or other that is wrongly placed in the Houses, Towns, or the Emperor's Palace.  
They say that some of these Fortune-tellers reside on desolate and solitary Mountains, between the Clefts of Rocks and barren Hills like Hermits; whither also great numbers of People resort to know the Events of future things. Some only write strange Characters and▪ Chinese Letters on Board's, containing the future Condition of the Enquirers; yet their promising oftentimes hath a double meaning.  
These Wizards have many times horrible Toads that sit near them, with a thick grey speckled Skin, and opening their Jaws, (as they say) with their poisonous Breath blast and wither the Grass round about them.  
These generally sit bareheaded, being close shaved, and with their Feet naked, picking their Ears whilst they mutter several words to themselves.  
In the time of the Emperor Hiaou, who Reigned Anno 142. before the Nativity of Christ, many Women, especially at the Emperor's Court, Studied Magic and Charms, by which making themselves to appear much fairer than they were, they subjected the Male Sex according to their pleasures. Of these some got into the Prince Guei's Court, the Emperor's Son begotten by a lawful Wife, but without his knowledge, because he, according to the Chinese Writings, was of a good and pious Nature: but attaining to years, he betook himself, being ensnared by the forementioned Charms, wholly to lasciviousness.  
Amongst other things, they say there are certain Drugs, by the Chineses called Kuan, which if the Powder thereof be given any Man to drink by a Woman, it makes them mad after them, like our Love-Powders: But they had worse Ingredients, with which they occasioned Distempers, nay, Death on whomsoever they pleased; by which means Li, the Emperor's Son, begotten by one of his Concubines, was killed in the nineteenth Year of his Age, together with his Wife, Children, and most of his Family, except one Nephew.  
But the whole Empire is strangely besotted with the study of Alchemy, thereby 
●…igaut.  to get the Philosophers-Stone, by which they not only Enrich themselves by turning all things to Gold and Silver, but also that Elixir makes them Immortal, which many Emperors before and since the Nativity have endeavoured to attain to.  
The Chineses affirm, That there are Rules and Commandments of both these Arts, found out first by very Ancient, Learned, (which the Chineses reckon amongst their Saints) and afterwards from one to another, delivered to their Successors: They say also, that these first Inventors, after having▪ performed many excellent and sovereign Works, ascend both with Soul and 〈◊〉 together to Heaven, when they began to grow weary living on Earth.  
They also tell us, That anciently a Person lived without the Walls of the City Nanchang, which assisted many needy People, and ●…ast p●…ntiful▪ Alms amongst the Poor, because he by the Art of Chemistry could make pure Silver. He also (say they) had by the help of Divine Arts, a Dragon, who threatened the Ruin of the City; after which, having Chained him to an Iron Column of an exceeding bigness, he, his whole House and Family ascended up to Heaven; For this reason, the Citizens out of a Superstition, erected a great Chapel for him; and the forementioned Iron Column, the better to keep up the reputation of the Fable, is there to be seen at this day.  
But however they decline the converting of Metals into Gold or Silver by the Stone, yet the Emperor himself, and most Eminent Persons of the Empire, make it a great part of their business to study Immortality, from the promised Restauration of Youth, by the wonderful Operations of this Elixir: To which purpose, as there are many Students, so there is no want of Masters; and the whole City of Peking every where pestered with their Laboratories; and though never so much deluded, yet fresh hopes carry them on with a fervent desire to bring their Work to Perfection; being persuaded by these Mountebanks, that their failings happened from some mistakes, but now, if they would begin again, they make no question, being since better informed, to finish the so long expected and happy Work.  
But before we leave our Alchemists, take this from Martinius, which he tells of the Emperor Hiaou, who had not his equal amongst the Chinese, He was as their Histories say, much transported with a belief, that by this Art he might not only be the Wealthiest, the Happiest, and the Greatest of all Princes, but also be Crowned with Immortality: From hence he received the Title of Van Sin, that is, Ten thousand Years, which hath descended to all the Emperors to this Day.  
To this great purpose he built a new Palace accordingly, all of Cedar, Cypress, Camphire, and the like sweet smelling Woods; the scent of which, as they say, might be perceived (a) twenty one Chinese Furlongs from thence. 
About five English Mile.   
Amidst this wonderful Structure, he raised a Tower all of Copper, of twenty Rods high, (a marvellous piece of Work) with a winding Pair of Stairs in the middle, from the bottom to the top: There was also a Copper Bason, Cast in the form of a Hand, which every Morning was filled with early De●…v, wherein the Emperor steeped the Oriental Pearls to soften them, being part of the Preparations of the Medicines of Immortality: But at last they wrought upon his Belief so far, that the Elexar was ready, which Drinking, would so perpetuate Youth, that he should live according to his Title, Ten thousand Years, that is, He should be Immortal.  
The Longevity-Potion being brought, was set on the Table, which should begin the Work of Youth's Renovation; when one of his Councillors, a Minister of State, first dissuading him from the taking of it, suddenly threw the Liquor down upon the Floor; at which, the Emperor much incensed that he should lose his expectation of Immortality, which had cost so much time and treasure in Preparing, consulted with what Death he should punish so bold an Offender; when he that stood thus liable to his fury, spoke thus mildly and undiscomposed to him.  
Sir, You cannot put me to Death, for I have drunk the same Medicine of Immortality already, and am Immortal; so if I die I am guiltless, because the Medicine wants the promised Efficacy, and therefore use your pleasure; yet I suspect, that if your Indignation fall upon me, what I have drunk will be of no Defence, and I feel I shall certainly suffer Death, being conscious of the Deceit of these that are Trapanners for Bread. Which mollifying Speech so pacified the Emperor, that he gave him his Life; yet howsoever, the Emperor prosecuted the same business, to make himself Rich, Happy, and Immortal.  
There are also a third kind of Philosophers, by Semedo called Taokiao, and by Trigaut, from the first Promoter, Lonzu; as likewise by Semedo, Tunsi or Tusi, being the first broacher of this Doctrine, which agrees with the Epicureans, who affirm, 
a Post mort●… nulla 〈◊〉.  That there is no pleasure after death, and therefore they indulge what e'er in their life seems to be easy and happy, so to prolong their lives, to continue their present welfare they use all means possible, and not only study Longevity, but also how to be Immortal by ingenious discoveries for self-preservation.  
But though Laotan accounts the Summum Bonum to consist in Pleasures, yet Martinius finds him to be no way Atheistical, but declares it every where probable, that Laotan hath acknowledged one Supreme Deity, saying, Tao, or Great Understanding hath no Name; he hath Created Heaven and Earth, he is without shape; moves the Stars, though he himself is immovable; and because I know not his Name, I will call him Tao, or Supreme Understanding, without form.  
The same Philosopher makes mention in another place, of The Creation of the Heavens.  
It is not to be credited, what the Father's report out of their Stories concerning this Philosopher Laotan, that he lay concealed, being locked up in his Mother's Womb eighty one, or according to Trigaut eighty years; and afterwards forced his passage into the World through her right side; wherefore according to Trigaut he is called Lauzu, and by Martinius, Laosu; and and last of all, Laotan, that is, Old Philosopher: The time of his Maturation, or rather Imprisonment in the Womb, was (as they say) nine times nine Years, which the Chineses account the fullness of Perfection, and all things that are perfect: And because Laotan was one of their greatest and most learned Stages, they invented the forementioned number, as if Nature had spent so many Years in perfecting of him.  
This Laotan was born in the Kingdom of Zu, (for China contained anciently many and several Kingdoms) at this day the County Fungyangfu, of the Province of Nanking, in the City Mao, Anno 603▪ about twenty four Years before Confut, the Prime Philosopher amongst the Chinese.  
The third Sect (saith Martinius) is also like the Epicurean, they place Happiness 
〈◊〉. Atl. p. ●….  in Pleasures, and make it their chief study to prolong their Life, expecting nothing after Death. Amongst this are many Sorcerers, and such as use Magic, and is indeed the vilest of all Sects; the followers thereof nevertheless praise the Morality of our European Doctrine.  
According to Trigaut, Laotan left not one Book of his Doctrine, nor as it appears, would teach no new Opinion; but some of his followers called Tansu, after his death, named him, The Head of Learning, and Collected several Books in a handsome Style, from divers other Opinions and Writings. These also live unmarried in Cloisters, in which they make their Pupils, and are as lewd and wicked, as the followers of the forementioned. They never cut the Hair of their Heads, but are distinguished from others, by wearing a Hat or Bonnet of Wood upon the knot which ties the Hair on the Crown of their Heads.  
Other of this Sect that are Married, with great Zeal observe the Tenets of their Fraternity at home in their own Houses: They Honour, as they say, amongst many other Images, The Lord, or King of the Heavens, but one that is Bodily, and as they say in their Books, hath had many troubles: They also affirm, That the King of the Heavens, which Reigns at this day, is called Ciam; but he who Governed them formerly, was named Leu. This Leu, say they, on a certain time sitting on a white Dragon, descended to the Earth, and invited Ciam (who they affirm was a Magician) to a Dinner: But whilst Leu, making himself merry at the Table, Ciam getting upon the White Dragon, ascended up to Heaven, and took possession of the Celestial Realm.  
Leu thus prevented from returning by Ciam, yet obtained a Grant from The new King of Heaven, for the Dominion over certain Mountains in this Country, where they suppose he still lives, bereaved of his old Dignity.  
They Worship therefore according to their own confession, a foreign Robber and Tyrant for their God.  
Besides this their Supreme Power, they Worship another, which is a triple Deity, one of which is Lauzu, the chief of their Sect.  
These also hold forth Rewards after Death; and many of those which are most Holy, and observe their Rules, enter Soul and Body into Paradise, being capable of all Heavenly Joy; which to affirm, they show many Images of the Departed, which were translated thither in the Flesh.  
The peculiar Office of the Priests of this Sect is to clear Houses, which they believe are haunted with Evil Spirits, which they do by setting up Papers Painted with horrid Resemblances, and making a hideous cry and noise through all the Rooms, as if they were Possessed themselves.  
These Priests have their Residences in the Emperor's Temples, Consecrated to Heaven and Earth, and in Person attend the Emperor's Sacrifices, either when he Offers himself, or his foremention'd Magistrates, by which means they are in great esteem and request.  
The Music which fills up the Ceremony, the Priests perform themselves, Playing on several Instruments which may be pleasing to them, but seems very harsh to us of Europe.  
They are also sent for to Funerals of the Grandees, before which they walk in costly Habits, Playing on Horns, Sagbuts, and other Instruments: They also spend their time in warming new Houses, and conduct new Married People alongst the Streets in State, which at certain times is done at the charge and appointment of the Magistrates.  

A Correct TIDE TABLE showing the tr●…e Times of the High-Waters at London-Fridge to every day in the Year, 1692. By JOHN FLAMS●…EED, M. R. S. S.  1692. january Februar. March. April. May. june. july. August. Septemb. October. Novem. Decemb. Days. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. H.  M. 1 M 7  18 8  55 8  40 10  18 10▪ ☉ 22 11  15 11  43 1  05 2  30 2  56 4  07 4  23 A 7  47 9  31 9  16 10  40 10 49 11  45    1  35 2  50 3  17 4  26 4  40 2 M 8  18 10  09 9  48 11  13 11  5    0  18 2  01 3  10 3 ☉ 37 4  47 4  58 A 8  51 10  45 10  19 11  39 11  41 0  17 0  52 2  25 3  28 3 56 5  09 5  16 3 M 9 ☉ 26 11  20 10  50 ☉     0  50 1 ☉ 24 2  47 3  46 4  16 5  32 5  35 A 10 02 11  53 11  20 0 03 0  06 1  19 1 53 3  07 4  04 4  37 5  57 5  55 4 M 10  38    11  48 0  27 0  33 1  47 2  20 3  26 4 ☉ 23 4  59 6  ●…1 6 ☉ 15 A 11  13 0  23    0  50 0  58 2  14 2  43 3  43 4 43 5  24 6  46 6 36 5 M 11  49 0  51 0  15 1  11 1  21 2 ☉ 39 3  03 4  00 5  05 5  51 7  11 6  58 A    ●…  16 0  42 1  33 1  44 3 01 3  22 4  18 5  29 6  19 7  35 7  20 6 M 0  ●…3 1  39 1 ☉ 05 1  54 2  07 3  21 3  41 4  36 5  58 6  48 8 ☉ 01 7  43 A 0  52 2  00 1 26 2  14 2  30 3  41 3  59 4  53 6  27 7  18 8 29 8  07 7 M 1  19 2 ☉ 18 1  45 2  32 2  53 3  59 4  16 5 ☉ 14 6  57 7  48 8  55 8  33 A 1  45 2 34 2  04 2  50 3  14 4  18 4  33 5 37 7  31 8  18 9  20 8  59 8 M 2  08 2  50 2  21 3  07 3 ☉ 34 4  36 4  5●… 6  03 8  05 8  49 9  45 9  27 A 2  29 3  04 2  37 3  24 3 53 4  56 5  11 6  30 8  42 9  20 10  12 9  55 9 M 2  48 3  17 2  53 3  42 4  12 5  17 5  33 7  00 9  15 9 ☉ 48 10  39 10  26 A 3  04 3  30 3  08 3  59 4  32 5  38 5  56 7  34 9  48 10 17 11  07 10  57 10 M 3 ☉ 19 3  42 3  24 4 ☉ 18 4  53 6  03 6 ☉ 21 8  11 10  20 10  45 11  33 11  28 A 3 34 3  55 3  38 4 37 5  15 6  27 6 47 8  47 10  51 11  1●… 11  59 11  59 11 M 3  48 4  08 3  53 4  58 5  38 6  51 7  15 9  23 11 ☉ 21 11  36     ☉  A 4  01 4  22 4  08 5  20 6  04 7  18 7  47 9  59 11 49    0  26 0 30 12 M 4  14 4  37 4  25 5  46 6  30 7 ☉ 47 8  21 10  35    0  00 0  51 0  59 A 4  28 4  54 4  43 6  14 6  57 8 17 8  57 11  11 0  16 0  25 1  15 1  29 13 M 4  42 5  14 5 ☉ 02 6  43 7  26 8  50 9  35 11  44 0  41 0  48 1 ☉ 38 1  56 A 4  56 5  35 5 24 7  15 7  57 9  24 1  14    1  03 1  10 2 01 2  20 14 M 5  11 5 ☉ 59 5  50 7  48 8  28 9  59 10  51 0 ☉ 15 1  24 1  31 2  23 2  42 A 5  27 6 25 6  18 8  22 8  59 10  35 11  28 0 43 1  44 1  51 2  44 3  03 15 M 5  45 6  54 6  48 8  56 9 ☉ 31 11  12    1  09 2  04 2  11 3  04 3  22 A 6  06 7  26 7  21 9  31 10 03 11  48 0  03 1  33 2  21 2  30 3  24 3  39 16 M 6  28 8  01 7  57 10  06 10  36    0  35 1  54 2  37 2 ☉ 47 3  42 3  57 A 6  52 8  39 8  34 10  39 11  10 0  23 1  05 2  13 2  53 3 04 4  00 4  14 17 M 7 ☉ 19 9  19 9  12 11 ☉ 12 11  43 0  56 1 ☉ 32 2  30 3  07 3  20 4  18 4  32 A 7 49 9  59 9  51 11 44    1  27 1 55 2  46 3  22 3  37 4  37 4  50 18 M 8  23 10  39 10  28    0  15 1  55 2  18 3  01 3 ☉ 37 3  54 4  57 5 ☉ 09 A 8  59 11  19 11  05 0  16 0  47 2  20 2  37 3  15 3 51 4  12 5  19 5 29 19 M 9  37 11  57 11  38 0  46 1  17 2 ☉ 41 2  55 3  29 4  07 4  32 5  41 5  51 A 10  18       1  14 1  46 3 00 3  11 3  41 4  24 4  49 6  05 6  14 20 M 10  58 0  32 0 ☉ 10 1  40 2  13 3  18 3  25 3  54 4  42 5  12 6 ☉ 31 6  38 A 11  38 1  03 0 40 2  06 2  37 3  34 3  39 4  07 5  00 5  36 6 58 7  04 21 M    1 ☉ 32 1  09 2  29 2  59 3  50 3  52 4 ☉ 21 5  21 6  03 7  25 7  33 A 0  16 1 57 1  36 2  50 3  18 4  06 4  05 4 36 5  45 6  30 7  52 8  05 22 M 0  52 2  20 2  00 3  11 3 ☉ 39 4  22 4  19 4  52 6  11 6  59 8  22 8  39 A 1  24 2  41 2  23 3  31 3 56 4  37 4  33 5  11 6  40 7  30 8  54 9  15 23 M 1  54 3  01 2  45 3  51 4  14 4  52 4  47 5  32 7  11 8 ☉ 02 9  27 9  51 A 2  20 3  19 3  05 4  11 4  32 5  08 5  02 5  55 7  45 8 34 10  10 10  28 24 M 2 ☉ 43 3  36 3  24 4 ☉ 32 4  50 5  24 5 ☉ 19 6  20 8  22 9  07 10  35 11  07 A 3 03 3  54 3  42 4 52 5  09 5  41 5 36 6  48 8  57 9  40 11  11 11  46 25 M 3  21 4  11 4  01 5  14 5  28 5  59 5  56 7  19 9 ☉ 34 10 14 11  46 ☉  A 3  38 4  29 4  21 5  36 5  48 6  19 6  17 7  53 10 10 10  47    0 22 26 M 3  55 4  48 4  41 6  00 6  08 6 ☉ 39 6  40 8  30 10  46 11  20 0  20 0  56 A 4  12 5  10 5  03 6  25 6  30 7 01 7  07 9  08 11  21 11  53 0  53 1  28 27 M 4  29 5  35 5 ☉ 26 6  50 6  51 7  25 7  37 9  47 11  54    1 ☉ 25 1  55 A 4  46 6  02 5 52 7  16 7  13 7  50 8  11 10  26    0  23 1 54 2  20 28 M 5  06 6 ☉ 29 6  20 7  44 7  36 8  18 8  46 11 ☉ 05 0  26 0  53 2  21 2  42 A 5  27 6 58 6  48 8  16 8  00 8  50 9  23 11 41 0  55 1  21 2  46 3  03 29 M 5  51 7  30 7  18 8  36 8 ☉ 26 9  22 10  01    1  22 1  49 3  08 3  21 A 6  16 8  05 7  48 9  00 8 52 9  56 10  39 0  16 1  47 2  15 4  28 3  37 30 M 6  43    8  20 9  28 9  19 10  31 11  18 0  48 2  12 2 ☉ 39 3  47 3  52 A 7  13    8  51 9  55 9  47 11  08 11  56 1  17 2  34 3 04 4  06 4  06 31 M 7 ☉ 45    9  21    10  15     ☉  1  43    3  26    4  20 A 8 20    9  51    10  45    0 32 2  07    3  47    4  34  
M stands for Morning, A for Afternoon, ☉ for Sunday.  
This Table may be made to serve the under-written places by  
Adding h. m. For Tinmouth-Haven, Hartlepool, and Amsterdam. 0 30 ●…rest 1 00 Scilly 1 45 Mounts Bey 1 55 Bridlington Peer, and Humber 2 00 Fowey Looe and Plymouth 3 13 Dartmoutò, Harborow and Hull 3 30 Torbay and Tinmouth 3 40 Exmouth, To●…sham and Lymt 3 50 Wey●…outh 4 20 Bridgewater and Tex●…l 4 45 Portland Harestew, and without the Ulit 5 40  
Substracting. h. m For Leith, Ma●…s, and Gourits Gut 0 15 Gravesend, Rochester, Ramm●…skins 1 00 For Bu●…y of the Nor, and Fi●…shing 1 20 Shoe Beacon, Portsmouth Red-sand and Ostend 2 30 Spithead, Harwict, Dover, Calis 3 00 Orfo●…dness, Gunfleet, Hastings, Shortham, Diep 4 00 Needles, and ●…armouth Peer 4 40 St. Helen's and Haver de Grace ●… ●…0  
But Note, That in such of these places as lie open to the Sea, and where no great Rivers are, the Quarter-Moon high-waters hold out longer than the times showed by this Reduction, near half an hour.  
As also that, When by reason of long Droughts in Summer, or continual hard Frosts in Winter, the Fresh Waters are low; or when the Wind blows hard at N. or N. W. the Tide●… may hold up longer in the River of Th●…ts, than the times showed in the Table. But when the Wind is strong at W. or W. by S. or there are great Freshes, they hold not out so long, but the difference is seldom above half hour.  
London: Printed for William Co●…t at the Mariner and Anchor on Little-Tower-hill near the Mi●…ories-End.  
Im●…▪ 30 Octobris 16●…1. Robert Southwell. P. R. S.  
Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Nanking 1 26 32 40 Chief Cities     Fungyang 0 30 34 48 Sucheu 3 30 31 52 Sunkiang 4 30 31 10 Changcheu 2 50 32 45 Chinkiang 2 28 32 49 Yangcheu 2 15 33 6 Hoaigan 2 12 34 17 Lucheu 0 8 33 4 Ganking 0 20 31 20 Taiping 1 10 32 20 Ningque 1 10 31 40 Chicheu 0 10 31 36 Hoeicheu 0 55 30 18 Great Cities     Quangte 1 50 31 32 Hocheu 1 0 33 50 Chucheu 1 26 32 31 Siuchen 0 3 35 3  

The tenth Province, Chikiang.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Hangcheu 3 10 30 27 Chief Cities     Kiating 4 0 31 15 Hucheu 3 3 30 57 Niencheu 2 24 29 33 Kinhoa 2 2 28 57 Kiucheu 1 37 28 42 Chucheu 3 5 28 12 Xaohing 3 30 30 16 Ningpo 4 46 29 40 Taicheu 4 25 28 38 Vencheu 4 4 27 38  

The eleventh Province, Fokien.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Focheu 2 40 25 58 Chief Cities     Civencheu 2 9 25 0 Changcheu 1 10 24 42 Kienning 1 0 27 0 jenning 0 57 26 34 Tingcheu 0 55 25 40 Hinghoa 2 35 25 27 Xaow 0 2 27 10 The great City     Foving 4 0 26 33 Garrisons     Phumuen 4 25 27 0 Foning 4 8 26 15 Tinghai 3 22 26 10 Muihoa 3 21 25 52 Xe 3 28 25 50 Haikeu 3 50 25 29 Ganhai 2 3 24 45 Hiamuen 1 59 24 35 Chungxe 1 26 24 30 Tungxan 0 57 24 15 Hivenchung 0 46 24 0 jungting 1 18 24 33  

The twelfth Province, Quantung.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Quancheu 4 2 23 15 Chief Cities     Xacheu 3 42 24 42 Nanhiung 3 10 25 32 Hoeicheu 2 46 23 9 Caocheu 1 0 23 30 Chaoking 4 45 23 30 Caoheu 5 40 22 33 Liencheu 7 12 22 0 Liucheu 6 20 28 58 Kiuncheu 6 36 39 40 The Great City     Loting 5 9 23 25 Garrisons     Taching 1 5 24 20 Tung 1 22 24 17 Hanxan 1 10 23 25 Cinghai 1 14 23 25 Kiazu 1 29 23 12 Kiexo 1 49 22 50 Hiung 6 30 21 30 jungching 5 49 23 45 Ciungling 8 10 19 30  

The thirteenth Province, Quangsi.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Queilin 7 32 25 54 Chief Cities     Liucheu 8 42 25 0 Kingyven 9 46 25 2 Pinglo 7 0 25 26 Gucheu 6 33 24 2 Cincheu 8 0 24 2 Nanning 9 30 23 20 Taiping 12 20 23 20 junning 12 7 23 8 Chingan 11 55 24 0 Tiencheu 11 30 24 11 Garrison Cities     Sungen 10 25 24 5 Vuyven 10 30 23 52 Funghoa 9 55 24 5 The great City     Suching 12 25 24 6 Garrisons     Xanglin 12 47 23 57 Ganlung 13 57 24 4  

The fourteenth Province, Quoicheu.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. Quoiyang 11 46 26 0 Chief Cities     Sucheu 9 2 27 53 Sunan 10 20 27 39 Chinyven 9 23 27 34 Xecien 9 42 27 55 Tungyn 8 45 28 20 Liping 8 35 26 42 Touch 10 3 25 55 Great Cities     Pugan 13 5 25 52 junning 12 20 25 2 Chinning 12 5 25 0 Garrison Cities     Putting 12 7 26 4 Pingyve 10 32 27 0 Lungli 11 9 26 27  

The fifteenth Province, junnan.  Names. Longitude. Latitude. Metropolis D. M. D. M. junnan 14 25 25 0 Chief Cities     Tali 16 56 25 27 Linyaw 14 19 24 6 Zuhiung 15 24 24 56 Chinkiang 14 4 24 29 Munghoa 16 38 25 23 Kinfung 16 30 25 52 Quangnan 13 25 24 0 Quangsi 13 35 24 14 Chinyven 16 26 24 37 Sungning 15 48 27 33 Xunning 17 18 24 46 Chief Garrisons     Kiocing 13 48 25 35 Yaogan 15 50 26 3 Cioking 16 40 26 28 Vutin 14 59 25 27 Cintien 13 52 26 4 Likiang 16 58 26 54 juenkiang 15 33 23 54 jungchang 17 42 24 58 Great Cities     Pexing 16 8 26 44 Lanking 15 55 27 3   

The manner of the Building of the Cities in China.  
MOst of the Cities in all China are of one Model and Fashion, and exceed each other only in Bigness and Commerce; for most of them are square, with broad and high Walls of Brick or Freestone, Fortified round about at an exact distance, with high Watch-Towers, not unlike those of the ancient Romans; surrounded with broad Moats; and within, with Pallasadoes.  
The Entrances into the City have always double Gates, one before another, with Portcullases, between those two Gates is a large Court, wherein the Soldiers are Exercised that belong to the Guard: These Gates are not opposite but oblique, so that they cannot see through them both at once: The first hangs on a double Wall, which appears like our Bulwarks. Above the Gates, on the Arch are high Towers, which the Chineses call Muen Leu, in which the Soldiers keep Guard, and are Magazines where their Arms are kept.  
Every Metropolis, and almost all the small Cities, have a little distance 
Trigaut.  without the Walls in a pleasant and frequented place, or near the Road, a Tower, by Peter jarrik and others called Chimes, which the Chineses look upon to be so auspicious, that no Man goes about any business of consequence, before he hath Saluted these Edifices, from thence expecting their better Fortune. One of these Towers, by which we may judge all the rest, is before described in the Province of Xantung: They have at least seven, nine, or ten Galleries of Freestone, and very artificially built, in manner like a Pyramid; they are not only Erected in or near the Cities, but some of them on the highest Mountains.  
These Towers are not much unlike other Structures, from their quality 
Other Towers called Cu●….  called Culeu (which here we should name Hourly Towers) which are built at the Public Charge, one or two in every City, according to the bigness thereof: On every one of these Towers is a Water-Glass, for in stead of Watches or Hour-Glasses, the Chineses use Water Glasses, which show the Hour of the Day; for the Water falling out of one Glass into the other, lifts up a Board, Carved with the Figures of the Hours, and time of the Day: There is also one, who constantly observes the Hand which points, and by the beating on a great Drum, giveth notice thereof to the People every Hour, what the Clock is; he also puts forth another Board out of the Steeple, on which the Hour of the Day is Painted with Golden Figures, of a Foot and a half long.  
The same Person which Watches the Hours, hath an Eye also (because he looks over the whole City) if any Fire should accidentally happen in one House or other, and by beating on his Drum, raiseth all the Citizens to the quenching of it: He whose House is set a Fire through his own carelessness, suffers Death without mercy, because of the danger which threatens the neighbouring Houses, all built of Wood  
On these Time-telling Towers, the Governors often meet to keep their Festivals.   

Pagodes or Temples.  
NOt far from these Turrets stands generally a Pagan Chapel, besides a Temple Consecrated to the Spirit or good Genius of the City.  
In these, all the Governors or Magistrates, on the entering into their Offices, take their Oaths of Allegiance, and the like, as if before the God or Protector of their City.  
In former Ages, the Chineses in these Temples honoured only the forementioned Spirits; but at this day Worship other Idols.  
Great numbers of these Pagodes are through all China, and are likewise built in solitary places, on the tops and declinings of Mountains.  
Most of these Pagodes are inhabited by Priests, who live there upon the ancient Revenues granted them of the place: The Pagodes also afford good Lodgings and Entertainment for Travellers, who there find plenty of all things.  
The Pagodes or Temples are within furnished with Images, to the number in some of above a thousand, and hung round about with black Lamps, which burn Night and Day, in Commemoration of those, as they conceive, which lived Piously, and died Happily.  
Some Images sit on Tables, as if they lived and were consulting together.  
At the entrance, or behind the other Images stand horrible shapes, Horned Fiends, with open Mouths, and Hands with grievous Claws.  
In the middle commonly appears an Altar, whereon sits an Image of some times thirty, forty, fifty, nay a hundred Foot high, to which the Temple is Consecrated, besides several lesser Idols on each side thereof; before the Image stands generally a thick, but hollow Cane, full of little Reeds or Pens, inscribed with Chinese Characters, which they believe foretell future events: On each side are Perfuming-Pots, which are continually supplied, and in the middle stands a Wooden Charger, in which the Priest puts his Offerings, when he Invokes the God on some exigent, to grant him a favourable sign of good success: The Altar is Coloured Red, with which no common Houses may be Painted.  
A Pagode or Temple, which was formerly the Hall of a Palace, belonging to a grand Eunuch, near the City of Peking, and afterwards on the Emperor's Command given to the jesuits for a Chapel, Trigaut says, was before set forth after this manner:  
In the chief Isle stood a great Altar of Baked and Hewn Stone, curiously Wrought, and Painted Red, after the manner of their Temples: Upon the middle of the Altar sat a great and horrible Monster, Baked of Clay, Gilt from top to bottom.  
The Chineses called this Image Tuan, and suppose it Commands over the Earth and Riches thereof; wherefore we with the ancient Poets should call it Pluto: It had a Sceptre in one Hand, and a Crown on its Head, both not unlike the Marks of our Kings. On each side of the Isle stood two great Tables, every one Guarded by five Infernal Judges, which were also Painted on the Walls, sitting on Seats of Justice, and Condemned (as they said) the Sinners to Everlasting Torments, every one according to his Condition: Before them stood many Furies, far more terrible (with tormenting Scourges) than those which we represent; and in such manner those Devils seemed to punish the Criminals, that they struck a Terror to the Living; for some lay broiled on Gridirons, others boiled in Oil, others again rend to Pieces, some cut through in the middle, torn to Pieces by Dogs, bruised in Mortars, and other such like cruel Punishments.  
The first of the forementioned Infernal Judges seemed to examine the Malefactors, which as the Chineses suppose, he re-views in a Looking-Glass; this done, he sends them to the other Judges, according to the several Punishments which they are to suffer: Amongst them was one, whose Office was to Punish by Transmigration, sending the Souls of the Malefactor into worse Bodies than formerly they possessed; transforming Tyrants to Tigers, debauched Persons into Swine, others into such Beasts as best suit with their Inclination: But for Petty Crimes, the Rich, they only became poor and despicable People.  
There were also a great Pair of Scales, in one of which stood a Sinner, and in the other a Prayer Book of the Doctrine of the Idols, which weighed down the Sinner, and released him from Punishments.  
In the middle, before the resemblance of Hell, flowed a River of a strange Colour, into which many were dragged; cross the River lay two Bridges, one of Gold, and the other of Silver, over which passed those that had been true Pagan-Worshippers, and wore several Badges of their Offices and Service shown to the Idols; and had for their Guides the Servants of the Idols, under whose Defence they passed through the midst of all the Torments of Hell, and came at last to pleasant Fields, Groves, and Valleys.  
In another corner were drawn the Jaws of Hell, belching out Flames, Serpents and Furies, towards the Gates of Hell, which were made of Copper; many other more of that kind were also seen: In several places of the Temple was written on Scrols, That whosoever calls a thousand times on this Image by Name, shall be freed from all these Tortures.  
It will not be unnecessary to give you here two Platforms of two several Pagodes or Temples.  

Directions for a little Temple or Pagode, covered all over.  1 
THe Prime and only Gate of the Temple.  2 
A Partition of Wood between two Pillars of Stone or Wood, on which two Gygantick Figures are Painted; By this means, the sight out of the Street into the Temple is prevented, though the Doors are open.  3. 
An erected Stone, in form of a Consecrated Basin, in which the Romans keep their Holy-Water, in which lies Fire to burn the Perfumes that are put in the same.  4. 
Body of the Temple.  5. 
A great Table before the Altar, curiously Varnished, Painted, and Gilt, on which stand Tapers, and Perfumes always burning. On the Table stand also two Cases, and a Cane full of little Pipes or Straws, wherewith they Cast Lots.  6. 
A great Altar, on which some Images stand.  7. 
Two dat Altars, on each of which are other Representations.  8. 
Pedestals of Stone, on which the Pillars of Wood or Stone rest, which hold up the Roof, and make three Divisions.  9 
Two small Pools or Ponds, with Water and Fish, open on the top, from whence the Light shines into the Temple, being in stead of Windows, for no other Light comes into the Temple, but from those places where they are, or through the chief Gate.  10. 
Two Chambers before the Gate that leads into the Temple, in which stand two great shapes of Horses and other Images.  11. 
Two Board's made fast to the Walls of the Temple, Engraven with Superstitious Directions, to throw their Lots before the Images, with the foresaid Straws, which stand on the Table.  12. 
A great Drum on a Wooden Bench, on which they give several strokes, after having ended their Prayers to the Images.  13. 
A great Bell hanging at the Wall of the Temple, made like ours, on which they also strike twice or thrice with a Stick, after they have ended their Devotions.  14. 
A Bench with holes, wherein they put their Umbrelloes', or other Marks of Honour, which are carried before the Mandarins, and likewise before their Images, when they go Processioning.  15. 
The place where those that Kneel to Pray before their Images, and Cast Lots.   

Directions or Draught of a Temple, one of the biggest and stateliest in all China.  1 
THe chief Gate in the first Wall that surrounds the Temple.  2 
Two Gates on each side of the forementioned.  3 
First Court before the Temple, open on the top.  4 
A great Pool, with Water and Fish.  5 
A Bridge to go over the Pool.  6 
A great covered Hall, which spreads itself before the whole Structure.  7 
A second open Court, much bigger, Paved with Freestone.  8 
Little Chambers on each side of the second Court.  9 
The chief Hall or Chapel in the Temple, covered with a handsome Roof.  10 
Pillars of the two Halls, which in some Temples are of Wood, and in others of one entire Stone.  11 
Little Doors of the Chambers, with a Gallery, through which they pass before they go into the Chambers.  12 
The place whither those repair to Kneel and show Reverence to their Images, and draw Lots.  13 
A very curious and well-made Table, Gilt and Varnished, whereon in a Case stand Straws or little Canes, with which they draw Lots; and likewise Perfuming Pans, and burning Tapers; over it also hangs a lighted Lamp.  14 
A great Altar with one, or several Images.  15 
A Stone Pedestal close by the Wall, on which stand many whole and half Images.  16 
A Stone, cut in manner of a Basin, in which stands a Chafindish with Coals, wherein Gilt and Silvered Paper is burnt by those that come to Worship the Images: In some Temples generally stand, in stead of the forementioned Stone, many Copper Pan's, large, and neatly made.  17 
Two Board's made fast on the Walls of the Temple, Engraven with their Superstitious Belief.  18 
A great Bell, made like those of Europe, but without a Clapper, on which they strike with a Staff three or four times, after they have finished their Prayers.  19 
A great Drum on a Wooden Bench, on which they also strike, as on the Bell.  20 
A Bench of Wood with holes, in which they stick the Umbrelloes' and other Badges of Honour that are carried before the Mandarins, and likewise before the Images in time of their Precessioning.    

Triumphal Arches.  
IN several Cities, to their no small Ornament, are divers Triumphal Arches, most of them of hewn Marble, with great Art and curious Imagery, richly wrought, after the manner of the Goths; they are, as anciently amongst the Romans, built in Commemoration of those which have done some great Service to that City or Country; sometimes also for the Citizens, that have attained to the height of their Learning.  
They are chiefly built in the Eminentest Streets and most Populous places, and consist in three Portals, the biggest in the middle, and the two lesser on each side, through which they pass.  
On both sides stand Marble Lions, and other fine Imagery; on the Ceiling are Celestial Signs, Birds, Flowers, Snakes, Serpents, and the like, done very Artificially.  
Those places that are void of Statues are curiously Carved or adorned with other Imagery, and are so Cut, that they seem Pendant in the Air. It deserves no small admiration, how such vast Stones could be Wrought and Cut through, that they seem rather like loose Chains of divers Links, than singly Wrought. The whole Arch rests on high Pillars, and both before and behind of one fashion; The upper part of the Roof generally consists in three Stories or Partitions, every one divided, with some ●…hings resembling our Architecture; Upon the Summit of the Arch lies a blue Stone, covered with a small Gilded Arch, on which the Emperor's Name in whose Reign the Arch was built is Engraven; Beneath in the Front appears another broad Stone, whereon is an Inscription, with the Name of the Person in honour of whom, and for what good Service it was erected.   

Buildings.  
THe Artificers and Tradesmens Houses in the Cities are not built with any great art, because the Chineses regard more their Ease and Convenience than Ornaments; yet though they are not ver●… stately, they are convenient and sufficiently comely: But the Houses of the Grandees are very magnificent and large.  
The Chineses, as Adam Schall witnesseth, use no Stone for their high Buildings, but only Timber joined and fastened to one another with Iron Rings, after the same manner as our Masts in great Ships are; which thus conjoined is coloured over with Chinese Varnish, or Wax called Cie, and sometimes Gilded, to the no small lustre thereof.  
They take no delight in many Stories, never raising them higher than two, 
Martin. A●…l. p. 6.  though generally but one, they counting it a hard labour to go up Stairs or Ladders.  
The lower part of their House is only inhabited, it being divided into handsome Chambers and Halls: As to the out-part of the House, it is but mean (except the great Gate and other lesser Wickets, which are stately built before Nobleman's Houses) but the inner part is pleasant, and very curiously wrought, all shining with the Varnish Cie. They are generally built of Wood, yea, the Emperor's Palace itself, though the Walls which separate the Halls and Antichambers are commonly of Brick, but the Roof rests on wooden Pillars, and not on Walls, as ours do, and not covered with Tiles of Clay. They look not forwards through Windows, Persons of Quality accounting it ill Breeding to open a Casement into the Street. Every House hath several Yards or Halls one behind another; the privatest or last of which is in habited by the Women, who are kept so close, as if in Prison.  
The Chineses, according to Trigaut, when they begin to Build, erect first the 
Lib. 5. p. 6.  Pillars of their Houses, which are all of Wood, for Stone is of no esteem amongst them; nay, the Pillars in the Emperor's Courts and Governors Houses are also of Wood: On the raised Columns they lay great pieces of Timber, and on them the Roof: The Walls are made last of all of Clay or Mortar, which if they should chance to fall, yet the Timber-work would stand, and the Roof-remains firm and whole. The order in which the Pillars stand, is the same with all other open places; for every Court of the Governors is divided into several base Courts or Quadrangles paved with Freestone; the Floors of them being somewhat lower than those of the Chambers, they ascend a few Steps up to them and the Galleries.  
And again in another place the same Trigaut saith, That the Chineses are not 
Lib. 1. cap. 4.  to be compared to us in Architecture, neither for beauty nor durance; for they build according to Man's life, and (as they say) only for themselves and not for others; whereas we on the contrary build for future Ages.  
The Chineses dig no Foundations, but lay on the Ground which they design to build on, very great Stones; or if they chance to dig Foundations, they are never above two or three Yards deep, though for exceeding high Towers, so that they seldom last one Age. Nor in like manner their Clay Walls, which give them the trouble of a constant and daily repairing; from whence it happens also, that their Houses are for the most part of Wood, or rest on wooden Posts; in which there is no small convenience, because the Walls may be repaired without meddling with the other parts of the Houses, for the Roofs rest not on the Walls, but on Columns. Thus far Trigaut.   

Palaces, or Governors Courts.  
THe Palaces are all built at the Emperor's Charge for Residences for the Governors, as well Civil as Martialist: And the Emperor doth not only provide Courts and Ships for his Governors, but also all manner of necessary Furniture, Provisions and Servants; nay, when a Governor (which is most remarkable) either goes to another Province, or served out the time of his Office (which sometimes happens to be in half a year) he may take all the Furniture with him, and then again new is provided for his Successor.  
The Houses of the Magistrates exceed all other in beauty, bigness, and Ornamentals, and may justly be called Courts or Palaces.  
In every Metropolis are fifteen, twenty, or more such public Edifices, in the chief Cities; at least eight, and four in the less, all after one Model, except that the one is bigger than the other, according to the Quality of the Governors.  
The great Palaces have four or five Halls, with as many Porches that stand before them.  
At the Front of every Palace three Gates, the biggest in the middle, every one adorned on each side with great Lions of Marble. Before the greatest Gate is a large Court Railed in, which glitters exceedingly with the Chinese Varnish. In the middle of this Court stand two Towers, or Musick-Rooms, ready provided with Drums, and all sorts of Instruments to play on whenever the Governor goes in or out to sit on the Bench of Justice. Beyond this Gate is a spacious Hall, wherein those that Plead, or have any Business with the Governor, wait; on each side thereof are small Apartments for the Judges of the lower Bench; beyond are two Rooms, wherein Persons of Quality, that come to visit the Governors, are received; in them are Stools and Benches, and all things necessary for Entertainment. In these also the right-Hand is given to the Civilists, or Citizens, and the left to the Martialist. Passing through these Chambers you come to another Gate, which is seldom opened but when the Governor keeps a Court-Day. The middlemost is of an extraordinary bigness, and none but Lords and Noblemen are suffered to go through it, all other Persons walking through the side-Gates. Beyond this Gate is another large Court, at the end whereof stands a great Apartment resting on Columns, and is called Tang. In this Chamber or Hall the Governor sits on the Bench; on each side thereof Servants, Messengers, and other Officers, have little Houses for their Residences.  
These Officers never remove with the Governor, but live there during their life-time, being maintained at the Emperor's Charge, and serve one Lord after another, without changing their Habitations.  
Behind this Apartment is another inward Chamber, much statelier than the first, which is called Sutang, that is, The Privy-Chamber; in which only the greatest Friends to the Governor give their Visits, and pay Respects; about it on the outside the Governor's Household have their Dwellings; behind it opens the greatest Gate, where also are the Governors own Lodgings, and a little apart his Wives and Concubines, being all neatly built, and conveniently contrived. There are also Warrens, Gardens, and all things fit for Country Recreation.  
A Palace belonging to an Eunuch, not far from the City Peking, is by Trigaut, with the following Platform, thus described:  
On each side before the Gates stand two Marble Stones, in a manner like Steps to get on Horseback from; before the Entrance of the Palace runs a Wall about six Foot high; behind which opens a small Entry or Alley, in the middle whereof stands the prime Portico, or chief Stone Gate, to which they go mounted on Steps, with two Chambers on the right, and three on the lefthand, which have their Entrances into the little Alley; beyond this Gate opens a great Court, where on the right-Hand stand three, and on the lefthand four Chambers; At the end of this first Court is another Gate, which they first ascend on Steps, and having passed through it, descend again on the other side into a second Court; in the middle whereof on each side, a Gate or Door with Steps leads to the Halls that are on both sides of this Court; behind which is also a great Hall, and beyond that a third Court of the same form as the second; and at last appears a stately Garden, surrounded with a Wall of twenty Hand high, and cut through in the middle with a paved Way.  

A Draught of the first Ground-plot of a House for Chineses of indifferent Quality.  1 
THe chief Door of the House under a small Gallery, which serves in stead of a Penthouse,  2 
Prime Courts paved with Freestone.  3 
Chief Halls in the House.  4 
A wooden Partition, with a little Room in the middle in manner like a Chapel, in which stand Carved Images, and before them perfuming Vessels and Lamps.  5 
A narrow Entry behind the Partition, which hinders the sight into the chief Hall.  6 
Two inner Chambers.  7 
Two Halls or Dining-Rooms.  8 
A great House for Poultry, cattle, and the like.   

A Draught of the second Ground-plot of a House for a Rich Chinese, or Mandarin of ordinary Quality.  1 
A Portal before the Gate.  2 
The chief and only Gate of the whole House.  3 
The Entry or Gallery.  4 
A Partition of Wood to prevent the sight from without into the House.  5 
An open Court paved neatly with Freestone.  6 
Covered Halls.  7 
The chiefest Hall.  8 
A Wooden Partition with a Chapel in the middle, in which the Images stand, as also Candles, Lamps, and Vessels to burn Perfume in before them.  9 
A narrow Entry behind the wooden Partition, which hinders the Prospect into the Hall and open Court.  10 
Chambers in which the Master of the House Lodges.  11 
Narrow Entries, through which they go into all the Chambers and inner-  12 
Apartments for Slavesses, and other Female-Servants.  13 
Little Chambers for Slaves and Men-Servants.  14 
A Stable for cattle.   

A Draught of a third Ground-plot of Royal Houses, and the Houses of very rich Mandarins.  1 
THe Front Gate.  2 
The chief and only Door of the House.  3 
The Entry or Gallery.  4 
A Partition of Wood, which prevents the sight from without into the House.  5 
Open Courts covered neatly with square Freestone.  6 7 
Chief covered Halls.  8 
Little Entries, through which they go into all the Courts and Chambers of the House.  9 
A Partition of Wood in the last Hall, with a Chapel in the middle, in which as before stand Carved Images, Candles, Lamps, and perfuming Vessels.  10 
Narrow Entries behind the great wooden Partition, which hinders those from being seen that walk in the Hall.  11 
A wooden Partition in the first Hall between the first chief Court, which stops the prospect into the other open places.  12 
Pedestals of the Pillars, which support the Roof of the first Hall, which stands at the end of the first Court.  13 
Handsome Chambers, in which the Lord of the House resides.  14 
Lesser Rooms, in which his Concubines, Slavesses, and other Women dwell.  15 
Small Apartments for Servants and Slaves.  16 
The Stable. Thus much concerning their Houses.    

Of their Shipping.  
FRom the building of their Houses we may conjecture what their Shipping may be, notwithstanding they are used in another Element, and serve for other occasions.  
The Chinese Vessels are several, viz. Warlike, Imperial, Ships for the Governors, others that carry the Fish sent to the Emperor's Court, Longzons, Snake-Vessels, or rather Pleasure-Boats, and the like, besides floating Villages on Canes, joined together with a tough Twig called Rotang.  
An incredible number of Vessels are continually found in China, Sailing from one place to another; for the Country is Navigable in most parts, by convenience of the Rivers every where; for the Way from the City Makao to the Metropolis Peking, (being a Tract of about three hundred Germane Miles) may all be travelled by Water, along Rivers or artificial Channels, except one days Journey, which is over the Mountain of Mintin, between the City Nanhang, of the Province of Quantung, and the City Nanking in the Province of Quangsi.  
In like manner, they can go from the Province of Chikiang in their Barges along the Rivers through that of Suchuen; nay, there is scarce any City, either little or great in all China, to which they cannot come by Water, because the whole Country is not only naturally full of Rivers, but are also divided and subdivided by industry into several Channels and Rivulets: But their Ships that lie in several Bays and Harbours resemble Woods.  
Such an innumerable and vast number of Shipping are in the Province of Fokien, that the Inhabitants thereof proffered the Emperor of China, when on a time he resolved to War against the japanners, to make him a Bridge or Causeway of Ships, that should reach from their Coast to japan, and well it might have been done, if they could have endured the turbulence of the Sea.  
Amongst all other, the Imperial Ships belonging to the Governors are the 
Ships of the Governors.  best and stoutest, and indeed in curious Work and Ornamentals, exceed ours in Europe: they show in the Water like Towers or Castles, and are on both sides divided into several Apartments; in the middle is a stately Room provided with all manner of Necessaries, and Hung with Tapestry, and furnished in State, with whatever belongs to a Prince's Palace; in stead of Glass Windows they have Silk varnished and painted with Flowers, Birds, Trees, and the like, which is so close that no Wind penetrates. Round about the Ship on the Deck are Galleries and Rails, between which the Seamen or Mariners can do their Business without any trouble or disturbance. The whole Ship is varnished with the Wax by the Chinese called Cie, which gives a great lustre, being also mixed with divers Colours; the inside is painted with Birds, Beasts, Cities, and the like, in Golden Colours (the proper Livery of the Emperor,) which are worthy of observation, and very delightful to the Eye. They use no Nails in all their Ships, because the Timber and Planks are pegged together with wooden Pins.  
The Chinese Vessels are in length equal with our Mediterranean Galleys, but are not so high and broad; on a Ladder of Leather with twelve Steps they get into them. The Prow, where the Drummers beat and Trumpeters sound their Levets, is made like a Castle. Upon the sound of the Drums and Trumpets all the other Vessels give them the way, unless it be a Mandarin of greater Quality, than the inferior gives way to the superior, without any the least disturbance or dispute, all which Cases being ordered by the Law, according to which every one must govern himself; wherefore on the Head of every Ship stands written in great Golden Letters of a Foot and a half long, the Quality of every Governor; from both the sides fly divers coloured Silk Flags and Pennons.  
In calm Wether there are People, which in stead of Horses, Tow the Vessels by a Line, or Row them: They also use their Oars just as the Fishes their Fins or Tails, with very great dexterity and swiftness, to the no little manifestation of their Ingenuity. They also Steer a Ship with a single Oar after the same manner as we our Boats.  
Exceeding stately are those Ships which every three Months to the number of five, come with Silk-Stuffs and Garments from the Metropolis of Nanking to the Court of Peking, and are by the Chineses called Lungchychuen, as if they would say Ships of Dragon's Clothes, because they are sent to the Emperor, whose Arms and Marks are Dragons; they are Gilt all over, and coloured Red. To these all the Governor's Vessels are inferior, and must give them the Way wheresoever they meet them.  
Swift Streams, which between the Hills and Valleys have great Falls, are Rowed up by the Chinese with a sort of little Boats with two Oars or Steerers, one before at the Head, and the other at the Stern; by means of which they guide their Boats between the Rocks with great dexterity and ease, as if they had a Horse by the Reins, though sometimes the Channel is so narrow, that the Vessels can scarce pass through the same, but are forced to go round about the Stones, which lie scattered and cumber the Channel every where.  
This troublesome Rowing, though an ingenious Invention of the Chinese, hath raised this Proverb amongst them, That their Boats are Paper, and their Watermen Iron, because they are made of very thin Board's, like our slit Deal, which are not nailed, but fastened together with Withs, in the Chinese Tongue called Rotang; by which means the Boats, though often beaten by the strong Current against the Rocks, split not, but bend and give way.  
In the third County Sucheufu, of the Province of Nanking, the Inhabitants keep many Pleasure-Boats only for their Recreation, all of them being richly gilded and painted with several colours to the Life, so that we may rather call them stately Houses than Ships. Many oftentimes spend their whole Estates in these Vessels, being too indulgent to Wine and Women.  
In a delightful Lake called Si, near the chief City Hangcheu, in the Province of Chekiang, are also very gallant Vessels, which Row up and down in the same in fair Wether for their pleasure. All things about these Vessels are either gilded or painted with various colours, where they always highly Treat, and are presented with Stage-Plays, and other such like Divertisements. The Ships in the interim furnished with all manner of Necessaries, Sail without fear of Shipwreck cross the Lake, notwithstanding many by sudden Storms or Tempests are in the middle of their Mirth cast away.  
They have also a kind of Gundelo's, in the Chinese Tongue called Lungschen, that is, Serpent-Boats, from their resembling of Water-Snakes, and their being Painted and Carved all over with various Serpents; some overgrown with Hair, and hooped in with broad Iron Rings, are also joined together with Ribbons of divers colours, very neatly, and with great art interwoven together. The Masts, which are generally three, and hung with Silk Pennons and Flags, have an Idol upon the top of them, as also one on the Prow of the Ship; on the Stern are many Ensigns, hung full of Tufts of Hair, Silk Flags, and long Feathers; the whole Vessel is hung round about with Gold and Silk Fringe; under the Deck sit the Rowers, generally to the number of ten or twelve, richly Clothed in Silk, and Gilded Crowns on their Heads; at the sound of a Drum they strike their Oars (which are made like a Spoon) into the Water, and make such quick way, that they seem to go as swift as Lightning; in a Gap in the Stern oftentimes hangs a Boy, a Juggler, who leaping into the Water, makes pleasant sport for the Passengers.  
In the Yellow River are a kind of Carriages, or rather floating Villages, consisting in great thick Reeds, by the Indians called Bambu, or Bambo's, which are so closely tied together with Withs, by them named Rotang, that the least drop of Water cannot get through them. On these Floats are Huts and little Houses of Board's and other slight Materials, covered with Roofs made of Mats, in which the Chineses dwell with their Wives and Children (in someto the number of two hundred) as on the Main Land, and never inhabit on the Shore: They drive along with the Stream down the Rivers, or else are Towed against the Current with a Line, for Sails they use none.  
Those that reside in these floating Villages drive a Trade with all sorts of Merchandise, and carry them from one place to another on the River: at the Towns before which they stop, they run Stakes into the Ground, to which they make fast their floating Isle.  
There are also some in China, which with their whole Families reside in ordinary Vessels, and Sail in Fleets of four or five hundred together, Trading through the whole Empire; so that from whence these Fleets remove, it seems as if a Forest moved. They keep likewise all manner of tame cattle in those Vessels, especially Swine; and wheresoever they arrive, they generally stay several Months.  
Father Martin doubts not, but that the Chinese Merchants have anciently, as at this day, furrowed the Seas as far as the Red Lake: for in these modern Times they build great Ships called Pancum da China, which in the Chinese Tongue signifies A Wooden Palace; neither have we small testimonies of it through all India.  
That the Chinese (saith he) have anciently frequented the Seas, and Sailed with their Ships to remote Countries, doth not darkly appear by the Voyage of one Luseng, sent out by the Emperor Ching or Xi, Anno 214. before the Nativity of Christ, to discover the Northern Countries; for he, amongst others, proffered the Emperor some Geographical Descriptions of several Countries in the World, and especially of China, and the Islands lying in the East Sea, otherwise called Mare Eoum; from whence some will conclude, that the Name Cingala (which signifies Sand-plats of the Chinese, on which a Fleet of Ships suffered Shipwreck) hath its original: From hence is also derived Ceilon, or Sinlan, that is, Inhabitants of China, or Chineses: Moreover, that the Chinese of the Island St. Laurence or Madagaskar, is affirmed by the Chineses that reside on this Island, especially at the Bay of St. Clare, where Men of white Complexions speak the Chinese Language.  
This Negotiation of the Chinese extended itself to all the Islands in the Oriental Sea, and to India itself, till the time of the Portuguese first coming thither; but afterwards it was neglected, partly for the remoteness of the Places, and partly out of fear of the Portuguese: But japan, the Philippine Isles, Macassar, java, Camboya, Zion, and Cochinchina, the Chineses frequent with their Ships laden with Merchandise to this very day, especially those of the Province of Fokien; for scarce any other Chinese frequent the Sea, or go to foreign Countries against the Laws of the Empire.  
The Emperor Hiaou, who Anno 140. before the Incarnation began his Reign, after having by means of the General Chankieng subdued the Kingdoms of Ynpei, (at this day Tungking and Laos) Tavon and Takia, lying near the West, sent a Fleet of Ships to the East through the Chinese Sea, or Bay called Sang. But those Places to which the forementioned Fleet Sailed, were not described by the Chinese Geographers, which is no wonder; for as these People have a great and high opinion of themselves, and account foreign things not worth their knowledge or description; therefore we cannot say whether this Fleet went to japan, or to the Isles Linson, Ceilon, java, Camboya, and the like Places.  
The timely finding of the Magnet or Loadstone, and Compass, by the Chinese, give also no small testimonies of their Navigation.  
As Martinius saith, the Properties of the Magnet, and its respecting the North and South, or the Compass, was known to the Chinese many Ages before the Incarnation, and before the People of Europe; for when in the Reign of Zing, Anno 1115. before the Birth of Christ, the Cochinchinese, by the Chineses called Kiaochi, had the first time sent an Agent to the Emperor, with a white Hen or Pheasant for a Present, the Agent was by the Emperor's Tutor called Cheucung, a great Astronomer, presented with a piece of Workmanship artificially wrought, which of itself without ceasing pointed directly towards the South, not only when it was carried by Land, but by Water also.  
This Piece was with two Syllables called Zinan, which is like that wherewith the Chineses at this day call the Loadstone; which serves for an infallible testimony (as Martinius saith) that the use thereof was found out only by the Chinese at that time. It is not like our Compass divided into thirty two Points, but only into four, which respect the four chief Winds, as East, West, South, and North.  
The Chineses are little experienced in the Mystery of Navigation, not being able to take an Observation of what Latitude they are in with a Quadrant, but govern themselves only by their Compass and Evening-Star: At the rising of a Storm or Tempest they choose not Sea-room as our Mariners, but running with their Ships ashore, leap overboard, and cry Sequa, Sequa.  
I will here annex what I have received concerning the Chinese Ships, from the Writings of David Wright, who resided a considerable time in the Island of Formosa and China.  
The Chinese (saith he) call their great Ships Zoens, and not Jonks, or jovencheu, as most have written, but by that Name understand our Christian Vessels; some of them carry a thousand one hundred Last, or twenty two hundred Tun, some a thousand, others six hundred, others two, and many less.  
Their Men of War have a Forecastle, and another along the Quarter-Deck, which are higher than the sides of the Ship; in which the Soldiers keep in the time of a close Fight, and serve also for Gun-Rooms, wherein they keep their Arms and Ammunition.  
Their greatest Ships of War carry not above forty Guns, some thirty, and others twenty, and ten; all the Guns which they carry in their Vessels being smaller than ours, some carrying not above eight pound Ball, others scarce four, three, two, or one; some are Cast of Copper, others of Brass.  
Men of War with forty Guns carry eight hundred Men; those with ten, two hundred, and generally more Soldiers than Seamen.  
The Arms which they use are Muskets, Pikes, Darts, Bows, Shields and Swords, with Fire-balls, and the like, besides many Fireships.  
Their Men of War are made after another manner than ours, with broad Sterns; and also broad before, yet not above three Foot▪ and from the middle they run narrower towards the Head; they have no Keel, but are flat at the bottom; the biggest as well as the smallest carry two Masts, without Yards, Mizne, or Boltsprit. The Sails are made of Rushes and Cane Leaves in this manner:  
First they make Network of split Reeds, as big as the Sail they intent to make, which spreading on the Ground, they lay five double Leaves of Canes all over it, and on these another Network made just like the undermost, all which is twined fast together round about and in the middle: which being thus made, are fastened to the Yard with Ropes, like those of the Dutch Hoys; they lose and fasten the Strings one by one, and the Sail when taken from the Yard, is rolled up and laid along in the Ship; the Ropes wherewith they tie them are made of Hair, but their Cables of Canes or Reeds; the Sails have neither Braces nor Bowling, but abundance of small Ropes, which are fastened from the top down to the bottom of the Sail, and all knotted together about a Fathom distance from it.  
The Anchors are made of a sort of exceeding strong Wood, which sinks in the Water like Iron, and fastens in the Ground, with Flooks like ours; but they have no Anchor-stocks nor Rings, but through the end where our Anchor-stock is made fast, runs a Rope.  
The Chineses carry no Flag-staffs, but in stead thereof a Mast, which stands in that part of the Ship where our Mizne-Mast stands: their Flags hang at the end of a long Stick on the top of the forementioned Mast; which Stick is drawn up by a Rope that runs through the top, and is made fast about the middle thereof; on the other end is a Rope, with which they pull down the end of the Staff, and hoist up the other to which the Flag is fastened; they also carry Flags and Pennons on their Fore and Mainmast, according to the inserted Sculpture.  
The Men of War generally bear a round Circle in their Flags, and not (as Linschot tells us) three Crescents with seven Stars, after the Mahometan manner, one half Red, and the other yellow: and the whole Circle is surrounded with forty three Specks.  
When any Ships come to an Anchor, than their Rudder, which is of another fashion than ours, they hoist Aboard, and put on again when they set Sail.  
They have another sort of Vessels, by those of the Province of Fokien called Koeya, which are much lesser, the greatest carrying not above fifty, and the smallest twenty Tun, bearing only one Mast.  
A third sort called Sampan, or Champan, have also one Mast, but six Oars.  
A fourth named Lantya, have neither Sails nor Masts, but are like Barges, and carried with sixteen Oars, eight on each side, and to every one eight Men. These Vessels are not only long, but bear a breadth, and serve against the Pirates, which much molest the Rivers.  
The Emperor keeps great numbers of these Vessels for the safeguard of Travellers and Merchants, and likewise keeps great Fleets of them upon the Sea-bordering Provinces, for defence of his Havens and Harbours.  
All the Emperor's Ships and Lantayes carry in chief, the Imperial Arms in their Flags, being a Dragon with five Claws on each Foot.  
When any of their Ships coming from a foreign Country, stands in for the Shore, they can immediately know from whence it comes, and what her Loading, never ask from whence, or what their Freight, for they give notice thereof in this manner: The Pilot at the beating on Drums and Kettles, standing on the Stern, begins to make signs with the Staff in his Hands, and sometimes waves it over his Head, then behind his Back, then up in the Air, and anon down to his Feet; then laying the Staff down, he makes as many strange signs with his Hands and Arms, as he did before; which done, he takes the Staff up again, and begins a new, whilst the Pilots of those Ships that Ride at an Anchor in the Harbours, exactly observe his motions, and thereby know all what they desire concerning the Vessel; which strange kind of signs and tokens the Netherlanders believe are not to be done by Humane Reason, but by Necromancy and Arts of the Devil.   

Common Roads, or Highways.  
ALl strangers may justly wonder at the Roads and common Highways that are so many, and withal, strangely and artificially contrived by Humane Industry, for the conveniency of the Traveller; especially in all the Southern Provinces, the Ways are first Levelled and Paved with Stones, because they use not many Horses nor Wains: The highest Mountains are also turned into good Roads, by cutting and making Passages through the Cliffs on each side: Hills and tops of Mountains are Levelled, and Valleys filled up therewith, to the great ease of Travellers.  
There are also on certain places, as at every Stone, (lying ten Chinese Furlongs from one another) Messengers or Posts, which speedily convey all Letters, the Emperor's and Governor's Edicts from one place to another, by which means, nothing that is strange or News happens, but in few days, it is spread through the whole Empire.  
At every eighth Stone, being a Tract of a days Journey, are public Houses or Inns, for Entertainment, called Cungyvon and Yhi, which entertain all Governors, Magistrates, and other Imperial Officers, of what Degree soever, with their several Trains, at the Emperor's Charge; but they must by a Harbinger pre-acquaint the Host or Master of their coming, with the quality and number of their Attendance, so that when they come, they find all things in a readiness, not only Provisions, but also Horses, Sedans, Porters, and Vessels, if there be occasion for them; for whatsoever he desires to have, he gives notice thereof to the Innkeeper, by a Letter, in the Chinese Tongue called Pai.  
In like manner, the Shores and Banks of Rivers are like the Highways, handsomely made up, without any Trees or other hindrances, within eight Foot from the Water, that those which Tow the Vessels by Land, may have a clear Passage.  
And also the Walls of several places are raised from the ground with great square Stones, and over-laid with Stone Bridges of divers Arches, where occasion requires it; so that the Chinese in this Point, not only exceed the ancient Romans, but may also with all other People strive for the Palm, for though the Chineses are not comparable to the Europeans, in the Building of stately and strong Houses; yet in the erecting of Stone Bridges of exceeding bigness, and many Arches, they far exceed them, as may appear by the Description of several beforementioned.   

Rivers, Streams, and Channels.  
AMongst the Rivers which moisten the Country of China, the Kiang and Hoang, or Yellow River, deserve the first place, partly for their long course through almost the whole Empire, and partly for their greatness and abundance of Water.  
The greatest Rivers are in the Chinese Tongue called Kiang, but the less, Ho.  
The Yangzu-Kiang, or for its excellency, by the Chineses called Kiang, as if they would say, The Son of the Sea, divides all China into a North and South part.  
The River Kiang gliding from the West to the East, takes its Original out of the Mountain Min, which runs in a ledge of Hills, from the utmost Western Borders of the Province of Suchuen, into the Kingdom of Sifan, and extends Northward to the City Guei.  
It hath several Names from the several Countries through and by which it passes; its first Name is Min, from the Mountain Min, its Spring and Original, from whence it rushes with great force of Water, by the chief City Chingtu, in the Province of Suchuen, and divides itself by the spreading into several Branches, and Encloses great part of the County Chintingfu, especially at and near the Metropolis Chingtu, in such a manner, with his Meandring Reaches and crooked Windings, that it lieth like an Island, and at the City Sincin, it changes its Name into that of Takiang, and passes from thence, enriched with the Waters of other Rivulets; as the Lunghoa, from the East-side, and Chocang, Cin, and Tatu, from the Westside, by the City Sui, into the Stream of Mahu; from thence going on Eastward to the City Liucheu, where it is called Linkiang, and gliding to the City Chunking, receives the great River Pa with this Name; then passes North, through the County of Chunkingfu and Queicheufu, Southward of the City Queicheu or Patung, in one and thirty Degrees Northern Latitude, out of the Province of Suchuen, into that of Huquang, and then takes again the Name of Takiang, not far from the City of Queicheu.  
To this place it tumbles with many Gulfs, and great force of Water through crooked Valleys, amidst dangerous Rocks and amazing Precepices, which the Chineses in their Sailing, with great dexterity and nimbleness, know how to shun: But afterwards begins to glide more gentler, where on the North it falls in the Lake Tungting; and passing thence, this Lake and the chief City Vuchang enters the Province of Kiangsi, and there receives out of the Lake Poyang, by which it passes on the North, great abundance of Water, and the name of Iang●…u Kiang.  
From thence falling into the Province of Nanking, a little after makes an Isle can Sango, Eastward from the City Sosing, where expatiating itself two Leagues, goes Northward through the whole Province of Nanking; and to the West and North by the City Nanking itself.  
In the County Taipingfu, Southward from the City Nanking, the Kiang divides itself into two Arms, and makes the Island on which the little City Whu stands situate, which afterwards against Nanking unite themselves again: On the South-West side of the City Taiping, the Kiang is pressed between two Hills belonging to the Mountain Tienmuen, through which it passes like a Gate; for which reason the Mountain is called Tienmuen, that is, Heaven Gate; then running by Chinkiang, at last disembogues itself through a great Bay into the Ocean; wherein lies in a small Isle the City Cinkiang, Garrisoned with Soldiers, and Fortified with Ships; on both sides the Shores, are for the most part built with great and small Cities, Villages and Hamlets.  
Before its fall from the City Kieukiam into the Sea, a Tract of above a hundred Leagues, the Kiang glides so gently, that the Ships may Sail up the same, with or against the Wind, and some Tides, especially Spring-Tides, (a strange thing to relate,) the Water running up so far in the Country, that Sea-Fish are there taken.  
In this Stream lie several Isles, as Pequey, that is, of the white Tortel, in the third County Hoangcheufu, of the Province of Huquang.  
In this County Kincheufu, of the Province of Huquang, a little Island called Peli, which signifies, An hundred Furlongs, lies near the City Chikiang, in the River Kiang: In ancient times, as the Chineses write, it was nine small Isles, which afterwards by the falling of the Waters and increase of Sands, became one entire Island.  
On the Southside of the City Kiangning, lies an Island called Pelu, famous, because not far from it, the Armies of the Southern Provinces were in the time of the Family Sung, beaten and utterly routed.  
Near the City Kiang, lieth the Isle Chancung, and on the South-West side another, called Tengxu.  
The Yellow River, the second in Magnitude, and most famous in all China, and by them named Hoang, is so called from the colour of the Water, occasioned by the Yellow Mud or Day Earth, which from the Spring to the Sea it glides over: It is always disturbed and made thick by a Yellow Soil, which it carries along; because this Mud, which gives the denomination, and doth not as in other clear Waters, shine from the Ground, but discolours, being raised by the swift and strong Current of the Water (after the manner of Rivulets which swell by Rains) the whole River, as hath often been found by experience; for when its Water is for a little while put into a Vessel, or Glass, the sediment sinks so fast down to the bottom, that it makes almost a third part; and indeed, this River at the first sight seems to be a Pool or flowing Mud, but the swift Current of its Waters manifests the contrary: Those that frequent this River, make the Water clear by casting in Allom, which drives the Lees to the Ground, and fills the fourth part of the Vessel. It is a great wonder, from whence such abundance of Clay or Mud proceeds, considering it hath never been seen clear or bright; nay, the Chineses say, That its Water cannot be clear in the time of a thousand Years, insomuch that they have a Proverb from thence amongst them, viz. when they speak of things that are never like to happen, as altogether impossible, they say, When the Yellow River shall be bright. Moreover, the Hoang, as a Foraigner, entering from without into China, takes Original out of the Southern Amasian Mountains, otherwise called Quonlun, and by the Inhabitants, Otunlao, which lie not far from the great Mogul's second Court, named Laor, or from the Kingdom of Tibet; Nay, the situation of the places show, that the River Ganges in Bengale, the Meson in Laor, and other famous Rivers which moisten the Countries of Siam and Pegu, have their Originals from these Mountains beforementioned; for the Chineses also manifest, that many great Rivers, have their head Springs and Fountains there; leaving these Mountains, it runs by Sifan and Tanyu, a Tract of above 300 Leagues, with abundance of Water to the North-East, from whence descending to the East, it approaches China, near the County of Linyaofu, in the Province of Xensi, at the West end of the Great Wall, along which it rushes, and passes on through a part of the Kingdom of Tanyu, between the Desert Karacatay, otherwise Samo; afterwards through the Desert itself, with a swift Course, and several Branches to the East and North, a Tract of two thousand Furlongs; from whence it turns South-West to China, and in forty Degrees and eighteen Minute's Northern-Latitude, runs through the Gate See in the Great Wall of China, and shoots along between the Province of Xansi and that of Xensi, and in the Latitude of thirty six Degrees enters into the Province of Honan, and out of that into the Province of Xantung, near the City Cao; from whence it runs towards the Southeast, and passes on through the Northern part of the Province of Nanking, and discharges itself at last with great violence into the Sea, in thirty two Degrees and a half Northern-Latitude.  
The Hoang generally falls with such an incredible swiftness, that no Boats can Row against it, but are forced up with a far greater number of Toers than in the River Kiang. In some places it is above half a League, and others more, and extending itself in length above eight hundred Leagues, oftentimes rises above its Banks, and covers all the neighbouring Countries with Water and Mud. The Chineses describe the Hoang in these, or the like words:  The original of the River Hoang is between the Southern Mountains of Quonlun or Amasian Hills, by the Inhabitants called Otunlao. The Water which makes this River springs from above a hundred Fountains, which makes the Lake called Singcieu, which is forty Furlongs wide; the Water running out of it along a Channel makes another lesser Lake, from whence the Hoang runs Northward, through a little towards the East, and soon after washes the Province of Xensi, and runs direct East, then passing on Northward by the Sandy Fields or Wildernesses, from whence it streams Southward into China, and through the Province of Xantung discharges itself into the Sea. Thus far the Chinese Writer. 
In former times this River used also to run through the Province of Peking and Xantung, but its Course is since by the art and labour of the Chineses led another way, thereby to prevent the overflowing the forementioned Countries, which by reason of their Champain Lands that extend themselves a great way in breadth and length, should not be subject to its often inundating Streams; yet nevertheless the Chineses have left a little Branch thereof, as a testimony of its ancient Course thither.  
After having given you an account of the two famous Rivers, the Kiang and Hoang, take a brief Relation of all the particular Streams, both small and great, which distinctly water every Province in the Empire of China.  
THe River Io takes its original out of the Lake Si, lying Westward of the Mountain jociven in the County of Pekingfu, from whence it passes through the Emperor's Palace, and gliding through it with many artificial Trenches, and meandring Inlets, waters the Gardens, and also makes several Lakes.  
The Stream Lukeu, which is called Sangean, takes its beginning in the County of Taitungfu, in the Province of Xansi, out of the Mountain jueny; from whence it runs North-East, and at the City Hoaigin receives the River He, which makes the Lake Kiuncun; and thence proceeding on its Course enters Northward of the Fort Guei, into the Province of Peking, where enlarged by the Stream Guei, which hath its original in the same County Taitingfu▪ out of the Mountains near the City Quangchang, it divides the whole Territory Pekingfu, and gliding Southward by the City Paogan with a broader Channel, passes under a large Stone Bridge, and receives the Stream Caoleang, which out of the Yellow Kiver through the Great Wall falls into the Province of Peking; from thence passing towards the Southeast, rowls along South-West by the Metropolis Peking, where a Stone Bridge with many Arches lies over the same, then bending Southerly passes East by the Cities of Fungan and jungein, where after having received the Rivers Yo and Pe, disembogues itself at last in the Bay of Sang.  
The River Kiuto hath its original in the Province of Xansi, out of the Mountain Cinhi, from whence it glides Eastward by the Cities Tai and Kicchi, and aftewards Southerly receives by the way the Stream Linsui, with which to the Northward of the City Henping, it enters into the Province of Peking, which it almost cuts through, the Counties Chintingfu, Paotungfu, and Pekingfu, and at last near the Garrison of Tiencin discharges its Waters, being joined with the River Guei, into the Sea: It receives by the way several Brooks and Rivulets, as in the County Chinting, near the City Lingxui, that of Quei; more Eastward, the Stream Fi; near the City Tuilo, the Ta; in the County Paoting by the City Poye, the Kinguen; afterwards the Channel called In, which out of the Mountain Yekon stretching from the North to the West, glides round about within the City, and with its winding Arms makes the Island Pehoa, and at last the Streams Ye and Fan.  
The River Ye divides Northward the County Paotingfu, beginning Westward in the Mountain Culeang, reaches towards the South by the City Ye, and receives by the way in the County Xuntienfu, the Fan; glides Eastward between the Mountain Non, and Southward by the City Paoting, where it unites its Waters with the River Kiuto.  
The Chokiang hath its beginning in the Province of Xansi, out of the Mountain Kieu, lying near the City Sin, from whence it runs Eastward through the utmost Northern Point of the Province of Honan; to the North, by the City Xe; and passing through the Counties Xuntefu and Quangpingfu, enters the Province of Peking; from whence it glides through the Lake Talo into the County Chintingfu, and at last pours its Waters into the River Guei, in the Territory of Hokienfu, near the Mountain Si and the City Sing. This Stream Chekiang receives several Rivulets by the way.  
The River Guei, which rises in the Province of Honan in the County Gueichoeifu, on the West side of the City runs along to the North by the same; from thence entering the Province of Peking, glides to the North-East between the Borders of the Province of Peking and that of Xantung; receives near the City Lincing in the Province of Xantung, the Water of the Channel jun; and in the County of Hokienfu, the River Chaohang; and at last with the Kiuto, disembogues itself near the Garrison Tieucin, into the Bay of Sang.  
The Water of this River hath a peculiar property at the place where it receives the artificial Channel jun, as the Netherlanders in their Embassies to the Emperor of China have twice observed, that is, Throw nine Sticks of an equal length into the River, and six of them, after a little lying still, will move to the South, and three to the North.  
This River in its Course receives several Rivulets, as the Si, Change, Ki, Ming, and Fu: The Si takes its beginning in the Mountain Cuckoe, Northward of the same City, in the County Chungtefu and Province of Honan, and passes through the County Quangpingfu; Southward, to the City Quangping; and Eastward, to the Guei.  
The Change, which hath its original near the City Lugan in the neighbouring Mountain Sin, in the Province of Xansi, runs from thence through the Province of Honan, Northward of the City Changte, and accordingly into the Guei, and in the way thither by the City Luching, receives a small Rivulet, which hath its original in the Mountain called Lin.  
The Ming, a Stream whose Fountain Head is Northward of the City Quangping, takes its Course Southeast towards the Guei.  
The Furio, which begins in the Province of Honan, in the County of Luganfu, Northward from the City Liching, runs through the Province of Honan into the Guei.  
The River Ki takes original with several Branches in the County Guehoei of the Province of Honan, especially in the Mountains Sumei and Choayang, from whence one Branch runs by the City King, and then glides North-East into the Guei.  
The Hoei belongs properly to the Province of Pingyangfu, and springs from the Mountain Vanquo, near the City jeching; from whence passing Westward, glides by the Southside of the Cities Hia, Vanciven, Lincin and Pu, where it falls into the Yellow River, and by the way Northward receives the Kiang.  
The Sin, which waters the Ce, a City in the Province of Xansi, almost surrounding the same, hath his Fountain in the County of Pingyangfu, Northward from the Mountain Mien; from whence it passes Southward into the County of Hoaikingfu, Eastward from the City Vucheu, and joins with the Yellow River.  
The River Tan, which cuts through a part of the little County Ce, in the Province of Xansi, beings to the Northward from the City Caoping, and runs Eastward in the Province of Honan, where it unites with the River Ki.  
Tan signifies Red, for the Water thereof is of a bloody colour; notwithstanding (as the Chineses relate) it hath been clear formerly, but hath received that colour from the Blood of a Loyal Governor called Pe, who was his own Executioner on the Banks of the forementioned River.  
The Streams jang and Io begin Northward in the Mountains of the County of jenping, and pass through the same to the South, but at the City Vunning unite themselves into one Body, which Eastward of the Garrison Thou discharges its Waters into the Bay of Cang.  
Through the same County run also two other Rivers, viz. the Y and Cie; the first begins above the County Pekingfu, from the Mountain Petam; the other out of the East-Tartary without the Great Wall, where it divides itself into two Arms, the one called Hang, and the other Hoang. The Rivers Y and Cie make one Channel near the City Lo, and disembogue themselves in the Bay of Cang.  
The Guei, a pleasant River in the Province of Peking in the Western part of the Province of Xensi, in the County Linyaofu, near the City Gueiyven, and runs from thence winding to the Southeast through the Counties of Cungchangfu, Fungciangfu, and Siganfu; to the North by the chief City Sigan, where it receives the River King, and pours at last its clear Waters into the Yellow River, near the City Puching in the County of Siganfa.  
The River King spreads itself with several Branches, as the Streams Kin and Haoting through the County Pingleangfu; from whence it goes on Eastward, leaving the City King to the West, afterwards Southerly pours its Water's East from the chief City Sigan, into the River Guei.  
The Stream Yao, which takes original out of Sifan, otherwise called Prester-iohns' Country, or Tibet, descends Southward through the County of Linyaofu, and with great abundance of Water, roaring like Thunder, rowls along Northerly by the City Linyao, and at last enlarged with the Stream Tahia, falls into the Yellow River near the Mountain Ciexe.  
The Stream Hoan (another besides the forementioned great River Hoang) springs up in the Mountains Taise or Ulum, in the County of Kingyangfu; from whence gliding towards the South by the City Hoang, and near the City Fungiven, in the County Siganfu, unites itself with the River Kiang.  
The Yung, Guei, Puon, Ring, and U. are Rivers, which glides through the County Fungyangfu, all of them contributing their Waters into the River Guei.  
The Han, or Tungchan, a Stream which begins in the County of Cungchangfu, in the Mountains Cheuchi, through which falling Eastward, afterwards winds Southward, then enters the County of Hanchungfu; through which it cuts especially with two Branches, one Eastern, which begins about the City Fung; the other Western, which comes out of the Mountains about the City Mincheu; then both these Branches uniting, glides (enriched with Water Navigable for Ships, by the Name of Tan) Southeast, and pass through the County of Cingyangfu into the Province of Huquang: From thence the Han runs through the Counties of Siangyanfu and Chintienfu, and at last, after a long Course, pours its Waters into the Lake Yeuchi, and the River Kiang near the City Hanyang.  
Several Rivulets discharge their Waters into this Stream, into which the River Guei glides out of the Mountains Io through the Counties of Siganfu and Hanchungfu.  
The River Vuting runs out of the Mountains near the City Ganting through the County of jenganfu, Southward by the City Cingkien, and pours its Waters united with the Stream Kiemo, into the Yellow River: It is generally by the Chineses called The Unconstant, because in its Course amongst the Sands it is sometimes shallow, and sometimes deep.  
The Stream Kiemo passes through the same County from the South to the North, and begins in the Mountains Kicinu; and gliding Westward by the Cities Paogan and jengan, and with the Vuting falls into the Yellow River.  
The Water of this Stream is said to be so thin and aerial, that no pieces of Timber nor wooden Vessels can swim upon it, but sink like Iron.  
The River Io runs to the South by the Garrison Xaucheu, towards the East, and unites itself Southward of the Fort Culang with the River Hoanting, which comes out of Tibet, and running both through one Mouth, fall into the Yellow River. How far this River Io glides Westward, is not mentioned by the Chinese.  
THe Stream You runs by the City Chaoykieu in the County of Cinanfu, and 
Rivers in the Provin●… of Xantung.  takes its original out of the neighbouring Mountain Hosien.  
The River Ci takes its beginning in the Stream Sun in the County of Yencheufu, and passes Northeastward through the County of Cinanfu; beyond which it divides itself into two Branches, the one called The Northern, and the other The Southern Cing, and both discharge their Waters in the Xangen Bay; at the dividing it receives the River Mingto, which glides Westward out of the Mountain Minx.  
The Stream Venus, which passes through the County Vencheufu, begins near the City Taigan; from whence gliding by the Cities Ningyang and Vengang, disembogues near the City Cinning, Westward of the Lake Nanuang in the Channel jun.  
The River Simo begins near the City Suxui; from whence running Westward, divides its self into two Arms, (the Eastern whereof is called Tangle) between which the City Kooheu lieth like an Island: both these Arms uniting themselves again, and enriched with the Water of the River Io, fall through one Mouth into the same Channel jun.  
The Pelang, a River which springs out of the Mountains near the City Sintai, in the County of Cinanfu, passes Northward through the Territory of Cincheufu, and gliding by the Cities Changlo and Xeuquan, discharges its Waters into the Bay of Xang: on the way the Rivers Hoaoquei and Chi flow into the same 〈◊〉 the West side, and on the East the River Si.  
The Stream Kiao runs from the South to the North through the middle of the County of Lucheufu, beyond the City Pinghtie, and pours its Waters Westward of the Fort Haicolang into the Cangang Bay: Kiao signifies Mudstream, because of the thickness of the Water.  
The River Vi begins in the County Cincheufu, Northward of the City Mung, in the Mountain Tapico; from whence it descends Northward through the County of Laichenfu, beyond the City Camie, and disembogues into the Bay of Xang. This River being stopped in its Course by one Zansin, when his Country was invaded, with Bags filled with Sand, which drowning the Champain defeated his Enemies.  
The Y or So begins in the Mountains, Westward of the City Kiu, belonging to the County of Cincheufu, and Southward from the City Mungin; from whence gliding South by the East-side of the City Y, it enters the Province of Nanking, and then falls into the Channel Nun, Northward from the Yellow River.  
The Stream Hucu springs in the West from the Mountain Lie, Northward from the City Po in the County of Tungchanfu; from whence gliding Eastward it unites with the Channel jun, Southward from the City jangco in the County of jencheufu.  
Eastward from the City Kao, the Si flows out of the Lake Lui, and runs towards the South into the Yellow River.  
THe Streams Kinxui, In, Xeleang, Pien, Cuckoe, Quei, and the Yellow River, cut 
Streams in the Province of Honan.  through the County of Caifungfu.  
The River Kinxui, which comes out of the Mountain Xeyang, in the County of Honanfu, goes Eastward through Caifungfu into the River Pien, which takes its beginning out of the Yellow River in the County of Caifungfu, Westward of the City Hoin, and glides East by the South side of the Kity Caifung; from whence running on to the Southeast through the County of Queitefu, it passes by the West side of the City Ningling, then passes on through the County of Fungyangfu in the Province of Nanking, and by the City Lingpi unites itself again with the Yellow River.  
The Stream Quei divides the County of Caifungfu with several Branches, and seems to take its original out of the Lake Si, Westward from the City Hiu; from whence it passes East, and afterwards South through the same County, and by the West side of the Cities Hiangching and Xinkian, then passing through the County of Fungyangfu in the Province of Nanking, where changing its Name, and taking up that of Ing, at last falls Southerly into the Hoai.  
The River Cin, which begins in the County of Caifungfu and the Mountains juling, North from the City In, runs East to the City jenling, then gliding Southward, unites with the Stream Quei.  
The River In, takes Original out of the Lake Quanching, lieth West from the City In, where it joins itself with the River Scenal, and from thence flows through the County In; afterwards East, through the North part of the County Nanyangfu; and at last turning its course through the County junningfu, towards the South, it falls into the River Hoai, near the City Quang.  
The Xoleang, whose Head is in the County Honanfu, Southward from the Mountains Xeyang, flows from thence Southerly, to the West side of the County Caifungfu, and unites its self at the entrance into the County juningfu, with the River Iu.  
Through the County Queitefu flows the Streams Pien; described before the Cin and Hoang, or Yellow River.  
The River Ciu begins in the County Caifungfu, Westward from the City Chinglieu, and runs Southward through the County Queitefu, by the Southside of the City Queite; afterwards East, and again South, by the Mountain Tangle, and enters near the City Tangxan into the Province of Nanking, and soon after into the Yellow River.  
The Rivers Lo and Ganyang, otherwise called Von, pass by the City Liu, where they lose themselves underground several Furlongs, but soon after appear again.  
The Ki, which divides the County Hoaikingfu, comes out of the Mountain Vanno, where falling underground, soon after makes the Lake Taye; from whence gliding Eastward into the Yellow River, is called, the Ci.  
Through the County Honanfu, the Rivers Chan, Kien, Ko, or Lo, and Y: The River Y begins near the City Luxi, in the Mountain Lu.; and gliding Eastward, unites with the Co or Lo, near the City Honan.  
The Lo or Co, an excellent River, comes out of the County Siganfu, from the Mountain Lo, in the Province of Xensi; from whence it passes North, North-East, by the East side of the City junning, where it receives the River Hivenhu, and unites itself at last near the City Hanan with the River Y; with which it glides from thence into the Yellow River.  
The Stream Kien, which begins in Mount Pexe, to the Southward of the Yellow River, runs Eastward into the River Y; and Eastward from the City Honan, the River Chan glides to the North.  
The Rivers You or Pe, Tan, Pie, and Hoai, through the Territory Nanyangfu.  
The Pe or You, beginning in the North of this County in the Mountain Thou; from whence it runs South, and passes through the Territory Cingyangfu into the Province of Huquang, gliding Eastward by the City Quanghoa, and immediately after into the River Tunghan.  
The Pie, which begins Westward from the City Thou, runs Southward, and unites with the Stream Pe, on the Borders of the Province of Huquang.  
The Tan begins at the West side of the City Nuihiang, and shoots from thence Southeast by the South part of the Towns Checheven and Sinye, and at last falls into the Pe.  
The Palu, which begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Huquang, glides North-East into the River Hoai, East from the City Quang.  
The Sienul springs out of the Mountain Ri, near the City Tenfung, in the County Honangfu, from whence it glides South-West into the Territory In, Eastward from the Lake Quangching.  
The Chu, which begins in the County Chintufu, Southward from the City Ginxeu, passes South through the same, and towards the West by the City Ninkiang, unites with the Stream Yoyung, which coming out of the County Tungchuen, receives another River near the Mountain Looking, which hath its Original in the Territory Chintufu.  
The Chu, thus enriched with Water, glides to the South, and takes the Name of Chung, and so passes on through the County Sincheufu, and at last towards the East, through the County of the City Lincheu, and disembogues Southward of the City Hokiang, into the River Kiang.  
The Kiang, which from North to South runs through the whole County of Chingtufu, under the Name of Takiang, runs Southward by the West side of the City Muen, and receives on the East the River Yolung; after which it divides near the City Sinfung into several Branches, which about and near the City Chingtu, join together, and surrounding the City and adjacent Country, make it an Isle: One of these Branches which run to the Southward of the City, is called Kin, and generally also Damask River, because its Water gives a great Gloss to Silk, if it be washed therein: Another, more towards the West, is called Chia or Hoanglang, that is, Yellow Dragon, for it is said, that in the time of the Family Han, a Yellow Dragon was seen in the same; but glides towards the South, through the County of the City Muicheu and Kiating, and falls at last near the City Muicheu, into Kiang or Taking.  
The Lungchoa running out of the County of the City Muicheu; to the South-West and North, by the City Gueiyven, discharges its Water in the Che or Cin.  
The Cin, which begins in the Mountain's Cinsing, in the Territory Yacheufu, falls Southward through the same County, by the East side of the City Yacheu; afterward through that of Kiating; and at last Westward, by the City Kiating, where it unites with the River To or Tatu.  
The River Chocung, which hath its Original in the Territory of Kiungchoa, in the Mountain Gomui, passes through the Southern parts thereof, and through the County of Kiating, into the Stream Takiang or Kiang: This River is eminent amongst the Chinese, for a wonderful accident that happened to a Woman, who walking along its Bank, saw a great Cane standing on the Water, from which hearing a noise, and pulling up the Cane, found a Child enclosed therein, which she carried home with her, who breeding it up, not long after became a great Conqueror, and was called Yelang, and first on the West side of this River, Planted the Kingdom of Yeleang.  
The To or Tatu which runs towards the Kingdom of Sifan, is a Branch led from the River Kiang, cut by Command of the Emperor Thou, to prevent the overflowing of the River Kiang.  
The Chexu washes the South-West side of the Province Suchuen; from whence it glides North-East, and falls on the West side into the Lake Mahu: Somewhat Northerly, the River Lu. takes the same course and so ends.  
The Pa, taking Original in the Northern Mountains of the County Paoningfu, moistens the same, and runs Eastward by the City Pa, to which it gives denomination; and afterwards passes Southward through the County Xunkingfu, and near the Mountain johoan, receives the River Chai; near the City Tacho, the River Lin; near the City Riu, the Stream Thou, and unites itself in the County Chungkingfu; near the Mountain Tu, with the River Sihan or Sung, and Feu, which all of them with their conjoined Streams fall into the River Kiang, Southward from the City Chungking.  
The Pa, a River which is so called, because with its Meandring Reaches it represents the Chinese Character called Pa, which signifies Enough.  
The Feu, begins in the North part of the Province of Suchuen, in the County Lungganfu, on the South-West side of the City Lunggan; passing from thence South, through this and the Territory Chingtufu; and Eastward, by the City Tungchuen; from whence it bends East, and glides through the County Chunkingfu, where, near the Mountain Pu, it mingles with the Ta.  
The Chuen, which springs in the Mountains Northward from the City Quanggan, in the County Xankingfu, and gliding South by the West side of the City Quanggan; more Southerly by the West side also of the City Gochi, at the end of the County, falls into the River Sung or Sihan: In it are thirty six deep Water-falls, where it descends violently with great noise.  
The Sung, by some called Sihan, begins in the Province of Xensi, in thirty Degrees and fifty Minute's Northern-Latitude, at the East side of the Garrison Mincheu, from whence it passes Southward, and in thirty three Degrees and forty Minute's North-Latitude, enters the Province of Suchuen; then running through the County Paoningfu, by the West side of the City Zangki, receives the Tung, falling out of the Mountain Xeyen; so gliding by the City Paoning, enters at last into the Territory of Chungkingfu, and near the Mountain Furio, joins with the River's Pa and Feu, which all loose themselves near the City Chungking in the River Kiang.  
The Xe, which rises in the Mountains, Westward from the City Kien, passes Southward through the Mountain Tapa, and with several Windings, glides Eastward by the City Lenting and Xehung; then passing on Southeast, makes way through the County of Xunkingfu, and mixes at the South-end thereof with the River Sihan or Sung.  
The Xemuen or Heng, runs through the South part of the Territory Siucheufu, by the South-West side of the City Siucheu, with great force and Precipices, called the Bell, because it makes a noise like a Bell, re-sounding with Echoes.  
Lastly, the River Xemuen falls in the Kiang: The Stream Cingy, also passing on the East side of the same Territory, fills the River Kiang.  
The Cing and Tosiang, cut through the Territory Queicheufu; the first which takes Original in the Lake Cingyven, and falls joined with the Tosiang, which glides out of the Lake Cienking into the Kiang, Eastward from the City Queicheu: Cing signifies Clear, because its water is clearer than any other Rivers in this Province.  
The Tahoa, which passes through the South side of the County Chunkingfu, glides Northward by the West side of the City Vulung, and falls on the West side also of the City Changxu, into the River Kiang.  
The Kiu or Kiukiang, begins with two Branches, the one called Piniao, in the South part of the Province of Queicheu, Westward from the City Luken; and with the other, in the Province of Suchuen, Southward of the Mountain Fuyung, from whence it glides North-East along the Southeast side of the Province of Suchuen; afterwards running Northerly into the County Chunkingfu, falls Eastward of the City Changxeu into the River Kiang: By the way, the Ciu receives on the North side of the Garrison Pingchai the Nanyang; and in the County Vunkingfu, the Stream U, Northward from the City Pengxui.  
THe Han, which runs through the North part of the Country Vuchanfu, 
Rivers of the Province of Huquang.  falls Westward of the little City Vuchan, into the Kiang: The water of the Han is exceeding cold, insomuch, that it makes the Air about the same temperate in the Dog-Days; for which cause, the Kings in times past built a Palace over the same, to reside in the Summer.  
The Io springs in the Mountains, Southward from the City Vuchan, and runs Northerly through the middle of the City into the Kiang.  
The Sui takes Original in the Mountains, Eastward from the City Tangzan, and glides North-West into the Kiang; through the South part of this County passes another Branch, which also discharges in the Kiang.  
The Cha divides the whole County Teganfu, and takes Original in the Mountain Tahaung, from whence it passes Southward by the East side of the City Sui, and enlarged with the Stream Tuen, on the West side, and with others on the East side, out of the Lake Tuigmung, by the West part of the City Tegan; at last, mixed near the City jungmuug with the River Hoan, which comes out of the Lake Tungmung, it falls by the Name of Hoan into the River Han.  
The Ki, which glides through the County of Hoangcheufu, out of the Lake Uheu, Westward by the City King, falls into the River Kiang: The same Territory is also cut through by two other Streams, viz. Hi and Lungsiang, which both coming out of the North, mingles with the Kiang.  
The Mie, which glides through the County Yocheufu, springs from the Mountain Tienho, from whence it shoots North-West into the River Siang, and with that into the Kiang.  
The Lieu, begins in the Lake Pexa, which produces four Rivers, and gliding North-West through the Territory Chanxafu, empties itself into the County jocheufu in the River Siang.  
The Mielo proceeds from the joining of two Streams, viz. Lieu and Chaos, originally springing out of the County Paokingfu, and passing Westward by the City Siangiin, at last falls into the River Taohao, or Siang: The Mielo receives by the way another Stream called Can, which comes out of the Lake Pexa: This River is eminent, because it was the occasion of a great Feast, by the Chineses called Tuonu, which with all Solemnity, is kept on the fifth day of the fifth Moon, through all parts of China, in Commemoration of a Loyal Governor, who not able to serve his Master the Emperor any longer, Drowned himself in this River.  
The Siang rises at the conjoining Borders of the Province Huquang, and that of Quangsi, in the Mountain Siung; from whence it passes North, through the County jungcheufu, where on the West it receives the River Thou; and out of this Territory, entering into that of Hengcheufu, glides afterwards through that of Changxafu, where it also receives the Names of Mielo, by the West part of the City Siangyan, where it unites with the River Tahoa, but retains the Name of Siang; and at last, falls through the Territory Yocheufu into the Kiang: Its water may compare with Crystal for clearness, and though it be very deep, yet the Stones that lie in the bottom may plainly be discerned.  
The Siao, which begins in the Mountain Kieny, at the South-West side of the City Ningyven, passes from thence close by the East side of the City jungcheu; and towards the North, mixes with the Siang; receives by the way Northward, from the City Ningyven; on the West, the River Cin, and Rivulet Xu; on the East, the Hoang.  
The Chinghiang and Ciencieu, glide from the South to the North through the County Ciencheufu, afterwards mixing their Waves together, pass along one Channel North-West, through the Territory Hengcheufu, thence pour their waters into the Siang.  
The Lofeu, which comes out of the Northern Mountains in the County of Changxafu, runs to the South by the City Xeu, and to the Southward of the City Siatang falls into the River Siang.  
This River is called Lofeu because of its excellency, and for the abundance of Lampreys that breed in the same.  
The Gum, which begins in the Mountains near the City Vucang, glides from the South to the North through the County Paokinfu, and passes over many Rocky Falls, and receives on its West side, Southward from the City Paoking, the River Tuleang; and in the Territory Xincheufu, near the City Xopu, another Rivulet called Xo; from whence it passes along the West side of the County of Changxafu, where it is named Taohoa, and winding towards the East, joins at last near the City Siangyn, with the River Siang.  
This River in the County of Paotingfu hath forty eight very troublesome and difficult places for Vessels to pass, and most of all on the North side of the City Paoting, where there are so many headstrong Falls from broken Rocks, that the Chineses have set up a Copper Pillar there, to make fast their Vessels to, till such time as they have furnished themselves with all manner of Necessaries for their Voyage, for it would be impossible else to get up their Boats by so many Rocks against the Stream.  
The Ching, which passes from the Mountains Eastward from the City Paoking, glides to the North by the City Hencheu, where soon after it falls into the Siang.  
The U begins in the Mountain near the City jung, and runs by the City Changning.  
The Lang, otherwise called Yvon and Kiu, takes original in the Province of Queicheu, Southward from the Garrison Taping, where it is called Tiechung, and passes from thence Northward through the County Sintienfu, then Eastward through the Territories Chinyvenfu and Sucheufu, and enters into the Province of Huquang, near the City Yveni; from whence gliding North-East through the Counties Xincheufu and Chatefu, it falls at last into the Lake Tungting.  
The Xin, passing by the East side of the City Xincheu, falls into the juen.  
On the South side of the City Lui are five Rivulets, viz. Hiung, You, Yuen, Xin, and Muon; besides one of the same denomination, which runs by the City Cienkiang, and disembogues in the Tan.  
By the City Kingling glides the River Y, which falls also into the forementioned Tan.  
The Lungmuen passes by the East side of the City Chingyang, having its original in a Mountain of the like Name.  
Westward from the City Choxan begins the River C●…ngyang, and runs Northward by the City Fang; then by the Name of Tanghia bends Eastward, and discharges its Waters also in the Tan.  
The Water of this River suddenly takes all Spots out of Garments, and hardens the Edge of Iron and Steel.  
By the City Choxan rushes also the Xangyang, which hath a very great Water-fall; If any one throw a Stone into it, there immediately (as they say) arises a Thunder Shewer.  
The Hiung grows from the conjunction of nine Rivulets in the little County Cincheufu, viz. Lang, Vry, Hiung, Xin, Lung, Sui, Quei, Vu, and Hiung; from whence it glides along one Channel through the County of Xincheufu, to increase the River Yven.  
The Y or Cing, which begins Westward of the Garrisoned City Xi, passes Northward, and going through the County of Kingcheufu falls into the Kiang.  
The Can runs Westward by the City Nanchang into the Lake Poyang, as the River Licufan to the East.  
THe Cau or Chan, which runs through the middle of the Province of 
in the Province 〈◊〉.  Kiangfu from the South to the North, takes its original in the County Cancheufu, Eastward from the City Xuiking; from whence it glides South ward by the City Hoeichang, and afterwards takes its Course Northerly; where, not far from the City Cancheu, to which it gives denomination, it receives the River Chang.  
This River begins in the County of Nanganfu, Westward from the City Nangan, on the joint Borders of the Provinces of Kiangsi and Huquang. Both these Rivers commixing their Waters, make a great Channel on the North side of the City, and divide almost the whole Province of Kiangsi; then gliding Northward first through the County Cancheufu, afterwards through that of Kiegan, Eastward from the City Kiegan itself; lastly, passing through Linkiangfu and Nanchangfu, fall Westward from the City Nanchang into the Lake Poyang.  
By the way the Can receives several Streams and Rivers, which all have their original in the Province of Kiangsi, viz. To the East in the Territory Cancheufu, the River U hath its beginning; near the City Utu, the Kien and Cang; near the City Cancheu, as in Kieganfu, the Stream Lu.; near the City Kiexui towards the West, the Rivers Tao, Sui, Xoin, and Sengting; in the County of Linkiangfu Westward, the River Yven; in Nanchangfu, the Hoayang and Xo; by the City Kiegan, in the Stream Can, begins the dangerous Rock called Xotapan: for from this City the going down this River is very Craggy, and dreaded also for the many Vessels that have perished there on its Sands and Shelves, over which the Water hastes with great swiftness.  
There are eighteen Places where they say the most danger is, from whence the Name Xopatan, which signifies Eighteen Water-falls, is derived.  
Most Vessels take an experienced Pilot with them from the City Kiegan, to carry them through the forementioned Places: The greatest danger is at the City Hoangcung.  
The River Yven, or Thou, springs in the Mountain Yangchi, Northward from the City juencheu, and in the County of Linkiangfu falls into the Chan.  
The Lu., which begins in the Mountain near the City jungfung, runs not far from the City Kiexui, and receives near the Walls of the City two Rivers, viz. the Xanglu and Hialu; then gliding towards the West, bends afterwards a little to the North-West, and altars its Name, first into that of Luyven, then into that of Lap, and disembogues into that of Chan.  
The River Kie or Venus passes through the Jurisdiction of the City Kiexui, and with its winding Course makes almost the Chinese Letter Kie, that is, Happiness, from whence also the City hath the Name Kiexui, which is, Happy in Waters.  
Out of the Mountains near the City jungsin, springs the Rivulet Scenting, which signifies Whistle, because its Waters gliding swiftly through the Rocks and Stones, make a pleasant noise like that of a Flajulet.  
The River Xo, otherwise called Kin, springs near the City Vanca, in the County of juencheusu; from whence it glides Westward by the City Xancao, and unites with the River Hoayang near the City Kuicheu, which both run into the Can. Its Water (according to the common Relation of the Chinese) is good against many Distempers.  
The Lungki, which springs out of the Mountain Pochang in the County of Nanchangfu, glides North-East by the Westside of the City Fungsin, afterwards through the Territory Nankangfu, and pours its Waters at last near the City Gang into the Lake Poyang.  
The River Sieu, which running out of the County juencheufu, Northward from the Mountain Kinki, glides Eastward into the Territory Nanchangfu, by the South side of the City Ning; then gliding North-East, enters the County Nankangfu, and at last falls into the Lake Poyang.  
THe Po, which springs out of the Mountains in the Territory Hoeicheufu 
Rivers in the Province of Kiangsi.  in the Province of Nanking, and glides South-West through the same, passes through the County jaocheufu into the Province of Kiangsi; then Westward, and enlarged with the Waters of the Stream Poyven, glides to the South by the City jaocheu, and in the Territory jaocheufu falls into the Lake Poyang.  
Along this River the Earth is carried out of the forementioned County jaocheufu, of which the best Porcelain in all China is made.  
The Kiencie, which begins Northward of the Mountain Suihan, runs West by the North-side of the City Yukan, where it falls into the Lake Poyang.  
The Xangjao springs in the Mountains near the City joxan, and glides Northward by the City Quangsin, afterwards to the South through the same County, and disembogues, having washed several places in the County jaocheufu, in the Lake Poyang, and by the way receives on its Northern Shore th●… Water of the Rivulets See and Ko.  
Almost out of the same place, though more Southerly, ●…uns the Yo, and through this County takes the same Course towards the North by the City jungfung, and to the South by the City Queiki. The Rivulet C●…, coming out of the South, falls into the same.  
The Hivi, which begins in the Mountains Southward fro●… the Quangchang in the County Kienchangfu, passes North-West by the North s●…e of the City Kienchan; from whence it enters into the County Vucheufu, and falls into the River Lienfan. Near the City Kienchang the Rivulets Lung an●… Kieukio, through one only Channel, run into the same, both originally out of the Eastern Mountains of this Territory.  
Two other Rivers, viz. the Lu. and Cing, gliding from the South to the North through the County Vucheufu; by the City Vucheu, into the River Hivi, with which they fall into the Stream Lienfan.  
The Lienfan runs by the North-West side of the City Veuche●…, and afterwards cutting through the County of Nanchangfu, disembogues on the East side of the Nanchang into the Lake Poyang.  
This River is remarkable for the use which the Chineses ma●… of its Water, for that not being subject to the alteration of the Wether, is properly made use of in their Hour-glasses, which run there with Water as ours with Sand.  
The Hoai beginning in the Province of Honan, out of the Mountains near the City Funge, passes from thence into the Province of Nanking▪ by the City Hokieu, through the Territory Fungyangfu, and crosses the same from the East to the West, then falls at last, near the City Hoiang, into the Yello●… River, and with that into the Sea.  
By the way this River receives several others, viz. in the County jenningfu of the Province of Honan, the Sum; in this County of Fungangfu Southward, another called Hoai, Peca and Fi▪ to the North, the River Ing, Co, and Vi; which three last have their original out of the Province of Honan.  
The Furio rises in the County Fungyangfu near the City So, on the East side of a Lake which lies at the Foot of the Mountain.  
Three Rivers surround the County Sucheufu, like an Isle, making it Navigable in several places; the first is called Leu; the second, Sung, which glides towards the City Ukiang; the third, Ulang, runs towards the East: all of them have their original out of the Lake Tai, and discharge themselves into the Sea.  
Leang, a little River, proceeds from the Fountain Hoci, lying on the Hill Hoei, in the County of Sucheufu, and near the City Vucie falls into the Lake Ta: The Water thereof is by the Chineses accounted the best, excepting one, in the whole Empire, and is in great esteem amongst Persons of Quality. Not a Vessel which passes this way but buys of it, being ready Bottled, for a small Price, though any one that will stay, may freely take as much as he pleases for nothing. It is Transported to remote Provinces, nay, to the Imperial Court at Peking; for they account it the best to make their Drink Cha withal, by boiling it with the Herb Tee, and therefore it is much in request.  
The Singan begins in the County Hoeicheufu, Westward of the City Hoeicheu; by which passing, it is afterwards increased with the Waters of several Rivulets; the first of which comes out of the City Hoeicheu; the second, out of those near the City Hieuning; the third, from those about Vuyen; and the fourth, out of those near▪ Cieki. The Singan runs strait along through Rocks and Valleys to Sungan, a City in the Province of Chekiang, and hath by the way three hundred and sixty Water-falls, of which the most troublesome to pass lies near the City Hoeicheu, and is called Liucung; then entering into the County Niencheufu in the Province of Chekiang, passes Southward by the City Sungan, and from thence towards the Southeast, and to the South by the City Nieucheu, where bending Northward, it changes its Name into that of I or Chekiang, (from whence the whole Territory, which it almost cuts through the middle from South to North, receives denomination) and accordingly through the County of Hangcheufu; towards the East, by the City Hangcheu; where taking the Name of Cientung, it runs East, and at last in thirty Degrees North-Latitude falls into the Sea.  
The I receive●… several Streams out of the Territories Kinhoafu and Kiucheufu from the South and East, as Venus, Chanyo, Kin, Tingyang, Co, Puyang, and Ho, which all through one Channel fall into the same near the City of Tunglin.  
The Min begins on the Boundaries of the Provinces of Fokien and Chekiang, by the City ●…gciveu of the County of Chuchenfu; from whence it passes Southerly through the County of Kienningfu; Westward, by the City Puching and Kienning, as accordingly East by the City Yenping (where it receives the River Siki) through the Territory Yenpingfu; from whence bending Eastward, it enters the County Focheu, and glides by the South side of the Garrison Xuikeu, where the M●… falls into the same; then Northward by the chief City Focheu, and at last on the North side of the Garrison Xeching disembogues into the Sea in twenty six Degrees Northern-Latitude. From the City Puching to the Garrison Xuiken▪ the same River falls with great force of Water through Valleys, Rocks and Cliffs, but from thence glides on but slowly: With how much swiftness the Water runs between the forementioned two Places appears by this, that they can go from Puching to the Metropolis Tiocheu with the Stream in three days, whereas they are fifteen days Toeing up against it: The Channel winding up and down is very dangerous, and dreadful by reason of the swift Current, abundance of Rocks, and narrowness of the Channel, which in many places between the Rocks is no wider than to permit a small Chinese Vessel to pass through, from whence it oftentimes happens that several suffer Wreck. From the place where this River hath its original, to that where it terminates, it receives many Rivulets and Streams, as on the East, the Tung; on the West, the Kiao, Kieukio, Cuckoe, and Siki; on the South, the Rivers jonki, Min, and Tachang or Nantai.  
The Tung, which comes out of the Mountain Vanche in the County of Kienningfu, falls Southward of the City Kienning into the Min.  
The Kiao, which passes through the Territory of Focheufu, rises out of the Mountain Sivefung, shoots from thence Eastward to the North of the River Min, by the South side of the City Lienkiang, and at last discharges its Waters into the Ocean.  
The Brook Kieukio, which begins in the Mountain Vuy, in the County of Kienningfu, runs from thence South-West, and unites with the Brook Hochung, which hath its original in the Hill Ukiun in the Territory of Xaounfu; from whence it passes South by the City Kienyang, and at last falls with its Waters into the River Min, near the City Kienning.  
The Cum, which begins in the Mountain Ukiun in the County of Xaounfu, glides from thence first Southward, then Eastward by the East side of the City Xaonu, then bending to the South in the County jenpingfu, it fa●…s into the River Si, near the City Sianglo; from whence both these Strea●… run through one Mouth Easterly, then Southward, and pour their Wate●… united with the River Situ, Westward from the City jenping, into the Min.  
The Siki springs Northward in the Territory of Tingcheufu, out of the Lake Kiao, then runs Southward, so East, and enters into the County ●…enpingfu, and to the North by the City Lunggan, and by the City Xu, whe●… it receives the Brook Taisu, and unites itself at last with the River Cu.  
In the Siki, along which they Sail down to the City jenping, ●…e many Water-falls and dangerous Shoals, two especially near the City Cing●… namely Kieulung and Chancung; in the passing by, the Seamen to preven●… the danger of Shipwreck therein, tie Trusses or Bundles of Straw befor●… the Bow of the Ship, which bear off the violence of the blow and keep her back.  
The River Yeuki, which rises in the County of jenpingfu▪ out of the Mountain Yucuang, takes its Course Eastward by the North side of the City Yeuki, and turning to the North, falls into the Min.  
The Rivulet Tachang begins West from the City jungfo, and r●…ning East by the City Focheu, finishes Northward by the Name of Nantai into ●…e Min.  
The Change, which hath its original Northward from the Ci●… Lungnien, in the County of Changcheufu, runs East by the North side of the ●…es Changping and Changtui, then from the East part of the City Chancheu, (which is also in the South) it falls at last Southward into the Sea with two Arms.  
More to the South in the same County glides the Xeching, from the West to the East, and loseth itself Northward of the Garrison Tungxan into the Sea.  
The Kieu, directing its Course from North to South through the County of Civencheu, discharges its Waters Southward into the Sea.  
The Brook Lan and River Si, which run from North to South through the Territory of Foningfu, fall both into the Sea; the first towards the West breaks forth in the Mountain beyond the City Fogan, the other comes out of the Mountain Lan.  
The Ting hath its beginning in the Territory of Tingcheufu, Northward from the City Tingcheu, and receiving Southward of the same the Brook Venus, proceeds by the City Xanghang; then entering the County of Chaocheufu in the Province of Quantung, receives near the City Chingiang, the River Ching, with which at last it loseth itself Southward in the Sea.  
THe Brook jokio begins with a Branch in the Mountain Ho, in the County 
Rivers in the Province Quantung.  of Hoeicheufu, and with another out of the Territory of Chaocheufu, Northward from the City Pingquen; both joining near the City Kieyang, run Southward by the East part of the City Chaocheu, and at last dividing into two Arms, fall into the Sea, which on the East side of the City is called Go.  
The River Ly rises in the Mountain Northward from the City Changlo, and Westward of the City Haifung shoots itself into the Sea, opposite to the Island of Ciexing.  
The Tung takes its original in the Mountains in the County Cancheu, in the Province of Kiangsi, tends on Southward into the Province of Quantung, through the County of Hoeicheufu, and at last terminates in the Sea.  
Another River called Ceng, shoots out of the forementioned Tung above the City Hoeicheu, and runs Southward through this and the County of Quangcheufu, and gliding through the Lake Go, dischargeth itself Northward from the City of S●…an into the Sea.  
The Siang▪ also called Kio, springs from the River's Chin and Vu, Southward of the City ●…ocheu, and bends its Course into the County of Quangcheufu, where near the City Cingyven it receives the River Talo coming out of the Lake Quen, and falls at last Westward from the City Quancheu or Ranton, into the River Ta.  
The Chin springs out of the Mountain Muilin, beyond the City Nanhiung; the Vu out of the Mountain Change, in the County Haocheufu. The River's Chin and Siang run ●…oth quite through whole Province of Quantung.  
The Tao flows out of the Lake Quen, Southward through the County of Quancheufu, and falls near the City Cingyven into the River Siang. Tao signifies a Peach, from the abundance of that sort of Fruit growing on its Banks. By the way the Tao takes in the River Hoang.  
The Brook Yu●…▪ which hath its source beyond the City Cunhoa in the County Quancheufu, runs South-West, and thence Eastward from the City Canton.  
The River Xangu passing through the County of Lotingfu, is received by the River Ta.  
The River Mekiang glides through the Territory of Nanhiungfu. Mekiang signifies A River of Ink, because its Water is as black as Ink; notwithstanding which the ●…sh is not the worse esteemed.  
The River King appearing first on the Boundaries of the Provinces of Quangsi and Quantung, passes on from the North to the South, but through the last Eastward by the City King, to which it gives that Name, and opens a wide Mouth into the Sea.  
The River Lungmuen takes its source in the Western Mountains about the City King in the County of Liencheufu, and from thence passing through the Kingdom of Tungching loseth its self in the Sea  
The River Lien springs out of the Mountains, near the City Linkan, and Southward by the East side of the City Liencheu, descends into the Sea, through the same County the Sanya, which hath its Original in the Mountains, Northward of the City Suiki, in the County Liucheufu, resigns to the Sea.  
The River Tunglui, shoots from the North to the South through the County Caocheufu; the Xo likewise, though more Eastward, glides to the West by the City Xaocheu, where it receives the Stream Hencang.  
THe River Ly, otherwise called Quei, taketh its Original on the Boundaries 
Rivers belonging to the Province of Quangsi.  of the Provinces of Huquang▪ from whence it passes through the County Queilingfu, Westward in the Province of Quangsi, by the way taking in the Brook Quon, (which comes out of the East, Southward from the City Quonyang,) and falling down with a great force and noise through Mountains and Valleys, half environs the City Quelin; whence gliding Southward, it entertains the River Yang, which comes Northward out of the Mountain Sumo, West from the Mountain Ly; then turns with a Branch Eastward, to the City Yangeo (where out of the Northern Mountains, in the County Pinglofu, the River Pinghuen falls into the same) then turns again Southward, and runs again through the County Pinglofu, Westward by the City Pinglo; and at last unites its self with the River Ta, in the Territory Gucheufu.  
The River Lieu, otherwise called Xo or Xokiang, and Kung, begins in the Province of Queicheu, near the Garrison Cinping; from whence it passes Southward through the County Tuchefu; thence Eastward, by the City Tucho, through the Territory Kingyven, Northward by the City Kingyven, and so turning and winding into the Province of Kiangsi; thence Eastward, into that of Lieucheu; at last, it unites with the River Talo, otherwise called Lieucheu, near the chief City Lieucheu.  
The River Tolo, otherwise called Lieu, rising in the County Lipingfu, of the Province of Queicheu, near the Garrison Cheki, runs Southward through the same, by the West side of the City Lungeung, where a little more Southerly it meets with the River Yung, and enters Westward of the City Hoaiyven, into the County Lieuchefu, of the Province of Quangsi; at last, joining with the River Lieu or Xo, near the City Lieucheu, it keeps on Eastward of the City Laiping, where it receives the Lui; then from the City Siang, it glides Southward, and at last augmented with the Water of several Rivers, it pours through the County Cincheufu, and Eastward of the City Cinchen into the River Ta.  
The Streams Lie, Teng, Quei, Feu, and Lin, flow through the County Pinglofu, from the North (where, except the Quei, they all have their Original) to the South, and accordingly, through a part of Gucheufu, where they all discharge their Water into the River Takiang.  
The River Yung extends through the whole County Gucheufu, rising on the East side of the City Hingye, out of the Mountains Ho; from whence it runs Southward, and soon after East, and returns from thence Northward, by the West side of the City Yung, to which it gives denomination; then passes Eastward again to the West of the City Gucheu, into the River Taikiang, or Ta.  
The Stream Ly, Springs out of the Lake Xan, in the County Quangsifu, of the Province of junnan; from whence it marches Southward, and enters next into the Province of Quangsi, by the City Lung; then proceeds on its Course East, with many Inlets through the County Taipingfu, where it receives the Rivers Leung and Tungly; from the North afterwards through that of Nanningfu; and at last, near the City Nanning, unites itself with the Southern Puon.  
The Mosale, or Moxale, or Xale, springs out of the Lake Siul, in the County Tulifu, of the Province of junnan; from whence it runs Eastward through the same County, and first Southeast, afterwards South, through that of Zuhiungfu, by the East side of the City Zuhiung, where it receives the River Lungchuen; then proceeding on its Course through the County juenkiangfu, Linganfu, and the Kingdom of Tungking, falls at last with the River Canlang into the Sea; In the Kingdom of Tunking it enlargeth itself, and becomes Navigable to the Metropolis Tungking.  
The Mosale takes in by the way several Rivers and Brooks; as from the North, the Kio; from the West, Lungchuen, Polo, Tunghoa, Taolieu, Ta, Xanno, juen; and from the East, Singsien.  
The River Kio, gushing out of the Mountain Suki, in the County Yaoganfu, passeth Southward through the same into the Masole: The Polo which comes out of the Lake Zinglung in the Territory Zuhiungfu, (joining on the way by the River Tunghoa, out of the County Kiutungfu,) and with the River Ta, falls into the Mosale.  
The Ta, which riseth in the County Kintungfu, Southward from the City Kintung, stretches from thence Eastward through the County Chinyvenfu, and mixes first with the Polo, afterwards with the Moxale.  
The River Xanno springs on the South side of the City Chinyven, and running Southeast, dischargeth its Waves in the Confines of the Counties, juenkiungfu, Zuhiungfu, and Nanganfu into the Moxale.  
The juen, takes its way from the West through the County juenkiangfu, Southward from the City juenkiang, and unites with the Moxale.  
The River Singsieu, hath its scource out of the Mountain Yolung, in the County junnanfu; and somewhat more Southerly, the River Xanno unites with the Mosale.  
To the Northward, near the City Furio, in the County Quanguan, runs a Brook or Rivulet, called Nanmo, into the River Ly; its Water is said to be continually warm, and good for many Distempers.  
Westward from the Garrison Usa, in the Province of Suchuen, appears the River Venus, Puon, or Northern Puon, properly called Pepuon, that is, Northern Puon; and passing from thence Southward into the Province Queicheu, is enlarged by the River Ciesing, which begins beyond the Mountain Cingping, in the Province of junnan.  
Another Northern Branch, also named Pepuon, or Northern Puon, issues out of the Lakes I and Venus, and unites with the Northern Branch beforementioned, below the Fort Ganchang.  
The River Pexe, which breaks forth in the County Kiocingfu, of the Province of junnan, Northward from the City Kiocing, in the Mountain Fuking looseth itself in the Pepuon.  
The Northern Puon thus united, passeth through the South part of the Province of Queicheu, and joins with the Southern Puon, which riseth in several Branches or Brooks out of the Province of junnan; besides which there are the Pepuon, which comes out of the County junnanfu, Southward from the Mountain Cocing; the River Hikien, the Stream Von out of the Lake Fusien, and the River Lu., out of the Pool Ylung.  
The Southern Puon thus augmented, runs on towards the East, and unites with the Northern Puon, in the little County of the City junning, of the Province of Queicheu, by the City ting, in twenty five Degrees and twenty Minutes Northern Latitude.  
The Southern Puon being thus united with the Northern, casts forth one Channel Southward into the Province of Quangsi, but retains the Name of the Southern Puon; after having run a considerable course, it entertains the River Mungung and Chiugpi, the one from the North, and the other from the South; then proceeds on its way Eastward, through the County Tiencheufu, Singenfu, Nanningfu, and by the South side of the City Nanning, where Eastward it takes in the River Lis, which comes out of the Lake Xan, in the Province of junnan; and somewhat farther two other Rivers, namely, the Go and Cieu, out of which it passes through the County Cincheufu, and near the City Cincheu unites with the River Lieu and Ta; for here the Puon loses its Name, and is called Ta, which holds the same Course through the County Gucheufu, where on the South it receives the River jung, and runs through the Territory Chaokingfu▪ into the Province of Quantung, glides Southward by the City Chaoting and Loting; and Southward from the City Quancheu or Canton, looseth itself.  
The River Kinxa, takes its Original in the Province of junnan, out of the South side of the Lake Tien or Quienning, bends its Course Northward through the County junnanfu; in like manner through Vutingfu, and in twenty seven Degrees and thirty Minute's North-Latitude, enters on the South into the Province of Suchuen, Westward from the Garrison Le; and at last falls East from the Lake Mahu, into the River Mahu.  
Another Branch also called Kinxa, runs by the City Tinghuen, of the Province of Suchuen; and Westward from the Mountain Ulang, finisheth its Course.  
Another River likewise called Kinxa, issues out of the Kingdom of Sifan, and enters the Province of junnan, through the Territory Likiangfu, on the East side of the City Linsi; proceeds Northward by the City Likiang, then through the River Ciokingfu; from thence Eastward by the North side of the City Pexing, where it sends forth a Branch towards the South, through the North part of the County Yagon, having its Channel enlarged from the several Rivers which it receives in the Province of Suchuen, near the Confines of the Province of Queicheu, and joins with the River Kinxa, which comes out of the Province junnan.  
Another River passes more Northward out of the Kingdom of Sifan, also called Kinxa, and sometimes Lekie; it passes by the Mountain Luyni, into the Province junnan, thence through the County jungningfu; from West to East by the North part of the City jungning, and through the Lake Lacu, where it receives the Stream Loye, which comes out of the South; and falling last into the Province of Suchuen, mixes with that Kinxa which flows out of the Province of junnan, Southward from the Mountain Ulung: Kingxa signifies Gold-Dust, so called from its plenty of Gold.  
Thus far of the Rivers and Brooks, which Water the Empire of China in several places, to its great fertility, and make it Navigable almost through the whole Empire; nay, in such manner, that several Counties and Provinces divided and surrounded by them, lie like Islands separated from one another, by the Streams that flow between them.  
There are also many deep-cut Channels, besides Lakes, Pools, and Springs, abounding in Fish.   

Standing— waters, or Channels.  
THe Country of China is cut thorough in many places with Moats or Artificial Channels, for the conveniency of Navigation from one City to another.  
Among many others, one of these Channels called jun, deserves no small admiration, being with an incredible Charge digged from the Province of Nanking, through that of Xantung to the Metropolis of Peking; by means of which, from most places in the Empire, all sorts of Goods are brought in Ships to Peking.  
It begins on the Northern Borders of the Province of Nanking in the County Hoaiganfu, Northward from the City Socien; near the Northern Shore of the Yellow River, out of which Ships from all parts of the Empire are brought into it; from thence it extends North-West through the second Territory jencheufu of the Province of Xantung, to the City Cining, Southward from the Lake Nanyang; then through that of Tungchangfu, and the Lake Nanyang; from whence at last, at the end of the County, near the City Lincing, beyond the Lake Cang, it falls into the River Guei.  
But because the Water in this Channel is too shallow in many places for great Ships, therefore there are above twenty Sluices or Water-gates in the same, in the Chinese Tongue called Tungpa, very strong and firm, of square Stone. Every Sluice hath a Gate or opening, locked with great Planks to keep out the Water, being by means of a Wheel and an Engine drawn up with little trouble, to give way for the Water and Ships, till you come to the second Gate, where they do the like, and so likewise at all the rest: But half way, before you come to the City Cining, they tap as much Water through a great Water-gate out of the Lake Cang, as they need; then Locking up the Gates again, keep the Water from running out too much, and so leaving the Ground bare, for the Water in the Lake is higher than the adjacent Country; so that in a small Tract of Land, they reckon above eight Water-gates, which resist the force and power of the Water.  
When the Ships are come to the Lake Cang itself, they cross not the same, but with much more ease, pass along a Channel made by the sides of the Lake, with brave Banks on each side: At every Water-gate are People which Toe the Ships by a Line through the Sluices, for a small reward.  
In this manner the Ships go out of the Yellow River to Peking.  
Certainly, should the best Builders or Surveyors of Europe come and behold the length of this Channel, or thickness and height of the Banks on each side, and the ornament of the Sluices, which are all of hewn Stone, they would justly wonder at the wisdom of the Chinese, and their Industry, in undergoing that labour, which scarce any other People would be able to perform.  
In the Province of Peking, in the County of Pekingfu, near the City Cho, there is also a very long Channel called Tocang; another in the eighth County Xaohingfu, in the Province of Chekiang, described before; besides many more, which would be too tedious to mention.   

Lakes and Pools.  
IN the County of Pekingfu, Westward from the Metropolis, lies on the 
Lakes in the Province of Peking.  Mountain jociven, a Lake called Lis, which is ten Furlongs in Circumference.  
On the South side of the Mountain Tienxu, Northward from the chief City, is a Lake, made by the confluence of several Springs, wherefore it is called, Kienlung, that is, Of nine Springs, which number, because the Chineses account it Fortunate, hath much increased their Superstitious Belief concerning the Emperor's Tombs that are there.  
On the South-West side of the City Paoting, close by the City Moat, is a small, but very pleasant Lake, called Lienhoa, that is, Lien-Flower, whereon the Citizens and Neighbouring People make great Feasts and Entertainments in Pleasure-Boats, built for that purpose.  
In the County Hokienfu, near the City High, is a very deep Lake, named Vo, the Water of which, at the throwing of a Stone therein, becomes of the Colour of Blood: If the Leaves of the adjacent Trees chance to fall into it, in a short time Swallows fly out of it, insomuch, that the Leaves seem to turn into Birds, as is related of the Scotch Barnacles, or Soland Geese.  
In the Territory Sintivyfu, Northward of the City Nangsin, begins a great Lake, called Talo, and extends as far as the City Kiulo, in the County Xuntefu.  
Nor far from the little City Hanping, is another lesser Lake made by two Springs; the one with very hot, and the other very cold Water, though they lie both close together.  
In the County Tamingfu, near the City Niuhoang, lies a Lake called Luece, eighty Furlongs in compass; near the City Taming, the Pool Caoki, and another bigger, called Chanfung or Moma, both brackish.  
Westward from the Mountain Feukieu, is a Lake that proceeded there, from the sinking of a City, called Siun.  
In the County jungpingfu, near the City Changlei, lies a Lake of thirty Furlongs, called In; it is Oval, and extends almost to the Sea.  
IN the Territory Pingyangfu, at the Foot of the Mountain Xevyang, is a Lake 
Lakes in the Province of Xansi.  of a considerable bigness, on which the ancient Emperor Xun, as the Chineses write, used to Fish.  
Near the City Kiang, begins the Lake In, that is, Brackish, (for all the Water thereof is as Salt as that of the Sea) and stretches from thence to the Jurisdiction of the City Ganye; it is in Circumference a hundred and forty Furlongs.  
In the County Taitungfu, Westward from the City Taitung, lies the small Lake Kiuncu, that is, Honest Man, because hereabouts lived one that would never accept Gold when offered; it is made by the River Herald  
On the Mountain Yenking, near the City So, is a deep Lake, of a Furlong in Circumference.  
In the Territory Taiyvenfu, Westward from the City Che, lies the Lake Tien.  
IN the County Siganfu, on the South side of the chief City, is a considerable 
Lakes in the Province of Xensi.  large Lake, called Fan, which is made by the uniting of two Rivers; another on the North-East side, not natural, but cut by Command of the Emperor Hiaou, serves for a place of Recreation: It is moreover, adorned with a stately Palace, to which belong pleasant Woods, and Flowery Meadows, whereon, the Emperor also, to Recreate himself, caused Plays and other Pastimes to be Presented to him: The same Emperor also Commanded a Lake to be digged on the South-West side of the same City, calling it Queming; on which, he oftentimes caused his Soldiers in Vessels to make Sea-Fights, thereby, to make them experienced therein; for intending to invade the Southern Provinces, which abounded with Ships, he instructed them by this Jesting Exercise, how to behave themselves in real Engagements.  
On the South side, the Emperor made a third Lake, and near it a pleasant Court, called Silent, to solace himself in, after the end of those pretended Fights: He placed also in this Lake a great Stone▪ Fish, raised, and fastened in the bottom of the Water like a Rock, that the Sea men Sailing by the same, might learn to shun Rocks and Shelves: Against Rainy weather (as the Chineses say) this Fish makes a hideous noise, the force whereof is imagined to be much advantaged by a Neighbouring Echo. Moreover, the Chineses relate, that this Emperor on a certain time Dreamt, That this Fish being gotten with a Hook in his Presence, craved his Aid; and that he the next day, really taking a Fish in the Lake, remembered his Dream, and freed the Fish; whereupon, throwing his Net in again, he found two inestimable Pearls, which the Chineses call Mingyven, that is, Stones of a clear Moon, because on the Increase and Decrease of the Moon, they grow dimmer or brighter, as is generally reported of the Moon-Stones.  
Moreover, there are some that affirm, that such like Stones are yet in China, and being kept in the Emperor's Palace, are accounted unvaluable; and that when the Emperor took up the foremention'd Pearls, he said, Certainly, this is the Gift of that grateful Fish which I set at liberty.  
WIthin the City Cinan, in the County Cinanfu, on the West side, is the Lake 
Lakes in the Province of Xantung.  Taiming, out of which runs a Channel to the Lake Coing, which is also within the Walls of the said City; Out of both which Lakes, there run through the whole City convenient Navigable Moats: This Lake Taiming also extends towards the Lake Cioxan, which is on the North-side, without the City.  
Near the City Changkieu, is the great Lake called Peyun, which abounds in Fish, and inricheth the adjacent Grounds with excellent Fruit, Linko and Lien-Flowers.  
In the County Yencheufu are five Lakes, namely, Nanuang, South from the City Venus; Toxan and Fauly, near the City Tingtao; Leangxan, near the City Tungping; and Lui, which in the Chinese Language signifies Thunder, because in the middle thereof is a Stone, whose Body resembles that of a Dragon, and the Head, a Man's, and is by the Chineses called, The Spirit of Thunder; they affirming, that by striking on its Belly, they hear a noise or voice: There are likewise in this County many other Lakes, but of less note.  
In the County Tengcheufu, near the City Laiyang, is the Lake Hiyang; and in Tungchanfu, the Lake Ho.  
IN the County Kaifungfu, lies Westward from the little City Hiu, the small 
Lakes in the Province of Honan▪  Lake Si, and another near jengling; two other Lakes, called Lieu, from the abundance of Willows which grow on their Banks, lie one near the City Chin, and the other by Sincheu.  
On the West side of the City stands the Lake Kiuming, made by the Imperial Family Sung, for a place wherein to Exercise the Naval Militia, and represent Sea-Fights: This Lake is exceeding pleasant, being built round about with many stately Palaces and Pagods, and also Marble Columns Inscribed with Verses extolling the Lake.  
There are also other lesser Lakes, amongst which is one, called Tungmuen, near the City Chin, which is exceeding clear, and without any Weeds.  
In the County Queitefu, on the South side of the City Queite, is the Lake Nan, over which lies a Stone-Bridge with many Arches; Westward from the City Ciu, is the Lake Si; and in the same County, a very small Lake called Chokin, about which many Silk-Weavers have their Habitations, invited thither by the goodness of the Water, from which the Silk receives an excellent Gloss; and thereupon, the Lake takes its Name: The word Chokin signifying, A Washing place for Silk Damask.  
Eastward from the City juching, stands the Lake Menchu.  
In the County Hoakingfu, Northward from the City Ciyven, is the Lake Tay, which is made by the River Ki.  
In the Territory junningfu, Westward from the City junning, is the Lake Si, yielding a very pleasant Prospect, as being surrounded with many Buildings, for the Entertainment and Recreation of the Citizens.  
Westward from the small City In, lieth a Lake of a hundred Furlongs; in the City of In, to the North, stands the Lake Quanching.  
ON the Mountain Tienchi, near the City Mien, in the County Chingtufu, in the 
Lakes in the Province of Suchuen▪  Province of Suchien, there is a Lake, which by Rain is not observed to increase, nor in dry Seasons to decrease.  
On the Southeast side of the City Chingtu, is a Pool called Yolung, which the Emperor Sui caused to be made for the exercising his Mariners and Soldiers in Ships of War, when he resolved to invade King Chin.  
Vansui is a Lake of four hundred Furlongs, digged like a Moat round about the City Chingtu, but broadest on the North side; of the Earth which was digged out of the same, the Walls of the City were made.  
Southward from the City Caiazzo, in the County Queicheufu, stands the Lake Cingyven, a hundred Furlongs square, being the source of the River Cin.  
Westerly of which, and East from the City Ta, is the great Lake Vanking, whose Shore is all set with stately Trees, and environed with Flowery Meadows, Fruit-Trees, and Populous Villages.  
In the County Mahufu, Southward from the City Mahu, is a Lake also called Mahu, that is, Horse Lake; for the Chineses say, that in this Lake a Horse appeared, Winged like a Dragon, from which the Family Tangle gave the City, Lake and River that denomination.  
In the little County Muicheu, whose chief City is of the same Name, stands a great Lake called Hoang, that is to say, Circular, because it surrounds the whole City, yet it is broadest towards the West: The Shore is built all along with handsome Houses, which standing round like a Ring, the City may justly be called, The Stone thereof; near it is a long Bridge called Sieve.  
On the East side of the City Kiating, is a small Lake called Ningyve: By the City Pukiang is another Lake named Yotan, on which they say the Emperor Hoangti Anno 2500. before the Incarnation, studied Chemistry.  
THere are two Lakes in the County Vuchangfu, one near the City Kiayn, 
Lakes in the Province of Huquang.  and the other near that of Puki.  
In the Territory Hanyangsu, part within and part without the Walls of the City Hanyang, is the Lake called Langquon.  
On the West side, at the Foot of the Mountain Kieuchin is the Lake Taipe, two hundred Furlongs in bigness.  
In the County Sianyangfu, near the City Nanchang, within a Temple, is a Pool called Chinchu, that is, Lake of Pearls; for if any Person walk apace round the sides thereof, the Water arises out of the Ground like Pearls, whether naturally or artificially cannot easily be resolved.  
In the Territory Teganfu, Eastward from the City Tegan, is a great Lake of nine hundred Furlongs, called junmung.  
In the Province Hoangcheufu, near the City Hoangpi, stands a Lake called Vu, that is War: for in the time of the Kings it was a Place ordained for the Exercise of Ships.  
Near the City Hoangmui is another bigger Lake called Vihu, and not far from it the Lake Taipe; and Eastward from the City King, the Lake Kinxa.  
In the Territory Kingcheufu, on the East side of the City Kongcheu, is the Lake Tung, forty Furlongs in bigness, pleasant and full of Fish, with which the Citizens often Feast and make Merry in Vessels on the same.  
In the County Yocheufu, at the South-West side of the City Yocheu, is a great Lake called Tungting, which (as the Chineses say) had its original from a Deluge; and this seems to be confirmed by the many Isles that lie in the same, namely Kiun, Kinxa (signifying Sand of Gold,) Kiue, and Pecio, built full of Pagodes and Cloisters, which are inhabited by some poor Religious Order.  
Amongst others is a floating Isle, on which is also a Cloister built, for the Roots of Trees and large Canes knitted and joined together keep up the Earth by their continual growing to one another, without the least danger of ever breaking.  
In the County Changxafu, on the middle of the Mountain Taihu, near the City Lievyang, lies a great fathomless Lake: On the Mountain Xepi another of thirty Furlongs called Pexa, out of which run four Brooks, of which one is the Rivulet Lieus; the rest fall into the River juping.  
On the North side of the City Siangyn, lies the Cingcao; which moistening the County jocheufu, unites itself with the Lake Tunting.  
In the County Hengcheufu, Eastward from the chief Kity Hengcheu, is a very deep Lake; the Water whereof being of a green colour the Chineses highly esteem for the making of their Drink, or Wine called Sampsou.  
In the Territory Chantefu, near the Cities Luugyang and juenkiang, lies the Lake Chexa, and unites itself with the Lake Tungting.  
In the County jengcheufu near the City Tan, is a great Water-fall, which immediately turns to a Pool, in which grow yellow Lien-Flowers, which are seldom found of that colour in any other place.  
In the little Territory Cingcheufu, near the City Hoeitung, stands the Lake Cingpo, full of great Rocks and Stones, on which the Chineses often make Merry.  
In the small County Chincheufu, not far from the City Hingping on the Mountain Xemeve, is a small Lake called Then, whose Water continues warm all the Winter. Twice a year great numbers of wild Geese fly thither out of the North and South; wherefore this Lake is called jen, that is, A Goose.  
IN the Territory Nanchangfu, in the Province of Kiangsi, on the Southeast 
Lakes in the Province of Kiangsi.  side of the City, stands the Lake Tung, very much noted for the clearness of its Water, and the abundance of Fish which is in the same.  
The great Lake Poyang, otherwise called Pengli, near the City Nankang, North-East, is three hundred Furlongs long, and forty broad, borders Westward on the County Nankangfu; Eastward on jaocheufu: part of it, which respects the City Yukan, is called Kanglang: It contains several Isles, as to the South, Langma, Xuihung, and Pipa, lying near the City Yukan; more Northward, Ingcu, Chuki, Checien, and the Mountain King, lying on an Island Eastward of the chief City Pehoa, and Westward of the little Isle Teuxu. It receives in the South, the River Can; in the East, the Logan; and in the North, the River Kiang.  
In the County of Kienchangfu, without and within the chief City, lies a Lake, the one part called Kinquei, and the other Kao.  
Near the City Nangfung is also the little Lake Vansui.  
In the Territory Linkiangfu, near the City juencheu, is the Lake Funghoang, which not being very big, neither increases by abundance of Rain, nor decreased by excessive Drought.  
In the County Kieganfu, near the City Kiexui, lies the Lake Kien, and near Ganfo the Pool Mie, signifying Honey, so called from the exceeding sweet Fish which it produces.  
In the Territory Xuicheufu, near the City Sinchang, there is a Lake, whose Water is never muddy, but always very clear.  
In the County juencheufu, on the East side of the City juencheu, the Lake Tung spreads itself, and is called The Pleasure of the County, for the Chineses often make Feasts on the same, and have built several Retreats and Banquetting-houses on its Banks.  
The Lake Mingyo affords the City a Moat, through which it is brought with convenient and Navigable Channels, which on the East side run into the Lake Tung.  
THe Lake Cienli is situate in the Territory Kiangningfu, Eastward near the 
Lakes in the Province of Nanking.  City Lieyang, containing a thousand Furlongs, which to the South is united with the Lake Tai, in the County Sucheufu.  
Without the Gate of the City Taiping, a small Lake called Hivenuu lies on the South-West side, not far from the City Liexui, Westward from the Lake Tanyang, and extends from thence to the Borders of the City Taiping.  
In the County Sucheufu, on the West and South-West side of the City Sucheu, is the great Lake Tai, which according to the Description of the Chinese, takes up the space of thirty six thousand Paces.  
Near the City Changxo is the Lake Xang, united on the North with the Lake Cienli.  
In the Territory Yangcheufu stands the Lake Piexe, Northward from the City Kaoyeu, where a digged Channel runs into it.  
In the County Hoaiganfu, on the East side of the City Hoaigan, lies the Lake, or rather a great Pool, called Hang, full of Canes.  
In the Territory Luchenfu is the great Lake Cao, and another less, named Pe, which join near the City Lukiang: In the first lies the Mountain Ci, that is to say, Orphan, because it stands alone.  
In the County Taipingfu, on the Southeast side of the City Taiping, begins the Lake Tanyang, by the Chinese reckoned to be three hundred Furlongs large, and extends from thence to the City Liexui.  
In the little Territory wherein is the City Cheucheu, near the City Civenciao, begins the Lake U, and reaches to the City Laigan.  
The little County Siucheu boasts of the Lake Ta; near which (they say) a Country Maid, afterwards Mother to the Emperor Lieupang, Conceived by a Spirit, and brought forth the chief of the Family of Han.  
In the County Hancheufu, near the City Changhoa, on the Mountain Cienking, is a Lake of two hundred Paces in bigness, famous for its Golden-coloured Fishes, which the Chineses from thence call Kinyu.  
In the Territory Hangcheu, Westward from the City of the same Name, is the famous Lake Si, between which and the Wall is only a Stone Street of seven Furlongs for a convenient Walking-place. The Lake, whose Water for its pleasantness is much esteemed both by Natives and Strangers, containeth forty Furlongs in circumference, and is surrounded with Hills in manner like a Theatre; round about the Hills (out of which flow many Brooks and Rivulets, distinguished by several Channels) are Pagodes, Palaces, Cloisters, Colleges, Groves, Tombs, and very delightful Gardens. On its Shore are broad Ways Paved with Freestone; and across the Lake lie Bridges of Ships, over which they pass from one side to another, and in the passage take a view of the whole Lake. The Ways are all along shaded with Willow Trees, planted direct in a Line, and ever now and then Seats or Arbours, with Benches for Passengers to rest on; insomuch that it is a question, which of the two are here most to be admired, the workmanship of Nature, or the artificial Adornments of the Place? The Water is clear as Crystal, the least Stone being seen in the bottom; but near the Shores the Water, being low, is overgrown with the Flower Lien.  
This Lake hath no way for the Ships to go out or in at, for the Water is only let out in time of great Rains, through little Rivulets, or through a Sluice which is Northward from the City; yet nevertheless there are many Ships built on its Banks, which may justly be called Golden Palaces, for their being so richly Gilded and Painted with various Colours. In these Pleasure-Boats they make Feasts, Plays, and other Entertainments; wherein the Chineses have all things that can be invented to recreate the Mind. The Vessels thus stored with all manner of Necessaries for delight, Sail to and again in the Lake without fear or danger of Shipwreck; so that it is no wonder why they call this Place and City A delightful Garden, or Earthly Paradise.  
In the County Kiucheu, near the City Kaihoa, lies the little Lake Pehiai, so called from the white Crabs which it produces, for Pehiai signifies a White Crab.  
In the Territory Ningpofu, near the City Tunghoa, is a little Pool, but very deep, called Yapoi, whose Water (as the Chineses say) grows exceeding clear, when the City hath a pious and good Governor, but when a bad one, muddy and thick.  
In the County Tingcheufu, near the City Vuping, lies the Lake Loxui, that is, Green Water, so called from its green colour, with which this Water is so deeply Died, that it makes all things green which are washed in the same.  
On the East side of the City Tingcheu, is a Pool called Cingcao, of one Furlong, but very deep; near which grow Trees, whose Leaves are continually green.  
In the County Hoeicheufu, Westward from the City Hoeicheu, is the Lake Fung, ten Furlongs in circumference; in the middle of it are two Isles, built with Banquetting-houses, wherein the Citizen's Caress one another.  
This Lake is surrounded with a Stone Wall, and a Bridge also, which not only leads from one side to the other, but also from one Island to another. The Shore is planted with shading Trees, and built with Colleges.  
In the County Liencheufu, five little Lakes called U, surround the City King.  
In the Territory Tincheufu lies the Lake Kiao.  
THe Lake So lies in the County Queilingfu, in the Province of Kiangsi, on 
Lakes in the Province of Kiangsi.  the West side of the City Queiling, being seventy Furlongs in compass, and in it a Hill called In, makes a little Island.  
In the Territory Gucheufu, on the East side of the City Gucheu, is a small Lake called Go, in which King Pegao is reported of old to have fed ten tame Crocodiles, feasting them only with Criminals and Malefactors.  
Within the Wall of the Garrison Cinping is a Lake called Ciseng, out of which the Inhabitants fetch their Water, the hard and stony Ground thereabouts not yielding them any Pits or Wells.  
In the County Tuchufu, on the West side of the City Pingcheu, is a Lake which bears the same Name with the City.  
In the Territory junnanfu, on the South side of the chief City junnan, is the Lake Tien, otherwise called Quinming, which extends Westward, and is five hundred Furlongs in circumference: It receives increase of Water out of the Puon, which descends out of the Mountain Kaoming into this Lake; and on the South side makes the River Kinxa, which runs Northward.  
In the County Talifu, Eastward from the City Tali, is a very long Lake called Siul, which abounds in Fish, it begins Southward near the City Tali, and ends Northward at the City Leankiang.  
This Lake makes nine Creeks or Inlets, and hath three Isles which rise up into Hills, besides four others very low and fruitful.  
The Mosale also takes its original out of this Lake, which after having run through this whole Country, falls into the Province of Tungking, where augmenting its Stream, it makes the Channel which carries Ships of great Burden to the Court of Tunking.  
In the County Linganfu, near the City Xeping, lies the Lake Ylung, above a hundred and fifty Furlongs in circumference, and hath three Isles in the midst of it.  
Another called Tungha appears Westward from the City Tunghai, eighty Furlongs about; its beginning is near the City Hosi.  
In the Territory Chinkiangfu, Southward from the City Chinkiang, is a great Lake called Fusien, a hundred thousand Paces over; and another lesser named Ming, lies near the City Yangcung.  
In the County jungningfu, on the East side of the City jungning, is a great Lake with three Isles of equal bigness, each having a rising Mount about two hundred Rods high.  
In the County Kioungfu, near the City Koleang, at the Foot of the Mountain Kiechiung, is a Lake or Pool called Changyen.  
In the Territory Kioungfu, near the City Kienchuen, lies the Lake Kien, which is sixty Furlongs in circumference. Out of it flow three Brooks called Chuen, which represented by these Chinese Characters 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, signify Water; from whence the City hath also received its denomination.  
In the County Vutingfu, on the North-West side of the City Vuting, is the Lake Hoeineao, which word signifies Breeding Birds; because the Leaves of a certain Tree which fall into it, turn into a sort of Birds, so black, that the Inhabitants look upon them as little Devils or Spirits.  
In the County Cintienfu, between two Mountains, Westward from the City, is a great Lake called I, otherwise The Sea Cingxui, into which certain little Rivulets descend out of the Mountains.  
In the County junchangfu, on the East side of the City jungchang, is the Lake Chinghoa, wholly covered with Lien-Flowers.  
On the South side of the City Pexing lies the Lake called Chin, which broke out from the Ruins of a great City, which (as they say) through the wickedness of the Inhabitants was swallowed up in the Earth with all the People, only one Child, by sitting on a piece of Timber in the Water, escaped that general Destruction. It's chiefest Inhabitants were said to be of the House of Chin; from whence the Lake hath its denomination. It is also called The Starry Sea, from the Weeds, which, shaped like Stars, drive upon the Water.   

Springs.  
IN the County Fuencheufu, in the Province of Peking, near the City Hiaoy, are many hot and boiling Springs, almost like the sulphurous Waters in Italy. If the Chineses observed and minded these things sufficiently, they might perhaps easily discover the same, if not greater Operations in them, than are found in any of ours in Europe; for having peculiar Tastes and Colours, they may probably also have in them no less Virtue and Efficacy in Medicine.  
Near the City Lo, in the County Chungpingfu, is a very pleasant Spring, remarkable only for the clearness of its Water.  
Another like this in the Territory Kingyangfu, is called Xingxui.  
In the County Cinanfu, in the Province of Xuntung, they reckon above seventy two Springs on the South side of the City Cinan; amongst which one called Kiuti exceeds all the other in excellency of Water.  
In the County Yoncheufu of the same Province, near the City Ningyang, is the the Spring Tao; of which, because the word signifies Robber, the famous Philosopher Confut, though he was exceeding thirsty, refused to drink, so much he abhorred the very Name of Vice.  
In the Territory Tencheufu, in the same Province, near the City Chaoyiven, is a Spring called Hanuen, a Monster of Nature, out of which at the same time flows Water both cold and hot; wherefore it hath that Name, for Hanuen signifies Cold and Hot.  
THere is a delightful Spring named Ping in the Province of Honan, at the 
Springs in the Province of Honan.  South side of the City of the same Name, near which stands an Ascent of Stone for those that please to stand upon, and behold the Fountain.  
In the Territory Nanyangfu, in the Province beforementioned, near the City Nuihan, is a Spring whose Water is highly esteemed of by the Chinese, who believe it to have an Operation effectual to the prolongation of humane Life.  
On the South-West side of the City In, is a Fountain, which for the hotness of its Water is called Venus, that is to say, Hot.  
In the Territory Chintufu, in the Province of Suchuen, near the City Nuikiang, is a Spring, whose Water is observed to ebb and flow at the same time with the Sea, though very remote from thence.  
On the West side of the City Xunking rises a Spring called Tieyu, that is to say, Milky, from the sweetness of its Water.  
NEar the City Kixui, in the County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Huquang, 
Springs in the Province of Huquang.  is the Spring Loyu, whose Water is particularly famous for making of good Tee.  
On the Mountain Kingmuen appears the Fountain Sinlo, whose Water is esteemed of great Virtue.  
WEstward from the City Nankang, in the Province of Kiangsi, is the 
Springs in the Province of Kiangsi.  Spring Lien, whose Water in its fall glitters like Cloth of Silver, producing thirty Rivulets.  
In the County Vucheufu in the same Province, near the City Kinki, is another pleasant Fountain; and another called Puensin, within the Walls of the City Xuicheu.  
IN the County Sinkiangfu, in the Province of Nanking, within the City Xanghiu, 
Springs in the Province of Nanking.  is a Fountain of pure Water called jung, in the midst of a Temple.  
Out of the Mountain Kin, lying in the River Kiang, in the County Chinkiangfu, issues a Fountain called Chungleang.  
IN the Territory Choking, in the Province of Quantung, near the City Singing, 
Springs in the Province of Quantung.  on the Mountain Tienlu, is a Spring or Pool, from which upon the throwing of a Stone into the same a noise is heard like Thunder; soon after which the Sky overcasting poureth down Rain, wherefore it is called The Dragon's Pool.  
THe County Pinglofu in the Province of Quangsi, hath two Springs, one 
Springs in the Province of Quangsi.  Northward from the City Pinglo, called Caning, and the other near the City Xo, called Yoxan.  
On the Southeast side of the City Queiyang, a Fountain of very sweet and clear Water falls into a Pool, which is never perceived either to increase or decrease, how much Water soever is drawn out of, or let into it.  
Near the City Pingtin, in the County Tungginfu, is a strange Spring called Cankeng, out of which through one only Mouth flows two several sorts of Water, the one clear, and bright, and the other thick and muddy, which after having forsaken their Spring, go each a contrary way, as if at enmity one against another.  
On the East side of the City Chinning, is a Fountain of exceeding cold Water, notwithstanding the adjacent Earth is heated by a Fire which continually burns under Ground.  
Near the Garrison Picie is a Fountain of very pleasant Water, called Tro.  
NOrthward from the chief City junnan, on the Mountain Xang, is a cold 
Springs in the Province of junnan.  Spring, counted good to strengthen the Joints or Limbs.  
On the Southeast side of the City Cioking, in the County Ciokingfu, rises a Fountain of warm Water, which cures by Bath those that are troubled with Swellings, proceeding from redundant Humours.  
There is yet another Spring in this County called Hiangxui, that is to say, Sweet-smelling Water, because of its fragrancy, especially in Lent; at which time the Inhabitants make Offerings to this Fountain, and drink the Water mixed with their Liquor made of Rice.   

Mountains, Hills, and Valleys.  
THe Empire of China is in many places flanked with rows of Mountains to a vast length; not far from which are situate some or other of their chief Cities.  
The Chineses hold all great Mountains in such high veneration, that there is nothing which they adore with a more superstitious zeal; and as our Astrologers make their Prognostications from the observation of the Course of the Heavens, so they from the Mountains; first from their situation and shape, then from the Gardens, Rivers, Springs and Lakes that are in and about them.  
In the observation and choosing of Mountains they are no less curious than superstitious, imagining that in them all their happiness and prosperity consists, because the Dragon, whom they account the chief Instrument of their felicity, resides in a Mountain. But of this their Mountainous Superstition, a more particular account may be seen in Father Martin's Preface to the History of China.  
FIve Leagues Northward from the Metropolis Peking, is a Mountain called 
Mountains in the Province of Peking,  Thienxen, wherein the Tombs of divers Chinese Emperors are very richly and magnificently built.  
On the South-West side of the City is a Mountain called jociven, crowned with most stately Palaces belonging to the Tartarian Family of Iven.  
Here the Tartar Emperors used to retire, to shelter themselves from the excessive heat of the Sun in the Summer.  
In the same County, near the City Changpling, is the Mountain Pefeu, out of which run two Rivers, which meet at the Village Feu.  
In the same County, not far from the City Pa, is a Mountain named Nan, overgrown with a Wood of Canes twelve Furlongs in circumference, in the midst of which is a noble Palace: and not far from thence is that high and steep Mountain named Puon, having upon one of its tops a Stone, which though of a huge bulk, totters and shakes at the least touch; the like whereof we have in a certain Cave in Derbyshire.  
Near the City jungjung is the Mountain Chinquon, forty Furlongs about, and on its South side a Hill called The Flower, from the various coloured Stones thereon.  
Not far from the City Cunhoo is the Mountain Mingque, so called from a Fire burning within it, which seems to pierce it through in such a manner, that looking in at a Hole on the right side, there appears the form of a bright Half-Moon.  
By the City Phingco are the Mountains Kie and Siuvu, out of which they dig a sort of Coals, that serve the Inhabitants for Fuel.  
In the County wherein is the City Paoting, near the City Huon, is the Mountain Yki, on which they say the Emperor Yau's Mother resided.  
Hard by the City Hiung lies the Mountain Tahiung, out of a Rocky part whereof springs a clear Fountain.  
Near the City je is the Mountain Lungcie, on which appears the footsteps of a Dragon.  
Not far from thence is a Valley called Tunglo, which being surrounded with high Mountains, only one narrow Passage left, is much resorted to, as a very secure place in time of War.  
The County wherein is the City Hokien hath few and little Mountains; the only remarkable one called Simo, is near the City Ching; on the top whereof, spreading itself into a large and fruitful Plain, is built a pleasant Village.  
In the County wherein is the City Chingting, and near the City Cinking, is a very high Mountain called Changuen; upon whose top, reaching above the Clouds, is a very sovereign Spring, and a stately Cloister for Priests, built by Queen Xayang, in memory of a great Cure she received by drinking the Water of the forementioned Spring.  
Near the City Kioyang is another Hill, out of which gusheth also a healing Fountain, and whereon grow divers kinds of Physical Herbs.  
By the City King are the Mountains Curi and Tiaopuon, eminent for the Defeat which Hansini of Chinya received there.  
Not far from the City Chanhoang is the Mountain Ulna, so called from the Statues of five Horses Cut in yellow Stone, over which the Family of Sung built a rich Chapel.  
In the County of Xantefu, near the City Xaho, is a Mountain, famous for its many Caverns; it is called Tangle, that is, Bath, from a Fountain of warm Water thereon, exceeding good against all kind of Scurf.  
Near the City Nuikeu is the Mountain Pungcio, producing divers Physical Drugs.  
There is likewise the Mountain Cuckoe, that is, Orphan, because it rises only with one top, and stands distant from all others.  
In the County Tamingfu, near the City Chinfung, lies the Mountain Cieu, famous for the Emperor Kau's Tomb.  
Near the City Siun is the Mountain Feukieu, having a Lake on the Westside, which proceeded from the sinking of another City, called also Siun.  
Nor far from hence is likewise the steep and high Mountain Cukin.  
In jungpingfu, on the Southeast side of the City jungping, is the Mountain Sang, of a dreadful height; out of which spring many Brooks.  
Near the City Hiengan, is a Mountain called Lungciven, and upon it a Spring, whither the Chineses repair in dry Wether to Pray to the Dragon for Rain.  
Eastward from the same City is that high Mountain named Tu, surrounded with pleasant Woods.  
Near the Garrison jungcheu is one named Lungmuen, that is to say Dragon's Gate, so called, because the River Linhoang flows out of Tartary between those Mountains through the Great Wall into China.  
Near the Garrison Xanghai are Mountains of a great height.  
IN the County Taiyvenfu, are many Mountains, but none remarkable, except 
Mountains in the Province of Xansi▪  the Mountain Kiecheu, North-East from the City Taiyven: Kiecheu signifies Tying of a Ship, for it is Recorded, that the Emperor Thou tied his Ship to this Mountain, when he Sailed up the Stream Fuen.  
By the City Kioching is the Mountain Hukive, out of which they dig abundance of the best sort of Iron to make Working-Tools of.  
Near the City Pingting is the Mountain Cio, eminent for a Chapel or Cloister of Priests.  
By the City Kafau, is the Mountain Sieve, that is, Mountain of Snow, because it is always covered with Snow.  
The Mountain Xeleu, lying in the Jurisdiction of the City Chin, is notable for its height, in which some say, it exceeds all besides.  
In the County Pingyangfu, near the City Siangling, lies the great Mountain Golung, which extends Northward by the City's Fuensi and Fuensan, and runs South, to the Towns Kioyao and Yeching, where it unites with the Mountain Ulao, and stretches in a continued Ridge to the Province of Xensi, and further Westward.  
In the Mountain Kiao, near the City Kioyao, they say the Crown and other Imperial Ensigns of the ancient Emperor Hiangti lie buried.  
Near the City Pu is the Mountain Xevyang, eminent for the Residence of two Philosophers of the Royal Extraction, who chose rather to quit the Pomp of Empire, and retire from the World, than to attend upon the wicked Emperor Cheu.  
Near it stands the Mountain Lie, where the Emperor Xun, extolled amongst the Chinese for his Pious Life, followed Husbandry, before he was advanced to the Crown. This Mountain to this day, produces neither Thorn nor Bramble, nor any hurtful Plant; and this they imagine to be an effect of the said Emperor's Piety.  
In the County Taitingfu, near the City Henyven, is a part of the Mountain Heng, much resorted to for its rare Flowers and Physical Herbs; but there is one Tree thought to be of great Virtue, to which their Superstition will not suffer them to lay an Ax.  
Near the City So, lies the Mountain jueney, so called from a belov'd Female, Singer to King Guei, who is buried there.  
By the City Quangchang, stands the Mountain Hiang, eminent for a great and old Wood of Pine-Trees; in the middle of which stands a Pagod Temple, and Cloister for Priests.  
Near the City Lingkieu, is the Mountain Tape, out of which they dig a sort of Vermilion, of which they make a kind of Red Ink to Print with.  
Near the City So, is the Mountain Yenking.  
In the County of Luganfu, near the City Changeu, is the Mountain Fakieu, so called from the abundance of Turtle-Doves that breed thereon; it is very Woody, and hath a strong Fort built upon it, which is the safeguard of the County.  
By the City Tunlieu is the Mountain Lin, on which one Hevy, a famous Archer, shot with seven Arrows seven Birds flying one after another.  
Near the City Lucing is the Mountain Funieu, that is, Cow Rider, from an old Cow, which is reported to have there destroyed several Men, till at last, by an unknown Man, it was dragged into a hole of the Mountain, neither of them being ever after heard of.  
In the County Fuencheufu, on the West side of the chief City Fuencheu, is the Mountain Vanhu, remarkable for its height; it is so called from Ten thousand Men, which, they say, getting upon the same, escaped the violence of a great Deluge.  
Near the City Hiaoy is the Mountain Kaotang, in which are divers boiling Springs and Pits, by reason of Fire which burns within the Earth.  
IN the County Siganfu, near the City Linchang, is the Mountain Limon, on 
Mountains in the Province of Xensi.  which is a Spring of Water, clear as Crystal, and of a strange quality, for though it hath not above five Foot Water in depth, yet it is extreme cold above, and at the bottom, so hot, that it is not to be endured.  
Near the City Lantien, is the Mountain Io, out of which they dig a kind of Earth, which is used in the Dying of Clothes: Hard by, on a steep Mountain called Ciepuon, stands a Fort, for the securing of the Highway.  
Not far from the City Nucung, is the Mountain Taipe, which, by the Chinese Astrologers, is accounted The eleventh Mansion of Happiness. They say, that beating on a Drum on this Mountain, causes Thunder, Lightning, and Tempestuous Wether; wherefore all Persons are strictly Commanded not to touch a Drum near the same.  
Near the City Xunghoa, is the Mountain Kanciven, so called from a Brook of exceeding sweet Water, which springs on the top thereof; where there is also a stately Garden and Banqueting-house.  
In the County Fungciangfu, near the City Khi, is a very high Mountain, called Nan, which extends from thence into the County Siganfu, to the Cities Lantien and Hu.  
On the North-East of the City Paoki, is the Mountain Chincang, whose top seems to represent a Turkey-cock: They said, that Thunder or turbulent Wether is foretold by a great noise, which is heard above thirty Furlongs off in the Valleys adjoining to it.  
At the same place is the Mountain Xecu, so called from ten Stone Drums, placed there by King Siven, that his Hunters might give a signal of Chase one to another.  
On the East side the City Mui, is the Mountain Taipe, whose exceeding high tops are in the midst of Summer covered with Snow.  
Not far from thence lies a Mountain called Quan, Fortified with a brave Castle, for a safeguard of the County: Here Falcons, and other such like Birds for the Game, are frequently caught.  
In the County Hangcheufu, near the City Sihiang, begins the Mountain Tapa; and runs from thence into the Province of Suchuen, to the City Pa.  
By the City Loyang, is the Mountain Yoniu; so called from the Effigies of a most Beautiful Maiden of Stone said to have grown Naturally in that place.  
Near the City Siyang, is a very scraggy and steep Mountain, called Cuking.  
By the City Fung, is also a Mountain named Cuye, having in it seventy two Caverns; near which stands the Mountain Nanki which hath a great Lake upon it: Not far from thence is the Mountain Vutu, out of which they dig a Plant called Hiunghoang, good to expel Poison and all Pestilential Virulency.  
In the County Pingleangfu, on the East side of the City Cingyven, is the Mountain Yo; on which are found Pebbles emulating Diamonds for clearness.  
Near the City Hiating is a Valley of thirty Furlongs in length, but so deep and narrow, that it hath little Light; yet nevertheless, a Highway paved with Freestone leads through it.  
In the County Cungchangfu, on the North-West side of the City Hoeicin, is a very great and high Mountain, named Sivi, from the Snow with which it is continually covered.  
Northward from the City Fokiang, is the Mountain called Xecu, that is, Stone-Drum, because (as the Chineses write) this Mountain by making of a noise, foretells War.  
By the City Ching, is the Mountain Loyo; at the top whereof stands a great Image of a Lion, out of whose Mouth runs a Spring.  
There is also the Mountain Cheuchi, which extends to the Jurisdiction of the City Siho, and on its top hath a Plain of about twenty Furlongs.  
In the Southeast from the City Cin, is the Mountain Pochung, on which grows an Herb called Hoako, which eaten causeth Barrenness: There are many other Mountains in this County which are not remarkable.  
IN the Territory Linyaofu, near the City Lan, Northward, is the Mountain 
Mountains in the Territory Linyafu.  Kaolan, which makes an Arch about the City like a Stage, and gives a pleasant Prospect over all the adjacent Countries: Near it is the Mountain Pexe, whereon, they say, the Valiant General Leanghoei, Besieged by the Tartars, made Offerings to obtain Water for his Forces; whereupon, immediately a Spring appeared.  
Near the City Ho is the Mountain Ciexie, with two spiring tops, between which, as through a Gate, runs the Yellow River.  
Beyond the City Lan, is a pleasant Valley named Thou, which being Watered by the Yao, a Branch of the Yellow River, inricheth the Grounds and Meadows thereabout.  
In the County Kingyangfu, Northward from the chief City Kingyang, is the Mountain Taipe; in the middle of which is the Spring of the Stream Herald  
By the City Hoan, is the Mountain Ulum, Fortified with a Castle for defence of the County.  
Near the City Chinning is the Mountain Lo, whereon stood twenty seven Images, which, the Chineses affirm, grew there naturally, and were not made by Art.  
In the County jenganfu, North-East from the City jengan, is the Mountain called Chingleang.  
IN the Territory Cinanfu, near the City Changkieu, lies the Mountain Hoang, 
Mountains in the Province of Xantung.  which spreads from thence to the City Cichuen, and runs through the Jurisdiction of the City Ceuping.  
By the City Changxan, begins the Mountain Changpe, and extends to the City Cenping; on the top whereof stands a very noted Chapel.  
Near the City Taigan, is a great Mountain called Tai, accounted forty Furlongs high; it is full of Caverns and very deep Precipices; there are built upon it many Pagod Temples, and endowed Cloisters of Priests.  
Near the City Laiu, is a Mountain named Tax; out of which they dig Iron.  
In the County Yencheufu, near the City Kioheu, is the Mountain Fang, famous for the Tombs of the Ancient Philosopher Kungfuti's Parents.  
Hang, is a Hill near the City Nungyang; so called, from the abundance of Armenian Plums which grow on the same.  
By the City Cou, is the Mountain Chaugping; on which, some say, Kungni was Born, in a City of the same name; whereof, the Ruins are yet to be seen.  
By the City je, is the Mountain je, Crowned with divers Villages.  
Near the City Tunping, a Mountain named Fung is so interlaced with Woods and Fields, that it makes a most delightful Landscape: The Chineses compare it to Damask Silk.  
In the County Tungchangfu, not far from the City Kaotang, lies a Mountain called Minx, which signifies A Sounding Stone; for that on the top of this Mountain stands a very high Pillar, which, on the least touch with the Finger, makes a noise like a Drum.  
In the County Chingcheufu, near the City Choosing, lies a great Mountain called Langsie, which extends East from thence to the Sea: On it are many Villages built, the first when the Emperor Xi Encamped thereabout with thirty thousand Men.  
By the City Yxui is the Mountain Tapien, having a flat top of ninety Furlongs.  
In the Territory Tencheufu, Northward from the chief City Tengcheu, lies the Mountain Tengheng; noted for the Defeat which Hansiu gave to King Si.  
By the City Foxan is the Mountain Chifeu, which with a Promontory runs into the Sea: There is also another Mountain called Chevy, from whence a round Stone runs into the Sea; which by the Chinese is called Cheu, that signifies Pearls.  
In the County Laicheufu lies the Mountain Hoang, so called from a certain Virgin who had here a Temple Consecrated to Her: On the Shore, near the City Siene, is the Mountain Lao.  
WIthin the Walls of the City Kaifung, is a Hill called Y, full of Gardens and 
Mountains in the Province of Honan.  stately Palaces.  
Near the City Siangching, is the Mountain Xeu, being in great Veneration among the Chinese, for its Fortunate shape and position, and is the first mentioned in the Books of Tiungxu, which Treats of that kind of Divination which they deduce from the observation of the Mountains.  
By the City Siuching, is the Mountain Kicu, in which is a stately Grotto, made by the Emperor Hoangti, for his Summer's Recess.  
North-West from the City Cuckoe, is the Mountain Cuckoe, on which King Si, having hid much Treasure, afterwards put to Death all those that were privy to the burying thereof, that so he might keep it secret: Nevertheless, his Son, though then very young, taking notice of the Action, when he came to the Crown, caused all the Gold to be taken up.  
In the County Gueichoeifu, near the City King, lies the Mountain Cinivien, out of which runs a Brook, whose Water both washeses and shaves at once, that is, when applied, makes bare all Hairy parts of the Body.  
In the Territory Hoaikingfu, Northward from the chief City Hoaiking is the Mountain Tai, which in former Ages Vomiting Fire, rend asunder, making a Gap of thirty Rods, from whence flows now a slimy unctuous Water, serving for many uses in stead of Oil, and being not unpleasing to the Taste.  
Towards the South-West is a double Mountain, called Iquan; between which, as through a Gate, the River In hath its Course.  
About the City Hiang, towards the South, lies the Mountain King, out of which the Emperor Hoangti is Recorded to have all the Copper which he used, both for his Weapons of War, and his Household Utensils.  
In the County Nanyangfu, on the North side of the chief City Nanyang, is the Mountain Thou, on which thirty six Pearls are constantly found, never either more or less.  
About the City Niuhang, towards the North-East, begins the Mountain Taipe, and extends Southeast to the City Chechuen: There lies also the Mountain Tienchi, and upon it a Lake, whose Water is held for a great Cordial.  
In the County junningfu, is the Mountain Tienchung, which they call, The Centre of the World.  
By the City Simang, is a very high and pleasant Mountain, whose top, if covered with a Cloud, the Chineses immediately after expect Rain; like the Table-Mountain at the Cape of Good Hope, and the Wrekin in Shropshire.  
The other Mountains of this Province are in the County of Changtifu; by Tangin, the Hill Simeu, out of which runs the River Tangle: West of the City Lin, the steep Mountain Yang.  
In the Territory Hoaikinfu, North of the City Liyven, the Wooddy Mountain Voangae.  
In the County Hananfu, near the City Hanan, the great Mountain Pemang.  
In the County Nanyangfu, South of the City Quanxan, the Mountain Hue.  
In the County of In, near the City Luxa, a Mountain of the same name.  
IN the Province of Suchuen, Westward from the City Quan, begins the Mountain 
Mountains in the Province of Suchuen.  Cinching, spreading above a thousand Furlongs, and hath the fifth place of Esteem among the Chinese, who hold, that those which they call Xensiens, or Immortal People, meet often there.  
By the City 'Gan, towards the East, lies the Mountain Lunggan, Crowned with pleasant Woods and Fountains: There are also the Ruins of a Palace, built by the Kings of Cho.  
Near the City Chungking, is the Mountain called Toyung, swarming with Apes and Monkeys.  
Not far from the City Xefang, towards the North, is a Mountain called Tafung, whose Head pierces the Clouds, and sends forth from the top a River, which running down very steep, makes a great noise in the fall; from the top of this being reckoned sixty Furlongs Perpendicular, you may take a Prospect over all the other Mountains, and see the City Chingtu; it extends from the utmost Western Borders of the Province of Suchuen, to Prester John's Country, or Sifan; and in a continued Ridge, reaches to the City Guei: Out of these Mountains the great River Kiang takes its first Original.  
By the City Cangki, towards the North, is the Mountain juntai, which for its height, is called The Throne of Clouds.  
Near the City Pa, lies to the North-East the Mountain In, out of which, (though craggy and difficult to ascend) Precious Stones are digged.  
Not far from thence▪ towards the West, lies the Mountain Pingleang, on whose top is a delightful Plain, surrounded with other higher Mountains of the County.  
By the City Sike, lies the great Mountain Nannim, which rises aloft with twelve high Spiring Heads, upon nine whereof are Salt-pits.  
In the County Chungkingfu, Northward from the chief City Chungking, on the Shore of the River Feu, is a Mountain, which for its shape is much Idolised by the Chinese, by reason it represents (at least they imagine so) the Idol called Fe, who is Figured sitting with his Legs a cross, and his Hands on his Bosom a cross: This Mountain-Image, which whether Natural or made by Art, the Chineses themselves have not under Record, may be judged by his Eyes, Nose, Mouth, and Ears, which are seen at half a Mile distance: A more particular Description is given by Athanasius Kircher, in his Atlas Chinensis.  
Near the City Ho, towards the South, lies the Mountain Lungmuen, on which stood formerly a Pagod Chappel, with a Library of thirty thousand Books, called Siyali; first built by a Nobleman of that name.  
By the City Fungtu, is the Mountain Pungtu, accounted amongst the seventy two Mountains; so highly extolled in the Book of Taosu.  
Near the City Penxui, is the Mountain Fonien; on which are many Salt-pits.  
In the County Queicheufu, Northward from the chief City Queicheu, is a Mountain named Chekia, on which are seen the Ruins of a Palace, once the Residence of the Kings of Sufo.  
Northward, beyond the City Van, lies the Mountain Tulie, which reaches so high into the Clouds, that no Bird can fly over it.  
On the Mountain Si, which lies Westward from the City Van, is yet a pleasant Garden of the Family Sung, with a Lake, pleasant Groves, and many Fruit-Trees.  
On the Mountain Tunghoa, lies the City Ta.  
Near the City Leangxan, is the Mountain Kaoleang, which extends a thousand Furlongs East and West.  
The Mountain Xehiang, in the same County, is so called from its abundance of Musk.  
In the Territory Lungganfu, Northward from the chief City Lunggan, lies the Mountain Cungtung; which from thence in a continued Ridge runs towards the Countries of Sifan, or Prester John's Country, and to the Damasian Mountains. Towards the Southeast, lies the Mountain Xemuen, a Boundary between Sifan and China.  
In the County Mahufu, Westward from the City Mahu, is the Mountain King, which signifies A Looking-Glass, so called from the Crystal Fountain which springs from its Foot.  
Southeast of the City Liucheu, is the Mountain Pao, on which the Air is of such a Nature, that those that have Agues upon them, going thither, are immediately cured thereof.  
In the little County of Yacheu, near the City Mingxan, lies a Mountain named Mung, which rises with five Spires; on the highest of which is much Manna, by the Chineses called Pinglu, that is, Frozen Dew.  
By the City Pinchai, is the Mountain Pecui, on which, if Snow melts in the Winter, the Chineses have observed, a fruitful Year will follow, if not, the contrary.  
Not far from the Garrison'd-City Kienchung, lies the Mountain Tiexe, so called from its abundance of Iron Oar.  
The other Mountains of less note in the Province of Suchien are; In the Territory Kingtufu, South of the City Kingtu, the Mountain Seeking: By the City Mien, the Mountain Tienchi: In the County Paoningfu, East of the City Paoning, the Woody Mountains Paon and Menyping: In the County Xungkingfu, West of the City Xungking, the Mountain Co: In the County Sieucheufu, South from the City Sieucheu, the Mountain Xeching: By the City Kingfu, the Mountain Hanyang: South of the City Tiucum, upon the River Kiang, the Mountain Lingyven: About the City Riexan, the far-stretching Mountain Chungpoe: West of the City Han, in the County Queicheufu, a high and steep Mountain: On the Shore of the River Kiang, the Mountain Co: West of the City Chuniking, the Wooddy Mountain Cyvyun: In the County Lungganfu, the Mountain Talo: In the County of Ziencheves, North of the City Chungkiang, the Mountain Tunquon, wherein are Copper Mines: Near the City Lochi, the pleasant Mountain Ciepion: In the County of Muichen, the Mountain Gomui, and part of the Mountain Min: West of the City Muichen, the Mountain Peeping, shining like a Torch in the Night: North of the City Kiatung, the Mountain Mienkiang: Near the City jung, a high Mountain of the same name: South-West of the City Liuchen, the double-pointed Mountain Fiang: By the City junking, the Mountain Cunglai, on which Ice is found in midst of Summer: On the shore of the River Kinxa, a Mountain of a hundred Furlongs: By the City Ufa, the Mountains Tain and Umueu: Near the City Chinchiun, the Mountain Utung: Near the City Ly, the Woody Mountain juliang.  
IN the Province of Huquang, in the County Vuchangfu, Southeast from the 
Mountains in the Province of Huquang.  chief City Vuchang, is the Mountain Tayvon, which hath Golden coloured Stones and Earth.  
Southward from the little City Vuchang, is a Mountain of the same denomination, on which they say, in the time of the Family of Cin, a Man appeared all Hairy, and ten Cubits high.  
North-East, near the City Kiayu, on the shore of the River Kiang, a Mountain named Chepie, is remarkable for the overthrow which Caocao gave to Chevyu.  
Southward by the City Kungyang, a Ridge of Hills extends two hundred Furlongs over a great Cave.  
Southward from the City Hinque, lies the Mountain Chung, having on it a Lake with Water as black as Ink.  
Southward from the City Tungxan, is the Mountain Kienyvon, that is, Of nine Palaces, so called from the nine Apartments, built on the same by the Sons of King Cyngan, for places of Retirement to Study in.  
In the County Hanyangfu, South West of the City Hanyang, lies the Mountain Kieuchin, or, Of nine Maids; so called from nine Sisters that lived and died Virgins there, and studied Chemistry.  
In the County Siangyangfu, Southward from the City Kiun, is a great Mountain called Vutang, which with a great number of Spring-heads, rises up to the Sky; upon it are twenty four Lakes or Pools; there are also many stately Temples with Cloisters, the Residences of Priests.  
Eastward from the City Ingxan, is the Mountain Tungting, with a great Cave of incredible depth: Not far from it, to the South, is a Mountain named Kie, on which the Ruins of the ancient City Kieyang are to be seen.  
Westward from the City Hoangmui, is the Mountain Sucu, Crowned with a Chapel which is Consecrated to four Chinese, who were in high Veneration for their skill in Physic, and also a stately Tower with nine Galleries.  
In the County Kincheufu, Southward from the City Changyang, is the Mountain Fang, which is said to be of such a Nature, that in Spring and Harvest not the least breath of Wind can be perceived thereon, but in the Summer continual Blasts blow strongly out of its Caverns, as in Winter they blow into them.  
Westward near the City Sungki, begins the Mountain Kieucang, which extends to the River Kiang, and with a double row of continued Rocks, encloses the same, and makes the way between to be long and dangerous.  
Southward from the City Quei, lies the Mountain Cutai, which is Crowned with a Palace of the old Emperors.  
In the County Yocheufu, on the South side of the chief City Yocheu, is the Mountain Pavo, famous for a stately Temple and Cloister, situate between two Lakes.  
In the Lake Tungting, at the South-West part of the City Yucheu, the Mountain Kiun makes an Island; at the Southeast end of the City the Mountain Uxe produces littles Stones, which by the Physicians, amongst other Medicines, are given for sore Throats.  
By the City Linsiang the great Mountain Tayang shoots up with seventy Spiry Heads; and another Westward from the City Hoayang named Tung, that is a hundred Furlongs, full of Pine-Trees: There is likewise the Mountain Fangtai.  
Eastward from the City Pingkiang lies the Mountain Tiengo, five hundred Furlongs in circumference, and is in the Book of Tausu accounted the twenty fifth amongst the famousest Mountains; and is likewise famous amongst the Chinese Physicians for the producing of many Physical Herbs.  
By the City Gaukiang, towards the South, is the Mountain Hoang, that is, Yellow, for the Earth and Stones about it are of a yellow colour; wherefore it is called also Kinhoa, that is, Golden Flower.  
In the County Changxafu, Westward from the City Changxa, lies the Mountain jamo, so called from the Muscovy Glass which is digged out of it in great abundance.  
Westward from the City Ninghiang, towards the South-West, lies the biggest Mountain Taihiu, which rises with three Spires; the middlemost whereof hath on the top of it a great and fathomless Lake.  
There is likewise the Mountain Xepi, and upon it a Lake of forty Furlongs called Pexa; out of which flow four Rivulets, the one named Lieu; the rest glide towards the Stream juping.  
At the same place is the Mountain Tungyang, the third in order amongst the famous Mountains, described in the Book of Tausu.  
By the City Xeu lies the Mountain Sucung, which hath a Spring of hot Water, and thirty six rising Piques, besides many other large Mountains.  
In the County Paokingfu, East from the chief City Paoking, the Mountain Lung riseth with four Spires, which are of such an equal height, that they seem every where to be one entire Head; in the middle of them is a Lake, out of which run two Rivulets, the one named Lain, which glides to the City Siangkiang, and the other the Chaos.  
In the Jurisdiction of the City Vuchang, Easterly, lies the Mountain Changmo; which extending a great way, and having very inaccessible Ways, is inhabited by wild People, which are not under the Dominion of the Chinese, but live safe and secure amongst themselves.  
In the County Hengcheufu, Westward from the chif City Hengcheu, appears the Mountain Taceu, where (according to the Chinese Writers) Silver Mines have been opened in former Ages.  
By the City Hengcan begins the Mountain Heng, which extends eighty Furlongs, with seventy two Spiry Hillocks, ten great Valleys, thirty eight Springs, and twenty five Brooks.  
By the City Queiyang is the Mountain Xejen, sometime called The Stone-Swallow, because after Rain Stones are found upon it, exactly resembling Swallows, which Physicians by their several colours distinguish into Males and Females, and use them in Physic.  
The Mountain Hoayn, pleasant to the Eye, and for its fair Prospect called The Flower, rises up in the Jurisdiction of the Cities Linuu and Lanxan.  
By the City Taoyven, towards the West, lies the Mountain Lolo, the forty seond in order in the Book of Tausu.  
On the North-West side of the City Changte, over a great Valley called Lungmuen, a Bridge leads from one Hill to another; under which is a Rivulet.  
In the County Xincheufu, North-West from the City Xincheu, is the Mountain Tayeu, the twenty sixth in order in the Books of Tansu.  
There is also the Mountain Siaoye, whereon a thousand Books were found, which they say were hid there in the time when the Emperor Xi commanded all the Books in China to be burnt.  
By the City Kivyang is the Mountain Locung, on which, they say, breeds a Bird that never Sings but before Rain; upon it is a Lake which takes up the compass of about a thousand Acres.  
In the County jungcheufu, Westward from the City jungcheu, is the Mountain Kiungyo, observable for the abundance of brave Cypress▪ Trees which grow on it.  
In the Territory Chingtien, near the City Kingmuen, is a Mountain of the same Name, which formerly served for a Wall and Boundary between the Northern Provinces and the Kingdom of Cu.  
By the City Tangyung lies the Mountain Cucai, the thirtieth in order in the Book of Tansu; upon it are Trees and Stones of a red colour, and a Rivulet of sweet-smelling Water.  
In the County Chingyangfu, North-West from the City Chingyang, is the Mountain Tiensin, which hath a plain of a hundred Furlongs on its top, which is surrounded with other rising Hillocks in stead of Walls. The Physicians highly esteem this Mountain for the abundance of sovereign Herbs which they have from it.  
By the City Chinxan is the Mountain Canglo; on which (they say) a Countryman for several years gathering Chestnuts against an approaching Famine which he foresaw, thereby preserved himself and his Neighbours from perishing with Hunger.  
Not far from thence is the Mountain Nuiqua, so called from a Woman so named, whom the Chineses adore as a Goddess, for some great and public Action done by her in her Life-time.  
Southward from the City Tungtao begins the Mountain Fecu, and serves for a Boundary between the Province of Huquang and that of Queicheu.  
To these may be added in the Territory Hangcheufu, North of the City Hoangcheu, the Mountain Pui; North of the City Machin, the woody Mountain Molin; near the City Ling, the large spreading Mountain Vanyang; in the Territory Changtefu, West of the City Changte, the Mountain Lo; by the City Tangle, the high Mountain Suvang; in the County Chincheufu, South of the City Chincheu, the Mountain Hoanycung; by the City junghing, the high and steep Mountain Pipa; North of the City Songing, the high and cold Mountain Keling; South of the City Nanquei, the fruitful and pleasant high Mountain Tuting; and some others.  
EAstward by the City Funghing lies the Mountain Xifung, the thirty ninth 
Mountains in the Province of Kiangsi▪  in the Books of Tansu.  
In the County jaocheufu, Eastward from the City jaocheu, is the Mountain Macie, the fifty second in the Book of Tansu.  
By the City Yukan lies the Mountain Xehung, that is, Stone Rainbow, because the Water falling from the same represents a Rainbow.  
In the County Quangsinfu, Northward from the City▪ Quangsin, the woody Mountain Ling, the thirty second in order in the Book of Tausu, produces great variety of Flowers and Herbs, and also excellent Crystal.  
By the City Yeyang the Mountain Paofung hath on its Summitie a Stone-House built, which pierceth into the Clouds.  
Southward from the City Queili the Siang, a high and broad Mountain, distinguished by the many Meadows, Woods and Villages which are upon it, affords a delightful Prospect.  
Westward lies the Mountain Lunghu, the thirty second in order in the Book of Tausu; it rises with two Spiry Tops, which because they seem to oppress one another, the uppermost of them is called Lung, that is, Dragon; and the unmost Hu, that is, Tiger.  
In the County Nankanfu, North-West from the City Nankan, the Mountain Quangliu, the ninth in order in the Book of Tausu, spreads itself five hundred Furlongs, and is inhabited by many Orders of Religious Persons in their Way.  
By the City Tuchang lies the Mountain juenxin, the fifty second in order amongst the famous Mountains described in the Books of Tausu; and more Northerly the Hill Xepie.  
Northward from the City Tegan is the Mountain Quenlun, on which is a Stone of that bigness, that a hundred Men may with ease lie on the same, without touching one another.  
Northward from the City Hukeu lies the Mountain Yechung, that is, Stone-Clock; for the Water of the Lake being driven by the Wind against this Mountain, makes a noise like a Bell.  
On the Shore of the River Kiang, by the same City, the Mountain Matang is noted for the many Ships that have been lost on the same; for if any Vessel chance to go never so little from the Shore, the Current being so exceeding strong, drives them against the Rocks, and splits them in pieces.  
In the County Kienchangfu, Westward from the chief City Kienchang, the Mountain Masu, the thirty sixth in order in the Books of Tausu, extends four hundred Furlongs.  
By the City Quanchang the Mountain Chunghoa divides itself at the top into several Hillocks, whereof all are barren, except one, which being green, and full of Trees, is crowned with a Temple.  
In the County Vucheufu, Northward from the City Vucheu, is the Mountain Sangkiu; on which (they say) is a strange Image, in the shape of a Man, which according to the several variations of the Air changes its colour; so that the neighbouring People know certainly by it what Wether they shall have.  
In the County Linkiangfu, on the North side of the City Linkiang, is the Mountain Comao, the thirty third in order in the Books of Tausu. Many Omens of good fortune the Chineses fancy to themselves in this Mountain.  
By the City Sinkin is the Mountain josu, the seventeenth in order in the Books of Tausu.  
In the Teritory Xuicheufu, on the East side of the City Xuicheu, is the Mountain Tayu; in the midst of which is a pleasant Grove and a stately Chapel.  
By the City Xangcau lies the Mountain Lungfung; on which, a day after Rain, there appears a great Flame of Fire in the Night, but never in dry Seasons. The People thereabouts, being much inclined to Superstition, say that this Flame is the Spirit of the Mountains, and for that reason have built a fair Chapel on the South side of the City Sinchang, and Consecrated it to Fire.  
In the County juencheufu, on the South side of the City juencheu, lies the Mountain Niang, so called because it is only visible, but not accessible, by reason of its dangerous Cliffs, which seem to fall every Minute; it is three hundred Furlongs in circumference, and produces a Spring, whose Water is so exceeding cold all the whole year, that it cannot be drunk till it hath stood a considerable time in the Sun.  
In the County of Kancheusu, on the East side of the City Kancheu, is the Mountain Tiencho, on which, in the Night, appears a Light like that of kindled Coals. There are some which suppose it to be Serpents, which (as they say) vomit forth Precious Stones, (whereof they wear one on their Heads) and swallow up the rest again.  
Near the City Ningtu lies the Mountain Kincing, the thirty third in order in the Books of Tausu.  
The Chineses fancy that the neighbouring Hills are peopled with Satyrs, and other strange Monsters in the shape of Men.  
In the County Nanganfu, on the West side of the City Nangan, is the Mountain Sihoa, that is, Western Flower; for Simo signifies Western, and Hoa, Flower.  
There are also in this Province, by the City jaoicheu, on the Lake Poyang, the Mountain Cienfo; by the City Yukaw, the Mountain Hungyai; in the County Kieukiangfu, Southeast of the City Kieukiang, the Mountain Taku; on an Isle of the same Name, in the Lake Poyang, East of the City Tegan, the Mountain Poye; by the City Pengie, in the Lake Poyang, the inaccessible Mountain Siaofu; near the City Kinki, the far-stretched Mountain junglin, having thirty six Tops; in the County Kieganfu, by the City Ganfo, the Mountain Uncung, in circuit eight hundred Furlongs; by the City Sinfung, the large Mountain Hiang, producing Medicinal Drugs, and several others, of which there is nothing remarkable to mention.  
IN the County Kiangningfu, South West from the City Kivyung, lies the 
Mountains ●…in the Province of Nanking.  Mountain Mao, which in the Books of Tausu is accounted the first for Pleasure and Happiness.  
North-East from the chief City Nanking, the Mountain No bears on its Head a Temple, wherein are placed a thousand Images.  
Towards the Southeast from the City Nanking is the Fang, a Mountain only remarkable, because on the Commands of the Emperor Xi it was by five thousand Men digged through, to prevent (as he thought) the Prediction which the Mountain-gazers gave out from their observation of this Mountain, concerning the subversion of his Empire.  
On the South-West side of the City Nanking, the Mountain San juts into the River Kiang, and towards the River side hath divers Iron Chains fastened to it, not (as the Chineses ridiculously affirm) because it should not run away, but that the Ships may take the better hold with their Hooks; otherwise this Mountain being of very hard Stone, the Vessels must needs strike against it.  
In the County Fungyangfu, near the City Linhoa, lies the Mountain junonu, so called from the abundance of a sort of Mineral, which we commonly call Muscovy Glass, digged out of the same.  
Near the City Xeu lies the Mountain Cukin, whereon in former Ages a great piece of Gold being found, and proving good against many Distempers, the Chineses say that it was made by the art of Chemistry.  
By the City Hutai lies the Mountain Moyang, or Shepherds-Hill, so called from a fair Virgin who kept Sheep on the same.  
In the Territory Sucheufu, at the South-West side of the City Sucheu, near the Lake Tai, lies the Mountain Liguien, remarkable for the many fair Buildings which crown the same.  
By the Lake Tai the Mountain Siu is coronetted with a stately Chapel and Cloister.  
Within the City Changxo the Mountain Thou extends to the West several Furlongs.  
In the County Sungkiangfu, on the Southeast side of the City Sungkiang, on the Shore of the River, is the Kin, only remarkable in this County; upon it stands a great Fort, and at the Foot thereof a considerable number of Ships for the securing of the Havens thereabouts.  
In the County Changcheufu, by the City Vusie, is the Si, a Mountain out of which they dig Tin.  
In the Territory Chinkiangfu, on the North-West side of the City Chinkiang, lies the Mountain Kin, which makes an Isle in the River Kiang; upon it are several fair Temples and Cloisters for Priests: There also springs out of it a Brook called Chungleang, whose Water is much esteemed amongst the Chinese; so that it is exceeding pleasant both by Art and Nature.  
In the Territory Hoaiganfu lies the Yocheu, in the Sea near the City Hai, a Mountain very remarkable for a most stately Chapel and Cloister, to which many People from all Parts in China come to make Offerings.  
By the City Lukiang in the County of Lucheufu, the Mountain Taifu hath many pleasant Groves and delightful Ascents.  
By the City Sosung lies the Mountain Siaoku, with two high Spiry Tops, between which being a Valley runs the River Kiang: on one of the Spires is a great Chapel and Cloister.  
Southward from the City Chicheu lies the Mountain Kieuhoa, that is, Nine Spires and the Flower, for it consists of so many Hills, and appears hanging down like a Flower.  
In the County Hoeicheufu, on the West side of the City Hoeicheu, is the Mountain Hoang, the greatest in the whole County; it reckons twenty four Brooks, thirty two high Tops, and eighteen obscure Valleys.  
In the little Territory of the City Quangte, near the Towns Quangté and Kienping, lie several great and pleasant Mountains; the most famous of which are the Hang and Ling: the first whereof, lying on the West side of the City Quangte, pierces the Clouds, yet nevertheless hath a Spring on the top thereof, which overflows continually.  
The Mountain Ling, not inferior to the others in height, hath also a steep and craggy Ascent, and at the top is fifteen Furlongs in circumference. Near it, at the entrance of a Passage, stands the Image of a Priest, who (as they say) was thus transformed.  
Besides these above mentioned, there are in this Province, by the City jungchiung in the County Gunkinfu, the steep and cavernous Mountain Feu; Southeast of the City Taiping, the Mountain Tienmen; within the Walls of Ning, the pleasant Hill Lingyang; by the City Tung in the Territory Chicheufu, the Mountain Hang, very rich in Fruit-Trees, especially the Armenian Plum; by the City Hicuning, the Mountain King, a hundred Rods high; with some others which have not been thought worthy to be named.  
IN the Territory Hangcheufu in the Province of Chekiang, on the South side 
Mountains in the Province of Chekiang.  of the City Hangcheu, the Mountain Funghoang divides itself upwards into exceeding high Spiry Heads; yet on each of them is a Steepled Chapel with nine Galleries.  
On the Eastern Shore of the Lake Si, near the City Hangcheu, the Mountain Xeceng lifts up a Temple with a Turret, and about it nine Galleries.  
By the City Lingan begins the great and steep Mountain Tienmo, extending above eight hundred Furlongs, and the thirty fourth in order in the Books of Tausu; it overlooks most pleasant Woods, and Fields of Rice, and hath growing upon it great store of rare Mushrooms, which, being Pickled, are from thence sent through all China. Tienmo signifies Eye of Heaven, because this Mountain on two several Precipices hath two Lakes, which the Chineses call Eyes, with which it looks up to Heaven.  
By the City Chung hoa the Mountain Cienking hath upon it a Lake which possesseth the space of two hundred Acres, very remarkable for yellow Fish, by the Chineses called Kinyu, that breed therein.  
The Tiencho, a Mountain which lies South-West from the City Hangcheu, is partly very craggy, and partly pleasant and delightful; it hath one top called Filaifung, all of hard Rocky Stones, and within full of Holes or Caves; upon it also are several fair Temples and Cloisters, to which (they say) above three thousand Priests belong, most of them betaking themselves to a most solitary Life, and choosing to dwell in those dark Caves, out of which not being able to get without the assistance of some from without, they are upon occasion drawn up by Ropes; after which manner they receive Alms from those that pass by, which sometimes amounts to no small value; for this Place is all the year long (especially in May) frequented both by Strangers and Natives. Tilaifung signifies To come flying; which Denomination it received from an Indian Priest, who so soon as he saw this Mountain said, This is the Hill which we miss out of India, certainly it is flown hither.  
The County Kiahingfu is for the most part Champain, having only one Mountain or Hill named Utai, on the North-West side of the City Kiahing in the Lake Tiensing, which affords the City a Moat; upon it are five pleasant Gardens and Banquetting-houses, built by Persons of Quality for Places of Recreation; from whence also the Hill hath received its Denomination, for Utai signifies Five Altars.  
To the North side of the City Niencheu in the Territory Niencheufu, lies the Mountain Ulum, which in a manner surrounds the City; it upholds two Lakes, one of which, though not far distant from the other, hath clear, and the other muddy Water.  
The Mountain Tuichung rises out of the Valley Kieuli, through which flows a little River; upon it are the Chapels and Gardens of the famous Philosopher Nienculin, to whom those that Travel that way pay their Visits, in commemoration of so eminent a Person. They say that here he made Fishing his chief Recreation when he hid himself from the Emperor, because he would not accept of the prime Place in the Government, which was so far urged upon him, that the Emperor himself coming to him, lay with him a whole Night in one Bed, so great an esteem did the greatest of the Chinese Emperor's set upon Learned and Pious Men.  
In the County Kinhoafu, Northward from the City Kinhoa, the Mountain Kinhoa extends itself rhree hundred and sixty Furlongs in circumference, and is the thirty sixth in the Books of Tausu; on which the Chineses say that the Contest was between Venus and Pallas.  
By the City Thou is the Mountain Kiming, the biggest in the whole County, high and difficult to ascend; on the top thereof appears a fair Palace.  
Near the City Pukiang lies Sunhoa, a Mountain whereon (according to the Relation of the Chinese) the ancient Emperor Hoangti's Daughter resided, and devoted herself to Virginity.  
By the City jungkang the Mountain Fangnien is by Stone Steps ascended to the top, where a great Bridge leads cross a Valley.  
In the County Kiucheufu, on the South side of the City Kiucheu, lies the Mountain Lano, the eighth in the Books of Tausu.  
Near the City Kiangxan begins the Mountain Civen, and from thence extends above three hundred Furlongs.  
Through these Mountains a Way runs to the Province of Fokien, though over many Precipices, very troublesome to Travellers; but most of all in the steep and high Mountain Sienhoa, to ascend which are built three hundred and sixty Stone Steps like a pair of winding Stairs: On its highest Top is a fair Temple, and many Inns, or Houses of Entertainment for Travellers.  
In the County Chucheufu, near the City Cinyun, begins the great Mountain Hocang, the thirteenth in order in the Books of Tausu, and spreads itself three hundred Furlongs towards the Sea, and according to the Chinese Geographers is a thousand Rods high, and not subject to Snow, Hail, Thunder, Rain, or any alteration of Wether.  
In the Territory Xaohingfu, on the Southeast side of the City Xaohing, is the Mountain Hoeiki, the eleventh in the Books of Tausu; from whence anciently the Province Hoeiki (which compriseth the Eastern Countries) had its Denomination.  
The Mountain Suming, the ninth in order amongst the most famous in the Book of Tausu, rises with two hundred Spiry Heads, hath eight thousand Rods in height, and extends two hundred and eighty Furlongs: it begins about the City Yuyao, and runs South-West to the City Ningpo.  
By the City Xing lies the Mountain Tenchi, the twenty seventh in the Book of Tausu, which hath its Denomination from a Lake whose water is Blood-Red.  
Near the City Sinchan is the Mountain Vocheu, the fifteenth in the Book of Tausu.  
There is also the Mountain Tienlao, the sixteenth in the Book of Taoxu.  
In the County Ningpofu, near the City Cuki, the Mountain Lu. advances to sight a fair Temple, to which the Chineses often resort with Supplications to their Idols, to have their Dreams Interpreted.  
In the Territory Taicheufu, Southward from the City Taicheu, the Mountain Kaicho, the nineteenth in the Book of Taoxu, is remarkable for the Stones thereon, which are all perfectly square.  
By the City Hoangnieu is the Mountain Queiyu, the second in the Book of Taoxu.  
By the City Tientai is the red Mountain Cheching, the sixth in the Book of Taoxu; and near it, by a City of the same Name, the Mountain Tientai, accounted eight thousand Rods high, and eight hundred Furlongs about, the famousest, and first in order amongst all those Mountains described by Taoxu, and, as they say, in happy Auspice: Upon it are many fair Temples and Cloisters.  
More Southwardly in the Sea, is a Mountainous Isle, called Yohoan, which signifies Precious Circle, so named from its convenient Harbour for Ships, being almost hemmed in with Mountains, and subject to no manner of Winds, having only one Gap like a Mouth, for the entrance of Ships.  
By the City Taiping, lies the Mountain Fangching; on which King You lived in a private condition.  
In the County Vencheufu, South-West from the City Vencheu, in the River Lungyeu, lies the Mountain Cuyu, surrounded with Water; yet on the top thereof is a Chapel and Cloister.  
By the City Suigan, is the Mountain Siennien, the twenty sixth in the Books of Taoxu.  
Near Locing, is the Mountain Yentany, on which is a Lake of ten Furlongs, also named Yentang, that is, A Bath for Geese, because the Wild-Geese, which according to the several Seasons of the Year, change their Stations, generally make it one of their resting places.  
ON the North side of the City Fokien, in the County Fokhenfu, in the Province 
Mountains in the Province of Fokien.  of Fokien, begins the high and large Mountain Sieve or Fung, and runs from thence to another County to the Cities Cutieu, Mincing, and Leyven; towards the South side of the Metropolis, lies the Mountain Fang, which hath a Valley of forty Furlongs; and on the neighbouring Hills many Orange, Citron, and Lemon-Trees.  
About the City jungfu, towards the North, a famous and high Mountain, named Kaoca, the seventh in the Books of Taoxu, yields a delightful Prospect by its ancient Woods, and the stately Cloisters built on it.  
In the County Civencheufu, Southward from the City Civencheu, is the Paocai, a Mountain, which on its top hath a Turret with nine Galleries, and serves for a Landmark to Seamen: Eastward lies the Mountain Siaoso.  
In the County Changcheufu, towards the East side of the City Changcheu, is the Cio, a Mountain, on which (according to the Chinese Writers) stands a Stone of five Rods high, that before Rain or Tempestuous Wether, shivers and shakes like a Tree, blown by the Wind: Nearer the City lies another Mountain called Kieulang, which joins to the former, and is remarkable for a Crystal Fountain.  
In the Territory Kienningfu, on the North-East side of the City Kienning, lies the high Mountain Xin; from whose top the Sunrising may be seen over all the other Mountains: There is also the Ciaoyven, the thirteenth in the Books of Tausu.  
But that which exceeds all the other in Fame and Bigness, is the Mountain Vuy, near the City Zunggan, upon it are many Pagods or Cloisters, the Residences for Priests and solitary Persons; amongst which are divers Noblemen, who despising the World, live thus retired to serve their Idols with the greater Zeal.  
By the City Pucing is the Mountain Yuleang, one of the ten greatest in all China.  
Southward from the City jenping, lies the Mountain Yuevang, on which the Kings of Iue used to have many Palaces for Retiring places, from the heat in Summer: more Southerly, are the Mountains Kieusieu and Yeuki.  
In the Territory Zincheufu, is the Mountain Kin, or Gold, so named, from its Gold-mines, which the Family Sung caused to be opened: It lies South from the City Tincheu, near the City Xanhang, on the Eastern shore of the River Ting; it is so pleasant, that it appears like an excellent Landscape; upon it are three little Lakes, which, they say, turn the Iron that is thrown therein, into Copper.  
In the County Hinghoafu, towards the South side of the City Hinghoa, lies the Mountain Hucung; upon which, the Chinese Mountain-Gazers make many Observations: Towards the Southeast from the City, is the Mountain Goching, having a large Village at its Foot.  
There are besides in this Province, in the County jenpingfu, the Mountain Tung, which surrounds the City Sianglo: Through the Borders of Kiangsi, runs the great Mountain Pechang: West of the City jenping, the great Mountain Huon: By the City Singlieu, the high Mountain Tiung: West from the City Ninghoai, the Mountain Lungmien: South of the City Tinquien, the Mountains Leang and Linting: East of the City Tincheu, the Mountain Liensung: Southeast of the City Xaonu, the Mountain Cietai: North from the City Taining, the Mountain Kingoa: A little above the City Foning, the Mountain Lunxen: South of the same City, the high Mountain Hung: On the same side of the same City, the Mountain Nanquin: West of the City Ningte, the Mountain Hoeung: North of the City Foning, the Mountain Lunizen: North-East from the same, the Mountain Talao, having six high Precipices, with several others.  
IN the Province of Quantung, the vast Mountain Talo begins near the City Cingquen; 
Mountains in the Province of Quantung.  from whence it reaches to the Jurisdiction of the City Hoaicie, lying in the Province of Quangsi; upon it dwell a Wild and Savage People, which are not under the Dominion of the Chinese: Within the Walls of the City Canton, lie three Hills, Crowned with stately Buildings; the first called juesieu, the second, Fan; and the third, Gheu.  
By the City Xunte, is the Mountain Lungnien, out of which springs a Fountain as clear as Crystal; it produces also Red Stones, of a strange and wonderful form, with which, the Chineses build their Artificial Mounts.  
Near the City Ungyven, is the Mountain Lichi, and in the middle of it a Lake which proceeds from eight Rivulets, whose Water is good against many Distempers.  
In the County Nanhyungfu, lies the noted Mountain Nuilen, on the top whereof stands a Chapel, Consecrated to the General Chankieuling.  
In the Territory Hoeicheufu, near the City Polo, begins the Mountain Lefeu, one amongst the ten greatest Mountains in the whole Empire: It rises from the joining of the Mountains, Lo and Feu, and extends to the Jurisdiction of the chief City Quancheu, and to the City Cengching: Its height is accounted to be three thousand six hundred Paces, and its Circumference three hundred Furlongs: It hath fifteen steep Hills, and above four hundred seventy two Holes or Caverns: The Chinese Mountain-Gazers look upon it as one of the chief Mountains for Divination.  
By the City Lungchuen, near the City Kieyang, lies the Mountain Cangpu, which extends to the Sea, where on the Shore it ends in a most dreadful Precipice: They say that Flowers and Birds grow and breed on the same, of so strange a kind, as are found in no other places. By this City Kieyang lies a Mountain of the same denomination, divided, as it were, into Arms or Branches; one of which extends to the City Hinning, of the County Hoeicheufu; and the other towards the City Haifung.  
By the City Hoeilay, lies the Mountain Pehoa, so called from the Flowers which continually grow upon it, for it produces several Flowers, according to the season of the Year.  
By the City Chinkiang, are also many great Hills which lie close together, and wherein there are many deep Caverns, but not pried into by the Chinese; for that, as it is said, many going to dig in them, never came out alive, none knowing what became of them, or whither they went.  
In the County Chaokingfu, at the North side of the City Chaoking, lies the Mountain Ting, on which, according to the Writings of the Chinese, stands a Stone two hundred Rods high.  
In the Jurisdiction of the City Suhoci, lies the Mountain Sin, that is, The Mountain of Chastity, so called from a Maid, who vowing Solitude and Chastity, Lived and Died there a Virgin, in pure Devotion to the memory of one, who having been her Lover, and Betrothed to her, was accidentally devoured by a Tiger; her Parents, in vain, endeavouring to force her to Marry some other Person, to avoid which constraint, she fled to this Mountain, on which are two Temples built and Consecrated to her.  
By the City Teking lies the Mountain Koleang, eminent for its producing a sort of Trees, which because of the exceeding hardness of their Wood, are called Iron Trees.  
In the County Kaocheufu, on the East side of the City Kaocheu, is the Mountain Feu, which is of such a height, that this only (as the Chineses say) appeared with its Crown above the Water, in the time of their general Deluge, and that some were preserved alive on the same.  
Near the City Tienpe lies the Mountain Koleang, which is said to be of that quality, that its Inhabitants neither feel excess of heat in the Summer, nor cold in the Winter, but enjoy all the Year long continual Spring.  
By the City Hoa, lies a brave and pleasant Mountain, named Pao, that is, Precious; to which the Inhabitants resort in great companies to Recreate themselves.  
In the Territory Liencheufu, near the North side of the City Liencheu, lies in a private place the great Mountain Uhoang; famous amongst the Chinese, upon a supposition they have, that the Fruit which grows there, is found no where else, and that if any one should presume to carry any away with him (having liberty to Eat as much as he pleases there) he would never find his way out of the Mountain.  
From the City King towards the West, the way through the Mountains is so troublesome to find, that Mayven, a General of the Chineses marching with an Army against the Emperor of Tungking, caused Copper Columes to be set up in the same, that thereby he might find that way out again at his return; to this day one of them may be seen, standing on a steep ascent called Fuenmoa, where the Boundaries are between the Kingdom of Tungkin and China.  
In the County Luicheufu, Southward from the City Luicheu, is the Mountain Kingliu, on which, from a flash of Lightning, sprung a Fountain.  
Another Hill named Tatunglai, near the City Cuiki, on an Isle in the Sea, near the Shore; hath seventy Furlongs in Circumference, and eight Populous Villages, which maintain themselves with fishing for Pearls.  
There are moreover in this Province, in the County Quancheufu, near the City Tunguen, the Mountain Heufu making an Isle in the Sea: Near the same City, the Mountain Tahi, on the Seashore: In the County Hoeucheufu, the Mountain Lofeu, extending from the City Changing, to the City Polo: In the County Xaocheu, near the City Lochang, the Mountain Change: North of the City Nanking, the high and far-spreading Mountain Tecafung: By the City Xihing, the fair and pleasant Mountain Sicung: Near the Moat of the City King, the Mountain Heng: About the City Linxan, the high Hill Loyang.  
THe Province of Quangsi possesses an endless Ridge of barren and unaccessible 
Mountains in the Province of Quangsi.  Mountains.  
In the County Queilufu, towards the North-East of the chief City Queilin, appears the Quei, a Mountain so called, from the abundance of Trees named Quei; these Trees suffer no other to grow near them, nor in the same places where they have stood formerly. The Mountain Tosieu lies also near the City Queilin, and hath a very fine College. More Northward, in the same Tract of Land, lies the Mountain Xin, with three high Precipices; on the top of one of them stands a Palace, so high, that the Chineses affirm it to be in the third or purest Region of the Air, above all the Clouds.  
By the City Hingquan, lies the Mountain Haiyang, which reaches to the City Lingchuen; upon it is a Pool which breeds four Footed Beasts, and Horned Fish, which Monsters, the Chineses believe are to Recreate the Dragon, therefore dare not offer to kill any of them.  
The Mountain Hoa, that is, Flower, so called from its pleasant Prospect, lies on the Shore of the River Quei, near the City Yangso.  
By the City jungfo lies the Mountain Fungcao, that is, Phoenix Nest,; the Chinese affirm, that the Bird Phoenix bred, and made his Nest on the same, and that under the Phoenix Nest, a very Precious and unvaluable Stone hath been found.  
About the City Cyven lies the Mountain Siang, Crowned with a fair Temple and Cloister.  
Northward, beyond the City Queilin, a Ridge of steep Hills runs along with seven rising tops, which exactly represent the shape of The great Bear, wherefore it is called Chiesing, that is, Hill of the seven Stars.  
In the County Lieucheufu, lies Southward from the City Lieucheu, the Mountain Sienie; from whose several observable things, as its deep Caverns, Spiry Point, which like a Pillar of one entire Stone, shoots up in a strait and Perpendicular Line, its Stone Image of a Horse, etc. the Chineses Draw in their Fancy many lucky Omens.  
Northward of the City Siang, rises the Mountain Xintang, which is so high and steep, that it is almost inaccessible; yet on its top hath a pleasant Lake, full of Fish, and surrounded with Trees; whereupon the Chineses, who are very curious to see such things, climb up this Mountain with great labour and trouble; reporting, that for its pleasant Situation, it was formerly frequented by a People, which they say, never Die, and are called Xincien.  
In the County Kingyvenfu, Northward from the City Kingyven, appears the Mountain Y; only remarkable for its standing alone, for whereas others are very high, and extend a vast way, this stands alone like a Pyramid, and therefore eminent amongst the Chinese.  
In the County Pinglofu, at the South-West side of the City Pinglo, begins the Mountain Kai, and extends to the City Lipu; on the East side is the steep and great Mountain jung, which hath nine craggy Hills; on the West side lies the Hill Monica, that is to say, The Crown of Eyes, because it hath two great Stones which appear like two Eyes on its top, so exactly formed by Nature, that scarce any Artist could match them; the Ball of the Eye may easily be distinguished, for round about are two Streaks, one white, and another black, as in our Eyes.  
By the City Fuchuen appears the Mountain Sin, on which by a flash of Lightning eight great Holes were made.  
Not far from the City Ho lies the Mountain Kiue, so called from the abundance of Golden-coloured Apples that grow thereon.  
Southward from the City Sieugin lies a pretty high Hill named To, which is inaccessible one way, but towards the City ascended by Stairs made by Nature.  
In the County Guchenfu, Northward from the City Gucheu, the Mountain Tayun begins near the Metropolis of the County.  
By the City Teng lies a very pleasant Mountain named Nan, from which the Chineses make many strange Observations.  
By the City Yung begins the Mountain Tayung, which reaches to the Jurisdiction of the Cities Pelieu, Hinge, Yolin, and Cin.  
Near the same place is the Mountain Tuki●…o, the twenty second in the Book of Tausu; it hath eight steep Spires and twenty Caverns.  
By the City Yolin lies the Mountain Han, that is, Cold, because it is so exceeding cold, that no Man can live on the same, notwithstanding it lies under a very hot Climate.  
Soutward from the City Pope lies the Mountain Fiyun, remarkable because in the Rocks thereof appear Prints of men's Feet, some four Spans long: The whole Mountain is barren and full of Caverns.  
Northward from the City Pelieu lies the great Mountain Kilieu, which hath many Precipices, and is the twenty second in the Book of Tausu.  
Westward from the City Yung lies the Mountain Ho, that is, Fiery, so called because every Night appears a Fire like a lighted Torch on the same.  
They say that these Lights are little Infects, which we call Glow-worm's, and that they run out of the River upon the Mountain, from whence they give that Light.  
The great Mountain Xepao lies also in this County, hath great Woods of Trees and Indian Canes, and nourishes a multitude of Tigers.  
In the County Chincheufu, at the South side of the City Sincheu, lies the Mountain Pexe, the one and twentieth in the Book of Tausu, and advances its Top called Toucu above the Clouds; on the North side is the Mountain Lungxe, the largest in the whole County, overspread with many pleasant Groves and Cornfields.  
By the City Quei lies the great Mountain Nan, which thrusts up twenty four Spiry Hillocks.  
In the County Nanningfu, on the East side of the City Nanning, rises the the Mountain Heng, so called, because in the middle of the River You or Puon it receives the Water, which with great force is driven by the Stream: The Family Sung caused a Fort to be built on the same for a Defence of the Country.  
There are besides in this Province, North-East of the River Hung, the Mountain Hocio; North of the City Heng, the Florid Mountain Sieulia; East of the City Yunghung, the Mountain Suchung; having Iron Mines; West of the City Naning, the Mountain Moye; in the Territory Taipingfu, near the City Lung, the very high Mountain Cieuling; East of the City Taiping, the Mountain Peyun; not far from thence, the Mountain Gomui; and near it, the Mountain Kin; by the City Co, in the County Sumingfu, near the Rity Hiaxe, the woody Mountain Pelo; in the Territory Chinyanfu, the high and pleasant Mountain jun; in the Garrisoned County Sugenfu, East of the City Sugen, the Mountain Tosieu; by the City Vuyven, the Mountain Kifung, and a little farther the Moye; in the Territory Suchingfu, near the City Suching, the high craggy Mountain Lengyum; by the Cities Fulo, Tukang, and Suling, the Mountains Tanping, Siecung, and Lyfang, and not far thence the Mountain Xipi.  
IN the Territory Queiyangfu, on the East side of the City Queiyang in the Province 
Mountains in the Province of Queicheu.  of Queicheu, lies the Mountain Tengen, signifying Copper Drum, from the sound of a Drum (as the Chineses affirm) that is heard upon it against Rain.  
In the Territory Sunangfu, on the South side of the City Sunang, rises the Vancing; to which there being no Ascent but only one way, the Inhabitants find it a safe place of refuge in time of War. On the South-West side lies the Mountain Lungmuen; by the City Vuchuen, the great Mountain Tanien; on which reside many People unknown to the Chinese.  
In the County Sinyven, near the Moat of the City Ciniven, rises the Mountain Xeping, which signifies Stone Pillar, because an entire Stone is erected there, which, as they say, is a hundred Rods high.  
On the North-West side of the City Sinyven, lies the Mountain Sikiung, on which anciently stood a City, whereof the Ruins yet remain.  
In the Territory Tuchofu, near the City Pinglang, lies the Mountain Kaiyang, fortified with a Castle.  
On the North side of the City Hokiang is the Mountain Ching, to whose top leads only a narrow Footpath, which is guarded by a strong Fort.  
About the City Fuiugning lies the Mountain Hinglang, ascended by Stone Stairs, which are guarded by the Inhabitants to secure the Passage.  
By the City Pincheu lies the Mountain Lotung, which extends twelve hundred Rods, and near the City Cinping piercing the Clouds with its Spiry Top, is called Hianglu.  
In the little County of the City Pugan, on the North-East side thereof, appears the Mountain Puonkiang, which extends to the Kingdom of Gannan and the Fort Ganchoang: On the South-West side is the Mountain Tangpi, out of which they dig Quicksilver and the Mineral Hiunghoang.  
In the little County junningfu, near the City Muy, rises the Hungyai, a very high Mountain, terrible to behold. There is also a Hill named Lincing, overgrown with Indian Canes.  
By the City ting lies the Mountain Quangso, which extending a hundred Furlongs, hath a Fort for the safeguard of the Way.  
In the little County of the City Chinning, near the City Xenk, appears the Mountain Magan, so named from its resembling a Saddle.  
The small Territory of the City Ganxun hath but one Mountain, which lies on the East side thereof, and is called Niencung, which though very high, is not above ten Furlongs in compass.  
In the Garrisoned County Sintienfu, on the North side of the chief City Sintien, is a very high Mountain called Pie, which pierces the Clouds, and runs up like a Pyramid, for which reason it is named Pie, which signifies A Pencil, with which the Chineses Write. On the North side lies the Mountain Yangpo, which for its pleasantness and variety of colours may be resembled to a Picture. The Mountain Caimiao, lies on the North-East side, from which Water falls, whereon the Sunbeams reflecting continually, represent a Rainbow.  
Westward from the Garrison Pingao lies the Mountain Loco, which signifies Hearts▪ horn, so called from the abundance of broken Stones which stick out of the same.  
There are also in this Province, North of the City Queiang, the high craggy Mountain Nannang; In the County Suchenfu, South of Suchen, the inaccessible Mountain Go; West of the same City, the Mountain Tienyung; In the Territory Xecienfu, South of Xecie, the Mountain Pipa; East of the same, the Heu; In the County Tunganfu, East of Tungan, the Mountain Tung; South of the City, the Tungyai; On the Southeast side, the Cloud-piercing Vienpi; On the South-West side, the woody Mountain Pechang; In the County Lipingfu, North of Liping, the Mountain Patung; East of the same City, the pleasant Mountain Kinping, called The Gilded Wall; East of the City Tanki, the high Mountain Tungquen; also the Mountain Taiping, with its rising Top Metien, and square Cavern Tunqui; In the County Putingfu, North-West of Putting, the high craggy Mountain King; and East of the same City, the Magan; East of the chief City of Pinguefu, the Mountain Pie; By the City Yangy, the craggy Mocing; In the County Lungtefu, by the City Pingtu, the high high Mountain junctao; By Taiping, the Rocky Mountain Cohai; East of Picie, the craggy Mountain Mohi; North of the Garrison Cingping, the Mountains Lochung and Cosung.  
IN the County junnanfu, within the Walls of the chief City junnan, is the 
Mountains in the Province of junnan▪  Mountain Uhao, adorned with many Cloisters and Temples, and divers other Buildings.  
Westward from the Lake Tien and the City junnan, lies the far-spreading and high Mountain Kingki; and on the North side of the same City is the Mountain Xang, which produces a Spring with very cold Water, which nevertheless is exceeding good against all manner of pain in the Joints and Limbs.  
In this County also is the Mountain Lo, being high and slender, appears like a Spire, and with the Mountain Kinki, riseth above all the other Mountains in the County. On the North-West side lies the Toyang, full of Cloisters, the Residences of Priests.  
In the County Talifu, on the West side of the City Tali, is the Mountain Tiencang, which extends three hundred Furlongs, and rises up with eighteen high Spiry Heads: Upon it is a very deep Pool.  
By the City Chaos is the Mountain Fungy; where there is also an artificial Mount of Earth; under which two hundred thousand Men belonging to the King of Nanchao lie buried, they being all slain in a Battle against the Chinese, under the Conduct of the General Tangsiengu: After which Victory the Kingdom of Nanchao, which contains all that lies towards the South over the River Gangas, was by the Family of Han subdued.  
By the City Tengchuen, towards the South-West lies the Mountain Kico, famous for many stately Pagods and Cloisters. From this Place the knowledge of the Pagan Religion is thought to have come first to the Chinese.  
On one of the Mountains near the City Chaos, a steep Spiry Hill called Tinsi shoots up a thousand Rods above the Mountain on which it rises: and at the Foot thereof lies a Fort for defence of the Ways. The other Mountains of lesser remark are Xuimo, Chung, Tungi, and Lofeu.  
In the County Linganfu the Mountain Uchung bears on the middlemost of three Spiry Risings the City Omi.  
By the City Ning the Mountain Vansung, so called from the Pine-Trees it bears.  
Near Tunghai is the Hill Siau, which (as the Chineses say) hath a Spring whose Water clears and whitens the Skin of those that drink it, and also makes lean People fat.  
In the Territory Cuhiungfu, on the West side of the City Cuhiung, are the Mountains Minfung and Viki, from the last of which flow above a thousand Brooks, which makes it all over very Flowery and fruitful.  
Northward from Quantung lies the high Mountain Cieupuon, which sinks in the middle, and makes a deep Cavern.  
Near the City Nangan is the Piaolo, full of Silver Mines. The others are Heu, Southward from the City Sinhoa; Minfung, Westward from the City Cuhiungfu; and Umung, Eastward from the City Tingyven.  
In the County Chinkiangfu, on the South side of the City Chinkiang, near the Lake Vusien, the woody Mountain Yokeu thrusts up one Spiry Hillock.  
On the East side of the same City is the Mountain Kinlieu, which at the rising of the Sun glisters like Gold.  
By the City Kiangchuen, towards the South, the Mountai Si sends forth several Rivulets.  
Not far from thence is the Mountains Puon and Quen, in one of which stands a Temple and Cloister, inhabited by Priests.  
In the County Munghoafu, on the Southeast side of the City Munghoa, the Mountain Guaipo over-tops all the other Mountains in the County. On the South-West side lies the Mountain Tunghoang, which is so called from the Chinese Phoenix, which (as they say) died on the same, after having Sung very sweetly a considerable time. On the North side lies the Mountain Tiencul, that is Ear of Heaven, because there is such a perfect Echo on the same, that the Voice, though uttered never so softly, is repeated again.  
In the County Quangnangfu, on the East side of the City Quangnang, is the Mountain Lienhoa, that is, Lien-Flower, because it represents the shape of that Flower.  
Near the City Tai is the Mountain Yocyven, so called from a pure Spring which rises on its top; for Yocyven signifies An excellent Spring.  
In the County Sinyvenfu, on the West side of the City Sinyven, is the Mountain Polung, with many Hills, which running along in a Ridge, rise higher and higher, and appear like swollen Waves of the Sea; wherefore it hath the Name Polung, that is, Many Waves. On the North-East side lies the Mountain Nalo, which abounds with Tigers and Leopards.  
In the Territory jungningfu, on the Southeast side of the City jungning, is the Mountain Canmo, which being all a Rock, stands apart from other Mountains in a great Plain.  
By the City Volu is the Mountain Lopu; By Hinglo, the Mountain Povo; Bianca Lochuho, the Mountain Lovi.  
In the County Xunningfu, on the North-West of the City Xuuning, lies the Mountain Loping; on the North side the Mountain Mengpa, which is inhabited by savage People.  
In the Garrisoned County Kioungfu, on the East side of the City Kiocing, is the Mountain Kuking, which hath a Spring, whose Waters (if we may believe the Chinese) given to Children to drink, sharpens their Wit.  
In the Territory Sokingfu, near the City Kienchuen, Westward, lies the Kinhoa, a Mountain which abounds in Gold, and extends from thence in a continued Line through the Kingdom of Sifan. One of the Hills belonging to it shines all over like Gold.  
On the South side of the City Siking lies the large Mountain Fauchang.  
By the City Kienchuen is the Mountain Xepao; on which on a Column of Stone is the Image of the Idol Fe, an Elephant, Lion, Clock, and Drum, all of one piece, yet every Representation of a particular colour; but by whom erected is not known.  
In the County Vutingfu, on the East side of the City Vuting, is the large Mountain Umong, rising with twelve Spiry Heads.  
About the City Lokiven, Northward lies the Mountain Hinkieu, which is barren and craggy, yet plain on the top, and ascended only by a long and narrow Path, just broad enough for one Man; so that it affords a safe refuge for the Inhabitants in the time of War.  
By the City Hokio lies the Mountain Sokien, which is commonly called The continual Spring, because it feels none of the alterations which usually attend the several Seasons of the year. On its West side is a great Cavern like a deep Pit, in which stand two Images, one of a Man, the other of some kind of Beast.  
The Chineses write, That if any one chancing to come near these Images speaks aloud, there follows immediately Thunder and tempestuous Wether.  
In the County Cintienfu, on the North side of the City Cintien, is the Mountain juecu, fifty Furlongs in circumference; and on the North-West side the Mountain Into, the Air whereof is so very pure and wholesome, that those who inhabit there live very long, and free from all Diseases, nor are ever troubled with that excessive Heat, with which in the Dog-days other places are infested.  
By the City Kiucin is the Mountain Kiusna, so called from the diverse-coloured Stones thereon, being in the form of a Horse.  
In the Territory Likiangfu, on the North-West side of the City Likiang, which looks towards the Kingdom of Tibet lies the Mountain Sieu, so called from the Snow, which never melting is always found upon it.  
In the County juenkiangfu, on the North-East side of the City juenkiang, is the pleasant Mountain Lecekia, signifying Fair Tower; On the East side, the great Mountain jotai, with twenty five Spiry Tops.  
In the County junchangfu, on the East side of the City jungchiang, is the Mountain Gailo, or Ganlo; upon which is a deep Pond, from which the Husbandmen take Observations whether the approaching Year will be fruitful or not, by taking notice in the Springtime, whether its Water falls or rises. There is also a Stone, which representing a Man's Nose, sends forth out of the Nostrils two Fountains, one with cold, and the other with warm Water.  
Near the City Say lies the Kaoli, a great and high Mountain.  
By the City junping lies the Mountain Ponan, very troublesome and dangerous to ascend.  
Near Xintien, is the Mountain Mocang, one of whose Tops seems to kiss the Skies.  
The Mountain Funko, which lies Westward from the City jenping, hath a Fort of the same Denomination.  
These are the most remarkable Mountains of this Province; besides which there are North of the City Caoming the high Mountain Sieucao: By the City sinning, the Golden Mountain Kiuma: South of Queniang, the Pecio: North of the same City, the Mountains Yleang and Kocing: South of the City Lyngan, the high Mountain Puonchang: North of the chief City of the County Kingtungfu, the high and far stretching Mountain Munglo: And not far from thence, the Garrisoned Mountain Pingtai: North of Quangsi, in the County Quangsifu, the Mountain Fiaco: Within the Walls of the same City, the Mountain Chungfien: About the City Mile, the Mountain Siaolung: By the City Cheneye, the Woody Mountain Xingan: By the City Loleang, the Mountain Xemuon; through which runs a Road ten Furlongs broad: By the City Yeco, the Mountain Yceng: Near the City Malnug, the high topped Mountain Quenfo: West of the chief City, in the County Yaoganfu, the Mountain Kienlien: On the East of the same City, the Mountain Tung, o'erspread with pleasant Groves: On the North of the Mountain Lolo, and by the City Zayao, the Mountain Luki: South of the City Pexing, the high Mountain Rieulung: On the East side, the Mountain Tung; on the West, the Utung: On the North-West side of the City Sinhon, the Mountain Talung: On the North side, the Checung, on which is a warm Spring: By the Garrison Chelo, the Mountain Munglo: By the Garrison Taheu, the steep Mountain Olun: By the Garrisoned City Mangxi, the high Stony and Cavernous Mountain Singxe: By the Garrison Mengyang, the high Mountain Queikive, so full of Holes, that it is said to have been Undermined by Evil Spirits.  
As to what concerns the Temperature of the Air, and Quality of the Soil in the several Countries of China in particular, having heretofore spoken of it in general, we find in the Chinese Books of Geography this account given.   

The Temperature of the Air, and Quality of the Soil.  
IN the first little County, wherein stands the City Chin, in the Province of Xensi, the Air, in regard of the Country, lies very high, and is much colder than in other places; but in most parts of the Province of Xensi, the Air is pleasant and temperate.  
It Rains very seldom in the Province of Xantung.  
In divers places of the Province of Honan the Air is very Temperate, and consequently Healthful; as likewise in the County Hoviking.  
The Air of the Province of Fokien is generally hot, but clear and Healthful; except in the County Tincheufu.  
The Southern part of the Province of Quangsi, is under a warm Climate.  
The Air of the Province of junnan is much hotter than that of the other Provinces, as being nearer to the Line, and for the most part agreeing with that of India.  
The Soil of the Province of Peking, is in most places Barren and Sandy, though Champain; but in the second County Paotingfu, very pleasant and Fruitful of all things; and so likewise in the seventh Territory Tamingfu: In the eighth County of this Province grows the Root Gingten.  
In the Jurisdiction of the City Yenking, the first of the three Cities without the bounds of the Province of Peking, are store of Vines; yet the Inhabitants know not how, or rather (which is most probable) will not make Wine of Grapes, but content themselves with Liquors made of Rice, which are exceeding good, and so well approved of by the Jesuits, who went thither from Europe, that they used no Liquor else, except at Mass.  
The Province of Xansi produceth Vineyards and Grapes, much sweeter than in other parts in China; so that the Chinese, if they would, might make excellent Wine in great abundance; but in stead thereof, they have a way of drying their Grapes like Raisins, which, when so ordered, are Vended in all parts of China.  
The Fathers which Promulgated the Gospel in this Province, took a convenient course to Press their Wine themselves which they use at Mass, and furnished others of their Fraternity in the Neighbouring Provinces therewith; whereas, formerly with great trouble and charge they sent for their Wine from the City Makao.  
The second County Pingyangfu, of the Province of Xansi, is partly Champain, and partly Mountainous; but of the Champain, which is very Fruitful, not an Acre lies Untilled.  
The fourth County Luganfu, of the same Province, is very Pleasant, and though small, yet abounds with all manner of Provision.  
The fifth County Fuencheufu, though Hilly, yet on the Hills themselves hath some places capable of Tillage; and beneath, divers thick Woods and Forests, stored with Venison, fruitful Cornfields and Meadows for Pasture.  
The Province of Xensi is more subject to Drought than any other Province, and very often infinitely endamaged by swarms of Locusts, which like a vast Army devour the Fruits of the Earth, and lay waste all before them: This Province particularly produces the Physical Plant Rhubarb.  
The first County Siganfu, of the Province of Xensi, hath both Pleasant Mountains and Fruitful Plains, producing all store of Fruits and other Provision: The second likewise is both Manured, and not behind in natural Fertility.  
The third Territory Hanchungfu, hath many rank Pastures and rich Fields.  
The fourth Pingleangfu, hath many pleasant Mountains, which are not altogether barren.  
The Soil of the whole Province of Xantung is enriched by the many Rivers, Lakes, and Brooks that are in the same, and hath plenty of all kind of Necessaries, as well Rice, Barley, and other sorts of Corn, as of Beans, Have, and divers sorts of excellent Fruit, but Drought and Locust do often great hurt: Nevertheless, the Country is naturally so exceeding Fertile, that they say, the Harvest of one Fruitful Year stored them for ten Years, in such plenty, as to spare great quantities to other Countries: Particularly, it yields large Pears and Apples of several sorts, Chest-nuts, Small-nuts, and great abundance of Plums, which are dried and sent to other Countries.  
The first County Cinunfu, yields not, for pleasure, to any other of the Northern Provinces, for all manner of Grain or Fruits, especially Wheat and Rice, which grow there in great abundance.  
In like manner, the second County Yeucheufu hath many delightful Fields, Wooddy Mountains, and in most places, is well Cultivated.  
The third County Tungchangfu hath a Plain and Rich Soil, produces great store of Grain, and wants in a manner nothing of what is requisite for the sustaining of Man's Life.  
The Province of Honan is in some parts Champain, and in others Mountainous, especially Westward; yet the Soil being every where Fruitful, no place lies Untilled, except towards the West, where several craggy Mountains obstruct the Husbandman's Labour: The Fields produce Rice, and all other sorts of Grain: They have all manner of European Fruits, and that in such abundance, that they are bought at very cheap Rates; so that it is no wonder this Province is by the Chineses called A Paradise of Delight; for the Eastern part thereof is so pleasant, and every where so improved by Tillage, that those who shall for several days Travel through the same, may fancy they walk through a most delightful Garden.  
But above all, for richness of Soil, are the Counties Queitefu and Changtefu, as being for the most part Plain, without any Mountains.  
The third Territory on the contrary is very barren and Sandy; yet that defect is much supplied by the conveniency of its Rivers. The fifth County Hoaikingfu again is exceeding Fertile; as also the sixth and seventh, being Honanfu and Nanyangfu; the last well Watered with Rivers and surrounded with Mountains, so abounds with Provision, that it is able to furnish whole Armies therewith. In like manner the little County, in which stands the City In, is very Fruitful.  
The Province of Suchuen hath many pleasant Pastures and rich Cornfields, yet is Mountainous in several places: The Physical Drugs which this Country produces, as well Herbs as Minerals, are much esteemed, and from thence Transported to Europe; among others the true China-Root, and best Rhubarb.  
The whole Territory Chingtufu is partly Champain, and in some parts with Mountains; the Plains are enriched by Nature's Hand, and the very Mountainous parts by good Tillage, are made Fruitful; all the Fields are Watered by Rivulets, either Natural or Cut, insomuch, that whoever Travels through them, hath, for three days, an exceeding pleasant Journey.  
In the County Paoningfu, of the Province of Suchuen, in a Pagod-Temple in the great City Kien, grows an Indian Figtree, in the Portuguese Tongue called Arvor de Rays.  
In the Country Xunkingfu grow great store of Gold-coloured Apples, a Root called Soozanem, and Chest-nuts which melt in the Mouth like Sugar.  
The Territory Siucheufu, though craggy and Mountainous, produces among many other things requisite, abundance of Indian Sugarcanes, and an excellent Fruit called Lichi.  
The County Chunkingfu hath store of Meutang-Flowers, and the Fruit Licheu.  
The Territory Queicheufu, Fruitful of its self, is also by the Inhabitants very much improved by Tillage, no spot of Ground being left Unmanured, except some Sandy and Stony Mountains, which lie especially towards the North: Among other excellent Fruits, this Country abounds in Oranges and Lemons.  
The first little County, wherein stands the City Tungchun, is exceedingly enriched by the abundance of Rivers which Water the same.  
The small Territory belonging to the City Kiating, is a pleasant place, and yields plenty of Rice and other Grains.  
By the fourth Garrisoned City Chinhiung grow a sort of Beans, which the Chineses for their hardness call The Stone-Beans; they grow on Shrubs, and are exceeding good against Heartburning.  
The County of Huquang for its Fruitfulness is called jumichity, that is, The Country of Fish and Rice; it is also called The Corn-store-house of the Chinese (as Sicily was anciently called, The Storehouse of Italy) from its abundance of all things, especially Corn, and all manner of Grain, which it not only yields to its Inhabitants, but in a plentiful manner furnishes all the neighbouring Countries.  
The County Vuchangfu is advantaged by the many Streams and Channels that run through the same, and along whose Banks grow abundance of Reeds, of which they make Paper.  
The second Honia, among other things, produces in particular great plenty of Lemons, Oranges, and Citrons: Nor are the fifth and sixth Territories inferior; which last yields all manner of Provisions.  
The seventh County jocheufu, is very much enriched by three Rivers, viz. the Kiang, Siang, and Fungi, and brings forth incomparable Fruits, especially Oranges and Lemons.  
The eighth County Changxafu, generally Champain, but in some places Mountainous, hath a fat and fertile Soil, and plenty of all things, Rice growing there in abundance, without danger of withering in the driest Seasons, because there seldom wants Rain, which if there should, the Husbandman supplies it sufficiently with Water, which by an Engine is drawn out of the Lakes and Streams over their Fields, so to moisten the Roots of their Plants.  
The County Hengcheufu is a delightful and well Tilled Country, yielding all manner of Provisions, and among the rest, Paper-canes: Much of the same Nature are the tenth and fourteenth Counties.  
In the Territory Chingyangfu grows a Plant, which like our Ivy runs up in height, bears Yellow Flowers, and some White. The utmost end of the Sprigs are very thin, like Silken Threads; they say, that a small Branch thereof being laid to the Naked Body, occasions Sleep, and therefore is called Munghao, that is, Flower of Sleep.  
The County Nanchangfu, the first of the Province of Kiangfi, having every where a fruitful and fat Soil, is Tilled in most places: In like manner, the second Territory jaocheufu is made very pregnant by several Rivers that run through it.  
The Chineses also esteem the fourth County Nankangfu, for its affording them all kind of Necessaries; the low Grounds yielding plenty of Rice, Corn, and Shell-Fruit; the Mountain's store of Wood for Fuel.  
The sixth County Kienchangfu, is, though Mountainous, a Pleasant and Fertile Country; as likewise the seventh Vuchenfu, (through which run many Rivers) it yields store of Gold-coloured Apples; nor is it wanting in all sorts of Fruit and other Provisions: No less Pleasant and Fruitful is the eighth County Lingkiangfu, esteemed by the Chinese; as also the ninth Kieganfu, though Hilly and Mountainous: But above all, the tenth Territory Xuicheufu, abounds in Rice-Fields; as appears by its paying three thousand Bags of Rice for Custom Yearly; when as it contains only three Cities, of which, the chief at this day called Xuicheu, was in the time of the Family Tangle named Micheu, that is, City of Rice: Not much short of this in plenty is the eleventh County juencheufu.  
The fourth County Sunkiangfu, of the Province of Kiangnan, though small, is not to be left out of the Fruitful Countries: The fifth Changcheufu, being a plain Country and Watered by several Rivers, exceeds many other Territories in the goodness of its Soil; producing an excellent kind of Grain. The seventh Yancheufu hath also a delightful and fertile Soyl.  
The ninth County Lucheufu, being watered by the Lake Cao, possesses in most parts thereof very luxuriant Plains: In like manner doth the eleventh, Taipingfu.  
The Province of Chekiang, by reason of the many Brooks, Rivers and Lakes which wash the same, is a rich Magazine of Plenty: And though Chokiang hath many Mountains on its South and West parts, yet they are all Tilled▪ except those which are stony; and they also afford Timber, fit for the building of Ships or Houses. In most parts are store of Mulberry Trees, which are Pruned yearly like our Vines, thereby the better to provide Food for the Silkworms; for the Chineses suffer them not to grow too high, having by the experience of many years learned, that the Leaves of the Orange-Trees, and those that are most kept down, yield the best Silk.  
In the County Hucheufu, the third of the Province of Chekiang, grows Cha, which is called Riaicha.  
In the fifth Territory Kinhaofu grows a sort of great Plumbs, which being dried, are sent from thence to most parts of China.  
The whole County of Ningpofu, in the Province of Chekiang, hath a fertile Soil, except where it is full of Rocks and Mountains.  
The eleventh County Vencheufu flourishes all along till you come to the Mountains in the Province of Fokien, which extend themselves a vast way.  
The Province of Fokien is for the most part over▪ spread with Mountains, which in many places are covered with pleasant Woods, especially on steep Ascents: The Timber is good for the building of Ships, Houses, and the like. That part also which is plain, is for the most part Sandy and unfit for Tillage: but to supply that defect, the Water is led thither in little Channels, whereby those places that are barren by Nature, are rendered productive by the Art and Industry of Man.  
The sixth County Tingcheufu hath abundance of all things requisite for the subsistence of Mankind, notwithstanding it is very Mountainous.  
The seventh Territory Hinghoafu in the Province of Fokien, is the fertilest and pleasantest in the whole Country, and especially abounding in Rice, as appears by its paying seventy two thousand Bags of Tribute, whereas it only contains two Cities.  
The little Territory of the City Foning hath also plenty of Provision, notwithstanding it is every where full of Mountains.  
The Province of Quantung is a rich Storehouse of Plenty: The Fields are so bountiful in the production of Rice and Wheat, that they are Sown twice a year, each Harvest yielding the Husbandman a most plentiful Crop, by reason the whole Province feels neither Frost nor Snow, insomuch that the Chineses have a Proverb concerning it, viz. That in the Province of Quantung are three unusual things, The Sky without Snow, The Trees always green, and The Inhabitants continually spitting Blood, that is to say, a red-coloured spital occasioned by the continual chewing the Leaves of Betel with Faufel or Araka, a Composition made of burnt Oyster-shells.  
In the same Province also are every where many excellent Fruits, as Pomegranates, Grapes, Pears, Chestnuts, Indian Figs, Indian Nuts, Anana's, Lichin, Lunggon, jeucu, or Musk-melons, Apples, and all sorts of Citrons.  
The fifth Territory jaocheufu in the Province of Quantung, hath a fertile Soil, except in some places where it is oppressed with Rocks.  
The sixth Chaokingfu yields store of sweet Wood, and amongst the rest that which the Portuguese name Pao de Rosa, that is, Rose-Wood.  
The ninth County Luicheufu exceeds in many things all the other Territories in the Province of Quantung:  
In most parts of this Country grows a Twig, which the Chineses call Teng, and the Portuguese, Rosa.  
The Province of Quangsi is not altogether so delightful as that of Quantung; yet in some measure is supplied with Provisions: The whole Province is full of Hills, except the South part, which reaches to the Shore, where it is all Tilled and Manured.  
The third County Kingyvenfu is a Craggy and Mountainous Country, yet produces Araka, little Indian Nuts, and the Fruit Lichias.  
The sixth Territory Cincheufu, is a pleasant Place, and not so barren as the former.  
The Province of Queicheu is the craggiest and unfertilest Place in all China, being nothing but a continued and inaccessible Ridge of Mountains.  
In the fourth Territory Chinyvenfu grow a sort of Flowers, highly esteemed by the Chinese, Granates, and Golden Apples.  
The first County junnanfu in the Province of junnan, is a very pleasant Country, having plenty of all things, and rises in some places in Hills and high. Mountains, and in others extends a vast way on plain and Champain Grounds: It produces Rose-Wood.  
In the second County Talifu in the Province of junnan, grow European Figs, which the Chineses call Whoaquo, that is, Fruit without Flowers, because they grow without ever having any Blossoms; for Vu signifies Without; Hoa, Flower; and Quo, A Blossom. There likewise grows Cha or Tee.  
The third County Langanfu yields Rice, Wheat, Honey, and Wax; and also all sorts of Fruits which grow in India. It is partly Champain, and partly Mountainous.  
The fourth Territory Cuihungfu is a plain Country, flourishing with Cornfields, brave Meadows, and Pastures for cattle.  
The whole County Kingtungfu produces chiefly (and therefore in great abundance) Rice.  
The Territory Quangnangfu is by the Chinese, for its excellent fertility, called The Golden Land.  
In the fifth Territory junnanfu, where stands the Garrisoned City Cioking, are store of Pine-Apples; as likewise in the sixth.  
The seventh abounds with Silk, Ebony-Wood, Date-Trees, and Araka, which the Inhabitants chew with Betel-Leaves, as also the Indians, who call it Makinnang.  
Thus much of the temperature of the Air, and fertility of the Soil of China; as to what concerns their manner of Husbandry, and the Description of some Plants that belong properly to China, we will here Treat at large.   

Of their manner of Husbandry.  
The Emperor Venus, who began his Reign Anno 197 before the Incarnation, promoted Husbandry, then decayed by the continual Wars, with great zeal, and put his own Hands to the Work, that by his Example he might oblige all the greatest Noblemen to follow him. He caused all Women to plant Mulbery-Trees, and breed Silkworms, from the Example of his Empress, whom he enjoined to set the forementioned Trees, and breed Silkworms in his Palace; insomuch that all the Clothes she wore, and which were used in their Religious Ceremonies, were of her making.  
It is credible that from hence the high Feast, which the Chineses call Hinchun, hath its original: This may well be termed The Countrey-man's Holiday; for in the beginning of the Spring, when the Sun is in the Aequator, this Day is by the Chinese through the whole Empire kept with great Solemnity, by all degrees of Persons in every City, and in the Metropolis Peking itself after this manner:  
One of the chiefest of the Nobility, Crowned with a Garland of Flowers, goes to the Eastern Gate of the City, with all manner of Instruments Playing before him, and attended with a number of burning Torches and Flags. Behind follow a Train of Men, which carry several Dishes of Meat to Trees, whereon hang the ancient Monuments of Husbandry, being either made of Wood or some other Material, and set forth with Silk and Cloth of Gold. In several places through which they pass, stand Triumphal Arches, and all the Streets are hung with Tapestry. In this manner the Nobleman goes to the Eastern Gate, as it were, to meet the approaching Spring.  
The chiefest Pageantries of this Solemnity are, A Cow of Baked Clay, so big, that forty Men are scarce able to carry it: The other is a Youth, whom they call The Careful and Industrious Spirit, who going bare with one Leg, and the other covered with a Stocking, continually strikes the Cow on the Back with a Switches: Then follow divers Countrymen, carrying Spades, Shovels, Axes, and the like Tools, used in Husbandry; yet nothing of what they carry or do, but represents a peculiar Secret; as by the continual beating on the Cow, they signify, what care the Husbandman must take in the Manuring of his Lands; by the Youths going with one Leg bare, and the other anticly clad, they express what speed they must use to go to their Labour, and scarce allow time to Cloth themselves.  
When the whole Train is led to the King's or Governor's Palace, the Stone Cow is bereaved of all her Garlands and other Ornamentals: Out of her opened Belly (like as from the Trojan Horse) little Clayie Oxen are drawn in great numbers, of which the Emperor sends one to every Governor, with admonishments, that the Subjects would be careful and diligent in the Tilling of their Lands, and leave not an Acre unsowed; and among other Ceremonies, the Emperor himself Ploughs, and throws Seed on the Ground that day.  
The Emperor Hiaou, though when he was grown very old, betook himself three years before his Death to Husbandry, and forsaking all kind of State Affairs, Ploughed and Sowed the Ground himself, that by that means he might show good examples to his Subjects, and stir them up in like manner to Husbandry: Then enquiring out experienced Planters, commanded them to go through his whole Dominions, and teach all People the way of Husbandry: to which purpose, they found out all sorts of Implements or Tools useful in Tillage, and many other the like things which are required in Husbandry; so that we may now cease from wondering, that formerly mean Rustics were raised from the Plough to the Imperial Throne and sole Monarchy of all China, when we see that Emperors descended from the Throne to the Plough, nay, which is more, managed the Empire and the Plough at once.  
The ancient Chinese Emperors and Kings have had several Laws concerning 
Laws for Husbandry.  Husbandry, amongst which were these.  
The nineteenth part of whatsoever the Soil produces, falls to the Emperor.  
The Governors ought in time of Famine to take notice of the Subject's Goods and Estates, and Tax them according to their Quality.  
The dividing of the Ground was after this manner; every Person was to have an equal share, and one Family no more than the other: All the Fields were divided into great Squares, and these again into nine lesser, of which each Person had one to Manure; but the middlemost was either the Emperor's or the King's Square, which was also by eight Overseers Tilled on the Emperor's Account.  
The eight Squares were called Peculiar Acres, but the middlemost, The Cammon or Free Square, which when left Untilled, no Man was permitted to Manure his own. 
He Reigned Anno 2837. before the Nativity.   
The Emperor Xinnung first Invented the Plough and other Necessary things for Husbandry, and taught the Inhabitants to Sow Wheat, Rice, Barley, Maiz or Turkish Corn, and other Grains. 
Martin. D●…cas p. 45.   
The Emperor Thou, who Reigned Anno 2207. before the Nativity, hath written many things concerning Tillage, viz. after what manner the Fields of every County, are to be Tilled and Sown; for he had gained excellent knowledge of the Nature of several Soils, to which he attained by his own Industry: And observing their Situation among Rivers, concerning which he also wrote several Treatises, and from his Writings the Chineses observe several Rules in their Tilling, according to the several qualities of the Ground.  
The Mountains are also in China Manured after a peculiar manner, but in no Province so much, as in that of Fokien, because there are the most Mountains.  
Michael Boem observes, that the Country of China is exceeding fruitful, not only in the producing of Indian, (especially the Southern Provinces) but also all sorts of European Fruits, besides others, solely belonging to itself: It is a wonder to consider, how many excellent Fruits the Inhabitants in the fifteen Provinces of China enjoy; for those Provinces which want any sorts of Fruits are furnished by their Neighbours with those which they have not; by which means they have all the Year long fresh Fruits, even in the midst of Winter; for in some Provinces, the Fruits are ripe in November, December, january, and February; in others, in March, April, May and june; and in some, in july, August, September and October.  
The manner of Nursing up of young Plants amongst the Chinese and most Indians is three several ways: The first is by burying of the Fruit and Seed together in the Ground; for the Chinese Gardeners put whole Golden Apples and other Fruits in the Earth, and then Plant the Sprouts which shoot from the Seed at a distance from one another, by which means they grow in a short time to be great Trees, and bear excellent Fruit.  
They Graff their Trees also after the same manner as we do ours; and not only Graff Trees, but also Flowers, by which means, one Stalk, if Graffed, bears several Flowers of divers shapes and Colours the next Year.  
The third way of Nursing up of Plants, is by Lopping, as they do in Vineyards, and by cutting off Sprigs from old Trees, and Planting them again; after which manner they increase their Manga and Goyava; sometimes only the Leaves, as the Paparja, which in a short time run up to be high Trees.  
It is to be observed in Trees, of what size or sort soever, the Chineses intend should speedily grow to Perfection and produce Fruit, they Plant the cut-off Branches that day when the Sun enters the fifteenth Degree of Capricorn, which never fails to shoot forth in a short time; for they have either observed by experience, or learned from the Ancients from time to time, that only this day is fit for that business, viz. that if a Sprig of what Tree soever be Planted or set in the Ground on that day, it will very suddenly become a Fruit▪ bearing Tree.   

Plants.  
DIvers sorts of strange Herbs, Trees, Roots, Canes, and Flowers grow in the Country of China, some of which are proper to China only; others again common to that, with other Countries, especially India. Most of the Provinces yield each of them many Herbs, which are of a strange Sovereign Virtue.  
In the seventh County Kingyangfu, in the Province of Xensi, grows an Herb 
Herb Kinsu.  in manner like a Tuft of Yellow Hair, wherefore it is called Kinsu, that is, Silk of Gold, or Golden Thread of Silkworms, for Kin signifies Gold, and Su, Silk: It is of a bitterish Taste, but more cooling than heating; cures suddenly all manner of Scabs and Breakings-out in the Body, without leaving the least Spot behind.  
In the same County is a sort of Rice, exceeding good to cleanse the Body, and especially to provoke Urine: There are also several sorts of Beans, which are an excellent Remedy against Poison.  
In the eighth County jenganfu grows a Flower named Meutang, which signifies 
Flower Meutang.  King of Flowers; it is highly esteemed by the Chinese, being bigger than a common Rose, and also resembling the same, but spreads its Leaves out further; and though it smells not so sweet, yet is pleasanter to the Eye, and without prickles; the colour of it is a pale Purple streaked with White; there are also some which are Red and Yellow. It grows on a Tree not unlike our Birch-Trees, and is Planted in all Gardens through the whole Empire of China, though with great Care and Industry; for in warm places it must be preserved from the heat of the Sun.  
By the Garrisoned City Hocheu, grow those Trees that produce Mirobalans, and others, whose Wood is the Drug called Santalum.  
In the County Cinanfu, of the Province of Xantung, grows a kind of Fruit called Linkio and Lieu.  
In the third County Changtefu, in the Province of Honan, grow several sorts 
Wormwood.  of Wormwood. In the County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Huquang, grows White Wormwood, so called for its excellency by the Chinese Druggist's. On the Mountains, in the County Fangyangfu, in the Province of Kiangnan, is Red Wormwood, both being used by the Chinese against many Distempers, especially against Heat.  
The true and real China-Root grows only in the Province of Suchuen, but 
China- Root. Martin.  that sort which is Wild in all parts of China, for there are two sorts; Wild and Tame, both which are by the Chineses called Folcin, or as some say, Lampatam.  
None but that which is Wild, being of a Reddish Colour within, is brought over to us: It is not so big as the true and Tame Root, neither hath it that Power, yet is not altogether void of Efficacy.  
The true Root, as they say, grows only in the Province of Suchuen, under the Ground, in old Woods of Pine-Trees, almost after the same manner as Potatoes in India; wherefore the Chineses write, that it grows from a tough Slime or Pitch of the Pinetree, which dropping on the Earth, fastens in the Ground, and becomes a Plant, which spreading all about over the Earth, breeds a Root under Ground, sometimes as big as a Child's Head, and in Weight and Form not unlike Coco-nuts, from which the Shell or Rind doth not differ much, though not so hard and thick, but much weaker and thinner; under the Rind is a Kernel or white Spongy Flesh, which is highly esteemed by the Chinese, and used amongst their Medicines; yet if they want this, they despise not the forementioned Wild sort, though it is not altogether of so powerful an Operation.  
The Wild China-Root grows also in Cochin-China, on the Coast of Malabar, and several other places in India.  
The China-Root, as Michael Boem writes, is by the Chineses called Pe Folcin; by the Portuguese, Pao de Cina; and in Europe, China, among the Chinese it grows only in the Provinces of junnan, Quamsi, Quantum, Kaoli, and Leaotum: The Plant or Tree is surrounded with many Thorns, which touch not the Leaves.  
The Chineses eat the Pith of the Root of this Tree in Broth, which is wholesome and used against the Gout, Ulcers, Stops in the Stomach, Lameness, Dropsy, Pain in the Legs and Body, and many other Distempers; the heaviest of them is accounted the best, and the White esteemed before the Red: The Powder of this Root taken with Sugar, and used like a Conserve, is generally with good success given against Distempers in the Breast. They say, that the use and knowledge of this Root was Anno 1535. by the Portuguese brought into India and Europe.  
Another Bastard China-Root of the same Virtue, as the Wild Root, grows in Brasile, especially in the Province of Parayba, where the Inhabitants call it Ivaspecanga.  
In the eighth County jungpingfu, in the Province of Peking; and in that of 
Root Ginseng.  Xansi near the City Leao, grows the most excellent and famous Root in all China, by the Chineses called Ginseng, and by the japanners, Nisi. The Chinese name Ginseng is taken from the shape, because it represents a Man (in the Chinese Tongue called Gin) striding with his Legs; it is much smaller than our Mandragora, or Mandrake; yet we need not doubt but it is a sort of it, because it is exactly like it, and hath the same Operation. The dried Root is of a yellow Colour, hath very few or scarce any Strings, by which it draws Nourishment; is streaked round about with blackish Veins, as if drawn with Ink; yields when chawed an unpleasant sweetness, being mixed with bitterness; a quarter of an Ounce of this Root taken in Syrup, exceedingly revives the Spirits, and if taken in a greater quantity, strengthens those that are Sick and Weak, and pleasantly warms the whole Body.  
Those that are of a hot and strong Constitution endanger their Lives by using the same, because of its too much increasing and heighthning the Spirits; but on the contrary, it recovers those that by long Sicknesses or other Causes are consumed and grown weak. It oftentimes restores those that lie a dying, and with the help of some other Physic restores them to their Health again. Many other Virtues the Chinese ascribe to this Root, and give three pound of Gold for one pound of it. The same Root is sometimes to be had in Holland; but because of its excessive dearness is little used.  
The Provinces of Xensi and Suchuen, according to Martinius, bring forth excellent Medicines, especially the Root Rhubarb, in the Chinese Tongue called Taihoang. This Root (says he) grows not wild, as some affirm, but on the contrary requires great care and pains in the Planting of it: it is of a yellow Colour streak'e with Flames, not hollow, but firm and hard, and in some places having Knobs and Swellings: The Leaves are somewhat like our Cabbage Leaves, but much bigger. The Chineses make a Hole through the Root, and hang them out to dry in the Shade, for being dried in the Sun they lose their Virtue.  
Most of the Rhubarb which is brought into Europe, comes for the most part out of the Provinces of Xensi and Suchuen; being brought from China and Persia by Sea to Batavia, and from thence to Holland; or else out of China by Land to Kaskar, Astrakan and Russia, or through Thebet and Persia by Venice to Italy; for those of Tebet and Mogor frequent the Province of Suchuen, and from thence bring the Rhubarb hither. Thus far Martinius.  
Matthiolus gives us another Description of Rhubarb in his Comment upon Di●…scorides, which agrees with that of Michael Boem, in his Chinese Flora, and with Baptista Ramusio, formerly Secretary to the State of Venice, in his Preface before the Voyage of Marcus Paulus Venetus, which is to this effect▪  
Though (say they) Rhubarb grows in all parts of China, yet it grows in greater abundance in the Provinces of Suciven, (perhaps Suchuen) Xensi, and in the Jurisdiction of the City Socieu near the Great Wall, than in any other place. The Earth in which it grows is red and Clayie, occasioned by its being continually moistened with Springs and Rain: The Leaves, according to the Plant, are two Handfuls long, narrow below, broad at the end, and the edges thereof covered with a hairy Wool: When they are come to their f●…ll growth and maturity, they immediately grow yellow and lank: The Stalk shoots a Hands-breadth with the Leaves above the Earth; from the middle of the Leaf runs a thin Stalk, which bears Flowers not unlike a great Pink; likewise towards the top, which is of a sharp and strong smell: The Root or Stalk which is in the Ground, is of a dark Copper colour, one, two, and sometimes three Handfuls long, and as thick as a Man's Arm; from which shoot forth other lesser Roots, which are cut off from the same. The Root Rhubarb, when cut asunder, shows a dark yellow Flesh streaked with red Veins, out of which drops a red slimy Juice. Moreover, if any one immediately hangs these moist pieces up to dry, then, as experience hath taught, the moisture instantly vanishes, and the Root growing very light, loses all its Virtue; therefore those who are experienced herein, first lay the pieces of green Rhubarb on Tables, and turn them twice or thrice in a day, that so the Sap or Juice may soak and dry by degrees into the pieces, and remain in them; four days after, when the moisture is dried up, they put the pieces on Strings, and hang them from the Sun in the Shadow to dry by the Wind.  
The best time to dig up the Rhubarb is in the Winter before the Trees begin 
Or rather in Spring▪ as Ramusio will have it▪  to Bud, because at that time (about the beginning of April) the Juice and Virtue unites and gathers together. But if the Root of Rhubarb be digged up in Summer, or at that time when it sends forth green Leaves, which is a sign of it's not being ripe, than it never comes to the perfection of the Rhubarb, which is digged up in the Winter.  
One Wagon full of Rhubarb Roots which is full of moisture, costs one Scudo and a half: The Juice when dried up abates so much of the weight, that of seven Pound of green, there scarce remains one Pound when dressed. The Chineses call it Tayhuan, that is, High Yellow.  
This Plant is discoursed of at large by the fore mentioned Authors, and particularly Michael Boem makes a curious Disquisition, whether the Rhaponticum of Alpinus be the same with that which is commonly brought out of Muscovy, and takes much pains to prove that that which grows in China is much better than that which is brought by Russia into Europe.  
This Fruit may justly be called The King of Fruits, since in so ample a measure it both delights the Eye and pleases the Palate, which seems never satisfied therewith: The Kernel of it melts in the Mouth like Sugar.  
Another Fruit named Lungyen, that is, Dragons-Eye, grows in China; it is not 
The Fruit Lungyen, or Dragons-Eye.  much unlike the former, though smaller and rounder like our Cherries; but the Shell of the Fruit Lichi is somewhat harder and thicker. Both these Fruits are dried and sent from this Province through the whole Empire as a Dainty: nevertheless the dried are not comparable to the green, because all the Juice is dried out of them. They also press a Juice out of the Fruit Lichi, which the Chineses call Wine, which is very sweet, but very scarce to be had. The ripe Fruit Lichi is generally brought fresh out of the County Chinkingfu.  
A particular Description of both these Fruits may be seen in the forementioned 
Flor. Sin.  Author Michael Boem, in his Book called Flores sinarum regionis.  
In the same County Focheufu in the Province of Fokien, grows a Fruit called 
The Herb Muigiuli.  Muigiuli, that is to say, Fair Woman's Plumb. These Plumbs are of an Oval Figure, bigger and much better than Damask Prunes.  
In the County Kingcheufu, belonging to the Province of Huquang, grows an 
The Herb of a thousand years.  Herb which the Chineses call Herb of a thousand years; nay, affirm that it never fades, but is as it were immortal.  
To drink the Water wherein the formentioned Herb hath lain to soak, makes white Hair black, and is said to be exceeding good to prolong Life, and restore Youth to the Aged.  
In the County Changtefu, in the Province of Huquang, grow all sorts of Golden Apples; amongst which are some that by the Chinese are called Winter Apples, for when all the others fall off, these begin to grow ripe, and are of a sweet taste.  
In the Province of Kiangsi and other places, grows (for the most part in Lakes and standing Waters) a Plant with a Flower, by the Chineses called Lain, and by the Portuguese, Fula de Golfon.  
The Flower Lien shoots up two or three Yards above the Water on hard and strong Stalks, and is of several Colours, as Purple, White, Particoloured, Red, etc. only Yellow is a Colour peculiar to those that grow in juncheufu, a County of the Province of Huquang.  
This Flower exceeds our Lilies in bigness, and much more in beauty, but is in scent rather worse than better. We should call this Flower The great Lily, because it differs not much in fashion, especially when it opens its Leaves.  
To this Plont belongs also a sort of Fruit like a Ninepin, which is above a Span long, and a Hand thick. The top or point of this Fruit is fast to the Stalk, on which the Flower hung before, the Cod stands upright, and hath several Partitions filled with Fruits bigger than Hazle-Nuts, or French Beans: each Fruit is without covered with a green Rind, and within filled up with a white Kernel, or Pith of a delightful taste, whether fresh or dried.  
This Fruit is by the Chinese Physicians highly esteemed, and accounted an excellent Food; wherefore they are generally given to sick Persons that are upon their recovery.  
The Leaves of this Plant are very big, sometimes two Handfuls broad, and for the most part round: They lie and drive on the Water like those of our Water-Lilies, and join by long Stalks to the Root. The Root, which is thicker than a Man's Arm, sends forth a very fine Stalk two or three els long, distinguished with Joints like a Cane: The outward Shell is firm and whole, but the Flesh is parted, and in several divisions: The dried Leaves are by Grocers and other Tradesmen used in stead of Paper to wrap or wind their Wares in. The Root also is very excellent, and esteemed a Dainty of great value in the Summer, when it is taken to cool and expel Heat; so that nothing belongs to this Plant but what is useful.  
In China are whole Lakes (a pleasant thing to behold) overgrown with Flowers, not wild, but produced by Art, by throwing once a year the Seed into the Water. Moreover, divers Persons of Quality keep great Earthen Vessels filled with Slime and Water in their Gardens, wherein they Sow the forementioned Flowers.  
In the Lake Hung, on the East side of the City Hoaigan in the Province of Kiangnan, grows a kind of high Reed, which by the Inhabitants of the whole County are burnt in stead of Wood, very few Trees growing in that Country.  
In all parts of the County Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, in standing 
The Fruit Peci.  Water, grows a Fruit called Peci, which is no bigger than a Chestnut, and hath a Kernel covered with a dark-coloured Skin, white within, full of Juice, and of a pleasing taste, harder than an ordinary Apple, and somewhat sowerer.  
This Fruit is said to be of such a Nature, that the Juice of it softens Copper to that degree, that it may be chewed in the Mouth.  
In the County Kinhoafu in the Province of Chekiang, grows a small Tree with 
Mogorin Flower.  one Flower, which the Portuguese in India call Mogorin; It is very white like a jessamin Flower, yet fuller of Leaves, and of a sweeter smell, insomuch that a few of them put in any Room perfumes the whole House; wherefore it is not undeservedly held in great esteem amongst the Chinese, and the Tree thereof preserved with great care in the Winter in Earthen Pots.  
In the same County grows also a Tree called Kievyen, which produces a 
Kievyen, or Fat-Flower.  kind of fat substance like Tallow, of which pure white Candles are made, and are not subject to grease the Fingers though often handled, like those which are of Tallow. The Tree hath pretty big Leaves, somewhat like those of our Pear-Tree, with white Blossoms like our Cherry-Trees: after the Blossom follows a round Cod as big as a Cherry, covered with a blackish thin Skin, which encloses a white Pith appearing through the Skin, which cracks when the Cod is grown ripe. The Cod thus ripe, are pulled off and boiled in Water; by which means the Flesh melting, becomes perfect Tallow when grown cold again; then the remaining Kernel being pressed produces store of Oil, which they use not in Salads, but burn in Lamps: In the Winter the Leaves are quite red like Copper, which is pleasant to behold, for they appear at a distance like Red-woods: At last the Leaves falling off afford excellent Feeding (by reason of their fatness) for Sheep and other cattle, which so Fed grow exceeding fat.  
On the Mountain Loseu, by the City Polo in the Province of Quantung, grows a very long and thick Cane, the Body thereof being ten Handfuls in circumference.  
On the Mountain Change, by the City Lochang in the same Province, grows a black Cane, of which the Chineses make their Pipes, and many other things, which seem as if made of Ebony Wood  
On the Shore of the River Kinxe, near the City Kinhao, grows abundance of thick Canes, which the Inhabitants beating into thin Shreds, Wove and make Clothes of them.  
The Shore of the River Tao, in the County Xaocheufu in the Province of Quantung, is all Planted with Peach-Trees, from whence it hath its Denomination, for Tao signifies A Peach.  
In the County Chaokingfu in the same Province, grow divers sorts of sweet Wood, and amongst others Rose-Wood, by the Portuguese called Pao de Rosa; of which they make Cabinets, Stools, Tables, and the like: It is exceeding good Wood, of a dark Red, with several Veins, and looks naturally as if Painted: It grows also in the County junnanfu in the Province of junnan.  
In most parts of the Province of Quantung, and on the Island Aynan, grows a 
The Twig Teng.  kind of Plant, by the Chineses called Teng, and by the Portuguese, Rota, which seems like a Rope naturally twisted together; for it runs along the Ground and over the Mountains like a Rope; it is full of Prickles, and hath long green Leaves, and though scarce a Finger thick, extends itself a whole Furlong in length, and in such abundance over the Mountains, that it makes the Way, by its twining and twisting together, unpassable: It is an exceeding tough Plant, and cannot be broke; wherefore the Chineses make Cables and Tackling for their Ships of it; and slitting it into thin Twigs, make Baskets, Hurdles, and the like, of them, but most of all exceeding fine Mats, on which the Chineses, from the meanest Person to the Emperor himself, sleep or repose themselves, they being very cool in the Summer, and by the Chineses long Custom of sleeping in that manner, are judged very easy, notwithstanding they are spread on the bare Floor. Of the same Plant they make Quilts and Bolsters for their Beds, which they fill with divers sorts of Perfumes. The whole Isle of Ainan is overgrown with it, especially with the white, which is the best.  
In most parts of China grows a Flower called Quei, but no where in such 
The Flower Quei.  abundance as in the Province of Quangsi, especially in the County Quelingfu, from whence the chief City Quelin hath its Denomination, for Quelin signifies Flowry Green. This Flower grows upon a high Tree, whose Leaves are not unlike those of the Laurel or Cinamon-Tree: It being very small, and of a yellow Colour, smells very odoriferously: When displayed, it hangs a considerable time on the Tree without withering; when it falls off, the Tree within a Month after Buds again, and in Harvest smells so strong and sweet, that it may be scented at a very considerable distance.  
The Chineses prepare many Dainties of this Flower, both to please the Palate, and to delight the Smell. This also is the same Flower which steeped in the Juice of Lemmon the Turks use to colour their Hair with: The Trees thereof suffer no other to grow near them, nor grow in places where others have grown.  
In the County Lieucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, on the Shore of the 
The Herb Pusu.  River Lieu, grow many Willow Trees. There are likewise several excellent Herbs, good against many Sicknesses; amongst which the Herb Pusu, that is, Immortal, so called by the Chinese, because they always preserve it green in their Houses.  
In the County Gucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, grows a Tree named 
The Quanglang Tree.  Quanglang, which in stead of Pith or Marrow, encloses a kind of thin Matter like Honey, in stead of which it is often used, being no less pleasing to the Palate.  
In the Territory Cincheufu, in the Province of Quangsi, grows an Herb called Thou; of which the Inhabitants make their Clothes, which are richer than Silk, and amongst them of greater value. There also grows a Tree, whose Wood is like Iron, it being much harder than our Box-wood. The same County likewise produces excellent Cinnamon, in the Chinese Tongue called Kueypi, which only differs from the Ceylon Cinnamon in this, that it is more biting on the Tongue, and of a better scent.  
The Chineses in ancient times used to carry Cinnamon from the Island Ceylon, (which was, according to Boem, so called by the Chinese from the many Ships which suffered Shipwreck on the same; or else Ceylon, or rather Sinland, signifies, according to Martinius, People of China, or Chineses) by Sea to Ormuz, from whence it was carried by Land to Aleppo in Syria, and Greece. The ignorant sort of People supposed that it came out of the Moors Country and Egypt, whenas it never grew in that Country, though sometimes a Fleet of four thousand Ships came Laden with Gold, Silk, Precious Stones, Musk, Porcelain, Copper, Allom, Nutmegs, Cloves, and chiefly Cinnamon, into the Bay of Persia. The Merchants, as the same Boem tells us, called Cinnamon (otherwise by the Chineses named The Bark of the sweet Tree) Cina and Momum, which signifies Sweet and well scented Chinese Wood  
In the County Lipingfu in the Province of Queicheu, grows an Herb like 
The Herb Ko.  Hemp, which the Chineses call Ko, and make their Summer Garments thereof, which are an excellent Wear against the excessive heat of the Sun: It also grows in the County Nankangfu, in the Province of Kiangsi.  
In the Southern Provinces of junnan, Quangsi, Quantung, Fokien, and on the 
Fanyaycocu.  Isle Ainan, grows in great abundance a Tree by the Chineses called Fanyaycocu; by the Eastern Indians, Papayo; by the West-Indian Inhabitants, Pinoyvacu; and by the Portugese Mamova: It produces a Fruit which springs out of the top of the 
The Fruit of the Tree Fanyay.  Body of the Tree, looking red within, and having in stead of Pith a thin Juice, that may be eaten with a Spoon. They are accounted to be very cooling, and to abate lascivious Desires, and cause Barrenness.  
This Tree (a strange thing!) hath no Branches, but only Leaves, which grow on the top thereof; from amongst which Leaves sprout out white Flowers, which afterwards become Fruit. The Fruit hath no set-time of the Year to ripen in, but successively ripe Fruits are to be found on the Trees every Month in the Year. The Chineses call it Fanyaycocu, that is, Fruit of the Fanyay; for Kocu signifies Fruit; and the Portuguese, Maman, because it hangs on the Tree like a Teat. The Fruit, Leaves, and whole Tree, are pleasant and delightful to the Eye. The Tree springs first from the Seed of its Fruit, and afterwards new Trees from the Strings which shoot out of the Root: The Leaves and part of the Body of the Tree being put into the Ground, grow very speedily and in a short time to a high Tree.  
Anno 1626. the Papayo-Tree being sown, grew in Naples: It had a whitish Root full of Strings, a whitish Stem or Body, eighteen Inches long and a Finger thick, of the same colour with the Root, spongy and round, not unlike the Body of the Wonder-Tree, and notched after the same manner under the Leaves, which when green hang by a long Stalk round about the Body of the Tree, sloping from the middle upwards, all of them four or five Inches broad, divided like the Fig-Leaves into five parts, but notched much deeper, smooth, and of a pleasant Green; all of them fell off in the Winter, and the Body with the Root also withered away by degrees: But we may doubt whether this Tree was the right Papayo, because, according to Michael Boem, the Fanyacu, or Papayo, hath its Leaves only on the top, and not as this in Naples, from the middle upwards.  
Peter de Valla, by Letters to Fabius Columna, gives quite another Description of the Papayo, which (saith he) is a Plant like our Figtree, but much pleasanter; the Fruit like our ordinary Melons, oval, smooth, and with a green Rind; the Flesh within of an Orange colour, and tasting like a sweet Orange, but more Spicy and pleasanter; the fresh Seed blackish, when dried turns to a Chestnut colour, and is about the thickness of Coriander Seeds, but longer; the Flesh thereof being cut through in the middle looks whitish, is tough, tastes sweet, and is like old Musk▪ melons Seed; the Stalk of the Fruit, though green, yields like those of Figs: The Tree is full of Branches like the Figtree.  
The experienced and Learned Physician, William Piso, makes mention of two 
Histor. Natur. & M●…. L. 4.  sorts of Papayo growing in the West-Indies, where it is called Pinoguacu, a Male and Female; of both which he hath a particular Description, which may be seen at large in his Natural History.  
To conclude, most agree in this, that the Papayo-Tree grows not of itself, but is Planted: What Country it properly belongs to is not yet certainly known, but it is by most believed to be a Stranger to India, and brought thither from a foreign Country.  
In no Place, except China, grows that Tree and excellent Fruit, in the Chinese 
The Tree Supim▪ Michael Boem.  Tongue called Supim; it is of a Golden colour, bigger than an ordinary Apple, and hath within its Shell or Rind, a soft and red Pulp, within which are several Stones: The dry Fruit is very like an European Fig, and keeps good many years: The Chinese Physicians use it often in their Compounds. In the Province of Quantung it ripens in january, February, and March; but in Xensi, Honan, and other Northern Provinces, in june, july, and August.  
The Tree laden with this Fruit affords a pleasant Prospect, and is constantly watched against the Birds.  
There also grows a Tree in the Province of Quantung, and in the Island Ainan, with Leaves of half the size of a Man of ordinary Stature: The Root thereof grows half in the Ground, and the other half out, and bears red Flowers, and a Fruit like our Figs. The ripe Fruits are also red, and the Flesh within tastes also like our Figs, and are ripe in july and August.  
The Fruit by the Chineses called Cienko, is by the Indians and Portuguese called 
The Fruit Cienko.  Goyaun: It seems to those that are not used thereto, to have no good savour, but indeed smells very Spicy, and is desired afterwards by those that at first disrelished it, because it warms, and hath a sovereign healing power, and is exceeding good to stop a Looseness, and fortify the Stomach: Within it are many little round Stones, from which the Trees grow, though quickerby Setting a Bough thereof in the Ground: The Boughs bear great store of Fruit and sweet-smelling Leaves, which rubbed to pieces smell very strong, and are accounted excellent Medicines against Fevers: The Fruit is also in the Portuguese Tongue called Pera, that is, Pear, because it is exactly like a Pear.  
In India this Fruit ripens in November and December, and for the most part continues in all the other Months; but in the Province of Quantung, in june and july.  
On the Island Hiamxan, lying near China, in Makau, and in Malacca, grows a 
The Tree and Fruit Giambo. Mithael Boem.  Tree and Fruit named Giambo, which is of two or three sorts; for in India are red, white, and yellow, which smell like Roses: the first hath a white, and the second a pale yellow Flower: The Body and Boughs are Ash-coloured, the Leaves smooth, a Hand-breadth long, and three Fingers broad: The Fruit is as big as a Pear, with a thin sweetish spongy Flesh; it is pleasant to the Eye, either quite red or white, or partly red and partly white: On one Bough grow Flowers, green and ripe Fruit together. They are very cooling, and the only thing in great Fevers to quench Thirst.  
The Indians make a Conserve of this Fruit, exceeding good against Agues and other Distempers arising from the Gaul. In stead of Seed it encloses a round Kernel; but the yellow sort hath two Kernels, or rather one divided into two parts: the Flesh of the yellow is very sweet and luscious: the red ripens in India in October and November, but the yellow in some places in March, and in other places in july.  
The Pipa is a Fruit of a yellowish Green when it is ripe, sweet of taste like 
The Fruit Pipa.  our Plumbs, and covered with the like sort of Skin, within it lies a hard oval Stone; it is generally gathered ripe in February and March: The Tree, by reason of its fine Leaves and Flowers, is very pleasant to behold.  
The Fruit Yata hath a green, knotty, and prickly Shell, like a Pineapple; 
The Fruit Yata.  within which is a waterish Pulp as white as Snow, hiding in little Repositories hard and black Stones: The bigger this Fruit is, the better it is esteemed. The Tree grows chiefly in Malacca, from whence it was transplanted into China, where it grows in some plenty: In some places the Fruit is ripe in October and November, and in others in February and March.  
The Fruit Manko, by the Chinese and the Indians called Manga, and by the 
The Fruit Manko.  Turks, Ambo., grows most plentifully in the Southern Provinces of China: In India are several sorts, the biggest whereof weigh two, and sometimes three Pound, especially if they grow on a Bough Pruned to a Cedar-Tree, of whose Fruit they borrow the Coat and rough Shell.  
Their Pruning on other Trees is much like ours in Europe, but not in the Mango-Tree, a Bough of which being cut off, is tied to the Bough of another Tree, and daubed all about with Clay, by which means the Boughs in time growing together bear Fruit. The ripe Fruits sometimes all upon one Tree 
Boem.  are of several Colours, some green, others yellow, and some red; or as others 
●…auhin.  write, greenish yellow, and reddish: It hath a bitter Kernel within a hard and woolly Shell, as big as an Almond: there are also some without Stones. The Flesh of those that are ripe is of a kind of Purple colour, and exceeds all other in lusciousness: Some account it the best Fruit in the World: They are ripe in April and May, and continue till November.  
The Tree, according to Garcias, on which this Fruit grows, is like a Pear-Tree, high and full of Boughs; the Leaves are very thin, ten Inches long and three broad, with a thick sinew in the middle.  
Acosta tells us, That the Fruit being sliced and laid to soak in Wine is counted for a dainty Banquet. It is also laid in Sugar, thereby to preserve it the longer; and sometimes opened with a Knife is filled with Ginger, Garlick, and Mustardseed, and laid to steep in Salt, Oil, and Vinegar, or else is eaten with Rice, or Pickled like Olives: It grows in many places in India, as in Malabar, Goa, Surrat, Balagate, Bengale, Pegu, and others; but the best sort is judged to grow in Ormus, the second in Surrat, and the 〈◊〉 in Balagate.  
A Fruit named Mangan, which grows on the Isle java, is by the Inhabitants accounted above all Cordials in the World, whether Lapis Bezoar, or any other: It is as big as a Coco▪ Nut, and joins close together till grown ripe, for than it cracks and bursts asunder; within lies the Seed wrapped up in Wool, which if not taken off in time, is blown away by the Wind. This Fruit is so dear, that it can scarce be purchased with Money. Moreover, the parts split from each other stick so fast at the bottom to the Stalk, that the strongest Man cannot pull them from it.  
In many places in China grows also Cotton, but in greatest abundance in the Province of Nanking, especially near the City Xangchai, where there are said to dwell two hundred Cotton-Weavers, it being in that place and two neighbouring Villages, the only thing whereby the Inhabitants maintain themselves. The Seed, according to their Relation, was brought out of other Countries into China about five hundred years ago. The Herb or Plant on which the Cotton grows in China, hath a woody Stalk of a Foot and a half long, or two Foot high, and being covered with a darkish red Bark or Rind, divides itself into several short Branches: The Leaves like those of a Vine are divided into three parts, and hang on rough Stalks of two or three Inches long: The Blossom or Flower is like those of Mallows, and ends in Saffron, or (as others say) blue and Purple Stalks; after the Flower follows round Fruit as big as a small Apple, which when grown ripe cracks in two or three places, and shows the white Cotton which is in it; under it is an Oval and white-coloured Seed, which tastes like an Almond or Pineapple.  
Another Plant also which produces Cotton, but grows like a Tree, and hath smother Leaves, grows in Egypt and Arabia; where by the Egyptians it is called Gotnel Segia,, and shoots up to the height of ten Cubits; the Leaves hang on Violet-coloured Stalks, and are divided into five parts; when grown to maturity, the Fruit is almost of the same fashion, though bigger, with brown Seed. Of these Cotton-Trees they make the fine Clothes called Sessa in Arabia.  
The County Chucheufu is full of ancient Pinetree Woods, of which the Chineses build their Houses and Ships.  
It is said, that by the Singian, that is, Earth of Pine-Trees, are such exceeding large Trees, that eighty Men cannot grasp one of them; and some of so vast a compass, that they can enclose thirty Men in their hollow Trunks.  
In the same County in the Province of Chekiang, in the River Luyeu, by the City Kingning, grow great Woods of Canes, which the Chineses by a general Name called Cho; (for there are several sorts) the Indians, Mambu; the Portuguese, Bambu; and the Hollanders, Bamba's: some smaller, others bigger, but all of them as hard as Iron, and oftentimes two or three Span thick, and towards the bottom about the bigness of a Man's Thigh; nay, there are some of such a thickness, that the Indians make Boats of them, by only splitting them in the middle, leaving on each side only two of the undermost Joints, there sitting on each end a naked Indian with a Paddle in each hand, with which they Row these Boats with great swiftness against the Stream. Of the thickest parts of these Canes they make Vessels to put Water or Merchandise into, the Wood thereof being about three Inches thick: The least of them are half a Rod high, and the biggest much higher; wherefore they are not unjustly by some called Trees, and particularly by Garcias compared to the Poplar; some are green, others quite black, and most of them Massive; the Portuguese in India call them Bambu Macho, that is, Man's Cane; though the last sort grows not in China but in India: They grow in Rocky places, shooting upright, though sometimes by Art made crooked, the better to be used for the making of Palakins: They consist from top to bottom of Knots or Joints, about a Hand-breadth from each other; out of which shoot some strait Branches.  
Piso tells of two sorts of Bambu or Mambu that grows in India, the one small, though fuller within, the other bigger, and less filled, which in height and firmness exceeds all other Canes. A more exact Description whereof, together 
Mantis. Arom. p. 185.  with their use, both in Physic and in the making of divers Utensils, may be found in the abovementioned Author, in his Mantissa Aromatica, and also in Martinius.  
In the Gallery of the high School at Leyden are kept two of the foremention'd 
Kilus.  Canes, broke off at both ends, which were brought Anno 1601. out of the East-Indies; the smallest is about one and twenty Foot long, distinguished by twenty nine Joints at the bottom, seventeen Inches in circumference, and fourteen on the top; the biggest is a Foot and a half longer, and three Inches thicker: how big the whole Canes were, may be guessed by these pieces.  
In many places of China grow also Sugarcanes, especially in the County 
Sugarcanes.  Tungchuenfu in the Province of Suchuen, out of which they press great store of good Sugar. But those Canes were in a manner useless amongst the Chinese, till of late years that they were taught this Art of making Sugar, as it is said, by an Indian Priest upon this occasion: This Priest's Ass on which he used to Ride, running into a Cane-Field, was detained by the Owner thereof for satisfaction for the damage which he had done; whereupon the Priest, that he might make satisfaction without the forfeiture of his Ass, taught him the Art of boiling Sugar out of the Canes.  
In the Province of Quantung, and many other places in China, grows a Rose 
Chinese Rose.  which changes its colour twice a day, first it is of a yellowish colour, then Purple, and anon quite white: It hath no smell, and grows on a little Tree. Concerning which change of colour Kircher makes a curious Enquiry, and takes upon him to give the reason thereof in his China Illustrata.  
joannes Baptista Ferrarius largely describes a sort of Chinese Rose, by the Inhabitants 
Flora lib. 4. ca 6. p. 974.  called Fuyo, by others named The Indian and Japan Melleuwe, which by the same Ferrarius was brought out of the West-Indies to Rome; where being Sowed it grew up in a short time: It is of a Milky colour, but afterwards changes to white and red, and at last turning to a Purple, fades and withers: In India it is in one day of three several colours (and flourishes only one day) viz. in the Morning it is White, at Noon, Red, and Purple at Night.  
The Province of Quantung produces a Fruit, by the Chineses called Yencu; by 
Fruit jamboes', or Pampelmoes.  the Portuguese, jambos, (and the Tree jambeiro;) by the Malabars, and those of the Canaries, jambali; by the Indians, Tufa; by the Persians and Arabians, Tufat; by the Turks, Almat; and by the Hollanders, Pampelmoes; the Tree whereon it grows is prickly like the Lemon Tree, but somewhat bigger; the Flower or Blossom being also like that of the Lemon, is white and smells very oderiferously, and out of which they Distil sweet Water: The Fruit much exceeds the greatest Lemons in bigness, for it is oftentimes as big as a Man's Head: The Shell is in Colour like that of the Golden Apple; the Pulp, red and sweet, mixed with a little tartness, and tasting like a Grape which is not quite ripe; so that often times a Liquor is Pressed out of them to drink, in the manner of Cherry-Wine, Perry, or Cider; it remains good a whole Year.  
Garcias tell us, that this Fruit is in high esteem amongst the Indians, and that it was brought first thither a few years since from Malaka, where it grows in great abundance; and gives a farther Description much to the same purpose with what hath been already delivered.  
There are two sorts of these Trees, very like one another; (yet their Fruits differ a little) and resemble not only in fashion and shape, but also in bigness our European Appletrees.  
The Flowers and Fruits of jambos moisten and cool, smell very sweet, and are therefore by the Indians accounted amongst the greatest Dainties; they generally use them in Physic, for being Preserved in Sugar, they are exceeding good against hot Distempers, because by their coolness and moistness, they quench Thirst in Fevers, and revive the Spirits.  
In the County Chivencheufu and Changcheufu, in the Province of Fokien, grow 
Golden Apples.  abundance of Golden-Apples, which in weight and bigness differ little from the European, but surpass them in Scent and Deliciousness; neither doth the Tree differ much from the European, but the Fruit differs from that which grows in other parts of China, and both Tastes and Smells exactly like a Muskadel-Grape, so that it yields not to any kind of Fruit that Europe affords: the Golden and thick Rind is easily Peeled of; in like manner, the Meat is distinguished by a thin Skin, which is easily broken.  
The Inhabitants Preserve the Fruits (after having Pressed the same between two Board's) in Sugar, and so keeping them a whole Year, both furnish their Neighbours, and send of them into foreign Countries.  
In most parts of China, in all standing-Waters, they Sow a Seed, which with 
Fruit Linkio.  small Leaves covers all the Water: The Fruit thereof called Linkio, grows in great abundance under the Water, and is in fashion like a three-sided Spire: The Rind which is green and thick, and red at the corners, turns black when dried: The Kernel thereof is very White, and tastes like a Chest-nut, but is twice or thrice as big.  
The Lake Malo lying in the fifth County Xuntefu in the Province of Peking, is much noted for the forementioned Fruit.  
In the Southern Provinces of China, and especially in the Province of Queicheu, 
The Fruit Bananas, or Mauz.  by the little City Pugan, grows a Fruit, by the Chineses called Pacayao; by the Malabars and Malaers, Palan; by the javans, Piesang or Pysang; by the Brasilians in the West-Indies, Bananas; by the Arabians in Egypt, Mauz; by some in Europe, Indian-Figs, and Adams-Apples, from the Opinion of a Franciscan Monk, who holds this Fruit to be the same with that which Adam eat in Paradise, and with the Leaves whereof being very large, he covered his Nakedness.  
The Tree, or rather Sprout, is according to Acosta, a fine Plant, and grows eighteen or twenty handfuls high, and being as big about as a Man's Thigh, consists of many Barks, which lie close one upon another; it grows to the height of a Granate-Tree without Branches, for it spreads its Leaves like Canes. Boem writes, that the body thereof is thick, round, and green, not firm nor massy, but swelled with a Watery moisture; it seems to consist of abundance of roul'd-up Leaves, which are nine handfuls long, and two and a half broad; or according to Alpinus, three or four Yards long, and about two 
Vesting. in Alpin.  broad, insomuch, that one Leaf may cover a Man all over, nay, wind round about him. The young Leaves extend in length and height like Indian Canes, being first roul'd up together, but when grown old, begin to open; through the middle long-ways, runs a pretty thick and long Vein, yet nevertheless, they are subject to crack and rent at the edges, if ruffled by the Wind; and on each side many cross Veins, which are of a sad Colour underneath, but upwards of a pale Green; from the top of the Tree grows a Stalk with ruddy Coloured Flowers, like a Pineapple, each of them is bigger than a Tulip or Lily, but round, or rather Oval; afterwards it produces a Branch, divided into many Joints, on each of which hang ten or fourteen Figs, so that this Bough is sometimes loaden with a hundred, or two hundred Figs: Or as Boem saith, from the middle of the Leaf shoots one single Branch with Flowers, which also grow to be Figs, to the number sometimes of above a thousand on one Bough, which one man is scarce able to carry; some of the Figs are as small as a Damsin, others as big as a great Pear, according to the Boughs on which they grow. The Fruit itself is very sweet, hath a Yellow Shell, with a soft, sweet, and well-scented Pulp, which tastes like Preserved Raspberries; being boiled either in Honey or Sugar, and afterwards dried, it is counted good against Phlegmatic Humours. The Fruit is all the Year long to be had in the Southern Provinces of China, but in the Northern, it bears only great Leaves, and yields no Fruit; though it requires six Months to ripen, yet ripe Figs may be had every Month, since this Tree observes no set-time, but Buds, Flowers, and is Ripe in several places all at one time. If one Bough be cut off from the 
Alpinus.  Tree, or one Fig plucked from a Bough, the Tree will never produce either Bough or Fruit more, but withering, is cut off, and given in India for Food to the Elephants.  
This Plant, as some say, grew first from a Sugar-Cane, Graffed on the Root of another Plant, called Colokasia, very common in Egypt; and indeed you may perceive the nature of both in the same, for the Leaves are as long as those of Sugarcanes, and as broad as those of Colokasia; it is always Green, and never bore of Leaves.  
The common Opinion is, that from the Mouth of the Flower, opened at 
Vesting.  the right time, drops a kind of spital, which is supposed to be its Seed, since young Sprouts grow out of the Root or Foot of the Tree, before ever the Flower opens.  
The Chineses in the Province of Quangsi, in the County Pinglofu, make Clothes of the Red Muisu Leaves.  
In divers places in China, and especially on the Isle Ainan, grows a Fruit-Tree, by the Chineses called Polomie; by the Portuguese, from the Indians, Giaka and jaka; by those of Surat, Pana's; by those of the Canaries, Panasu; by the Arabians, Panax; by the Persians, Funax; and in Kalicut, jonceras.  
The Tree in the Chinese Tongue properly called Polomioxu, that is, Polomy Tree, is, as Acosta tells us, very tall and big about, hath pale Green Leaves, about a Hand big, with a hard sinew in the middle; it bears a small number of a very large Fruit, which grow not on the Boughs, but on the main Body of the Tree (as Peter Martyr saith) as if the Boughs refused to carry so great a burden, notwithstanding they are very tough and strong.  
Acosta saith, that the Fruit jaka is long, thick, dark Green, hard, and hath a thick Shell: Martin affirms, that it is so hard and thick, that it must be opened with an Axe: It is full of Green Thorns with Black Points, very like the Fruit Durion, but not sharp nor prickly, though seeming so; when ripe it hath a strong Scent: The smallest of this sort of Fruit is bigger than the greatest Pumkin, especially that which grows in Malabar, but that of Goa is lesser and of a worse Taste. Martinius saith, That the jaka or Polomie is accounted the biggest Fruit in the World: And Boem affirms, That one of them alone is a Man's burden: It is White, and hath a firm Pulp, with little Husks, wherein are several Nuts or Kernels like Chest-nuts, (sometimes enough to suffice ten or twenty Men) longer and thicker than Dates, and covered with Ash-coloured Shells; Earthy, of an ill Taste, and causing Wind if eaten Raw, but if Roasted like Chest-nuts, well-tasted; they are said to provoke Lechery, for which reason the Common People esteem them highly.  
Every Chest-nut-like-Kernel is enclosed in a Yellow and tough Husk (like that of the Fruit Durion, yet not without a little difference) and being Boiled, tastes like a sweet Chest-nut.  
This Fruit is by the Chineses called A Bag full of Honey-Chest-nuts; it tastes much better than a Melon, but is counted unwholesome and hard of Digestion. The Pith about the Kernels, which the Portuguese call Cocobarka, is by how much harder, so much the better; the softness of the Skin, is a sign of the ripeness of the Fruit; it ripens commonly in May and june.  
Another sort of jaka, called Champidaka, grows not only in China, but on the 
Fruit Champidaka.  Island java, and several other places in India; and that after the common manner, not on the Body of the Tree, as the first sort; it is of a better taste, and wholesomer than the common jaka: The Tree spreads itself very much, and is extraordinary high, and broad Leaved; out of the calcined Shells of these two prickly Fruits, the Indians make a Composition, which they use in stead of Soap or Lie to scour Clothes with.  
In the Southern Provinces, Quantung, Quangsi, junnan, Foquieu, and on the 
Fruit Fa●…, Polo, or Ana nas.  Island Ainan, grows in great abundance a Fruit, by the Chineses called Fanpolomie; by the Brasilians, (according to Piso) Nano; (according to Lerius,) Panaco; by the Spaniards in New-Spain, jajama, from its likeness with a Pineapple; and by the Portuguese, Ananas, which they hammered without doubt from the Brasilian name Nana.  
The ripe Fruit is very juicy, and of a sweetish taste with a mixture of sowrness; of a deep Vermilion Colour, or (as Acosta says) Yellow, as big as a Melon or Cytron, or (as Boem writes) as a Pineapple; the edges are of a lively Colour, good smell, nay so strong it is, that any Person walking may smell in what House they hang up in to ripen: It is generally without full of whitish knobs; the ripe Fruit is crowned with a young Plant, which cut off, and without Root, (for it hath none put into the Ground) bears Fruit the next Year; every Plant produces only one Fruit a Year, and that Fruit a new Plant, which when cut off and set in the Ground, the old is pulled out, and thrown away as unfruitful; the Root is like that of an Artichoke; the Fruit sliced and steeped in Wine, gives it an excellent Savour and Relish, but bites the Tongue and heats the Palate: The Juice thereof refreshes the fainting Heart, revives the Spirits, and strengthens a squeamish Stomach: Moreover, its Juice or Wine (much more the Distilled Water) is exceeding good against the Gravel: The Root also is a Remedy to cure the forementioned Distemper: But those that are troubled with, or are careful to avoid Agues, must be sure to abstain both from the Fruit, and all that belongs to it.  
China also produces several sorts of Spices and Aromatic Plants, in the Southern Province, bordering upon India, though in no great abundance, viz. Pepper, in the Chinese Tongue called Hucyao, which grows in the Province of junnan. Cinnamon (as already we have made mention) in the Province of Quantung and Quangsi: But there is exceeding good Ginger in great abundance, which they call Sem Kiam, and store of Coco-nuts in the Southern Provinces, and especially on the Isle Ainan: But because all those Plants and Fruits have been largely described by others, it would be needless to make rehearsal thereof.  
In several places in China grows the Plant Tee or Cha, so called by the Chinese, 
Tee or Cham  by which Name it is known among us; and Cia or Tchia and Tsia, by the japanners; though amongst the Chinese, according to the several places wherein it grows, it hath several Denominations; as likewise from its goodness, for the Inhabitants of the thirteenth County Chucheufu in the Province of Nanking, call the best Tee Sunglocha; those of the third County Hucheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, Kiaichai; those in the Province of Fokien, Ziazcha.  
The Water or Liquor in which this Plant is boiled, is also by the Chineses 
Piso Annotas. in Bort.  properly called Tee and Cha, and Chia or Tsia by the japanners: There are those which say, that Tsia or Chia in general signifies Meat and Drink; as Lo Chia, Will you please to have Meat or Drink?  
The Plant The, according to Martin and Trigaut, is a Shrub and no Tree, grows about the 
b Piso.  height of an European Rasberry-bush, or Rose-Tree, and 
c Martin.  dividing itself into several Boughs, is like the Myrtle-tree, and partly tastes like it, yet grows not Wild but is Planted: 
d Piso.  The Boughs and Stalks of the whole Sprout, are from top to bottom, always full of Leaves and Flowers: The Leaves are thin, sharp before, and notched round about, in shape Oval, in bigness like those of the Granate-Tree; and though of one shape, yet are of such several bignesses, that on one Sprout four or five sizes of Leaves are to be seen: The first and biggest grow on the undermost Boughs, and are like the Leaves of Garden-Balsom: The second size much less than the first; so accordingly the rest which grow higher, still lessen more and more; but as much as the uppermost Leaves abate in bigness, so much they increase in value; for one of the first rank of Leaves dried and prepared, costs five Pence; the second sort, fifty; the third, ten Shillings; the fourth, if rightly prepared, thirty; the difference of the Value, follows from the difference of the Virtue, which according to Trigaut, is very considerable; insomuch, that they often give for one Pound of the best, two, sometimes three Ducats: In japan, the best cost ten, and twelve Ducats.  
The Flowers of the The are of a Yellowish White, in bigness and shape like the Eglantine, but not in smell, which according to Martin, is faintyish. After the falling off of the Flowers, there remains a Cod or Husk, which is first Green, and afterwards turns Black, in it lies a round Black Seed, like those of Roses: This Seed Sown, yields a new Plant in three years' time. 
Martin.   
The Root is full of Strings, divided into several Knobs, which lie not deep in the Ground, but are just covered with the same, and are for no use; all the Virtue of this Plant consisting only in the Leaves; the freshest and youngest of which are made use of in the making their Drink Cha; they gather them in the Spring, one by one, and immediately put them to warm in an Iron Kettle over the fire, then laying them a on fine light Mat, roll them together with their Hands: The Leaves thus roul'd up, are again hanged over the fire, and then again roul'd closer together, till they are dry, and then put up carefully in Tin Vessels, thereby to keep them from all moistness; Trigaut tells us, that the Chineses dry not the Leaves over the fire, but in the Sun.  
In the using of these Leaves is some differnece betwixt the japanners and Chineses, for they (says Trigaut) throw some of the Leaves into a Pot of boiling Water, which when the Virtue of the Leaf is sufficiently infused into it, they Drink hot, without eating the Leaves: The Chineses, as the Lord Tulp tells us, boil the Leaves with a little Salt and Sugar, to take away the bitterness in a certain Liquor which they drink warm; or else they put a Handful of The Leaves in a Pint-Pot, then pour it full of scalding Water, and about two or three Minutes after, Drink the same very hot.  
The Chineses generally, both Night and Day, drink of the Liquor wherein the fore mentioned Leaves are boiled, and not only ordinarily at Table, but have it ready upon all occasions at great Entertainments; and the greatest Nobles and Princes think not much to prepare it themselves, and have in their Palaces Hearths of rich Stone, principally made for that purpose, and are much looked upon according to the richness of the Utensils they use therein.  
The Water of the Fountain Hoei, in the County Chancheufu, of the Province of Kiangnan, is accounted the best by the Chineses to make their Drink Cha; and for that use bought by the Grandees, and from thence carried to the remotest Provinces, nay to the Emperor's Court at Peking.  
The Chineses also drink their Cha out of peculiar Earthen Dishes, which add a curious smell to the Liquor, almost like that of Juniper, Cypress and Aloes-Wood; some of them are to be seen, being brought from thence hither.  
The best of these Cups (according to Martinius) are made in the City Guihing, (in the Province of Kiangnang) which from whence takes its Denomination, for Guihing signifies Glory of the Earth; these are for this reason by the Chinese chosen before those of the Province of Kiangsi, notwithstanding those are clearer and brighter, because they give a pleasant scent and taste to the Liquor, for which cause they are highly esteemed by them; and in the whole City before named, they do in a manner nothing else but make Tee-Cups, some of which they sell very dear.  
The Chineses highly extol the Virtue of the Liquor Tee, and chiefly ascribe the reason that they are never troubled with the Stone nor Gout, to the same; for, say they, to drink it after Meals, takes away all indigestion and rawness of the Stomach, and causes Digestion, makes those that are inebriated sober, and restores them fresh power and Senses, removes giddiness and pains of the Head, occasioned by excess of Drink, because it consumes the abundance of Moistures; and those that are called upon to vigilancy, by drinking the same expel their drowsiness, and become very vigorous and fit for Business; it prolongs life also, fortifies the Sight, and is commended by the famous Physician Nicholaus Tulp, for the wholsomest Plant that grows: And for a more particular enumeration of its Virtues, the said Physician may not unfitly beconsulted.  
Moreover, the Chineses not only use this Drink, but also the Indians, Tartars, those of Tibet, Mogor, and almost all the People on the Shore of the Oriental Sea; and of late years it hath been in use in divers parts of Europe, where it is prepared after the same manner as amongst the Chinese, excepting that we put a little Sugar-Candy into it, to abate the bitterness of it, as it appears to our Palates.  
It is doubted whether this Plant and the use thereof were known to the Chineses in former Ages: Trigaut tells us that they have not used it long, because in the old Chinese Books not one Character or Letter is found that expresses the same. Others affirm, that this Plant or Herb grew many Ages ago wild, and without Planting, but that the Setting or Sowing of it, its Virtue and manner of making Liquor thereof was known but of late to the Chinese. The Herb at this day grows not wild, but is planted with great care on Hills, and Set about three Foot distant one Plant from another. It grows in no other place but China, Siam, japan and Tunking; but in no part of China in greater abundance than in the thirteenth County Chicheufu in the Province of Nanking.  
In the seventh County juenki in the Province of junnan, and in the third County Kingyven in the Province of Quangsi, grows the Fruit called Areka (already spoken of) otherwise called Fausel, which the Inhabitants, as most of the Indians, chew with the Leaves of Betel, which colours their spital red: It is in the Country Language named Makinnang.   

Beasts.  
AS the Country of China is blessed with divers sorts of Trees, Plants and Herbs, so it likewise abounds with fourfooted Beasts, Birds, Fishes, and creeping Animals.  
In all parts of China, especially in the Province of Quantung, are Hearts, Stags, Bucks, Hares, and the like, which by Travellers are seen in great Herds. Great abundance of Deer are also in the Province of Huquang.  
China also is every where stored with such like Sheep as are found in Persia and Tartary, viz. having long and thick Tails, which trail after them, and weigh sometimes forty Pound, and are extraordinary good Meat.  
About the tenth Garrisoned City Tieki in the Province of Suchuen, and in the County jungningfu in the Province of junnan, are a sort of cattle with long, thick, and curled Hair on their Tails, which the Chinese Soldiers wear on their Helmets and Ensigns in stead of Feathers. Of this Hair they also make Tapestry, and exceeding good Clothes to keep out Rain. Great store of these kind of cattle are also in the Kingdom of Tibet.  
The Kine in the Counties Chingcheufu and Tengcheufu in the Province of Xantung, have a certain Stone found in their Maw, which they call Nicuhoang, that is, The yellowness of a Cow, because of the yellow colour, for Nicu is A Cow, and Hoang, Yellow. This Stone differs in bigness, and is sometimes as big as a Goose Egg, but is not so firm as a Bezoar Stone, and therefore much lighter, yet in greater esteem amongst the Chinese Physicians: it appears to those that look on it like yellowish Chalk. It is, as the Chineses affirm, of a cold Temper, but dries up the Rheum in the Head extremely: Its Powder, if thrown into boiling Water, immediately cools the same, but cold Water being poured upon it, a Vapour arises from it, and presently soaks up the Water.  
According to Martinius, this Stone is by Bellenius called the Gall-Stone; and by the Arabians, as the same Author writeth, Haraczi.  
In the County Luicheufu in the Province of Quantung, is a Beast, by the Chineses 
Flying Cow:  called The flying Cow, because of its swiftness in running, for they say it can run three hundred Furlongs in a day: It hath a long round Horn on the Head.  
In the County Cincheufu in the Province of Quangsi, is a Horned Beast like an Ox, whose Horns are much whiter than Ivory. This Beast is strangely desirous of Salt; whereof the Hunters taking their advantage, lay whole Bags full before it, which it falls upon so greedily, that it suffers itself rather to be taken, bound, and killed, than to desist from licking the Salt-Bags, which is the only way they have to take it.  
In the Province of Peking are Cats with white long Hair, and hanging Ears, 
White Cats like Iselan Shocks.  which by Ladies and Persons of Quality are kept for their pleasure, but will not catch Mice, being perhaps fed with other Dainties; yet there are other good Mousing Cats, which are not so well fed as the former. And amongst the rest is a Cat called Xumxu, of a yellow colour (though some are black) with 
The Beast Xamxu.  very shining Hair, being an excellent Mouser.  
These Creatures are naturally wild, but when taken by the Chinese are made tame, and hang Silver about their Necks: Some of them are sold for nine Scudoes. 
A Scudo is about 2 d.   
In the Province of Peking, about the Garrisoned City Siven, are great Mice 
Great Mice.  with yellow Hair, in great esteem amongst the Chinese.  
In the Province of Xantung are Wolves, which devour both Men and Plants. 
Wolves.   
In the Province of Xensi are many Bears, whose fore-feets are by the Chineses 
Dears.  accounted a great Dainty.  
In the Mountainous County Linyaofu in the Province of Xensi, are many wild Bulls, and Beasts like Tigers, or Panthers, or Leopards, and according to Martinius called Pau, and by Boem, Hiven Pao: The Chineses make Clothing of their Skins.  
In the Province of Suchuen, and likewise in the fifth County Chucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, is the Beast which the Greeks call Rhinoceros, that is Nose-Horn, because of a Horn which it hath on its Snout or Nose.  
The Elephants which are seen in most parts of China, are all brought out of the Provinces of junnan and Quangsi, where they breed in great numbers, the Inhabitants making use of them in time of War.  
The whole Province of Chekiang is infested with fierce Tigers; but on the Mountain Kutien, near the City Kaiho, breed Tigers which do no hurt to Men. In the neighbouring Countries again they are very wild, and of a cruel Nature; yet the wildest of them being brought to this Mountain grow immediately tame. Tiger's breed also on the Mountain Xepao in the County Gucheufu in the Province of Quangsi. There are likewise ravenous Tigers and Leopards in the Mountain Nalo in the County Chinyvenfu in the Province of junnan.  
In the County Nanningfu in the Province of Quangsi, are great wild Boars, 
Boars.  with Tusks of a Foot and a half long, which with a strange motion of their Bodies they strike at all Persons which come near them, and certainly tear them to pieces.  
In no part of China are so many good Horses as in the Province of junnan, 
Horses;  especially in the County junnanfu, and by the Garrison Moping; likewise in the Province of Suchuen, near the Garrisoned City Po.  
On the Mountain Holan in the Province of Xensi, by the Garrisoned City Ninghia, are many wild Horses.  
The Chinese Horses are generally of no high size, but very fat, broad Buttocked, and strong for Travel; they are Ridden with a Bit, and without being beaten, observe their Master's words of command.  
In the County Cungkingfu in the Province of Suchuen, on the Mountain Tayung, 
Baboons.  are Baboons, which in bigness and shape are very like a Man, and so furiously lustful after Women, that oftentimes surprising them in the Way, they Ravish them.  
In the Province of Fokien, by the third little City on the Mountain Puon, as the Chineses write, there is a hairy Animal very like a Man. The same Creature called Tuse, is found in the Kingdom of Gannan.  
In the Province of Xansi, about the City Leao, and especially in the third County Hangcheufu in the Province of Suchuen, in the second Paoningfu, and about the City Kiating, by the sixth Garrisoned City Tienciven, in several places in the Province of junnan, and many other parts towards the West, there is great store of Musk, which a kind of Matter taken from the sweeting of the Navel (in form of a Purse) of a certain Beast like a Deer, in the Chinese Tongue called Xe, and the Musk Xehiang, that is, Scent of the Xe, for Hiang signifies Scent; or according to Michael Boem, and Philip Marinus, in his History of the Kingdom of Tunking, Xehiang signifies properly A sweet-scented Hart.  
Philip Marinus before mentioned describes the Musk which this Beast produces in this manner:  
They have (meaning those of Laos) the natural and true Musk out of the Kingdom of Goai. In the Woods lurks a Deer which the Chineses call Yehiam, that is, Musk-Deer, which is as big as a Do or Hart, though, to speak truth, I know no Beast that hath greater resemblance with it (except the Head, which is like that of a Wolf, and hath two long Teeth) than an old wild Boar: it is of a sadder colour than a Deer, and so slow in motion, that the Hunters thereof are only troubled to rouse it, for than it stands still, and suffers itself to be killed without making the least resistance. Moreover, the Musk which they take from this Beast is of divers Prices: After they have taken it they draw all the Blood from it, and keep it apart from his Navel; they also cut a Bag which is full of Blood, or sweet-scented Moisture; then they flay and cut it in many pieces. When they will make the best Musk of it, they take one half of the Beast, the hind part from the Kidneys, which with a little Blood they stamp in a great Stone-Mortar till they have made it a Pap, with which after it is dried they fill little Bags made of the Deres Skin. There is a worse sort, made of the forepart of the Beast as far as the Kidneys; but the worst of all is made of the whole Beast together: And this last is the Musk used in these Countries of Europe. Thus far Marinus.  
When this Beast, as the Chineses write, is carried out of the Kingdom of Lu. into that of Laos, it dies instantly, like a Fish which is taken out of the Water.   

Birds.  
IN the Province of Xensi, about the Garrisoned City Mincheu, and by the sixth Garrisoned City Tienciven in the Province of Suchuen, are Hens, whose Bodies are covered with Wool like that of Sheep in stead of Feathers: they are little, and have short Legs, but are very valiant; great Ladies keep them for their pleasure. The like sort are also in Kambodia and Siam. But Kircher objects against this Relation, and maintains by several Arguments, that they are rather fine curled Feathers or Down, than Wool.  
In the County Nanningfu in the Province of Quangsi are a sort of strange and wonderful Hens, which evacuate long Threads, such as are generally Spun of the Cotton which grows on Trees, and (if they be not immediately taken from them) swallow them up again.  
Another sort of wild Hens called jeki, breed on the high Mountains in the Provinces of Xensi and Quangsi, and are of an extraordinary bigness, having white Heads and divers coloured Feathers, with Bunches both on their Backs and Breasts, wherefore they are by some called Toki, that is, Cammel-Hens.  
In the first County Chingtefu in the Province of Suchuen, is a strange and 
The Bird Tunghoafung.  wonderful Bird, which the Chineses call Tunghoafung, that is, The Bird of the Flower Tung; Fung signifies a Bird, and Hoa a Flower; and Tung is the proper Name for the Flower, for it grows out of the Flower Tunghoa, and lives so long as the Flower of the Tree continues: We might justly call it A Living Flower, partly for its likeness and beauty, and partly for its shortness of life: It hath a reddish Bill, tastes very sweet, and is very admirable to behold, being of all sorts of Colours.  
In several parts of China is a Bird named Chin, whose Feathers mixed with Wine made of Rice, and afterwards pounded very small, is so deadly a Poison, that no Medicine whatsoever can expel the same.  
In the County Xincheufu in the Province of Huquang, breeds a Bird on the 
The Bird Lokung.  Mountain Lekung, which never makes a noise but against Rain, and thereby gives warning thereof to the Husbandmen.  
In the County Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, the Chineses catch certain 
The Bird Hoangcio.  Birds named Hoangcio, which steeping in Wine made with Rice, they sell all the year long for a great Dainty.  
In the first Territory Queilingfu in the Province of Quangsi, are many curious Birds, whose various coloured Feathers the Chinese Wove amongst their Silk-Stuffs.  
In the County Kiocingfu in the Province of junnan are Swallows with divers 
Swallows.  white Spots under their Bellies, some bigger, some lesser: The Chinese Physicians Distil an excellent Water from them, which cures all Distempers incident to the Eyes.  
The Province of Quantung abounds with a sort of Ducks, which are brought 
Ducks.  up with great care by the Inhabitants; they are in most parts of China, but no where in such abundance as in Quantung.  
These Ducks, Hatch not their Eggs as with us, but the Chineses put them into a warm Oven, or bury them in hot Dung after the same manner as it is said the Egyptians do at Grand Cairo.  
The Chineses also on Shipboard breed whole Coops full of Ducks, setting them on the Shore at Low-water, there to feed on Oysters, Crabs, and the like. Several Companies of them belonging to divers Vessels, oftentimes mix themselves together in the Water and on the Shore, but towards Evening at the Ringing on a Basin return to their several Vessels.  
The Chineses also use Ducks to Weed their Rice.  
In most parts of China is found a Bird in the Chinese Tongue called Louwa, 
The Bird Louwa.  which is smaller than a Goose, and not unlike a Raven, with a long Bill and Neck like a Crane, at the end crooked, with Feet like a Swan, and a very wide Maw, excellent for Fishing.  
This Bird seems to be the same with that which Pliny calls by the Greek Name 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifies Asse's Cymbal, because of its strange noise, and is by him described in the following words:  
The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 (saith he) differs not much in shape from a Swan, except in the Throat, in which, being of an extraordinary bigness, this unreasonable Creature stores all that it gets: After it hath gotten its fill, the gorged Store comes up again into the Mouth, and from thence being chewed, goes into the Belly. Thus far Pliny.  
The Chineses fish with these Birds, teaching them to catch Fish as here we teach our Dogs to Hunt: Their Fishing is in this manner:  
But to prevent these Birds from swallowing the Fish, which they are very greedy of; they lock their Throats, by putting on an Iron Ring about them, beyond which the Fish cannot pass.  
Those Fish which by reason of their bigness cannot be swallowed, they bring up in their Bills, giving timely notice to the Fisherman, by a noise which they make, that so he may be ready to take the Fish from them; nay sometimes one Bird helps another (if the Fish be very big) to bring him to the Boat, each holding a part thereof in his Bill.  
If any Bird, after his being put overboard, Dive not instantly under Water, it is cruelly beaten with a Cane, till the Feathers fly off, thereby to break it of its slothfulness.  
After they have taken a considerable number of Fish, the Iron Ring is taken off from them, that then they may Fish for themselves, which makes them another time the willinger to Fish for their Masters.  
The Fishermen pay yearly for every Fish a certain Tribute to the Emperor.  
The Birds beforementioned are very dear, one of them (which is any thing dextrous in fishing) being sold for fifty Tail of Silver, every Tail being an English Crown.  
john Gonzalves of Mendoza, in his Description of the Empire of China, calls these Fishing-birds Sholfers, and gives an account of their Fishing, much to the same purpose as hath been already described.  
The Chinese (says he) have a peculiar way of Fishing, which is very pleasant and good. The Emperor keeps in every Town built near Rivers certain Houses, in which every year young Sholfers are bred up, with which they Fish in certain seasons, after this manner:  
The Masters of the Fowls take them out of their Coops, and carry them down to the Shore, where they keep many Boats to Fish with, and fill them half way full of Water, than they tie their Crop with a String under their Wings so close that they cannot swallow the Fish; then they throw them into the Water to Fish, which they do with great eagerness, and Dive with great dexterity and swiftness under the Water; after having been a while out of sight, they appear again with their Bill and Throat full of Fish, and come flying towards the Boat, and evacuate the Fish in the Water which is in the Boat, that so they may be kept alive.  
In the County Nanningfu, of the Province of Quangsi, are a kind of small Parrots, in bigness and shape like Mag-Pies.  
On the craggy Mountains of Suchuen are very large Mag-Pies, and in the same County, near the Garrisoned City Ydmui great store of Larks.  
In the Provinces of Quantung, Quangsi, and junnan, are both tame and wild Peacocks; they are in no other Provinces, unless brought from thence.  
In the County Hoaiganfu, in the Province of Nanking, are more Quails and Pheasants than in any other part of China.  
In the County Taipingfu, in the Province of Nanking, lies an Island named Hoa, in the River Kiang, which seems to be nothing but a hollow Rock, in which are an incredible number of Owls; from whence the Island hath gotten its Denomination.  
In the Province of Xantung are great store of Poultry, Pheasants and Woodcocks, insomuch that they are bought there extraordinary cheap.  
Very remarkable is a Bird properly called Fung, and by addition of the word Ciang, is named Fungciang, in regard the appearance of the Bird (which is very seldom and always alone) is by the Chineses looked upon as a good Omen, and very fortunate to the whole Empire. Boem also writes, that if this Bird disappears suddenly from the sight of Men, it is a sign of one or other sad event, or threatening danger to those of the Royal Blood. The Chineses have this Bird in great veneration, so that the Figure of it is frequently seen among them, both in their Paintings, Tapestry, Weaving, and their Embroideries of Gold, Silver and Silk, and the greatest of the Nobility have the Effigies of it often wrought on their Clothes. Martinius will have him to be the Phoenix, or else an unknown sort of Crane, resembling a Peacock in head, and variety of Colours; it is said to breed in the Mountain of the Kingdom of Tang.  
The same Martinius tells us, that in the County Munghoafu, in the Province of junnan, is a Mountain, from the Chinese Phoenix called Funghoang; because this Bird (as they say) died on the same, after he had sung a while very melodiously. They also add, that all the Birds about the latter end of Harvest meet on the same, and there bewail the death of their Phoenix: The Inhabitants observe also that time, and climb up the Hill in the Night with Lights to catch Birds, and return from thence loaden with their purchase.  
Moreover, (according to Bontius) on the Island java, breed ordinary Bats in the Woods, which are as big as Pigeons, which the javans eat for a great Dainty: They often come into the Houses at Night, if the Windows or Doors chance to be left open in the Day, and fastening themselves like Leeches to the Feet of those whom they find asleep, suck great abundance of Blood from them, which more amazes than hurts them when they awake.   

Fishes.  
BEcause of the many Rivers, Pools and Lakes, the Country of China abounds with variety of Fish, especially the Province of Xantung, which by reason of its Neighbourhood to the Sea, hath, besides the Fish taken in Rivers and Lakes, great store which are got in the Sea, in such abundance, that for the value of a Penny they purchase ten Pound weight of Fish.  
Also there is incredible store of Fish in the Province of Huquang, and likewise in that of Kiangsi, especially Salmon.  
In the River Kiang, about the City Kieukyang, though some Leagues from the Sea, store of Fish is caught, as Cod, Dolphins, and Salmon.  
In the River Lofeu, by the City Xeu in the Province of Huquang, are excellent Lamprees in abundance.  
The Yellow River amongst the rest breeds a Fish named Xehon, that is Marbled Flower, so called from the Marble Spots on its Skin: It is caught in no other place but near the City Paote in the Province of Xansi, and is in great esteem amongst such as take upon them to understand Eating: They are taken chiefly in the Province of Fokien near the City Hunghoa.  
The River Tan, which glides close by the chief City Nanyang in the Province of Honan, hath Fish of a perfect red colour, which are only seen and caught in the beginning of Summer; for the remaining time of the year they hide themselves.  
The Chineses ridiculously believe, and some have written to that effect: If any one besmears his Feet with the Blood of this Fish, he may walk on the Water as well as on the Land. They add moreover, That if the Water be stirred at that time, it immediately turns red, together with all the Fish, which at that present appear; wherefore it hath the Name of Tan, that is, Red.  
The County of Ningpofu in the Province of Chekiang, lying near the Sea, is well provided with Sea-Fish, which they dry in the Sun, as Oysters, Crabs, and Lobsters, with which they furnish most parts of China.  
In the beginning of Summer is caught a Fish named Hoang, that is to say, 
The Fish Hoang.  Yellow, because of its yellow colour. This Fish is of such a Nature, that it will not last one hour good after it is taken out of the Water; but it is exceedingly valued amongst the Chinese: they put it into Vessels with Ice, and so bring it to Market; for which purpose they preserve Ice in the Winter to keep the forementioned Fish in in the Summer.  
In a Lake of the compass of two hundred Acres, lying on the Mountain 
The Fish Kinyu.  Cienking in the County Hancheufu in the Province of Chekiang, they catch Fish of a Golden colour, from which they are called Kinyu, for Kin signifies Gold, and Thou, a Fish, having a Scale which shines as if sprinkled with Gold. They scarce ever exceed a Finger's length, yet have Tails split into two or three parts, sometimes entire and broad, which make them appear fair to the Eye: They are by the Chineses kept with great care alive in their Houses or Gardens in neat Vessels made for that purpose. The Grandees often with their own Hands catch this Fish, which on the other side, as if it knew who was its Lord, and what pleasure it did him, comes as it were on purpose with his Companion and plays just above the Water. One of these Fishes, if it be perfect and sound, costs sometimes three or four Crowns.  
In the watery Valley on the Mountain Haiyang, near the City Queiling in the Province of Quangsi, are fourfooted and Horned Fish.  
In the River Siang, in the County Changxafu in the Province of Huquang, and 
The Fish Kiyu, or Xau●…l.  in the great River Kiang, where it runs through the Province of Nanking, are a sort of Fish, by the Chinese from the Portuguese corruptly called Xanel. A great quantity of this Fish packed up alive in Ice in peculiar Vessels, is sent to the Emperor to Peking, every Week two Ships Lading of them as long as the time of Fishing continues; and though it be above two hundred Leagues by Water, yet in eight or ten days they finish their Journey: for Night and Day the Vessels are Toed by a Line, and new Toers taken so soon as the old ones begin to be tired, which at appointed places, like our Stages, stand ready: for by a Letter sent before they acquaint them with the Hour when they shall be there; and if any neglect happen herein, the Governors forfeit their Lives. No Cost nor Charges are spared to procure the Emperor this excellent Fish, of which he gives some to his Council of State.  
The County Chinkiangfu in the Province of junnan, hath many Rivers, Pools and Lakes abounding with Fish, and amongst others one, out of which the Physicians draw an excellent Medicine against all kind of Scurf and Scabs.  
In the same County by the City Yangcung, in the Lake Ming, is a black coloured 
〈…〉.  Fish named Cing, which is said to be good against many Diseases.  
In the County Fungciangfu in the Province of Xensi near the City Pingyang, 
The 〈◊〉 〈◊〉.  they take a Fish called Xe, that is, Stone, which being dried and beaten to Powder, keeps Moths out of Clothes if strowed on the same.  
In the Sea before the County Taicheufu in the Province of Chekiang, the Chineses catch many Haions, or Seals, whose Skins they send to japan to make Scabbards for Swords, and through all parts of China, making great profit of them; as the said Skin is used amongst us, for the making Cases for Watches, and Handles for Knives.   

Serpents and creeping Animals.  
IN the County Fungchiangfu in the Province of Xensi, is a sort of black Serpent, of which the Chineses make a Medicine to expel Poison, and cure many Distempers.  
In the County Nanyangfu in the Province of Honan, are Serpents, whose Skin is generally full of white Spots. The Wine in which they have been steeped, is an excellent Remedy against Stiffness of the Joints or Limbs.  
In the County Hoangcheufu in the Province of Huquang, are Serpents which heal the Leprosy and Scabbiness.  
On the Mountain Citien, by the City Caihoa in the Province of Chekiang, are very great Serpents, which have no manner of Poison.  
In the County Gucheufu in the Province of Quangsi, are (as the Chineses write) 
Serpent Gento.  Serpents several Rods in length, no wonder then if they are affirmed to be the biggest in the whole World. Michael Boem saith, That these Serpents, called Gento, are found on the Isle Ainan in the Provinces of Quantung, Quangsi, and some other places, and are without doubt the biggest of all Serpents, being about eighteen or twenty Foot long: they are said to swallow whole Deer, but are not accounted very poisonous; when hungry they leap out of Hedges or Bramble-Bushes, then rising upright and standing on their Tail, encounter whatever they meet, whether Man or Beast; sometimes from a Tree set upon Travellers, and winding about their middle, destroy them: Their Gall is accounted by the Chineses good for sore Eyes.  
In the Province of Quangsi, and in many other places in India, is a sort of 
Serpent Cabros de Cabello.  Serpents, by the Portuguese called Cabros de Cabello, that is, Serpents of Hair, or Hairy Serpents; in the Heads whereof a Stone is found, by the Portuguese named Piedro del Cobra, or Serpent-Stone, good against Wounds or the Bitings of the same Serpent, which otherwise would destroy in twenty four Hours: It is round, and of a blue colour, in the middle pierced with white; being laid to the Wound it sticks fast thereon of itself, but when impregnated with the Poison, it falls from it, then thrown a while into Milk, it returns to its natural Quality; if it sticks the second time to the Wound, it is a certain sign that all the Poison is not drawn out, but if it falls off, than the Patient is certainly past danger.  
This Stone hath been experienced with good success upon divers, both Men and Beasts, according to the testimony of Kircher and several others.  
There is also a Root good against the Bitings of these Serpents, which the Portuguese call Raise de Cabro, that is, Serpent-Root, which being chewed so long till the Patient Sneezes two or three times, cures him.  
This Virtue is not only in the natural, but also the artificial Stone made of some of the pieces of the natural Stone, or of the Head, Liver, Teeth, and Heart of the Serpent, mixed with Terra Sigillata, or Sealed Earth. The brahmin's, though proffered never so great a Sum of Money, will not teach this Art to any.  
Moreover, there is another very venomous Serpent amongst the Chinese, which by biting kills a Man in few Hours; out of which also they draw a Medicine, good against several Sicknesses, after this manner: The Tail and Body is put into a Kettle of the best Wine, leaving only the Head, which is put through a Hole made in the Lid thereof; out of which the Serpent at the boiling of the Wine, which is hung over a great Fire, breathes forth all the Poison through its gaping Mouth. The Flesh, the Head being cut off, is given to the Sick, and preserved, being (as they say) the only precious thing to expel Poison, like Treacle, or other sovereign Medicines.  
The Province of Xensi is exceedingly infested with Locusts, which devour all the Product of the Fields, insomuch that at some times there is not one Blade of Grass to be seen, notwithstanding the Inhabitants, both great and small, at Command of their Magistrates, kill and destroy them in the Fields. There are often in such thick great Swarms, that by Clouding the Sun they darken the Earth; but they make some amends with their Bodies, for the Chineses boil these Locusts for a Dainty Dish.  
In the County Tegaufu, of the Province of Huquang, and in the County Pinglofu in the Province of Quangsi, are little Worms, which make white Wax after the same manner as the Bees do their Honey-Combs; but the Combs of these Worms are much less, and extraordinary white; neither are they bred up by Hand, but wild. Of the Combs the Chinese make Candles, as we of our Wax, but they are much whiter, and being very dear, are only used by Persons of Quality; for besides their whiteness they give an excellent scent when lighted; neither do they spot the Clothes they drop upon, and burn also very clear and bright.  
In several Inlets or Creeks along the Seashore of China, and also under the Island Ainan, is a Land and Sea-Monster, in the Chinese Tongue called Hayma, that is, Sea-Horse, for Hay signifies the Sea, and May a Horse: It is knownto us by the Name of Sea-Horse, as it was to the Greeks by that of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, that is, River-Horse, not for its likeness to a Horse, but for its bigness, for the word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 in the Greek is applied to those things which are to be represented bigger than ordinary. It is by the Chinese represented like a Horse with a Main, but having on each side of the Mouth long Teeth sticking out like Horns. The Head (according to Boem, who saw these Beasts wading in shallow places on the Coast of Cafruria, opposite to Mosambique) is from the Mouth to the Shoulders three Cubits long; on his nethermost Jaw grow two very long and crooked Teeth, and on the uppermost also two thick ones, though shorter, which jut upon them; between lies their Tongue: Their Skin is very hard, insomuch that it can scarce be pierced with a Lance; it hath no Hair, except at the end of the Tail, which shines like black Horn; each Hair is about the bigness of a Straw, and which bending is not easily to be broke. The Caffers, both Men and Women, make Bracelets of the Hair, which serves both for an Ornament about their Wrists, and is said to prevent the Palsy. Of the Teeth (says Boem) in India and Goa, are made Garlands, Images, and also Crosses. It hath also been found, that these Teeth are great stoppers of Bleeding; though experience hath taught us, that the Teeth of these Horses have not always the same Virtue, but certain times must be observed in the kill of this Beast, that then his Teeth may have the forementioned Power in a greater measure.  
No place in China feeds more Silkworms than the Province of Chekiang; for it not only furnishes its own Inhabitants, and all China with Silk-Stuffs of divers sorts, but also the neighbouring Country japan, the Spaniards on the Philippine Isles, nay, India and the remotest Countries in Europe; for the Hollanders buy great store of Silk at Hocksieu in the Province of Fokien, which is all brought thither out of the Province of Chekiang.  
The Silk-Stuffs made in this Province are accounted the best in all China, and are to be had at so cheap a Rate, that ten Men may go clad in Silk at less Charge than one Man in Cloth in Europe. They Prune their Mulberry-Trees once a year, as we do our Vines, and suffer them not to grow up to high Trees, because through long experience they have learned, that the Leaves of the smallest and youngest Trees make the best Silk, and know thereby how to distinguish the first Spinning of the Threads from the second, viz. the first is that which comes from the young Leaves that are gathered in March, with which they feed their Silkworms; and the second is of the old Summer Leaves, and it is only the change of Food, as the young and old Leaves, which makes the difference in the Silk. This is perhaps the reason why the Silk which is made in Europe is courser than that made by the Chinese. The Prices of the first and second Spinning also differs amongst the Chinese, whenas most Silk-Throsters in Europe make no difference therein. The best Silk is Spun in March, the coursest in june, yet both in one year. The breeding of the Worms is all one, and requires as much trouble and care as in some places in Europe; therefore it is plainly false, and a Romance, That all the Silk in China is produced by the Silkworms on the Trees without care or labour.  
Martinius tells us, That the breeding of Silkworms, and making of Cotton and Silk, is an ancient Invention of the Chinese; for the Wife of the Emperor Ya, who Reigned Anno 2357. before the Navity of Christ, is said to have been the first Inventress and Teacher thereof to her Subjects: for though the breeding of Silkworms was not unknown to the Chineses at that time, yet they were ignorant in the Art of making Clothes of the same, as it generally happens in the beginning of all things. To the Chineses justly belongs the honour, that from them originally the Art of making Silk was translated to other Countries of Asia and Europe.  
In the Province of Xantung the Silk Threads are Spun on Trees and in the Fields, not by tame Silkworms, but another kind of Worm like a Caterpillar which Spin not their Silk in manner of a Ball or Egg, but in long Threads of a white colour, which are blown to and again by the Wind on Trees and Houses, from whence the Inhabitants fetch them; almost after the same manner as our long Spider-Threds in Cobwebs, which fly up and down in Summer. Of this Silk they also make Silk-Stuffs as well as of that Spun by Silkworms, and much stronger, though somewhat courser.  
Divers Animals in the Greek Tongue called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or Creatures which live in the Water as well as on the Shore, are in several places of China.  
In the County Hoeicheufu in the Province of Quantung, breeds a Monster of Nature, by the Chineses called Hoangcioyu, that is, Yellow-Bird Fish; for it is neither Bird nor Fish, but both; that is to say, all the Summer it is a Bird of a Saffron colour, and flies in the Mountains, but at the end of Harvest it betakes itself to the Sea and becomes a Fish, and being caught in Winter, is (as the Chineses say) very sweet and good Meat.  
In the County Chaocheufu in the same Province, are many Crocodiles in the River Zo, which oftentimes hurt the neighbouring People.  
On the East side of the chief City Gucheu in the Province of Quangsi, is a little Lake named Go, in which King Pegao in ancient times kept ten Crocodiles, to which he threw Malefactors to be devoured by them; those which were guiltless or innocent, being (as the Chineses say) found untouched, were taken out again and released.  
In the Province of Huquang, in the River Siang, is a Beast which chiefly resembles a Horse, but with Scales on its Body, and Claws like a Tiger: It is of a cruel Nature, and seizes on Man and Beast, especially in Harvest, for than it often comes out of the Water, and runs all over the Country.  
In the River jun, in the same County Chaokingfu in the Province of Quantung, breeds a Fish, by the Chineses called The Swimming Cow, because it often comes out of the Water and engages with its Horns the tame Cow; but if it stays long out of the Water its Horns turn yellow, and lose their hardness, by which means it is forced to return to the Water, where it becomes a Fish again, and the Horns obtain their former hardness.  
In the County Changtefu in the Province of Honan, breeds a Fish in the Rivers, by the Chineses named Hagul, that is, Child, because when caught it cries like a Child. In shape this Fish differs little from a Crocodile, hath a long Tail, and goes on four Feet: The Fat thereof once set on fire, cannot be quenched either by Water, or any other means.  
In China also are many Land and Sea-Tortoises, or Turtles, called Quei, especially in the County Chunkingfu in the Province of Suchuen, and in the Island Pequei, that is, Isle of Turtles, lying in the River Kiang, and the Province of Huquang; some of them are very big, and others small and handsome, which the Inhabitants keep in their Houses; some are no bigger than a small Bird.  
The Chineses relate of a strange accident that happened there to a Soldier, who being accidentally by his Enemies thrown into the River, was by a Tortoise (which it is likely he had formerly fed and set at liberty) carried like an Arion on a Dolphins back to the opposite Shore.  
In the fourth County Hoeicheufu, in the Province of Quantung, are seen at Sea, Turtles of such a vast bigness, that afar off they seem to be Rocks, some having Shrubs and other Plants growing on their Shells.  
In some Provinces of China, and especially in Honan are flying Turtles, with green, and others with blue Wings on their Feet, by the spreading out of which they push themselves forward, leaping after the manner of Grasshoppers: The Feet of these Turtles, are for the Rarity thereof, in great esteem among the Chinese; those that have green Wing'd Feet are called Lo Mae Quey, Quey signifying A Tortoise; Lo, Green; and Mae, Wings.  
In all places near the Sea are plenty of Oysters, almost as good as our Colchester-Oysters, especially in the County Tencheufu, in the Province of Xantung.  
In the eleventh County Vencheufu, of the Province of Chikiang, are small Oysters, of which it is reported, that from the Powder of them, dried and stamped, and Sown like Seed along the Fields in Marsh Ground, there grow Oysters of a very sweet Relish; most of the Sea-bordering places abound also with Crabs and Lobsters.   

Minerals, Stones, and Earth's.  
THrough all China are an innumerable company of Mines, which abound in all sorts of Metal, and in particular Gold and Silver in great store, though there be an Edict in China not to Dig for them; because (as the Chineses say) Men are generally killed in the Mines, by the dangerous Damps and Vapours that arise from the Earth: But to gather Gold on the Shores of Rivers is free for every Man, after which manner they get great store; and Gold is rather a Commodity or Merchandise itself amongst the Chinese, than a Purchaser of other Commodities.  
In the Province of junnan they gather great quantities of Gold out of the cleansed Sand; but if the Mines might be opened, the Chineses could not expect greater abundance of Gold or Silver from any other place: from whence there is a Proverb amongst them, wherein those that are seen to spend their Estates in Riot and Prodigality, are asked, Whither their Fathers be Receivers of the Emperor's Revenue in the Province of Junnan? There are also in this Province Mines of Tin, Iron, and Led.  
The Province of Fokien hath Copper, Tin, and Iron Mines, and in some places Gold and Siver Mines also: Particularly in the sixth County Tingcheufu, in the same Province, the Mountain Kin, that is, Gold, is so called from its Golden Mines which were opened by the Family Sung.  
The Mountains in the Province of Queicheu, enclose (as the Chineses write) Gold, Silver, Quicksilver, and the like rich Metals, all which might easily be gotten, if the Mountaineers, or Inhabitants of the Mountains could be subdued and brought to Obedience; but now the Chineses have no more benefit than the forementioned People will give them out of their free Wills in Barter for Salt, or any other Necessaries.  
The County Hengcheufu, in the Province of Huquang, hath many rich Silver Mines which may not be opened.  
All over the Province of Suchuen great store of Iron, Led, and Tin is Digged out of the Mountains: China hath also divers sorts of Precious and ordinary Stones.  
In the Province of Suchuen are the best sort of Loadstones to be found; as also in the Provinces of Huquang and Honan.  
In the little County Lincheufu, in the Province of Suchuen, is a sort of Green Stone called Lapis Lazuli: and likewise in the seventh County Nanganfu, in the Province of Honan: and in the Territory Honanfu of the Province of junnan.  
In the seventh County Kaocheufu, in the Province of Quantung, and out of the Mountain Tiniang, in the second Talifu, in the Province of junnan, they Dig very excellent Marble, which the Chineses cut in thin Squares to make Tables, Walls, and the like Ornaments for their Houses; for this Marble is naturally streaked with several Colours, in such a manner, that it represents Mountains, Rivers, Trees, Landscapes, and the like, as if done by a great Artist with a Pencil. This Marble is called Tienciang, from the Mountain out of which it is Digged. There is also very good Marble in the County junnanfu: Out of the Mountains near the Garrisoned City Siven, in the Province of Peking, they Dig white and red Marble or Porphyre-stones, and also exceeding good Crystal, which is also found on the Mountain Ting, in the County Quanglingfu, in the Province of Quangsi: In the same Province are agates, for their colour and hardness highly esteemed.  
By the little City Queiyang, in the County Hengchufu, in the Province of Huquang, on the Mountain Xeyen, are Stones found after Rainy Wether exactly resembling Swallows; which we have already mentioned among the Mountains.  
On the Mountain Queiyu, in the County Taicheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, all the Stones, as well great as small, grow naturally square.  
In the County Cunchangfu, in the Province of Xensi, they gather little blue Stones with white Veins or Streaks, which are highly esteemed by Persons of Quality; for the common Opinion is, that being burnt to Chalk and pounded very small, they are good to prolong Life.  
On the Mountain Pao, in the fifth County Hoangcheufu, in the Province of Huquang they find Stones, of which, some if laid in the Sun, turn Red, others Yellow, and retain that Colour for a considerable time.  
Out of the almost inaccessible Mountain Io, by the City Pa, in the County Paoningfu, in the Province of Suchuen, they Dig Precious Stones.  
Out of the Mountains Vutu, in the third County Hangchungfu, in the Province of Xensi; and in the fourth, Cungchangfu; and also in the Province of Suchuen, by the Garrisoned City Po, they Dig a Mineral, by the Chineses called Hiunghoang: It is of a deep yellow, or sometimes Vermilion, distinguished with black Spots; it is like a Chalky Stone or hard Earth, and is accounted an excellent Medicine against many Malignant Fevers and Agues, dangerous Heats in the Dog-Days, if laid to steep in Wine, and drunk up.  
Out of the Mountain Tape, by the City Lungkieu, in the County Taitungfu, of the Province of Xansi, they Dig Earth so Red, that it is used in stead of Vermilion to Print the Red Chinese Characters with.  
Out of the Mountain Nieuxeu, in the County Siganfu, in the Province of Xensi, is Digged a certain White Earth, which is used by the Women in stead of White Lead, to make them Beautiful, by taking away all Spots and Freckles in the Face: The Chineses call it Queiki, that is, Fair Woman.  
The Mountain Io, in the Province of Xensi, produces a certain Blue Earth or Mineral, with which they make a kind of Starch for their Linen.  
Through all the Province of Xansi, they Dig a sort of Coal, firm and slick like Jet or black Marble, such as those of Luker-land, or like our Cannel-Coal in Derbyshire: The Chineses, especially the Common people, burn these Coals (called Mui) on their Hearths, in their Kitchens or Chambers, but first break them very small, (they being Digged in great Pieces) and then mixed with Water, make them into Balls; they are a long while a kindling, but once lighted, they cast a great heat, and keep in a great while: The Northern Chineses burn also Wood, Cane, and other Fuel.  
In the same Province are wonderful Fire-pits, like our Water-pits; they are in most places, and serve in stead of other Fires, for the poor people to boil their Meat over; which they do after this manner, the Mouth of the Pit is shut very close, except a little hole just big enough for the Pot to stand in; and so the Inhabitants Boyl their Meat without trouble: They say that this Fire burns dull and not bright, and though it be very hot, yet sets not the least Stick of Wood a fire, if thrown into the same; nay that which is more, it may by being put into a great hollow Cane, be carried from one place to the other, so that every man may use it when he pleaseth; and by opening the Mouth of the Cane, out of which the heat strikes, Boyl a Pot with Meat, yet never hurt the Cane in which the Fire is Enclosed.  
Out of the Mountains Kie and Siuvu, in the Province of Peking, by the City Pingeo, they Dig another sort of Coal, which they burn for ordinary Fuel.  
On the Mountain Io, in the Province of Xensi, by the little City Chinyven, are very bright Stones found, not unlike Diamonds.  
The Province of junnan produces Rubies, Sapphires, agates, and the like Precious Stones, called by a general Name jemin.  
In the County Kincheufu, of the Province of Huquang, and in the County Queilingfu, in the Province of Quangsi, are very excellent Stones found, with which the Chineses temper their Ink, as the European Painters their Colours.  
In the County Nanhingfu is a black Stone, very like the Chinese Ink, with which they write on Board's, as we do with Chalk: There is also a Stone which is so hard, that the Inhabitants make Stone Axes and Knives thereof.  
Out of the Mountain Tiexe, lying in the Province of Suchuen, by the Garrisoned City Kienchang they Dig Stones, which melted in the fire produce Iron, very good to make Swords and Falchions of.  
By the City Siaoxan is a Quarry, which furnishes all China with Freestone. 
Gum Ci●….   
In several places in China, especially in the fourth County Nieucheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, is a kind of Gum, in the Chinese Tongue called Cie, which drops out of the Trees, and is very like Gum or Oil of Turpentine: The Chineses gather it in the Summer, and cleansing the same, Colour it how they please; the best is yellow like Gold, and the next black; before it is dried it yields a malignant Damp, which makes the Faces of those which are not used to it, swell and look pale for a time, but they soon recover again: It dries very leisurely when any Chests or Cabinets are Varnished with the same, but when once dry, it never melts again: What a curious and shining thing this Gum is, Europe hath long since seen by the Cabinets and Chests that are brought hither from China and japan: The Chineses varnish all their curious Wood-Work with the same; as also their Ships, Houses, Tables, Bedsteads, Closets, and all their Household Utensils, to the great lustre thereof. Trigaut gives us this following Account of this Gum, viz.  
In China is a certain Gum like Musk, pressed out of the Bark of a Tree, and thick like Pitch, of which the Chineses make a Varnish, by them called Cie, and by the Portuguese, Ciaro. With this Cie they Varnish their Tables, Presses, and other Householdstuff, as also their Ships and Houses, and Colour it how they please: The Work thus Varnished shines like Glass, and is very beautiful to the Eye, and acceptable by reason of its smoothness, and continues many years. By means of this Gum the Houses of the Chinese and japanners shine in such a manner, that they dazzle the Eyes of the Beholders. With this also they represent the colour of all kind of Wood And for this reason the Chinese, by whom this Gum is used, account Table-clothes altogether superfluous; for if the shining and Crystal-like Tables accidentally, by spilling of any Grease upon them, are bereaved of their lustre, they are restored to their former beauty, by being washed over with warm Water, because nothing can soak through the hard Gum. Besides this Gum there is an Oil, pressed out of the Fruit of another Tree, not unlike the former; the use thereof is also one and the same, but gives not so great a Gloss.  
We have several kinds of Varnish amongst us, in imitation of the Chinese, but far short of it, the true Preparation thereof being doubtless unknown to us, or but imperfectly discovered.  
Out of the Mountains in the eighth County jenganfu in the Province of 
Peters-Oyl.  Xensi, is digged a slimy Moisture, generally called Peters-Oyl, which the Chineses use in their Lamps, and against Scabs.  
In the Province of Suchuen is abundance of yellow Amber, which is gathered on the Coast of Pomeren, and in other parts of the same Province another sort of a reddish colour.  
Martinius speaks of great quantities of artificial Amber, made of the boiled Gum of Pine-Trees, and sold by the Chinese; so exactly imitated, that it was not to be distinguished from the best; neither is it a certain sign of true Amber, to attract Chaff or other light things; for the falsified and artificial, if rubbed, hath an attracting power as well as the natural.  
In the Provinces of junnan they also have Amber which is somewhat redder than the Pomeran; for yellow they have none.  
The Salt which the Chineses have, is not only made in the Sea-bordering Provinces, but there are also Inland Waters of which they make Salt without any great trouble.  
In the County Hokienfu in the Province of Peking, are large Fields, which extending to the Seaside, are washed by the Sea Water, which leaves great quantities of Salt upon the Banks.  
All the Water of the Lake jeu, lying in the County Pingyangfu in the Province of Xansi, is as salt as Sea-Water, and Salt also made of it by the Inhabitants.  
In the County Kingyangfu in the Province of Xensi, are two Pools of salt Water, of which they make abundance of Salt.  
In the Province of junnan, on the North-East side of the City Yaogan, is a great Pit of salt Water, out of which is extracted exceeding white Salt, with which the whole County Yaoganfu is furnished. The Pit is called Peyencing, that is, Pit of white Salt. The first finding of this Salt is ascribed to the Sheep, because they used to lick the Earth thereabouts, and scratch up lumps of Salt with their Feet, till the Inhabitants at last observing the same, found salt Water and Earth there.  
China abounds with Salt in all places; so that besides the great plenty for common use, the Salt-Trade brings great Revenue into the Emperor's Treasury, there being an incredible number of People which Trade in that Commodity.  
Every Province in which Salt is made, pays yearly a certain weight of Salt to the Emperor for Tribute.  
On the Mountains in the Province of Suchuen are Salt-pits, which supply all the Inhabitants of that Province with Salt; which is a great testimony of God's Providence to these People, considering this part of China lies remote from the Sea, and could not be furnished with Salt from any other places, but with exceeding great trouble.  
These Pits are some of them a hundred Paces deep, as being on inhabited Hills of salt Earth: The Mouth of one of them is not above three or four Hands-breadth wide: They are searched with an Iron Instrument in form of a Hand, which being let down in the Ground, by reason of its great weight and sharp Fingers, presses through the same, then drawn up again shuts close, and brings up a handful of Earth; which they do so long till they come to salt Earth and Water, which is afterwards pulled out with a Tub or Bucket, which hath a Cover at the top, and a Hole in the bottom, through which the Water running as the Vessel goes down thrusts it open, but when it is full and pulled up by a Rope it falls and shuts again: which salt Water being taken out and set over the Fire, its watery part evaporates forth▪ and leaves white Salt in the bottom; yet is not altogether so salt as that which is made of Sea-Water.  
There are Salt-pits also in the County Queicheufu. And likewise in the Territory Kiahingfu in the Province of Chekiang, are very great Salt-pits, in the Fields near the Sea, where they make abundance of Salt. Also in the County Hoaiganfu, not far from the City Hoaigain, and in several other places bordering on the Sea.  
In China only is that kind of fine Earth of which is made that rich Material of those we call China-Dishes, and this Stuff is called Porcelain. Some falsely affirm, That the Matter of which the Porcelain is made is prepared of pounded Eggshells, or Sea-Cockles, adding, That it must lie a hundred years under Ground before it can be used. Others tell us, That the right Porcelain is made of a hard chalky Earth, which is first beaten to Powder, and ground to Meal, and then is thrown into Troughs made of grey Stone full of Water, and there left to soak so long till it becomes a Pap; mean while a thin Skin comes over it, of some of which they make Porcelain, as fine and clear as Crystal, which on pain of Death may not be carried out of the Country, but must all be brought to the Court, and delivered to the Emperor and his Council: The next sort is made of the uppermost Stuff under this Skin; and this is the finest Porcelain we have in Europe: and so the nearer this Mucilage is to the bottom of the Troughs, still so much the courser is the Porcelain made thereof, the bottom of all being not much better than our Earthen Ware. But Martinius, Trigaut, and other jesuits, who were Eye-witnesses, write with more probability, That the Stuff of which they make their Porcelain, is a dry Earth, like Chalk and 〈◊〉 Sand, and (according to Trigaut) yellow.  
This Earth is digged in the fourteenth County Hoeicheufu in the Province of Nanking, and from thence carried in square Lumps or Cakes, each weighing about three Catties, to the Province of Kiangsi, along the River Po. And in this Province, at a Village called Sinktesinu, near the City Feuleang, in the fourth County jaocheufu, the best Porcelain in all China is made: for though there be Earth in other places, of which the Porcelain might be made, yet it is no way to be compared to that which is made in the Village.  
It is to be observed, that Porcelain cannot be made in the forementioned place, where there is such an abundance of Earth, either for want of Water, or because the Water is not so proper for the making of it.  
Those which dig the Earth carry it not themselves to the Province of Kiangsi, but generally sell Cakes or Lumps thereof to other People, who maintain themselves by carrying of them thither; yet not one Lump may be carried away before it is marked with the Emperor's Arms, thereby to prevent the falsifying of it.  
The Porcelain Vessels are made after the same manner as our Potters make their Earthen Ware. The Vessels, Plates or Dishes, as soon as formed, are Painted with various Colours, as yellow, red, blue, or any other. That which is of a Saffron colour, and Painted with Shapes of Dragons, is sent to the Emperor and his Council; and the red, yellow, and blue, is sold amongst the common People.  
To colour the Porcelain blue they general use a certain Weed, which in the Southern Provinces is found in great abundance.  
The Baking of these Vessels is after this manner: Being shaped, and having stood a while in the Wind and Sun to dry, they are put into an Oven, which is for fifteen days after made extraordinary hot, and both all that while, and for fifteen days longer are stopped so close, that the least Air cannot get in or out of it; then the Oven is opened, and the Vessels remaining therein left to cool by degrees; for if the glowing Vessels should be taken out of the Oven and put into the Air, they would crack to pieces like Glass; after the expiration of thirty days the Furnace is opened in the presence of an Officer, appointed by the Emperor for that purpose; who examining what is Baked, takes of every sort the fifth piece for the Empeor, by virtue of an ancient Law. 'Tis said, that of the pieces also of broken Porcelain, first beaten, and afterwards sifted, then mixed with Water and kneaded in a Lump, are new Vessels made, but cannot be brought to their former lustre.  
It is observable, that though some use the fresh Lumps which are brought to them, and make Porcelain of it, yet others, more curious, let them lie a while till they grow as hard as a Stone. The Earth thus dried, when they intent to use it, is beaten like the broken pieces of Porcelain, and also sifted and mixed with Water, then kneaded into Lumps or Cakes, of which they make Porcelain as of the fresh Earth.  
Besides the goodness of the Stuff, and curious fashioning, the Porcelain Vessels are of a high value, because they can endure extraordinary hot Liquors in them without cracking; also the pieces, if joined with Iron, or small Copper Wyre, hold any Moisture without leaking.  
Through all China are People which are experienced in this Art, and carry a curious small Drill, with a Diamond at the end thereof, with which they ●…ake the Holes in the Porcelain.  
In China are also divers sorts of Paper made, sometimes of Canes and the Leaves thereof, and sometimes of Cotton, Silk and Hemp: The Paper made of Cotton is not inferior in whiteness to the French Paper.  
In the County Vuchanfu in the Province of Huquang, is abundance of Paper made of Canes and the Leaves thereof, which grow there.  
There is also good Paper made in the County Lucheufu, in the Province of Kiangnan.  
There are more ways of making Paper among the Chinese (as Trigaut witnesseth) than among us: The same Author affirms, that the Chinese Paper is very rotten, apt to tear, and not durable; so that no Paper, whatsoever sort it be, can compare to ours in Europe: But whereas he saith, that it cannot bear on both sides to be Written or Printed, it is a mere mistake, because several sorts of Chinese Paper are found in the Netherlands, which not only by the Hollanders, but the Chineses also are written on both sides without the least sinking. The Chinese Paper is of several sizes, some two Foot and a half long, and two broad, some six Foot long, and three broad, which sort is brought from China into Holland.  
China also in several places produces Sugar, 〈◊〉, Honey; and in the Mountain's abundance of Salt-Petre.   

Of the Shape, Nature, and Complexion of the Chinese.  
THe Chineses in Colour and Complexion are like the People of Europe, especially those of the Northern Provinces, for those in the Southern, by reason of their Neighbourhood to the Line and Heat of the Sun, are of a brown Complexion.  
The Hair of their Beards is stiff and short, and appears not till full Manhood; so that a Chinese of thirty years, looks a●… Youthful as an European of twenty.  
The Colour of the Hair, both of their Heads and Beards, is generally black, and it is accounted a dishonour in China to wear long Hair.  
Their Eyes are small, somewhat oblong, black, and standing out: their Noses are small, and not high: their Ears of an indifferent bigness, in which the Chineses, as also in their other Features differ little from the European, though in some Provinces they have flat, and in a manner square Faces.  
In the Province of Quantung and Quangsi, most people on every little Toe have two Nails, which is also common amongst those of Cochin-China; and some say that in former times they had six Toes on every Foot.  
All the Women are of little Stature, white Skins, brown Eyes, and extraordinary small Feet, in which last they account their chiefest Beauty to consist; for though a Woman be never so fair, yet she is accounted homely if she hath great Feet; insomuch, that the Mother's Swath and Rowl up their Daughter's Feet from their Infancy, that by these Swaths (which they wear all their Life-time) they may prevent the natural growth of them: This Swathing of their Feet often occasions in tender Bodies such a pain, that they sometimes become lame of their Feet and decrepit; yet the Women generally Dance prettily, and make strange gestures with their bare Arms.  
Some will have it, that this Swathing was inven●…ed by some politic and jealous Person, that by this means they might be kept at home, and prevented from walking the Streets, which in that Country ●…edounds to the dishonour of the Women, and disesteem of the Men.  
But, as Martinius tells us, this Custom was derived from Taquia, an ancient Empress of Che, who, though exceeding all other Women in Beauty, had extraordinary small Feet, which extremely troubled her in going; her Women hereupon in flattery imitated her, and also to make their Feet smaller Swathed them; and this Custom to this day is of such Authority among them, that should they behold a second Helen, they would look upon her as a Monster if she had great Feet.  
Others say, that Taquia was no Woman, but a Spirit in Female shape, with Goat's Feet; which, because she would not have them discovered, she kept continually wrapped up; and that from thence it hath also been a Custom for Women to cover their Feet, which if they do not, it is accounted very ridiculous: Moreover, in this they resemble Taquia, that their Feet seem so little in their Shoes, that they appear no bigger than Goat's Feet.  
The Chineses, both Men and Women, before the Conquering of the Empire of China by the Tartars, are said to have wore long Hair on their Heads, without ever Shaving it, except Children, who till the fifteenth year of their Age Shaved their Heads, only leaving a long Lock on their Crown; after that time they suffered their Hair to grow without Shaving, till they came to twenty years of age, (which was the time that Men putting on their Hat of Manhood, an ancient Custom like that of the Toga Virilis amongst the Romans) and let it hang loose over their Shoulders: In the twentieth year they tied up their Hair, and wore a Cap or Hat over it made of Horsehair, or Silk; but this Cap was not used by the Women, who went only with their Hair tied up, and adorned with Gold, Silver, Precious-stones, and all manner of curious Flowers, and the like.  
But there hath been since a great alteration in the Shaving and Wearing of their Hair; for all those Chineses which were subdued by them, were forced to Shave their Hair according to the Tartar fashion, only reserving one Lock behind on their Heads, wherefore the Hollanders generally call them Shave Chineses, as those who refusing to submit to the Tartars, and to Shave off their Hair, joined with the Rebel K●…xinga, are called Unshaven Chineses: ●…ut in former times they took such a Pride in their long Hair, that they rather chose to Die, than lose the least Lock thereof; nor was it only Pride but something of Superstition that made them so concerned in long Hair, for they like the Mahumetants entertained a simple Imagination, that they should be pulled up to Heaven by their Hair. Nevertheless, the Priests used in ancient times to Shave the Hair of their Heads and Beards every eighth day.  
The Chineses also have a strange Opinion of themselves, accounting none equal to them, and looking upon all Affairs of foreign Kingdoms and People as not worthy their knowledge nor description; insomuch, that we find not any one Country which they have frequented with their Ships, mentioned in their Histories, when as they are very exact in the describing of those Countries within their own Dominions: Moreover, all the Names with which they express foreign places are ridiculous, and signifying either Barbarians, Slaves, or the like, for they never take notice of the proper and true Names of Strangers; as for example, they ridiculously name the japanners Vocu, which by them signifies The Country of a Barba●…ian Language; and the Tartars, Nucieu.  
All the Northern Chinefes, or the Inhabitants of the seven Northern Provinces, especially those of the Province of Peking, are Inferior to those of the Southern Provinces in Learning, Arts, and other Exercises of Ingenuity, but are Valianter and better Soldiers.  
In like manner, the Southern Chineses are very Politic and Civil, and the Northern Rough and Unpolished: As for the Inhabitants of the Province of Xensi, they are very Civil and Courteous, yet they are as dull in Learning as the other Northern Chineses. Those of the Province of Fokien are much inclined to Riot and Lasciviousness, yet are they Politic, of great Understanding, and subtle in the way of Merchandise, very full of Fraud: They are addicted to Literature, and have many Learned Persons among them; yet they are by the other Chineses accounted a People of a Savage cruel Nature, as seeming to have retained some of the antique Barbarism, because they were the last that embraced the present Laws and Customs of the Chinese.  
The Inhabitants of the little City Vu●…iven, in the Province of Quangsi, are in high credit amongst the Chinese for their Policy and Understanding; many of them being chosen for Governors and High-priests.  
The City Xaohing, in the Province of Chekiang, sends forth the most Ingenious and best Orators in all China; insomuch, that there is scarce a Governor but hath one of this City for his Council.  
The Inhabitants of the eleventh County Vencheufu, in the Province of Chekiang, have been of old much given to the abominable Sin of Sodomy, which is grown so habitual among them, that neither Law nor shame restrains them from acting it publicly.  
Several Mountains lying in the twelfth County of Xincheufu, in the Province 
Vulinman, or wild ●…ple.  of Huquang, are inhabited by Wild and Savage People called Vulinman: Concerning the Original of these People, the Chinese Writers give us this fabulous account.  
King Kaosin Warring against a Robber named U, was driven by him to utmost extremity, for the Robbers. Valour and Experience in War was such, that he often Defeated King Kaosin, and Routed all his Forces; wherefore Kaosin caused to be Proclaimed amongst his Soldiers, that he would give twenty thousand Ounces of Silver and a City, with his youngest Daughter, to any one that would bring him the General U's Head: While this Edict was in force, King Kaosin's Dog called Puonho, ran into the Enemy's Army, which lay at that time Encamped in a Wood, and killing the General U, brought his Head to the King, who exceedingly rejoiced at the Death of so great an Enemy, yet thought himself not obliged to perform what the Proclamation had promised, as concluding it very unseemly for a Beast to Marry a Woman: Which his Daughter hearing, urged the Sacredness of the Edict, and of the King's Word, which ought not to be broke; and thereupon she was Married to the Dog, by whom, in six years' time she had six Sons and six Daughters, who by Marrying one another, bred a Generation of Doglike Natured People.  
But it is to be supposed, that this Fable was feigned by the Chinese, because they accounted none to be Humane, which are not of their Country, or observe their Laws.  
Yet in the Journal of a Monk, written in the second Book of Navigation and Travels, Collected by M. Gio Baptista Ramusio, we find this for the confirmation of these Dogs.  
The Tartars returning through the Wildernesses, came to a Country, in which (as the Ruthens, which had been there, relate) they found a Generation of Wild Women, who after they had been asked by several Interpreters what People they were that Inhabited that Country, answered, That all the Women of that place were of humane shape, but the Men like Dogs: And that upon this occasion, whilst the Tartars stayed in this Country, the Dogs met together on one side of the River, and leaped (being Winter) into the Water, and afterwards roul'd themselves in the Sand, which by the excessive cold, Froze upon them, and Armed them with a kind of a Coat of Mail: This having done several times together, the Tartars falling upon them, threw their Darts at them; but the Dogs running amongst the midst of them, made a great slaughter among them, and drove the Tartars out of the Country, and took Possession thereof. Thus far Baptista.  
The Inhabitants of the eighth County Taiping, in the Province of Quangsi, are by a Chinese Writer called Barbarians, because (having cast off the Chinese Laws and Government) they go barefooted like Savage People, and live without Law, Rule, Order, or Decency, killing one another upon every slight occasion.  
Also on the Mountains in the ninth County Cuncheufu, in the Province of Kiangsi, there live many wild People, which (according to the Relation of the Chinese Writers) live after a Savage and Bestial manner.  
Likewise on the Mountains in the Province of Queicheu inhabit a People, for the most part Wild and untractable, for they observe not the Chinese Laws or Customs, but live of themselves under several Governors of their own Elections: They often Sally out upon the Chinese which live near them, sometimes forcing them to a Peace, which at their pleasure they break again, never suffering any that are not for their way of Living to come amongst them.  
To reduce this Country to Reason, the Emperors have often sent Forces thither, but with little success that ever was heard of.  
Those of Queiyangfu, in the time of the Family Taiming, first applied themselves to study the Learning and Customs of the Chinese, by which means not a few of them have attained to the highest degree thereof.  
The People of the second County Sucheufu, of the Province of Queicheu are strong Limbed and Valiant, and withal, Courteous and Civil, yet have something of Wild in their manner of Living; they go with their Hair loose, barefooted, and the Soles of their Feet have contracted such a hard Callosity, that they fear not to tread on the sharpest Stones, and most prickly Thorns.  
Those of the third County, though somewhat of a Savage Nature, yet they have mixed therewith a kind of Clownish Civility.  
The Mountaineers of the sixth County Tungganfu, in the Province of Queicheu, were formerly the most Cruel and Barbarous People in all that Province, Proud of themselves, Fraudulent, and having a Custom among them to kill their old People; but have of late, by their conversing with the other Chineses, learned something of Morality.  
The City Hinghoa, in the Province of Fokien, is famous for the Industriousness of its Inhabitants, in Learning, Arts, and ingenious Faculties.  
The Inhabitants of the seventh County Yancheufu, of the Province of Kiangnan, are much inclined to Lasciviousness.  
The Northern Mountaineers, as in the County of the Garrisoned City Putting, of the Province of Queicheu, trouble not themselves with Learning, Manners, or Civility, every one doing what they please, living without Laws or Government.  
The Inhabitants of the Mountain near the Garrisoned City Lungli have by their Conversing with the neighbouring Chineses learned several of their Customs; yet going always Armed delight in War and the noise of Arms.  
Those of the Province of Kiangsi are politic and subtle, and many of them attain to the highest degree of Literature, and thereby are raised to great Preferments.  
The Inhabitants of the City Sucheu in the Province of Nanking, are exceedingly inclined to dainty and delicious Fare, and love the Art of Candying and Preserving in Sugar.  
All the Inhabitants of the ninth County Ningpofu in the Province of Chekiang, are great lovers of salt Meats, whereupon this proverbial Sentence passes upon them, That they cannot rot after Death, being so much sa●…ted during Life.  
The People of the Province of junnan, by reason of their Neighbourhood to India, participate with them in their Customs; and the main thing wherein they differ from the rest of the Chinese is this, namely, that whereas in all parts of China besides they Lock their Women up in their Houses, and suffer them not to be spoken with or seen by any Man, or ever to come out of their Houses into the Streets, here the Women walk abroad upon their occasions as in Europe. They exceed the rest of the Chinese in Courage and Valour, being never daunted at the Engaging of an Enemy, and training up their Elephants to War. They are friendly, Courteous, and Civil to Strangers, and more tractable to embrace the Christian Religion than any of the Chinese besides.  
On the North-side of the fourth County Cuihungfu in the Province of junnan, before the Tartars coming into China in the time of the Family juen, dwelled a People called Kinchi, that is, Golden-teeths, because they used to cover their Teeth with thin Plates of Gold; which is also a Custom amongst those of the eighth Garrisoned City in the same Province.  
The Inhabitants of the twelfth County Xunningfu in the same Province, are very barbarous and inhuman; some of them take pleasure to make their Teeth black; others Paint several Images on their Faces, rubbing in their Skin, first pierced with a Needle, a kind of black Colour.  
The Inhabitants of the first Garrisoned City Kiocing of the same Province, are good Husbandmen, but very litigious, often spending in Law that which they have laboured for the whole year, and all for a trifle; yet they are not the only People possessed with this fond humour, but may be paralleled in this Nation, especially in some parts of Wales.  
The People of the second Garrisoned City Yaogan, in the same Province, are (according to the Chinese Writers) prodigiously strong, and therefore delight more in War than Peace.  
The Inhabitants of the third Garrisoned City Cioking in the same Province, are valiant, prudent, and stout People; they Fight generally with Bows and Arrows.  
Though the Inhabitants of the sixth Garrisoned City Likiang, Extracted from the ancientest Inhabitants of China, do not fully observe the Chinese Laws, because of their nearness to other People, whose Customs they have learned, yet nevertheless they partly observe those of the Chinese: They are very much addicted to Drinking and Jollity, spending whole Days and Nights in Singing, Dancing and Revelling; they are good Horsemen, and use Bows and Arrows.  
It is scarce to be believed, how strictly the Women (I mean those of high Quality, for the ordinary Women walk the Streets) are kept through all China, from the natural jealousy of the People: Their Residences are made after such a manner, that they cannot see nor be seen by others: They are seldom permitted to go out, except on extraordinary occasions, and are carried in Sedans made for that purpose, and so closely shut, that there is not the least Crevise through which they may be seen. Moreover, they spend their time in breeding little Dogs, Birds, and the like.   

Characters and Languages.  
THe Chineses have no Letters like the People of Europe, and other parts of the World, which any way agree in a certain Order or Rule of an Alphabet, neither have they any such thing as Vowels and Consonants, or other Literals that can be joined to make Words of; but they have Characters, Signs, or Images, or what you please to name them, in stead of the Letters of the Alphabet, for every Word or Name which they speak hath a certain Figure or Character, by which it is expressed: This Figure consists in Strokes and Specks, which as they differ in shape, so in signification one from another; they are joined without Art or Method, as it were by accident expressing the Name or Thing which they design: Therefore the Chineses use as many Figures or Characters as there are Things which they would express.  
The Chinese (saith Trigaut) express not with any Letters of the Alphabet their Language in Writing, as almost all other People on the Earth, but draw as many Figures or Characters as there are Words and Things to signify; so that if any one would Translate a Dictionary out of English into their Language, he would need as many several Characters as there are Words. As to what concerns the number of these Characters, though according to the greatness of any Subject, the more of them are required, yet they have brought them all within the compass of seventy or eighty thousand; all which stand written in order in a Book called Haipien: besides which there is another much shorter (which teaches to Read, Write, and Understand their Books) which at most contains not above eight or ten thousand. If in their Reading they chance to meet with a Word which they understand not, than they turn to their great Dictionary, like one who learns the Latin or French Tongue; by which we may conclude, that the more Characters the Chinese know, the more Learned they are accounted: therefore it must be one of an exceeding Memory, that will be reckoned a Scholar amongst them.  
Kircher tells us, That at this day none are accounted amongst the number of the eminently Learned, which have not attained to the perfect knowledge of eighty thousand Characters, though any one that will learn to speak the Language hath enough of ten thousand: Neither do the Chineses themselves know all these Characters, the vulgar Person learning no more than he thinks may serve him in his way of Trading.  
In like manner saith Trigaut, He that knows ten thousand Characters, hath obtained those which are commonly used in Writing.  
Martinius makes the learning of the Chinese Characters so hard, that to know them throughly requires a whole Age, for he affirms, that he spent ten years in the learning of them, and yet at the expiration of that time, he had attained no farther knowledge of them, than to understand a small Prayer-Book.  
It is strange to consider, that the Chineses make the great distinction of their vast number of Characters by no more than nine Specks, by adding or leaving out any of which, another signification is produced: As for Exaample, one strait Struck thus— signifies One; the same Stroke, cut through with another like a Cross in this manner † signifies Tzi, or Ten; another being added to the bottom of the Cross † signifies Thou, or Earth; and with a third on the top † Vam, that is, King; one Speck being added on the left-side of the uppermost Stroke † signifies In, or Gum, that is, A Pearl; and so all kinds of Minerals, Plants, Animals, etc. are 〈◊〉 by the different position of Specks and Lines.  
But this Rule, saith Semedo, is not always certain▪ for the Chineses not only join several Lines ●…nto one Figure, but make divers of their Significations by joining two or more whole Figures together; so that a square Figure which signifies 〈◊〉 Sun, joined to another, signifies the Moon, and being added to a third of the same form, expresses Min, that is, 〈◊〉: To signify a Door they draw a Figure like it, which they call Muen; and to signify the Heart, a Figure like a Heart: To express Melancholy, or Sadness, the●… put the Character which expresses a Heart in the middle of that of a Door, as if the Heart found itself oppressed in the entrance of a narrow Door: And because Sorrow hath its seat in the Heart, they always add the Figure of a Heart to all those Characters with which they express any kind of sorrowful Object or Consideration.  
These Characters are generally used, not only in ●…ll the fifteen Provinces of the whole Empire of China, but also in japan, Corea, Cochinchina, Tungking, Camboya, and Sionei, though every Country hath a peculiar Language. By this means the japanners, Cochinchineses, Chineses, Coreans, and Tungkingans, can understand one another's Books, as being all written in the forementioned Characters; yet cannot speak with, nor understand one another: In like manner as the Figures of Arithmetic are used all Europe over, and understood by all the several Nations thereof, yet the words with which they are expressed differ very much; for these Chinese Characters are signs of th●… things which they signify, and are by all in general understood: therefore it is one thing to know the Chinese Characters, and another to speak their Language; insomuch that a Foreigner endued with a great Memory, may by often reading the Chinese Books, attain to the highest degree of their Learning, though he cannot Discourse with, nor understand them.  
These Chinese Characters seem to be of the same Original with the People themselves; for (according to some of their ancient Histories) they have been in use amongst them three thousand seven hundred and thirty years. Many ascribe the first Invention of them to the Emperor Fohi, who 〈◊〉 to Reign Anno 2952. before the Incarnation, and (according to Kircher) three hundred years before the Flood. But it is to be observed, that the old Chinese Characters differed much from the modern; for the first Chineses took not their significations from joint Figures, but, from the representation of natural things, as Birds, Beasts, Infects, Fishes, Herbs, Trees, Minerals, and the like; ●…y which, put in order, and joined several ways, the Chineses at first declared their Thoughts and Apprehensions.  
When they treated of fiery things, they used 〈◊〉 and Dragons, which being placed in several orders, had such and such significations; and in expressing aerial things, they made Figures of Birds; and for watery, Fishes; for earthly things▪ Beasts, Plants, Trees and Leaves; for Stars, Specks and Circles; and in like manner for things of another nature.  
The forms of the ancient Chinese Characters were of seventeen sorts: The first, invented by the Emperor Fohi, consisted (according to their Chronicles) of Serpents and Dragons; wherefore the Book which he writ of Astronomy is called The Book of Dragons: In it are Serpents strangely twisted together, and in several forms, after the manner of those things which they signify therewith: But at this day few Chineses understand these Characters, Age having worn out the knowledge of them.  
The second sort are taken from 〈◊〉 belonging to Hu●…bandry, joined together, and were first used by the Emperor Xin, in his Book of Agriculture, or Husbandry.  
The third sort consists in the placing of several Feathers of the Bird Tunghoahang, which is by them accounted the best Bird that flies. It is said that the Emperor Xanghoang used the●…e Characters in his Book of Birds.  
The fourth sort consists of Shell-fish and Infects.  
The fifth, of Roots and ●…erbs.  
The sixth, of the Feet of Birds, which the Emperor Choanghang used.  
The seventh, being an Invention of the Emperor jao, consists of Turtles.  
The eighth, of Fowls.  
The ninth and tenth, of Herbs.  
The eleventh, of Representations of the Planets.  
The twelfth and thirteenth were formerly called The useful Characters of Laws and Constitutions.  
The fourteenth consist of Characters expressing Rest, Joy, Knowledge, Light, and Darkness.  
The fifteenth, of Fishing.  
The sixteenth cannot be read nor understood.  
The seventeenth and l●…st sort was used for Superscriptions on Letters, Deeds, Bonds, and the like.  
But the modern Chineses grown wiser by Experience, and finding a great confusion and trouble in the representing of so many Beasts, Plants, etc.) invented a far shorter way of joining Specks and Lines together.  
THe Language of the Chinese is, for its antiquity, by many accounted for 
The Language of the Chinese.  one of the seventy two Tongues of the Tower of Babel: But certain it is (according to the testimony of their Books) that it hath been in being for three thousand six hundred years. It is not all one, but differing in the several Kingdoms or Provinces which now make up that Empire.  
Trigaut tells us, that ●…very Province differs so much from another in their Language, that they 〈◊〉 understand one another, notwithstanding they use the same Books 〈◊〉 Characters.  
The Inhabitants of the County Taipin in the Province of Quangsi, speak quite another Language from the Chinese.  
In like manner those of the seventh County Lipingfu of the Province of Queicheu, speak a different Language, altogether unknown to the other Chineses.  
In the Province of Fokien the Inhabitants use not one Dialect but every County hath a peculiar Speech, insomuch that the one cannot understand the other.  
Those of the Province of Fokien, who speak a gross and ungraceful Language, use in stead of N the Letter ●… for Nanking is by them called Lanking; the Suburbs of Hoksieu or Focheu, Lanthai; which the Portuguese and Hollanders, with whom they Trade, have followed.  
Those of the second County Sucheufu in the Province of Queicheu, knew nothing of any Letters formerly, though they expressed themselves by writing Figures on Board's, but have lately learned the vulgar Characters.  
Besides the several Dialects belonging properly to each Province, after the reducing of them to one sole Empire, another Language was instituted, which was made common through the whole Realm. This Language is by the Chineses named Quonhoa or Quonthoa, that is, Court, or Pleading Tongue; because it is most used at Court, by the Mandarins, Governors and Magistrates: It is also known by the Name of The Mandarins Language, but is least of all used in the Province of Fokien. This was done, because it happened oftentimes that all the Magistrates were Foreigners or Strangers in the Province, where by the Emperor's Order they were placed, and that they might not be necessitated to learn a strange Language, there was a general one Instituted in the whole Empire.  
In this Language they not only try Causes, but all well bred People or Strangers speak the same with the Natives in every Province, in the same manner as the English, French, Italians, Germans, and other People use the Latin Tongue through all Europe.  
The jesuits which are sent to China to promulgate the Christian Religion, learn all of them this general Language, because those which belonged to each several Province are neither useful nor elegant, nor spoken by People of Quality, except in their Houses to their Servants, or in other Country's, thereby to put them in mind of their Native Country. This Language is also spoken by Women and Children, because long custom hath conquered the difficulty of learning it. Tradesmen speak the Language of their own Province; and though they all understand the Mandarins Tongue, yet they speak it not.  
This general Chinese Tongue is very brief and short, and though rich and abounding in Characters above all other Languages, yet inferior to them in scarcity of words; for the number of the words exceed not sixteen hundred, and according to Semedo, not above three hundred twenty six. All the words end almost in a Vowel, yet some few of them with M or N; and (which is remarkable in this Language) there are no Dissyllables or Polysyllables, but all Monosyllables, or words consisting of one syllable only, I mean all radical and fundamental words, for Appellatives or Names of Places and Things, are compounded of two or three words clapped together, as Tunghoafung of Fung, a Bird, Hoa a Flower, and Tung the Name of the Flower: and herein it is paralleled even by our English Tongue, whose fundamental words being originally Saxon, are for the most part Monosyllable, as Tree, Stone, Hand, Eye, etc. It hath many Diphthongs, or double Vowels joined together in one syllable, I say Vowels after our way of speaking, meaning the force of Vowels; for Vowels are no used by the Chinese, but as every thing, so every word hath its peculiar Sign: wherefore▪ it may be asked, Are there so many Signs in so small a number of words as the Chineses 〈◊〉? or, How can they with so few words express all things which their thoughts comprehend? In answer hereof I say, That the Chinese Language is very comprehensive, that is to say, it hath few words, but oftentimes one word signifies ten or twenty several things, which are not to be distinguished but by the different sound and pronunciation in speaking, which distinction is so small, that Strangers ●…an scarce observe the same; insomuch that one might say, this Language was rather Artificially invented, than Naturally proceeding from the necessity of Discourse; therefore they that will rightly understand the sense of the words, had need be as attentive to the Tone in Speaking, as the Accent in Writing.  
To make the Chinese Tongue the easier, (for it is very hard to learn) the jesuits have from the Method of Musical Notes, as Ut, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, taught to know the high and low Sounds which the Chineses observe in their Speaking: To this purpose jacob Pantoja first found out these five Signs, which written over the Chinese words after the European manner, are thus expressed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. And by these five Marks of Sound, Foreigners learn the Language, though not without great Pains and Study; partly, because of the manifold Characters of the words, and partly, by reason of the difficulty of hitting upon the several Tones or Sounds.  
The first Sign of the five Sounds or Tones marked thus 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, agrees with Ut in Music; and the Sound or Pronounciation is in the Chinese Tongue called Cho Pim, as if they would say, The first agreeable Tone. The second Sign 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 agrees with Re, in Chinese called Pim Xim, that is, A clear and even Voice. The third Sign 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 agrees with Mi; this Sound in Chinese is called Xam Xim, that is, High Voice. The fourth Sign 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 agrees with Fa, and is by the Chineses named, Kiu Xim, that is, High Voice of the Goer. The fifth U agrees with Sol, and is by the Chineses called Ge Xim, that is, Proper Voice of the Enterer.  
According as any word written in European Letters is marked with these Signs, it must be uttered in a different Voice or Sound, as it is written by the Chinese with several Characters, and hath also there its several significations: As for example, the word ja, written with European Letters, according as it is marked with any ' of the five Signs, signifies several things, and must also be uttered with a difference of Sounds; for the Word or Syllable Iâ, with this Sign 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 signifies A Tooth; jan with a straight Stroke, A Voice; Ià with a sloaping Stroke towards the Left, Excellent; Iá with a sloaping Stroke towards the Right, A Deafness; Iă with a Semicircle, He Goes.  
In like manner, the Syllable Ko, is by the Chineses Toned ten several ways, and each Tone hath a peculiar signification; as also, each signification a peculiar Mark, whereby it is distinguished from the other; so that no Language in the whole world is so Univocal or containing so many several meanings under one word as the Chinese; and the Marks that distinguish the significations of a word by the Accent, are so many, that the difference of Sound can scarce be discerned in all; insomuch, that not any one Book can be understood from a Reader by the Auditor, an Ocular Inspection being absolutely necessary to distinguish by the Marks the difference of the Sound, and by consequence, the double sense of the words, which cannot be distinguished by the Ear; nay, that which is more, it often happens in their Speaking, that when one cannot understand the others sense, notwithstanding he speaks plain and distinctly, he is not only necessitated to repeat his Discourse, but also to write it; and if they chance not to have Pen or Paper, they do it with Water on a Table, or with their Fingers in the Air, or express the meaning with the Hand of the Auditor: This happens most amongst the Learned and Eloquent part of the People, who study to speak more exact and quai●…t than ordinary, according as they write in their Books.  
The reason of the Univocalness of this Language seems to proceed from nothing else, but that these People from ●…ll Ages have endeavoured more to write well than speak well, because their best Language to this day consists in Writing and not in Speaking; therefore it also happens, that Messages are not delivered by word of Mouth, but in Writing, though it be in one and the same City; for though this Language be very scanty of words, nevertheless, it is the pleasing and most ingenious of all others; for whereas in any action we cannot express the manner of doing but in several words, the Chineses often comprehend it in one word: As for example, the word Nien, among them signifies Taking hold with two Fingers; Tzo, Taking hold with all the Fingers: In like manner, we make several uses of the word Are, when we say They are a Bed, are at Table, are at the Tavern; but the Chineses express the being and manner of being in one word; we also say, The Foot of a Man, the Foot of a Bird, the Foot of a Beast, never omitting to add the word Foot: But the Chineses to express the Foot of a Man, say, Kio, that of a Bird, Cua, that of a four footed Beast Thi.  
The Chineses, considering they have no Alphabet, are accustomed from their Infancy to express themselves by this way of signed Sounds, and very much wonder how we of Europe can write down their Words in Latin Letters, and pronounce the●… so plainly.  
They use not the Sound of the Letter R. which they cannot Pronounce, nor ever put two Consonants together, without a Vowel between; so that to this day they call the Franks, Falankes, by whom perhaps, they, as well as the Moors, understand all the People of Europe, except the Greeks.  
A●… for the Language of the Tartars it is much easier to learn, seeming in some measure to agree with the Persian, and having some Characters or Letters like the Arabic.  
The Alphabet of this Language is said to consist of sixty several Letters, which may the rather be, because some of them have the force of Consonant and Vowel joined in one, as Lafoy, Le, Li, Lo, Lu.; Pa, Pe, Pi, Po, Pu.  
In Reading they descend downwards like the Chinese, and proceed from the Right to the Left side, as anciently the Hebrews and other Easterly Nations, and at this day the Arabians and Chineses.   
FINIS.   


CHINA AIMOEY QUEMOEY  
On these Islands which are now become a Kingdom used the famous Pirates: Yquen & Kocksinga to Resort   map  

IMPERIUM SINICUM Quindicupartitum  
Imperium Sinicum in XV Regna seu Provincias distributum una cum genuino situ Vrbium Metropolitanarum, Montium, Fluminum, Lacum, caeterarumque rerum consideratione dignarum.   map of China and Korea